Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 1956

Preface

Open Source Software

Table of Contents

SIPROTEC 5 Introduction 1
Distance and Line Differ- Basic Structure of the Function 2
ential Protection, Breaker
Management for 1-Pole System Functions 3
and 3-Pole Tripping Applications 4
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87,
Function-Group Types 5
7VK87
Protection and Automation Functions 6
V7.80 and higher Control Functions 7
Supervision Functions 8
Manual Measured Values, Energy Values, and
Supervision of the Primary System 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Glossary

Index

C53000-G5040-C011-A
NOTE

i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright


This document has been subjected to rigorous technical Copyright © Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved.
review before being published. It is revised at regular inter- The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
vals, and any modifications and amendments are included document, or utilization and communication of the content
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document has are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
been compiled for information purposes only. Although including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document as utility model or a design, are reserved.
precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall not
assume any liability for defects and damage which result Trademarks
through use of the information contained herein.
SIPROTEC™, DIGSI™, SIGUARD™, SIMEAS™, and SICAM™
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
are trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized use is
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
illegal. All other designations in this document can be
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agree-
trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
ments.
purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from
time to time.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C011-A.03
Edition: 07.2018
Version of the product described: V7.80 and higher
Preface

Purpose of the Manual


This manual describes the protection, automation, control, and supervision functions of the SIPROTEC 5 device
functions for distance protection and line differential protection.

Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa-
tions and power plants.

Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.

Further Documentation

[dwprefdm-221012-01.tif, 3, en_US]

• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.

• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.

• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 3
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Preface

• Communication protocol manual


The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.

• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.

• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engi-
neering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update the
functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.

• DIGSI 5 online help


The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic examples
of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5 range.

• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial


The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed infor-
mation about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on practical
operation and a brief explanation.

• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.

• Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle


The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices, and a
device selection table.

Indication of Conformity

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive) and with the
product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens AG.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.

Other Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.
For more information about the UL database, see certified.ul.com
Select Online Certifications Directory and enter E194016 as UL File Number.

IND. CONT. EQ.


69CA

[ul_listed_c_us, 1, --_--]

4 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Preface

Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.

Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-Mail: support.energy@siemens.com

Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD

Humboldtstraße 59
90459 Nürnberg
Germany

Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415


Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
E-Mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy

Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:

! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.

! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.

! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 5
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Preface

NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.

NOTE

i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given particular attention.

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel


Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.

Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance


When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.

• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).

• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.

• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.

6 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Open Source Software

The product contains, among other things, Open Source Software developed by third parties. The Open
Source Software used in the product and the license agreements concerning this software can be found in the
Readme_OSS. These Open Source Software files are protected by copyright. Your compliance with those
license conditions will entitle you to use the Open Source Software as foreseen in the relevant license. In the
event of conflicts between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license conditions, the
Open Source Software conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the soft-
ware. The Open Source Software is licensed royalty-free. Insofar as the applicable Open Source Software
License Conditions provide for it you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your
Siemens sales contact - against payment of the shipping and handling charges - for a period of at least 3 years
since purchase of the Product. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in
it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for the Open Source Software
beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore any liability for defects
resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. We do not
provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified.
When using DIGSI 5 in online mode, you are provided with the option to go to the main menu Show open
source software information and read and display the Readme_OSS file containing the original license text
and copyright information.
To do this, the following steps are necessary:
• Switch to online mode.
• Select the device.

• Select Online in the menu bar.

• Click Show open source software information.

NOTE

i To read the Readme_OSS file, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer.
In order to operate SIPROTEC 5 devices, a valid DIGSI 5 license is required.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 7
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
8 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3

Open Source Software..................................................................................................................................7

1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................41
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................42
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 44

2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 45


2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.................................................................................... 46
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope..................................................... 53
2.3 Function Control............................................................................................................... 55
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications.....................................59
2.5 Information Lists............................................................................................................... 61

3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 63
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 64
3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 64
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 64
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 66
3.1.4 Displaying Indications.................................................................................................. 67
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 69
3.1.5.1 General..................................................................................................................69
3.1.5.2 Operational Log..................................................................................................... 71
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................72
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log................................................................................................... 73
3.1.5.5 User Log................................................................................................................ 75
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log.................................................................................................77
3.1.5.7 Communication Log............................................................................................... 79
3.1.5.8 Security Log........................................................................................................... 80
3.1.5.9 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................. 81
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs....................................................................................... 82
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5....................................................................84
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel...........................................84
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device.................................................................86
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ..................................................... 87
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ............87
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ............................................................................................. 88
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups...........................................90
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................90
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking...................................................................................... 90
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups..........................................................................................93

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 9
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

3.4 Processing Quality Attributes.............................................................................................98


3.4.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................98
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values........................... 100
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts................................................ 106
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions.......................... 110
3.5 Fault Recording...............................................................................................................114
3.5.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 114
3.5.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 114
3.5.3 Function Description..................................................................................................114
3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................117
3.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................119
3.5.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 120
3.6 Protection Communication..............................................................................................121
3.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................121
3.6.2 Protection-Communication Structure ........................................................................ 121
3.6.3 Protection Interface and Protection Topology............................................................. 122
3.6.3.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 122
3.6.3.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 122
3.6.3.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 123
3.6.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 ................... 134
3.6.3.5 Device-Combination Settings................................................................................135
3.6.3.6 Selecting the Connection..................................................................................... 137
3.6.3.7 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface............................................................. 138
3.6.3.8 Routing Information in DIGSI 5............................................................................. 140
3.6.3.9 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection Interface........................................ 146
3.6.3.10 Diagnostic Data for the Protection Interface..........................................................150
3.6.3.11 Settings............................................................................................................... 154
3.6.3.12 Information List................................................................................................... 155
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization....................................................................................... 158
3.7.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 158
3.7.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 158
3.7.3 Function Description..................................................................................................158
3.7.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................161
3.7.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................164
3.7.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 165
3.8 User-Defined Objects...................................................................................................... 166
3.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................166
3.8.2 Basic Data Types........................................................................................................ 167
3.8.3 Pulse- and Energy-Metered Values............................................................................. 170
3.8.4 Additional Data Types................................................................................................ 170
3.8.5 External Signals......................................................................................................... 170
3.9 Other Functions.............................................................................................................. 172
3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals................................................ 172
3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.................................................................176
3.9.3 Persistent Commands................................................................................................ 179
3.9.4 Device Logoff............................................................................................................ 179
3.9.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 179
3.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 180
3.9.4.3 Information List................................................................................................... 183

10 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions.............................184
3.10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................184
3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5.............................................................. 184
3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device....................... 191
3.11 Device Settings............................................................................................................... 193
3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching.......................................................................................... 193
3.11.1.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................193
3.11.1.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 193
3.11.1.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 193
3.11.1.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 194
3.11.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 195
3.11.1.6 Information List................................................................................................... 195
3.11.2 General Device Settings............................................................................................. 195
3.11.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 195
3.11.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 197
3.11.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 198
3.11.2.4 Information List................................................................................................... 198

4 Applications.............................................................................................................................................. 201
4.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 202
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87........................................ 203
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87........................................ 208
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87.........................................212
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87........................................ 215

5 Function-Group Types.............................................................................................................................. 217


5.1 Function-Group Type Line............................................................................................... 218
5.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................218
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 220
5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................224
5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line).......................................................................................... 231
5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 231
5.1.4.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 232
5.1.4.3 Current-Flow Criterion..........................................................................................234
5.1.4.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion) ........................................ 234
5.1.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 235
5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object................................................ 235
5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.................................................................................................236
5.1.4.8 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)................................................ 237
5.1.4.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 238
5.1.4.10 1-Pole Open Detector........................................................................................... 238
5.1.4.11 Application and Setting Notes (1-Pole Open Detector) ......................................... 240
5.1.4.12 Voltage Criterion (Optional)................................................................................. 241
5.1.4.13 Application and Setting Notes (Voltage Criterion) ................................................ 241
5.1.4.14 Settings............................................................................................................... 242
5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) .................................................................242
5.1.4.16 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) .................................243
5.1.4.17 Settings............................................................................................................... 244
5.1.4.18 Information List................................................................................................... 244
5.1.4.19 Settings............................................................................................................... 244
5.1.4.20 Information List................................................................................................... 245
5.1.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................245
5.1.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 246

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 11
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase................................................................. 247


5.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................247
5.2.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 247
5.2.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................251
5.2.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 252
5.2.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................252
5.2.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 253
5.2.7 Process Monitor.........................................................................................................253
5.2.7.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 253
5.2.7.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 253
5.2.7.3 Current-Flow Criterion..........................................................................................255
5.2.7.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion) ........................................ 255
5.2.7.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object................................................ 256
5.2.7.6 Closure Detection.................................................................................................256
5.2.7.7 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)................................................ 257
5.2.7.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) .................................................................258
5.2.7.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) .................................259
5.2.7.10 Settings............................................................................................................... 260
5.2.7.11 Information List................................................................................................... 260
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase................................................................. 261
5.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................261
5.3.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 261
5.3.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................264
5.3.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 265
5.3.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................265
5.3.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 266
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase............................................................................. 267
5.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................267
5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 267
5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................268
5.4.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................268
5.4.5 Information List......................................................................................................... 269
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker............................................................................... 270
5.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 270
5.5.2 Structure of the Function Group ................................................................................270
5.5.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................272
5.5.4 Trip Logic.................................................................................................................. 273
5.5.4.1 Function Description............................................................................................ 273
5.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 277
5.5.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 279
5.5.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 279
5.5.5 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 279
5.5.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 279
5.5.5.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker............................................... 279
5.5.5.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information................281
5.5.5.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression.............................283
5.5.5.5 Tripping and Opening Information....................................................................... 283
5.5.5.6 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 284
5.5.6 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions........... 288
5.5.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 288

12 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

5.5.7 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)......................................... 289
5.5.7.1 Function Description............................................................................................ 289
5.5.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 290
5.5.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 291
5.5.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 291
5.5.8 Settings.....................................................................................................................291
5.5.9 Information List......................................................................................................... 292
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................. 293
5.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................293
5.6.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 293
5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................295
5.6.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 295
5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 295
5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet .......................................................... 296
5.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 297
5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel.................................................................................................... 297
5.6.3.6 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 300
5.6.3.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 301
5.6.3.8 Information List................................................................................................... 302
5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial...................................................................................................... 302
5.6.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 302
5.6.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 302
5.6.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 304
5.6.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 305
5.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit...............................................................................305
5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit........................................................................ 305
5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet....................................................................308
5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs..........................................................310
5.6.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 310
5.6.6.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 311
5.6.6.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 311
5.6.6.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 312
5.6.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 316
5.6.6.6 Information List................................................................................................... 318
5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet...................................................................................................... 318
5.6.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 318
5.6.7.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 318
5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ........................................................................ 319
5.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 320
5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor.............................................................................................321
5.6.7.6 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 321
5.6.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 322
5.6.7.8 Information List................................................................................................... 322
5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial..........................................................................................................323
5.6.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 323
5.6.8.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 323
5.6.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 324
5.6.8.4 Information List................................................................................................... 324
5.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit................................................................................... 324
5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)..................................................... 324
5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)................................................... 327
5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors ............................................................ 329
5.6.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols........................................................................329
5.6.10.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 329
5.6.10.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 329

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 13
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

5.6.10.3 Stage Temperature Acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850............................... 330


5.6.10.4 Stage Temperature Acquisition via GOOSE............................................................337
5.6.10.5 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 350
5.6.10.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 351
5.6.10.7 Information List................................................................................................... 351
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group......................................................... 352
5.7.1 Overview...................................................................................................................352
5.7.2 Basic Data Types........................................................................................................ 353
5.7.3 Pulse- and Energy-Metered Values............................................................................. 356
5.7.4 Additional Data Types................................................................................................ 356

6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 357


6.1 Power-System Data......................................................................................................... 359
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................359
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data...........................................................................359
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 359
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)................ 360
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 1-Phase (I-1ph)................ 363
6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)............... 364
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1-Phase (V-1ph)............... 368
6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for Line Differential Protection Settings........................370
6.1.9 Settings.....................................................................................................................373
6.1.10 Information List......................................................................................................... 380
6.2 Line Differential Protection..............................................................................................383
6.2.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 383
6.2.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 383
6.2.3 Function Description..................................................................................................385
6.2.4 Application and Setting Instructions - General Settings............................................... 392
6.2.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................393
6.2.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 393
6.2.7 Stage I-DIFF............................................................................................................... 394
6.2.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 394
6.2.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 397
6.2.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 398
6.2.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 399
6.2.8 Stage I-DIFF Fast 2..................................................................................................... 400
6.2.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 400
6.2.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 403
6.2.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 404
6.2.8.4 Information List................................................................................................... 405
6.2.9 Stage I-DIFF Fast........................................................................................................ 405
6.2.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 405
6.2.9.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 407
6.2.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 407
6.2.9.4 Information List................................................................................................... 407
6.2.10 Remote Tripping........................................................................................................ 408
6.2.10.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 408
6.2.10.2 Information List................................................................................................... 408
6.2.11 Pickup and Tripping................................................................................................... 408
6.2.11.1 Pickup Logic ........................................................................................................ 408
6.2.11.2 Trip Logic............................................................................................................. 408

14 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.2.11.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic........................................ 409
6.2.11.4 Information List................................................................................................... 409
6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection.......................................................409
6.2.13 Transformer in Protection Range................................................................................ 412
6.2.13.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 412
6.2.13.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 412
6.2.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 414
6.2.14 Charging-Current Compensation Ic-Compensation..................................................... 415
6.2.14.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 415
6.2.14.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 416
6.2.14.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 418
6.2.14.4 Information List................................................................................................... 418
6.3 Stub Differential Protection............................................................................................. 419
6.3.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 419
6.3.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 419
6.3.3 Function Description..................................................................................................421
6.3.4 Stage S-DIFF.............................................................................................................. 423
6.3.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 423
6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 424
6.3.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 425
6.3.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 425
6.3.5 Stage S-DIFF Fast 2.................................................................................................... 426
6.3.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 426
6.3.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 428
6.3.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 428
6.3.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 429
6.3.6 Stage S-DIFF Fast....................................................................................................... 430
6.3.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 430
6.3.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 431
6.3.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 431
6.3.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 431
6.3.7 Stage Description of the Output Logic........................................................................ 432
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection.................................................................................. 433
6.4.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 433
6.4.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 433
6.4.3 Function Description..................................................................................................434
6.4.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................439
6.4.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................449
6.4.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 451
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)..........................................................452
6.5.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 452
6.5.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 452
6.5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 454
6.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................458
6.5.5 Information List......................................................................................................... 458
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection............................................................................................ 459
6.5.7 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 460
6.5.8 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve..............................................................465
6.5.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 465
6.5.8.2 Impedance Calculation......................................................................................... 467
6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 471

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 15
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.5.8.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 478


6.5.8.5 Information List................................................................................................... 479
6.5.9 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve.......................................................................... 480
6.5.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 480
6.5.9.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 485
6.5.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 486
6.5.9.4 Information List................................................................................................... 486
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection..................................................................... 487
6.5.11 Application Example.................................................................................................. 488
6.5.11.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 488
6.5.11.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data................................................................. 488
6.5.11.3 Setting Notes – General Parameters in the Line Function Group............................ 489
6.5.11.4 Setting Notes – General Parameters in the RMD Function......................................490
6.5.11.5 Setting Instructions Zone Z1 to Z4........................................................................ 494
6.5.12 Settings.....................................................................................................................497
6.5.13 Information List......................................................................................................... 502
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method..........................................................................504
6.6.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 504
6.6.2 Distance Protection for Grounded Systems................................................................. 504
6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................504
6.6.2.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 504
6.6.2.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings..................................................509
6.6.2.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 512
6.6.2.5 Information List................................................................................................... 516
6.6.3 Distance Protection for Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems..................................... 518
6.6.3.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................518
6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 518
6.6.3.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings.................................................. 524
6.6.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 527
6.6.3.5 Information List................................................................................................... 530
6.6.4 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 532
6.6.5 Pickup Method: Impedance Pickup............................................................................. 536
6.6.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 536
6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 537
6.6.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 540
6.6.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 541
6.6.6 Pickup Method: Overcurrent Pickup........................................................................... 541
6.6.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 541
6.6.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 541
6.6.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 543
6.6.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 543
6.6.7 Pickup Method: V/I Pickup.......................................................................................... 543
6.6.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 543
6.6.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 545
6.6.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 547
6.6.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 548
6.6.8 Pickup Method: V/I/φ Pickup.......................................................................................548
6.6.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 548
6.6.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 550
6.6.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 553
6.6.8.4 Information List................................................................................................... 554
6.6.9 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve..............................................................555
6.6.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 555
6.6.9.2 Impedance Calculation......................................................................................... 557

16 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.6.9.3 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 560


6.6.9.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 564
6.6.9.5 Information List................................................................................................... 565
6.6.10 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup.............................. 565
6.6.10.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 565
6.6.10.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 566
6.6.10.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 567
6.6.10.4 Information List................................................................................................... 568
6.6.11 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve.......................................................................... 569
6.6.11.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 569
6.6.11.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 575
6.6.11.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 577
6.6.11.4 Information List................................................................................................... 577
6.6.12 Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve...................................................................... 578
6.6.12.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 578
6.6.12.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 582
6.6.12.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 590
6.6.12.4 Information List................................................................................................... 591
6.6.13 Release of Tripping through AREC Zone......................................................................592
6.6.13.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 592
6.6.13.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 594
6.6.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 595
6.6.13.4 Information List................................................................................................... 595
6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection..................................................................... 595
6.6.15 Application Example: High-Voltage Overhead Line..................................................... 596
6.6.15.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 596
6.6.15.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ................................................................ 597
6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line ................................................................. 601
6.6.15.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems – General Settings.... 603
6.6.15.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ............................................................................605
6.6.15.6 Setting Instructions for Zone Z1 ...........................................................................607
6.6.15.7 Setting Notes for Zone Z1B...................................................................................612
6.6.15.8 Setting Instructions for Zone Z3........................................................................... 614
6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 ....................................................................................615
6.7 Impedance Protection..................................................................................................... 618
6.7.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 618
6.7.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 618
6.7.3 Description................................................................................................................ 618
6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................626
6.7.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................633
6.7.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 634
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking..................................................................................................... 636
6.8.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 636
6.8.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 636
6.8.3 Function Description .................................................................................................636
6.8.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................639
6.8.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................640
6.8.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 640
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection.......................................................................... 641
6.9.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 641
6.9.2 Structure of Function ................................................................................................ 641
6.9.3 Receive Blocks........................................................................................................... 642

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 17
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.9.4 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip.......................................................................... 645


6.9.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 645
6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Intertrip Process, General ........................... 647
6.9.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
via an Extended Measuring Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching
and Grading-Time Shortening) ............................................................................ 648
6.9.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
via Pickup (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Remote Tripping
with Release) ...................................................................................................... 648
6.9.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Intertrip Process ............................... 649
6.9.4.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 650
6.9.4.7 Information List................................................................................................... 651
6.9.5 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip............................................................................ 651
6.9.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 651
6.9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Permissive Schemes, General ........................... 654
6.9.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
Scheme (Distance Protection with Overreaching and Release) ..............................655
6.9.5.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method ................. 656
6.9.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direction Unblocking Process (Distance
Protection with Overreaching and Unblocking) .................................................... 657
6.9.5.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 658
6.9.5.7 Information List................................................................................................... 658
6.9.6 Blocking Method....................................................................................................... 659
6.9.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 659
6.9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Procedure .................................... 661
6.9.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 663
6.9.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 663
6.9.7 Reverse Interlocking.................................................................................................. 664
6.9.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 664
6.9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Reverse Interlocking .........................................665
6.9.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 666
6.9.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 667
6.9.8 Transient Blocking..................................................................................................... 667
6.9.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 667
6.9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking ........................................... 668
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems............ 669
6.10.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 669
6.10.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 669
6.10.3 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 670
6.10.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 672
6.10.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 672
6.10.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 675
6.10.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 677
6.10.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 680
6.10.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection According to IEC and ANSI................ 682
6.10.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 682
6.10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 685
6.10.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 688
6.10.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 689
6.10.6 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse Char-
acteristic Curve..........................................................................................................691
6.10.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 691
6.10.6.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 692
6.10.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 693
6.10.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 695

18 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.10.7 Stage with S0 Characteristic Curve............................................................................. 696


6.10.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 696
6.10.7.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 697
6.10.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 698
6.10.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 699
6.10.8 Stage with U0 Characteristic Curve............................................................................ 700
6.10.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 700
6.10.8.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 703
6.10.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 705
6.10.8.4 Information List................................................................................................... 706
6.10.9 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 706
6.10.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 706
6.10.9.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 712
6.10.10 Phase Selection .........................................................................................................715
6.10.11 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................715
6.10.11.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 715
6.10.11.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 716
6.10.12 Signal Transmission .................................................................................................. 716
6.10.13 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings..................................................... 717
6.10.13.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 717
6.10.13.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 720
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection................................................................... 722
6.11.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 722
6.11.2 Structure of Function ................................................................................................ 722
6.11.3 Receipt blocks............................................................................................................723
6.11.4 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip............................................................................ 726
6.11.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 726
6.11.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Comparison Procedures .... 728
6.11.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method ................. 729
6.11.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Unblocking Method .................. 729
6.11.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 730
6.11.4.6 Information List................................................................................................... 731
6.11.5 Blocking Method....................................................................................................... 732
6.11.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 732
6.11.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Method ........................................ 734
6.11.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 735
6.11.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 736
6.11.6 Transient Blocking..................................................................................................... 736
6.11.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 736
6.11.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking ........................................... 737
6.11.7 Sensitive Measuring Stage of Ground-Fault Protection................................................737
6.11.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 737
6.11.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault
Protection ........................................................................................................... 738
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed................................................................ 740
6.12.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 740
6.12.2 Structure of Function ................................................................................................ 740
6.12.3 Echo Function .......................................................................................................... 741
6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function).....................................................................744
6.12.5 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 745
6.12.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................746
6.12.7 Information List......................................................................................................... 747

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 19
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification.......................... 748
6.13.1 Function Overview.................................................................................................... 748
6.13.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 748
6.13.3 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection................................................................................ 749
6.13.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 749
6.13.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 750
6.13.4 Instantaneous Stage.................................................................................................. 751
6.13.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 751
6.13.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 751
6.13.5 Delayed Stage........................................................................................................... 753
6.13.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 753
6.13.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 754
6.13.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................755
6.13.7 Information List......................................................................................................... 755
6.14 External Trip Initiation..................................................................................................... 757
6.14.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 757
6.14.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 757
6.14.3 Stage Description ......................................................................................................758
6.14.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 759
6.14.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................759
6.14.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 759
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function......................................................................................... 760
6.15.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 760
6.15.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 760
6.15.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions .............. 762
6.15.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function.......................................................................... 764
6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function ................................... 764
6.15.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function ........................................... 767
6.15.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping .................................................... 769
6.15.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup ....................................................... 770
6.15.4.5 Start.................................................................................................................... 770
6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time .................772
6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time ....................773
6.15.4.8 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time ........... 775
6.15.4.9 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time .............. 776
6.15.4.10 Stage Release ...................................................................................................... 777
6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping...................................................... 778
6.15.4.12 Dead time for Operating Modes with Pickup ........................................................ 780
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.................................................... 782
6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command ............................................................... 784
6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time .......................................................................................................786
6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition ....................................... 787
6.15.4.17 Blockings............................................................................................................. 789
6.15.4.18 1-/3-pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker ...............................................................792
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) ......................................... 793
6.15.4.20 Settings............................................................................................................... 795
6.15.4.21 Information List................................................................................................... 797
6.15.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)................................... 799
6.15.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 799
6.15.5.2 Settings .............................................................................................................. 800
6.15.5.3 Information List................................................................................................... 800
6.15.6 Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function...............................................802
6.15.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 802

20 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.15.6.2 Information List................................................................................................... 803


6.15.7 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings ....................................................804
6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function 810
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................................................814
6.16.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 814
6.16.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 814
6.16.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain........................................................................................... 816
6.16.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 816
6.16.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 817
6.16.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 818
6.16.3.4 Information List................................................................................................... 818
6.16.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 819
6.16.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 819
6.16.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 824
6.16.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 827
6.16.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 829
6.16.5 Stage with Independent Characteristic Curve, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protec-
tion and Adaptive Pickup........................................................................................... 831
6.16.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 831
6.16.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 831
6.16.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 831
6.16.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 834
6.16.6 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 835
6.16.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 835
6.16.6.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 840
6.16.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 843
6.16.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 846
6.16.7 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 846
6.16.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 846
6.16.7.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 848
6.16.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 849
6.16.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 851
6.16.8 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................852
6.16.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 852
6.16.8.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 852
6.16.9 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings..................................................... 853
6.16.9.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 853
6.16.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) ..................................................857
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground...................................................................................... 858
6.17.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 858
6.17.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 858
6.17.3 General Functionality................................................................................................ 859
6.17.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 859
6.17.3.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 860
6.17.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 861
6.17.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 862
6.17.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 862
6.17.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 864
6.17.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 867
6.17.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 872
6.17.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 873
6.17.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 873
6.17.5.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 876
6.17.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 878

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 21
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.17.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 881


6.17.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 881
6.17.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 881
6.17.6.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 883
6.17.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 884
6.17.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 886
6.17.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................887
6.17.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 887
6.17.7.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 887
6.17.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings..................................................... 888
6.17.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 888
6.17.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) ..................................................892
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases...................................................................... 894
6.18.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 894
6.18.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 894
6.18.3 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 895
6.18.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 895
6.18.3.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 896
6.18.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 898
6.18.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 898
6.18.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 900
6.18.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 902
6.18.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 907
6.18.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 908
6.18.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 908
6.18.5.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 910
6.18.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 913
6.18.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 915
6.18.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 916
6.18.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 916
6.18.6.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 917
6.18.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 918
6.18.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 921
6.18.7 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 921
6.18.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 921
6.18.7.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 924
6.18.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings .................................................... 924
6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends ............. 925
6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection ........................................... 926
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping...............................................................................928
6.19.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 928
6.19.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 928
6.19.3 Standard Release Procedure....................................................................................... 929
6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 930
6.19.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface................................................................. 931
6.19.6 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 933
6.19.7 Settings.....................................................................................................................933
6.19.8 Information List......................................................................................................... 934
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions.................................................... 935
6.20.1 Description ............................................................................................................... 935

22 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase...................................................................................... 936


6.21.1 Function Overview ....................................................................................................936
6.21.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 936
6.21.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 938
6.21.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 938
6.21.3.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 939
6.21.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 940
6.21.3.4 Information List................................................................................................... 940
6.21.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 941
6.21.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 941
6.21.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 942
6.21.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 943
6.21.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 944
6.21.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse Char-
acteristic Curve..........................................................................................................945
6.21.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 945
6.21.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 947
6.21.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 948
6.21.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 948
6.21.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 949
6.21.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 949
6.21.6.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 950
6.21.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 951
6.21.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 951
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases......................................................... 952
6.22.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 952
6.22.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 952
6.22.3 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent......................... 953
6.22.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 953
6.22.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 955
6.22.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 957
6.22.3.4 Information List................................................................................................... 957
6.22.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released.............................958
6.22.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 958
6.22.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 959
6.22.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 960
6.22.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 960
6.22.5 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-In...................... 961
6.22.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 961
6.22.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 962
6.22.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 963
6.22.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 964
6.22.6 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Under-
voltage Seal-In...........................................................................................................965
6.22.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 965
6.22.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 966
6.22.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 968
6.22.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 969
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................... 970
6.23.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 970
6.23.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 970
6.23.3 General Functionality................................................................................................ 972
6.23.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 972
6.23.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 975

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 23
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.23.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 975


6.23.3.4 Information List................................................................................................... 976
6.23.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement............................................. 976
6.23.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 976
6.23.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 982
6.23.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 984
6.23.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 985
6.23.5 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage................................................................... 985
6.23.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 985
6.23.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 990
6.23.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 993
6.23.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 993
6.23.6 Usage Information for Detection of Intermittent Ground Faults.................................. 994
6.23.7 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement.................................................... 995
6.23.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 995
6.23.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 999
6.23.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1000
6.23.7.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1001
6.23.8 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement.....................................................1001
6.23.8.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1001
6.23.8.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1006
6.23.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1009
6.23.8.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1010
6.23.9 Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic...................................... 1010
6.23.9.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1010
6.23.9.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1015
6.23.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1017
6.23.9.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1017
6.23.10 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage................... 1018
6.23.10.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1018
6.23.10.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1019
6.23.10.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1022
6.23.10.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1022
6.23.11 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage........................................................................................ 1022
6.23.11.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1022
6.23.11.2 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1024
6.23.11.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1025
6.23.11.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1025
6.23.12 Non-Directional Y0 Stage......................................................................................... 1025
6.23.12.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1025
6.23.12.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1028
6.23.12.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1029
6.23.12.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1029
6.23.13 Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage.................................................................................. 1029
6.23.13.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1029
6.23.13.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1034
6.23.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1037
6.23.13.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1037
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection....................................................1038
6.24.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1038
6.24.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1038
6.24.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1039
6.24.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1043
6.24.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1044

24 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.24.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1045


6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection........................................................... 1046
6.25.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1046
6.25.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1046
6.25.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1047
6.25.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1053
6.25.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1055
6.25.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1056
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection.......................................................................................1057
6.26.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1057
6.26.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1057
6.26.3 General Functionality.............................................................................................. 1058
6.26.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1058
6.26.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1058
6.26.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1060
6.26.4.1 Stage Description .............................................................................................. 1060
6.26.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1061
6.26.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1061
6.26.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1062
6.26.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1063
6.26.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1063
6.26.5.2 Application and Settings Notes........................................................................... 1064
6.26.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1065
6.26.5.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1065
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay........... 1066
6.27.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1066
6.27.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1066
6.27.3 Function Description................................................................................................1066
6.27.4 Application and Setting Notes for Direction Determination ...................................... 1071
6.27.5 Application and Setting Notes for Stages ................................................................. 1072
6.27.6 Settings...................................................................................................................1074
6.27.7 Information List....................................................................................................... 1075
6.28 Undercurrent Protection................................................................................................1076
6.28.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1076
6.28.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1076
6.28.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1077
6.28.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1078
6.28.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1079
6.28.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1080
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................1081
6.29.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1081
6.29.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1081
6.29.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1082
6.29.3.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1082
6.29.3.2 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1083
6.29.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1085
6.29.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1085
6.29.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1087
6.29.4.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1087

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 25
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.29.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1090


6.29.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1091
6.29.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1092
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage................................................. 1093
6.30.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1093
6.30.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1093
6.30.3 Stage Description ....................................................................................................1094
6.30.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1094
6.30.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1095
6.30.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1095
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage............................................... 1097
6.31.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1097
6.31.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1097
6.31.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1098
6.31.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1099
6.31.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1100
6.31.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1100
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding....................1102
6.32.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1102
6.32.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1102
6.32.3 Stage Description ....................................................................................................1103
6.32.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1104
6.32.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1105
6.32.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1105
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage............................1107
6.33.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1107
6.33.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1107
6.33.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1108
6.33.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1109
6.33.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1112
6.33.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1112
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage.......................................................................1113
6.34.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1113
6.34.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1113
6.34.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1114
6.34.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1115
6.34.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1117
6.34.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1117
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.............................................................. 1119
6.35.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1119
6.35.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1119
6.35.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1120
6.35.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1120
6.35.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1122
6.35.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1125
6.35.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1126

26 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.35.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1127


6.35.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1127
6.35.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1131
6.35.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1134
6.35.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1134
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage...............................................1135
6.36.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1135
6.36.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1135
6.36.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1136
6.36.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1137
6.36.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1140
6.36.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1141
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage.....................................................................1142
6.37.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1142
6.37.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1142
6.37.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1143
6.37.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1144
6.37.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1146
6.37.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1147
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 1148
6.38.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1148
6.38.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1148
6.38.3 Protection Stage...................................................................................................... 1149
6.38.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1149
6.38.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1150
6.38.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1152
6.38.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1153
6.38.4 Reclosure Stage....................................................................................................... 1154
6.38.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1154
6.38.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1155
6.38.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1156
6.38.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1156
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision................................................................................... 1157
6.39.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1157
6.39.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1157
6.39.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1158
6.39.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1158
6.39.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1161
6.39.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1161
6.39.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1162
6.40 Fault Locator.................................................................................................................1163
6.40.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1163
6.40.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1163
6.40.3 Function Description................................................................................................1163
6.40.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1165
6.40.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1166
6.40.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1166
6.41 Overfrequency Protection..............................................................................................1168
6.41.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1168

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 27
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.41.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1168


6.41.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.............................................................................. 1169
6.41.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1170
6.41.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1171
6.41.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1172
6.42 Underfrequency Protection........................................................................................... 1173
6.42.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1173
6.42.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1173
6.42.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage............................................................................ 1174
6.42.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1175
6.42.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1176
6.42.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1177
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................ 1178
6.43.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1178
6.43.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1178
6.43.3 General Functions (Undervoltage Test, df/dt Calculation)......................................... 1178
6.43.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1178
6.43.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1179
6.43.4 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1180
6.43.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1180
6.43.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1181
6.43.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1182
6.43.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1182
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding.................................................................................... 1184
6.44.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1184
6.44.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1184
6.44.3 General Functionality.............................................................................................. 1185
6.44.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1185
6.44.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1188
6.44.4 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1191
6.44.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1191
6.44.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1193
6.44.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1194
6.44.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1194
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover.......................................................................................... 1196
6.45.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1196
6.45.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1196
6.45.3 Function Description................................................................................................1196
6.45.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1199
6.45.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1200
6.45.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1201
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault.................................................................. 1202
6.46.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1202
6.46.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1202
6.46.3 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1203
6.46.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1203
6.46.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1204
6.46.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1204

28 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced......................................................... 1205


6.47.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1205
6.47.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1205
6.47.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain......................................................................................... 1205
6.47.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1205
6.47.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1206
6.47.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1207
6.47.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1208
6.47.4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced...................................1208
6.47.4.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1208
6.47.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1213
6.47.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1216
6.47.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1217
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase........................................................................... 1219
6.48.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1219
6.48.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1219
6.48.3 Function Description................................................................................................1220
6.48.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1224
6.48.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1227
6.48.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1228
6.49 Temperature Supervision.............................................................................................. 1229
6.49.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1229
6.49.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1229
6.49.3 Function Description ...............................................................................................1230
6.49.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1230
6.49.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1231
6.49.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1236
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection...................................................................................1239
6.50.1 Overview of Function.............................................................................................. 1239
6.50.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1239
6.50.3 Function Description................................................................................................1240
6.50.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1249
6.50.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1257
6.50.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1258
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection................................................................................. 1260
6.51.1 Overview of Function.............................................................................................. 1260
6.51.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1260
6.51.3 Function Description................................................................................................1260
6.51.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1262
6.51.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1265
6.51.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1266
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection.................................................................................................. 1267
6.52.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1267
6.52.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1267
6.52.3 Description of a Zone...............................................................................................1267
6.52.4 Application and Setting Notes (System Protection)................................................... 1273
6.52.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1282
6.52.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1283

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 29
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.53 Inrush-Current Detection...............................................................................................1285


6.53.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1285
6.53.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1285
6.53.3 Function Description................................................................................................1285
6.53.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1289
6.53.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1290
6.53.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1291
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase.................................................................................... 1292
6.54.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1292
6.54.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1292
6.54.3 Active Power Stage ................................................................................................. 1293
6.54.4 Reactive Power Stage ..............................................................................................1295
6.54.5 Application Example................................................................................................ 1296
6.54.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage................................................................. 1297
6.54.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage.............................................................. 1298
6.54.8 Settings...................................................................................................................1299
6.54.9 Information List....................................................................................................... 1300
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 1302
6.55.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1302
6.55.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1302
6.55.3 Protection Stage...................................................................................................... 1303
6.55.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1303
6.55.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1304
6.55.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1306
6.55.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1307
6.55.4 Reclosure Stage....................................................................................................... 1308
6.55.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1308
6.55.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1309
6.55.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1310
6.55.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1310
6.56 Current-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 1311
6.56.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1311
6.56.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1311
6.56.3 Function Description................................................................................................1311
6.56.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1312
6.56.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1313
6.56.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1313
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 1314
6.57.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1314
6.57.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1314
6.57.3 Function Description................................................................................................1314
6.57.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1315
6.57.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1316
6.57.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1316
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection................................................................................................. 1317
6.58.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1317
6.58.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1317

30 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

6.58.3 General Functionality.............................................................................................. 1317


6.58.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1317
6.58.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1320
6.58.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1320
6.58.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1320
6.58.4 Δφ Stage................................................................................................................. 1321
6.58.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1321
6.58.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1322
6.58.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1323
6.58.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1323
6.58.5 I1 < Release Stage ...................................................................................................1323
6.58.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1323
6.58.5.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1324
6.58.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1324
6.58.5.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1324
6.59 Arc Protection............................................................................................................... 1325
6.59.1 Overview of Function ..............................................................................................1325
6.59.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1325
6.59.3 Function Description................................................................................................1326
6.59.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings..................................................... 1328
6.59.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage............................................................. 1329
6.59.6 Settings...................................................................................................................1330
6.59.7 Information List....................................................................................................... 1331
6.59.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only............................................................................................................... 1333
6.59.8.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1333
6.59.8.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1334
6.59.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light and Current.................................................................................................... 1335
6.59.9.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1335
6.59.9.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1337
6.59.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip Initiation1337
6.59.10.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1337
6.59.10.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1339
6.59.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current.................................................................................................... 1341
6.59.11.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1341
6.59.11.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1343
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection................................................................................ 1344
6.60.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1344
6.60.2 Function Description................................................................................................1344
6.60.3 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1345
6.60.4 Information List....................................................................................................... 1346

7 Control Functions................................................................................................................................... 1347


7.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................1348
7.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1348
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables..........................................................................................1348
7.2 Switching Devices......................................................................................................... 1351
7.2.1 General Overview.................................................................................................... 1351
7.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker.............................................................................. 1351
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device................................................1351

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 31
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1355


7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker.......................................................... 1357
7.2.2.4 Settings............................................................................................................. 1365
7.2.2.5 Information List................................................................................................. 1367
7.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device................................................................................ 1369
7.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device.................................................. 1369
7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1373
7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector...................................................................1375
7.2.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................. 1378
7.2.3.5 Information List................................................................................................. 1379
7.3 Switching Sequences.................................................................................................... 1380
7.3.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1380
7.3.2 Function Description................................................................................................1380
7.3.3 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1382
7.3.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1385
7.3.5 Information List....................................................................................................... 1386
7.4 Control Functionality.....................................................................................................1387
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection........................................ 1387
7.4.2 Command Logging ................................................................................................. 1405
7.4.3 Settings...................................................................................................................1409
7.4.4 Information List....................................................................................................... 1410
7.5 Synchronization Function..............................................................................................1411
7.5.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1411
7.5.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1411
7.5.3 Connection and Definition....................................................................................... 1412
7.5.4 General Functionality.............................................................................................. 1415
7.5.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1415
7.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1419
7.5.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1422
7.5.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching........................................................................ 1422
7.5.6 Sequence of Functions............................................................................................ 1425
7.5.7 Stage Synchrocheck.................................................................................................1427
7.5.7.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1427
7.5.7.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1428
7.5.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1428
7.5.7.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1429
7.5.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous........................................................................... 1430
7.5.8.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1430
7.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1434
7.5.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1436
7.5.8.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1437
7.5.9 Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations)........................................... 1438
7.5.10 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar.........................................................................1439
7.5.10.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1439
7.5.10.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1441
7.5.11 Direct Close Command ............................................................................................1442
7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering......... 1443
7.5.13 External Synchronization......................................................................................... 1445
7.5.13.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1445
7.5.13.2 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)................................... 1447
7.5.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1448

32 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

7.5.13.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1450


7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]........................................................................... 1451
7.6.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1451
7.6.2 Function Description................................................................................................1451
7.6.3 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1451
7.6.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1452
7.6.5 Information List....................................................................................................... 1453
7.7 CFC-Chart Settings........................................................................................................ 1454
7.7.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1454
7.7.2 Function Description................................................................................................1454
7.7.3 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1454
7.7.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1455
7.7.5 Information List....................................................................................................... 1455
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers............................................................................................ 1456
7.8.1 Function Description................................................................................................1456
7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1460
7.8.3 Settings (Properties Dialog)......................................................................................1467
7.8.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1467
7.8.5 Information List....................................................................................................... 1468
7.9 Voltage Controller......................................................................................................... 1469
7.9.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1469
7.9.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1469
7.9.3 Function Description................................................................................................1470
7.9.3.1 General..............................................................................................................1470
7.9.3.2 Logic of the Function......................................................................................... 1477
7.9.3.3 Control Response............................................................................................... 1478
7.9.3.4 Function Supervision..........................................................................................1481
7.9.3.5 Line Compensation............................................................................................ 1481
7.9.3.6 Limiting Values.................................................................................................. 1483
7.9.3.7 Blockings........................................................................................................... 1483
7.9.3.8 Parallel Operation.............................................................................................. 1484
7.9.3.9 Creating a GOOSE Later Binding for Parallel Control ........................................... 1496
7.9.3.10 Functional Measured Values...............................................................................1504
7.9.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1508
7.9.4.1 General..............................................................................................................1508
7.9.4.2 Controlling.........................................................................................................1510
7.9.4.3 Voltage Controller.............................................................................................. 1510
7.9.4.4 Line Compensation............................................................................................ 1515
7.9.4.5 Limiting Values.................................................................................................. 1518
7.9.4.6 Blockings........................................................................................................... 1519
7.9.4.7 Parallel operation............................................................................................... 1520
7.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1521
7.9.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1529

8 Supervision Functions............................................................................................................................ 1535


8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 1536
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision...............................................................................1537
8.2.1 Load Model............................................................................................................. 1537
8.2.2 Function Points........................................................................................................1539
8.2.3 CFC Resources......................................................................................................... 1539

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 33
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System............................................................................ 1542


8.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1542
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure....................................................................................... 1542
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1542
8.3.2.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................. 1543
8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure...............................................................1544
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure.....................................................................1545
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load..........................1546
8.3.2.6 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1547
8.3.2.7 Settings............................................................................................................. 1549
8.3.2.8 Information List................................................................................................. 1549
8.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision..................................................................................1550
8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1550
8.3.3.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1550
8.3.3.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1550
8.3.3.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1552
8.3.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1554
8.3.3.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1555
8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker.........................................................................1555
8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1555
8.3.4.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................. 1556
8.3.4.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1556
8.3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1556
8.3.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1556
8.3.4.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1557
8.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection............................................................................................. 1557
8.3.5.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1557
8.3.5.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1557
8.3.5.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1558
8.3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1560
8.3.5.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1560
8.3.5.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1560
8.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision.................................................................................... 1561
8.3.6.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1561
8.3.6.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1561
8.3.6.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1561
8.3.6.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1562
8.3.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1563
8.3.6.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1563
8.3.7 Voltage-Balance Supervision.................................................................................... 1563
8.3.7.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1563
8.3.7.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1564
8.3.7.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1564
8.3.7.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1565
8.3.7.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1566
8.3.7.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1566
8.3.8 Current-Sum Supervision......................................................................................... 1566
8.3.8.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1566
8.3.8.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1567
8.3.8.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1567
8.3.8.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1569
8.3.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1569
8.3.8.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1570
8.3.9 Voltage-Sum Supervision......................................................................................... 1570
8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1570
8.3.9.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................. 1570

34 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

8.3.9.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1570


8.3.9.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1572
8.3.9.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1572
8.3.9.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1572
8.3.10 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision......................................................................... 1573
8.3.10.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1573
8.3.10.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................. 1573
8.3.10.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1573
8.3.10.4 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1574
8.3.10.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1574
8.3.10.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1574
8.3.11 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision......................................................................... 1575
8.3.11.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1575
8.3.11.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................. 1575
8.3.11.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1575
8.3.11.4 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1576
8.3.11.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1576
8.3.11.6 Information List................................................................................................. 1576
8.3.12 Saturation Detection................................................................................................1577
8.3.12.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1577
8.3.12.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1577
8.3.12.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1577
8.3.12.4 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1577
8.3.12.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1578
8.3.13 Trip-Circuit Supervision............................................................................................ 1578
8.3.13.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1578
8.3.13.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1579
8.3.13.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs....................................................... 1579
8.3.13.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input.........................................................1580
8.3.13.5 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1583
8.3.13.6 Settings............................................................................................................. 1583
8.3.13.7 Information List................................................................................................. 1583
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware.............................................................................. 1585
8.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1585
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum....................................................1586
8.4.2.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1586
8.4.2.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1586
8.4.2.3 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1587
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware.....................................................................................1590
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration......................................................................... 1591
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections..................................................................1592
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures...................................................................... 1593
8.8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1593
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1..................................................................................................... 1594
8.8.3 Defect Severity 2..................................................................................................... 1598
8.8.4 Defect Severity 3..................................................................................................... 1599
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)...............................................................................1600
8.9 Group Indications..........................................................................................................1601

9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System........................................... 1603
9.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................. 1604
9.2 Structure of the Function.............................................................................................. 1605
9.3 Operational Measured Values........................................................................................ 1607

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 35
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components..................................................................1609


9.5 Average Values............................................................................................................. 1610
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values................................................................... 1610
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values.................................................... 1610
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values...........................................................................................1613
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values.................................................1613
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values.................................. 1614
9.7 Energy Values............................................................................................................... 1615
9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values..................................................................... 1615
9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values...................................................... 1616
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values........................................................................................ 1618
9.8.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values.......................................................... 1618
9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values........................................... 1619
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System......................................................................... 1622
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)...................................................................................1623
9.10.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1623
9.10.2 Structure of the Function Group.............................................................................. 1623
9.10.3 Function Description................................................................................................1623
9.10.4 Transmitted Data..................................................................................................... 1628
9.10.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)....................................................................... 1628
9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI..........................................................................1629
9.10.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device.....................................................................1638
9.10.8 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1640
9.10.9 Settings...................................................................................................................1641
9.10.10 Information List....................................................................................................... 1642
9.11 Measuring Transducers................................................................................................. 1643
9.11.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1643
9.11.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1643
9.11.3 Function Description................................................................................................1643
9.11.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1646
9.11.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1647
9.11.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1648
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring....................................................................................1649
9.12.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1649
9.12.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1649
9.12.3 General Functionality.............................................................................................. 1650
9.12.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1650
9.12.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1651
9.12.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1652
9.12.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1652
9.12.4 ΣI*-Method Stage.................................................................................................... 1653
9.12.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1653
9.12.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1655
9.12.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1655
9.12.4.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1655
9.12.5 2P-Method Stage..................................................................................................... 1656
9.12.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1656
9.12.5.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1659

36 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

9.12.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1660


9.12.5.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1660
9.12.6 I2t-Method Stage.....................................................................................................1661
9.12.6.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1661
9.12.6.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1662
9.12.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1662
9.12.6.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1662
9.12.7 Supervision CB Make Time Stage..............................................................................1663
9.12.7.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1663
9.12.7.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1664
9.12.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1664
9.12.7.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1665

10 Functional Tests......................................................................................................................................1667
10.1 General Notes............................................................................................................... 1668
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) ...................... 1669
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication....................................................................1670
10.3.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication......................................................... 1670
10.3.2 Directional Test .......................................................................................................1671
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection..........................................................1672
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displace-
ment Voltage ............................................................................................................... 1676
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection............................ 1677
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test....................................................................................................... 1680
10.8 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test ............................................................................ 1684
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection ............................................................ 1685
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision .............................................................. 1686
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test .......................................................................... 1687
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal............................................................. 1688
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 1689
10.14 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems..................................... 1691
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function.................................... 1692
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control...................................................................... 1696
10.16.1 Secondary Tests.......................................................................................................1696
10.16.1.1 General..............................................................................................................1696
10.16.1.2 Checking the Transformer Tap Position...............................................................1696
10.16.1.3 Check of the Voltage-Control Function............................................................... 1699
10.16.1.4 Further Tests......................................................................................................1700
10.16.1.5 Voltage-Control Function for Parallel Transformers............................................. 1703
10.16.2 Primary Tests........................................................................................................... 1708

11 Technical Data........................................................................................................................................ 1713


11.1 General Device Data......................................................................................................1716
11.1.1 Analog Inputs.......................................................................................................... 1716
11.1.2 Supply Voltage........................................................................................................ 1718
11.1.3 Binary Inputs........................................................................................................... 1720
11.1.4 Relay Outputs.......................................................................................................... 1720
11.1.5 Design Data.............................................................................................................1722
11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology................................................................ 1726

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 37
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

11.3 Date and Time Synchronization..................................................................................... 1728


11.4 Line Differential Protection............................................................................................1729
11.5 Stub-Differential Protection........................................................................................... 1731
11.6 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection................................................................................ 1732
11.7 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)........................................................1734
11.8 Distance Protection with the Classical Method............................................................... 1736
11.9 Impedance Protection................................................................................................... 1739
11.10 Power-Swing Blocking .................................................................................................. 1740
11.11 Teleprotection with Distance Protection ........................................................................1741
11.12 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems.......... 1742
11.13 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection ................................................................ 1747
11.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed ............................................................. 1748
11.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification........................ 1749
11.16 External Trip Initiation .................................................................................................. 1750
11.17 Automatic Reclosing .....................................................................................................1751
11.18 Overcurrent Protection, Phases......................................................................................1752
11.18.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1752
11.18.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1754
11.18.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve .......................................................... 1761
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Ground.................................................................................... 1764
11.19.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve ......................................................... 1764
11.19.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1765
11.19.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve .......................................................... 1772
11.20 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases.................................................................... 1774
11.20.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1774
11.20.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1775
11.20.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1777
11.21 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping.............................................................................1780
11.22 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase.................................................................................... 1781
11.22.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1781
11.22.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1782
11.22.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve .......................................................... 1783
11.23 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases....................................................... 1786
11.24 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................. 1789
11.24.1 General................................................................................................................... 1789
11.24.2 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement........................................... 1790
11.24.3 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage................................................................. 1791
11.24.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement.................................................. 1791
11.24.5 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement (Admittance)................................1792
11.24.6 Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic...................................... 1794
11.24.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage................... 1795
11.24.8 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage........................................................................................ 1796
11.24.9 Non-Directional Y0 Stage......................................................................................... 1796
11.24.10 Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage.................................................................................. 1797
11.25 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection....................................................1799

38 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

11.26 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection........................................................... 1801


11.27 Negative-Sequence Protection.......................................................................................1803
11.27.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1803
11.27.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1804
11.28 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay...............................1807
11.29 Undercurrent Protection................................................................................................1809
11.30 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................1811
11.31 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage ................................................ 1813
11.32 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage .............................................. 1814
11.33 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding ...................1815
11.34 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ...........................1816
11.35 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage.......................................................................1818
11.36 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.............................................................. 1820
11.37 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage...............................................1823
11.38 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage ....................................................................1824
11.39 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 1825
11.40 Voltage-Comparison Supervision................................................................................... 1827
11.41 Fault Locator.................................................................................................................1828
11.42 Overfrequency Protection..............................................................................................1829
11.43 Underfrequency Protection........................................................................................... 1830
11.44 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................ 1831
11.45 Underfrequency Load Shedding.................................................................................... 1833
11.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault ................................................................. 1835
11.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase – Advanced........................................................ 1836
11.48 Analog-Units Function Group........................................................................................ 1840
11.49 Temperature Supervision.............................................................................................. 1841
11.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection...................................................................................1842
11.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection................................................................................. 1844
11.52 Out-of-Step Protection ................................................................................................. 1845
11.53 Inrush-Current Detection...............................................................................................1846
11.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase.................................................................................... 1847
11.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 1848
11.56 Current-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 1850
11.57 Voltage-Jump Detection ............................................................................................... 1851
11.58 Vector-Jump Protection................................................................................................. 1852
11.59 Arc Protection............................................................................................................... 1853
11.60 Synchronization Function..............................................................................................1854
11.61 Voltage Controller......................................................................................................... 1856
11.62 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection............................................................................. 1860
11.63 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker ............................................................................. 1862
11.64 Voltage-Balance Supervision .........................................................................................1863
11.65 Voltage-Sum Supervision.............................................................................................. 1864
11.66 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 1865
11.67 Broken-Wire Detection ................................................................................................. 1866

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 39
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents

11.68 Current-Balance Supervision..........................................................................................1867


11.69 Current-Sum Supervision...............................................................................................1868
11.70 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 1869
11.71 Trip-Circuit Supervision................................................................................................. 1870
11.72 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum .........................................................1871
11.73 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values....................................................... 1872
11.74 Energy Values............................................................................................................... 1876
11.75 Phasor Measurement Unit............................................................................................. 1877
11.76 Measuring Transducers ................................................................................................ 1878
11.77 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring ...................................................................................1879
11.78 CFC...............................................................................................................................1880

A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 1885
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options...........................................................................1886
A.2 Ordering Accessories.....................................................................................................1887
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions........................................................................... 1889
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87 ..................................................... 1892
A.5 Phase Current-Transformer Requirements......................................................................1901
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................. 1910
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices............................... 1917
A.8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices........................1922
A.9 Connection Examples for Special Applications ...............................................................1924
A.10 Preroutings for 7SL87 (Basis) ........................................................................................1925
A.11 Preroutings for 7SL87 (1 1/2 Circuit Breakers) ............................................................... 1927

Glossary.................................................................................................................................................. 1931

Index.......................................................................................................................................................1951

40 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
1 Introduction

1.1 General 42
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 44

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 41
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.1 General

1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with a
powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.

Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device has a current transformer and,
depending on the device type, a voltage transformer. The current inputs are therefore intended for the detec-
tion of phase currents and ground current. The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core
balance current transformer. In addition, phase currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly
precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current
and voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.

Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands

• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions

• Querying of limiting values and time-outs

• Controlling of signals for the logic functions

• Decision about the trip and close commands

• Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis

• Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.

• External distribution of information

Binary Inputs and Outputs


Using the binary inputs and outputs, the device receives information from the system or from other devices
(such as locking commands). The most important outputs include the commands to the switching devices and
the indications for remote signaling of important events and states.

Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide informa-
tion on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC display,
the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting parame-
ters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters changed. In
addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.

Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.

42 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.1 General

Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally
bridged by capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 43
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5


The SIPROTEC 5 devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium and high-voltage
switchgear. They are characterized by comprehensive integration of protection and control functions.

General Properties

• Powerful microprocessor

• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker

• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing circuits from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters

• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface

• Continuous display of measured and metered values at the front

• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values

• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording

• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software

• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface

• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock

Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder

• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family

• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety

• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices

• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries

• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions

• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain

• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults

• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems

Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)

• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B, SNTP, or IEEE 1588)

44 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
2 Basic Structure of the Function

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device 46


2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope 53
2.3 Function Control 55
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 59
2.5 Information Lists 61

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 45
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device


General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The necessary
integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.

NOTE

i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!

EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
• Distance protection (21)
• Overcurrent protection, phases (51)

• Circuit-breaker failure protection (50BF), for circuit breakers 1 and 2

• Basic functionality (handling of tripping, etc.)

Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.

EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This
application template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application
Templates/Functional Scope).

Function Groups (FG)


Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and copying). The
function groups are assigned to primary objects, such as a line, transformer, or circuit breaker.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to current and/or voltagetransformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the protected object)

• Exchange of information between function groups


When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned to
the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application. You
can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. You can find detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online help.

46 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
• Protection function group Line 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 1

• Circuit-breaker function group QA 2


The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups.

[dweifkfg-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-1 Embedding the Functions via Function Groups

Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
• Protection function groups
• Circuit-breaker function groups
Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to one protected object – for example, to the
line. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types of protection
function groups (line, voltage/current 3-phase, transformer, motor, generator, etc.).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches – for example, circuit breakers
and disconnectors (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protection, automatic reclosing).
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application. You
can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. Detailed information on
this can be found in the DIGSI 5 Online help.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 47
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point


The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to one or more measuring points.
The number of measuring points and the assignment of function groups to the measuring points are preset by
the selected application template in accordance with the specific application. Therefore, this specifies which
measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function
group.

EXAMPLE
The measuring points are assigned to the function groups in the application template in Figure 2-1 as follows:
• The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2 and V-3ph 1. The
function group therefore receives the measured values from current transformers 1 and 2 and from
voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are added geometrically for
feeder-related processing.

• The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.

• The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 2.

The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.

[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-2 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)

The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following Figure, does not
correspond to the example).

48 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-3 Connecting Measuring Points and Function Groups

Interface Between Protection and Circuit-Breaker Function Groups


The protection function group(s) is/are connected to one or several circuit-breaker function groups. This
connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are started by the protection functions of the protection FG.
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group) through the protection functions of the connected protection function group

• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this is included
later in the section. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible
assignments in detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.

EXAMPLE
The linkage of the function group in the example shown in Figure 2-1 is as follows:
The protection function group Line is linked to both circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2.
This means that an operate indication in the Distance protection function generates a trip command in both
circuit-breaker function groups and thus controls both circuit breakers. The function Circuit-breaker failure
protection of both Circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2 is also started if these are configured.

The user can change this linkage as needed, that is, protection function groups can be freely assigned to any
Circuit-breaker function groups.
To check or change the assignment of the protection function groups to the circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Name of device (see following
figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 49
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-4 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)

The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area (see following figure).

[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.

• Open the respective protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example, Line 1 (see the
following figure).

50 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

[sclsinta-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-6 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)

• Double-click Circuit-breaker interaction (see Figure 2-6).

• The window for detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and the
Circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.

• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 51
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

[scdetail-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Group(s)

In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:


• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command

• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function

• Which protection functions block the automatic reclosing function

• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function

Functions (FN), Tripping Stages/Function Blocks (FB)


As already illustrated in Figure 2-1, functions are assigned to the protected objects or other primary objects via
function groups.
Functions can be further subdivided. For example, protection functions often consist of multiple protection
stages (for example, the Overcurrent-protection function). Other functions can contain one or more function
blocks.Thus, the distance protection, for example, offers different zone types and power-swing blocking.

EXAMPLE
In Figure 2-1 you can see that the function Overcurrent protection, phases (51) has 3 stages. The number of
zones of the function Distance protection is not shown.

Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in chapter 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, tripping stages, and function blocks can be
added, copied, and deleted (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).

52 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope


Application Template
The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed. The available application templates with
the respective functional scope are described in more detail in 4 Applications.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are present in
the device (see also Figure 2-1 in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device).
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.

Adjusting the Functional Scope


Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, copy or delete functions,
tripping stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing

• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added func-
tionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are also
copied when you copy functionalities.

NOTE

i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or level from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.

In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions
for your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one or
more measuring points (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.

Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. Further information can be
found in the description of application templates, in the chapter 4 Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
No function points are required to add additional stages in functions.

Extending the Function-Point Credit


You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 53
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.

• Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com.

• Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading.

• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.

54 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control

2.3 Function Control


Function control is used for:
• Functions that do not contain stages or function blocks
• Stages within functions

• Function blocks within functions

NOTE

i Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.

Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not (Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode for the purpose of commissioning (parameter Mode = Test).
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.

[losteurg-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-8 General Control of a Function

State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. The function mode can be set to
On, Off, and Test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5

• On-site operation at the device

• Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)


The possibility to adjust the superordinate state is limited. For test purposes, the complete device can set into
test mode.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 55
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control

The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state is shown in the
following table.

Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Linkage of Parameter Mode and Superordinate State)

Inputs State of the Function


Parameter Mode (of the function) Superordinate State
Off (any) Off
(any) Off Off
On On On
On Test Test
Test On Test
Test Test Test

The following table shows the possible function states:

Table 2-2 Possible States of a Function

Function State Explanation


On The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The health of a disabled func-
tion always has the value OK.

56 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control

Function State Explanation


Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor-
mation from the function (indications and, if present, measured values) is provided with a
test bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the information,
depending on the target.
For instance, among other things, it is possible to implement the functionality Blocking of
the command relay known from SIPROTEC 4.
Target of the Informa- Processing
tion
Log The indication is labeled Test in the log.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal
processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:
The CFC chart is not triggered by a status change of infor-
mation with a set test bit. The initial state of the informa-
tion (state before test bit was set) is not processed during
execution of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The CFC chart continues to process the information (indica-
tion or measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing infor-
mation is provided with a test bit. The definitions in this
table apply to its continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the
entire device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message, the test bit is set
spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted immedi-
ately. The receiver of the GOOSE message is automatically noti-
fied of transmitter test mode.
If an object is transmitted via the protection interface, the test bit
is not transmitted. The Test state must also be transmitted as
information for this state to be taken into account in the applica-
tion on the receiver end. You must route the Test signal in the
DIGSI 5 project tree → Device → Communication routing.
The test mode of the differential protection will be dealt with
separately in the application.

Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case the
functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-monitoring can cause functions to assume the health Alarm (see chapter 8 Supervision Func-
tions). If a function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is gener-
ated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 57
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control

Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
active in the following cases:
• Function is disabled
• The function is in the health state Alarm

• Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-8)

• All protection-function steps are disabled via the Enable protection controllable (state = false). The
indication Protection inactive is active.

Blocking of the Operate Indication, No Fault Recording at Pickup


With the Blk. Op. Ind. & Fault Rec. parameter, you define whether a function works as a protection
or a monitoring function. Further, you use this to determine the type and scope of the logging (see following
table)
Parameter Value Description
No The function works as a protection function. It generates an operate indica-
tion and starts fault recording with pickup. During fault recording, a fault is
created and logged as a fault record in the fault log.
Yes The function works as a supervision function. The logic runs normally, but
without creating the operate indication. The time-out indication is still
generated and can be processed further if necessary. No fault recording
starts with pickup.

58 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications

2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form unique texts and reference numbers, each function group, function, function block/stage, and
indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the texts and reference numbers follow the hierarchy already shown in Figure 2-1..
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Indication
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Parameter
The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Stage/Function block are optional. Since the func-
tion groups, functions as well as tripping stages/function blocks of the same type can be created multiple
times, a so-called instance number is added to these elements.

EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an example
of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite time-overcurrent protec-
tion stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and one func-
tion group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.

[lostuumz-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 2-9 Stage of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (without Representation of Stage
Control)

The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite time-overcurrent 66 2
protection
Settings Threshold value 3 –
Indication Pickup 55 –

The instance numbers arise as follows:


• Function group: Line 1
1 instance, because only one Line function group exists in the device

• Function: Overcurrent 3ph 1


1 instance, because only one Overcurrent 3ph function exists in the Line function group

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 59
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications

• Stage: Definite time-overcurrent protection 2


2 instances, because 2 definite time-overcurrent protection stages exist in the Overcurrent 3ph function
(here the 2nd instance as an example)
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite time-overcurrent 21:201:662:3
protection 2:Threshold value
Indication: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite time-overcurrent 21:201:662:55
protection 2:Pickup

The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.

60 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.5 Information Lists

2.5 Information Lists


For the function groups, functions, and function blocks, settings and miscellaneous signals are defined that
are shown in the settings and information lists.
The information lists summarize the signals. The data type of the information may differ. Possible data types
are ENS, ACD, ACT, SPS and MV, etc.
A type is assigned to the individual data types. The following table shows the possible types:
Type Meaning
I Input – input signal
O Output – output signal
C Controllable – control signal

EXAMPLE:
The following table shows the types for some data types as examples:
Data Type Type
ENS O
ACD O
ACT O
SPS I or O
SPC C
MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 61
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
62 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
3 System Functions

3.1 Indications 64
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 88
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups 90
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes 98
3.5 Fault Recording 114
3.6 Protection Communication 121
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization 158
3.8 User-Defined Objects 166
3.9 Other Functions 172
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 184
3.11 Device Settings 193

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 63
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

3.1 Indications

3.1.1 General

During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data

• Device supervisions

• Device functions

• Function procedures during testing and commissioning of the device


In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the system. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
• Ground-fault log 100 indications
• Fault log 1000 indications

• User-defined log 200 indications

• Operational log 2000 indications

• Motor-starting log 200 indications


If the maximum capacity of the user-defined log or of the operational log is exhausted, the oldest entries
disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault log or of the ground-fault log is
reached, the number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault log is full. You can route this signal in the
information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are also
saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and navigation using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external
request via general interrogation. In DIGSI 5, indications can be tracked spontaneously during online mode in
a special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control systems through
mapping on various communication protocols.

NOTE

i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.

Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.

3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel

Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.

64 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Figure 3-1
On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)

Menu Path Log


Main menu → Indications → Operational log
Fault log
Ground-fault log
Setting changes
User indications 1
User indications 2
Motor-starting indications
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Device diagnosis
Security indications
Communication indications

To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To learn more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.

NOTE

i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 65
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5

Procedure

Menu Path (Project) Log


Project → Device → Process data → Log → Operational log
Setting changes
Fault log
User indications 1
User indications 2
Motor-starting log
Ground-fault log
Online access → Device → Device information → Log Device-diagnosis log
tab → Security indications
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communica- Communication indications
tion module →

To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. You can establish a direct connection to your PC
via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data network
from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² You access the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. If you have not
created the device within a project, you can also do this via the Online access menu item.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update, it is
necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² Synchronize the log. For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see the
ground-fault indications example in Figure 3-2 a)).

[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List (Example of Ground-Fault Log)

You will find additional information about deleting and saving logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the
Logs.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.

66 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Setting Relative Time Reference


² Reference the display of log entries, if needed, to the real time of a specific entry. In this way, you deter-
mine a relative time for all other indications. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.

3.1.4 Displaying Indications

Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-
mation:

Table 3-1 Overview of Additional Information

Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information


Log for operational indications and Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
log for user-defined indications Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Function structure, Value
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for motor-starting indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Motor-starting time, Function structure,
Starting current, Name,
Starting voltage, Value
Starting duration
Log for ground-fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause,
Number

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 67
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information


Log for parameter changes Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Function structure, Value
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Spontaneous indication window Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(DIGSI 5) Relative time, Fault number,
Indication, Value
Value,
Quality,
Additional Information
Log for safety indications1 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for device-diagnostic indica- Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
tions1 Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication indications1 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication

Overview of Displayed Quality Attributes


If values are shown on the device display or in DIGSI, the following quality attributes are different for meas-
ured values and metered values.

Table 3-2 Measured Values

IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description


Detail Quality Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
– X Value The measured value is valid.
Failure X Fault The device is defective. Contact
Support.
Inaccurate X --- The measured value was not
calculated (for example, the
angle between current and
voltage if one of the 2 variables is
missing).
Bad Reference X ≈ Value The measured value can be inac-
curate (for example, outside the
frequency-tracking range).
Out of Range X > Value The measured value exceeds the
measuring range.

1 Only online access

68 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Table 3-3 Metered Values

IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description


Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
X Value The metered value is invalid.
X --- The metered value was not calcu-
lated.
X ≈ Value The metered value has no refer-
ence.

Indication Columns
The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns in the log:
Indication Column Meaning
Time stamp Time stamp of the indication in device time using the local time
zone of the device or the query time for the motor log
Relative time Relative time to a reference entry
Error number Number of the error that occurred in the device. This number incre-
ments continuously.
Entry number Entry identification of buffer entries. This identification displays the
sequence of buffer entries.
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number
increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by
Siemens.
Indication Message text
Function structure Path of the signal with the signal name
Name Signal name
Value Current state of the command. Also pay attention to the value
quality to check whether the value is up to date.
Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether
the value is up to date.
Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity
Number DIGSI address of the signal
Motor startup time Time of motor starting
Starting current Current needed by the motor to start up
Starting voltage Voltage needed by the motor to start up
Start duration Time needed by the motor to start up

3.1.5 Logs

3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow catego-
rization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and based on
fields of application.

Table 3-4 Log Overview

Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Ground-fault log Ground-fault indications

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 69
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Log Logging
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-startup log Information on the motor startup

Management of Logs
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault or ground-fault log is
reached, the number of the last fault is generated via the signal Fault log is full. You can route this signal in
the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are
also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.

Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.

Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is only
through the project:
• Open the information routing.
Project → Device → Information routing

• Select the appropriate routing column.


Target → Logs → Column Ground-fault log (G)
The routing of the selected indication is done via right click.
• Select one of the options in the list box shown:
– Routed (X)
– Unrouted

[scinfpuf-191012-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: Ground-Fault Log, Column G)

70 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).

3.1.5.2 Operational Log


Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
• State of device functions
• Measured data

• Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed informa-
tion about the recording of system incidents, please refer to the description of the fault log (chapter
3.1.5.3 Fault Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5

• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log

• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4 a)).

[scbetrmd-030211-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 71
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Reading on the Device via the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.

[scoperlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-5 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)

Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.

Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.

3.1.5.3 Fault Log


Fault indications are events which arise during a fault. They are logged in the fault log with real-time stamp
and relative-time stamp (reference point: fault occurrence) . Faults are numbered consecutively in rising order.
With fault recording engaged, a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault logged
in the fault log. A maximum of 128 fault logs can be stored. A maximum of 1000 indications can be recorded
in each fault log.

Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is pref-
erably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing process is
logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function every
pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.

72 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

NOTE

i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.

Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the
last fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.

Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

Figure 3-6
Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device

Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Equipment Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However,
this can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The
recording of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.

3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log


Ground-fault indications are events which arise during a ground fault. They are logged in the ground-fault log
with real-time stamp and relative-time stamp (reference point: ground-fault occurrence) . Ground faults are
numbered consecutively in rising order. A maximum of 10 ground-fault logs are stored and for each ground-
fault log it is guaranteed that at least 100 indications are recorded.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 73
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

The following functions can start the logging of a ground fault with the raising ground-fault indication:
• Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns)

• Sensitive ground current protection with I0 (50Ns/51Ns)

• Intermittent ground-fault protection


The logging ends with the going ground-fault indication.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5

• To reach the ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Ground-fault log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the ground-fault log is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-7 a)).

[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-7 Reading the Ground-Fault Log with DIGSI 5

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach the ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Ground-fault indication

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

74 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Figure 3-8
Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device

Deletability
The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.

Configurability
The indication scope of the ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Ground-fault log
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.

3.1.5.5 User Log


With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5

• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-9 a)).

[scanwnmd-030211-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-9 Reading the User-Defined Log with DIGSI 5

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 75
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.

[scuserrlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-10 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device

Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.

Configuration of a User-Defined Log


The indication capacity of a created user-defined log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → U1 or U2

76 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

[scdiu1u2-280415-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-11 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log U1/2)

3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log


All individual setting changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
parameter changes. This enables you to determine setting changes made are associated with events logged
(for example, faults). On the other hand, it is possible to prove with fault analyses, for example, that the
current status of all settings truly corresponds to their status at the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications can
be stored in the setting-history log.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5

• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-12).

[scparamd-030211-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-12 Reading the Setting-History Log with DIGSI 5

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 77
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Setting changes

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

Figure 3-13
Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device

Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log


For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.

Table 3-5 Overview of Indication Types

Displayed Information Explanation


Selection editing+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Reject+ Rejection of all changes successful
PG activation+ PG activation via command successful
PG activation- PG activation via command failed
set+ Parameter value was changed
Acceptance+ Acceptance of change successful
Acceptance- Acceptance of change failed
DCF loaded DCF loaded into device
SG 1 Settings group 1
SG 2 Settings group 2
SG 3 Settings group 3
SG 4 Settings group 4
SG 5 Settings group 5
SG 6 Settings group 6
SG 7 Settings group 7
SG 8 Settings group 8

78 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

NOTE

i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!

• The log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!

• If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.

• You cannot route additional indication objects to the setting-history log.

3.1.5.7 Communication Log


The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5

• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communication module

• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.

[sccompuf-140912-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-14 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Communication log

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 79
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Figure 3-15
Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device

Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.

Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.

3.1.5.8 Security Log


Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 2048 indications can be stored in the security log.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5

• To access the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window . The device must be in
Online access.
Project → Online access → Device → Device Information → Log tab → Security logs
The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.

[scsecmld-180816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-16 Reading the Security Indications with DIGSI 5

80 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel

• To access the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Security indications

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

Figure 3-17
Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device

NOTE

i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!

• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!

• If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.

3.1.5.9 Device-Diagnosis Log


Concrete take-action instructions are logged and displayed in the device-diagnosis log for the following items:
• Required maintenance (for example, battery supervision)
• Identified hardware defects

• Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.

Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation

• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Online access → Device → Device information → Logs tab → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 81
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

[scdevdia-180816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-18 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5

Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation

• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Device diagnosis

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

Figure 3-19
Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device

NOTE

i • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!

• The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!

3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs

Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after an inspection of
the system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.

NOTE

i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.

82 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

NOTE

i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with rele-
vance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).

NOTE

i Upon deletion of the fault log, the associated fault records are also deleted. In addition, the meters for fault
number and fault-record number are reset to 0. In contrast, if you delete fault records, the content of the
fault log, including the allocated fault numbers, remains.

NOTE

i If the device executes an initial start, for example, after an update of the device software, the following
logs are automatically deleted:
• Operational log
• Fault log

• Ground-fault log

• Setting-history log

• User log

• Motor-startup log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.

NOTE

i If a ground fault is currently active, the ground-fault log cannot be deleted.

Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel

• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log

Figure 3-20
Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel

• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.

• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 83
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

• After being prompted, enter the password and confirm with Enter.

• After being prompted, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.

Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5

• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example, opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log

3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5

With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.

Procedure

• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.

• Click Indications in the path:


Online access → Interface → Device → Indications

• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.

[scspnmld-230211-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-21 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5

3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel

After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects (for example, lines) and even
circuit breakers can be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several instances). In
DIGSI 5, several spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application, with each indi-
vidual one being assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the device until they are
manually confirmed or reset by LED reset.

Configuration of a Spontaneous Fault Display with DIGSI 5

• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration

84 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.

• With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be displayed for each pickup or only pickups with
the trip command.

[sckonstf-230211-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-22 Configuration of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device

For every display line the following display options can be selected:

Table 3-6 Overview of Display Options

Displayed Information Explanation


Pickup indication Display of the first function stage picked up in a fault, as needed
with additional information (phases, ground, direction).
PU time Display of the entire pickup duration of the fault.
Operate indication Display of the first function stage triggered in a fault, as needed with
additional information (phases).
Trip time Display of the operate time related to the beginning of the fault
(pickup start).
Fault distance Display of the measured fault-location distance.

Acknowledgement of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device


After faults, the last occurred fault is always displayed to you. In cases where more than one circuit breaker is
configured, several stored fault displays can be present after faults, with the latest being displayed. These
displays remain stored in the device until they are manually acknowledged or reset by LED reset.

Figure 3-23
Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device

Method 1: Manual acknowledgement


• Press the softkey button Quit in the base bar of the display. The display is irretrievably closed. Repeat this
step until no spontaneous fault display appears anymore.

• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 85
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Method 2: Acknowledgement via LED reset


• An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and also
to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device

3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device

In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5

• Binary input

• Protocol of substation automation technology

Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5


In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others, to
LEDs and output contacts.
• To do this, proceed in the project tree to:
Project → Device → Information routing

• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:

Table 3-7 Overview of Routing Options

Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description


H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
V (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unlatched. Activation and reset of
the output (LED, BA) occurs automatically via the binary-
signal value.
G (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is acti-
vated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
NT (conditioned latching) X Fault indications are stored during control of the output
(LED) as a function of the parameter (_:91:139)
Fault-display. In the event of a new fault, the previ-
ously stored states are reset.
• If the fault gets terminated via a trip command from
the assigned circuit breaker, the status of an indication
remains as latched with the setting option with
trip. Without a trip command, the status is displayed
before the fault (if necessary, the status of the last
fault) is restored.
• With the setting option with pickup the current
indication image of a pickup gets stored. The image
comprises all indications of functions that are effective
in the event of tripping on the same circuit breaker,
like the picked up function.

86 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description


TL (stored only with tripping) X Routing option TL (tripping stored) is only possible for the
switching object circuit breaker.
The output is saved with protection tripping. The contact
remains activated until acknowledged.
Control commands are not affected. A control command is
pending above the parameterized command period until
feedback has been successfully received.
Note:
You can realize the functionality of the Lockout (ANSI 86)
by storing the output relay with the routing option TL.

3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group

You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it
is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5.
You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.

3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology

If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 87
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition


Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high
sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu-
racy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2 algo-
rithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 80 Hz.

• Fixed sampling frequency – correction of the filter coefficients:


This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected. This meth-
odology is used for the Distance protection and Line differential protection functions.

The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-24 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit the
bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. This means the magnitude,
phase, as well as the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that
the current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.

[dwmeserf-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-24 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain

The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If the magnitude, phase, and transformer time
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values, refer.
For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency. For
numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if frated = 50 Hz:
sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an adequate compro-
mise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).

88 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in 2
variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 80 Hz)
Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. Detailed information can be found in the
corresponding function description.

NOTE

i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in chapter 6.1 Power-
System Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 89
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

3.3.1 Overview

Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The device operates with a maximum of 6 Frequency tracking groups..
The chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking provides the necessary hints on the operating principle of
sampling-frequency tracking and its application.
The chapter 3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups describes the principle and application of frequency tracking
groups.

3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking

SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with powerful sampling-frequency tracking as explained in the chapter
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition . This ensures high measuring accuracy over a wide frequency operating
range (10 Hz to 80 Hz).
To determine the actual sampling frequency, the voltage and current measuring points are checked for valid
input signals, the actual power frequency is determined and the tracking frequency (sampling frequency =
20 ⋅ tracking frequency) is adapted. The method is implemented in such a way that the number of samplings
per actual power frequency or the frequency of the system is always constant. The number of samplings is 20
per cycle, as per chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition .
During engineering, you set the parameters specifying which measuring points are used for frequency
tracking. All 3-phase voltage and current measuring points and 1-phase voltage and current measuring points
are allowed.

NOTE

i The 1-phase measuring points, however, should only be used in exceptional cases.
Measuring points that measure zero-sequence voltages or zero-sequence currents must not be used for
frequency tracking.

The following figure shows where you set the parameters for the corresponding measuring point and activate
sampling-frequency tracking in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Settings → Power-system data.

[sc_MP_Powersys trackfreq, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-25 Using the Measuring Point to Determine the Sampling Frequency

90 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

If the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point is used to determine the actual tracking
frequency. If the parameter Tracking is set to active for several measuring points, the ID of the measuring
point determines the sequence in which these are checked for valid input signals. The algorithm starts with
the lowest ID number, as follows:
• First, the 3-phase measuring points are scanned. If no valid voltage is found, the selected current meas-
uring points are next. In this case, the following sequence applies:
3-phase voltage measuring point → 3-phase current measuring point → 1-phase voltage measuring point
→ 1-phase current measuring point
If a trigger signal comes from a current measuring point, the voltage measuring points are still continu-
ously scanned for valid voltages and switched immediately if a voltage is found.

• If the true RMS value is greater than 2.5 % of the set secondary device rated value, a measuring point is
valid. For example, this is 2.5 V at 100 V, 25 mA at 1 A or 125 mA at 5 A.

• A 3-phase measuring point is scanned in the sequence of phase A → phase B → phase C.


In the case of the voltage measuring points, the phase-to-phase voltage VAB, VBC, and VCA is always used
for evaluation. The phase-to-phase voltage is calculated in the event of a phase-to-ground connection.

• The tracking frequency is tracked using different interval steps. If the tracking frequency deviates only
slightly from the measured frequency, the frequency is tracked using small steps of 0.010 Hz. In the case
of greater deviations, the interval is 1 Hz. To react faster in the event of larger deviations, for example in
switchover conditions, tracking occurs in 5-Hz steps. When switching on measurands immediately the
measured tracking frequency is used.

• If no tracking frequency can be determined, the appropriate rated frequency of the electrical power
system is used as the tracking frequency. This case occurs before the measurands are switched on, after
they are switched off or when the device is powered on. If the measurands are switched on, the starting
frequency is the set power frequency, for example 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since rated-frequency input variables
can be assumed for most applications, the measuring algorithms start with the fixed sampling frequency,
for example, 1 kHz for 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz for 60 Hz.
Figure 3-26 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking across the frequency band and at the
frequency limits.
The x-axis shows the actual power frequency (fsys) and the y-axis shows the set tracking frequency (ftrack).
Between 10 Hz and 80 Hz, the relationship is linear. If the actual power frequency is less than 10 Hz, the
tracking frequency is kept at 10 Hz. In this case, sampling occurs at 20 ⋅ 10 Hz = 200 Hz. If the power
frequency is greater than 80 Hz, the tracking frequency is kept constant at 80 Hz.
If the frequency is outside the frequency operating range (10 Hz to 80 Hz), frequency tracking generates the
indication Freq. out of range. The individual protection functions evaluate this indication. If an over-
function can occur, the protection functions are blocked internally to avoid a failure.
You can find more detailed information on the behavior of the protection functions in the chapter 11 Tech-
nical Data.

[dw_working-area_sampling-frequency-tracking, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-26 Operating Range of Sampling-Frequency Tracking

Siemens recommends routing the calculated power frequency (fsys) and the determined tracking frequency
(ftrack) as a measured value trace in the fault record. In this way, you can document the behavior of the device

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 91
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

in transient conditions. The following figure shows that you find the both measured values in the information
routing under Power-system data → General:

[sc_Rout meas freq, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-27 Routing of the Frequency Measured Values

EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-28 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking using an example.
The voltage was reduced linearly from 57.7 V (100 V phase-to-phase) to 35 V (60.6 V phase-to-phase) and, at
the same time, the frequency was reduced from 50 Hz to 35 Hz, for example motor coasting down. Then, an
abrupt switch to the rated values of 57.7 V at 50 Hz was made.
The upper trace shows the power-system voltage on 1 phase (A) as an example. The center trace is the calcu-
lated power frequency and the lower trace is the determined tracking frequency. If you multiply the deter-
mined tracking frequency of the lower trace by 20, you can determine the sampling frequency.

[sc_example freqtrack, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-28 Example of Frequency Tracking and Reaction to a Step Change in the Input Variable

92 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups

In the SIPROTEC 5 devices before platform version V07.80, sampling-frequency tracking applies to the entire
device. This means that the 1st valid measuring point, for example a 3-phase voltage measuring point, deter-
mines the selected tracking frequency based on the detected frequency.
If all measuring points in a system are galvanically coupled to each other, the power frequency is identical for
all measuring points.
There are problems with electrical power system states or system states where galvanic separation is possible
and measuring points of the separated system parts are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device. For these prob-
lematic electrical power system states or system states, different frequencies are possible for a limited time.
Depending on the measuring point set for tracking, the device selects which frequency to use. As a result,
measuring errors and a failure of protection functions are possible.
Starting with platform version V7.80, you can assign the measuring points to different frequency tracking
groups. This ensures high flexibility and high measuring accuracy for a variety of applications. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. In the case of galvanic separation and
different system frequencies, different sampling frequencies arise as a result. This occurs temporarily in
systems with rotating machines, for example. A way to achieve galvanic separation is to use an open circuit
breaker.

NOTE

i In the measured-value acquisition chain in Figure 3-24 in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ,
only the data stream designated as tracked is adapted. The data stream represented as fixed derives its
sampling frequency exclusively from the set rated frequency. In this case, the constant sampling frequency
of 1 kHz at frated = 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz at frated = 60 Hz is used. This applies to every measuring point, regard-
less of the frequency tracking group to which it is assigned.

EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-29 shows an example for the necessity of frequency tracking groups. The generator circuit breaker
(GCB) and the high-voltage circuit breaker (HVCB) are the galvanic disconnection points. In this way, different
switching states are possible. The device uses current measuring points (CTs 1 to 6) and voltage measuring
points (VTs 1 to 4) located on different sides of the circuit breakers. In addition, it is assumed that the gener-
ator is started using a starting-frequency converter. In a gas-turbine application, the starting-frequency
converter accelerates the generator from 0 Hz to about 70 % of the rated speed (roughly 35 Hz at
frated = 50 Hz). After this, the gas turbine is fired up and brings the generator to the rated speed. Then, the
voltage is built up to the rated voltage and synchronized. During this start-up operation, the GCB is open and
the HVCB is closed. As a result, the measuring points VT 1, CTs 1, 2, 4 have a frequency that deviates from the
other measuring points during start-up operation. The other measuring points are usually at the rated
frequency due of the connection to the power system.
Furthermore, protection tripping can result in a switching state where the HVCB is open and the GCB remains
closed. In this case, the generator and a generator transformer can assume a frequency that deviates from the
power frequency. In the event of load shedding, the generator accelerates before the speed controller inter-
venes. This is particularly pronounced in hydro generators.
An evaluation of the individual scenarios shows that different frequencies can occur at the different meas-
uring points for a limited time. For this reason, 3 frequency tracking groups are necessary in this example.
These groups are marked with different colors in the following figure.

NOTE

i The measuring point (CT 4) marked with 1) in the following figure will be discussed later.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 93
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

[dw_example_frequency-tracking-groups, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-29 Example of the Necessity of Frequency Tracking Groups

To strike a balance between application flexibility and the required computing power, the number of addi-
tional frequency tracking groups was limited to 5. Together with the basic functionality, a total of 6 frequency
tracking groups are possible.
If you wish to use frequency tracking groups, use the following engineering recommendations. Before starting
work, make sure you know how many frequency tracking groups are needed. Select only the required
number.
If you start with an application template that you have expanded by the necessary measuring points, you must
load the necessary number of additional frequency tracking groups from the Global DIGSI 5 Library into the
Power system folder.

94 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

[sc_loading freq group, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-30 Loading the Required Frequency Tracking Groups

If you instantiate an additional frequency tracking group, the system automatically assigns the ID of the
frequency tracking group in DIGSI using consecutive numbers. As the device already has 1 frequency tracking
group, the ID numbering for additional frequency tracking groups starts with 2.

[sc_ID freqgroup, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-31 ID of the Frequency Tracking Group

NOTE

i If you have activated several frequency tracking groups during engineering and you then delete a
frequency tracking group again later, the assigned ID is also deleted. All other frequency tracking groups
retain their assigned IDs.
Try to avoid discontinuities by deleting the frequency tracking group with the highest ID if possible.

You will find the frequency measured values and the indications of the corresponding frequency tracking
group in the routing matrix (see Figure 3-27).
Assign the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups in the Function-group connections Editor. As
soon as you have instantiated another frequency tracking group from the Global DIGSI 5 Library, the addi-
tional column Frequency tracking group ID appears in the routing matrix. In this column, you select the
number of the corresponding frequency tracking group for each measuring point using the list box.

[sc_Routing MP to freqgroup, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-32 Assignment of the Measuring Point to the Frequency Tracking Group

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 95
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

NOTE

i Keep the following in mind when assigning the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups:
• The function groups (FGs) can operate only with 1 frequency tracking group.

• This applies also to interconnections between the function groups as for the Transformer differential
protection.
In the case of the Transformer differential protection, the Transformer side FG is interconnected
with the Transformer FG and all Transformer side FGs of one transformer must operate in the same
frequency tracking group.
The same applies when the neutral-point current is measured using a 1-phase function group.
There are also exceptions such as the FG Circuit breaker (see chapter 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit
Breaker). The voltage measured values are processed by the Synchronization function which operates
only with a fixed sampling frequency. In this way, voltage measuring points from different frequency
tracking groups can be connected.
The cited rules are checked using scripts and infractions reported during engineering.

Now, you can select the measuring points to be used to determine the tracking frequency for the appropriate
frequency tracking group as explained in the chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking. If possible, use at
least 1 voltage measuring point and 1 current measuring point. Give preference to 3-phase measuring points.
When the tracking frequency has been determined, all measuring points of the frequency tracking group are
set to this frequency and the tracked sampling frequency is adapted.

NOTE

i As described in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , the measured-value current with fixed
sampling frequency is unaffected by this.

To avoid errors, the ID of the measuring point and the ID of the assigned frequency tracking group are
displayed in the setting sheet of the measuring points in DIGSI 5 (see Figure 3-33).

[sc_MP additional setting freqgroup, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-33 Example: Settings of the 3-Phase Current Measuring Point; Additional Display of the ID for the
Frequency Tracking Group

In addition, the ID of the frequency tracking group is displayed in the function group in the General block (see
Figure 3-34). Here, you can also check the consistency.

96 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups

[sc_MP additional setting FG, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-34 Display of the ID for the Frequency Tracking Group in the Block General of the Function Group

A special feature is explained using Figure 3-29 as an example.


The measuring point marked in Figure 3-29 with 1) uses a current transformer that is located on the generator
side but is used by the transformer differential protection. As a result, this current transformer must be
assigned to the frequency tracking group 2 in accordance with the rules above. Since the generator is started
using a starting-frequency converter in the application example, the frequency at this measuring point devi-
ates from the frequency at the other measuring points of group 2. For this reason, the measuring point with
CT 4 must not be used to determine the tracking frequency.
Depending on the application, the current of the CT 4 acts as a disturbance variable when forming the Kirch-
hoff's current law. As a rule, this current is not particularly strong (< 15 % of Irated) so that the disturbance
effect remains small. If required, you must set the differential protection to be less sensitive. Decide this for
the specific application.
The following table shows the possible assignment of measuring points used to determine the tracked
sampling frequency for the example. For this purpose, the parameter Tracking = active in the corre-
sponding measuring point:
Frequency Tracking 1 2 3
Group
Recommended measuring VT 4 VT 3 VT 1
points for tracking VT 2 CT 1
CT 5

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 97
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

3.4.1 Overview

The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different appli-
cations, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects on the basis of
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.

[loquali1-090212-02.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-35 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device

Supported Quality Attributes


The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
• Validity using the values good or invalid
The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also
setting a substitute value for the object that is not received (see 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the
User for Received GOOSE Values). The substitute value is forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed further
as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the transmitter end.
• Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiver device that the object received via a GOOSE message
was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.

98 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

• OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE


The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message origi-
nates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. When the sending device is switched off,
the object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Operator-
Blocked quality was previously identified on the receiver device, the object can be treated differently at
the receiving end (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
At the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.

• Source using the values process, substituted


The Source quality attribute indicates whether the object was updated in the sending device.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.

Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes


In addition to the normal operation, the device also supports further operating modes that influence quality:
• Test mode of the device
You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device (state
values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.

• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks


You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.

• Functional logoff of the device


If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can function-
ally log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated
in the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked = TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The receiver
device detects a functional logoff of the transmitting device. After shutting down the sending device, the
receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not fail. Now
the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/
Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).

• Switching off individual functions, stages, or function blocks


You can switch off individual functions, stages, or function blocks. In this case, all data objects generated
by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute
Validity = invalid.

Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision


Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see chapter 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If
the supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, all recorded data will receive
the quality attribute Validity = invalid.

Influencing the Quality through Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breakers


If tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is detected (see chapter 8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit
Breaker), all recorded data will receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 99
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Influencing the Quality by the User


You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this is possible at the
following 3 locations:
• In the Information routing editor for external signals of GOOSE connections
• In the CFC chart

• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of the function.
This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several func-
tions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.

3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values

The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can find
information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User
for Received GOOSE Values, Page 104.
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.

• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-36 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object

Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Select the property for the selected data object.
You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding.
The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 101
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

[sc_LB_GOOSE_1, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-37 Advanced Quality Attributes for GOOSE Later Binding

With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.

Table 3-8 Value Definitions

Setting Value Description


Apply safe state value The value configured in the Safe state is forwarded as valid to the appli-
cation as soon as communication disturbance occurs.
Keep value The disturbed quality attribute is overwritten with good and the received
value is forwarded as valid to the application. If no value was received,
the output value is assumed being in safe state.
Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received, the last valid value is forwarded
to the application. If no value has yet been received, the output value is
assumed being in safe state.
Set value to "false" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value false to be forwarded to the applica-
tion.
Set value to "true" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value true to be forwarded to the application.

These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.

102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

[sc_LB_GOOSE_3, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-38 Value Definition of a Data Object of the SPS Type

You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.

Functional Logoff by Operator Blocked


You have set the Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device. As a result, every
indication issued from the functions and subject to Device logoff is transmitted with the quality informa-
tion operator blocked and Validity = good. The receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts
according to the settings (Table 3-8). A different quality processing can take place only once you have set the
Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device.

Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-8).

Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).

Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).

Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-8).

NOTE

i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.

In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not appli-
cable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 103
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.

Data Substitute Values


Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general 0 (False), 1 (True)
(The directional information is always manually updated with
unknown.
PhsA, phsB, phsC, and neut are manually updated with the same
value just like how the general value is set.)
BAC, APC mxVal Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
BCR actVal –263 to 263 – 1
CMV mag, ang Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
INC stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
INS stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
ISC, BSC valWTr.posVal –64 to 64
valWTr.transInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)

For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY

Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values


In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.

• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-39 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object

The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good without change.
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is • The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)


• Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
• Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked forwarded without change.
= FALSE
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = • The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
• The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked


OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Oper- Regardless of whether the validity check box is set or
atorBlocked = TRUE not, and regardless of the current validity, the validity
attribute is set to good and the substitute value of
the OperatorBlocked data object is set. That is, the
OperatorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity
settings.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 105
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked


OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it must
be taken into account that in this configuration the
data object substitute value for validity = invalid is
set, but the quality attribute OperatorBlocked is not
yet set.

3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts

In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:

[sc quali cfc, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-40 Influencing CFC Quality Handling in DIGSI 5

With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.

General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.

106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Quality Attribute: Validity


If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to
invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the
quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set glob-
ally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).

Quality Attribute: Test


CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored. When
the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was used
before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this old
value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is set
for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or
without quality processing.
1)ACFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of
the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally logged
off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.

Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)


The first 3 building blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other
building blocks are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical
processing.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 107
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Building Blocks Description


OR_SPS The building blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic.
The following tables describe the logic using input values in connection with the quality
AND_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
NEG_SPS
x = placeholder for the input value and quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLIT_DPS building block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a
quality processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
SPLI_XMV
connection.
SPLIT_Q The building block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid),
test, off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The building
block must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) building block.
BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under General
Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.

108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Building Blocks Description


BUILD_ACD These building blocks merge data value and quality. The building-block output is generally
used as a CFC output.
BUILD_ACT Generally, the BUILD_Q building block is connected upstream from these building blocks.

BUILD_BSC

BUILD_DPS

BUILD_ENS

BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV

CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.

EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE


The following conditions apply to the example:
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear inter-
locking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS building
block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then continue to
process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal for a
BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a result, with
the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the release
messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release signal for a
switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The following
figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:

[sccfcran-220415-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-41 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)

If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 109
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.

3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions

Figure 3-42 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.

NOTE

i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.

[loquali3-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-42 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function

Internal Input Data


The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.
Supported Quality Attributes Description
Validity • At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
• If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
• The frequency operating range of the device was left.
• The device is not calibrated.
• The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.

110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)


Figure 3-43 shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received
GOOSE Values

• Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.

[loquali2-230212-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-43 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal

For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-42.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.

• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 111
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

[sceinflu de, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-44 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

Quality Attribute: Validity


The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
• Further process last valid data value of the source signal
(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.

Quality Attribute: Test


• The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
• The input signal source is not in test
state and the function to be
processed is in test state.

112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes

Quality Attribute: Test


The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state. • Further processing of the last valid source signal data value,
before the source switches to the test state (that is the
default setting)
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applica-
tions.

Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked


The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic

Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 113
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

3.5 Fault Recording

3.5.1 Overview of Functions

All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording docu-
ments operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them. You can
read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Sample values of the analog input channels
• Measured values calculated internally

• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also available
after a loss of auxiliary voltage.

3.5.2 Structure of the Function

The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
In devices with line differential protection (7SD, 7SL), the time management feature synchronizes the fault
records of all line ends via the protection interfaces. This means that all fault recordings function on the same
real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be transferred to
the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing communica-
tion connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data using appro-
priate programs.

3.5.3 Function Description

The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the inter-
nally calculated measured values and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually.

NOTE

i You can find detailed information about selecting and deleting fault records in the Operating Manual
(C53000-G5040-C003).

The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest records are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.

Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz, 2 kHz,
4 kHz, and 8 kHz . This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection functions or
calculated measured values.

114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable recording
criterion, the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time. You can set the parameters for these
components individually.

[dwsigrar-070813-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-45 Example of a Fault Recording

With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.

• with pickup & AR cyc.:


In connection with an active automatic reclosing function (internal/external), the fault recordings record
the fault including the short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles).

• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
• Externally via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection device
without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)

• By way of a configurable input signal >Manual start, you can start fault records with a configurable
length (parameter Manual record time).

• From DIGSI 5, you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s.

• With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)

NOTE

i If a pickup signal is present continuously, the fault record is closed after the Maximum record time
expires and the fault recording is not restarted!

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 115
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

Saving the Recording


Not every fault recording that is started actually needs to be saved. With the Storage parameter, you specify
whether or not you want to save the fault recording that has started. You can also save only fault data for
which the pickup of a protection function also caused a tripping. With this setting, faults beyond the self-
protection range will not lead to replacing fault recordings that have already been saved.

Configuration of Signals to Be Recorded


All analog inputs of the device that have been configured (currents and voltages) are recorded as sampled
channels.
Function-specific binary signals (for example, pickup and trip signals) and measured value channels can be
configured individually for recording in the DIGSI Information-routing matrix. For this purpose, a separate
Recorder column is available.
You can rename the signals in the DIGSI Information routing matrix. You can change the order of the binary
signals and measured-value channels to be recorded in DIGSI under Signal order. You can find more detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online Help, version V07.50 and higher (Order number: C53000-D5040-
C001-D).
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see the Device Manual, chapters 9.3 Operational Measured Values and 9.4 Fundamental and
Symmetrical Components) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this can
mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording of
these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.

Numbering and Time Stamping


All fault recordings saved are automatically numbered in ascending order and assigned a real-time stamp for
the start time. The fault recording logs the fault with a relative time. The reference-time point is the start of
the recording. Every fault recording has a corresponding fault log with the same number. This ensures that the
fault recording can be uniquely assigned to the event log.

Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is always
available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten.
This means that the most recent recordings are always available. The sampling rate, type, and number of
measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of recordings possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific measured
values and up to 200 binary tracks can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of the maximum
storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.

Table 3-9 Maximum Length of All Stored Recordings

Connection Examples Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling


1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
Feeder: 1365 s 819 s 455 s 241 s
4I, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks
Feeder: 1125 s 566 s 284 s 142 s
4l, 4V, 20 binary tracks
Feeder: 890 s 500 s 266 s 137 s
4I, 4V, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks
Feeder 1.5 CB: 525 s 281 s 145 s 74 s
8I, 8V, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks

Input and Output Signals


The Fault recorder function provides several input signals that allow the precise starting, deleting of record-
ings. The output signals provide information about the function status.

116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

In the following table, you can find input signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Start recording SPC Start recording via the function key
Control: Reset memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers are reset.
Control: Delete memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers remain as is.
Control: >External start SPS Start recording with an external binary signal,
for example, by the trip command of an external
protection device. The set pre- and post-trigger
time are taken into account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start a recording of fixed duration (parameter
Manual record time ) by way of an
external binary signal, for example, manually via
the function key or by an external binary signal.

In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
General: Mode ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according
General: State ENS to chapter 2.3 Function Control
General: Standby ENS
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running

3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Fault recording

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:130) Fault recording = with pickup


With the Fault recording parameter, you define the time interval at which faults are recorded. The total
record duration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters Pre-trigger time,
Post-trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration.
Parameter Value Description
with pickup The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
pickups. The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken into
account.
Note: When the post-trigger time has expired, the indications of an auto-
matic reclosing function are not recorded. Evolving faults after expiry of the
post-trigger time can result in the opening of a new fault with its own
recording.
with pickup & AR cyc. The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
pickups including short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles).
It includes the resulting pickup signals of all function groups and the
runtimes of initiated automatic reclosing cycles for all active automatic
reclosing functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 117
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

Parameter Value Description


user-defined The fault recording time is defined user-specific.
Note: You must specify all signals for individual definition of the fault
recording time in the DIGSI 5 information-routing matrix. In the information
routing matrix in the Fault record column, the fault recording has for this
purpose a separate column Trigger. The record duration is calculated from
the logical OR operation of all initiated, configured signals.

Parameter: Storage

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:131) Storage = always


With the Storage parameter, you define the storage criterion for a fault recording that has already started.
Parameter Value Description
always Each fault recording that has been started is saved.
with trip If at least one protection function issues an operate indication during the
record time, any fault recording that has been started will be saved.

Parameter: Maximum record time

• Default setting (_:2761:111) Maximum record time = 5.00 s


With the Maximum record time parameter, you configure the maximum record duration for an individual
fault recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter
merely limits the duration of the fault recording. It does not affect the logging of faults in the fault log.

Parameter: Pre-trigger time

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.50 s


With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The set pre-trigger time is prepended to the actual recording criterion for the fault recording.

Parameter: Post-trigger time

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:113) Post-trigger time= 0.50 s


With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time that has been configured is added to the actual recording criterion for the
fault recording after the dropout.
The following table shows how the setting range changes for the Post-trigger time parameter
depending on the Sampling frequency.
Sampling Frequency Setting Range for the Post-trigger time Parameter
8 kHz 0.05 s to 4 s
4 kHz 0.05 s to 8 s
2 kHz 0.05 s to 16 s
1 kHz 0.05 s to 24 s

Parameter: Manual record time

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:116) Manual record time = 0.50 s


With the Manual record time parameter, you set the length of a recording if the fault recording is acti-
vated dynamically (edge-triggered) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start.
In this case, pre-trigger and post-trigger times do not take effect.

Parameter: Sampling frequency

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:140) Sampling frequency = 8 kHz

118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of fault records that you
want to download via DIGSI 5. Possible setting values are 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.

Parameter: Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec.

• Recommended setting value (_:2761:141) Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec. = 8 kHz


With the Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec. parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault record
that you want to download using the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Possible setting values are 8 kHz, 4
kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
You cannot set the Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec. parameter to be greater than the maximum setting
value of the Sampling frequency parameter.
If the size of the COMTRADE file exceeds the maximum permissible storage capacity of the device, the original
recording is truncated. The truncated data are discarded.

Parameter: Scaling COMTRADE

• Recommended setting value Scaling COMTRADE = Secondary values


With the Scaling COMTRADE parameter, you scale the fault record data for the COMTRADE format. Possible
setting values are Primary values or Secondary values .

3.5.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2731:1 General:Mode • on on
• test
Control
_:2761:130 Control:Fault recording • with pickup with pickup
• with pickup & AR cyc.
• user-defined
_:2761:131 Control:Storage • always always
• with trip
_:2761:111 Control:Maximum record 0.20 s to 20.00 s 5.00 s
time
_:2761:112 Control:Pre-trigger time 0.05 sto 4.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:113 Control:Post-trigger time 0.05 sto 0.50 s 0.50 s
_:2761:116 Control:Manual record 0.20 s to 20.00 s 0.50 s
time
_:2761:140 Control:Sampling • 8 kHz 2 kHz
frequency • 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:141 Control:Sampl. freq. • 8 kHz 1 kHz
IEC61850 rec. • 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:128 Control:Scaling • Primary values Secondary
COMTRADE • Secondary values values

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 119
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

3.5.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2731:53 General:Health ENS O
Binary IO
_:2761:300 Control:Start record SPC C
_:2761:305 Control:Reset memory SPC C
_:2761:306 Control:Clear memory SPC C
_:2761:502 Control:>External start SPS I
_:2761:503 Control:>Manual start SPS I
_:2761:310 Control:Fault number INS O
_:2761:311 Control:Recording started SPS O
_:2761:314 Control:Record made SPS O
_:2761:327 Control:Tmax reduced SPS O
_:2761:324 Control:Fault log is full INS O

120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

3.6 Protection Communication

3.6.1 Overview

Protection communication includes all functionalities required to exchange data via the protection interface
(PI). It manages one or a maximum of 2 protection interfaces. The Protection communication is generated
with the configuration of the channels as a protocol.
You can find detailed information in the section Protection interface in chapter 3.6.3.1 Overview of Func-
tions.

3.6.2 Protection-Communication Structure

The following Protection communication functions are visible:


• Topology recognition
• Remote data
The following figure shows the structure of Protection communication:

[dwstrufg-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-46 Protection-Data Communication Structure

Interface to the Line Function Group


Binary signals, measured values, and other data are automatically exchanged between the Protection-data
communication and the Line protection function group. Some protection functions exchange information
with other protection devices via the protection interface. This information is predefined and cannot be
changed.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 121
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

NOTE

i If the teleprotection scheme is to work via a protection interface, the receive block Rec. PI# must be
instantiated. Proceed as follows:
• Open the Global DIGSI 5 library and instantiate, for example, the 85-21Perm.overr. function. You can
find the function under FG Line → Teleprotection scheme → 85-21Perm.overr..

• Open Information routing via Project tree → Device name.

• Use drag and drop to add the receive block Rec. PI# from the Global DIGSI 5 library in Information
routing under Line → 85-21Perm.overr.. If a receive block Rec. bin.sig.# is already available
besides Rec. PI# delete the receive block Rec. bin.sig.# from the Information routing.
It's not necessary to route the send and receive signals separately.

Interface to Motor Function Group


Binary signals, measured values, and other data are automatically exchanged between the Protection-data
communication and the Motor protection function group.

Remote Data
The Remote data functionality is applied if you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
interfaces. The protection interface then attends to the transmitting and receiving of such signals. The
maximum amount of remote data is defined by the available bandwidth.

3.6.3 Protection Interface and Protection Topology

3.6.3.1 Overview of Functions


The Protection topology and protection interface function enables data exchange between the devices via
synchronous serial point-to-point connections from 64 kBit/s to 2 MBit/s. These connections can be established
directly via optical fibers or via other communication media, for example via dedicated lines or via communi-
cation networks.
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices which communicate via protection interfaces. It can be set up
either as a redundant ring or as a chain structure. Within a topology, the protection interfaces can have a
different bandwidth. Depending on the bandwidth, a certain amount of binary information and measured
values can be transmitted bi-directionally between the devices. The connection with the lowest bandwidth
defines this amount (of binary information and measured values).
The following information that is significant for the function of the protection interface is also transferred. You
cannot change this information:
• Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and testing the connection.
The results are displayed on the device or with DIGSI 5.

• Protection data, for example differential protection data or teleprotection scheme binary data, are trans-
ferred for distance protection and ground-fault protection.

• The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection, whereby a device of the protection topology
assumes the role of the timing master.
The connection is continuously monitored for data faults and outage, and the time delay of the data is meas-
ured.
The protection interfaces are typically used for differential protection and with the teleprotection scheme for
distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure protection interfaces in all
devices and then use them for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary information and
measured values can be transferred between the devices.

3.6.3.2 Structure of the Function


The protection interfaces of a device are located in the Protection communication function group. A device
has 1 or 2 specifically parameterizable protection interfaces.

122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

The protection topology is used for administration of that topology data relevant to the respective interfaces
and containing data from other devices in the protection topology.

[dwstruct-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-47 Structure of the Protection Interface in a Device

The protection communication runs physically via a serial optical communication module. This module can
have 1 or 2 channels. The protection communication can take place via various modules. This depends on the
type of interface and the application. DIGSI 5 is used to configure 1 or 2 channels of a serial optical module as
a protection interface. This enables communication with the values set at the protection interface via this
channel.

3.6.3.3 Function Description

Topology and Type of Protection Communication


The protection interfaces (PI) establish a direct point-to-point connection between devices via different
communication media. Data can be transferred within the switchgear or between switchgears.
Devices connected to one another with protection communication form a protection topology. Refer to
Figure 3-48.
The protection communication in a device can be either type 1 or type 2. In the case of devices with differen-
tial protection function (7SD and 7SL), a protection communication of type 1 is automatically created. Type 2
is created for other devices, and is used for other data transmission. A device can contain only the same types
of protection communication. Type 1 and type 2 protection communication do not work together in pairs via a
protection function.
Types Description
Type 1 With type 1, the differential protection function is the primary application.
This application requires the greatest portion of the bandwidth, so that with
Application using differential
type 1 the number of signals additionally available is lower. This becomes
protection
noticeable with a 64-kBit/s protection connection via a G703.1 or X21 inter-
face. If a multiple-end differential-protection application is realized, all
protection communications must be of type 1.
A maximum of 6 line ends is possible.
If the Differential protection und Teleprotection scheme functions are to
operate in parallel in the device, the bit rate must not be less than 512
kBit/s!
Type 2 Type 2 has a significantly higher amount of information that can be trans-
ferred as the differential-protection application is not used here. The trans-
Application without using
mission of protection data and other data, for example, measured values, is
differential protection
predominant here. Using type 2 protection communication, a maximum of
6 devices can be connected to one another and different device types (for
example, 6MD, 7VK, 7SA, and 7SJ) can exchange data.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 123
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[dwintert-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-48 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection Communications of Type 1 or Type 2 in a
Protection Topology

2-Device Topology: Simple or Redundant Transfer


In the case of a simple 2-device topology, one protection communication per device is required (see next
figure).
The most frequent application is the two-line-end differential protection (the protection communication is of
type 1) or the point-to-point exchange of data between 2 devices (the protection communication is of type 2),
as performed by protection transmission devices.

[dwinterf-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-49 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having Protection Communication

NOTE

i The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a protection topology (see parameter
Local device is device).

A maximum of 2 protection communications can be integrated in one device (see next figure). If 2 protection
communications of the same type are connected to one another, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding
the transmission route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest band-
width (for example, optical fiber). If this connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the 2nd
connection until the 1st connection is available again. As the connection with lower bandwidth defines the
maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is exchanged via both connections. One
application of this is differential protection routed via a redundant communication connection. Both protec-
tion communications in the device are then of type 1.

124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[dwintera-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-50 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Communications/Redundant Transmis-
sion Route

Multi-Device Topology: Ring or Chain Topology


When there are more than 2 devices, a communication chain or a communication ring can be established. An
arrangement with a maximum of 6 devices is possible.
To enable the devices in a topology to communicate with one another, the devices automatically detect the
type of topology and their position within this topology. All devices in the topology must contain protection
communications of the same type. In the case of devices with differential protection function 7SD and 7SL, a
protection communication of type 1 is automatically created. Multiple-end configurations are an order option.
In the case of other devices, a protection communication of type 2 is created, which can be present one or
2 times.
A distinction is made between the following types of topology:
• Chain topology
• Ring topology
The chain topology is shown in the following figure.
The protection communications must be of the same type to belong to a topology. All protection communica-
tions are of type 1 in a multiple-end differential-protection configuration.
The configuration shows that the indexing of the devices does not have to correspond to the order of the
communication chain.

[dwchaint-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-51 4 SIPROTEC Devices in a Chain Topology

The ring topology is shown in the following figure.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 125
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

The communication ring has the advantage over the communication chain that the entire communications
system and, for example, the differential protection function also work if one of the communication connec-
tions fails or if a device in the topology is taken out of operation.
You can find more information in chapter 3.6.3.5 Device-Combination Settings.
The devices detect failure or logging off, and switch over automatically to the remaining communication
routes.
The following figure shows, for example, a four-line-end differential-protection application if all protection
communications are of type 1. A typical application with protection communications of type 2 is the exchange
of indications and measured values between 4 devices (for example, between switchgears), whereby the
connection can occur via different communication routes. This is the application for a protection-data trans-
mission device.

[dwringto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-52 4 SIPROTEC Devices in a Ring Topology

NOTE

i If a connection fails in the ring topology, this configuration continues to function as a chain topology. In
addition, a device in the constellation can be logged off from the topology.

Protection-Interface Information Transfer


With the protection-interface information transfer, customer-specific indications and measured values can be
communicated via the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities when transferring protection-interface information:
• Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated
at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram.

• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.

• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values conform with the remaining band-
width. The remaining bandwidth is lower than with all other protection functions (type 2) when using a differ-
ential protection (type 1). Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth than single-point
indications.

126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, via communication networks or via 2-wire
copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers the highest transmis-
sion rate of 2 MBit/s and is immune to failures in the communication route while offering the shortest trans-
mission time. This also enables the transmission of a large amount of additional information on differential
protection routes and the remote control of devices at the remote end with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths available determine the settings of the protection inter-
face. External communication converters are used for the connection to communication networks via
G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores also takes place via a communica-
tion converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a direct fiber-optic connection to a
multiplexer with the corresponding interface.
Table 3-10 to Table 3-11 show examples of communication connections.
In the case of a direct connection, the transmission distance depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a transmission route is possible.
In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO with 2 channels, 2 protection interfaces can be oper-
ated on one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.

Table 3-10 Plug-In Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface

Plug-In Modules

Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO2

Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO4

Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO5


Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO3


Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO

Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO

Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO


Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO

Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers, 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers, 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1550 nm, duplex LC plug, 100 km ●
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1550 nm, duplex LC plug, 100 km ●
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers

2 USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side


3 USART-AJ-1LDFOonly pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
4 USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side
5 USART-AY-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 127
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Plug-In Modules

Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO2

Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO4

Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO5


Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO3


Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO

Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO

Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO


Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex plug LC, 40 km via
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1550/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex plug LC, 40 km via
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
2 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40 km via
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
2 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, ●
1550/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40 km via
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber

Table 3-11 Plug-In Modules USART-AD-1FO and USART-AE-2FO

Plug-In module

Plug-In Module USART-AD-1FO


USART-AE-2FO
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers ●
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers ●
Application
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) X X

NOTE

i The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P
in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion module.

2 USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side


3 USART-AJ-1LDFOonly pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
4 USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side
5 USART-AY-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side

128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[dwmultim-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-53 Connection over Short Distances, 1.5 km to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber

[dwmultim-070611-02.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-54 Connection over Maximum 4 km via Multimode Optical Fiber

[dwsingle-070611-03.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-55 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber

NOTE

i In order to prevent optical overload of the receiver, a 7XV5107-0AA00 attenuator must be used on one side
in the fiber-optic modules USART-AF, USART-AG, USART-AU, USART-AK, and USART-AV for distances of less
than 25 km/50 km.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 129
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[dwsingle-020513-04.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-56 Connection via Singlemode Optical Fiber

[dwmultim-070611-05.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-57 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.1 Interface

The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface (64
kBit/s) or X21 interface (64 kBit/s to 512 kBit/s). You can set the bit rate for the KU-XG-512 (for X21), KU-
XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connection
via.
You can find more detailed information in Table 3-12.

[dwmultim-070611-06.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-58 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.6 Interface

The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for
connecting an additional protection interface.
Make the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 with 512 kBit/s in accordance with Table 3-12 with the
parameter Connection via.

130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[dwmulti7-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-59 Connection via 2-Wire Copper Cables

The connection to a communication converter with an integrated 5-kV isolation voltage is established with
128 kBit/s (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-12). A 20 kV isolation of the 2-wire connection is
possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.

[dwrepeat-070611-10.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-60 Direct Fiber-Optic Connection via an External Repeater

The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kBit/s (repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3-12).

[dwmutip8-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-61 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64 kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)

NOTE

i The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different communication routes via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 131
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Supervision of the Communication


The communication is continuously monitored by the devices.
If a number of defective data telegrams, or no data telegrams at all, are received, this is regarded as a failure
in the communication as soon as a failure time of 100 ms (default setting can be changed) is exceeded. A list
of the measured values is shown in a window in DIGSI 5 (defective telegrams per minute/hour; transmitted
and received telegrams per minute/hour, percentage fault rate per minute/hour). A corresponding failure indi-
cation is always available. If no alternative communication route exists (as in the ring topology), the protec-
tion function operating with the protection interface is not operating and the remote signals are not updated
on the receiver side.
If the communication is interrupted for longer than an adjustable time Data-connection failure, this is
regarded as a communication failure. A corresponding failure indication is always available.

Time Synchronization via the Protection Interface


All devices of a topology can be time-synchronized with one another. Synchronization is carried out with milli-
second accuracy. The synchronization works independently of the protection function and is exclusively for
simultaneous time keeping in the devices of a protection topology.
The device you set in the parameter Address of device 1 is the device with index 1. This device functions
as the timing master in a protection topology. If the timing master is logged off and switched off, the device
with the next highest device index takes on the function of the timing master. The timing master synchronizes
the clocks of the other devices of this topology via the protection interfaces. The time of the timing master is
typically synchronized via a substation automation protocol (for example, Ethernet or SNTP) or via IRIG-B. For
this, these time sources must be set as the 1st time source and optionally as the 2nd time source in the timing
master. If available, the system switches over to the 2nd source upon outage of the 1st source in the timing
master. This time is communicated with millisecond accuracy to the other devices of the topology.
Set the protection interface as the 1st time source in the other devices of the topology. In this way, all events
in the devices of the protection topology are recorded with the same time and are time-synchronized even
across different switchgears. This simplifies fault analysis and the fault records are recorded with the same
time in all devices.

[dwtimesy-130212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-62 Time Synchronization in a Protection Topology

Figure 3-62 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with the devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection
interface. Device 1 is synchronized externally from 2 sources (IRIG-B and SNTP via Ethernet).

132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Millisecond Accuracy
The measured values of the line differential protection for the various line ends are synchronized with each
other with microsecond accuracy via the mechanisms of the protection interface. The protection interface
displays this state with the RAISING indication Protection interface synchronized.
If communications problems occur, it is possible that the measured values may not be properly synchronized.
In this case, the protection interface generates the CLEARED indication Protection interface
synchronized. The line differential protection is blocked. This state can be corrected only by manual inter-
vention.

NOTE

i You can reset the synchronization of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset synchron.

Synchronization via GPS Second Pulse


Millisecond-accurate synchronization of the devices (1*10E-06 s), connected via protection interfaces, can
take place via a high-precision GPS second pulse at the time-synchronous port G for special differential protec-
tion applications or synchrophasor measuring devices. As a result, the transmission time of the communica-
tion route can be measured and displayed separately in the directions forward and reverse. This ensures that
the maximum responsivity can be obtained during differential protection, even if transmission times are
unbalanced in the communication networks. Different transmission times are insignificant for the transmis-
sion of protection data with a protection communication of type 2.

Log Off the Device


A device can be logged off for protection-function tests, system inspections, or disconnection of a feeder for
operational reasons. The device that is logged off no longer participates in the distributed functionality and is
therefore no longer a component of the topology. The protection functions are still in operation for the other
end or ends.
The following conditions are necessary for a successful logoff of the device from the point of view of protec-
tion communication:
• The protection topology is not in a transient state and is stable in operation without switchovers.
• The local device is one of the 2 token masters if there is a chain topology. The token masters are the
devices at the ends of the chain.

• The circuit breaker must be open and current must not be flowing.

NOTE

i If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the device cannot be logged off.

You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.9.4 Device Logoff.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 133
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

3.6.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5


If the device is provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface. A text box entitled Protec-
tion interface will then appear.

[scconfcp-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-63 Selection of the Communication Protocol

• Then select the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (see next figure).
Depending on the device, the selection of constellations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices.
The number of devices is an order option with regard to differential protection.

[scconfws-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-64 Selecting the Constellation

NOTE

i You have the option of changing the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication
devices) depending on the product code any way you like via the Select constellation text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Select constellation text box, all activated constellation
settings are lost.

134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.

• Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface. A text box entitled Protec-
tion interface will then appear (see Figure 3-63).

• Then use the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (for example 2 devices
protection com.) (see Figure 3-64).

3.6.3.5 Device-Combination Settings


Make the device-combination settings and the settings for protection communication (see next figure).

[scconfig-181013-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-65 Protection Interface Initialization and Configuration

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 135
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Changes in 1 channel are always visible on the other channel as well. All further parameters can be set sepa-
rately for individual channels.

Setting Device-Combination Settings

• Default setting (_:5131:102) Address of device 1 = 101

• Default setting (_:5131:103) Address of device 2 = 102

• Default setting (_:5131:104) Address of device 3 = 103

• Default setting (_:5131:105) Address of device 4 = 104

• Default setting (_:5131:106) Address of device 5 = 105

• Default setting (_:5131:107) Address of device 6 = 106


The parameters Address of device 1 to Address of device 6 can be used to give an address to each
device. Set a unique and unambiguous address for each device.
• Default setting (_:5131:101) Local device is device = 1
With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the topology.
A maximum of 6 devices can be present in 1 topology.

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a topology with 2 devices.
For example, in DIGSI 5, select the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value 101
for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device.

The addresses must be configured identically for all devices involved in the constellation. A functional protec-
tion communication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of a constellation for a device
with a unique address.
• Default setting (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s
The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter is used to set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
group. Set the lowest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 fiber-optic connections (2
MBit/s) and a 64 kBit/s connection with the lowest value (64 kBit/s). This value determines the maximum
signals and measured values within a constellation.
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s

• 2048 kBit/s

NOTE

i If you use optical fibers for the connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.

• Default setting (_:5131:125) Number of devices = 6


With the Number of devices parameter, you set the number of devices actually connected in the device
combination in one topology. This parameter is set by default to the maximum number of devices permitted
for the appropriate constellation.
The Number of devices parameter depends on the configuration of the protection interface. When config-
uring the protection interface, select the maximum number of devices present in the final phase of the system
in the Select constellation text box. If the current expansion phase of the system contains fewer devices at
this time, set the number of devices actually in the device combination using the Number of devices
parameter. In this procedure, all settings, for example, routing, you made for your constellation are retained.

136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

If you wish to operate, for example, a 3-device protection communication as a 2-device protection communi-
cation, you must set the Number of devices parameter = 2.
If you expand the system later, change the Number of devices parameter to the number of devices
actually present.
You can find more detailed information regarding the configuration of the protection interface in chapter
3.6.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 .

NOTE

i Set the same number of devices used in all devices that are part of the constellation.

3.6.3.6 Selecting the Connection

• Default setting (_:105) Connection via = fiber optic


The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different
discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table).

Table 3-12 Means of Communication

Means of Communication See Setting Value Bit Rate


Fiber-optic direct connection Figure 3-5 fiber optic 2 MBit/s
3 to
Figure 3-5
6
CC-XG-512 communication converter Figure 3-5 CCXG 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
7
CC-XG-128 communication converter Figure 3-5 CCXG 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
7
CC-XG-64 communication converter Figure 3-5 CCXG 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
7
Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3-6 repeater 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
0
CC-CC-128 Communication converter Figure 3-5 CCPW 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
9
CC-2M-512 Communication converter Figure 3-5 CC2M 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
8
Multiplexer with C37.94 interface Figure 3-6 C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
1 C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
Other (freely adjustable bit rates for a direct 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
connection for special applications) 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s 2048 kBit/s

NOTE

i Keep in mind that the Teleprotection schemes require a minimum bandwidth for communication via a
protection interface.
If the Line differential protection function is available in the device, the bit rate must not be less than 512
kBit/s!
The minimum bit rate of 512 kBit/s is important for the Teleprotection with distance protection and Tele-
protection with ground-fault protection functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 137
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

3.6.3.7 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface

Parameter: Max. Error Rate/h

• Default setting (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour = 1.0 %


The Max. error rate per hour parameter allows you to receive an error message on the number of
faults per hour. An indication is then generated.

Parameter: Max. Error Rate/min

• Default setting (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min = 1.0 %


The Max. error rate per min parameter allows you to receive an error message on the number of faults
per minute. An indication is then generated.

Parameter: Disturbance Alarm After

• Default setting (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after = 100 ms


The Disturbance alarm after parameter determines the time delay after which defective or missing
telegrams are signaled as faulty.

Parameter: Transm. Fail. Alarm After

• Default setting (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after = 6.0 s


The Transm. fail. alarm after parameter is used to set the time after which a failure of the communi-
cation is signaled.

NOTE

i If the setting values of the parameters Disturbance alarm after and Transm. fail. alarm
after are exceeded, then an indication is generated.

Parameter: Delay time threshold

• Default setting (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold = 30.0 ms


For the Delay time threshold, the default setting is selected such that it is not exceeded by normal
communication networks. If this time delay is exceeded during operation (for example, upon switchover to
another transmission route), the indication Time delay exceeded is issued.

Parameter: Difference Tx and Rx time

• Default setting (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time = 0.1 ms


The Difference Tx and Rx time parameter can be used to set a maximum time-delay difference
between the send and receive paths.
Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber-optic connection. A higher value is necessary for transmission via commu-
nication networks. Reference value: 0.1 ms (recommended setting value).

NOTE

i Only if the Line differential protection function is instantiated, the Difference Tx and Rx time
parameter is displayed.

NOTE

i If the user employs a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a communication medium, Siemens recom-
mends a setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.

138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Parameter: PPS Synchronization

• Default setting (_:5161:113) PPS synchronization=PPS sync. off


If the SIPROTEC device operates with PPS synchronization (PPS: pulse per second), use the PPS synchroni-
zation parameter to define how the protection is activated after restoration of the communication connec-
tion (basic state or after transmission fault).
Refer to Figure 3-66.

NOTE

i The PPS measurement is used to consider the time delay in the send and receive directions. If PPS fails due
to a reception fault or due to a short-term unfavorable satellite position, synchronization via conventional
communication media remains active.

The PPS synchronization parameter offers 3 different setting options:


Parameter Value Description
telegr. and PPS With this setting, the differential protection is only enabled upon renewed
establishment of the connection, if the communication section is synchron-
ized via PPS or if symmetrical time delays are signaled by an external opera-
tion (binary input).
This results in synchronization with the telegram measurement supported
by the PPS measurement.
telegr. or PPS In this setting, the differential protection is enabled immediately upon
renewed establishment of connection (data telegrams are received). The
conventional method is used up to synchronization.
This results in synchronization with the telegram measurement supported
by the PPS measurement.
PPS sync. off This setting means that no synchronization is performed via PPS at the
protection interface. This is typically the case if no time-delay differences
are expected.
The synchronization only takes place with the telegram measurement.

NOTE

i The synchronization mode can be set separately for both protection interfaces.

If no further PPS pulse is received within 2.1 s, the time-out supervision responds. If no new 2nd pulse occurs
after the expiry of the supervision time, the indication PPS pulse loss is issued.

[loppssyn-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-66 Setting the PPS Synchronization

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 139
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

The binary input >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal an externally detected failure in the PPS signal (for
example, error message from the receiver). Setting this binary input also leads to the indication PPS pulse
loss.
If you are using a second pulse from a GPS receiver, you must ensure that a loss of reception or reception
disturbances do not generate a second pulse. The GPS receivers recommended by Siemens are set by default
so that a loss of reception or reception disturbances do not generate a second pulse. In the event of problems,
check the setting value for the second pulse.
Siemens recommends the Meinberg 164 GPS receiver. Check the default setting for the second pulse using
the GPSMON32 program. The program is available in the SIPROTEC download area. You can find the setting
value under Outputs →Enable Flags. The second pulse must be set to the value if Sync.

[scGPS_1, 2, --_--]

Figure 3-67 Checking the Setting Value for the 2nd Pulse Using the GPSMON32 Program, Step 1

[scGPS_2, 2, --_--]

Figure 3-68 Checking the Setting Value for the 2nd Pulse Using the GPSMON32 Program, Step 2

3.6.3.8 Routing Information in DIGSI 5


Protection communications of the same type form a topology.
For more information on this, see chapter 3.6.3.3 Function Description.
A data bar is exchanged between the devices of a topology connected via protection communication. This can
be written into or read from by the devices. This can be used for exchanging various signals between the
devices. In this case, each signal demands a certain number of data fields.

140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[dwdatenl-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-69 Data Bar Exchanged Between Devices

The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which also have different transmission rates and data volumes.
The following basic principle applies for all messages: Only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality (for
example, Valid) is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well (for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages), the quality must be transmitted separately (for example,
by using CFC). If a signal that has a test flag is transmitted (because its function is in test mode, for example),
all signals are provided with a test flag on the receiving side. If the connection is broken, all received signals
are flagged with the quality Invalid. If desired, the value can also be set to a secure state after a selectable
dropout time, or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be configured separately for
each received signal (see Table 3-16).

NOTE

i For ACT type signals, only the phase information is transmitted.

Indications that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used
for the transmission of rapid signals, for example, release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly determin-
istic, rapid transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kbit/s, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 information is transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured
and metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for trans-
mission. Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a prop-
erty of the measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for
example, also for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Indications which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication
of the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement of each signal
type, refer to Table 3-15.
Table 3-13 and Table 3-14 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.

NOTE

i The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter, which has to be set in each device for the protection
interfaces of a topology, defines the number of data areas as well as the topology type.

If, for example, in a three-end constellation with a type 2 chain topology two devices are connected via direct
optical fibers and 2 devices via the 64-kbit/s weakest line, the 64-kbit/s section is the limiting factor for the
entire constellation.

Table 3-13 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kbit/s

Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3


Type 1 8 bits 24 bits 128 bits
Type 2 32 bits 64 bits 256 bits

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 141
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Table 3-14 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kbit/s

Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3


Type 1 48 bits 128 bits 384 bits
Type 2 96 bits 200 bits 1024 bits

Table 3-15 Requirement in Bits

Signal Type Size in Bits


SP (single-point indication) 1 bit
DP (double-point indication) 2 bits
IN (metered values) 32 bits
MW (measured values)6 32 bits
ACT 4 bits

Table 3-16 Possible Dropout Values

Signal Type Dropout Values


SP (single-point indication) Outgoing, Incoming, Hold
DP (double-point indication) On, Off, Intermediate Position, Disturbed Position,
Hold
IN (metered values) 0, Hold
MW (measured values) 0, Hold
ACT Hold

NOTE

i If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.

EXAMPLE
2 devices are connected with differential protection via a 64-kbits channel. This is a type 1 topology. 8 bits are
freely available for priority 1. Now, for example, 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed:
4 x 1 bit + 2 x 2 bits = 8 bits

NOTE

i Measured values are transmitted as primary values.

EXAMPLE

For the rated current display in the receiving device


When Irated = 1000 A in the transmitting device and ILoad = 200 A, the number 200 is displayed in the receiving
device.

Remote Data Transmission: Routing of the Indications and Measured Values to the Protection Interface
The transmission is organized in the form of a data bar which is continuously exchanged between the devices.
For this, see Figure 3-69.
A device indication or measured value is allocated to a definite data area of the bar.

6 The complex phasors of a measuring point are pre-routed

142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Figure 3-70 to Figure 3-73 show the routing for a communication topology of protection interface type 1.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single-point indications (SPS) and are routed to position 1 and position 2
of the transmission with the highest priority (priority 1). For 64 kbit/s, for example, only 8 of these data areas
are available for type 1; they are exchanged between the transmission routes with each telegram. Signals 3
and 4 are double-point indications (DPS), for example, a switch position that is transmitted by a device 1. A
double-point indication occupies 2 positions on the data bar. In addition, a measured and metered value are
communicated via priority 3.
As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits, value 2 starts at position 33. DIGSI 5 indicates the next available
position.

[scransps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-70 Routing of Single-Point Indications to the Protection Interface in Device 1

[scrangmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-71 Routing of Measured Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 143
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[scrangzw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-72 Routing of Metered Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1

This device also receives information (in the matrix under Receive). This must have been routed as a target for
other devices (see next figure). The binary outputs 1 and 2 in device 1 receive their information via the protec-
tion interface. This is priority 1 information, which has been routed in another device to position 3 and 4 of
the data bar. The secure state is defined in the Fallback value column. If the data connection fails, the single-
point indication is reset to coming or going or its value is retained (hold). For data of the various priorities,
you can also set a dropout time after which the reset (see Figure 3-72) to the fallback value occurs, in order to
retain the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions. These 3 dropout times apply for all
data of one transmission priority and are set as parameters.

[scspsemp-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-73 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 1

The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 to
positions 3 and 4 there. In device 1, positions 1 and 2 are already occupied (see Figure 3-70). If you also route
the signals to positions 1 and 2, the signals of the devices are then connected to the corresponding position
with a logical OR operation. If measured and metered values are routed in the same data areas, this results in
implausible values for the receivers that read the data. As a user, you are therefore responsible for the correct
routing.

144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[scbaspsr-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-74 Routing of Single-Point Indications to be Sent to the Protection Interface in Device 2

The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from the
1st device. This takes place via the data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the state of
the indications. Other devices can also read this information and link it to their internal signals. Here, too, the
secure state, which is assumed when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This state depends
on the information. In the case of single-point indications, the state is 0 or 1. In the case of double-point indi-
cations, the bit combinations 00, 01, 10, or 11 are possible, in order to directly signal a disturbed position
upon failure of the data connection, for example.
Hold is used to retain the state.

[scbausps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-75 Routing of Received Single-Point Indications to the Protection Interface in Device 2

[scbausmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-76 Routing of Received Measured Values to the Protection Interface in Device 2

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 145
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[scbauszw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-77 Routing of Metered Values to the Protection Interface in Device 2

3.6.3.9 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection Interface


The following diagnostic data is provided via the protection interfaces by the devices in the constellation:
• Address of the device in the constellation
• Circuit-breaker switch position (open/closed/undefined) (only for protection interfaces of type 1)

• Availability of protection-interface communication within the last minute, as percentage


Availability of protection-interface communication within the last hour, as percentage

• Time delay in the send and receive direction of the telegrams between local and neighboring device
You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure (see Figure 3-78):

[sc_diagnose_wskanäle_geräteadresse, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-78 Protection-Interface Channel Diagnostic Data – Device Address

146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

NOTE

i You can use the following procedure to reset the measured values for the protection interface directly in
the device:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.

Output Signals of the Protection Interface


Each individual protection interface provides the following indications for commissioning and diagnosing
communication:
Indication Description
(_:5161:301) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 1 and 2 1 and 2 (1: Physical Layer, 2: Data Link Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
• Initialized:
The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
• Protection interface connected:
The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of a device.
• Protection interface disturbance:
The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after.
• Protection interface failure:
The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after .
• not present:
The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 147
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Indication Description
(_:5161:302) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 3 and 4 3 and 4 (3: Network Layer, 4: Transport Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
• no error:
The protection interface is operating correctly.
• Software version incompatible:
The firmware versions of the connected devices are incompatible. Update
the firmware.
• System mirroring:
The protection interface is receiving its own data. Check the wiring.
• Dev. add. incorrect:
The device address of the partner device is incorrect. Check the settings for
parameters Address of device 1 to address of device n
(_:5131:102 and following).
• Constell. incorrect:
The constellation settings of the devices are different. Check that the setting
for the parameter Select constellation is identical in all devices.
• Const. param. incorrect:
Check that the same setting has been made for parameter (_:5131:122)
Lowest appearing bit rate in all devices.
• Diff. Param. Error:
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are incom-
patible. Check whether both devices are set to operate with or without line
differential protection.
The rated values of the line (parameters (_:9001:101) Rated current
and (_:9001:102) Rated voltage) must be adjusted at both ends of
the line such that the internally calculated (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power at both ends is equal.
If a transformer is installed in the line, (_:9001:102) Rated voltage
and (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power must be adjusted at both ends such
that the internally calculated value of the parameter (_:9001:101)
Rated current at both ends is equal.
You can find further information in this regard in the description of the func-
tion 6.2 Line Differential Protection.

In order to clarify faults, each individual protection interface provides the following binary signals:
Binary Output Signal Description
(_:5161:303) Signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized time (param-
Connection broken eter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) faulty or missing tele-
grams were continuously received. If the 'Connection interrupted' indication
occurs, the affected protection interface link will be terminated. This can cause
the blocking of an active differential protection or a ring topology can change to
a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error Signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum error rate per
rate / min exc. minute (Parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min) has been
exceeded.
(_:5161:317) Error Signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum error rate
rate / hour exc. per hour (Parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour) has
been exceeded.
(_:5161:318) Time Signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value for the set
delay exceeded signal-transit time (Parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold) has
been exceeded.

148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Binary Output Signal Description


(_:5161:319) Time Signal Time delay different indicates that the threshold value for asym-
delay different metrical transit times has been exceeded. The setting value results from the
setting value of the parameter (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx
time.
(_:5161:320) Time Signal Time delay jump indicates that the data transit times changed
delay jump abruptly. This is caused by switching the communication path in the communica-
tion network.
(_:5161:321) PI Signal PI synchronized indicates that the protection-interface connection is
synchronized synchronized with the opposite end.
(_:5161:340) Tele- Signal Telegram lost indicates that an expected telegram has failed to arrive
gram lost or a faulty telegram has been received.
If you would like to allocate the communications failures or faults to other events,
move the signal Telegram lost temporarily into the operational log. Such
events can be switching operations in the primary system or operations on the
components of the communication network.
Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log can overflow. Siemens
recommends routing the signal only for clarification of faults.

Measured Values of the Protection Interface


The protection interface provides the following measured value to diagnose the protection interface commu-
nication:
Measured Value Description
(_:5161:308) Tx Telegrams sent during the last hour
tel/h
(_:5161:309) Rx Telegrams received during the last hour
tel/h
(_:5161:310) Tx Telegrams sent during the last minute
tel/min
(_:5161:311) Rx Telegrams received during the last minute
tel/min
(_:5161:312) Tx Transmission failure rate during the last hour
err/h
(_:5161:313) Rx Receive error rate during the last hour
err/h
(_:5161:314) Tx Transmission failure rate during the last minute
err/min
(_:5161:315) Rx Receive error rate during the last minute
err/min
(_:5161:325) Mean signal-transit time (average value of the transit time in transmission and
Aver.Δt reception direction divided by 2, without GPS synchronization)
(_:5161:326) Rec. Signal-transit time in reception direction (with GPS synchronization)
Δt
(_:5161:327) Sen. Signal-transit time in transmission direction (with GPS synchronization)
Δt
(_:5161:334) Number of telegram failures within the last minute
Miss.tel/min
(_:5161:335) Number of telegram failures within the last hour
Miss.tel/h
(_:5161:336) Number of telegram failures within the last day
Miss.tel/d

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 149
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Measured Value Description


(_:5161:337) Number of telegram failures within the last week
Miss.tel/w
(_:5161:338) M. Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day
loss/d
(_:5161:339) M. Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week
loss/w

NOTE

i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.

3.6.3.10 Diagnostic Data for the Protection Interface

Diagnostic Data of the Channel in DIGSI 5


Different diagnostic data can be read with DIGSI 5.
For this, connect with the device via DIGSI 5 and query the device information. Diagnostic data for a module
whose channel is configured with the protection interface can be received by selecting the module slots (for
example, F) and the corresponding channel (1 or 2). The following figures show the extensive diagnostic data
for the protection interface. It is particularly helpful if data failures occur or other irregularities in a communi-
cation connection (for example, transmission time fluctuations).

NOTE

i The diagnostic data can also be read via the device control on the display of the device. The overview of
DIGSI 5 does not offer this option, however.

The following table describes the displays.

[scdiapin-140912-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-79 Diagnostic Data of a Channel Configured with the Protection Interface

Table 3-17 Description of the Diagnostic Data under Protection Interface

Channel Type Name Values Description - Diagnostic


Information for Log PI
Protection interfaces - log Status Initial, Running, Error Runtime status of the log

150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Channel Type Name Values Description - Diagnostic


Information for Log PI
Protection interfaces - log Build Date/time Date and time of the log
version

Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log in DIGSI 5


The following figures and tables describe the displays of the protection-interface log.

[scdiamed-140912-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-80 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - Media Status

Table 3-18 Description of Diagnostic Data under Media Status

Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - Media Status


Type Interface (in Direction of
Outside Interface)
Media Status Baudrate 64 kbit/s; 128 kbit/s; HDLC baud rate:
512 kbit/s; 2048 kbit/s; FO: 64 kbit/s to 2048 kbit/s
30 Mbit/s; <unknown> for 820-Nm USART modules
LDFO: 30 Mbit/s for 1300-
Nm/1500-Nm long-distance
modules
Error case: <unknown>
Media Status LinkState N/A, UP, DOWN FO: N/A (always display N/A)
Media Status TransceiverDetection N/A, NO Transceiver FO: N/A (always N/A)
detected, Transceiver (NO Transceiver detected,
detected Transceiver detected),
Error case: N/A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 151
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

[scdiacom-140912-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-81 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)

Table 3-19 Description of Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)

Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - HDLC Link


Type Layer Diagnostic Informa-
tion (in Direction of
Outside Interface)
HDLC RXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
HDLC RXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
HDLC RXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
HDLC RXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
HDLC TXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
HDLC TXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK

152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - HDLC Link


Type Layer Diagnostic Informa-
tion (in Direction of
Outside Interface)
HDLC TXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
HDLC TXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
HDLC Bridge Details Sub-nodes Sub-nodes Siemens-internal special
diagnostic for fault search

[scdiahdl-140912-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-82 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface
Between Module and Mainboard)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 153
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Table 3-20 Description of Diagnostic Data of the COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface Between
Module and Mainboard)

Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - COM Interface


Type Layer Diagnostic Informa-
tion
(Internal COM Link Inter-
face in Mainboard Direc-
tion)
COM interface RXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
COM interface RXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
COM interface RXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
COM interface RXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
COM interface TXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
COM interface TXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
COM interface TXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
COM interface TXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
COM interface Bridge Details Sub-nodes Sub-nodes Siemens-internal special
diagnostic for fault search

Table 3-21 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface

Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - Protection


Type Interface Setting Values
Settings Connection via Integer number - display of Protection interface is
the internal coding of the Connection via
settings variant
Settings PDI bandwidth Bit-rate display Bit rate (bit/s) for protection
telegrams depending on the
parameter Connection
via
Settings PDI Telegram.Overhead Display of bits Overhead for every protec-
tion telegram in bit.

3.6.3.11 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Device combin.
_:5131:102 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 101
of device 1
_:5131:103 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 102
of device 2
_:5131:104 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 103
of device 3
_:5131:105 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 104
of device 4

154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:5131:106 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 105
of device 5
_:5131:107 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 106
of device 6
_:5131:101 Device combin.:Local 1 to 6 1
device is device
_:5131:122 Device combin.:Lowest • 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
appearing bit rate • 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
_:5131:125 Device combin.:Number 2 to 6 6
of devices
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:1 Prot. interf.1:Mode • off on
• on
_:5161:105 Prot. interf.1:Max. error 0.000 % to 100.000 % 1.000 %
rate per hour
_:5161:106 Prot. interf.1:Max. error 0.000 % to 100.000 % 1.000 %
rate per min
_:5161:107 Prot. interf.1:Distur- 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.10 s
bance alarm after
_:5161:108 Prot. interf.1:Transm. 0.0 s to 6.0 s 6.0 s
fail. alarm after
_:5161:109 Prot. interf.1:Delay time 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms 30.0 ms
threshold
_:5161:110 Prot. interf.1:Difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms 0.100 ms
Tx and Rx time
_:5161:113 Prot. interf.1:PPS • telegr. and PPS PPS sync. off
synchronization • telegr. or PPS
• PPS sync. off

3.6.3.12 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Channel 1
_:307 Prot.interface:Health ENS O
_:304 Prot.interface:Channel Live SPS O
Device combin.
_:5131:52 Device combin.:Behavior ENS O
_:5131:53 Device combin.:Health ENS O
_:5131:301 Device combin.:Status of topo. recog. ENS O
_:5131:302 Device combin.:Topology is ENS O
_:5131:303 Device combin.:Devices form ENS O
_:5131:304 Device combin.:Number of detect. dev. INS O
_:5131:305 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 1 SPS O
_:5131:306 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 2 SPS O
_:5131:307 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 3 SPS O
_:5131:309 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 4 SPS O
_:5131:310 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 5 SPS O
_:5131:311 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 6 SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 155
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:5131:312 Device combin.:Device 1 available SPS O
_:5131:313 Device combin.:Device 2 available SPS O
_:5131:314 Device combin.:Device 3 available SPS O
_:5131:315 Device combin.:Device 4 available SPS O
_:5131:316 Device combin.:Device 5 available SPS O
_:5131:317 Device combin.:Device 6 available SPS O
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset SPS I
_:5161:341 Prot. interf.1:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:5161:342 Prot. interf.1:Reset measurements SPC C
_:5161:52 Prot. interf.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5161:53 Prot. interf.1:Health ENS O
_:5161:301 Prot. interf.1:Status of lay. 1 and 2 ENS O
_:5161:302 Prot. interf.1:Status of lay. 3 and 4 ENS O
_:5161:303 Prot. interf.1:Connection broken SPS O
_:5161:316 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:5161:317 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:5161:318 Prot. interf.1:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:5161:319 Prot. interf.1:Time delay different SPS O
_:5161:320 Prot. interf.1:Time delay jump SPS O
_:5161:321 Prot. interf.1:PI synchronized SPS O
_:5161:340 Prot. interf.1:Telegram lost SPS O
_:5161:308 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/h MV O
_:5161:309 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/h MV O
_:5161:310 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/min MV O
_:5161:311 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/min MV O
_:5161:312 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/h MV O
_:5161:313 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/h MV O
_:5161:314 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/min MV O
_:5161:315 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/min MV O
_:5161:334 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:5161:335 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:5161:336 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:5161:337 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:5161:338 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/d MV O
_:5161:339 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/w MV O
_:5161:331 Prot. interf.1:Recept. MV O
_:5161:323 Prot. interf.1:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:5161:324 Prot. interf.1:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:5161:325 Prot. interf.1:Aver.Δt MV O
_:5161:326 Prot. interf.1:Rec. Δt MV O
_:5161:327 Prot. interf.1:Sen. Δt MV O
Ext. Synchron.
_:9181:500 Ext. Synchron.:>Block stage SPS I
_:9181:501 Ext. Synchron.:>PPS pulse loss SPS I

156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:9181:301 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse loss SPS O
_:9181:302 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse SPS O
Meas.val.dev.1
_:1351:6811:300 Meas.val.dev.1:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6811:301 Meas.val.dev.1:Line ENS O
_:1351:6811:302 Meas.val.dev.1:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6811:303 Meas.val.dev.1:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.2
_:1351:6841:300 Meas.val.dev.2:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6841:301 Meas.val.dev.2:Line ENS O
_:1351:6841:302 Meas.val.dev.2:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6841:303 Meas.val.dev.2:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.3
_:1351:6871:300 Meas.val.dev.3:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6871:301 Meas.val.dev.3:Line ENS O
_:1351:6871:302 Meas.val.dev.3:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6871:303 Meas.val.dev.3:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.4
_:1351:6901:300 Meas.val.dev.4:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6901:301 Meas.val.dev.4:Line ENS O
_:1351:6901:302 Meas.val.dev.4:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6901:303 Meas.val.dev.4:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.5
_:1351:6931:300 Meas val.dev.5:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6931:301 Meas val.dev.5:Line ENS O
_:1351:6931:302 Meas val.dev.5:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6931:303 Meas val.dev.5:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.6
_:1351:6961:300 Meas.val.dev.6:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6961:301 Meas.val.dev.6:Line ENS O
_:1351:6961:302 Meas.val.dev.6:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6961:303 Meas.val.dev.6:Iph WYE O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 157
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

3.7.1 Overview of Functions

Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.

3.7.2 Structure of the Function

The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time
Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings
Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.

3.7.3 Function Description

Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.

Configurable Synchronization Options:

• None (default setting)


The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.

• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.

• Connection to a radio clock


The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG-B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.

• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.

• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Here, the timing master takes over the time management.

158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

Configurable Time Sources:

• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.

• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is indi-
cated.

• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.

NOTE

i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.

Configurable Date Format


Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009

• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24

Taking Local Time Zones into Account


The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parame-
ters. This allows the display of the local time.

NOTE

i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.

• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG-B.

Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management


Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
start-up and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 159
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the indi-
cation can point to a defect in the clock module or to
an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second has
Leap second occurred during time synchronization using an
external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG-B
005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.

NOTE

i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).

For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information

160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

[sctimedg-220415, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-83 Time Information in DIGSI

For every time source, you see the following:


• Last received time (with date)
• Receipt time of the last received time telegram

• Configured type of timer

• Indication of timer outage or failure

• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.

NOTE

i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).

3.7.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Date Format

• Default setting Date format = YYYY-MM-DD


With the Date format parameter, you define the local customary format of the date display.
Parameter Value Description
YYYY-MM-DD Day.Month.Year: Typical European display
Example: 24.12.2010
YYYY-MM-DD Month/Day/Year: Typical US representation
Example: 12/24/2010
YYYY-MM-DD Year-Month-Day: Typical Chinese display
Example: 2010-12-24

Parameter: Time zone time source 1,Time zone time source 2

• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2 parameters, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 161
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

Parameter Value Description


local Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone offsets to
GMT.
UTC Time format according to UTC (universal time)

Parameter: Time source 1,Time source 2

• Default setting Time source 1 = none, Time source 2 = none


With the Time source 1 and Time source 2 parameters, you can configure an external timer. The
prerequisite is to have the corresponding hardware configuration of the communication interfaces of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. This is listed as a prefix when making a selection in DIGSI 5.
Parameter Value Description
none The time source is not configured.
IRIG-B Time synchronization by an external GPS receiver:
SIPROTEC 5 devices support several protocol variants of the IRIG-B standards:
• IRIG-B 002(003)
The control function bits of the signal are not occupied. The missing year is
formed from the current device time. In this case, it is possible to set the
year via the online access in DIGSI 5.
• IRIG-B 006(007)
The bits for the calendar year are not equal to 00. The calendar year is set
automatically by the time protocol.
• IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE C37.118-2005
If, in the time signal, other control function bits are occupied in addition to
the calendar year, then the device takes the additional information into
consideration for leap seconds, daylight saving time, time offset (zone,
daylight saving time) and time accuracy.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2: The
value of this setting is not evaluated by the device, since this protocol
either transmits or in the case of local time, specifies the appropriate offset
to UTC in each set time telegram.
DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF 77 receiver
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
Please note: There are also clocks that generate a DCF 77 signal representing
UTC. In this case, UTC must be set.
PI The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured
for your SIPROTEC 5 device. Here, the timing master takes over the time
management. Signal-transit times of the protection interface communication
are calculated automatically.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
A slave that receives a time or a SIPROTEC 5 master, receives its system time
kept in UTC.
SNTP The time synchronization is done via the Ethernet service SNTP (SNTP server or
via IEC 61850).
SIPROTEC 5 devices support both Edition1 and Edition2 in accordance with
IEC 61850-7-2. In Edition2, the logical attributes LeapSecondsKnown, ClockFai-
lure, ClockNotSynchronized, and the value TimeAccuracy are maintained in
each time stamp. For Edition1, these signals contain default settings. Thus, the
interoperability for substation automation technology is ensured for both
editions!
The SNTP service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet interfaces
so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC

162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

Parameter Value Description


IEC 60870-5-103 The time is synchronized via telegram with an appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
However, there are also T103 systems that send the UTC.
DNP3 The time is synchronized via telegram with the appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the DNP3 protocol.
Two characteristics are supported in the process:
• Time synchronization via UTC
• Time synchronization with local time
The daylight saving time status is not transmitted. The device assumes that
the DNP3 master follows the same rules for the start and end of the
daylight saving time as those that were set for the device.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC is
the current implementation, local concerns older implementations.
IEEE 1588 Time is synchronized via an IEEE 1588 timing master. In this case, SIPROTEC 5
devices operate as slave-only clocks. IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P and
Ethernet Transport.
The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter-
faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC.

Parameter: Fault indication after

• Default setting Fault indication after = 600 s


With the Fault indication after parameter, you set the time delay after which the unsuccessful
attempts of time synchronization with external time sources configured are indicated.

Parameter: Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time


This parameter block contains all the settings for the local time zone and daylight saving time of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In addition to the individual parameters, configure the basic settings by preselecting via
the radio buttons or check box.

[sctimezo-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-84 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 163
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

Selection Button Description


Manual settings (local time zone and daylight saving This setting must be selected if you want to select the
time regulation) local time zone and daylight saving time zone regula-
tions of your SIPROTEC 5 device regardless of the PC
settings.
Input: Offset time zone for GMT [min]
Selection: Switchover to daylight saving time
[yes/no] via check box

• Input: Start of daylight saving time [Day and


time]
• Input: End of daylight saving time [Day and
time]
• Input: Offset daylight saving time [min]
• Default settings as in the picture above

3.7.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source • none none
1 • IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:103 Time sync.:Time source • port J
1 port • port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
1 channel • Ch2
_:105 Time sync.:Time source • none none
2 • IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104

164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:106 Time sync.:Time source • port J
2 port • port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
2 channel • Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 1 • local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 2 • local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after

3.7.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 165
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects

3.8 User-Defined Objects

3.8.1 Overview

With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).

[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-85 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library

The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-
cations, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable whole
number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example process
indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can be deac-
tivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.

[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-86 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications

166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects

3.8.2 Basic Data Types

The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.8.5 External Signals).

User-Defined Signals

[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-87 User-Defined Signals

Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)


The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.

EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.

Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)


In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 167
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects

[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-88 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)

Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)


When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).

EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.

Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)


This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).

Integer Status Value (Type INS)


The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.

168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects

EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.

State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)


The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.

Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)


This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.

Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double Point Controllable)


This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.

Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)


This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.

Complex Measured Values (CMV)


This data type provides a complex measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.

Measured Values (MV)


This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.

NOTE

i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps

• Metered values

Phase-to-Ground Measured Values (WYE)


This data type represents the phase-to-ground measured values of a 3-phase system.

Phase-to-Phase Measured Values (DEL, Delta)


This data type represents the phase-to-phase measured values of a 3-phase system.

Protection Activation Information (ACT)


This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.

Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)


This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT
can be generated and processed by CFC charts.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 169
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects

3.8.3 Pulse- and Energy-Metered Values

Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line as
well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Function Descrip-
tion of Pulse-Metered Values.

Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.

3.8.4 Additional Data Types

The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.

• SEQ (Sequence)

• BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position)


The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up,
down can be given.

NOTE

i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).

3.8.5 External Signals

User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-89) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instantia-
tion in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850 system
tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding procedure
specified in IEC 61850-6).

170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects

[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-89 External Signals

NOTE

i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 171
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

3.9 Other Functions

3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals

Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).

NOTE

i For the circuit breaker or the disconnector, the settings of the software filter for spontaneous position
changes are available only in the Control/Command with feedback function block. These settings are not
available in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function blocks since these function blocks contain the
actual unfiltered position of the switch in the bay.

[sclposi-260116, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-90 Settings for Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms
(1 day) in ms increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software
filter should be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back. When activated, the Indication timestamp
before filtering check box back dates the time stamp by the set software filtering time and the fixed
hardware filtering time. In this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If
you activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed
for the duration of this software filter time.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by: , you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for

172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes can then not be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the Circuit breaker or
Disconnector function block.

[scflatte-180315, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-91 Setting Chatter Blocking

The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 173
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

[scparafl-291110-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-92 Chatter-Blocking Settings

The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-93 and Figure 3-94 in the exam-
ples shown in the following):
• No. permis.state changes
This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.

• Initial test time


During this time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked. This time is started if chatter
blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its status. If the configured number
of permissible status changes is exceeded during the initial test time, the signal is temporarily blocked
and the indication Chatter blocking is set.
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in
seconds. When the set time has expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).

• No. of chatter tests


This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run. If the number of permissible status
changes of the signal stays exceeded during the initial test time of the last test cycle, the signal is finally
blocked. In this case, the indication Group warning (Alarm handling group and Device group) is set
additionally to the Chatter blocking indication after expiry of the set number. Restarting the devices
removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite (∞) is also permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.

• Chatter idle time


If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the initial test time or the
subsequent test time, the Chatter idle time starts. Within this time, this signal is blocked tempora-
rily and the Chatter blocking indication is set. The blocked input signal is assigned the oscillatory
quality.
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in
minutes. An entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0.

174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

• Subsequent test time


During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked once again. The
time begins when the Chatter idle time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the maximum
number of chatter tests has been reached.
Enter a number between 2 and 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in
seconds. An entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0.

Example 1: Permanent Blocking


The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4

• No. of chatter tests = 2


After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of status changes of the
input signal exceeds the set No. permis.state changes, the chatter blocking detects a persistent viola-
tion of the signal stability and sets the Group warning indication. The original state of the signal is perma-
nently frozen. Only a device restart removes the chatter blocking again.

[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-93 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time

(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 175
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

Example 2: Temporary Blocking


The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4

• No. of chatter tests = 2


After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of state changes of the
input signal is within the set No. permis.state changes, the temporary blocking of state changes of the
signal is removed and the actual signal state is released.
The quality bit oscillatory is removed and the Chatter blocking indication is reset. As the temporary
blocking of the signal is removed, the Group warning indication is not set. The chatter test starts again.

[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-94 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time

3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating

During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.

• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.

• Press the Change softkey.

176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).

• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.


After entering the confirmation ID (only with the RBAC inactive), acquisition blocking is switched on.

[scerfass-310816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-95 Activating Acquisition Blocking

Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select Manual update (Figure 3-96) using the navigation keys.
• Select the switching device setting to be updated manually using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-97).

• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.

[scstatus-310816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-96 Activating Manual Update

[scstatu2-310816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-97 Selecting Position

The manually updated position of the switching device will be displayed.

[scstatu3-310816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-98 Position of the Switching Device

NOTE

i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 177
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

NOTE

i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.

You can also set acquisition blocking via a binary input. If you want to put the feeder or the switching device
in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking for an individual or several switching devices with an external
toggle switch. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or discon-
nector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the CFC.

[scbeerfa-190215, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-99 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device

NOTE

i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.

If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850

• Input signal >Acquisition blocking


All sources undergo OR operations, that is, the acquisition blocking remains set until all the sources are deacti-
vated.
After deactivation of the acquisition blocking, the actual position of the switching device is adopted and
displayed in the operation panel of the device.

NOTE

i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.

The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.

178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

3.9.3 Persistent Commands

In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.

[scbefehl-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-100 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5

Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.

3.9.4 Device Logoff

3.9.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some applica-
tions, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant
and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades

• Testing the local protection functions, for example, the local line differential protection
The Device logoff functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 179
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

NOTE

i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.

You can log off the device as follows:


• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via a communication interface using the Device logoff (_:319) controllable

• Via the binary inputs, general: >Device funct.logoff on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logoff off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the
device→Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logoff have been met. If the condi-
tions for the log off have not been met, the logoff is rejected.
The logoff is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.

• The Line differential protection function is operating in the device and the local circuit breaker is still
switched on.
In this case, you must switch off the local circuit breaker and repeat the log-off process for the device.
After the logoff, the local Line differential protection function is removed from the summation of the
currents for the Line differential protection of the other devices. The Line differential protection func-
tion remains active in the other devices.

NOTE

i The option used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logoff, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.

If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logoff. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.

3.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Logoff Options for a Device


You can log off a device as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via communication via the controllable Device logoff (_:319)

• Via the binary inputs, general: >Device funct.logoff on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logoff off
(_:508)

180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

Conditions for Logging off the Device

[lo functional logoff device, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-101 Logic for Logging off the Device

The conditions for a successful logoff of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.

Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol, for example, in the case of substation
interlocking, you can set in the receiver device for each received data point the value of this data point when
the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the logoff is canceled
by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the meantime.

Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination using Protection Communication


If devices in a device combination communicate via the protection interface, you can only log off a device
under the following conditions:
• Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interruption of the
protection communication.

• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise, the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices that are not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged
off.

Logoff of a Device from a Protection Application with Line Differential Protection


If you are using the Line differential protection function, you must ensure that the functionality is still effec-
tive even after a device in a device combination is logged off and switched off. The following example
describes the procedure:

EXAMPLE:
The following line formation is protected by the Line differential protection with 3 devices.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 181
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

[dw example logoff ldiff, 2, en_US]

Figure 3-102 Differential Protection with 3 Devices for a Line with a Feeder

In the example, the feeder is to be decommissioned for maintenance or modification work. Device 3 should
therefore also be switched off. Without additional measures, the Line differential protection can no longer
function and sends an ineffective indication.
For this use case, the Line differential protection function must be logged off in Device 3.

NOTE

i Before logging off, you must switch off the feeder protected by the local Line differential protection.

The Line differential protection in device 3 can only be logged off if no current is flowing through the feeder.
During the log-off process, device 3 checks whether the circuit breaker 3 is really switched off.
The Circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-
breaker position using the internal signal CB state protected obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the circuit-breaker position function block performs linking of the individual CB condi-
tions for the protected object.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object internal signal assumes the
Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
• The binary input signal >Disconnector open is active.
You can find more information in chapter 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object.
If the Line differential protection is logged off in device 3, the remaining devices 1 and 2 save this state and
calculate the total current using Kirchhoff's current law with the currents in devices 1 and 2 only.
If device 3 is successfully logged off, you can switch it off. The logoff of device 3 is saved in the remaining
devices also after it is switched off. If you switch device 3 on again, you must log it on again in the device
combination.

Logoff via Binary Inputs


The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you want to use push-
buttons, switch them on as shown in the following figure. Use the push-button Key2 to log off the device; use
the push-button Key1 log on the device again.

182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

[loextta logoff device, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-103 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device

If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Device funct.logoff on as H (active
with voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logoff off as L (active without voltage).
If the switch S is closed, the device is logged off.

[loextsx logoff device, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-104 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device

Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and the cause of the logoff.
If you have logged off the device via binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI is issued.
If you have logged off the device via on-site operation, via DIGSI 5, or via the protection interface, the indica-
tion (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.

3.9.4.3 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:507 General:>Device funct.logoff on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logoff off SPS I
_:319 General:Device logoff SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 183
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection


Functions

3.10.1 Overview

You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary

• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.

Edit Mode: Primary


The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conversion
on the secondary circuit omitted.

Edit Mode: Secondary


The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
The secondary setting is the customary setting view. For secondary tests, the pickup values can be read
directly.

Edit Mode: Percent


This setting type is beneficial for electric machines (generators, transformers, motors, and busbars). The
setting values can be standardized regardless of the machine size. The reference values for the percentage
settings are the rated values of the function groups, for example, rated voltage and rated current or rated
apparent power . The setting values are, thus, related exclusively to the primary settings. If other reference
values are used, then this is documented for the respective protection function in the application and setting
notes.
If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views.

Recommendation for Setting Sequence


When setting the protection function, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. You will find these parameters in func-
tion group , for example, function group Line under line data .

• Next, set the parameter of the protection functions.


If the transformer data have changed after completing the protection setting, remain in the setting sheet
(for example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the
new settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.

3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5

In the delivery setting, DIGSI 5 is set to the Secondary edit mode.

184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the
example of the Overcurrent protection function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup value: 1.5 A

The following figure shows the protection setting of the Overcurrent protection function in the secondary
view. The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.

[scmodsek_1, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-105 Protection Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet

When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.

[scmodums_2, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-106 Switchover to the Desired Setting View

The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 185
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

[scpwandl_3, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-107 Setting Sheet: Transformer Data

In the function group Line, you set the line data (see following figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the
reference variables for the percent setting.

[scproref_4, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-108 Reference Data for Percentage Settings

The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at
1500 A.

186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

[scumzpri_5, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-109 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Primary)

When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A · 100 % = 150 %

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 187
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

[scumzpro_6, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-110 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Percent)

When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A

188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

[scumzsek_7, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-111 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Secondary)

If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 189
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

[scfragew_8, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-112 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)

If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A * 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.

190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

[scsekneu_9, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-113 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data

If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in the
secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In
the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A * 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the reply to your question (see Figure 3-112).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A

Changing the Transformer Ratio in the Single-Line Editor


If you want to change the primary or secondary rated currents of the current transformer in the Single-line
Editor, select the current transformer. You can view and change the currents in the Properties tab of the
object bar.
If you change the rated currents, the corresponding field has a red border to indicate currents that differ
between the Single-line Editor and the power-system data. During synchronization in the Single-line Editor,
these rated currents are adopted into the power-system data.

3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device

The device is preset to the secondary value at the time of delivery. Only secondary values can be set directly
on the device.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 191
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions

If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-112). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.

NOTE

i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.

192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

3.11 Device Settings

3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching

3.11.1.1 Overview of Functions


For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if
necessary enable them quickly.
You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active at
any given time. During operation, you can switch between settings groups. The source of the switchover can
be selected via a parameter.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device

• Via binary inputs

• Via a communication connection to the substation automation technology.


The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be
used for switching the settings groups.
A settings group includes all switchable settings of the device. Except for a few exceptions (for example,
general device settings such as rated frequency), all device settings can be switched.
Detailed information about the settings groups can be found in the Operating Manual and DIGSI 5 Online
Help.

3.11.1.2 Structure of the Function


The function of the Settings group switching is a supervisory device function. Accordingly, the settings and
indications of the settings group switching can be found in DIGSI 5 and at the on-site operation panel of the
device, below the general device settings respectively.
If you want to switchover a settings group, navigate to DIGSI 5 or proceed on the on-site operation panel of
the device, as follows:
• Via the project tree in DIGSI 5:
Project -> Device -> Settings -> Device settings

• Via the on-site operation panel of the device:


Main menu → Settings → General → Group switchover
The indications for the settings group switching can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under:
Project → Device → Information routing → General

3.11.1.3 Function Description

Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.

Mechanism of the Switchover


When switching over from one settings group to another, the device operation is not interrupted. With the
Active settings group parameter, you are either specifying a certain settings group or you allow
switching via control (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850) or via binary input.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 193
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

Switching via Control


When using the Control function for switching, the settings groups can be switched via a communication
connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used
for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
In order to use a CFC chart for switching, you must create a new CFC chart in DIGSI 5. Create the CFC chart in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Charts → Add new chart. Link the signals that control
settings group switching in the CFC chart.

Switching via Binary Input


There are 3 appropriate input signals available for switching via binary inputs. These input signals allow selec-
tion of the settings group via a binary code. If one of the 3 signals changes, the signal image present will, after
100 ms (stabilization time), result in switching over to the appropriate settings group. If only 2 settings groups
must be switched over, only 1 binary input is required. The following table shows the possible binary codes
(BCD) and applicable settings groups (PG).

Table 3-22 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups

BCD Code via Binary Inputs PG 1 PG 2 PG 3 PG 4 PG 5 PG 6 PG 7 PG 8


>PG selection bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
>PG selection bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
>PG selection bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Copying and Comparing Settings Groups


In DIGSI 5, you can copy or compare settings groups with each other.
If you want to copy settings groups, select a source and target parameter group in DIGSI 5 in the device
settings, and then start the copy process. The device settings can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under
Project → Device → Settings → Device settings.
If you want to compare settings groups, it is possible to do so in all setting sheets for settings. You will then
select in addition to the active settings group, a 2nd settings group for comparison. Active setting values and
the comparable values are displayed next to each other. For settings that cannot be switched over, no compa-
rable values are displayed.

Indication of Settings Group Switchings


Every settings group shows an applicable binary indication as well as its activation and deactivation. The
process of settings group switching is also logged in the log for settings changes.

3.11.1.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Number settings groups

• Default setting (_:113) Number settings groups = 1


With the Number settings groups parameter, you can set the number of available settings groups; you
can switch between these.

Parameter: Activat. of settings group

• Default setting (_:114) Activat. of settings group = settings group 1


With the Activat. of settings group parameter, you specify the settings groups that you want to acti-
vate, or the mechanisms via which the switchover is allowed. You can switchover only between the settings
groups specified with the Number settings groups parameter. Parameter Value

194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

Parameter Value Description


via control The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a
communication connection from a substation automation technology or via
a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC
61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups
via a communication connection.
via binary input The switchover between the settings groups functions exclusively via the
binary input signals routed to the settings group switching.
settings group 1 They define the active settings groups. You can define the active settings
... groups in DIGSI 5, or directly on the device via the on-site operation.
settings group 8

3.11.1.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Change group
_:113 General:Number settings 1 to 8 1
groups
_:114 General:Activat. of • via control settings group 1
settings group • via binary input
• settings group 1
• settings group 2
• settings group 3
• settings group 4
• settings group 5
• settings group 6
• settings group 7
• settings group 8

3.11.1.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:500 General:>SG choice bit 1 SPS I
_:501 General:>SG choice bit 2 SPS I
_:502 General:>SG choice bit 3 SPS I
_:300 General:Act. settings group 1 SPC C
_:301 General:Act. settings group 2 SPC C
_:302 General:Act. settings group 3 SPC C
_:303 General:Act. settings group 4 SPC C
_:304 General:Act. settings group 5 SPC C
_:305 General:Act. settings group 6 SPC C
_:306 General:Act. settings group 7 SPC C
_:307 General:Act. settings group 8 SPC C

3.11.2 General Device Settings

3.11.2.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 195
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

[scDeSeDe2-310715-01, 1, en_US]

[scDeSeAl-310715-01, 3, en_US]

[scDeSeall-260815-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 3-114 General Device Settings

The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.
You can find more about:
• Chatter blocking in chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
• Control in chapter 7.4 Control Functionality.

• Spontaneous indications in chapter 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5.

• Continuous Function Chart Quality Treatment in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User
in CFC Charts.

196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
With Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit, if
this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit you can determine whether an indication is generated in a
test and whether all or individual functions of the device are in the test mode. In this manner the reactions
that are necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive
these indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for
test purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.

3.11.2.2 Application and Setting Notes


The major portion of the settings is described in the chapters cited above. Then, the parameters on the
sections Device, Settings change, Spontaneous indication, and Test support are described.

Parameter: Rated frequency

• Default setting (_:101) Rated frequency = 50 Hz


With the parameter Rated frequency, you set the rated frequency of the electrical power system.

Parameter: Minimum operate time

• Default setting (_:102) Minimum operate time = 0.00 s


With the parameter Minimum operate time, you set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
functions. The trip command is maintained for the set duration.

Parameter: Set. format residu. comp.

• Default setting _:115 = Kr, Kx


With the parameter Set. format residu. comp., you specify the setting format for the residual compen-
sation factors that apply across functions. You can set the residual compensation using the scalar factors Kr,
Kx or as a complex factor using K0 .
The setting format controls the visibility of the residual compensation factors in the Distance protection.

Parameter: Block monitoring dir.

• Default setting (_:138) Block monitoring dir. = off


With the parameter Block monitoring dir., you set whether indications are output via the system inter-
face(s) of the SIPROTEC 5 device or not.
If transmission blocking is switched on, no indications are output via the system interface(s) of a SIPROTEC 5
device.

Parameter: Fault-display

• Default setting (_:139) Fault-display = with pickup


With the parameter Fault-display, you set whether spontaneous fault indications which are signed as NT
(conditioned latching) in the matrix, get stored with every pickup or only for one tripping.
Keep the DIGSI 5 routing options in chapters 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 and Table 3-7 in
mind.

Parameter: Activate device test mode

• Default setting (_:150) Activate device test mode = inactive


Withj the parameter Activate device test mode, you activate the test mode that adds a test bit to the
output indications. If test mode is activated but the test mode of the relay outputs is not, no relay outputs are
activated by the protection functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 197
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

Parameter: Oper.bin.outp. under test

• Default setting (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test = inactive


If you activate the parameter Oper.bin.outp. under test , you can permit the closing of a binary
output for test purposes. In this way, indications are output during a device-wide test mode and the relays are
either activated or not. If an individual function is in test mode, only indications are output and the relays are
not activated.

NOTE

i The device remains in test mode during every startup until you intentionally set the device back into
process mode. You set process mode by switching the parameterActivate device test mode to inactive
again (removing the check mark).

3.11.2.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Device
_:101 General:Rated frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz
• 60 Hz
_:102 General:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
operate time
_:115 General:Set. format • Kr, Kx Kr, Kx
residu. comp. • K0
_:138 General:Block moni- • off off
toring dir. • on
Setting change
_:163 General:Reserv.time for 0 s to 65535 s 120 s
com.prot.
Spontan.indic.
_:139 General:Fault-display • with pickup with pickup
• with trip
Test support
_:150 General:Activate device • 0 false
test mode • 1
_:151 General:Oper.bin.outp. • 0 false
under test • 1

3.11.2.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:510 General:>Test mode on SPS I
_:511 General:>Test mode off SPS I
_:507 General:>Device funct.logoff on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logoff off SPS I
_:512 General:>LED reset SPS I
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:53 General:Health ENS O
_:51 General:Test mode ENC C
_:321 General:Protection on SPC C
_:54 General:Protection inactive SPS O

198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:323 General:LED reset SPC C
_:320 General:LED have been reset SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 199
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
4 Applications

4.1 Overview 202


4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87 203
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87 208
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87 212
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87 215

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 201
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.1 Overview

4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
• Supports the fast realization of complete protection solutions for applications
• Contains the basic configuration for the use case

• Contains functions and default settings for the use case


Figure 2-12.1 Function Embedding in the Deviceprovides an example for the structure of an application
template.
When using an application template, please note the following:
• Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
You can find more detailed information in the 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.

• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.

• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.

NOTE

i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!

202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87

4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87


Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SA87. The application templates
contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SA87 in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
• Basis
• Distance protection, isolated/resonant-grounded systems with AREC

• Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems

• Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2 circuit-
breaker layout
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIS Res./Isol. Systems, with AREC
Template 3 DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
Template 4 DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems, 1 1/2 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
Circuit-Breaker Layout

The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates:

Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SA87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3

Template 4
7SA87

Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x x


Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x x
21/21N Distance protection Z< x x x x
Impedance protection x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x 2
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x x
Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x
sequence system
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx< x
universal, Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
tion with direction
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x x
protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 203
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3

Template 4
7SA87
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, ∠(V,I) x
phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x x
systems with resonant or isolated W0p,tr>, G0>,
neutral systems, incl. B0>, IN-pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Fleeting contact
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN-pulse
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt x x x
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection x x x x
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x x x x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed x
according to French specification
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground- x x x x
fault protection
86 Lockout x
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for x x
1 1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low impedance restricted ground-fault ΔIN x
protection

204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3

Template 4
7SA87
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x x x x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
status
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x x x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access
Control
Function-point class: 0 150 225 400

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 205
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87

Application Template: Basis (7SA87)


The Basis application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection for overhead lines with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping and 3-pole tripping for cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment

• Distance protection is the main protection

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

• Teleprotection scheme

• Fault Locator

Application Template: Distance Protection, Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems with 3-pole AREC (7SA87)
The Distance protection, isolated/resonant-grounded systems with 3-pole AREC application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point

• Distance protection is the main protection

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

• Teleprotection scheme

• Fault Locator

Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
(7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• For systems with grounded neutral point

• The main protection is distance protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

• Teleprotection scheme

• Fault Locator

Application Template: Distance Protection MHO for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line, grounded systems application template is preconfigured
for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• For systems with grounded neutral point

• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic curves)

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

• Teleprotection scheme

• Fault Locator

206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87

Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with
1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment

• Prepared for applications with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout

• Distance protection is the main protection

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

• Teleprotection scheme

• Fault Locator

Application Template: MHO Distance Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment

• Prepared for applications with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout

• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic curves)

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

• Teleprotection scheme

• Fault Locator

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 207
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87

4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87


Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SD87. The application templates
contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SD87 in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
• Basis
• Differential protection for overhead line

• Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range

• Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout


To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIFF Overhead Line
Template 3 DIFF Overhead Line with Transformer
Template 4 DIS Overhead Line, 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V

The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates described below:

Table 4-2 Functional Scope of the Application Template for Device 7SD87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3

Template 4
7SD87

Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x x


Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expand- I/O x x x x x
able
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ΔI x x x x
ends
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 ΔI x x x x
line ends (dependent on significant
properties)
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x x 2
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x x
Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x
sequence system
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx< x
universal, Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive P<>, Q<> x
power
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
tion with direction
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x x

208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3

Template 4
7SD87
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x x
protection
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection INs> x
for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protec- I>, ∠ (V,I) x
tion, phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x
systems with resonant or isolated W0p,tr>, G0>,
neutral systems, incl. B0>, IN-pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Fleeting contact
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN-pulse
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for differential protection: ΔI x x
Transformer in protection range
Option for differential protection: ΔI x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for x x
1 1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low-impedance restricted ground- ΔIN x
fault protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 209
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3

Template 4
7SD87
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x x
Circuit breaker x x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
status
27Q Directional reactive power under- Q>/V< x
voltage protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x x x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access
Control
Function-point class: 0 175 275 350

210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87

Application Template: Basis (7SD87)


The Basis application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection (for example, cable) with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• Protection of overhead lines and cables

• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function

Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line (7SD87)


The Differential protection for overhead line application template is preconfigured for the following applica-
tions:
• Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function


Important additional functions for overhead-line protection:
• Automatic reclosing function
• Synchronization function

• Circuit-breaker failure protection

• Voltage and frequency protection

Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Transformer in the Protection Range (7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping with transformer in the protection range
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection with transformer option

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function


Important additional functions for overhead-line protection:
• Automatic reclosing function
• Synchronization function

• Circuit-breaker failure protection

• Voltage and frequency protection

Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-breaker Layout ( 7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection

• Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function


Important additional functions specifically for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
• Double automatic reclosing function
• Double synchronization function

• Double circuit-breaker failure protection

• Stub-fault protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 211
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87

4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87


Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SL87. The application templates
contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SL87 in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
• Basis
• Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems

• Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIFF/DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
Template 3 DIFF/DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout

The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates described below:

Table 4-3 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SL87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3
7SL87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI x x x
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ΔI x x x
ends (dependent on significant proper-
ties)
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed x
according to French specification
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x 2
Impedance protection x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x
Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x
sequence system
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx< x
universal, Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
tion with direction

212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3
7SL87
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x
50 HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x
protection
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, ∠ (V,I) x
phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral W0p,tr>, G0>,
systems, incl. B0>, IN-pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Fleeting contact
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN-pulse
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for differential protection: Trans- ΔI x
former in protection range
Option for differential protection: ΔI x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for x x
1 1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low impedance restricted ground-fault ΔIN x
protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 213
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1

Template 2

Template 3
7SL87
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x
Circuit breaker x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor status x
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access
Control
Function-point class: 0 225 400

214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87

4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87


The application template Basis is available in DIGSI 5 for the application of device 7VK87. The application
template contains the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis (AREC, Sync., Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection) 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V

The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the Basis application
template:

Table 4-4 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7VK87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1
7VK87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence V1< x
system
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx< x
Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
with direction
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protec- I>>> x
tion
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x
59 Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
59 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system V0> x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx Vx> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, ∠ (V,I) x
phases
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 215
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87

ANSI Function Abbr.

Template 1
7VK87
81O Overfrequency protection f> x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x
90V Two-winding transformer voltage controller x
90V Three-winding transformer voltage controller x
90V Grid coupling transformer voltage controller x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Measured values, standard x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg x
(function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x
Monitoring and supervision x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x
Circuit-breaker control x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
Disconnector/grounding conductor status x
37 Undercurrent I< x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access Control
Function-point class: 0

216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
5 Function-Group Types

5.1 Function-Group Type Line 218


5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase 247
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase 261
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 267
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker 270
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units 293
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group 352

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 217
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.1 Overview

In the Line function group, all of the functions that are necessary for protecting and monitoring a line can be
used. The Line function group also contains the measuring functions (for more information, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Line function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Line func-
tion group contains all of the protection and supervision functions that you can use for this device type. The
functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation Functions. The following figure shows the
functional scope of the Line function group using the example of a device.

218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

[scbibofg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-1 Line Function Group - Functional Scope for Device Type 7SL86

For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, please refer to chapter 2 Basic
Structure of the Function. For information about the overall functional scope of the application templates for
the various device types, please refer to chapter 4 Applications.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 219
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group

The Line function group always contains the following blocks:


• Line data

• Operational measurement

• Process monitor

• Output logic of the function group


These blocks are essential for the Line function group, so they cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the Line function
group. The functions are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Functions that are not needed can be deleted
from the function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the Line function group:

[dwfgline-160812-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-2 Structure of the Line Function Group

The Line function group has interfaces with


• Measuring points
• Circuit-breaker function group

• Protection communication

Interfaces with Measuring Points


The Line function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points.
If you are using an application template, the Line function group is already connected to the necessary meas-
uring points.
If you add functions to the Line function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function-group connections Editor.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2 Basic Structure of the Function.

220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

The Line function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase voltage:
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Various transformer
connection types are possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided
via this interface. The Line function group must always be connected to the V-3ph measuring point.
If you want to use the Distance-protection function in the Line function group for your use case, you
must connect the 3 phase-to-ground voltages to the V-3ph measuring point. If you want to test or
change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point, double-click Measuring
point routing (connection type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage) in the DIGSI 5 project tree → 7SL86 (name
of the device).
For more information, please refer to the description of the power-system data starting from chapter
6.1.1 Overview.

• 3-phase phase current:


The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are for example IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be calcu-
lated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The Line function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase phase current interface to a maximum of two 3-phase current meas-
uring points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been
connected to the 3-phase phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured
values from both measuring points in the Line function group. All functions in the Line function group
have access to these values.

• Ground current parallel line:


If the device measures the ground current in the parallel line, this 1-phase measurand of the Line func-
tion group is provided via this interface.
You only have to connect the Ground current parallel line interface to the I-1ph measuring
point if functions in the Line function group are working with this measurand.

• Transformer neutral-point current:


If the device measures the ground current in the transformer neutral point, this 1-phase measurand of
the Line function group is provided via this interface.
You only have to connect the Transformer neutral-point current interface to the I-1ph meas-
uring point if functions in the Line function group are working with this measurand.

NOTE

i You can connect the 3-phase phase current interface to at most two 3-phase current measuring
points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts).
The other interfaces can only be connected to one measuring point each!

Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group


All required data is exchanged between the protection and Circuit-breaker function groups via the interface
with the Circuit-breaker function group. This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of
the protection functions sent in the direction of the circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the
circuit-breaker condition information in the direction of the protection function groups.
The Line function group is connected to one or more circuit-breaker function groups. This connection gener-
ally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the Line protection function group
• Start of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Line protection function group

• Start of the Automatic reclosing function (AREC if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Line protection function group

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 221
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Besides the general allocation of the Line protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups,
you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using
the Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the Line function group.
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function

• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function


If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5 via the
Function-group connections Editor. You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Function Embed-
ding in the Device. If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.

Interface with Protection Communication


All required data is exchanged between the protection function group and the protection communication via
the interface with Protection communication. These are, for example, binary signals, measured values and
complex data. Functions such as differential protection or teleprotection scheme exchange information with
other protection devices via the protection interface.
If an application template is used, the protection function group and protection communication are already
connected to each other because this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6 Protection Communication.
If this connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.

Line Data
The line data characterizes the line that is to be protected. The line data applies for all of the functions in the
Line function group.

Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Line function group and cannot be removed. The process
monitor provides the following information in the Line function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/closed line based on the flow of minimum current

• Voltage criterion (optional):


Detection of an open/closed line based on the minimum voltage present

• Closure detection:
Detection of closure of the line

• Cold-load pickup detection (optional):


Detection of a transient state of the network after a long period of disconnection (such as a blackout)
followed by automatic reclosing
This information is in the Line function group and is available to all the functions in the function group. The
description of the process monitor begins in chapter 5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line).

Operational Measured Values


The operational measured values are always present in the Line function group and cannot be deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Line function group:

Table 5-1 Operational Measured Values of the Function Group Line

Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary
system

222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary
system
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
voltage system/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
P Active power MW – Active power of the primary system
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Q Reactive power Mvar – Reactive power of the primary system
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
S Apparent power MVA – Apparent power of the primary system
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Cos φ Active power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW – Apparent power of the phase
Vrated phx · Irated phx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar – Apparent power of the phase
Vrated phx · Irated phx
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA – Apparent power of the phase
Vrated phx · Irated phx

Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)


The following directional values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direc-
tion of the protected object.
• Power
• Power factor

• Energy

• Minimum, maximum values

• Mean values
With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
You can find more information in chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions.

Output Logic
The output logic treats the pick up and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the
function group separately, in either a pickup logic or an output logic. The pickup and output logic generate the
overreaching indications (group signals) of the function group. These group indications are transferred via the
Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed further there.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 223
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

The pickup indications of the protection and supervision functions in the Line function group are combined
phase-segregated and output as a group indication.

[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]

Figure 5-3 Generation of a Pickup Indication of the Line Function Group

The operate indications of the protection functions are combined on a phase-selective basis (see the following
figure).

[loauspha-100511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-4 Generation of an Operate Indication of the Line Function Group

If the device is capable of a 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set in a
function (for example, distance protection), a 1-phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication.
If at least the following conditions have been met, the connected Circuit-breaker function group generates a
1-pole operate command:
• Automatic reclosing function (AREC) is present
• Circuit breaker can switch to 1-pole

• Circuit breaker is ready


With the Trip at 2ph short circuit parameter in the Circuit-breaker function group, you control the
tripping behavior of the device in the event of 2-pole short circuits (see chapter 5.5.4.1 Function Description).

5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes

Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group


The Line protection function group is linked to 2 circuit breakers (2 Circuit-breaker function groups) for the
breaker-and-a-half layout.
You can find more information in chapter 2 Basic Structure of the Function.

224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Line Data
The following application and setting instructions apply for the line data. The line data are configured in the
Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.

NOTE

i Specify the line data for your specific application!

Parameter: Rated current

• Default setting (_:9001:101) Rated current = 1000 A


With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current for the line to be protected. The
Rated current parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection function. The Rated current speci-
fied here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.

NOTE

i If the optional function block Transformer has been instantiated in the Line Differential Protection
function, the parameter Rated apparent power can be set. The parameter Rated current is then
calculated internally and is displayed as a write-protected parameter.

If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

Parameter: Rated voltage

• Default setting (_:9001:102) Rated voltage = 400 kV


With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage for the line to be protected. The
Rated voltage parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection, Distance-protection, and Voltage-
protection functions. The Rated voltage set here is the reference value for the percentage-measured
values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

Parameter: Rated apparent power

• Default setting _:9001:103 Rated apparent power = 692.8 MVA

NOTE

i The parameter Rated apparent power is only configurable if the optional function block Trans-
former has been instantiated in the Line Differential Protection function.
If the function block Transformer has not been instantiated, the Rated apparent power is calculated
internally from parameters Rated current and Rated voltage and is displayed as a write-protected
parameter.

With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power of the
protected transformer. The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection function
of the device. The Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage-measured
values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 225
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Parameter: Neutral point

• Default setting (_:9001:149) Neutral point = grounded


With the Neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system-neutral point is grounded, isolated
or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil).

Parameter: C1 per length unit

• Default setting (_:9001:112) C1 per length unit = 0.010 μF/km


With the C1 per length unit parameter, you specify the capacitance per unit length in the positive-
sequence system for the line to be protected. You set the C1 per length unit parameter as a relative
value in μF/km or μF/miles. The capacitance per unit length in the positive-sequence system is identical to the
operating capacitance cb´. The C1 per length unit parameter is relevant for the Differential and Over-
voltage protection with positive-sequence system and compounding functions.

Parameter: C0 per length unit

• Default setting (_:9001:148) C0 per length unit = 0.010 μF/km


With the C0 per length unit parameter, you specify the capacitance per unit length in the zero-sequence
system for the line to be protected. You set the C0 per length unit parameter as a relative value in
μF/km or μF/miles. The capacitance per unit length in the zero-sequence system is identical to the ground
capacitance cgnd´. The C0 per length unit parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection function.

EXAMPLE

110-kV single-phase liquid-filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:


ce = cgnd = 0.27 μF/km
The setting value for the parameters C1 per length unit and C0 per length unit is 0.27 μF/km.

Parameter: X per length unit

• Default setting (_:9001:113) X per length unit = 0.0525 Ω/km


With the X per length unit parameter, you set the reactance per unit length for the line to be protected.
You set the X per length unit parameter as a relative value in Ω/km or Ω/miles. The X per length
unit parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection, Differential-protection, and Overvoltage protec-
tion with positive-sequence system and compounding functions.

Parameter: Line length

• Default setting (_:9001:114) Line length = 60 km


With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected as a unit of length in km
or miles. The Line length parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection, Differential-protection, and
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence system and compounding functions.

Parameter: Line angle

• Default setting (_:9001:108) Line angle = 85°


The Line angle parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection, Differential-protection, and Over-
voltage protection with positive-sequence system and compounding functions. Calculate the setting value
for the parameter Line angle from the line constants for the line to be protected as follows:

[folwinkl-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]

226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected

EXAMPLE

110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data


R´1 = 0.19 Ω/km
X´1 = 0.42 Ω/km
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:

[folwibsp-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Kr and Kx

• Default setting (_:9001:104) Kr = 1.0

• Default setting (_:9001:105) Kx = 1.0

NOTE

i The visibility of the Kr and Kx parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual compen-
sation factors. The parameters Kr and Kx only become visible after you have set the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for the device.

The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and Kx
parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.

NOTE

i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
specific parameters for each zone.

Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio

where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line

This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 227
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

EXAMPLE

110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data:

R1/s 0.19 Ω/km positive-sequence system resistance


X1/s 0.42 Ω/km positive-sequence system reactance
R0/s 0.53 Ω/km zero-sequence system resistance
X0/s 1.19 Ω/km zero-sequence system reactance
s Line length

You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:

[forerlx1-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)

• Default setting (_:9001:118) K0 = 1.000

• Default setting (_:9001:150) Angle (K0) = 0.00°

NOTE

i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) only become visible after you have set the
parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device.

The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex residual compensation factor. The K0 and
Angle (K0) parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.

NOTE

i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
local parameters for each zone.

Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex residual compensation factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex residual compensation factor from the line data as
follows:

[fo K01, 1, en_US]

where:
Z0 (complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (complex) positive-sequence impedance

This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. The data can be calculated both from the primary values and from the secondary values.

228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.

EXAMPLE

110-kV single-phase liquid filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:

Z1/s 0.408 · ej73° Ω/km positive-sequence impedance


Z0/s 0.632 · ej18.4° Ω/km zero-sequence impedance
s Line length

The values for calculation of the residual compensation factor K0 are:

[fofork02-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

[fofork03-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The setting value of the parameter K0 is calculated from:

[fofork04-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
Part
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°

In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:

[fo phi K0, 1, en_US]

Parameter: KmR and KmX

• Default setting (_:9001:106) KmR = 0.00

• Default setting (_:9001:107) KmX = 0.00


The KmR and KmX parameters are used to set the coupling impedance for parallel-line compensation. The KmR
parameter (= R0m/3RL) is used to set the coupling resistance. The KmX parameter (= X0m/3XL) is used to set
the coupling reactance. The KmR and KmX parameters are only relevant for the Distance-protection function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 229
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Parameter: Km0 and Angle (Km0)

• Default setting (_:9001:124) Km0 = 0.00

• Default setting (_:9001:125) Angle (Km0) = 0.00°


Use the parameters Km0 (= Z0m/3ZL) and Angle (Km0) to set the coupling impedance for parallel-line
compensation as a complex value in quantity and angle. The Km0 parameter allows you to set the value for the
coupling-impedance factor. The Angle (Km0) parameter allows you to set the angle of the coupling-impe-
dance factor. The Km0 and Angle (Km0) parameters are only relevant for the Distance-protection function.

Parameter: Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)

• Recommended setting value (_:9001:109) Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) = 85 %


The Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) parameter is only relevant for the Distance-protection function. With the
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) parameter, you define the ground-current balance for parallel-line compensa-
tion. This parameter is important for parallel-line compensation in the event of ground faults outside of the
line to be protected.
For the ground-current balance of the distance protection, the setting value returns the current ratio Ignd/IgndP
for the protection device at installation site II (see Figure 5-5).

[dwparkomrw-161013, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-5 Range of Parallel-Line Compensation at II

Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected (Ignd) is greater
than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends retaining the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)= 85 %. In highly unbal-
anced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller value may be
advisable.

Parameter: CT saturation detection

• Default setting (_:9001:119) CT saturation detection = no


With the parameter CT saturation detection, you specify whether the device is to work with saturation
detection or not. The saturation detection detects measuring errors due to saturation of the current trans-
formers and switches over the method of measurement for distance measurement. The CT saturation
detection parameter is only relevant for the Distance-protection function.

Parameter: CT saturation threshold

• Default setting (_:9001:120) CT saturation threshold = 10 A


The CT saturation threshold parameter allows you to set the current threshold for the saturation
detection. If the set value is exceeded, saturation detection becomes active. If the saturation detection detects
a current-transformer saturation, the device switches over the method of measurement for distance measure-
ment. Calculate the setting value for the parameter CT saturation threshold according to the following
formula:

230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

[fo1isaet-041210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

where:

Effective overcurrent factor

Sr Rated burden of the current transformers [VA]


Si Inherent burden of the current transformers [VA]
S' Actually connected burden (protection device + secondary lines)

NOTE

i The parameter CT saturation threshold only becomes visible when you have set the parameter CT
saturation detection = yes.

Parameter: Series compensation

• Default setting (_:9001:111) Series compensation = no


Use the parameter Series compensation to specify whether the line to be protected is to work with or
without series compensation. The Series compensation parameter is relevant for the Distance-protec-
tion and Directional ground-fault protection functions. To ensure that the direction determination functions
correctly in applications for or in the vicinity of series-compensated lines, set the parameter Series
compensation = yes.

Parameter: Series capacit. reactance

• Default setting (_:9001:110) Series capacit. reactance = 0 Ω


The Series capacit. reactance parameter is used to define the positive-sequence system reactance of
the series capacitor. The reactance of the series capacitor is calculated as follows from the capacitance of the
capacitor (cs):

[foforcse-060509-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The Series capacit. reactance parameter is only relevant for the Directional ground-fault protection
function.

Parameter: P, Q sign

• Default setting (_:9001:158) P, Q sign= not reversed


The power and energy values are designed by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also positively define the power dissipation through the
protected object (for example, as seen by the consumer). With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the
sign for these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.

5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line)

5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions


All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 231
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.4.2 Structure of the Function


The Process monitor function is used in the Line protection function group with voltage and current meas-
urement.
The Process monitor function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with the following function blocks:
• Closure detection
• 1-pole-open detector

• Cold-load pickup detection (optional)

• Voltage criterion (optional)

• Circuit-breaker condition

• Current-flow criterion

[dwpro1p1-050612-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 5-6 Structure/Embedding of the Function

You can switch the voltage criterion and the cold-load pickup detection as necessary. The circuit-breaker posi-
tion recognition and the current-flow criterion run permanently in the background and are not displayed in
DIGSI.

232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.

[lopro1p1-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-7 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 233
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.4.3 Current-Flow Criterion

Logic

[loproire-181111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-8 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block

The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.

• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several FG circuit-breakers, the
Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG circuit-breaker. The smallest setting value of
the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.

5.1.4.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)

Parameter: Current thresh. CB open

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.100 A


The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.

234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A.

5.1.4.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP • unbalancing unbalancing
• I> query

5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object

Logic

[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-9 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block

The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function block
connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj.
signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in the
event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.

• The >Disconnector open input is active.


If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Closed state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.

• The >Disconnector open input is not active.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 235
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.4.7 Closure Detection

Logic
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.

[loproein-121012-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-10 Logic Diagram of the Closure-Detection Function Block

For an applied binary input signal Detected (from function block Manual close), the indication Closure is
always active. The indication Closure can also be activated via the measurand. In addition, the protected
object must be switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
This time is started as follows depending on the Operating mode parameter:
• For parameter Operating mode = Iopen,Vopen,ManCl:
If the current-flow criterion and the voltage criterion are detected open-circuited.

• For parameter Operating mode = CB, Iopen, ManCl:


If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact(s) and the current-flow criterion are detected as open-circuited.

• For parameter Operating mode = Iopen, ManCl:


If the current-flow criterion is detected as open-circuited.
If the protected object is detected as switched off, the phase-segregated internal output signal Release
(Closure) is formed. The Instantaneous high-current tripping function can trip immediately, for example
with the Release (Closure) signal in the event of connection to a short circuit.
If all the following conditions are active, the Closure indication is activated via the measurands.
• The protected object is switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.

• The time Action time after closure is running.

• The current-flow criterion no longer detects the state open-circuited.


The time Action time after closure is started depending on the Operating mode parameter:
• For parameter Operating mode = Iopen,Vopen,ManCl:
If the current-flow criterion or the voltage criterion are no longer detected open-circuited.

236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

• For parameter Operating mode = CB, Iopen, ManCl:


If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact(s) or the current-flow criterion are no longer detected as open-
circuited.

• For parameter Operating mode = Iopen, ManCl:


If the current-flow criterion is no longer detected as open-circuited.

5.1.4.8 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:4681:101) Operating mode=Manual close only


With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
Parameter Value Description
Manual close only The detection of feeder closure is exclusively decided using the binary input
signal Detected (from Manual close function block).
Siemens recommends this setting, if both of the following conditions are
met:
• The binary input signal Manual On is available on the side of the
system.
• A closure detection must not happen due to an additional current and
voltage measurement, for example, after an automatic reclosing.
Iopen,Vopen,ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current and voltage
measurement.
If the voltage transformers are installed at the busbar side or if there is no
voltage connected, you must not use this setting.
CB, Iopen, ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement
and with the evaluation of connected circuit breaker position contacts.
Iopen, ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement.
For this setting, make sure that the Current thresh. CB open param-
eter is set lower than the lowest possible load current. If this is not ensured,
open-circuit is detected continuously and each current value that exceeds
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is interpreted as closure.

Parameter: Min. Feeder Open Time

• Recommended setting value (_:4681:103) Min. time feeder open = 0.25 s


To avoid incorrect closure detection, the Feeder open state must exist for a minimum time (Min. time
feeder open parameter) before the Closure indication can become active. You define the duration of the
release delay with the Min. time feeder open parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.25 s.

Parameter: Action Time After Activation

• Recommended setting value (_:4681:102) Action time after closure = 0.05 s


The Closure indication signals detected closure. With the Action time after closure parameter, you
set the Closure indication to a defined length.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.05 s.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 237
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.4.9 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Closure detec.
_:4681:101 Closure detec.:Operating • Manual close only Manual close
mode • Iopen,Vopen,ManCl only
• CB, Iopen, ManCl
• Iopen, ManCl
_:4681:102 Closure detec.:Action 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
time after closure
_:4681:103 Closure detec.:Min. time 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
feeder open

5.1.4.10 1-Pole Open Detector


1-pole automatic reclosing often remedies arc short-circuits in electrical power systems with a grounded
neutral point. This can lead to undesirable pickup in the case of diverse protection and monitoring functions.
If the 1-pole open detector function block detects a 1-pole pause, the corresponding protection and supervi-
sion functions are blocked. To this end, you must set parameters for a grounded electrical power system
neutral point and 1-/3-pole tripping.

238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Logic

[loproopd-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-11 Logic Diagram of the 1-Pole Open Detector Function Block

The 1-pole open indication is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• Internal trip command
The source protection device has issued a 1-phase tripping command (after 30 ms).
After issuing a 1-phase tripping command, only the corresponding phase current drops below the setting
value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. At the same time, the ground current exceeds
this value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 239
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

• External trip command


During 1-pole pickup (Pickup (function group) indication), only the corresponding phase current
drops below the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. At the same time, the
ground current exceeds this value.

• V and I
The 1-pole open detector function block unambiguously detects a 1-pole open circuit breaker. Current
and voltage of the other phases must be present.
The corresponding 1-pole open indication disappears if one of the following conditions is met:
• The value in both activated phases falls below the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter 300 ms.

• The current in the deactivated phase exceeds the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter again after 150 ms.
Additionally, the 1-pole open indication is also generated in the following application cases:
• The following applies to applications on an unloaded line: The 1-pole open indication is generated if
current and voltage are missing in one phase and a voltage is applied in the other phases. The 1-pole
open indication disappears immediately if these criteria are no longer fulfilled. As a result, a 1-phase
automatic reclosing function on an unloaded line can be detected.

• The following applies to applications with voltage transformers at the busbar end: If a phase-selective
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals a 1-pole open circuit-breaker and the current of this phase falls
below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter, the 1-pole open indication is gener-
ated.
Detection of a 1-pole open circuit-breaker is stabilized by 10 ms. This avoids incorrect response in the
transition states of 3-phase switching operations.

5.1.4.11 Application and Setting Notes (1-Pole Open Detector)

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:4711:101) Operating mode = with measurement


With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criterion with which the 1-pole open detector function
block detects 1-pole open.
Parameter Value Description
with measurement All available information that refers to a 1-pole open state is evaluated.
CB and I open Recognition of the 1-pole open position operates with circuit-breaker
auxiliary contacts and the I open parameter from the current-flow crite-
rion function block.
off Detection of a 1-pole open state is not active.

Siemens recommends using the default setting.

240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.4.12 Voltage Criterion (Optional)

Logic

[loproure-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-12 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Criterion Function Block

If you want to test closure detection or an open-pole detector via a voltage, you need a voltage transformer
installed on the line side and electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point. In this case, add the
Voltage criterion function block to the process monitor.
If the voltage transformers are installed on the busbar side or if there is no voltage connected, you must not
use the voltage criterion to detect a deactivated phase.
With the (_:101) Threshold U open parameter, you define the residual voltage as the criterion for a
deactivated line. If the phase-to-ground voltage falls below the value of the Threshold U open parameter,
the V open signal is generated. The function stabilizes the signal with a hysteresis and a delay of the rising
edge of the signal. The falling edge of the signal is forwarded without delay.

5.1.4.13 Application and Setting Notes (Voltage Criterion)

Parameter: Threshold U open

NOTE

i The Threshold U open parameter is available only when the optional Voltage criterion function block
is used. Use this parameter only with a voltage transformer installed on the line side and in electrical power
systems with a grounded neutral point.

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold U open = 30.000 V


With the Threshold U open parameter, you define the threshold for the leakage voltage as the criterion for
a deactivated feeder.
Set the Threshold U open parameter so that the voltage measured when the feeder is deactivated falls
below the value of the Threshold U open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is additionally active if
the threshold is exceeded. The value of the Threshold U open parameter must lie below the minimum
expected phase-to-ground voltage. The voltage transformers must be connected on the line side.
Due to possible parasitic voltages (for example, due to capacitive coupling in), do not set the value of the
Threshold U open too sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 30.000 V.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 241
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

5.1.4.14 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Volt.criterion
_:101 Volt.criterion:Threshold U 0.300 V to 170.000 V 51.960 V
open

5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)

Logic

[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-13 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block

The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.

242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.

5.1.4.16 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)

NOTE

i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open


With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
Parameter Value Description
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure that
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open
condition in at least one phase.
• The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current

• Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A


With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal
Cold-load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.

Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion

• Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s


With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.

Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed

• Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s


With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 243
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Parameter: Min. CB open time

• Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s


With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is acti-
vated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.

5.1.4.17 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating • I open I open
mode • CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:103 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1sto600 s 600s
delay curr.crit.
_:104 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

5.1.4.18 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O

5.1.4.19 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Closure detec.
_:4681:101 Closure detec.:Operating • Manual close only Manual close
mode • I open and V open only
• CB and I open
• I open
_:4681:102 Closure detec.:Action 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
time after closure
_:4681:103 Closure detec.:Min. time 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
feeder open

244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


1pol.open det.
_:4711:101 1pol.open det.:Oper- • off with measure-
ating mode • with measurement ment
• CB and I open

5.1.4.20 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Closure detec.
_:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open PLC I
_:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure PLC O
1pol.open det.
_:4711:300 1pol.open det.:1-pole open ACT O

5.1.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Rated values
_:9001:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A
_:9001:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Line data
_:9001:149 General:Neutral point • grounded grounded
• suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
_:9001:112 General:C1 per length unit 1A 0.000 µF/km to 100000.000 0.010 µF/km
µF/km
5A 0.000 µF/km to 500000.000 0.050 µF/km
µF/km
_:9001:148 General:C0 per length unit 1A 0.000 µF/km to 100000.000 0.010 µF/km
µF/km
5A 0.000 µF/km to 500000.000 0.050 µF/km
µF/km
_:9001:113 General:X per length unit 1A 0.0010 Ω/km to 9.5000 Ω/km 0.0525 Ω/km
5A 0.0002 Ω/km to 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0105 Ω/km
_:9001:114 General:Line length 0.10 km to 1000.00 km 60.00 km
_:9001:108 General:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:9001:104 General:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:9001:105 General:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:9001:118 General:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:9001:150 General:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
_:9001:106 General:KmR 0.00 to 8.00 1.00
_:9001:107 General:KmX 0.00 to 8.00 1.00
_:9001:124 General:Km0 0.000 to 8.000 1.000
_:9001:125 General:Angle (Km0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
_:9001:109 General:Gnd.curr.ratio(Mut 50 % to 95 % 85 %
Comp)
_:9001:119 General:CT saturation • no no
detection • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 245
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:9001:120 General:CT saturation 1A 0.030 A to 125.000 A 10.000 A
threshold 5A 0.150 A to 625.000 A 50.000 A
_:9001:111 General:Series compensa- • no no
tion • yes
_:9001:110 General:Series capacit. 1A 0.000 Ω to 600.000 Ω 0.000 Ω
reactance 5A 0.000 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.000 Ω
Closure detec.
_: Closure detec.:Operating • Manual close only Manual close
1131:4681:101 mode • I open and V open only
• CB and I open
• I open
_: Closure detec.:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
1131:4681:102 after closure
_: Closure detec.:Min. time 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
1131:4681:103 feeder open
1pol.open det.
_: 1pol.open det.:Operating • off with measure-
1131:4711:101 mode • with measurement ment
• CB and I open

5.1.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:9001:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9001:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
RDT
_:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
1pol.open det.
_:1131:4711:300 1pol.open det.:1-pole open ACT O

246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

5.2.1 Overview

In the Voltage-current 3-phase function group, you can use all the functions for protection and supervision
of a protected object or equipment that allows 3-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type in the func-
tion group Voltage-current 3-phase. The functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation
Functions.
You can find more information on the embedding of the functions in the device in chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function. You can find the function scope of the application templates for the various device types in
chapter 4 Applications.

5.2.2 Structure of the Function Group

The function group always contains the following blocks:


• Protected object/equipment data (FB General)
• Operational measured values

• Process monitor

• Output logic of the function group

• Reset LED group


These blocks are essential for the function group under all circumstances, so they cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the function group. The
functions are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Functions that are not needed can be deleted from the
function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase.

[dwfgui3p-301112-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 5-14 Structure of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 247
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

The function group has interfaces with:


• Measuring points
• Circuit-breaker function group

Interface with Measuring Points


The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function group connections Editor. You can find more detailed information in chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function.
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points
(for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been connected with
the 3-phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured values from both
measuring points in the function group. All functions in the function group have access to these values.

• 3-phase voltage (optional)


The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various types
of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also
provided via this interface. Connecting the function group to the V 3ph measuring point is optional.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. You can find more information in chapter
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree → (Name of the device), Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage). For more information, refer to the description of the power-system
data starting in chapter 6.1 Power-System Data.

Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group


All required data is exchanged between the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and the Circuit-breaker
function group via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the
direction of the Circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-breaker condition information in
the direction of the protection function groups.
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group is connected to one or more Circuit-breaker function groups.
This connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group

• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the Circuit-breaker function groups, you can
also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function group.

248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:


• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function

• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function


If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5
via the Function-group connections Editor.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.

Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)


The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the protected object or the
equipment are defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.

Equipment Data
The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the object or the equipment are
defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.

Resetting the LED Group


Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific func-
tion group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group .

Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current

• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment

• Cold-load pickup detection (optional, only for protection devices):


These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
The description of the process monitor begins in chapter 5.2.7 Process Monitor.

Operational Measured Values


The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be removed.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:

Table 5-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 249
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Cos φ Active power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx

The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values.

Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)


The following directional values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direc-
tion of the protected object.
• Power
• Active power factor

• Energy

• Minimum, maximum values

• Average values
With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions.

Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.

250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]

Figure 5-15 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.

[loauslin-150211-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 5-16 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

5.2.3 Application and Setting Notes

Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group


With this, you define which circuit breaker(s) is/are affected by the protection functions of the Protection func-
tion group. A feasible default setting has already been provided in the application templates. You can find
more information in chapter 2.

Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)


The set data applies to all functions in the function group.
Set the protected object/equipment data for your specific application.

Parameter: Rated current

• Default setting (_:9451:101) Rated current = 1000 A


With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated current parameter is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

Parameter: Rated voltage

• Default setting (_:9451:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV


With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated voltage parameter is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 251
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point

• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded


With the Power-sys. neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded,
isolated, or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the parameter
does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage measure-
ment.
You can find more information in chapter 6.15.1 Overview of Functions.

Parameter: P, Q sign

• Default setting (_:9451:158) P, Q sign = not reversed


The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also positively define the power output by the protected
object (for example, as seen by the consumer). With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign for
these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.

5.2.4 Write-Protected Settings

Parameter: Rated apparent power

• Default setting (_:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA


With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power for the auto
transformer to be protected. The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection
function of the device. The Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage-
measured values and setting values made in percentages.

NOTE

i If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:103 General:rated apparent 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power

NOTE

i You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in chapter 5.2.7 Process Monitor.

5.2.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Rated values
_:9451:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A

252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:9451:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. • grounded grounded
neutral point • suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

5.2.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:9451:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9451:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Reset LED Group
_:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O

5.2.7 Process Monitor

5.2.7.1 Overview of Functions


All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.

5.2.7.2 Structure of the Function


The Process monitor function is used in the Standard V/I 3-phase protection function group.
The Process monitor function is provided by the manufacturer with the following function blocks:
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional)
• Current-flow criterion

• Circuit-breaker condition

• Closure detection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 253
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

[dwpro3pt-061212-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-17 Structure/Embedding of the Function

You can activate the cold-load pickup detection as needed. All other stages of the process monitor run perma-
nently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.

[lopro3pt-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-18 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor

254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

5.2.7.3 Current-Flow Criterion

Logic

[loproire-181111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-19 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block

The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.

• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several FG circuit-breakers, the
Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG circuit-breaker. The smallest setting value of
the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.

5.2.7.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)

Parameter: Current thresh. CB open

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.100 A


The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 255
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A.

5.2.7.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object

Logic

[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-20 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block

The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function block
connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj.
signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in the
event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.

• The >Disconnector open input is active.


If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Closed state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.

• The >Disconnector open input is not active.

5.2.7.6 Closure Detection


The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to a short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines
whether the protected object is switched on.

Logic

[loein6md-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-21 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection

256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

For an applied binary input signal (_:4681:500) >Disconnector openDetected (from function block
Manual close), the indication (_:4681:300) ClosureClosure is active.

5.2.7.7 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:4681:101) Operating mode=Manual close only


With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
Parameter Value Description
Manual close only The detection of feeder closure is exclusively decided using the binary input
signal Detected (from Manual close function block).
Siemens recommends this setting, if both of the following conditions are
met:
• The binary input signal Manual On is available on the side of the
system.
• A closure detection must not happen due to an additional current and
voltage measurement, for example, after an automatic reclosing.
Iopen,Vopen,ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current and voltage
measurement.
If the voltage transformers are installed at the busbar side or if there is no
voltage connected, you must not use this setting.
CB, Iopen, ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement
and with the evaluation of connected circuit breaker position contacts.
Iopen, ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement.
For this setting, make sure that the Current thresh. CB open param-
eter is set lower than the lowest possible load current. If this is not ensured,
open-circuit is detected continuously and each current value that exceeds
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is interpreted as closure.

Parameter: Min. time feeder open

• Recommended setting value (_:4681:103) Min. time feeder open = 0.25 s


To avoid incorrect closure detection, the protected object must be switched off for the minimum time of Min.
time feeder open before the Closure indication can become active. You define the duration of the
release delay with the Min. time feeder open parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.25 s.

Parameter: Action time after closure

• Recommended setting value (_:4681:102) Action time after closure = 0.05 s


The Closure indication signals detected closure. With the Action time after closure parameter, you
set the Closure indication to a defined length.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.05 s.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 257
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

5.2.7.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)

Logic

[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-22 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block

The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.

258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.

5.2.7.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)

NOTE

i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open


With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
Parameter Value Description
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure that
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open
condition in at least one phase.
• The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current

• Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A


With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal
Cold-load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.

Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion

• Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s


With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.

Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed

• Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s


With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.

Parameter: Min. CB open time

• Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s


With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is acti-
vated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 259
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase

5.2.7.10 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating • I open I open
mode • CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:103 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 600 s 600 s
delay curr.crit.
_:104 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

5.2.7.11 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O

260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

5.3.1 Overview

In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protection object or equipment that allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence
voltage measurement via the 3-phase voltage measuring point. The function group also contains the opera-
tional measurement for the protected object or equipment (see chapter 9 Measured Values, Energy Values,
and Supervision of the Primary System).

5.3.2 Structure of the Function Group

The Voltage-current 1-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker
function group.

[dw1spstr-040117-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-23 Structure of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group

Interface with Measuring Points


You connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group to the current and voltage measuring points via the
interfaces to the measuring points. At least one measuring point has to be connected. The other is optional.
This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the
interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
The function group has the following interfaces to the measuring points:
• 1-phase current
The 1-phase current measured values are provided via this interface.
You can only connect a 1-phase current measuring point to the 1-phase current interface.

• Voltage 1-phase or Voltage 3-phase


You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with a 1‑phase or
a 3-phase measuring point. The calculated zero-sequence voltage or the measured residual voltage are
available for connection with a 3-phase measuring point. The phase-to-ground voltages are not available
in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase. You can use both connection types at the same time.
You configure the 1-phase voltage measuring points via the voltage interface (see the following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 261
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

[scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-24 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group

If you select the voltage type VN broken-delta for the 1-phase voltage measuring point in the measuring
point routing (see the following figure), the device measures the residual voltage VN at the broken-delta
winding. The residual voltage is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-sequence voltage. This
converted voltage is used as the voltage input for all functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase function
group.

[scvnopen, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-25 Selection of the VN broken-delta Voltage Type for the 1-Phase Voltage Measuring Point

The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the 3-phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is
available via the voltage interface (see figure below).

[scVI1ph_V3ph, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-26 Connecting Measuring Points 3-Phase Voltage and 1-Phase Current to the 1-Phase Voltage-
Current Function Group

You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with precisely one 3-
phase voltage measuring point. 3 types of 3-phase voltage measuring-point connection are supported. With
the different connection types, the type of voltage input for the functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase
function group also changes.

262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

The following table shows the properties of the voltage input for the Voltage-current 1-phase function group
depending on the connection types.
Connection Type of the 3- Voltage Input
Phase Voltage Measuring
Point
3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages
and used as a voltage input for all functions.
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN The residual voltage VN is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN sequence voltage. This converted voltage is used as a voltage input for func-
tions.

Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group


All required data is exchanged between the Voltage-current 1-phase function group and the Circuit-breaker
function group via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This
assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the inter-
faces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix. If the interface is not
connected, the functions operate as supervision functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group.

[sc1stspc-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-27 Connecting Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

Fundamental Components
The fundamental components are always present in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the fundamental components of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group:

Table 5-3 Fundamental Components of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group

Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to


I 1-phase current A A Parameter Rated operating current
V7 1-phase voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating voltage
V08 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage /√3
VN9 Residual Voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage /√3

You can find the parameters Rated operating current and Rated operating voltage in the
General function block of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group.

7 The 1-phase voltage V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.
8 The zero-sequence voltage V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the 3-phase phase-to-ground
voltage connection type.
9 The residual voltage VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the connection type 3-phase phase-

to-ground voltage + VN or 3-phase phase-to-phase voltage + VN.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 263
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

Operational Measured Values


The operational measured values are not preconfigured in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group. You
can instantiate them in the function group or delete them from the function group. You can find the opera-
tional measured values in the DIGSI library, in the folder FG Voltage-current 1-phase under Measurements
→ Operational values.

[scui1pom, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-28 Operational Measured Values

Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group

Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to


I 1-phase current A A Parameter Rated operating current
V10 1-phase voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating voltage
VN 11 Residual voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
V012 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Parameter Rated frequency
P Active power MW W Parameter Rated apparent power
Q Reactive power Mvar var Parameter Rated apparent power

You can find the parameters Rated operating current, Rated operating voltage, and Rated
apparent power in the General function block of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group. You can
find the parameter Rated frequency in the General function block of the Device settings.

NOTE

i The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value.
The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1-phase current are connected to
the function group. If the connected voltage is a phase-to-ground voltage (VA, VB , VC) or any voltage Vx,
the specific power values are displayed. Otherwise the power is displayed as not available.

5.3.3 Application and Setting Notes

NOTE

i Prior to creation of the protection functions in the function group, these functions should first be
connected to the appropriateCircuit-breaker function group.

10 Vis only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.


11 VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point of the type 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN or 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN.
12 V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point of the type 3 ph-to-gnd voltages.

264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

Parameter: Rated current

• Default setting (_:9421:101) Rated current = 1000 A


The (_:9421:101) Rated current parameter is used to set the primary rated current of the protected
object. The (_:9421:101) Rated current specified here is the reference value for the percentage-meas-
ured values and setting values made in percentages.

Parameter: Rated voltage

• Default setting (_:9421:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV


With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage of the protected object. The Rated
voltage set here is the reference value for all voltage-related percentage values in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group.
If you connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with the 1-phase measuring point, the following
applies:
• With connection type VAB, VBC, VCB, or VN , you set the Rated voltage parameter as the phase-to-phase
voltage.

• With the connection type VA, VB, VC, or VN (broken-delta winding), you set the Rated voltage parameter as the
phase-to-ground voltage.

• With the connection type VX, you set the Rated voltage parameter as either the phase-to-phase
voltage or the phase-to-ground voltage

Parameter: P, Q sign

• Default setting (_:9421:150) P, Q sign = not reversed


The power values are set at the factory so that power in the direction of the protected object is considered
positive. You can also define the power output by the protected object as positive. With the P, Q sign
parameter, you can invert the signs of active and reactive power. This inversion has no effect on the protec-
tion functions.

5.3.4 Write-Protected Settings

The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting
Rated values
_:9421:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
Power-system data
_:9421:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9421:223 General:CT mismatch M 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
I-1ph

5.3.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Rated values
_:9421:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100 000 A 1000 A
_:9421:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 265
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Measurements
_:9421:150 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

5.3.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:9421:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9421:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Reset LED Group
_:13381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:13381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O

266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase

5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase

5.4.1 Overview

In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also
contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for
example, Voltage protection or Frequency protection.

5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group

The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.

[dw3spann-300913, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-29 Structure of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

Interface with Measuring Points


You connect the Voltage 3-phase function group to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connec-
tions. To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.

[sc3span1-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-30 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. You can find more information in chapter
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.

Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group


All required data is exchanged between the Voltage 3-phase function group and the Circuit-breaker function
group via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 267
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase

In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage 3-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This assign-
ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree → Connect function group. To connect the interfaces, set a
cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.

[sc3span2-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-31 Connecting Voltage 3-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

Operational Measured Values


The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage 3-phase function group and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase function group:

Table 5-5 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referenced to


VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency

5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes

NOTE

i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should first connect hese functions to
the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.

Parameter: Rated voltage

• Default setting (_:9421:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV


With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is
the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.

5.4.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Rated values
_:9421:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV

268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase

5.4.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:9421:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9421:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
RDT
_:4741:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:4741:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 269
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

5.5.1 Overview

The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can
use for this device type. The following figure shows the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker function
group.

[scbicb1p-241013, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-32 Circuit-Breaker Function Group - Example of the Functional Scope

These functions are described in the chapters Protection and automation functions and Control functionali-
ties.

5.5.2 Structure of the Function Group

Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker

270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

• Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions

• Detection of manual closing

• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-Breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.

[dwfgalle-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-33 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with:


• Measuring points
• Protection function groups, for example, the Line protection function group

Interfaces with Measuring Points


The function group contains the measured values needed from the measuring points associated with this
function group.
If an application template is used, the function group is connected to the measuring point of the 3-phase line
current because this link is essential. It may be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the func-
tion group, depending on the nature of the user functions used. Configuration is carried out using the Func-
tion-group connections editor in DIGSI 5. For more information about this, refer to chapter 2.1 Function
Embedding in the Device.
If a user function, for example, synchronization, is used in the function group but the required measuring
point has not linked to it, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the
missing measuring-point connection.
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with the following measuring points:
• 3-phase line current
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. The function group must
always be connected to this measuring point.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 271
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

• Voltage
The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system or 1-phase voltage are supplied via this interface.
Depending on the connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are for
example, VA, VB, VC of the line or feeder.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if a user function that needs the
measurand of the 3-phase voltage system is used, for example, to make use of the Synchronization or
Automatic reclosing function.

• Sync voltage
A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or a 3-
phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is supplied
via this interface.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.

Interface with Protection-Function Groups


All required data is exchanged between the Protection and Circuit-breaker function groups via the interface
with the Protection function group. This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of the
protection functions sent in the direction of the circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-
breaker condition information in the direction of the protection function groups.
If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this connection is
essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection using the Function group connections
editor in DIGSI 5.
You can find more detailed information in the chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
If this link is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Besides the general assignments of the Protection-function group or groups to the Circuit-breaker function
groups, you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail.
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated?
• Which protection functions activate the Automatic reclosing function?

• Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function?


You can find more detailed information about this configuration in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device.

5.5.3 Application and Setting Notes

Interface with Measuring Points


The interface with the 3-phase power system must have been configured. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 reports an
inconsistency.
If the Synchronization function is used, the measuring points that represent voltages V1 and V2 of the parts
of the power system to be synchronized must be connected.
You can find more detailed information in the chapter Synchronization 7.5.1 Overview of Functions.
The Automatic reclosing function provides the auxiliary functions Dead-line check and Reduced dead time.
For these auxiliary functions, the 3-phase voltage system has to be measured. If you want to use these auxil-
iary functions, the measuring point of the 3-phase voltage system must be connected to the Voltage function
group interface. This link is also necessary if the Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time
function type is used.

Interface with Protection-Function Groups


The Line protection-function group is linked to 2 circuit breakers (2 Circuit-breaker function groups) for 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layouts.

Parameter: Rated normal current for % values

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated normal current = 1000 A

272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

With the Rated normal current parameter, you set the primary current which serves as a reference for all
current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured
values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

Parameter: Rated voltage for % values

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated voltage = 400 kV


With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary voltage, which serves as a reference for all voltage-
related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured values
and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

Parameter: Current threshold circuit breaker open

• Default setting (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A


With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you specify the threshold value below which the circuit-
breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the circuit-breaker pole
is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value. If parasitic currents (for example, due to induction)
are excluded with the line deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high degree of
sensitivity, to 0.05 A for example.
If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary
purposes.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:2311:113) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether 1-pole operate is permitted or
whether only 3-pole operate should be carried out.
Parameter Value Description
yes The 3-pole coupling in the Trip logic function block (see 5.5.4.1 Function
Description) decides whether the current phase-selective pickup results in a
1-pole or a 3-pole operate command.
The basic prerequisite for 1-pole tripping is the existence of permission for
1-pole operate by the Automatic reclosing function.
1-pole operate is therefore only practical on overhead lines. The circuit
breakers for these lines must be suitable for 1-pole operate at both ends.
no The function always causes 3-pole operate of the circuit breaker.

5.5.4 Trip Logic

5.5.4.1 Function Description


The Trip logic function block receives the pickup and group operate indications from the Protection function
group or from the Protection function groups and forms the protection trip command that is transmitted to
the Circuit-breaker function block. A 3-pole operate indication can also come from automatic reclosing
(AREC) (if tripping was initiated for 1-pole and AREC cannot reclose).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 273
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.5.5.1 Overview). The command output time is also effective here. In the trip logic, the decision is made
whether to trigger 1-pole tripping or not (3-pole coupling) (see Figure 5-34).
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 5-35).

[loausl1p-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-34 1-Pole or 3-Pole Operate and 3-Pole Coupling

1-Pole or 3-Pole Operate


Under certain circumstances, the device can cause 1-pole operate in the event of 1-phase or 2-phase faults.
The device always causes 3-pole operate in the event of 3-phase short circuits.
The preconditions for 1-pole operate are:
• The device is designed for 1-pole operate (see Order reference).
• The tripping protection function can generate 1-pole operate indications and is set accordingly (1-pole
operate allowed parameter set to yes).

• The circuit-breaker function group allows 1-pole operate.


To do this, set the 1-pole operate allowed parameter in the Circuit-breaker function group (see
General parameters of the function group) to yes .

• The Automatic reclosing function is active and generates the 79 permits 1-pole trip signal. The
function thus indicates that it is healthy for 1-pole reclosing after 1-pole operate.

274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

All other cases result in 3-pole operate.

3-Pole Coupling
3-pole coupling describes the situation when the trip logic decides to execute 3-pole tripping despite the pres-
ence of a 1-pole operate indication.
This may be the case under the following circumstances:
• The Automatic reclosing function cannot execute a 1-pole cycle. This is expressed by the cleared signal
79 permits 1-pole trip.

• If an upstream device has caused 1-pole tripping and the device in question detects this pole as open (via
the process monitor in the Line protection function group) and the device in question detects a fault in
another phase.

• If 1-pole tripping reoccurs within 50 ms after an instance of 1-pole tripping has been cleared

• If the permission for 1-pole tripping is canceled by the AR (internal or external) after a cleared 1-pole trip
(during the 1-pole pause)
By default, 3-pole coupling is carried out based on the cumulative operate indication. Optionally, the group
pickup indication can also be taken into account (parameter 3-pole coupling). In this case, every multi-
phase pickup results in a 3-pole coupling, including pickups of different phases from different stages/func-
tions.

2-Phase Short-Circuits
For 2-pole faults, you set the behavior with the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit.
• 3-pole
Tripping is executed in the event of 2-pole faults.

• 1-pole, leading phase


1-pole tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole faults without grounding. The leading phase is tripped
(for more information, see Table 5-6). In the event of a BC fault, for example, pole B is tripped. 3-pole
tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole faults with grounding.

• 1-pole, lagging phase


1-pole tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole faults without grounding. The lagging phase is tripped.
In the event of a BC fault, for example, pole C is tripped. 3-pole tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole
faults with grounding.

Coupling Table
The following table shows the coupling table for Figure 5-34. This table also explains its impact on 2-phase
faults.

Table 5-6 Coupling

Input Output
Impact of the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit
3-pole 1-pole, leading phase 1-pole, lagging phase
A B C Groun A B C A B C A B C
d
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 275
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

Input Output
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Reset of Trip Command

[loauslbe-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-35 Reset of Trip Command

Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-34).


You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of
trip command. The following setting options are available:
• with dropout
If the function that initiated tripping resets its operate indication, the trip command is reset. This occurs
typically with dropout. Resetting of the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the circuit-
breaker position.

• with I<

276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

• with I< & aux.contact


With the criteria with I< and with I< & aux.contact, the position of the circuit breaker is also
taken into account as a further criterion in addition to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indi-
cation is reset). You can select whether the state is determined by means of the current (with I<) or by
means of the current in conjunction with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (with I< &
aux.contact). The behavior of these setting options only differs in one situation of the circuit-breaker
positon. If the circuit breaker is in the opening position, the trip command is reset in the case of the
option with I<, whereas it is not reset yet in the case of the option with with I< & aux.contact.
The opening position is detected if the auxiliary contacts still detect the circuit breaker as being closed
and opening is detected via the decreasing current flow.
As long as the circuit breaker is detected unambiguously as closed (fully closed), the trip command will
not be reset with these setting options.
The information about the position of the circuit breaker and the determination of the various positions is
supplied by the Circuit-breaker position recognition function block. You can find more information on
this in chapter 5.5.6.1 Overview.

5.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: 1-pole tripping allowed


For this, see 5.5.3 Application and Setting Notes.

Parameter: 3-pole coupling

• Default setting (_:5341:102) 3-pole coupling = with trip

Parameter Value Description


with trip With this setting, every multipole trip command results in 3-pole tripping. If
a 1-phase short circuit is present within the tripping zone and any other
fault is present outside the zone, 1-pole tripping is possible.
Even an additional fault during 1-pole tripping also results in 3-pole
coupling only if it occurs within the tripping zone.
with pickup With this setting every multiphase pickup results in a 3-pole trip, even if
only one 1-phase ground fault is present in the tripping zone and one
further fault is detected, for example due to overcurrent.
Even if a 1-pole trip command is pending, any further pickup will result in a
3-pole coupling.

EXAMPLE
If two 1-phase ground faults occur on different lines - for example, including parallel lines - (see Figure 5-36),
the protection devices will detect fault types A-B-E at all 4 line ends, that is, with a pickup characteristic corre-
sponding to a 2-phase ground fault. However, since there is only one 1-phase short circuit on each of the 2
lines, it is desirable to have a short 1-pole interruption on each of these 2 lines. This is possible with a setting
with trip command. Each of the 4 devices detects an internal 1-phase short circuit and can therefore cause 1-
pole tripping.

[dwfehler-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-36 Multiphase Short Circuit on a Double Line

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 277
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

In some cases, 3-pole disconnection works better for this fault type: If the double line is situated close to a
large generator block (see Figure 5-37). For the generator, both 1-phase ground faults are manifested as
double ground faults with a correspondingly high dynamic load of the turbine shaft. For a setting with pickup,
both lines are deactivated since each device detects A-B-E – that is, a multiphase short circuit – upon pickup.

[dwgenfeh-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-37 Multiphase Short Circuit on a Double Line Close to the Generator

Parameter: Tripping behavior with 2-phase short circuit

• Default setting (_:5341:101) Trip at 2ph short circuit = 1-pole, leading phase
With the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit, you determine whether the short-circuit protection
functions only result in 1-pole tripping in the event of an isolated 2-phase fault (without ground contact),
provided 1-pole tripping is possible and allowed. This enables a 1-phase interrupt cycle for this fault type. In
this case, you determine which of the 2 phases – the leading (1-pole, leading phase) or the lagging
phase (1-pole, lagging phase) – is tripped.

NOTE

i If you want to use this option, bear in mind that phase selection is the same throughout the power system
and at the ends of a line.

If 3-pole tripping is to be executed in the event of this fault type, select the 3-pole setting.

Parameter: Reset of trip command

• Recommended setting value (_:5341:103) Reset of trip command = with I<

Parameter Value Description


with I< The trip command will be reset under the following conditions:
• Dropout of the tripping function
• The current drops below the setting value of the parameter (_:
2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
with I< & aux.contact The trip command will be reset under the following conditions:
• The current drops below the setting value of the parameter (_:
2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
• The circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports that the breaker is open.
This setting option assumes that the setting of the auxiliary contact has
been routed via a binary input (for more information, see
5.5.5.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further
Information).
with dropout The setting option is useful if the load current in the system cannot be inter-
rupted during the protection device test and the test current is fed in
parallel with the load current.
The setting option can be selected for special applications in which the trip
command does not result in complete interruption of the current in every
case. In this case, the trip command is reset if the pickup of the tripping
protection function drops out.

278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

5.5.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Trip logic
_:101 Trip logic:Trip at 2ph short • 3-pole 3-pole
circuit • 1-pole, leading phase
• 1-pole, lagging phase
_:102 Trip logic:3-pole coupling • with pickup with trip
• with trip
_:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip • with I< with I<
command • with I< & aux.contact
• with dropout

5.5.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Trip logic
_:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O

5.5.5 Circuit Breaker

5.5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical circuit breaker in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
• Operation of the circuit breaker (CB)
• Detection of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts

• Detection of other circuit-breaker information


The Circuit-breaker function block also provides information about:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking current, breaking voltage, and breaking frequency

• Summation breaking current

5.5.5.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker


The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command
• Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations

• Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of automatic reclosing or control operations


Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection func-
tions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the
Circuit-breaker function block is generated there. 1-pole or 3-pole tripping is possible depending on the
configuration, parameterization or even the protection function (see also 5.5.4.1 Function Description).
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals (see Table 5-7)
that must be routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 279
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

[loaussch-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-38 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

Table 5-7 Description of the Output Signals

Signal Description Routing Options


Trip/open cmd. 3-pole This signal executes all 3-pole tripping and opening • Unlatched
operations. • Only saved in
The Output time parameter affects the signal. the event of
The signal is pending for the duration of this period, protection trip-
with the following exceptions: ping (not when
opened)
• Only when switched off by the control:
The signal is reset before expiration of the period
if the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
The signal remains active as long as the trip
command is still active after expiration of the
period (see also 5.5.4.1 Function Description).
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
With the routing option Only saved in the
event of tripping, the signal remains pending
until it is acknowledged manually. This only
applies for protection tripping.
Trip only pole A This signal only executes 1-pole tripping for phase A. Normal routing
If 3-pole tripping occurs while a 1-pole trip signal is
active, the 1-pole signal is canceled.
The signal is active for as long as the trip command is
active, but at least for the duration of the output
time.
Trip only pole B This signal only executes 1-pole tripping for phase B. Normal routing
If 3-pole tripping occurs while a 1-pole trip signal is
active, the 1-pole signal is canceled.
The signal is active for as long as the trip command is
active, but at least for the duration of the output
time.

280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

Signal Description Routing Options


Trip only pole C This signal only executes 1-pole tripping for phase C. Normal routing
If 3-pole tripping occurs while a 1-pole trip signal is
active, the 1-pole signal is canceled.
The signal is active for as long as the trip command is
active, but at least for the duration of the output
time.
Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of the output
time, with the following exception: The signal is
canceled before expiration of the period if the auxil-
iary contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed
before expiration of the period.
Closing operations are always 3-pole operations.
Command active This signal is active if one of the following binary Normal routing
outputs is active:
• Trip/open cmd. 3-pole
• Close command
The binary outputs are active as long as a switching
command is being executed by the control.

5.5.5.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information


To determine the circuit-breaker position, the Circuit-breaker function block provides position signals. These
signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to 2 binary
inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.

[loerfass-091210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-39 Detection of the Circuit-Breaker Information

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 281
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

Signal Type Description


Position 3-pole DPC Detection of the 3-pole circuit-breaker switch position.
The position 3-pole circuit breaker open and/or the position 3-pole
circuit breaker closed can be detected by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Detection of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase A.
phsA The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase A open and/or the position 1-
pole circuit-breaker phase A closed can be detected by routing to 1 or 2
binary inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Detection of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase B.
phsB The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase B open and/or the position 1-
pole circuit-breaker phase B closed can be detected by routing to 1 or 2
binary inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Detection of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase C.
phsC The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase C open and/or the position 1-
pole circuit-breaker phase C closed can be detected by routing to 1 or 2
binary inputs.

The signal or signals must be routed to the binary inputs that are connected to the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The open and closed signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of
parallel routing is that it can be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If you route only one
signal (open or closed), you cannot determine an intermediate position or a disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Open SPS The circuit-breaker position is open.
Closed SPS The circuit-breaker position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS The circuit-breaker position is in intermediate position.
Disturbed position SPS The circuit-breaker position is in disturbed position.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.

The following table shows the additional input signals:


Signal Type Description
>Acquisition SPS This is used to activate acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxil-
blocking iary contacts (see chapter Other functions 3.9.3 Persistent Commands
for a description of acquisition blocking).
>Reset SPS This is used to reset acquisition blocking and manual updating of the
AcqBlk&Subst circuit breaker. If the signal is active, acquisition blocking and manual
updating are reset.
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an Open-
Closed-Open cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip.
The signal is used in the Automatic reclosing and Circuit-breaker test
functions.

The following table shows an additional output signal:


External health SPS This can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit breaker.
For this, all failure information of the circuit breaker must be detected
via a binary input. This failure information can set the appropriate state
of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using the
BUILD_ENS block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.

282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

5.5.5.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever an automatic reclosing is not present or
the AREC has been switched off.

Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression


In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not to be issued if the circuit breaker is to be reclosed automatically after
tripping or if it is to be closed or opened via the control. The alarm is only to be issued in the event of final
tripping.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Alarm suppression signal can be used to suppress the alarm.
The Alarm suppression signal is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• The definitive protection tripping is not present.
• The integrated automatic reclosing function executes a closure.

• The integrated control executes a closure or an opening action.

• The Manual close function detects an external closing.


You can find further information about its use in 5.5.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.

[lounterd-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-40 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

5.5.5.5 Tripping and Opening Information


When a trip or opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the
fault log.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 283
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

[loausloe-081210-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-41 Breaking Information

The following statistics information is saved for the circuit breaker:


• Number of switching cycles:
All tripping, opening, and closing operations are counted.

• Number of closings by the automatic reclosing function, broken down according to 1-pole and 3-pole as
well as 1st cycle and other cycles

• Total of breaking currents, cumulative and pole-selective


The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..

[lo_statistics information circuit-breaker, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-42 Statistics Information about the Circuit Breaker

5.5.5.6 Application and Setting Notes

Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker


Figure 5-43 shows the necessary routings for the device:
• 1-pole and 3-pole tripping via the protection
• 3-pole opening via the control

• 3-pole closing by the automatic reclosing or via the control

284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

[loansteu-071210-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-43 Activation of the Circuit Breaker

NOTE

i Note that you must route the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signal for 3-pole tripping/opening to all 3 binary
inputs.

By routing the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1, 1.5, and
2‑pole activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description of this in chapter 7.2.2.3 Connec-
tion Variants of the Circuit Breaker.

NOTE

i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.

Routings for Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position


For certain functions of the device, it is useful to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. The following shows a number of examples:
• Circuit-breaker position recognition function block
• Circuit-breaker failure protection function

• Control function block


The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Depending on the application, Siemens recommends the following different interfaces for the auxiliary
contacts:
• The device performs protection and automatic reclosing functions without any control functionality.
For optimal performance of the protection and automatic reclosing functions, Siemens recommends
detecting the Pole closed information selectively via the auxiliary contacts.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 285
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

[loauswer-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-44 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
Device

Perform the routing to the binary input as C_ (closed). The following figure shows the recommended routing,
in which H stands for active with voltage.

[scpolges-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-45 Pole Closed: Routing for the Acquisition of Pole Closed Information

• The device performs protection, automatic reclosing, and control functions


The information Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles must also be detected via auxiliary
contacts to ensure optimum operation of the control functionality. The device derives the information
Circuit breaker is closed in 3 poles (for the control functionality) automatically from the
1‑pole information.

[loausw3p-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-46 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection and
Control Device

286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

Execute the routing of the Position 3-pole signal as O_ (open). The following figure shows the recom-
mended routing, in which H stands for active with voltage.

[scpoloff-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-47 Routing for Detection of the Information: Circuit Breaker 3-Pole Open

Depending on the design of the circuit breaker, other auxiliary contacts can be available in the system. In this
case, the device allows all routing options and acquires the necessary information automatically. Since all
routing options are possible on the device, there is no need for auxiliary contacts to be connected in series.
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for the control functions.

Parameter: Output time

• Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s


The Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit breaker.

! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.

Parameter: Indicat. of breaking values

• Default setting (_:105) Indicat. of breaking values = always


With the parameter Indicat. of breaking values, you specify whether the measured values are to be
reported if the circuit breaker is opened via the control function.
Parameter Value Description
always With this setting, the measured values are reported if the circuit breaker is
opened either via the control function or via the trip command of a protec-
tion function.
with trip With this setting, the measured values are only reported if the circuit
breaker is opened via the trip command of a protection function.

Measured Values
When a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault
log:
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 287
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

• Break. voltage phs A


• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
The measured value Break. current 3I0/IN is the neutral-point current. Dependent on the connection
type of the measuring point I-3ph that is connected with the Circuit-breaker function group, the neutral-
point current differs as follows:
Connection Type of the Meas- Neutral-Point Current
uring Point I-3ph
3-phase Calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
3-phase + IN Measured neutral-point current IN
3-phase + IN-separate If the secondary ground current exceeds the linear section of the sensitive
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep measuring input (1.6 Irated) with sensitive current transformers, the
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep neutral-point current of the measured IN is switched to the calculated 3I0.

Output Signal: Indication Suppression


Whereas in the case of feeders without an automatic reclosing function every trip command is final due to a
protection function, the use of an automatic reclosing function should only cause the motion detector of the
circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the circuit breaker) to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is
definitive (see next figure for more details). Likewise, a tripping alarm should not be triggered for switching
operations by the control.
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device
(output signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is
always closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm.
You can find more detailed information in the logic in chapter 5.5.5.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary
Contacts and Further Information.

[loschalt-081210-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-48 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

5.5.6 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary


Functions

5.5.6.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow. The determination is performed phase-segregated.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see 5.5.4.1 Function Description)
• Detection of manual closing (see 5.5.7.1 Function Description)

• Process monitor (see 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions)

288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

The specified chapters describe how the protection-related additional functions process the information of this
function block.
The control does not use this information. It evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.

[lozust1p-170611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-49 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition Function

Based on the connection between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow shown in
Figure 5-49, the circuit-breaker position can assume the following positions separately for each phase: The
following table shows the possible circuit-breaker positions:
Circuit-Breaker Position, Description
Phase-Segregated
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.
Possibly open, possibly These positions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the
closed routing of the auxiliary contacts and the position can no longer be deter-
mined reliably. These uncertain positions are evaluated differently by
certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring position that results when, while a trip
command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current falling
below the threshold value is detected because the current-flow criterion
takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact can open.

5.5.7 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)

5.5.7.1 Function Description

Detection of Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)


The Manual closure function block detects any closure carried out by hand. This information is used in the
Automatic reclosing (AREC) and Process monitor functions (within protection function groups).
You will find detailed information in the chapters AREC and Process monitor.
The following figure shows the logic for manual closure detection.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 289
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

[loghande-091210-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 5-50 Logic for Manual Closure Detection

External Manual Closure


An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input. The input signal can
also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. For this reason, detection is
suppressed in the event of a close command by the AREC function. Detection via the input signal >Input is
also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.

Internal Manual Closure


Manual closure is detected in all cases if a close command is transmitted by the internal control function of
the device. This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to inter-
locking.

5.5.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Input Signals: >Input, >Blocking of Manual Closure


In practice, the input signal >Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing
coil (see following figure).

[losteuer-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-51 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil

Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed automatically
in the event of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.

290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to prompt detection of a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
assured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.

• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.

Parameter: Action time

• Recommended setting value (_:6541:101) Action time = 0.30 s


In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is
extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time.
Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms.

Parameter: CB open dropout delay

• Default setting (_:102) CB open dropout delay = 0 ms


With the CB open dropout delay parameter, you can maintain the effectiveness of the internal indication
CB open for the set time. If the input signal >Input becomes active with a delay after an external close
command, the indication (_:300) Detected is issued as long as the dropout delay is effective (see
Figure 5-50).

5.5.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Manual close
_:101 Manual close:Action 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
time
_:102 Manual close:CB open 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
dropout delay

5.5.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Manual close
_:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O

5.5.8 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 291
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP • unbalancing unbalancing
• I> query

5.5.9 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Tripping current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O

292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.1 Overview

The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, analog plug-in modules, or measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.

[sc20maee-250816-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-52 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI

5.6.2 Structure of the Function Group

If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library in order to map the RTD units.
If the device is connected to a power-plant control system or another protection device, you must load one or
more Temperature acquisition via protocols functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library to form the protocols.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 293
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[dwstrthe, 3, en_US]

Figure 5-53 Structure of the Analog Unit Function Group

Gray: Optionally wired, optionally available


White: Always wired, always available

The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function
group provides for example measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit , a measuring
transducer or via protocols. These measured temperature values are available for all protection function
groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can operate simultaneously.
The structure of the function RTD unit serial is identical to the structure of the function RTD unit Ether..
The function 20-mA unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can operate simultaneously. The structure of the function 20-mA unit serial is identical to the structure of the
function 20-mA unit Ether..

294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

The function Temperature acquisition via protocols has 2 stage types: The Temperature acquisition via
PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 and the Temperature acquisition via GOOSE. One instance of the Temperature
acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 is preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 12 instances
can operate simultaneously for both stage types.

5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet

5.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit

• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure

• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display

• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function


The function 20-mA unit Ether. can work only in the function group Analog units. A maximum of 4 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. contains input and output channels which can be configured independently
of one another.

[dwstrfn2-150113-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-54 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 295
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet

Logic

[lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-55 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet

Communication with 20-mA Unit


The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a
connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab-
lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20-mA unit.
Ether.. For the connection to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be specified.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 5.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.
The 20-mA measurement unit 7XV5674 is supported.

Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

Table 5-8 Error Responses

Error Description Status Health


The function 20-mA unit Ether. cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. sends TCP settings to Alarm
the communication module, which evidently would
like to connect to the 20-mA unit via a serial protocol.
This communication module does not establish a
connection to the 20-mA unit.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the 20-mA unit causes a time-out indication.

296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Error Description Status Health


A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the 20-mA unit for 9 sec.

The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.

5.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Port

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J


Use the Port setting to define the port connecting the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device.

Parameter: IP address

• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1


With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the 20-mA unit connected to the communication
module via the TCP protocol. You must assign each 20-mA unit an unambiguous IP address. The IP address to
be set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts
with other IP addresses in the network. First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20-mA unit. Then specify the
IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.

Settings on the 20-mA Unit


The 7XV5674 20-mA unit is set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter's Ethernet interface.
Set Modbus TCP as bus protocol/operating mode.
You can find detailed notes on the settings in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.energy.siemens.com).

5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel

Logic

[lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-56 Logic Diagram of the Function 20-mA Channel

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 297
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.

Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre-
sponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities such as
temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the 20-mA
channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated values are
available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.

Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from
a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.

[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-57 Settings for Example 1

In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA means
a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100. The resolution (decimal
place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.

[dwknges3-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-58 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)

298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).

[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-59 Settings for Example 2

[dwknges2-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-60 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Unit (Example 2)

In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.

Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 299
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Table 5-9 Error Responses

Error Description Status Health Error Status


The input value lies outside the OK Yes
given limits
Channel not connected OK No

5.6.3.6 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Unit

• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C


You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.

Parameter: Conversion factor

• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100


The Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.

Parameter: Resolution

• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1


The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution.

Parameter: Range active

• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false


If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA.
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.

Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor

• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20.000 mA

• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100

• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4.000 mA

• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100


If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.

300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.3.7 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 301
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

5.6.3.8 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O

5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial

5.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit

• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure

• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display

• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit


The function 20-mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20-mA Unit Ether.. The mode of
operation is also identical. The only difference is that the measured values are transferred to the communica-
tion module via a serial connection instead of an Ethernet connection.
You can find more information in Chapter 5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.

5.6.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Port

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = Port J


With the Port setting, you specify the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external 20-mA unit.

Parameter: Channel number

• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number setting, you specify
the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication module inputs
are labeled with the channel numbers.

Parameter: Slave address

• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1


Use theSlave address setting to define the device address of the 20-mA unit. If only one 20-mA unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. Set the same device address as used with the 20-
mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a serial
bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when connecting 3 of
the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the Slave address setting in the 3 functions 20-mA Unit
Serial the same device address for each.

Parameter: Unit

• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C


You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.

Parameter: Conversion factor

• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100


The Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.

Parameter: Resolution

• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1


The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution.

Parameter: Range active

• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false


If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to 20
mA.
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor appear.

Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor

• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20 mA

• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100

• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4 mA

• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100


If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 303
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1
Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

5.6.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O

5.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit

5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit

Connection of the Communication Lines


Figure 5-61 shows how to connect the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug
is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-61 Connection of the 20-mA Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 305
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Adding a USART Module


Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).

[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-62 Insertion Position for a USART Module

Selecting the SUP Protocol


Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the 20-mA unit.

[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-63 Selecting the SUP Protocol

Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the
parameter Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.

NOTE

i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).

306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-64 Making the Communication Settings

With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see the
following figure).

[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-65 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Serial 1

Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
20‑mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1

• Baud rate: 9600

• Parity: no

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 307
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-66 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address

Finally, load the configuration in the device.

5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet

Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-67 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.

[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-67 Inserting an Ethernet Module

Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.

308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-68 Activation of the Protocol

This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).

[scautcp3-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-69 Selection of the Protocol

With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. 1 function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 309
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc20tcp4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-70 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1

Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.

[scautcp5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-71 Setting the Port and IP Address

Finally, load the configuration in the device.

5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs

5.6.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz for
all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the fault-
recorder function.

• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced from
the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in the
interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.

310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas pres-
sure, etc.

• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).

5.6.6.2 Structure of the Function


The function MT fast input works in the function group Analog units and contains the number of available
measuring-transducer inputs, depending on the hardware configuration. You can configure these channels
independently from one another either as current or voltage inputs.

[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-72 Structure/Embedding of the Function

5.6.6.3 Function Description


Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function, it will be visible in the project tree in the function
group Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder.
If you open the subdirectory MT fast input, you reach the setting sheet for the respective input (for more
details, see Application and Setting Notes).
The hardware is designed in such a way that either a current or a voltage can be processed at each input. Use
the corresponding terminals (see Hardware manual). Configure the input in accordance with the selected
connection (Parameter TD input-signal type). With the parameter Measuring window, you set the
measuring range with which the arithmetic mean value is determined. With the parameter Measuring
window, you also determine measurement speed for the input. For example, a setting of 100 ms means that
the measured value is updated every 100 ms.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 311
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scmuio212, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-73 Parameters of the Measuring-Transducer Channels.

The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA-channels (see chapter 5.6.3.5 20-mA
Channel).

5.6.6.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: TD input-signal type

• Default setting (_:101) TD input-signal type = Current input


With the parameterTD input-signal type you determine whether the measuring-transducer input
channel works as a Current input or as a Voltage input.
Make sure that the selected channel has also been wired correctly (see Hardware manual, Input and Output
Module IO212).

Parameter: Unit

• Default setting (_:103) Unit = A


With the parameter Unit, you set the physical unit of measurement of the measured values. The possible
setting values are listed in the settings table.

Parameter: Measuring window

• Default setting (_:142) Measuring window = 10 ms


With the parameter Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the arith-
metic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends setting the
top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for further
processing.

312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Parameter: Range active

• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false


If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA or
-10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to +20
mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate theRange active parameter, then 4 additional parametersUpper limit, Upper limit
- SensorLower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 5-73).

Parameter: Conversion factor

• Default setting (_:104) Conversion factor = 1.00


With the parameterConversion factor you can set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.

Parameter: Upper limit, Upper limit - Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
• Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
• Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00

• Default setting Lower limit = -20.00 mA

• Default setting Lower limit - Sensor = 1.00


With these setting parameters, you set the operating range of the measuring transducer as well as the conver-
sion of the values transmitted to the sensor values. Harmonize the operating range of the measuring trans-
ducer with the transmitter of the sensor. Using the free scalability of the system, you can meet different
requirements. The following figure shows the setting parameters in general terms.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 313
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-74 Scaling Principle

Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well
below 4 mA indicate a transmitter failure; currents around 0 mA indicate a broken wire. A sensor detecting a
temperature is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C and the lower value to
-100 °C. This results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the func-
tion calculates the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient
and foot point) are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied current
of 9.333 mA corresponds to a temperature of 0 °C.

314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-75 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1

NOTE

i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits are at approx. +20 mA and -20 mA or +10 V and -10 V.

Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly as
sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
• Upper limit = 10.00 V
• Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V

• Lower limit = -10.00 V

• Lower limit - Sensor = -10.00 V


With this setting, a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12-V measured value (see following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 315
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-76 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V

5.6.6.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


MT fast #
_:101 MT in #:TD input-signal • Voltage input Current input
type • Current input

316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:103 MT in #:Unit • % A
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh
_:142 MT in #:Measuring • 10 ms 10 ms
window • 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 5.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 4.00 mA

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 317
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor

5.6.6.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O

5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet

5.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit

• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function

• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

5.6.7.2 Structure of the Function


The RTD unit Ether. function can only work in the Analog units function group. A maximum of 20 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks.

[dwstrfnc-291112-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 5-77 Structure/Embedding of the Function

318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit

Logic

[lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-78 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function

Communication with an RTD Unit


The function is used to communicate with an RTD box connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec-
tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD box via the Ethernet interface, the RTD box
transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD box Ether. function. For the connection to be
established successfully, specific communication settings must be set, see chapter 5.6.7.4 Application and
Setting Notes.
The RTD box Ziehl TR1200 IP supports only an Ethernet connection of 10 MBit/s. A direct connection to a 100-
Mbit communication module is therefore not possible. For this reason, you must connect the RTD box to the
communication module via a 10/100 MBit/s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the transmis-
sion rates and adapts them accordingly. Further information can be found in the Application and setting
notes, see chapter 5.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes.

Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

Table 5-10 Error Responses

Error Description Status Health


The RTD unit Ether. function cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the RTD unit causes a time-out.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 319
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Error Description Status Health


A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the RTD unit for 9 sec.

The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.

5.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Port

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J


Use the Port parameter to define over which port the external RTD unit is connected to the SIPROTEC 5
device.
If you want to connect the external RTD unit to the integrated Ethernet interface, set the parameter Port =
Port J. If you want to connect the external RTD unit to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port
= Port F, Port E, Port P, or Port N.
You can connect directly the RTD unit to the device via the internal 10-Mbit Ethernet port J. If you operate the
RTD unit on another port via a 100-Mbit communication module, you need an interconnected 10/100-Mbit
autosensing switch, which adapts transmission rates accordingly.

Parameter: IP address

• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1


With the IP address parameter, you set the IP address of the RTD unit connected to the communication
module via the SUP protocol. Every RTD unit has to be assigned a unique IP address. The IP address to be set
depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts with
other IP addresses in the network. Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit. Then
specify the IP address parameter for the communication module to the same address.

Settings on the RTD Unit


The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its
Ethernet interface. Set the connection type of the sensors (3-wire connection or resistance value for 2-wire
connection), the idle state of the fault-indication relay, as well as the IP interface setting.
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the RTD
unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.
For an Ethernet connection to a SIPROTEC 5 device communicating with the RTD unit TR1200 IP via the SUP
protocol (Slave Unit Protocol), the Modbus TCP setting must be activated in the RTD unit. You can activate
the Modbus TCP protocol using the function keys under the tcP. → Mod / on menu item or with the Web
browser in the TCP/UDP Config tab. The RTD (RTD protocol) and UDP Port settings have no effect here. The
Modbus TCP port is permanently set to 502 and cannot be changed.

320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor

Logic

[lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-79 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block

Measured Temperature Value


The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the
RTD unit for the assigned sensor. 12 temperature sensor function blocks are always available in each RTD unit
function (both via Ethernet and serial), even if fewer sensors are connected to the RTD unit.
Various temperature sensor types are supported: Pt100, Ni100, and Ni120 sensors. The function block is noti-
fied regarding the selection of connected type via the Sensor type parameter.
The function block delivers a measured temperature value in °C or °F as an output variable. The measured
temperature value is available as an operational measured value and can be monitored by the Temperature
supervision function.

Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured
temperature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with
the following table:

Table 5-11 Error response

Error Description Health Status Error Status


Sensor or line short circuited Alarm Yes
Sensor or line interrupted Alarm Yes
Measured temperature value Alarm Yes
outside the valid measuring range
specified in the technical data. The
valid measuring range depends on
the sensor type.
Sensor not connected OK No

5.6.7.6 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Sensor type

• Default setting (_:11611:102) Sensor type = Pt 100


The Sensor type parameter is used to set the sensor element used. You can select between Pt 100, Ni
100 and Ni 120.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 321
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Parameter: Temperature unit


To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly.
Proceed as follows:
• In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings.
• In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.

• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.

[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-80 Change of the Display Between °C and °F

The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.

5.6.7.7 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type • Pt 100 Pt 100
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

5.6.7.8 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O

322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O

5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial

5.6.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit

• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature supervision function

• Monitors communication with the RTD unit


The RTD unit Serial function is set up structurally in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function. The
mode of operation is also identical (see 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ).

5.6.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Port

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = F


With the Port parameter, you set the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external RTD unit.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port = Port
F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.

Parameter: Channel number

• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1


A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number settings, you set the
channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication module
inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.

Parameter: Slave address

• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1


Use the Slave address parameter to define the device address of the RTD unit. If only one RTD unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. The same device address has to be set on the RTD
unit. The device address is important for distinguishing among several RTD units connected to a serial bus. Set
a unique device address (for example 1, 2 and 3 when connecting 3 RTD units) for each RTD unit and the same
device address for the parameter Slave address in the 3 RTD unit serial functions.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 323
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.8.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type • Pt 100 Pt 100
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

5.6.8.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O

5.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit

5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)

Connection of the Communication Lines


Figure 5-81 shows how you connect the RTD unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug is
connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-81 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device

324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Adding a USART Module


Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).

[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-82 Insertion Position for a USART Module

Selecting the SUP Protocol


Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit.

[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-83 Selecting the SUP Protocol

Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings
of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the parameter
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.

NOTE

i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 325
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-84 Making the Communication Settings

With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD unit serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).

[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-85 Analog-Unit Instance

Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
RTD box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first
time:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1

• Baud rate: 9600

• Parity: no

326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-86 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address

Finally, load the configuration in the device.

5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)

Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-87 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface port J.

[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-87 Inserting an Ethernet Module

Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 327
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-88 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation

This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).

[scautcp3-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-89 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (Base Module)

With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).

[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-90 Analog Unit Instance

Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to the
following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box.

328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[scautcp5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-91 Setting the Port and IP Address

Finally, load the configuration in the device.

5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors


Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit. Using this resistor, simulate a constant tempera-
ture. The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω.
If you want to simulate a changeable temperature, connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead
of a fixed resistor.

5.6.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols

5.6.10.1 Overview
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols:
• Obtains the temperature from a power-plant control system or from another protection device
• Processes the temperature, for example, supervises the temperature in the CFC

• Transfers the temperature to other protection devices

5.6.10.2 Structure of the Function


The function Temperature acquisition via protocols can work only in the function group Analog units. In
this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 12 stages Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850
The stage can obtain the temperature from a power-plant control system via PROFINET IO or via
IEC 61850.

• 12 stages Temperature acquisition via GOOSE


The stage can obtain the temperature from another SIPROTEC 5 protection device via GOOSE.
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols comes factory-set with 1 stage Temperature acquisi-
tion via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 329
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[dw_structure_TmpviaProt, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-92 Structure/Embedding of the Function

5.6.10.3 Stage Temperature Acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850

Logic

[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-93 Logic Diagram of the Stage

The stage processes the transmitted temperature via PROFINET IO or via IEC 61850.
• Via PROFINET IO, only the analog value of the temperature is transmitted.
• Via IEC 61850, the analog value of the temperature, the quality of the temperature, and the time stamp
are transmitted.

Temperature-Failure Indication
If the received temperature is invalid, the failure indication Temperature failure is issued.

Stage Application
The following figure shows the application example. The temperature sensor measures, for example the cold-
gas temperature of the generator and feeds it to the power-plant control system. In the SIPROTEC 5 protection
device, the function Temperature acquisition via protocols acquires the cold-gas temperature from the

330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

power-plant control system and processes the cold-gas temperature in the function. The function Tempera-
ture acquisition via protocols can also send the processed temperature value to other functions for further
processing.

[dw_AppEXP_IEC, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-94 Application Example

The following table explains the data.


Data Name Description
Tmp The variable is used to acquire the temperature via the protocol PROFINET IO or via the
protocol IEC 61850.
In the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, the data type is
APC.
Unit The parameter is used to select the unit °F or °C for the temperature which is acquired
from the power-plant control system.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 331
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Configuration Example
To acquire the temperature with the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, proceed
in DIGSI as follows:
• Via PROFINET IO
– In the project tree, select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select an Ethernet port of the device.
If the device has no Ethernet port, select Hardware catalog → SIRPOTEC 5 → Communication to
add one to the device.
– In the Properties view of the Ethernet port, select General → Ethernet addresses.
– Under IP protocol, set the IP address for the port.

[sc_PROFINET IP, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-95 IP Configuration


– In the Properties view of the Ethernet port, select General → Ethernet-interface settings.
– Under Communication protocols, change the setting value of the parameter Selected protocol to
PROFINET IO.

[sc_PROFINET_IO, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-96 Protocol Selection


– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Analog units.
– Instantiate the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom in the function group Analog units.
– In the project tree, select Device → Communication mapping.
– In the Communication mapping window, set Show protocol to PROFINET IO.

332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_PROFI_Filter, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-97 Protocol Filter


– In the column Signals, select Analog units → Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1 → Tmp.Ctl 1.
– Route the data Tmp in column R and set the value to 1.

[sc_PROFI_Setting, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-98 Signal Configuration


Now you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 to acquire the cold-
gas temperature via PROFINET IO.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 333
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

• Via IEC 61850


– In the project tree, select Device → Device information.
– In the Device information view, change the setting value of the parameter Edition to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
– In following dialog, click Yes.

[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-99 Confirmation of the IEC 61850 Edition Conversion

The IEC 61850 edition of the device changes to edition 2.

[sc_DeviceEdition, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-100 Converted IEC 61850 Edition


– In the project tree, select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select the port that you want to communicate via IEC 61850.
– In the Properties view of the port, select General → Ethernet addresses.
– Under IP protocol, set the IP address for the port.

334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-101 IP Configuration


– Select General → Ethernet-interface settings.
– Under Communication protocols, check IEC 61850-8-1.

[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-102 Protocol Selection


– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Analog units.
– Instantiate the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom in the function group Analog units.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 335
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

– Instantiate the function which requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function
group. The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following step.
– Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, change the setting values of the parameters
Temperature acquisition and Temperature via protocol to Protocol COM and
Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Ctl 1 respectively.

[sc_IEC61850_3, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-103 Parameter Configuration


– In the project tree, select Device → IEC 61850 structure.
– In the column Name, select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 → VIAC_STMP1.
– Active the data CTmp.

[sc_IEC61850_CGT, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-104 Data Selection


Now you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 to acquire the cold-
gas temperature via IEC 61850.

336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.10.4 Stage Temperature Acquisition via GOOSE

Logic

[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-105 Logic Diagram of the Stage

Temperature Failure Indication


If the received temperature is invalid, a failure indication Temperature failure is issued.

Stage Application
The following figure shows the application example. The temperature sensor measures, for example the cold-
gas temperature of the generator and feeds it to the SIPROTEC 5 device 2. In the SIPROTEC 5 protection device
1, the function Temperature acquisition via protocols acquires the cold-gas temperature from the
SIPROTEC 5 device 2 and processes the cold-gas temperature in the function. The function Temperature
acquisition via protocols can also send the processed temperature value to other functions for further
processing.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 337
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[dw_AppEXP_GOOSE, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-106 Application Example

The following table shows the explanations of the data:


Data Name Description
Tmp The variable is used to acquire the temperature via GOOSE.
In the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE, the input measured value with a
COM template is designed to acquire the data from another protection device.
Unit The parameter is used to select the unit °F or °C for the temperature which is acquired
from another protection device.

338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

Configuration Example

• Configure the source device.


– In the project tree, select Project → Device information.
– In the Device information view, change the setting value of the parameter Edition to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
The following dialog shows up. To acquire the cold-gas temperature, click Yes.

[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-107 Confirmation of the IEC 61850 Edition Conversion


– Select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select the port that you want to communicate with IEC 61850.
– In the Properties view of the port, select General → Ethernet addresses.
– Under IP protocol, set the IP address for the port.

[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-108 IP Configuration


– Select General → Ethernet-interface settings.
– Under Communication protocols, check IEC 61850-8-1.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 339
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-109 Protocol Selection


– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Analog units.
– Instantiate the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom in the function group Analog units.
– Select Device → IEC 61850 structure.
– In the column Name, select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 → VIAC_STMP1.
– Active the data CTmp.

[sc_IEC61850_CGT, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-110 Data Selection


Now the device can be used to send the cold-gas temperature to other devices.

340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

• Configure the destination device.


– In the project tree, select Device → Device information.
– In the Device information view, change the setting value of the parameter Edition to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
– In following dialog, click Yes.

[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-111 Confirmation of the IEC 61850 Edition Conversion

The IEC 61850 edition of the device changes to edition 2.

[sc_DeviceEdition, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-112 Converted IEC 61850 Edition


– In the project tree, select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select the port that you want to communicate with via GOOSE.
– In the Properties view of the port, select General → Ethernet addresses.
– Under IP protocol, set the IP address for the port.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 341
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-113 IP Configuration


– Select General → Ethernet-interface settings.
– Under Communication protocols, check IEC 61850-8-1.

[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-114 Protocol Selection


– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Analog units.
– Instantiate the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom in the function group Analog units.
– Instantiate the stage Tmp.GOOSE in the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom.

342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

– Select Device → Information routing.


– In the column Signals, select Analog units → Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1 → Tmp.Goose 1.
– Enter 1 in the column GOOSE for the data Tmp.

[sc_Station10, 1, en_US]

Signal Configuration
– In the project tree, select Device → Settings.
– Instantiate the function which requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function
group. The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following step.
– Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, change the setting values of the parameters
Temperature acquisition and Temperature via protocol to Protocol COM and
Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Goose 1 respectively.

[sc_GOOSE_CGT, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-115 Parameter Configuration


Now the device can be used to receive the cold-gas temperature from another device.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 343
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

• Connect the source device and the destination device.


– In the project tree, select IEC 61850 stations.
– Double-click Add new station and create a station.
– In the Properties view of the station, change the setting value of IEC Edition to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
– In following dialog, click Yes.

[sc_StationConfirmation, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-116 Confirmation of the IEC 61850 Edition Conversion

The IEC 61850 edition of the station changes to edition 2.

[sc_IECStation, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-117 Converted IEC 61850 Edition


– Assign the available devices to the IEC station.

344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_DeviceAssign, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-118 Device Assignment


– Right-click the station and select Export changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator in the context
menu.

[sc_ExportIEC, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-119 Export Changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator


– In the following dialog, click OK and save the SCD file to a folder.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 345
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_IECConfim, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-120 SCD File Creation


– In the opened IEC 61850 System Configurator window, select GOOSE in the toolbar.

[sc_Station1, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-121 GOOSE Function Selection


– In the GOOSE messages view, right-click the IEC station and select GOOSE application in the
context menu.

346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_Station2, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-122 GOOSE Application Creation


– In the Source catalog box, select Source device → AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 → VIAC_STMP1.
– Drag the data CTmp and drop it to the GOOSE application.

[sc_Station3, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-123 Source Data Selection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 347
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

You can see the assigned source data in the GOOSE messages view.

[sc_Station4, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-124 Source Data Assignment


– Unfold the assigned source data.
– In the Destination catalog box, select Destination device → AnUn_TmpAcqCom1.
– Drag the data RxTmp and drop it to the assigned source data.

[sc_Station6, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-125 Target Data Selection

Now the destination data is connected with the source data.

[sc_Station11, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-126 Target Data Assignment


– Save the configuration and close the IEC station.
– In the project tree, right-click the station and select Import changes from IEC 61850 System
Configurator in the context menu.

348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

[sc_Station8, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-127 Import Changes from IEC 61850 System Configurator

If the following dialog shows up, the source device and the destination device are successfully
connected.

[sc_End, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-128 Successful Devices Connection


– Click OK to finish the connection.
Now you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE to acquire the cold-gas temperature via
GOOSE.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 349
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

5.6.10.5 Application and Setting Notes

Change of the Temperature Unit


Commonly, the temperature unit °C is used in the display and evaluation of measured temperature values.
• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for all devices in the current DIGSI project, proceed as
follows:
– In DIGSI, select the menu item Options → Settings.
– In the Settings view, select the menu item DIGSI 5 user preferences.
– Under Standard unit system, change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to
US units.

[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-129 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for all Devices

• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for 1 device, proceed as follows:


– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Device settings.
– In the Device settings view, select the menu item Localization.
– Under Unit system, change the setting value of the unit system used from SI to ANSI.

[sc_SITmp, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-130 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for 1 Device

350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units

NOTE

i If the parameter Unit system is set to ANSI, only the unit of the measuring values and parameters
changes to °F. The unit of the data used in the device and the thresholds in DCF is still °C.

Parameter: Unit

• Default setting (_:19801:101) Unit = °C


You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of the source data the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.

5.6.10.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Tmp.Ctl 1
_:19801:101 Tmp.Ctl 1:Unit • °C °C
• °F

5.6.10.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Tmp.Ctl 1
_:19801:300 Tmp.Ctl 1:Tmp APC C
_:19801:53 Tmp.Ctl 1:Health ENS O
_:19801:301 Tmp.Ctl 1:Failure SPS O
_:19801:302 Tmp.Ctl 1:TmpOut MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 351
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group

5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group

5.7.1 Overview

With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).

[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-131 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library

The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-
cations, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable whole
number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example process
indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can be deac-
tivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.

[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-132 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications

352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group

5.7.2 Basic Data Types

The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.8.5 External Signals).

User-Defined Signals

[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-133 User-Defined Signals

Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)


The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.

EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.

Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)


In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 353
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group

[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 5-134 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)

Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)


When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).

EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.

Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)


This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).

Integer Status Value (Type INS)


The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.

354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group

EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.

State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)


The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.

Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)


This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.

Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double Point Controllable)


This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.

Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)


This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.

Complex Measured Values (CMV)


This data type provides a complex measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.

Measured Values (MV)


This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.

NOTE

i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps

• Metered values

Phase-to-Ground Measured Values (WYE)


This data type represents the phase-to-ground measured values of a 3-phase system.

Phase-to-Phase Measured Values (DEL, Delta)


This data type represents the phase-to-phase measured values of a 3-phase system.

Protection Activation Information (ACT)


This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.

Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)


This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT
can be generated and processed by CFC charts.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 355
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group

5.7.3 Pulse- and Energy-Metered Values

Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line as
well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Function Descrip-
tion of Pulse-Metered Values.

Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.

5.7.4 Additional Data Types

The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.

• SEQ (Sequence)

• BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position)


The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up,
down can be given.

NOTE

i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).

356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
6 Protection and Automation Functions

6.1 Power-System Data 359


6.2 Line Differential Protection 383
6.3 Stub Differential Protection 419
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection 433
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) 452
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method 504
6.7 Impedance Protection 618
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking 636
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection 641
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems 669
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection 722
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed 740
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification 748
6.14 External Trip Initiation 757
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function 760
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 814
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 858
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 894
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 928
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions 935
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase 936
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases 952
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection 970
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 1038
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 1046
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection 1057
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay 1066
6.28 Undercurrent Protection 1076
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 1081
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1093
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage 1097
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding 1102
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage 1107
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1113

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 357
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions

6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 1119


6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1135
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1142
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 1148
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision 1157
6.40 Fault Locator 1163
6.41 Overfrequency Protection 1168
6.42 Underfrequency Protection 1173
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1178
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding 1184
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover 1196
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 1202
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced 1205
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase 1219
6.49 Temperature Supervision 1229
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1239
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection 1260
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection 1267
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection 1285
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase 1292
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 1302
6.56 Current-Jump Detection 1311
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection 1314
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection 1317
6.59 Arc Protection 1325
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection 1344

358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

6.1 Power-System Data

6.1.1 Overview

The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them
in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.

6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data

The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:

[dwandata-180912-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-1 Structure of the Power-System Data

In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.

NOTE

i You can find information on the supervision-function parameters in chapter 8.3 Supervision of the Secon-
dary System.

Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)

• Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)

• Voltage 1-phase (measuring point V 1-ph)

• Current 1-phase (measuring point I 1-ph)


The measuring points have interfaces to the function groups requiring voltage and/or current measured values
of the power system.

6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings

Parameter: Phase sequence

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Phase sequence= ABC


The parameter Phase sequence is used to set the phase sequence (ABC) or (ACB). The setting value applies
to the entire SIPROTEC 5 device.
Use the General function to set the settings in the power-system data.
You can find detailed information about phase-rotation reversal in chapter 6.45.1 Overview of Functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 359
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)

The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. You can find the description
of these parameters in chapter 8 Supervision Functions.

Parameter: CT connection

• Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate


The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformer for the 3-phase
current measuring point. The parameter can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device
→ Parameter → Power-system data → Measuring point I 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type
of the current transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the current transformer only under measuring point routing in DIGSI 5.
Under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Current measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN

• 3-phase

• 3-phase, 2 primary CT

• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep

• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep


Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
current measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for current transformers in chapter A.
6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers. The connection examples provide assistance when selecting
the type of connection.

Parameter: Tracking

• Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active


With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
Parameter Value Description
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only
the 3-phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active, the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
and Frequency Tracking Groups.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, select the setting value inactive.

Parameter: Measuring-point ID

• Default setting (_:8881:130) Measuring-point ID = 1


The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.

360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking
Groups.

Parameter: Rated primary current

• Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A


With the Rated primary current parameter, you set the active rated primary current of the current trans-
former.

Parameter: Rated secondary current

• Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A


With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.

Parameter: Current range

• Default setting (_:8881:117) Current range = 100 x IR


The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications. The current measuring range 1.6 x Irated applies for the
connection type 3-phase + IN-separate and the sensitive current input or for the measuring inputs.

Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj

• Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes


The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the
current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined
by the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer). For this
reason, the default setting of the parameter was defined as yes.
When switching the parameter, the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN-sepa-
rate is rotated device-internally.

[dwpolstromwdl-251013, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-2 Polarity of Current Transformers

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 361
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Parameter: Inverted phases

• Default setting (_:8881:114) Inverted phases = none


The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (see Chapter Phase-rotation reversal). This default setting may be retained for power-system
protection applications.

Parameter: CT error changeover

• Default setting (_:8881:107) CT error changeover = 1.00


The CT error changeover parameter is only relevant for the Line differential protection function. The CT
error changeover parameter defines the transition range of the transformer fault from low to higher
currents.
You can find more setting notes and calculation samples in chapter 6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for
Line Differential Protection Settings.

Parameter: CT error A

• Default setting (_:8881:108) CT error A = 5.0


The CT error A parameter considers the transformer fault at rated current plus a safety margin.
You can find more setting notes and calculation samples in chapter 6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for
Line Differential Protection Settings.

Parameter: CT error B

• Default setting (_:8881:109) CT error B = 15.0


The CT error B parameter considers the transformer fault during rated overcurrent factor in addition to the
safety margin. It is the number preceding the letter P of the transformer data.
You can find more setting notes and calculation samples in chapter 6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for
Line Differential Protection Settings.

Parameter: Magnitude correction

• Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000


When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you set the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.

NOTE

i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

Note Regarding Routable Data


You can find indications for the current rotating field and the information pertaining to the sampling-
frequency tracking in Information routing under Power-system data → General in DIGSI 5. The indication
Freq.out of oper.range means that the frequency operating range has been exceeded. Either the
frequency is out of range (10 Hz to 80 Hz) or the input signals are too small for a manual update. Should this
condition occur, the system switches the update frequency to a sampling rate that corresponds to the rated
frequency.
Furthermore, there are 2 additional measured frequency values available. The measured value f sys displays
the current system frequency, and the measured value f track displays the sampling frequency currently
set. Siemens recommends routing both measured values as fault-recording channel.

362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 1-Phase (I-1ph)

If you insert a Measuring point I 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a current to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Current measuring points.
You can only route the current Ix.

Parameter: Rated primary current

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A


With the Rated primary current parameter, you set the active primary rated current of the current trans-
former.

Parameter: Rated secondary current

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A


With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the active secondary rated current of the current
transformer.

Parameter: Current range

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Current range = 100 x IR


The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications.

Parameter: Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj.

• Default setting (_:2311:116) Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes


With the Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. parameter, you define the direction of the current. If you set
the parameter Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes, the direction of the current to the protected
object is defined as forward.

Parameter: Magnitude correction

• Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000


When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you set the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary
correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.

NOTE

i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

Parameter: Tracking

• Default setting (_:2311:105) Tracking = active


With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 363
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Parameter Value Description


active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active, the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
and Frequency Tracking Groups.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.

Parameter: Measuring-point ID

• Default setting (_:2311:130) Measuring-point ID = 1


The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in Chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking
Groups.

6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)

Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in chapter Supervision Functions.

Parameter: Rated primary voltage

• Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV


The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.

Parameter: Rated secondary voltage

• Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V


The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.

Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN

• Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73


With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input. The different transmission
ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (see Figure 6-3).
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage

364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.

NOTE

i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:

EXAMPLE 1:

[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-3 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3 Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN

When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.

• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.

Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:

[fo_bsp1, 2, en_US]

Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.

In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 365
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

EXAMPLE 2:

Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V


Broken-delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the broken-delta winding
(500 V) is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an ohmic divider. In order to calcu-
late the matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.

Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:

[fo_bsp2, 1, en_US]

Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.


Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:

[fo_umrechnung2, 2, en_US]

NOTE

i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:

The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions:
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage

• Measured-value supervision

• Scaling of the faulty and measured values

Parameter: VT connection

• Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN


The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. The parameter can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device
→ Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type
of the voltage transformer in the power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring-points routing → Voltage measuring points, select the
desired connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages

366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN

• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in the chapters
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices. The connection examples provide
assistance when selecting the type of connection.

Parameter: Inverted phases

• Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none


The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (see chapter 6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover). This default setting may be retained for power-
system protection applications.

Parameter: Tracking

• Default setting (_:8911:111) Tracking = active


The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. The validity of this signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
Parameter Value Description
active If you set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point will be
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the
3‑phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active , the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
and Frequency Tracking Groups.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.

Parameter: Measuring-point ID

• Default setting (_:8911:130) Measuring-point ID = 1


The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking
Groups.

Parameter: Magnitude correction

• Default setting (_:3811:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000


When using the Magnitude correction parameter, the magnitude (magnitude correction) is adjusted for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 367
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.

NOTE

i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1-Phase (V-1ph)

If you insert a Measuring point V 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a voltage to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-points routing → Voltage measuring points.
You can route the following voltages:
• VA
• V B

• V C

• V AB

• V BC

• V CA

• VN13

• Vx

• VN broken-delta14

Parameter: Rated primary voltage

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV


The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.

Parameter: Rated secondary voltage

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V


The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.

Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN

• Default setting (_:2311:108) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73


With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point
Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph).

13 If
you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the neutral-point displacement voltage.
14 If
you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the voltage measured directly at the broken-delta winding of the
voltage transformer.

368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

NOTE

i The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V 1‑ph if the voltage
VN broken-delta has been routed.

Parameter: Tracking

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Tracking = inactive


The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. The validity of this signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
Parameter Value Description
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.
active If you have set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active, the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
and Frequency Tracking Groups.

Parameter: Measuring-point ID

• Default setting (_:2311:130) Measuring-point ID = 1


The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking
Groups.

Parameter: Magnitude correction

• Default setting (_:3811:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000


When using the Magnitude correction parameter, the magnitude (magnitude correction) is adjusted for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.

NOTE

i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 369
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for Line Differential Protection Settings

NOTE

i The following parameters are only important for the Line differential protection function. These parame-
ters can be found in DIGSI 5 project tree under Device name (for example, 7SL86) → Settings → Power-
system data under Measuring point I-3ph.

Current-Transformer Characteristic Curve


The basic principle of the Differential-protection function assumes that all currents flowing into a healthy
protected object add up to 0. If the sets of current transformers indicate different transformation errors at the
line ends in the overcurrent range, the secondarily measured sum of the current may reach a significant
magnitude during external short circuits and the high flow of current resulting from this fact. This may simu-
late an internal short circuit.
The adaptive stabilization method of the line differential protection considers the erroneous behavior during
current-transformer transmission errors. For this reason, the measuring error must be known with regard to
the value of the current transformed by the current transformer. To do this, set the characteristic data of the
current transformer and the secondary circuits. In many cases, the default setting can be maintained. It
considers the data of the most unfavorable protection current transformer. By using the following settings,
the Line differential protection function approximates the characteristic curve of the transformer error and
calculates the stabilization value.

[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-4 Transmission Behavior of the Current Transformer

Parameter: CT error changeover

• Default setting (_:8881:107) CT error changeover = 1.50


The CT error changeover parameter defines the transition range of the transformer error from low to
higher currents.

[fofueber-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

with
n' Operational overcurrent factor (effective overcurrent factor)
n Rated overcurrent factor of the current transformer (index following the letter "P")
PN Rated burden of the current transformer at rated current in [VA]
Pi Inherent current transformer burden at rated current in [VA]
P' Actually connected burden (devices and secondary line) at rated current in [VA]

The rated overcurrent factor n and the rated power PN of the current transformer can be found on the name
plate of the current transformer. These values refer to the specified conditions (rated current, rated burden).

370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

EXAMPLE:

Current transformer per VDE 0414/Part 1 or IEC 60044

Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA → n = 10; PN = 30 VA


Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA → n = 20; PN = 20 VA

The operational overcurrent factor n' is the result of the rated data and the actual secondary burden P'.
Under normal circumstances, the inherent burden of the current transformer is documented in the test
protocol. If this value is unknown, the inherent burden Pi can be approximated and determined from the DC
resistance Ri of the secondary winding:

[foeigbue-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

You can find the Siemens setting recommendation in Table 6-1.

Parameter: CT error A

• Default setting (_:8881:108) CT error A = 5.0


The CT error A parameter considers the transformer error at rated current plus a safety margin. According
to VDE 0414/Part 1 or IEC 60044, at a primary rated current F1, the CT error A is equal to the measured
current deviation.

Example:

Current transformer 5P: 3%


Current transformer 10P: 5%

You can find the Siemens setting recommendations in Table 6-1.

Parameter: CT error B

• Default setting (_:8881:109) CT error B = 15.0


The CT error B parameter considers the transformer error during rated overcurrent factor in addition to the
safety margin. It is the number preceding the letter P of the transformer data.
You can find the Siemens setting recommendation in Table 6-1.

Setting Recommendations for General Protection Current Transformers


The following table lists general protection current transformers with characteristic data, including associated
setting recommendations:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 371
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Table 6-1 Setting Recommendations for Current Transformer Data

Rated-Overcurrent Factor Error


Rated-Current Factor Error
Rated-Current Ratio Error

Error changeover15
Transformer
Standard
Class

CT error A15

CT error B15
5P IEC 60044-1 1.0 % ± 60 min ≤ 5 % 1.50 3.0 % 10.0 %
10P 3.0 % _ ≤ 10 % 1.50 5.0 % 15.0 %
TPX 0.5 % ± 30 min ε ≤ 10 % 1.50 1.0 % 15.0 %
TPY 1.0 % ± 30 min ε ≤ 10 % 1.50 3.0 % 15.0 %
TPZ 1.0 % 180 min ε ≤ 10 % 1.50 6.0 % 20.0 %
± 18 min (I ≈ only)
PX IEC 60044-1 1.50 3.0 % 10.0 %
BS: Class X
C100 to C800 ANSI 1.50 5.0 % 15.0 %

EXAMPLE:

Current transformer 5P10; 20 VA


RatioI 600 A/5 A
Inherent burden 2 VA
Secondary lines 4 mm2 copper (Cu)
Specific resistance of Cu 0.0175 Ω mm2/m
Length 20 m
Irated 5A
Burden at 5 A 0.1 VA

The resistance of the secondary lines is calculated as follows:

[fo_rl, 1, en_US]

The worst-case scenario has been assumed for the calculation, whereby during a 1-pole error the current
flows back and forth across the secondary lines (factor 2). This follows that the power at a rated current of
Irated = 5 A can be calculated as:

[fo_pi, 1, en_US]

The entire connected burden comprises the burden of the supply lines and the burden of the device, and is
calculated as follows:

[fo_pges, 1, en_US]

15 Setting recommendation for the parameter

372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

The ratio of the overcurrent factors is calculated as follows:

[fo_fehlerueb, 1, en_US]

According to Table 6-1, Siemens recommends the following setting values:


CT error changeover = 1.50
CT error A = 3.0 %
CT error B = 10.0 %

Transformer with Voltage Control


If the power transformer with voltage control is within the protection range, please observe the following: A
differential current occurs already during stationary operation. This differential current depends on the current
and the position of the tap changer. This is a current-proportional error. For this reason, it should be dealt with
as an additional current-transformer error.
Calculate the max. deviation along the limit of the control range (referring to the mean current of the control
range). Add the max. deviation to the calculated transformer errors A and B. Implement this correction only
for the end that is facing the controlled side of the transformer.

EXAMPLE:

For a transformer YNd5, 35 MV, 110 kV/25 kV, Y-side controlled ± 10 %


This results in the following values:
Rated current at rated voltage = 184 A
Rated current at Vrated + 10% Imin = 167 A
Rated current at Vrated - 10% Imax = 202 A

For the controlled side of the transformer, the following mean current is determined:

[foimittl-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The max. deviation of this mean current is:

[fodelmax-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Add this max. deviation to the transformer errors CT error A and CT error B determined as described
above. Ensure that this deviation due to voltage control relates to the mean current at rated apparent power
and not to the rated current at the rated voltage.

6.1.9 Settings

General

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 373
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Measuring Point I-3ph

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- • not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion • 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current • 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range • 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type • CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:8881:116 CT 3-phase:Neutr.point • no yes
in dir.of ref.obj • yes
_:8881:114 CT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases • AC
• BC
• AB
_:8881:107 CT 3-phase:CT error 1.00 to 10.00 1.00
changeover
_:8881:108 CT 3-phase:CT error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % 5.0 %
_:8881:109 CT 3-phase:CT error B 0.5 % to 50.0 % 15.0 %
CT IN
_:8881:104 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:105 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current • 5A
_:8881:119 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range • 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:8881:120 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type • CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus

374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 2
_:3842:103 CT 2:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3842:117 CT 2:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 3
_:3843:103 CT 3:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3843:117 CT 3:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 4
_:3844:103 CT 4:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3844:117 CT 4:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5581:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of • blocking blocking
blocking • auto blocking
• not blocking
_:5581:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
for autoblock
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 375
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2491:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:2491:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:2491:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2551:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum I
_:2431:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2431:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2431:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:2431:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:1 Supv.ADC sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
Saturat. det.
_:17731:1 Saturat. det.:Mode • off on
• on
_:17731:101 Saturat. det.:CT satura- 1 A @ 100 Irated 1.200 A to 100.000 A 8.000 A
tion threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 6.00 A to 500.00 A 40.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 1.200 A to 50.000 A 8.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 6.00 A to 250.00 A 40.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.040 A to 1.600 A 8.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.200 A to 8.000 A 40.000 A

Measuring Point I-1ph

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
current

376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary • 1A 1A
current • 5A
_:2311:103 General:Current range • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
• 8 x IR
• 20 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:2311:104 General:Internal CT type • CT protection CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:2311:116 General:Term. 1,3,5,7 in • no yes
dir. of obj. • yes
_:2311:105 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix

Measuring Point V-3ph

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- • not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd
tion • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases • AC
• BC
• AB
_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 377
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 2
_:3812:103 VT 2:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 3
_:3813:103 VT 3:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 4
_:3814:103 VT 4:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max

378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

Measuring Point V-1ph

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
voltage
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary 80 V to 340 V 100 V
voltage
_:2311:108 General:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:2311:103 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
• VN broken-delta
_:3811:107 VT 1:Sequence number 1 to 2147483647 2147483647
device
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 379
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

6.1.10 Information List

General

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:2311:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:2311:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

Measuring Point I-3ph

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 2
_:3842:300 CT 2:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 3
_:3843:300 CT 3:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 4
_:3844:300 CT 4:Sampled val. current SAV O
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:5581:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:5581:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:5581:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:5581:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:5581:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:5581:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:5581:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:5581:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:2491:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:2491:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:2491:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O

380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:2491:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:2551:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:2551:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:2551:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:2551:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum I
_:2431:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2431:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2431:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2431:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:2431:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O
Saturat. det.
_:17731:54 Saturat. det.:Inactive SPS O
_:17731:52 Saturat. det.:Behavior ENS O
_:17731:53 Saturat. det.:Health ENS O

Measuring Point I-1ph

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O

Measuring Point V-3ph

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
VT 2
_:3812:300 VT 2:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
VT 3
_:3813:300 VT 3:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
VT 4
_:3814:300 VT 4:Sampled val. voltage SAV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 381
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

Measuring Point V-1ph

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.1 Overview of Functions

Line differential protection (ANSI 87L):


• Is a selective short-circuit protection for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and multi-
side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed systems

• Allows fast tripping of 1-phase or 3-phase short circuits on 2 to 6 line ends

• Works strictly phase-selectively

• Allows protection of a transformer in the protection range of the line

• Becomes more sensitive when using charging-current compensation (Ic compensat.)

6.2.2 Structure of the Function

The Line differential protection function is used in the Line function group.
The Line differential protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB)
General, the stage I-DIFF and the stage I-DIFF fast 2.
As an alternative to the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the I-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5
library.

NOTE

i Keep in mind that the same stage type must be instantiated in all devices of the device combination. The
devices of the device combination operate either with the I-DIFF fast 2 stage or with the I-DIFF
fast stage.
When commissioning communication via the protection interface, it is checked whether the same stage
types are instantiated in all devices of the device combination. If different stage types are instantiated in
the devices, communication via the protection interface is not possible. In this case, the protection inter-
face issues the diagnostic indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 = Diff. Param.
Err..
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6.3.9 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection
Interface.

The function blocks Ic-compensat. and Transformer are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library for special
applications and can be instantiated into the function.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all stages.

[dwdifstr_LP, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-5 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 383
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

Overall Logic

[loges13p-310512-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-6 General Logic for Differential Protection Functions with 1-/3-Pole Tripping

Mode of Operation
The Line differential protection function is composed of several subfunctions.
The core of differential protection consists of the 2 stages I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2. Both work in
parallel and ensure high sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. The output signals

384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

of these stages are pickup and trip signals, which are routed to the pickup logic and the trip logic, resulting in
the corresponding protection indications.
The Remote tripping functionality transmits the internally generated trip group indication to the remote
devices in the device combination. In addition, the Remote tripping functionality receives the trip group indi-
cations of the remote devices and transmits these indications to the trip logic. You can find more detailed
information in chapter 6.2.10 Remote Tripping.
The optional FB Ic-compensat. contains the charging-current compensation. The FB Ic-compensat. is
assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage I-DIFF and ensures maximum sensitivity even with high capacitive
charging currents.
The optional FB Transformer is required to protect a transformer in the protection range. The additional FB
Transformer guarantees that amplitudes and phase angle of the measured currents at the line ends will be
evaluated correctly.

6.2.3 Function Description

Line differential protection is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. operates on the basis of
current comparison (Kirchhoff's current law). For this a device has to be installed at each end of the area to be
protected. The devices exchange their measurands via communication connections. Each device performs the
current comparison with these measurands and trips the assigned circuit breaker, if there is a short circuit in
the protection range. The current transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
Apart from normal lines, the Line differential protection can also protect lines with a transformer in block
connection. By using the Inrush-current detection function and the adaptive method of measurement for the
Line differential protection, the stages can be stabilized to prevent tripping that may be caused by transformer
inrush currents.

Measured-Value Transmission
If the protected object is spatially connected – as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars – the
measurands can be processed directly. The processing is different for lines where the protection range extends
from one station to another. To enable the measurands from all line ends to be processed at each line end,
these measurands must be transferred in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping condition can be checked at
each line end, and the respective local circuit breaker can be tripped in case of a fault.
The measurands are encrypted and transmitted in digital telegrams via communication channels. For this
purpose, each device features at least one interface for protection-data communication, called the protection
interface in the following.
Figure 6-7 shows this principle for a line with 2 ends. Each device detects the local current and sends informa-
tion on its magnitude and phase relation to the opposite end. Thus, each device can add the currents from all
ends and further process them.

[dwdiff2e-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-7 Differential Protection for a Line with 2 Ends

If there are more than 2 ends, a communication chain is established so that each device is informed of the
sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure 6-8 shows an example with 3 ends. The under-
lying principle in this regard is partial current summation. In this process, each device measures the respective
local currents. Device 1 detects the current i1 and transmits its data in the form of a complex phasor I1 to
device 2. This device adds the component I2 from measuring current i2 and transmits this subtotal to device 3.
The subtotal I1 + I2 reaches device 3 which adds its component I3. In the reverse direction, a corresponding

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 385
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

chain runs from device 3 via device 2 to device 1. In this way, all 3 devices have the sum of all 3 currents
measured at the measuring points.
If ends 1 and 2 are close together (within about 500 m), currents I1 and I2 can also be detected by 1 protec-
tion device. The number of analog current inputs (8I) at the protection device must be sufficient for this. Thus,
the topology shown in Figure 6-8 can also be protected with just 2 physical devices (see Figure 6-9).
The order of the devices in the communication chain does not have to correspond to their indexing. The
assignment is made in the course of parameterization for the topology.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6.3.5 Device-Combination Settings.

[dwdiff3e-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-8 Differential Protection for a Line with 3 Ends

[dw diff3e 2dev, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-9 Differential Protection for a Line with 3 Ends with 2 Devices

The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown with dashed lines in Figure 6-8. This
enables a redundant transmission. Even if there is an outage of the communication connection, the differen-
tial-protection system remains operational without any restrictions. The devices recognize a failure in the
communication and automatically switch over to a different communication route. It is also possible to discon-
nect one line end (for example for tests or modification) and shut down the local protection.
You can find more information on this in chapter 6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection.

386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

In a communication ring, the remaining operation can continue without interruption.

Measured-Value Synchronization
The devices detect the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device detects, digitizes, and
preprocesses the associated currents from the current transformers at its own random processor clock. If the
currents of 2 or more line ends are to be compared, all currents must be processed with the same time base.
All devices in the device combination exchange their time status with each telegram. The device whose
address is entered first in the device-combination configuration in the protection interface functions as timing
master, meaning it specifies the time frame. Each device can thus calculate the time offset due to the trans-
mission and processing times relative to the timing master.
To achieve a sufficiently exact synchronization of the measured values, the current values are additionally
provided with a time stamp before they are transmitted from one device to the others in digital telegrams.
The time stamp allows a statement on the time at which the transmitted current values were valid. The
receiving devices can thus carry out a fine synchronization based on the time stamp and their own time
management. This means that currents detected at the same time (< 5 μs tolerance) are compared with each
other.
The devices use the time stamp in the measured-data telegram to monitor the transfer times in real time and
take each of these into account at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measurands is decisive
for the exact calculation of the complex phasors. So that the phasor comparison is synchronous, the devices
also measure the frequency of the measurands constantly and feed these into the calculation when needed. If
the device is connected to voltage transformers and if at least one voltage is available in sufficient magnitude,
the frequency is determined from this voltage. Otherwise, the measured currents are used as the basis for
frequency determination. The devices exchange the determined frequencies with one another via the commu-
nication routes. Under these conditions, all devices operate with the updated frequency.

Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of the differential protection is based on the precondition that, during uninterrupted opera-
tion, the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equals 0. This applies to the primary system and
only there if the shunt components of current, which occur from the capacitance of the lines or the magneti-
zation currents of the transformers and shunt reactors, are negligible. In contrast, the secondary currents
offered to the devices via the current transformers contain measuring fault originating from the measuring
fault of the current transformers and the input circuits of the devices themselves. Even transmission faults
such as signal jitter can cause measurand deviations.
All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the currents processed in the devices is
not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influences. A special method of Adaptive
self-stabilization is applied in this context to ensure the highest possible sensitivity of the differential protec-
tion. The function calculates a restraint current Irest for this purpose.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 387
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-10 Operate Curve of the Differential Protection

Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, each device calculates the current-
transformer error on an adaptive basis. This value results from an estimated calculation of the possible local
transformer errors based on the data of the local current transformers and the magnitude of the locally meas-
ured currents.

[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-11 Approximation of the Current-Transformer Faults

The basis for this are the transformer data of the connected current transformers that must be entered individ-
ually for each device. Since each device transmits its estimated faults to the other devices in the device combi-
nation, each device is able to determine the sum of possible faults and use them for stabilization.

Other Measuring Faults


Other measuring faults which can occur in the device itself due to hardware tolerances, calculation tolerances,
time deviations, or the quality of the measurands such as harmonics and frequency deviations, are also esti-
mated by the device and automatically adaptively increase the local self-stabilization value. The permissible
variance of the transmission and processing times are also taken into account.
Time deviations are caused by residual faults when synchronizing the measurands, runtime variance or
similar. GPS synchronization is used to prevent possible increases in self-stabilization in case of runtime jumps.
If an influencing variable cannot be detected – for example, the frequency because no adequate measurands
are available – the device assumes the rated values by definition. In the frequency example, this means the
following: If the frequency cannot be determined because no sufficient measurands are available, the device

388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

uses the rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from the rated frequency within the
permissible range (±20 %), the stabilization is automatically increased correspondingly. As soon as the
frequency has been determined (100 ms max. after applying a usable measurand), the stabilization is
decreased again. In practice, this has an effect if no measurand is available in the range to be protected before
the occurrence of a short-circuit, for example when switching a line with line-side voltage transformers onto a
fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at that time, the stabilization is increased at first until the actual
frequency is determined. This can lead to a tripping delay, but only at the pickup threshold, for example, in the
case of very low-current faults.

Stages of Line Differential Protection


The Line differential protection has 2 preconfigured stages:
• The I-DIFF stage works with very accurate measurement. Maximum sensitivity can be achieved with
this stage. You cannot delete this stage.

• The I-DIFF fast 2 stage works in parallel with the I-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
If the I-DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the Measuring point Current 3-phase.

• The I-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library as an alternative to the I-DIFF fast
2 stage. If you want to instantiate this stage, you must first delete the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If the I-DIFF fast stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is not visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the current measuring point.
The I-DIFF fast stage also works in parallel with the I-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.

Transformer in the Protection Range


As an option, a transformer may be considered for the protection range. At each end of the protection range,
for example, at each protection device in the device combination, only a few additional transformer parame-
ters have to be entered, for example:
• Rated apparent power
• Primary voltages

• Vector groups of the relevant windings

• Any existing neutral-point displacement ground connections


For this purpose, instantiate the Transformer function block in the Line differential protection function. You
can find the Transformer function block in the DIGSI 5 function library, or you can select an appropriate appli-
cation template.

Inrush-Current Detection
If the protection range extends beyond a transformer, a high inrush current, which flows into the protection
range but does not leave it again, has to be expected when connecting the transformer. The inrush current
can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content of 2. harmonic
(twice the rated frequency), which is missing almost completely in the case of a short circuit.
The algorithm of the Line differential protection recognizes the inrush currents. Temporarily, the adaptive
stabilization function provides an elevated restraint current, preventing any false tripping.
If the Inrush-current detection function is present in the device, inrush currents are detected correctly. For
this, the function block Inrush detect. from the DIGSI 5 function library must be instantiated and enabled.
High inrush currents can lead to an overfunction. The inrush-current detection prevents overfunction by
blocking the affected phases or all phases using the crossblock function.

Charging-Current Compensation
Distributed line or phase capacities cause a permanently capacitive charging current. This charging current has
to be taken into account by the pickup values of the differential-protection stages. In cables, this charging
current can reach considerable values. The charging-current compensation serves to improve the sensitivity so

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 389
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

that maximum sensitivity can be protected even at high charging currents. For this, the function block Ic-
compensat. from the function library must be instantiated and enabled.

Monitoring the Differential Current


The process of adaptive self-stabilization is based on the fact that differential current faults that are caused by
disturbing influences can be compensated by supplementary restraints. Thus, the process provide the highest
possible sensitivity for the differential protection.
The additional dynamic monitoring of the differential current is meaningful, since there are interfering effects
that cannot be detected by the device. This includes stationary or slowly building unbalances in the transmis-
sion times in the protection interface communication over communication networks. Without external GPS
time synchronization, the runtime monitoring function cannot capture the unbalances in transmission times.
Therefore, the received measured values cannot be synchronized precisely and high currents passing through
may cause tripping.
During operation (load operation), the behavior of the differential and restraint current must be monitored to
this effect, and whether in spite of a restraining quantity the differential current approaches the operate curve
in an unexpected manner and without recognizing jumps in runtime. If the differential current exceeds the
supervision threshold (parameter Supervision Idiff = yes: block diff. prot.) and no current
jump is present, the Line differential protection is blocked and the indication Alarm: Idiff too high is
issued after 1 s. In addition, a fault record is initiated in all differential protection devices (see 6.2.2 Structure
of the Function ).
During commissioning, ensure that the differential current in the operate curve is defined primarily by the
charging current and the transformer error (DIGSI 5 Test Suite). If the differential-current supervision function
is already initiated during the commissioning, check first whether the setting recommendation for stage I-
DIFF was followed. If stage I-DIFF is set correctly, triggering indicates a stationary unbalance of the signal
transmission times. It is the responsibility of the network operator to apply suitable measures to eliminate the
causes.

Remote Tripping
Additionally to the measured values, the Line differential protection function transfers the locally generated
operate indication to the Line differential protection functions of the remote devices in the device combina-
tion. The remote devices also generate an operate indication if the local Line differential protection has not
yet generated an operate indication. This can occur under pickup conditions at the pickup threshold (see
6.2.2 Structure of the Function ).

Emergency Mode

NOTE

i When the protection device is in emergency mode, the Line differential protection function does not
work.

If the Line differential protection is the main protection function in the protection device, the Line differen-
tial protection can activate the emergency mode of the device. The emergency mode is activated if one of the
following conditions is met:
• Protection-interface communication is disturbed
• Line differential protection is blocked via the binary input (_:2311:82) >Block function.
If emergency mode is active, the Overcurrent protection function can work as an emergency function, for
example.
If the Line differential protection and Distance protection are instantiated simultaneously, you can set the
distance protection zones in such a way that the blocking of the distance protection zones is disabled in case
of a line differential protection outage. The blocking of the distance protection zones is disabled if one of the
following conditions is met:
• Protection-interface communication is disturbed
• Line differential protection is blocked via the binary input (_:2311:82) >Block function.

390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

• Line differential protection is disabled

• Line differential protection is in the test operating mode (_:2311:308) Test all devices.

Constellation Measured Values


Measured values constellations are measured values that have been predefined by Siemens with the following
properties:
• They are time-synchronized in the devices in a device combination.
• They are exchanged across the protection interface.

• They are available on any device.


You can view the constellation measured values with DIGSI 5.
In the device, current and voltage measured values are displayed in amount and phase as a percentage. 100 %
conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see next figure). These measured values are
recorded every 2 seconds by the devices participating in the device combination and then sent to the other
respective devices. At the same time, the current and voltage values of the different devices are time-synchro-
nous with one another.
You can find these measured values in the device under the following DIGSI mask:

[sc const mv, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-12 Constellation Measured Values with Phases

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 391
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.4 Application and Setting Instructions - General Settings

NOTE

i Keep the following hints in mind so that the line differential protection operates correctly on all line ends:
• Set the rated current of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated current) to the same value at
both ends of the line.
The rated apparent power is internally calculated for both ends of the line and is displayed as the
write-protected parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power.

• If you have instantiated the Transformer function block in the line differential protection, set the
parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power to the same value at both ends. The rated
current is internally calculated for both ends of the line and is displayed as the write-protected param-
eter (_:9001:101) Rated current.
If the parameters Rated current and Rated apparent power are set in a different way in the devices
of the device combination, the Line differential protection does not operate correctly and the indication
Diff. Param. Err. is issued. You can find more information on this in chapter 3.6.3.9 Diagnostic
Measured Values of the Protection Interface.

NOTE

i To stabilize the line differential protection against current-transformer errors, the corresponding parame-
ters (_:8881:107) CT error changeover, (_:8881:108) CT error A, and (_:8881:109) CT
error B for the current measuring points must be taken into account in the power-system data. These
parameters are used exclusively by the Line differential protection function.

Parameter: Min. current for release

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Min. current for release = 0.00 A


With the parameter Min. current for release, you specify the minimum local current required for
release of the local operate indication.

Parameter: Supervision Idiff

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff = yes: block diff. prot.
When using the parameter Supervision Idiff, you specify whether the line differential protection func-
tion operates with or without differential-current supervision.
Parameter Value Description
no The differential current is not monitored.
yes: reporting only The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
supervision threshold and a current jump is not present, the indication
Alarm: Idiff too high is issued after 1 s.
yes: block diff. prot. The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
supervision threshold and there is no current jump, the line differential
protection is blocked after 1 s and the indication Alarm: Idiff too
high is issued.

392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2311:11 General:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:2311:102 General:Min. current for 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 175.000 A 0.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 175.000 A 0.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:2311:104 General:Supervision Idiff • no yes: block diff.
• yes: reporting only prot.
• yes: block diff. prot.

6.2.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:507 General:>Function logoff on SPS I
_:2311:508 General:>Function logoff off SPS I
_:2311:503 General:>Test local device on SPS I
_:2311:504 General:>Test local device off SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Test all devices on SPS I
_:2311:502 General:>Test all devices off SPS I
_:2311:319 General:Function logoff SPC C
_:2311:309 General:Test local device SPC C
_:2311:308 General:Test all devices SPC C
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:315 General:Function logged off SPS O
_:2311:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:2311:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:2311:300 General:Test local device act. SPS O
_:2311:306 General:BI: Test local device SPS O
_:2311:307 General:Ctrl:Test local device SPS O
_:2311:301 General:Test all devices activ SPS O
_:2311:304 General:BI: Test all devices SPS O
_:2311:305 General:Ctrl: Test all devices SPS O
_:2311:302 General:Test remote device SPS O
_:2311:316 General:Alarm: Idiff too high SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 393
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.7 Stage I-DIFF

6.2.7.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loijump, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-13 Logic of the I-DIFF Stage, Part 1

394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

[lo13idif-250512-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-14 Logic of the I-DIFF Stage, Part 2

Mode of Operation
The I-DIFF stage is the sensitive stage of differential protection. The principle of the I-DIFF stage is comparison
of the current phasor. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occurrence
of a fault event. The I-DIFF fast 2 stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping in the
event of high-current faults.
The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Each device calculates an Idiff differential current from
the sum of the current phasors which are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 395
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current which the differential-protection system sees, ideally
that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging
current in lines in a first approximation. If charging-current compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is
achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably smaller.
The Irest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum fault of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of the
protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal faults. This means
that the restraint current Irest always reflects the maximum possible measuring faults in the differential-protec-
tion system.
Optional functions such as charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential and stabilization currents are calculated.

Pickup of the Stage


The pickup characteristic of the differential protection (see Figure 6-15) results from the stabilization charac-
teristic curve Idiff = Irest (45° line) which is cut below the setting value of the Threshold parameter. It complies
with the equation
Irest = Threshold + Σ (current-transformer error and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the pickup threshold (Threshold) and the maximum possible
measuring errors, there is an internal fault (dimmed area in Figure 6-15).
In case of an internal fault, you can define an additional criterion for local tripping release using the parameter
Min. current for release.

[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-15 Pickup Characteristic of the I-DIFF Stage

Pickup upon Switching


When switching on longer, unloaded cables, overhead lines, and resonant-grounded lines, pronounced
higher-frequency compensating processes can occur. These are strongly dampened by digital filters of the
differential protection. With the parameter Thresh. switch onto fault, you can prevent single-end
pickup of the line differential protection in case of switching. The parameter Thresh. switch onto
fault always becomes effective as soon as a device in the device combination has detected that its end is
switched after a dead time. All devices in the device combination are then changed over to this pickup value
for the duration of the closure detection. You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.4.7 Closure
Detection.

396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

In addition, for the switching of transformers and shunt reactors, the device features an Inrush-current detec-
tion function via which blocking of the affected phase of the differential protection is possible. You can find
more detailed information in chapter 6.53 Inrush-Current Detection.

Inrush-Current Detection
You can find the Inrush-current detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Line FG → Inrush
detect.. Add this functionality to the Line function group (under DIGSI 5 project tree →Name of the device
→ Settings →Line).
The parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. now also appears in the I-DIFF stage of the Line differ-
ential protection.

Fault Behavior
The Health indication is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (broken-wire detec-
tion, fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection inter-
face are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is
set to Yes.

Measured Value of the I-DIFF Stage


In order to clarify failures, the I-DIFF stage provides the following measured values:
Measured Value Description
(_:3451:300) I diff. Differential current
(_:3451:301) I restr. Restraint current (overall restraint)
(_:3451:307) I local Value of local current phasor
(_:3451:308) I l.restr. Local restraint current
(_:3451:309) I l.CTerr. Partial component of the local restraint current that considers the trans-
former fault.
(_:3451:310) I Subcomponent of the local restraint current that considers the fault caused
l.distor. by signal distortion. Each deviation of the signal form from the sinus shape
is interpreted as a signal distortion. The deviation between the actual signal
form and the sinus shape will be converted to a percentage of the stabiliza-
tion.
(_:3451:311) I sync. Subcomponents of the overall restraint that are caused by faults during the
time synchronization of the current phasor.

The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only I diff. and I
restr. . In order to find the measured values on the device, go to Main menu → Measurements → Line x
→ Functional measured values → Line differential protection.
Detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings can be found in the Operating Manual.

6.2.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:3451:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the tripping is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current. If the inrush-current detection blocks tripping of the I-DIFF stage,
indication Inrush blocks operate is generated.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:3451:3) Threshold = 0.300 A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 397
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

With the Threshold parameter, you set the pickup threshold for the I-DIFF stage. The total current flowing
into the protection range during a short circuit is decisive, that is, the total fault current, regardless of how it
divides among the ends of the protected object.

Parameter: Thresh. switch onto fault

• Recommended setting value (_:3451:101) Thresh. switch onto fault = 0.300 A


With the Thresh. switch onto fault parameter, you set the pickup threshold for the I-DIFF stage
during a detected connection.
A setting of 3 times to 4 times the stationary charging current generally ensures the stability of the protection
when switching.
If you set the parameter in exactly the same way as the parameter Threshold, the parameter Thresh.
switch onto fault is ineffective.

Parameter: Delay 1-phase pickup

• Recommended setting value (_:3451:102) Delay 1-phase pickup = 0.04 s


If the differential protection is used in an isolated or resonant-grounded system, it has to be ensured that trip-
ping due to the fault-ignition oscillation of a simple ground fault is prevented. With the Delay 1-phase
pickup parameter, you delay the pickup in case of a simple ground fault.
In extended, resonant-grounded systems, Siemens recommends using a higher setting value.

NOTE

i This parameter is only effective for resonant-grounded/isolated neutral-point treatment!

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:3451:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s


In special cases, it can be advantageous to delay the tripping of the differential protection with an additional
time stage, for example for reverse interlocking. The time delay is started when the I-DIFF stage picks up.

6.2.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


I-DIFF
_:3451:1 I-DIFF:Mode • off on
• on
_:3451:2 I-DIFF:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3451:27 I-DIFF:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3451:3 I-DIFF:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
_:3451:101 I-DIFF:Thresh. switch 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
onto fault 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
_:3451:102 I-DIFF:Delay 1-phase 0.00 s to 0.50 s 0.04 s
pickup
_:3451:6 I-DIFF:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
I-DIFF
_:3451:81 I-DIFF:>Block stage SPS I
_:3451:54 I-DIFF:Inactive SPS O
_:3451:302 I-DIFF:Remote stage inactive SPS O
_:3451:52 I-DIFF:Behavior ENS O
_:3451:53 I-DIFF:Health ENS O
_:3451:55 I-DIFF:Pickup ACD O
_:3451:57 I-DIFF:Operate ACT O
_:3451:60 I-DIFF:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:3451:300 I-DIFF:I diff. WYE O
_:3451:301 I-DIFF:I restr. WYE O
_:3451:307 I-DIFF:I local WYE O
_:3451:308 I-DIFF:I l.restr. WYE O
_:3451:309 I-DIFF:I l.CTerr. WYE O
_:3451:310 I-DIFF:I l.distor. WYE O
_:3451:311 I-DIFF:I sync. WYE O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 399
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.8 Stage I-DIFF Fast 2

6.2.8.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loijump, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-16 Logic of the I-DIFF fast 2 Stage, Part 1

400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

[lo stage idiff fast sat 13p, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-17 Logic of the I-DIFF fast 2 Stage, Continued

NOTE

i If you want to use the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly.

The differential-protection procedure of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage has been improved compared to the
procedure of the I-DIFF fast stage.
The new differential-protection procedure has the following properties:
• The lower limit of the setting range was reduced. As a result, the pickup threshold can be set with more
sensitivity.

• Improved stability against transformer-saturation effects during special faults

• Shorter operate times

• Improved behavior during faults with a change from external to internal faults

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 401
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

Mode of Operation
The I-DIFF fast 2 stage is the differential-protection stage that is optimized for fast tripping times when
high-current faults occur. It is superimposed on the I-DIFF stage. The measurands are analyzed separately
for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current faults is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instanta-
neous values. During this procedure, stabilization to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-trans-
former saturation), which can occur during external high-current faults, is not possible. For this reason, a deci-
sion for internal or external faults must be made before the potential saturation appears. It is assumed that
the current transformers do not yet go into saturation at least for 5 ms after fault inception.
If you use the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the Saturat. det. block is visible in the measuring point Current 3-
phase with the CT saturation threshold parameter. For this, the CT saturation threshold must
be set so that transformer saturation does not occur until the currents exceed the setting value.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 8.3.12 Saturation Detection.
If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers that limit the protection range, the I-DIFF fast 2
stage is blocked and an erroneous pickup due to transformer saturation is avoided. Normally, the I-DIFF
fast 2 stage is set higher than the rated current. In this way, the influence of charging currents and cross-
flow currents of transformers (fixed and transient) is suppressed.
Otherwise, the I-DIFF fast 2 stage works in the same way as the sensitive I-DIFF stage. Each device
calculates an Idiff differential current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which
are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends. Its amount corresponds
to the fault current calculated by the differential-protection system, ideally that is the short-circuit current. In
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
The Irest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation parameters. To this end, the maximum fault of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of
the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal faults. This
means that the restraint current Irest always reflects the maximum possible measuring faults in the differential-
protection system.
The option of a transformer in the protection range is automatically considered when the differential and
stabilization currents are calculated. An activated charging-current compensation has no effect on the I-DIFF
fast 2 stage.

Pickup of the Stage


The decisive element is the RMS value of the current. Like for the I-DIFF stage, the pickup characteristic (see
Figure 6-18) results from the stabilization characteristic curve Idiff = Irest (45° line) which is cut below the
setting value of the Threshold parameter. It complies with the equation
Irest = Threshold + Σ (current-transformer error and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the sum from pickup threshold (Threshold) and maximum
possible measuring error, there is an internal error (see Figure 6-18).
In case of an internal error, you can define an additional criterion for local tripping release using the parameter
Min. current for release.

402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-18 Pickup Characteristic of the I-DIFF fast 2 Stage

Pickup upon Switching


When switching on longer, unloaded cables, overhead lines, and resonant-grounded lines, pronounced
higher-frequency compensating processes can occur.
As the Threshold of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage must be set significantly higher than the Threshold of the
I-DIFF stage, switching procedures do not lead to an erroneous pickup of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
For the switching procedures mentioned above, it may be worthwhile to set the Thresh. switch onto
fault parameter higher than the Threshold parameter. This reliably prevents erroneous pickup of the I-
DIFF fast 2 stage. The parameter Thresh. switch onto fault always becomes effective as soon as a
device in the device combination has detected that its end is switched after a dead time. All devices in the
device combination are then changed over to this pickup value for the duration of the closure detection
(Action time after closure parameter).
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.

Fault Behavior
The Health indication is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions ( broken-wire detec-
tion, fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection inter-
face are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is
set to Yes.

6.2.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:3481:3) Threshold = 1.000 A


With the Threshold parameter, you set the pickup threshold for the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
This stage responds very quickly. For this reason, pickup during capacitive charging currents (in the case of
lines) and inductive magnetization currents for transformers or shunt reactors – including during switching
procedures - must be excluded. This also applies when charging-current compensation is switched on,
because this is not effective for the I-DIFF fast 2 stage. Set the pickup value to a value greater then the
load current (1.2 · Irated to 2 · Irated).
In resonant-grounded systems, the value must not fall below the value of the not resonant-grounded ground-
fault current. This value results from the total capacitive ground-fault current without taking into considera-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 403
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

tion the arc-suppression coil. Since the arc-suppression coil has to compensate for approximately the total
capacitive ground-fault current, its approximate rated current can be taken as a basis. For transformers, set
Irated transf./Vk transf.
A final dynamic check of the pickup thresholds is performed during commissioning.

Parameter: Thresh. switch onto fault

• Recommended setting value (_:3481:101) Thresh. switch onto fault = 1.000 A


With the Thresh. switch onto fault parameter, you set the pickup threshold for the I-DIFF fast 2
stage during a detected switching.
If bushing-type transformers are used for a transformer in the line section to be protected, leakage fluxes
through the bushing-type transformers can occur during reclosure after an external fault. These leakage fluxes
can corrupt the secondary current and lead to an overfunction of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage. If bushing-type
transformers are used, Siemens recommends setting the pickup value in the case of switching to 2 to 3 times
the setting value of the threshold value of the stage.
If you set the parameter to the same value as the parameter Threshold, the parameter Thresh. switch
onto fault is not effective.

Parameter: Delay 1-phase pickup

• Recommended setting value (_:3481:106) Delay 1-phase pickup = 0.04 s


If the differential protection is used in an isolated or resonant-grounded system, it must be ensured that trip-
ping due to the starting oscillation of a single ground fault is prevented. With the Delay 1-phase pickup
parameter, you delay the pickup in case of a single ground fault.
Siemens recommends a higher setting value in extended resonant-grounded systems.

NOTE

i This parameter is only effective for resonant-grounded or isolated neutral-point treatment!

6.2.8.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


I-DIFF fast 2
_:18211:1 I-DIFF fast 2:Mode • off on
• on
_:18211:2 I-DIFF fast 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:18211:3 I-DIFF fast 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 2.50 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 2.50 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
_:18211:101 I-DIFF fast 2:Thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
switch onto fault 5 A @ 100 Irated 2.50 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 2.50 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
_:18211:106 I-DIFF fast 2:Delay 1- 0.00 s to 0.50 s 0.04 s
phase pickup

404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.8.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
I-DIFF fast 2
_:18211:81 I-DIFF fast 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:18211:54 I-DIFF fast 2:Inactive SPS O
_:18211:302 I-DIFF fast 2:Remote stage inactive SPS O
_:18211:52 I-DIFF fast 2:Behavior ENS O
_:18211:53 I-DIFF fast 2:Health ENS O
_:18211:55 I-DIFF fast 2:Pickup ACD O
_:18211:57 I-DIFF fast 2:Operate ACT O

6.2.9 Stage I-DIFF Fast

6.2.9.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loijump, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-19 Logic of the I-DIFF Fast Stage, Part 1

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 405
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

[lo13idfs-250511-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-20 Logic of the I-DIFF Fast Stage

NOTE

i Siemens recommends:
Use the I-DIFF fast stage only if you want to expand an existing line differential protection device
combination and you want to retain the existing protection procedure.

NOTE

i If you load an application template starting from the V07.50 platform into a device with the CP200 CPU
printed circuit board assembly, keep the following in mind:
• Starting with the V07.50 platform, the I-DIFF fast 2 stage is preinstantiated in the Line differen-
tial protection function.

• The consistency check in DIGSI 5 reports an error for devices with the CP200 CPU printed circuit board
assembly.

• Replace the I-DIFF fast 2 stage with the I-DIFF fast stage.

406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

The I-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
In contrast to the differential-protection procedure of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the procedure of the I-
DIFF fast stage requires a time of at least 5 ms free of saturation from the current transformer. Starting at a
certain current flow (> 2.5 · Irated, local measurement), the system immediately determines an external fault
and the I-DIFF fast stage is blocked. If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers limiting the
protection range, the I-DIFF fast stage is blocked and unwanted tripping due to transformer saturation is
avoided.

6.2.9.2 Application and Setting Notes


The I-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If you want to use the I-DIFF fast stage, you must delete the preinstantiated I-DIFF fast 2 stage if neces-
sary. After this, you can instantiate the I-DIFF fast stage.
If you use the I-DIFF fast stage, the Current-transformer saturation block is not present in the Meas-
uring point Current 3-phase.
You can find the application and setting notes for the I-DIFF fast 2 stage in chapter 6.2.8.2 Application
and Setting Notes.

6.2.9.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


I-DIFF fast
_:3481:1 I-DIFF fast:Mode • off on
• on
_:3481:2 I-DIFF fast:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:3481:3 I-DIFF fast:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A
_:3481:101 I-DIFF fast:Thresh. switch 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
onto fault 5 A @ 100 Irated 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A
_:3481:106 I-DIFF fast:Delay 1-phase 0.00 s to 0.50 s 0.04 s
pickup

6.2.9.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
I-DIFF fast
_:3481:81 I-DIFF fast:>Block stage SPS I
_:3481:54 I-DIFF fast:Inactive SPS O
_:3481:302 I-DIFF fast:Remote stage inactive SPS O
_:3481:52 I-DIFF fast:Behavior ENS O
_:3481:53 I-DIFF fast:Health ENS O
_:3481:55 I-DIFF fast:Pickup ACD O
_:3481:57 I-DIFF fast:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 407
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.10 Remote Tripping

6.2.10.1 Description
The Line differential protection function contains the remote tripping functionality.
Remote tripping forms an internal, phase-segregated operate indication through the OR operation of the
operate indications in the I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2 stages. This internal, phase-segregated operate indica-
tion is not available in the information routing in DIGSI 5, but instead, it is sent to the line differential protec-
tion functions in the remote devices in the device combination.
If a device receives a remote operate indication from a remote device, the remote tripping functionality
generates the (_:5551:57) Operate indication.
You can find the remote tripping indications in the DIGSI 5 information routing under Line →Line differen-
tial protection→ Remote tripping.

6.2.10.2 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Remote trip.
_:5551:54 Remote trip.:Inactive SPS O
_:5551:52 Remote trip.:Behavior ENS O
_:5551:53 Remote trip.:Health ENS O
_:5551:57 Remote trip.:Operate ACT O

6.2.11 Pickup and Tripping

6.2.11.1 Pickup Logic


The pickup logic combines the pickup indications of the I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2 stages in a phase-segre-
gated manner and forms the pickup group indication of the Line differential protection function.

[loanregu-150211-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-21 Pickup Logic

6.2.11.2 Trip Logic


The trip logic combines the operate indications of the I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2 stages and of the remote
tripping and forms the tripping group indication of the Line differential protection function.
With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether the function is allowed to execute a 1-
pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of 1-phase switching, then 1-pole tripping is allowed on
overhead lines.
If the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, a 1-phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate
indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indication.

408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

[loausl13-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-22 Trip Logic

6.2.11.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


In protection devices that are theoretically capable of 1-pole tripping (7SD87, 7SL87), this parameter controls
the permission for 1-pole tripping of the differential protection.
The parameter is located in the General block.
Parameter Value Description
yes The stage has permission to trip 1-pole on 1-phase faults.
no The stage always executes 3-pole tripping regardless of the fault type.

6.2.11.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O

6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection

For some applications, it may be necessary to remove and log off the local Line differential protection from the
device combination of the line differential protection. These applications include, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System expansion

• Testing the local line differential protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 409
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

EXAMPLE:
The following line formation is protected by the line differential protection with 3 devices.

[dw example logoff ldiff, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-23 Differential Protection with 3 Devices for a Line with a Feeder

In the example, the feeder is to be decommissioned for maintenance or modification work. Device 3 should
therefore also be switched off. Without additional measures, the line differential protection will no longer
function and will send an indication that it is ineffective.
For this use case, the Line differential protection function must be logged off in device 3. The Line differen-
tial protection in device 3 can only be logged off if no current is flowing through the feeder. During the log-off
process, device 3 checks whether the circuit breaker 3 is really open. If the Line differential protection is
logged off in device 3, this is saved in the remaining devices 1 and 2 and Kirchhoff's current law will then be
calculated only with the currents of the devices 1 and 2.
If device 3 is successfully logged off, you can switch it off. The logoff of device 3 is saved in the remaining
devices after it is switched off. If you switch device 3 back on, log on to the device combination again.

NOTE

i Before logging off, you must switch off the feeder protected by the local line differential protection.

Logoff Options of the Line Differential Protection


You can log off the Line differential protection function as follows:
• Via the operating dialog in DIGSI or the on-site operation panel
• Via communication through the controllable Function logoff (_:2311:319)

• Via the binary inputs, general: >Function logoff on (_:2311:507) or >Function logoff off
(_:2311:508)

410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

Conditions for Logging off the Function

[lo functional logoff ldiff, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-24 Logic for Logging off the Function

The following conditions must be fulfilled before the function is logged off:
• The current flow at the circuit breaker must be stopped. You must switch off the feeder protected by the
local line differential protection.
The locally measured current of the logged-off line end no longer flows into the sum of the currents. The
function then only sums up the currents from the line ends that have not been logged off.

• The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker function group (CB) provides the circuit-
breaker condition via the internal signal CB state protected obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example, in case of a breaker-and-a-half
layout, then the CB state of the protected object must be determined with both circuit breakers. In this
case, the Circuit-breaker condition for the protected object function block performs the connection of
the individual CB conditions.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB state protected obj. internal signal is in the
Open state:
– All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
– The >Disconnector open input is active.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected
Object.

• Monitoring the communication topology in the device combination is only important if more than 2
devices are communicating via the protection interface. A function can only be logged off if this does not
disturb the communication between the remaining devices in the device combination.
The logged-off local line differential protection can also be activated for test purposes (see 10.4 Functional
Test of the Line Differential Protection). This has no influence or impact on the running protection interface
communication.
The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you would like to use push-
buttons, switch on these push-buttons as shown in the following figure. With the push-button Key2, you log
off the function using; with the push-button Key1, you log the function on again.

[loexttx3-140311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-25 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 411
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Function logoff on as H (active with voltage)
and the binary input >Function logoff off as L (active without voltage). If the switch S is
closed, the function is logged off.

[loextsx4-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-26 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection

Indications
The logged-off function reports the status (Function logged off) and the cause of the logoff.
If you have logged off the function via binary inputs, the indication Logged off via BI is issued.
If you have logged off the function via on-site operation, DIGSI 5, or the protection interface, the indication
Logged off via control is issued.

6.2.13 Transformer in Protection Range

6.2.13.1 Description
If you would like any transformer (two-winding transformer or multi-winding transformer) to be taken into
account in the line formation, you must instantiate the optional function block Transformer from the Global
DIGSI 5 library in the Line differential protection function. You can find the Transformer function block in
the Global DIGSI 5 library under FG Line→ Line differential protection→ Function extensions.
Enter the rated data of the transformer under FG Line→ General→ Rated values. The rated values affect the
magnitude and phase of the differential current to be calculated. All measurands can be based on the rated
data for the power transformer.
Additionally, the respective vector groups for current and voltage and the type of grounding of the trans-
former neutral point have to be entered.

6.2.13.2 Application and Setting Notes

Rated Data of the Transformer


Enter the primary rated data of the transformer under FG Line→ General→ Rated values.
• First, enter the rated voltage of the transformer winding (side).
• Then enter the rated apparent power of the transformer.
To verify this, the resulting rated current of the transformer winding (side) is shown as a write-protected
parameter in the general rated values of the FG Line.

NOTE

i Make sure that you enter the same value for the rated apparent power in each device on a transformer
side. If the values are different, the Line differential protection function does not work.

In general, select the rated voltage of the winding facing the respective device. However, if a winding has a
voltage regulating range, do not use the rated voltage of the winding, but rather the voltage which corre-
sponds to the average current of the control area. This minimizes fault currents resulting from control.

412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

EXAMPLE:
Transformer with the data
Vector group YNd5
Rated apparent power Srated 35 MVA
Ratio TV 110 kV/25 kV
Control Y-side regulated ±10 %

For the regulated winding (110 kV) the following results:


Maximum voltage Vmax = 121 kV
Minimum voltage Vmin = 99 kV
Calculate the setting value for the primary rated voltage as follows:

[fo u rated transformer prim, 1, en_US]

Current-Transformer Error Settings


If the transformer winding has a voltage control range, additional current-proportional errors occur due to the
tap-changer switch position. These must be dealt with similar to current-transformer errors and must be
considered when setting the associated settings. Refer to the setting notes for current transformers.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for Line Differential
Protection Settings.

Protection Settings
For verification purposes, the internally calculated rated current will be displayed as a write-protected param-
eter.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.

Parameter: Voltage vector group nb.

• Default setting (_:103) Voltage vector group nb. = 0


As a rule, the Voltage vector group nb. is set exactly the same as the Current vector group nb..
If the vector group of the transformer is matched with external means, for example, because matching trans-
formers are present in the measuring current circuit and are still to be used, set Current vector group
nb. = 0 for all ends. In this case, the differential protection works without a matching calculation of its own.
However, the measuring voltages are then not matched beyond the transformer and thus not calculated and
displayed correctly. The Voltage vector group nb. corrects this shortcoming. Here, specify the actual
vector group of the transformer according to the aspects mentioned previously.
The Current vector group nb. is therefore significant for the differential protection, while Voltage
vector group nb. is valid as the basis for calculating measuring voltages beyond the transformer.

Parameter: Current vector group nb.

• Default setting (_:104) Current vector group nb. = 0


Current vector group nb. is the vector group of the transformer winding facing the device. The device
used at the reference side of the transformer is on the upper-voltage side and has to keep the digit 0 (default).
For the other windings, you must indicate the corresponding vector-group digit.

EXAMPLE:
For a transformer with the vector group Yy6d5, set the Current vector group nb. parameter as follows:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 413
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

On the Y-side: Current vector group nb. = 0


On the y-side: Current vector group nb. = 6
On the d-side: Current vector group nb. = 5

Parameter: Residual curr. elimination

• Default setting (_:105) Residual curr. elimination = yes


In case of groundings in the protection range, fault currents can flow through the current transformers in case
of ground faults outside the protection range (see Figure 6-27). Possible groundings in the protection range
include a grounded transformer neutral point, grounding transformers, or an arc-suppression coil. With the
Residual curr. elimination parameter, you can eliminate these fault currents without particular
external measures.

[logfpaus-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-27 Ground Fault Outside of the Transformer

Parameter Value Description


yes Active elimination of residual current:
Siemens recommends this setting value for applications with neutral-point
grounding of the transformer in the protection range (transformer neutral
point, grounding transformer, arc-suppression coil).
no No elimination of residual current:
Siemens recommends this setting value for applications without any neutral
point grounding of the transformer in the protection range.

NOTE

i If the elimination of the residual current is active, and in case of ground faults, the differential protection
becomes less sensitive by a factor of 1/3:
You achieve a higher degree of sensitivity only by measuring the current that flows through the neutral-
point grounding of the transformer. This requires the installation of a current transformer in the neutral-
point supply of the transformer, whereby its measured current can be captured by a 1-phase current input
configured on the device.

6.2.13.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Transformer
_:103 Transformer:Voltage vector 0 to 11 0
group nb.
_:104 Transformer:Current vector 0 to 11 0
group nb.
_:105 Transformer:Residual curr. • no yes
elimination • yes

414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

6.2.14 Charging-Current Compensation Ic-Compensation

6.2.14.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loladeko-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-28 Charging-Current Compensation

Mode of Operation
The optional FB Ic-compensat. is available for charging-current compensation. The FB lc-compensat. is
assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage I-DIFF and increases the sensitivity of the I-DIFF stage even with
high capacitive charging currents.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 415
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

The charging current is caused by the capacitances of the overhead line or the cable and flows through the
ground capacitance of the line. Due to the phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase capacitances, charging
currents are flowing even in correct operation, which cause a difference of the currents at the ends of the
protection range. In cables or long lines, the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable values. If the
feeder-side transformer voltages are connected to the devices, the influence of the capacitive charging
currents can be compensated for by calculation. The charging-current compensation specifies the actual
charging current. If there are lines with 2 ends, each device performs half the charging-current compensation.
When using M devices, each device assumes the M-th part .

[dwladko2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-29 Charging-Current Compensation for a Line with 2 Ends (1-Phase System)

For correct operation, stationary charging currents can be regarded as almost constant since they only depend
on the voltage and line capacitances. If you are working without charging-current compensation, take into
account the charging currents in the pickup value of the I-DIFF stage. With charging-current compensation,
this does not have to be taken into account here. With charging-current compensation, the stationary magnet-
izing currents are considered before quadrature-axis reactances. For transient inrush currents, the devices are
provided with separate inrush-current detection.

NOTE

i If you wish to work with the charging-current compensation, consider the following:
• The local voltage transformers must be connected!

• Monitor the voltage with the Measuring-voltage failure detection function. If the Measuring-
voltage failure detection is not present in the Line function group, add the function to the Line func-
tion group from the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You can find the Measuring-voltage failure detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under FG
Line → Supervision of secondary system → Mes.v.fail.det.
If a transformer or common-mode reactors are located in the line section to be protected, charging-current
compensation must not be activated!

6.2.14.2 Application and Setting Notes


The rated current Ic-rated is the capacitive charging current to be expected for the entire line and is the result
of the setting values of the following parameters:
Parameters Description
(_:101) Rated frequency Rated frequency of the device
You can find the parameter in DIGSI 5 under Settings → Device settings.

416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

Parameters Description
(_:9001:102) Rated Rated voltage of the line
voltage Capacitance per unit length of the line
(_:9001:112) C1 per
length unit Reactance per unit length of the line
(_:9001:148) C0 per Residual compensation factors
length unit
(_:9001:113) X per
length unit
(_:9001:104) Kr
You can find the parameters in DIGSI 5 under Settings → FG Line →
(_:9001:105) Kx
General.
(_:9001:118) K0
(_:9001:150) Angle (K0)
(_:102) Total line Overall length of the line as a parameter of the charging-current compensa-
length tion
You can find the parameter in DIGSI 5 under Settings → FG Line → Line
diff. prot. in the FB Ic-compensat..

For verification purposes, the rated charging current is displayed as a write-protected parameter in the func-
tion block Ic-compensat. ((_:110) Rated charging current).
In the following cases, no charging current can be calculated:
• The voltages are not connected.
• The voltages are connected, but the internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
or Measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.
If one of the 2 cases occurs, the charging-current compensation remains responsible for the line; however, it
must return to the conventional stabilization method (see parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated).

NOTE

i Before switching off the charging-current compensation with the parameter Mode, you must increase the
Threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 2 to 3 times Ic-rated of the line distance portion. Otherwise, undesired
tripping might occur.

NOTE

i You must enter additional line parameters for charging-current compensation. These include the following
parameters:
• The Rated frequency
• The Rated voltage of the line

• Capacitance per unit length of the line (C1 per length unit, C0 per length unit)

• The residual compensation factors (Kr, Kx, K0, Angle (K0))

• The Total line length

Parameter: Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated = 1.5


It is only possible to set the I-DIFF stage more sensitively by using the charging-current compensation (FB Ic-
compensat.). If you use the charging-current compensation, set the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 1⋅ Ic-
rated.
In case of an outage or lack of voltages, it must be ensured that the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage is
increased again to 2 to 3 times Ic-rated. Do this with the parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 417
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection

With the Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated parameter, you set the stabilization charging current/rated current
ratio. The setting value of the parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated increases the stabilization of the I-
DIFF stage by an additional component (stabilization charging current).

EXAMPLE:
In case of an outage or lack of voltages, the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage is to be increased to 2.5 times Ic-
rated. The threshold of the I-DIFF stage is set to 1 ⋅ Ic-rated.
If you want to increase the threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 2.5 times, set the parameter Ic-stabiliza-
tion/Ic-rated = 1.5.
In case of an outage of lack of voltages, both setting values are added to 2.5.

Since the charging current of the device must only be considered for the respective portion of the line, each
device will in fact increase its normal stabilization by a value of Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated divided by
the number of devices.

Parameter: Total line length

• Default setting (_:102) Total line length = 100.0 km


The parameter Total line length considers the entire length of the protected line (2 to 6 line ends) .
Thus, the overall capacity of the line and the resulting charging current of the line can be determined.

6.2.14.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Ic-compensat.
_:1 Ic-compensat.:Mode • off on
• on
_:101 Ic-compensat.:Ic-stabiliza- 1.0 to 4.0 1.5
tion/Ic-rated
_:102 Ic-compensat.:Total line 0.1 km to 1000.0 km 100.0 km
length

6.2.14.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Ic-compensat.
_:54 Ic-compensat.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Ic-compensat.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Ic-compensat.:Health ENS O
_:300 Ic-compensat.:I charge WYE O

418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.1 Overview of Functions

The Stub differential protection (ANSI 87STUB):


• Is a selective, 2-step short-circuit protection for a line stub that can be tripped by a disconnector switch. It
is important in 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts.

• Detects short circuits that lie between the current transformers and the feeder disconnector switch QB.

• Operates strictly phase-segregated and permits 3-pole instantaneous high-speed tripping


The stub differential protection operates on the basis of current comparison. To do this, the current trans-
formers that selectively limit the line range are connected to the device using 2 configured, 3-phase current
measurement locations. The feedback of the disconnector's position (open) activates the stub differential
protection

[dwstubap-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-30 Stub Differential Protection on a 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout

6.3.2 Structure of the Function

The Stub-differential protection function is used in the Line function group.


The Stub-differential protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the S-DIFF stage and the S-
DIFF fast 2 stage.
As an alternative to the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the S-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 419
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

[dwstubeb-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-31 Embedding the Stub-Differential Protection

Mode of Operation
The Stub-differential protection function is composed of the stages S-DIFF and S-DIFF fast 2. Both will
also be referred to in the following sections as function blocks. Both stages work in parallel and ensure high
sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. A release binary input (>Release func-
tion) switches the stub-differential protection to active. This binary input reports the position as open to the
feeder disconnector switch. The output signals of these stages are pickup and operate signals, which are
routed to the output logic, resulting in the corresponding protection indications.

Overall Logic

[lo general sdiff, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-32 General Logic of the Stub Differential Protection

420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.3 Function Description

Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of differential protection rests on the precondition that, during an uninterrupted operation,
the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equal 0. Secondary currents detected by the device
are tainted with measuring errors that are caused by the transmission behavior of the current transformer and
the input circuits of the device. All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the
currents processed in the devices is not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influ-
ences. A special method of adaptive self-stabilization is used in this context to ensure the highest possible
sensitivity of the differential protection.
The stabilization variable Irest is calculated from the sum of the potential faults:
Irest = Threshold + Σ(current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal fault (shaded area in Figure 6-33). With the adaptive approach it is no longer necessary to
assign parameters for a characteristic curve.

[dwanstub-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-33 Operate Curve of the Stub-Differential Protection

Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, an adaptive self-stabilization value
Ifault is calculated for each measuring point. This is the result of the sum of all current-transformer errors,
which in turn are the result of the current-transformer data and the degree of currents measured on the trans-
former.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 421
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-34 Approximation of the Current-Transformer Errors

The set parameters of the transformer data apply to the configured current inputs on the device.

Other Measuring Faults


Additional measuring faults will also be estimated by the device and local self-stabilizing variables will be auto-
matically increased.
Such measuring faults can be caused by
• Hardware and computation tolerances by the device itself
• Based on the Quality of the measurands such as harmonic components and frequency deviations.

Stages of the Stub-Differential Protection


The stub-differential protection has 2 preconfigured stages:
• The S-DIFF stage works with very accurate measurement. Maximum sensitivity can be achieved with
this stage. You cannot delete this stage.

• The S-DIFF fast 2 stage works in parallel with the S-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
If the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the Measuring point Current 3-phase.

• The S-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library as an alternative to the S-DIFF fast
2 stage. If you want to instantiate this stage, you must first delete the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If the S-DIFF fast stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is not visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the current measuring point.
The S-DIFF fast stage also works in parallel with the S-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.

422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.4 Stage S-DIFF

6.3.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo sdiff, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-35 Logic of the S-DIFF Stage

Mode of Operation
The S-DIFF stage is the sensitive stage of the stub-differential protection. It is based on the principle of
current phasor calculation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occur-
rence of a fault event. The S-DIFF fast 2 stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping
in the event of high-current errors.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 423
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

All measurands are evaluated separately for each phase. The device calculates a differential current from the
sum of the current phasors on the measuring inputs. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault
current, which is detected by the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents of the current
transformer of the protected object.

Pickup of the Stage


The pickup characteristic of the stub differential protection (see Figure 6-36) results from the stabilization
characteristic curve Stubdif = Irest (45° line) which is cut below the setting value of the (_:8401:3)
Threshold parameter.
It complies with the equation:
Irest = Threshold + Σ(current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal error (shaded area in Figure 6-36).

[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-36 Pickup Characteristic of the S-DIFF Stage

Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions (broken-wire detection , fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object (_:8401:53) Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents is
constantly monitored. If persistent faults are detected, (_:8401:53) Health is set to Alarm and (_:
8401:54) Inactive is set to Yes.

6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value: (_:8401:3) Threshold = 0.300 A


The pickup threshold of the differential current is set using this parameter. The total current flowing into
the protection range during a short circuit is the important criterion. This is the overall fault current,
regardless how the ends of the protected object are divided.

424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value: (_:8401:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s


In special cases, it can be advantageous to delay the tripping of the stub differential protection with an
additional time stage, for example for reverse interlocking. The time delay is started when an internal
fault has been detected ((_:8401:55) Pickup).

6.3.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
S-DIFF
_:8401:1 S-DIFF:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:8401:2 S-DIFF:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:8401:27 S-DIFF:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:8401:3 S-DIFF:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
_:8401:6 S-DIFF:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

6.3.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:500 General:>Release function SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
S-DIFF
_:8401:81 S-DIFF:>Block stage SPS I
_:8401:54 S-DIFF:Inactive SPS O
_:8401:52 S-DIFF:Behavior ENS O
_:8401:53 S-DIFF:Health ENS O
_:8401:55 S-DIFF:Pickup ACD O
_:8401:57 S-DIFF:Operate ACT O
_:8401:60 S-DIFF:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:8401:300 S-DIFF:I diff. WYE O
_:8401:301 S-DIFF:I restr. WYE O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 425
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O

6.3.5 Stage S-DIFF Fast 2

6.3.5.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo stage sdiff schn2, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-37 Logic of the S-DIFF fast 2 Stage

NOTE

i If you want to use the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly.

426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

Method of Operation
The S-DIFF fast 2 stage is optimized for fast operate times during high-current faults. It is superimposed
on the S-DIFF stage. The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current
faults is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous values. During this procedure, stabilization
to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-transformer saturation), which may occur during high-
current external faults, is not possible. For this reason, a decision for internal or external faults must be made
before the potential saturation occurs. It is assumed that the current transformers do not yet go into satura-
tion at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault inception.
If you use the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the Saturat. det. block is visible with the CT saturation
threshold parameter in the measuring point Current 3-phase. With this, the CT saturation
threshold must be set so that transformer saturation does not occur until the currents exceed the setting
value.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 8.3.12 Saturation Detection.
If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers limiting the protection range, the S-DIFF fast 2
stage is blocked and an erroneous pickup due to transformer saturation is avoided.
Normally, the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is set higher than the rated current. Otherwise, the S-DIFF fast 2
stage works in the same way as the sensitive S-DIFF stage. Each device calculates a differential current for
each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at each end of the
protected object. The value of the differential current corresponds to the fault current, which the differential-
protection system sees. Ideally, that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corre-
sponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation parameters. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the presently flowing currents on each end
of the protected object.

Pickup of the Stage


Like for the S-DIFF stage, the pickup characteristic (see Figure 6-38) results from the stabilization character-
istic curve S-DIFF = Irest (45° line), which is cut below the setting value of the Threshold parameter.
It complies with the equation
Irest = Threshold + Σ(current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal error (dimmed area in the figure below).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 427
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-38 Pickup Characteristic of the S-DIFF fast 2 Stage

Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection ,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault. The validity of the used currents is monitored continuously.
If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to Yes.

6.3.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value: (_:18241:3) Threshold = 1.000 A


With this parameter, you set the pickup threshold of the differential current. This pickup threshold must
be primarily equal on all ends of the protected object.
This stage responds very quickly. For this reason, a pickup with capacitive charging currents and inductive
magnetization currents as with shunt reactors – including during switching procedures – must be
excluded. Set the pickup value to a value greater then the load current (1.2 · Irated to 2 · Irated).

6.3.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


S-DIFF fast 2
_:18241:1 S-DIFF fast 2:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:18241:2 S-DIFF fast 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:18241:3 S-DIFF fast 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 2.50 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 2.50 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A

428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
S-DIFF fast 2
_:18241:81 S-DIFF fast 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:18241:54 S-DIFF fast 2:Inactive SPS O
_:18241:52 S-DIFF fast 2:Behavior ENS O
_:18241:53 S-DIFF fast 2:Health ENS O
_:18241:55 S-DIFF fast 2:Pickup ACD O
_:18241:57 S-DIFF fast 2:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 429
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.6 Stage S-DIFF Fast

6.3.6.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lostubi2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-39 Logic of the S-DIFF fast Stage

The S-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If you want to use the S-DIFF fast stage, you must delete the preinstantiated S-DIFF fast 2 stage first.
After this, you can instantiate S-DIFF fast.
If you use the S-DIFF fast stage, the Saturat. det. block is not available in the measuring point
Current.
You can find the description of the S-DIFF fast 2 in chapter 6.3.5 Stage S-DIFF Fast 2.

430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.6.2 Application and Setting Notes


The S-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If you want to use the S-DIFF fast stage, you must delete the preinstantiated S-DIFF fast 2 stage first.
After this, you can instantiate the S-DIFF fast stage.
If you use the S-DIFF fast stage, the Saturat. det. block is not available in the measuring point
Current.
You can find the description of the S-DIFF fast 2 stage in chapter 6.3.5 Stage S-DIFF Fast 2.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value: (_:8431:3) Threshold = 1.000 A


This parameter sets the pickup threshold of the differential current, which must be primarily equal on all
ends of the protected object.
This stage responds very quickly. For this reason, pickup during capacitive charging currents and induc-
tive magnetization currents (for transformers or shunt reactors) – including during switching procedures
- must be excluded. The pickup value should be set higher than the load current (max. 1.2·Irated to 2·Irated).

6.3.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


S-DIFF fast
_:8431:1 S-DIFF fast:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:8431:2 S-DIFF fast:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:8431:3 S-DIFF fast:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 4.00 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 4.00 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A

6.3.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
S-DIFF fast
_:8431:81 S-DIFF fast:>Block stage SPS I
_:8431:54 S-DIFF fast:Inactive SPS O
_:8431:52 S-DIFF fast:Behavior ENS O
_:8431:53 S-DIFF fast:Health ENS O
_:8431:55 S-DIFF fast:Pickup ACD O
_:8431:57 S-DIFF fast:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 431
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection

6.3.7 Stage Description of the Output Logic

Output Logic

[lostubag-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-40 Output Logic

432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

6.4.1 Overview of Functions

The Restricted ground-fault protection function (ANSI 87N):


• Detects ground faults in transformers, shunt reactors, neutral reactors or rotating machinery in which the
neutral point is grounded.

• Has high sensitivity to ground faults near the neutral point.

• Is supplemental main protection to longitudinal differential protection.

• Protects grounding transformers in the protection range. It is required that a current transformer be used
in the case of neutral point feed, that is, between neutral point and grounding conductor. The neutral
point transformer and the phase current transformer define the protection range.

• Adapts itself to the highest-amperage side with auto transformers and thereby prevents overfunction in
the event of external ground faults.

6.4.2 Structure of the Function

The Restricted ground-fault protection function is used in the Transformer side or Auto transformer
protection function group. Furthermore, you can use the function in the stabilizing winding of the auto trans-
former or also in the Standard UI function. The function depends upon application in the corresponding appli-
cation template preconfigured by the manufacturer or can be copied during the engineering into the corre-
sponding function group.
The Restricted ground-fault protection function is stepless.

[dwstrupt-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-41 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 433
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

6.4.3 Function Description

Logic of the Function

[loreffkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-42 Logic Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection Function

The protection function processes the neutral-point current I0* (exactly 3I0) and the calculated zero-sequence
current I0** (exactly 3I0) from the phase currents (see following figure). The protection range extends exclu-
sively over the transformer winding, including current transformer. The amount-adapted (compensated)
currents are described by the * symbol. They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side.
In case of an internal ground fault, the residual currents flow to the fault location. With an external ground
fault, the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers. In this way, the direction of current flow
serves as the decisive criterion for an internal fault.

434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-43 Basic Principle of the Function

In accordance with the logic diagram, Figure 6-42 the protection function consists of 3 parts:

Effect of Pickup Value


The differential current and the restraint current are calculated from the residual currents. The reference
arrows are defined as positive when pointing to the protected object (see Figure 6-43). Consider that the
ground current in the fault record and in the DIGSI 5 Test Suite are displayed as positive if the current flows to
ground from the protected object.

NOTE

i The following calculation applies to the configurations with a current transformer for the side. In a special
case of several current transformers per side, the calculation of the restraint current must be performed in
greater detail.

I0* = km · 3I0'
I0** = km · 3I0'' → 3I0'' = IA + IB + IC
with km = IN,transformer/IN,side
IDiff,REF = |I0* + I0**|
IRest,REF = |I0*| + |IA| + |IB| + |IC|
where:
3I0' Measured zero-sequence current at neutral point
3I0'' Zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents
km Factor for magnitude adaptation
Irated,transformer Primary transformer rated current
Irated,side Primary rated current of the transformer side
IDiff,REF Differential current
IRest,REF Restraint current

Using the calculated restraint current, a current Ichar. curve which represents the pickup value for the tripping is
determined from the characteristic curve (Figure 6-44). In this way, the protection function is stabilized in the
event of external, multiphase ground faults, for example, a 2-pole ground fault. This means that the protec-
tion function becomes less sensitive.
If the Slope = 0 is set here, the set Threshold of the operate curve is delivered independent of the restraint
current.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 435
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[dwstabke-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-44 Stabilized Characteristic Curve

Processing a Ground Side for Auto Transformer


Instead of a 1-phase neutral point, with an auto transformer, a 3-phase ground side can also be used.

[dwautraf-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-45 Connecting a Ground Side on the Auto Transformer

In this case, the neutral-point current calculates as sum of the phase currents of the ground side:
I0* = km · 3I0' → 3I0' = Ignd,A + Ignd,B + Ignd, C
with km = IN,transformer/IN,side

436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

The following applies for the restraint current:


IRest,REF = |Ignd,A| + |Ignd,B| + |Ignd,C| + |IA| + |IB| + |IC|

NOTE

i If both 1-phase neutral point and 3-phase ground side are connected, only the 1-phase neutral point is
used by the restricted ground-fault protection. The 3-phase ground side is not considered.

Pickup
If the IDiff,REF calculated differential current exceeds the calculated current Ichar. (see Figure 6-42), pickup occurs
and the internal processing is enabled. The pickup is indicated.

Operate Curve
The operate curve represented in the following figure consists of 2 parts. In the right part of the characteristic
curve, you will find a case of an internal ground fault. Under ideal conditions, the angle between the two
residual currents (∠(I0*, I0**)) equals 0. With current-transformer saturation, angle errors can result. The right
part of the characteristic curve is valid for angles ≤ 90°. The tripping current is the current flowing at the
neutral point (I0*). It is compared to the set or increased threshold value.

[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-46 Operate Curve Depending on the Phase Angle between l0* and I0** at |I0*| = |I0**| (180° =
External Fault)

In case of an external ground fault, the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents reverses by
180°. The phase angle between the residual currents thus (∠(I0*, I0**)) equals 180°. They are located in the
left part of the operate curve and recognize a clearly increased pickup value. Angle deviations of 180° are
caused by transformer saturation in conjunction with external short-circuits.
The current IAngle,REF for the Angle Decision is determined from the following subtraction and summation:
IAngle,REF = |I0* - I0**| - |I0* + I0**|
The resulting current IAngle,REF results from the respective fault conditions, which are illustrated in the following
figure. With an internal fault (angle = 0°), a current results that has a negative sign. If angle errors occur, the
sign remains negative. The amount of the current decreases.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 437
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

In an external short circuit (180°), the current becomes positive. At a smaller angle (<180°) due to transformer
saturation, the angle remains positive. The amount also decreases.

[dwwinken-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-47 Angle Decision in Internal and External Faults

For tripping to occur, the neutral-point current I0* must reach the value IREF,off. The characteristic curve in the
left part of the figure can be determined from the following relationship:
IREF,off = Ichar + k · IAngle,REF
where:
Ichar. curve Pickup value resulting from the pickup value increase
k Factor (permanently set to 4.05657. With this value, the limit angle at |I0*| = |I0**| is
precisely 100°. No tripping is possible from this angle on.)

Processing of Several Measuring Points on One Side


If several measuring points are present on one side of a star winding, as with a 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, the
angle decision occurs separately for each measuring point. The maximum current IAngle,REF is used to establish
the tripping decision.

NOTE

i With an external fault, the current IAngle,REF is always > 0.

The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions.
Also observe that the restraint current (IRest.,REF) always results from the sum of all currents (phase currents of
the measuring points and the neutral-point current). For pickup, the differential current IDiff,REF is necessary.
This differential current results from the geometric sum of all adapted residual currents. The residual currents
of the measuring points on the outgoing side and of the neutral-point current are meant here.

438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[dwfehler-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-48 Behavior under Different Fault Conditions

Functional Measured Values

Measured Value Description


(_:306) I REF,operate Operate quantity of the restricted ground-fault protection from
the angle criterion
(_:307) I Angle,REF Stabilizing value (angle) of the restricted ground-fault protection
from the angle criterion
(_:311) I REF,Trip operate Operate quantity of the restricted ground-fault protection when
OFF
(_:312) I angle,REF operate Stabilizing value of the restricted ground-fault protection when
OFF
(_:301) I diff. Differential current
(_:302) I restr. Restraint current

You will find the measured values for the Restricted ground-fault protection under the following device
menu entries:
• Main menu → Measurements → function → Function values → 87N REF

6.4.4 Application and Setting Notes

NOTE

i The following conditions must be observed when setting the threshold values:
Threshold value ≥ max {0.05 I/Irated,S ; 0.05 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
Threshold value ≤ min {2.00 I/Irated,S ; 100.00 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
The value 0.05 I/Irated,S is the minimum possible setting value and 2.00 I/Irated,S the
maximum possible. Iprim,transf. max is the largest transformer current and Irated,protected object the protected object
rated current. 100.00 I/Irated,S is the upper measurement limit.
If otherwise, it could happen that there is chattering of the pickup indication, the minimum threshold limit
is lifted. The maximum limit on the other hand is corrected downward, if the exceeding current otherwise
through the magnitude scaling must be so large, that it would already be outside of the measuring range
of the transformer.
The adaptation of the setting limits is done automatically. In addition, a setting is prevented outside of
these limits.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 439
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

In the following, typical applications are described for the restricted ground-fault protection.

Protection of a Solidly Grounded Star Winding (Y Side)

[dwanster-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-49 Application Star Side

This application is a standard application. Here the phase currents of one side and the neutral-point current
are processed. The function is located in the Transformer Side function group.
The following figure show the structural division of the function. The restricted ground-fault protection gets
its measurands from the current transformers, which are connected to the Transformer side function group.
The neutral-point current is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer
side function group. To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 (including reference arrow definition of the restricted
ground-fault protection), in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral-point current, a rotation of the
polarity (phase rotation by 180°) is also done in the Transformer neutral point function group.

NOTE

i The fault record indicates the analog traces according to the connection. For this reason, the neutral-point
current is shown rotated by 180° in comparison to SIPROTEC 4.

[dw2wtyde-201112-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-50 Function Group Structure of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

Explanations on the Connection and Current-Direction Definition


Uniform reference arrows and transformer burdens are defined for the SIPROTEC 5 device series. These agree-
ments also apply to the transformer protection devices. The special handling of the neutral-point current
described previously is a result of this.
The current definition states that the sum of the currents flowing into the protected object is equal to 0 (IA + IB
+ IC + IN = 0 or IA + IB + IC = -IN). The protected object is located to the right or left of the transformer set. The
following basic connections result from this.

[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-51 Current-Transformer Connection (1) According to Definition

or

[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-52 Current-Transformer Connection (2) According to Definition

The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6-53. The current flow for an
external ground fault is entered at the same time. It is recognized that the secondary currents each flow from
the device. From this, a differential current (IDiff,REF = |IY + IA + IB + IC| = | -I4 - I3|) results, according to the refer-
ence arrow definition for the restricted ground-fault protection (positive to the protected object) with an

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 441
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

external ground fault. To prevent that, the neutral-point current is rotated in the Transformer neutral-point
function group. It follows that: IDiff, REF = |I4 – I3| = 0.

NOTE

i If the neutral-point current is included in the protection function (zero-sequence current correction), this
rotation also has an effect for the differential protection.

[dwstwnas-281112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-53 Current-Transformer Connection on the Transformer

The setting of the 1-phase measuring point based on the definition is done as follows:

[scedsall-200214-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-54 DIGSI 5 Setting

The point in Figure 6-53 describes the polarity of the current transformer. At the same time, the current
terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point. Since in the SIPROTEC 5
system each current transformer can be assigned a 1-phase measuring point, the odd number terminal points
are named in the setting parameters. According to Figure 6-53, the setting must be yes.
• Default setting (_:115) terminal 1,3,5,7 in dir.obj.= yes

442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

The following view can be used to derive the threshold value. The transformer is supplied, for example, via the
delta winding and a 1-pole ground fault occurs on the star side.

NOTE

i For estimation of the short-circuit current, note that the inductance changes quadratically with the winding
and linearly with the voltage.

The right part in the following figure represents the fault current as a function of the fault location. The fault
current curve IF1 shows that the longitudinal differential protection with faults near the neutral point has
sensitivity problems due to the sinking current. On the other hand, the neutral-point current IF2 is sufficiently
large. There is therefore no need to set the Threshold (current through the neutral point transformer) to
sensitive.

[dwf1pole-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-55 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1-Pole Ground Fault

• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.2 I/Irated,S


The previously mentioned condition must be maintained during the setting.

[foschwe1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The following lower limiting value results from the data from Figure 6-49:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 443
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[foschwe2-041012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The recommended setting value of 0.2 I/Irated,S lies above it.


• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.07
You can stabilize the protection function (less sensitive setting) with external multiphase short-circuits to
ground with the parameter Slope. To determine the setting value, no pickup value increase can occur up to
the rated current. After this, the gradient must be active. To derive the gradient, it is assumed that continua-
tion of the straight line must go through the coordinate origin (see Figure 6-56). Determine the intersection
from the threshold value and the restraint current at rated current. Calculate the gradient as follows:

[fostbref-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

[dwsteiga-221012-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-56 Derivation of the Setting Value for the Gradient

If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side (see Figure 6-48), Siemens recommends using the
value 3 I/Irated,S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current. In the load case, the maximum trans-
former rated current flows on one side.
If, however, several measuring points are on the supply side (for example, breaker-and-a-half layout), Siemens
recommends including all phase currents in the intersection calculation, in order to avoid too strong a stabili-
zation. With 2 measuring points, a value of 6 I/Irated,S results as intersection with the threshold value. The
slope becomes flatter (0.2 I/Irated,S/6 I/Irated,S = 0.03).

444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

Protection of an Auto Transformer

[dwsptran-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-57 Activation and Application Example of an Auto Transformer (500 MVA: 400 kV, 230 kV;
125 MVA: 34.5 kV)

Use the highest side rated current with the auto transformer for normalization. In the example (Figure 6-57),
the measuring point is M2 (230 kV side). For this side, a rated current of 500 MVA/(√(3) · 230 kV) = 1255 A
results. The primary transformer rated current is 1500 A. With this, you can estimate the minimum permissible
pickup value.

[foscwe01-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.2 I/Irated,S.


• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.2 I/Irated,S

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 445
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

To determine the Slope, the restraint current of both sides (400 kV and 230 kV) must be used. The rated
current is used as starting value for the gradient. Since side 2 (230 kV) is the reference side for the normaliza-
tion, the value of the 400 kV side must be adapted to this rated current. The adaptation factor results from the
inverse ratio (230 kV/400 kV). The following restraint current goes into the calculation:

[fostbrst-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Siemens recommends using the setting value 0.07.


• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.07

Protection of a Resistance-Grounded Star Winding (Y Side)

[dwrefspa-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-58 Application with Resistance-Grounded Neutral Point

To also capture faults in the resistance to ground, a current transformer must be installed at the neutral point
of the protected object (see Figure 6-58). The pickup values can be derived from the data in the example. As
side rated value, the following results:
140 MVA/(√3 · 20 kV) = 4042 A
The following threshold value results as lower limit:

446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[foschwe3-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

So that the function is responsive, select a setting value of 0.08 I/Irated,S.


• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.08 I/Irated,S
As gradient, the following results:

[fosteig1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.03


Because of the grounding resistance RE reduced protection range results. This can be estimated as follows: The
grounding resistance is much larger than the winding reactance, thus the following maximum ground current
results:
IGnd max = 20 kV/(√3 · 12 Ω) = 962 A
You can determine the minimum tripping current from the setting value:
IGnd min = side rated current * threshold value = 4042 A · 0.08 = 323 A
Thus, the following protection range results:

[foschwe4-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The attainable protection range amounts to approx. 66.4 %. In order to capture ground faults near the neutral
point, it is also recommended to connect a sensitive ground current protection to the neutral point trans-
former. You must coordinate its operate time with the line protection.

NOTE

i Ensure that the protection range further limits itself with larger neutral-point resistances, or the restricted
ground-fault protection can no longer be used.

Protection with Neutral Reactors on the Delta Side


To produce ground currents on the delta side of a transformer, neutral reactors (zigzag reactors) are used. A
resistance for ground current limitation can also be present. In this case, the resistance is much greater than
the reactor and delta reactance of the transformer. The following figure shows a typical implementation. The
restricted ground-fault protection works between output-sided phase current transformers and the current
transformer in the neutral point of the neutral reactor.
In the example, the fault current curve with the ground fault in a delta winding is also represented. The fault
location in which the lowest fault current flows can also be seen. This current influences the protection setting
set close.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 447
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[dwstrpkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-59 Application with Neutral Reactor

As side rated value, the following results:


140 MVA/(√3 · 34.4 kV) = 2343 A
You can thus define the lower limit for the threshold value:

[foschwe5-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

If the fault is in the middle of the winding, the minimum ground current will arise, as shown in Figure 6-59.
The driving voltage is:
VGnd min = Vrated,S2/(2 √3) = 34.5 kV/(2 √3) = 9.96 kV
The following minimum ground current results:
IGnd min = VGnd min/RGnd = 9.96 kV/19.05 Ω = 523 A
With reference to the side rated current, the relationship is:
IGnd min/Irated,S = 523 A/2343 A = 0.223
With a safety margin of 2, 0.223/2 = 0.1115 results. Select this value as threshold value (rounded: 0.12 I/
Irated,S).
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.12 I/Irated,S
As gradient, the following results:

448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

[fosteig2-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.04

Protection of a Shunt Reactor

[dwanquer-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-60 Application with Neutral Reactor

As side rated value, the following results:


10 MVA/(√3 · 132 kV) = 43.7 A
You can thus define the lower limit for the threshold value:

[foschwe6-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Select 0.35 I/Irated,S as threshold value.


• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.35 I/Irated,S
For the shunt reactor, there is no external fault that can lead to overfunction. Siemens recommends a
minimum rise (0.05).
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.05

6.4.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


87N REF #
_:1 87N REF #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 87N REF #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 449
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:103 87N REF #:Threshold 0.05 I/IrObj to 2.00 I/IrObj 0.20 I/IrObj
_:105 87N REF #:Slope 0.00 to 0.95 0.07
_:109 87N REF #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
_:191 87N REF #:Reference side is • not assigned not assigned
• Side 1
• Side 2
• Side 3
• Side 4
• Side 5
_:151 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 1 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 1
_:152 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 1 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 2
_:153 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 1 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 3
_:154 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 1 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 4
_:156 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 2 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 1
_:157 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 2 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 2
_:158 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 2 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 3
_:159 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 2 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 4
_:161 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 3 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 1
_:162 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 3 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 2
_:163 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 3 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 3
_:164 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 3 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 4
_:166 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 4 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 1
_:167 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 4 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 2
_:168 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 4 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 3
_:169 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 4 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 4
_:171 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 5 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 1
_:172 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 5 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 2
_:173 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 5 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 3
_:174 87N REF #:MU-ID Side 5 0 to 100 0
Mp3ph 4
_:185 87N REF #:MU-ID Mp1ph 0 to 100 0

450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

6.4.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
87N REF #
_:82 87N REF #:>Block function SPS I
_:54 87N REF #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 87N REF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 87N REF #:Health ENS O
_:55 87N REF #:Pickup ACD O
_:57 87N REF #:Operate ACT O
_:303 87N REF #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:305 87N REF #:Block by direct. det. SPS O
_:306 87N REF #:I REF,operate MV O
_:307 87N REF #:I Angle,REF MV O
_:311 87N REF #:I REF,Trip operate MV O
_:312 87N REF #:I angle,REF operate MV O
_:301 87N REF #:I diff. MV O
_:302 87N REF #:I restr. MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 451
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5.1 Overview of Functions

The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) function (ANSI 21/21 N):
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more ends in radial,
looped, or meshed systems,

• Is used as a backup protection for busbars, transformers, and other lines

• Works only in systems with a grounded neutral point

• Is suitable for use at all voltage levels


Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The Distance
protection with reactance method (RMD) function reduces the unfavorable influence of high fault resis-
tances at high loads. If the electrical power system shows inhomogeneities, for example, different impedance
angles of the infeeds, the reach of the distance protection can be affected. The reactance method compen-
sates this influence via adjustable compensation angles.

6.5.2 Structure of the Function

The RMD function can be placed in function groups that provide voltage and current measured values as well
as line parameters.
The RMD function consists of the following blocks:
• General
• Ground-fault detection

• Adaptive loop selection

• Distance zones (preconfigured quadrilateral characteristic curve)

• AREC zone (not preconfigured)

• Direction determination

• Output logic
The RMD function is preconfigured with 4 zones. The zones are structured identically. In the function RMD, a
maximum of 16 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve and 16 zones with MHO characteristic curve can
be operated simultaneously.

452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwstrdisrmd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-61 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Mode of Operation
The RMD function monitors the phase current. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current
thresh, the impedances of the 3 phase-to-phase loops and the positive-sequence loop (phase-to-phase-to-
phase) are calculated.
Ground-fault detection checks whether any ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault is detected, the impe-
dances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
The calculated impedance is assigned to the operate curve (quadrilateral characteristic curve) of the zones. For
long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the positive-sequence impedance is reflected in the operate
curve of the distance protection. For this case, a load cutout can be configured that eliminates unwanted
pickups due to overload. You can find the description of the settings in chapter 6.5.3 Application and Setting
Notes – General Settings.
For all picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The adaptive loop selection determines which loops
are actually selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops
are not considered by the adaptive loop selection. You can find more detailed information in chapter
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection.
For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip
signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the
zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.

Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the phase-
to-ground measurement loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the zero-sequence current 3I0
• Monitoring of the zero-sequence voltage V0

Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-62). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection
must be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current
without a primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of
current-transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detection.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 453
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.

[logroundfault RMD, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-62 Logic of the Ground-Fault Detection

Distance Zones
For each zone, an operate curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic
You can set the zones as basic or as advanced zone. With the parameter Advanced, you are provided
with additional settings in the zone. This allows you to adapt the zone better to the specific conditions.
You can find the description in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.

• MHO characteristic curve


The description begins in chapter 6.5.9.1 Description.

Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is analyzed additionally.
You can find the description of the direction determination in chapter 6.5.7 Direction Determination.

Adaptive Loop Selection


The RMD function works with adaptive loop selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed and
weighted at the same time. You can find the description of the properties of the different criteria in chapter
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection.

Output Logic
The output logic of the RMD function links the output information of the zones. The output logic forms the
accumulative pickup indications and operate indications of the function. You can find the description of the
output logic in chapter6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

6.5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings

In the General function block of the RMD function, you set the following parameters. The setting values are
valid for all zones in the distance protection.

Parameter: Zone timer start

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:110) Zone timer start = on dist. pickup

454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

The Zone timer start parameter is used to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
Parameter Value Description
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. If the
fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays continue
to run.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent-
time protection functions, select this setting.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) V0> threshold value = 1.667 V


The V0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence voltage limit for ground-fault
detection.
For ground faults in a network system, there is a zero-sequence voltage. The zero-sequence voltage drops as
the distance between the fault location and the measuring point increases. Siemens recommends keeping the
default setting of 1.667 V. If power-system unbalances can cause higher zero-sequence voltages to occur
during operation, you may increase the default setting.

Parameter: Parallel-line compensat.

• Default setting: (_:2311:105) Parallel-line compensat. = no


The Parallel-line compensat. parameter is used to determine for double circuit lines whether you wish
to take into account the influence of the coupling impedance on the loop impedance or not.

NOTE

i You see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.

Parameter: Min. phase-current thresh

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.100 A


Set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter to a very sensitive value (10 % of Irated). If the minimum
phase current is exceeded, the distance protection calculates the impedance. The sensitive setting allows you
to ensure the backup function of the distance protection in case of remote faults in other feeders. If the
minimum phase current in some short circuits – depending on system conditions – is not exceeded, you will
have to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens recommends using the default setting Min.
phase-current thresh = 0.10 A.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 455
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

NOTE

i If you have set the parameter Zone settings = Basic in a zone, the zone works with the following
parameters of the function (from the function block General):
• (_:2311:130) RF (ph-g)
• (_:2311:131) RF (ph-ph)

• (_:2311:132) Substitute for IF

• (_:2311:134) Comp. angle zero seq.

• (_:2311:135) Comp. angle neg. seq.

• (_:2311:145) Delta Dist. charact. angle


You can find the description of the parameters in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.

Parameter: Use load cutout

• Default setting (_:2311:106) Use load cutout = no


With the Use load cutout parameter, you determine if you want to cut out a load cutout from the operate
curve in the R-X plane or not. You can set the load cutout for both directions, forward only or
reverse only.

Load Cutout
The load-cutout parameters are only visible if you set the parameter (_:2311:106) Use load cutout =
forward only, reverse only or both directions.
You set the load cutout using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:2311:107) R load cutout = 2.500 Ω
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Angle load cutout = 45.0°
The load cutout applies only for the positive-sequence loops (phase-phase-phase-loop).
In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance zone. The zone
may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific application, calculate the
smallest load impedance and the greatest load-impedance angle under heavy load (see the following
example).

[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-63 The Load Cutout Acts only on the Positive-Sequence Loop

The R value should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.

456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

EXAMPLE

Calculation of load-cutout parameters in balanced load conditions


110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the following data:
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 100 MVA
Imax = 525 A
Minimum operating voltage
Vmin = 0.9 Vrated
Current transformer 600 A/5 A
Voltage transformer 110 kV/0.1 kV

The primary minimum load impedance is then calculated as follows:

[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]

The secondary minimum load impedance is then:

[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]

With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout = 0.9 ⋅108.9 Ω = 98 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout = 0.9 ⋅11.9 Ω = 10.7 Ω

Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameter Angle load cutout) greater (approx. 5°) than the
maximum occurring rotor angle (corresponding to the minimum power factor cos φ).

EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load cos φ = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting instructions in the example application beginning in chapter 6.5.11.1 Over-
view.

NOTE

i Only if you are working with MHO characteristic curves the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!

Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-ph)

• Default setting (_:2311:112) Mem. polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %


With the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with a
buffered voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO characteristic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 457
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without
extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-ph)

• Default setting (_:2311:114) Cross polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %


With the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.

6.5.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:110 General:Zone timer start • on zone pickup on dist. pickup
• on dist. pickup
_:2311:102 General:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 1.667 V
value
_:2311:105 General:Parallel-line • no no
compensat. • yes
_:2311:101 General:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:130 General:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:2311:131 General:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:2311:132 General:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:2311:134 General:Comp. angle -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
zero seq.
_:2311:135 General:Comp. angle -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
neg. seq.
_:2311:136 General:Delta Dist. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
charact. angle
_:2311:106 General:Use load cutout • no no
• both directions
• forward only
• reverse only
_:2311:107 General:R load cutout 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:2311:108 General:Angle load 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
cutout

6.5.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O

458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O

6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection

In systems with effective or impedance grounded neutral point, each contact of a phase with ground is a
short-circuit. The closest protection equipment must switch off the fault immediately.
With the distance protection with reactance method (RMD), 7 line loops are calculated (3 ph-gnd loops, 3 ph-
ph loops, 1 positive-sequence loop). Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-circuited lines also
influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-circuit current in line
A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B, C-A, and A-B-C. The ground current is also
measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called apparent impedances
occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop.
For double phase-to-ground faults, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the
same direction, this can also lead to pickup in the associated phase-to-phase loop.
With a symmetrical load and 3-phase short circuits, the positive-sequence loop (phase-phase-phase-loop) is
evaluated. In this case, the pickup is reported via the 3 phase-to-phase-loops. If a ground fault is detected, the
phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.
The RMD function works with adaptive loop selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed and
weighted at the same time. The following table shows the different criteria and their properties:
Criterion Property
Current level The criterion is based on the assumption that the current in the short-
circuited loops increases in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the current
RMS value to the rated current provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Voltage level The criterion is based on the assumption that the voltage in the short-
circuited loops collapses in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the voltage
RMS value to the rated voltage provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Delta current level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the current are used. The
following delta variables are formed:
• Difference between the actual RMS value and a saved value
• Difference between the present instantaneous value and the previous
instantaneous value before a nominal period in the past
• Difference between the instantaneous phasor values and a saved value
The magnitude of the calculated delta variables provides information on the
type of the short circuit.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 459
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Criterion Property
Delta voltage level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the voltages are used. The
following delta variables are formed:
• Difference between the actual RMS value and a saved value
• Difference between the present instantaneous value and the previous
instantaneous value before a nominal period in the past
• Difference between the instantaneous phasor values and a saved value
The magnitude of the calculated delta variables provides information on the
type of the short circuit.
Impedance The criterion calculates impedances for all short-circuit loops. The ratio of
the lowest impedance value to the individually calculated loop impedance
provides information on the type of the short circuit.
Symmetrical components The criterion is based on the symmetrical components. The ratio between
zero, negative and positive-sequence indicator provides information on the
type of the short circuit.
Jump detection The criterion is a logical criterion that has current and voltage jumps as input
variables. A conclusion about the type of the short circuit is drawn on the
basis of the logical operation of the existing current and voltage jumps.

Checking the loops with the adaptive loop selection ensures selectivity in a reliable way. The loop selected by
the criteria leads to a pickup only when the loop impedance is within the pickup range.
This eliminates healthy apparent impedances on the one hand, but on the other hand simultaneously detects
unbalanced multiphase short circuits and multiple faults correctly. The loops found valid are converted into
phase information. This allows the pickup to be signaled in a phase-selective manner.

6.5.7 Direction Determination

To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop. The direction of the
short circuit is determined using different methods. The methods are processed and weighted at the same
time. The following table shows the different input variables of the methods and their properties:
Input Variables for Direction Feature
Determination
Current, actual short-circuit This method determines the ratio between the instantaneous voltage
voltage phasor and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selec-
tive.
Saved, actual short-circuit The method determines the ratio between the saved voltage phasor and the
voltage instantaneous current phasor. The voltage phasor adapted to the instanta-
neous phase position is used.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. It is the preferred application for series-compensated systems. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.

460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Input Variables for Direction Feature


Determination
Instantaneous quadrature The method determines the ratio between the instantaneous healthy
voltage voltage phasor turned by 90° and the instantaneous current phasor.

Figure 6-64 Direction Determination with Quadrature Voltages

The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short


circuit. The method functions only with 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits
without ground contact, and is loop-selective.
Saved quadrature voltage The method determines the ratio between the saved healthy voltage phasor
turned by 90° and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions only with 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits
without ground contact, and is loop-selective.
Delta variables The direction determination with delta variables works with static or
dynamic delta variables.
• Direction determination with static delta variables:
The method uses the delta phasors of the current and the voltage. The
delta phasors of the current and the voltage are calculated from the
difference between the instantaneous actual phasor and the phasor
saved before the fault.
The ratio between the delta voltage phasor and the delta current
phasor provides information on the direction of the short circuit. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.
• Direction determination with dynamic delta variables:
The method uses the sampled delta values of the current and the
voltage. The sampled delta values of the current and voltage are calcu-
lated from the difference between the instantaneous measured
sampled value and the sampled value recorded before the system
period. The product of the delta current and the delta voltage is inte-
grated.
The result of the integration provides information on the direction of
the short circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and
is loop-selective.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 461
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Input Variables for Direction Feature


Determination
Symmetrical components The direction determination is based on the symmetrical components.
• The direction determination with zero-sequence variables determines
the zero-sequence impedance from the voltage and current phasors of
the zero-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. The method functions only with short circuits that have
ground contact and is not loop-selective.
• The direction determination with negative-sequence variables deter-
mines the negative-sequence impedance from the voltage and current
phasors of the negative-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. It is the preferred application for short circuits during
power swing. It functions only with non-symmetrical short circuits and
is not loop-selective.
Delta positive-sequence varia- The direction determination with delta positive-sequence variables deter-
bles mines the ratio between the delta voltage phasor and the delta current
phasor of the positive-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction. It functions
with all short-circuit types and is not loop-selective.

Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-65.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• Source impedance
• Power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve (forwards) has a reserve distance to the limits of the 1st
quadrant in the R-X diagram:

[dwritg kl disrm, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-65 Direction-Characteristic Curve in the R-X Diagram

(1) Also valid for non-directional

Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different (reflected through the center)
direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. The entire tripping range applies to it.

462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Features of Direction Determination


The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve in Figure 6-65 applies to actual short-circuit
voltages.
Figure 6-66 shows the direction-characteristic curve, taking the source impedance into consideration for
external short-circuit or buffered voltages (without load transport). Since these voltages are equal to the corre-
sponding generator voltage E, and they also do not change after a short circuit occurs, the direction-character-
istic curve appears in the impedance diagram shifted by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For fault location
F1 (Figure 6-66a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the reverse
direction. For all fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer), the short-
circuit direction is clearly detected as forward (Figure 6-66b). If the current reverses, the orientation of the
direction-characteristic curve changes suddenly (Figure 6-66c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the
measuring point (current transformer). The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the value of I2. During
load transport on the line, the direction-characteristic curve can also rotate by the load angle.

[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-66 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Quadrature or Buffered Voltages

Direction Determination for Series-Compensated Lines


The direction-characteristic curves and their shift by the source impedance also apply for lines with series
capacitors. For a short circuit upstream of the local series capacitor, however, the short-circuit voltage reverses
if the protective spark gap SF has not picked up (see Figure 6-67).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 463
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-67 Voltage Drop for a Short Circuit behind a Series Capacitor

(1) Without pickup of the protective spark gap


(2) With pickup of the protective spark gap

The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. In this case as well, however, direction measure-
ment is correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-68a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus, depending on the
source impedance and the load conditions before the occurrence of the fault, the peaks of the direction-char-
acteristic curves appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direc-
tion (see Figure 6-68b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction (see
Figure 6-68c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.

[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-68 Direction-Characteristic Curves for Series-Compensated Lines

So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.

464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5.8 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve

6.5.8.1 Description

Logic of the Basic Zone

[lopolydisrmd, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-69 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Zone Setting = Basic)

(1) If the Zone settings = Advanced, set the parameters represented in the General FB directly in the
zone!

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 465
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-70 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continuation)

Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the reactance (X) and the fault resistance (RF) from the current and voltage measured
values.

• Placement of the impedance into the zone

• Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone


If the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the operating polygon of a distance zone, and the direction of
the impedance phasor matches the directionality of the zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are
processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral characteristic (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parametersX reach, RF (ph-ph), RF (ph-g), and the inclination
angles Delta Dist. charact. angle and Line angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.

466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwklpolygon-DisRM, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-71 Operate Curve with Quadrilateral Characteristic

NOTE

i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.

6.5.8.2 Impedance Calculation


The RMD function calculates the line loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A, and A-B-C.
A jump detection synchronizes all calculations to the occurrence of the fault. The synchronization leads to a
minimum operate times that can be reproduced. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are
calculated using the current cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the
current fault condition.
The following figure serves as an example of the description of the impedance calculation:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 467
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dw ueb impedanzber, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-72 Line Supplied from 2 Sides (1-Pole Representation)

A fault with fault resistance is assumed. In addition to the actual mZL line impedance, the loop impedance
measured also contains the RF fault resistance.
The fault current IF is supplied from both sides. With the classical impedance measurement, the proportional
fault current IB from the opposite end generates a measuring error in the protection device on side A. This
measuring error depends on the preload on the line. The preload causes a phase displacement of the voltages
VA and VB. The following figure shows the effect of this phase displacement on the measured impedance:

[dw_merr_underreach_rmd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-73 Measuring Error with Classic Distance Protection

In Figure 6-73, as a result of an additional voltage drop, the measuring error resulting from supplying the
opposite end B is represented as IB/IA ⋅ RF. This voltage drop is represented as measuring error Δ X in the reac-
tance.
To avoid the measuring error, the distance protection with reactance method (RMD) works with an equivalent
current (I Subst.) that compensates the influence of RF in the measuring loop.

Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Ground Loops


For calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it must be considered that the impedance of the ground return
conductor generally does not match the impedance of the phases. This is the case, for example, for an A-gnd
short circuit.

468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-74 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop

The loop equation for calculating the impedance is:

[fo schl le ohne icomp, 2, en_US]

The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.

[fo schl le mit icomp, 2, en_US]

The following applies:

[fo x impber, 1, en_US]

Thus, X is calculated as follows:

[fo xf impber, 1, en_US]

You can select the equivalent current I Subst. in such a manner that the influence of the fault current IB is
compensated at the fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in R can be compensated only partially.
RF is calculated as follows:

[fo rf impber, 1, en_US]

IF cannot be measured by the protection device. For this reason, 3I0 is used as a substitute.
The 2 possible equivalent currents 3I2 and 3I0 achieve a perfect result only with equal impedance angles. If
the impedance angles are not equal, you can compensate the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles δ comp depend on the network condition and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas.

[fo kompwi nullsys impber, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 469
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[fo kompwi gegensys impber, 1, en_US]

The relatively smaller compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero and negative-sequence
system) is more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance
at the fault location.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.

Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Phase Loops


A 2-phase short circuit B-C is assumed as an example for the calculation:

[dw_llschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-75 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop

The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:

[fo schl ll ohne icomp, 2, en_US]

Thus, X is calculated as follows:

[fo xf impber LLschl, 1, en_US]

where Ikomp = (a - a2)⋅I2 and a = e j120°,


RF is calculated as follows:

[fo rf impber LLschl, 1, en_US]

As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in B for example, the loops A-B and B-C are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.

Measured-Value Correction for Parallel Lines


For double circuit lines, both line systems are influenced by mutual coupling impedances (see Figure 6-76).
With ground faults, errors in the results of the impedance calculation occur unless particular measures are
taken. They can therefore effectively connect parallel-line compensation (parameter Parallel-line
compensat.).This takes the ground current of the parallel line into consideration in the line equation,

470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

compensating for the coupling influence. This ground current must be applied to the device for this purpose.
The loop equation in this case is as follows:

[fo mwkorr parltg1, 2, en_US]

[fo mwkorr parltg, 2, en_US]

IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The factor k 0M is a line constant that results from the geometry
of the double circuit line and the suitability of the grounding.

[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-76 Ground Fault on a Double Line

Without parallel-line compensation, in most cases, the ground current of the parallel line leads to a move-back
of the breakdown point (the distance measurement falls short, that is, the impedance is too large). If both
lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-76), overreach
can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-76, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is used only if the ground current of the parallel line is less than that
of the end's own line. In the example Figure 6-76, IGnd is greater than IgndP: Compensation occurs at installa-
tion position I by coupling ZM · gndP; for installation point II, there is no compensation.

6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blocked if diff.prot.active

• Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if diff.prot.active = no


The Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter is visible only when the Line differential protection
function is available in the application.
With the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter, you establish whether the distance protection zone
is blocked as long as the Line differential protection function is active.
Parameter Value Description
no If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = no is set, the zone will run regard-
less of the line differential protection.
If the zone picks up, it will generate an operate indication after the time
delay has elapsed.
yes If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the Blocked if
diff.prot.active = yes parameter is set, the zone is blocked as long as
the line differential protection function is working.
If the line differential protection is blocked, then the zone is not blocked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 471
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed=yes


With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines. For practical applications, only the quick and selective tripping function should be 1-pole. For the 1st
distance zone, set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes. For all higher zones, set the parameter
1-pole operate allowed = no. The fast and selective tripping function is also significant in conjunction
with teleprotection scheme and the automatic reclosing function. Use the available parameters to set the 1-
phase tripping permission in those functions.

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


With the Function mode parameter, you can determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only.
Parameter Value Description
ph-gnd and ph-ph The zone works with phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring
elements. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
ph-gnd only The zone works only with the phase-to-ground measuring element.
ph-ph only The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:109) Directional mode=forward


With the Directional mode parameter, you define whether the zone operates forward , reverse or
non-directional . Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.

Parameter: X reach

• Default setting (_:102) X reach = 2.500 Ω


With the X reach parameter, you set the limit of the polygon in the X direction. Determine the setting value
for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Default setting (_:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


With the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter, you set the grading time of the zone for 1-pole short
circuits. The Operate delay (1-phase) must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Default setting (_:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


With the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter, you set the grading time of the zone for multi-phase
faults. The Operate delay (multi-ph.) must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Zone settings

• Recommended setting value (_:129) Zone settings = Basic


With the Zone settings parameter, you determine whether certain parameters must be set in a manner
that overlaps zones or whether the parameters must be set specifically for certain zones.

472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Parameter Value Description


Basic If this setting is selected, the zone works with the following parameters that
overlaps the zones:
• RF (ph-g)
• RF (ph-ph)
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
• Delta Dist. charact. angle
To find these parameters, go to the Distance protection with reactance
method function and click General information.

Note:
If Zone settings = Basic, the following parameters from the function
group Line apply to the zone:
• Line angle
• Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
Advanced If this setting is selected, the following parameters apply per zone:
• RF (ph-g)
• RF (ph-ph)
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
• Delta Dist. charact. angle
• Line angle
• Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
If you want one of the previously mentioned parameters to be zone-
specific, set parameter Zone settings = Advanced.
Mixed systems with overhead line and cable sections represent one possible
application. Here, you can set the parameter K0 precisely to the tipping limit
of the zone.

Parameter: RF (ph-g)

• Default setting (_:130) RF (ph-g) = 2.500 Ω


With the RF (ph-g) parameter, you set the boundary of the polygon in the R direction for phase-to-ground
loops. The RF (ph-g) setting value considers the fault resistance at the fault location. The fault resistance is
added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resistance is, for
example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases.
The R radius for ground faults is calculated in a manner similar to that used for RF (ph-ph) setting value for
phase-to-phase faults. For phase-to-ground faults, the fault resistance is greater than that for phase-to-phase
faults. For overhead lines, not only the arc resistance must be taken into consideration for a ground fault, but
also the tower-grounding resistance.
Determine the maximum fault resistance (RFmax, ph-gnd) for your specific application.
For single-side infeed, set the parameter RF (ph-g) to the maximum expected fault resistance RFmax, ph-gnd
plus a safety reserve (see following image). The maximum fault resistance is the sum of the arc and tower
grounding values.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 473
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwrfmale-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]

If using a two-sided infeed, the infeed ratios must be considered. Calculate the setting value for the RF (ph-
g) parameter as follows:

[fo zone rf L-E, 2, en_US]

where:
IB/IA Ratio of ground circuit current from opposite end to its own end
RF arc, ph-gnd Maximum arc portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
RF tower grounding Maximum tower grounding portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
Factor = 1.2 When using this factor, you obtain a safety reserve of 20 %.

Parameter: RF (ph-ph)

• Default setting (_:131) RF (ph-ph) = 1.250 Ω


With the RF (ph-ph) parameter, you set the polygon limits in the R direction for phase-to-phase loops. The
RF (ph-ph) setting value considers the fault resistance at the fault location. The fault resistance is added to
the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resistance is, for example, the
arc resistance.
For overhead lines, the setting value is determined primarily by the arc resistance. No significant arc is possible
in cables. With very short cables, ensure that the arc flashover at the local cable box is included in the set resis-
tance for Zone 1.
For single-side infeed, set the parameter RF (ph-ph) to half of the maximum expected fault resistance RFmax,
ph-ph plus a safety reserve.

[dwrfmall-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Parameter: Substitute for IF

• Default setting (_:132) Substitute for IF=3I2


With the Substitute for IF parameter, you can define which substitute value can be used in ground-
impedance loops for the unmeasurable fault current IF and replace it with the fault resistance at the fault loca-
tion.
First, calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system and the negative-sequence system. Set
the parameter Substitute for IF for the relatively smaller compensation angle. The relatively smaller

474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence and negative-sequence system) is
more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance at the fault
location.

Parameter: Compensation Angle for Zero-Sequence System/Negative-Sequence System

• Default setting (_:134) Comp. angle zero seq. = 0.00°

• Default setting (_:135) Comp. angle neg. seq. = 0.00°


If, based on network model tests or calculations, an angle difference between the measured 3I0 or 3I2 and IF
was determined, this can be compensated for with the parameter Comp. angle zero seq. or the param-
eter Comp. angle neg. seq..
A setting of the compensation angle deviating from 0 is only relevant for non-homogeneous systems.
When using the Comp. angle zero seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I0 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
When using the Comp. angle neg. seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I2 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.

EXAMPLE:
Calculation of the Compensation Angle

[dwkomprm-300413-01.tif, 2, en_US]

where:
ZS, A Infeed impedance, side A
ZS, B Infeed impedance, side B
ZL Line impedance
m Zone reach

Calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system as follows:

[fo kompwi nullsys zone, 1, en_US]

Calculate the compensation angle for the negative-sequence system as follows:

[fo kompwi gegensys zone, 1, en_US]

If the set compensation value matches network conditions during a fault, the fault reactance is not affected by
the load current, the fault resistance, or any other factors. The measurement compensates for the load
current.
If necessary, a change in the infeed impedance maybe considered by adapting the compensation angle. To do
this, set the compensation angle for supporting zones (Zone 1) smaller than that calculated, or negative if
necessary. The effective range X then tends to tilt downward (see Figure 6-77) and thus increases protection
against overreaching.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 475
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Set the compensation angle for all overreaching zones larger than that calculated. This will tilt the effective
range X upward and improve the tendency for underreaching.

[dwreikom-050613-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-77 Example of Reduced Reach with Compensation Angle

Parameter: Line angle

• Default setting (_:108) Line angle = 85°


Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the data for the positive-sequence system
line impedance of the line to be protected.
You can find an example on how to calculate the parameter Line angle from the line data in chapter
5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.

Parameter: Delta Dist. charact. angle

• Default setting (_:136) Delta Dist. charact. angle = 0.0°


With the Delta Dist. charact. angle parameter, you can set an additional inclination for the distance
protection characteristic curve. The Delta Dist. charact. angle(φΔ ) is added to line angle (φLine) (see
the following figure). Please observe the following condition:
90° ≥ φLine + φΔ≥ 30°

476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwneipol-050613-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-78 Example of an Additional Slope for the Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve

Siemens recommends to incline the quadrilateral characteristic curve (angle φPole) parallel to the straight line
(angle φLine). For this particular case, maintain the default setting φΔ = 0°.
If you would like to set the slope of the quadrilateral characteristic curve to be different than that of the slope
of the straight line, proceed as shown in the following example:

EXAMPLE:
Line angle φLine= 60°
Requirement: Quadrilateral characteristic curve in 90° - angle to R-axis
Calculation:
φPol = φLine+ φΔ
90° = 60° + φΔ
φΔ = 30°
Result: Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle to + 30°.

Parameter: Kr and Kx

• Default setting (_:104) Kr = 1.00

• Default setting (_:105) Kx = 1.00


With the Kr and Kx parameters, you set the residual compensation with scalar factors.
You can find an example on how to calculate the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data in chapter
5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.

Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)

• Default setting (_:118) K0 = 1.000

• Default setting (_:150) Angle (K0) = 0.00°


With the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters, you set the residual compensation with the complex residual
compensation factor.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 477
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

You can find an example on how to calculate the parameters K0 and Angle (K0) from the line data in
chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.

6.5.8.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z 1
_:14191:1 Z 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14191:2 Z 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:14191:121 Z 1:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:14191:11 Z 1:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:14191:101 Z 1:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:14191:109 Z 1:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:14191:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:14191:110 Z 1:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
phase)
_:14191:112 Z 1:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
ph.)
_:14191:129 Z 1:Zone settings • Basic Basic
• Advanced
_:14191:130 Z 1:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:14191:131 Z 1:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:14191:132 Z 1:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:14191:134 Z 1:Comp. angle zero -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14191:135 Z 1:Comp. angle neg. -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14191:108 Z 1:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:14191:136 Z 1:Delta Dist. charact. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
angle
_:14191:104 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:105 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:118 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14191:150 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5.8.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Z 1
_:14191:81 Z 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:14191:500 Z 1:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:14191:501 Z 1:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:14191:54 Z 1:Inactive SPS O
_:14191:52 Z 1:Behavior ENS O
_:14191:53 Z 1:Health ENS O
_:14191:55 Z 1:Pickup ACD O
_:14191:300 Z 1:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:14191:301 Z 1:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:14191:302 Z 1:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:14191:303 Z 1:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:14191:304 Z 1:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:14191:305 Z 1:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:14191:56 Z 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14191:57 Z 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 479
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5.9 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve

6.5.9.1 Description

Logic of a Zone

[loMHO RMD, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-79 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve

480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the polarization voltage from the current measured values
• Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone

• Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone


To arrange the measurands in the tripping level of the MHO characteristic curve, the angle between 2 differ-
ence vectors ΔZ1 and ΔZ2 is determined (see Figure 6-80). These vectors are calculated from the difference
between the 2 peaks of the circle's diameter and the fault impedance. The peak Zr corresponds to the setting
value of the zone (parameter Zr impedance reach and φ as in Figure 6-81); the peak k·ZV corresponds to
the polarization value. The difference vectors are calculated as follows:

[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In the boundary case, ZF is on the periphery of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is
90° (Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic, it is
less than 90°.

[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-80 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic Curve

With the Zr impedance reach parameter , you adjust the range of the zone. With the parameter Direc-
tional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward or reverse direction. In the reverse direc-
tion, the MHO characteristic curve is reflected across the coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 481
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

lies well within the MHO characteristic curve of a distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are
processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

Basic Characteristic of the MHO Circuit


The basic form of the MHO characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-81. The MHO characteristic curve of the
zone is a circle through the coordinate origin in the R-X plane. The diameter is defined by the parameter Zr
impedance reach. The inclination is defined by the parameter Dist. characteristic angle.

[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-81 Basic Form of the MHO Characteristic Curve

Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve


The MHO characteristic curve passes through the coordinate origin. The boundary around the origin is unde-
fined, since the measuring voltage there is too small for reliable analysis. The phase situation of the voltage
can no longer be determined. Consequently, the MHO characteristic curve after the fault occurs is either polar-
ized with a buffered voltage or a healthy voltage. The polarization determines the lower peak of the circle,
that is, the lower intersection of the diameter line on the circle's circumference. The upper peak remains
unchanged. It is defined by the parameter Zr impedance reach. Immediately after the fault occurs, a part
of a voltage saved before the fault is added to the currently measured voltage (memory polarization). As a
result, the lower peak of the circle is shifted. The position of the peak is determined by the source impedance
of the system ZS and through the degree of polarization k (see Figure 6-82). If the voltage saved before the
fault occurs, is small, a healthy voltage is used for polarization. This healthy voltage is vertical on the voltage
phasor of the loop with a short circuit (cross-polarization). This voltage is adjusted to the phase angle of the

482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

short-circuit voltage by a rotation of 90°. The displacement of the lower peak is then identical to the displace-
ment for the memory polarization.

[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-82 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve

Properties of the MHO Characteristic Curve


The cross-polarized or buffered voltage (without load transport) is equal to the corresponding generator
voltage E. After the short circuit, it does not change (see also Figure 6-83). The lower peak of the circle's diam-
eter thus appears shifted in the impedance diagram by the polarization value k·ZS1 = k·E1/I1. The upper peak
remains defined by the setting value Zr impedance reach. For fault location F1 (Figure 6-83a), the short
circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the reverse direction. All fault locations up
to directly where the device is installed (current transformer) are unambiguously within the MHO character-
istic curve (Figure 6-83b). If the current reverses, the peak of the diameter of the circle changes suddenly
(Figure 6-83c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring point (current transformer). The
source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the current I2. The peak Zr remains unchanged. It is now the lower
limit of the diameter of the circle. During load transport on the line, the peak phasor can also rotate by the
load angle.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 483
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-83 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages

Selecting the Polarization


For short lines, the range of the zone must be set as a small value. For small loop voltages, the phase-angle
comparison between the differential voltage and the loop voltage is not secure. This can lead to incorrect
directional decisions (tripping or blocking despite reverse faults). If a polarization voltage is used for the
phase-angle comparison, these problems are avoided. The polarization voltage is proportionally composed of
the loop voltage buffered before the fault occurred and the present loop voltage. The polarization voltage VP
for a phase-to-phase loop is calculated as follows:

[fo MHO up spol, 1, en_US]

You can set the level of polarization for the memory- and cross-polarization separately. For phase-to-phase
loops, the RMS value of the buffered voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For a subsequent fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage can be missing. In this case, the
buffered voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-phase short circuits and 2-
phase short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization.
This voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross-polarization). The polarization
voltage VP is a mixture of the current voltage and the corresponding healthy voltage and is calculated as
follows:

[fo MHO up kpol, 1, en_US]

If the buffered voltage is not available, you can access cross-polarization. For the phase-to-phase loops, you
can set the evaluation of the voltage with the factor kcross.

NOTE

i The parameters Mem. polarization(ph-ph) and Cross polarization(ph-ph) are available as


evaluation factors for the polarization.
Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters of the Distance protection function.

484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5.9.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blocked if diff.prot.active

• Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if diff.prot.active = no


The Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter is visible only when the Line differential protection
function is available in the application.
Using the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter, you establish whether the distance protection zone
is blocked or not as long as the Line differential protection function is active.
Parameter Value Description
no If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = no is set, the zone will run regard-
less of the line differential protection.
If the zone picks up, it will generate an operate indication after the time
delay has elapsed.
yes If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the Blocked if
diff.prot.active = yes parameter is set, the zone is blocked as long as
the line differential-protection function is working.
If the line differential protection is blocked, then the zone is not blocked.

Parameter: Function mode

• Default setting (_:101) Function mode = ph-ph only


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Recommended setting value (_:109) Directional mode = forward


With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward or reverse.
Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.

Parameter: Zr impedance reach

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Zr impedance reach = 2.500 Ω


Use the Zr impedance reach parameter to define the reach of the zone. Determine the setting value for
the specific application.
First, create a time-grading chart for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths with
their primary reactances X in Ω/km into the time-grading chart. The reactances X then define the range of the
distance protection zones.

[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-84 Setting of the Range – Example for Device A

Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set the
time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating time.
For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading-time increment.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 485
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems

• Variation in time delays


The usual grading times are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. Set the range of Zone Z2 to a value that extends to about 80 % of
the lower-level zone of the protection for the shortest subsequent line (see Figure 6-84).
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values in either primary or secondary
variables. If you wish to enter secondary variables during parameterization, convert the primary values from
the time-grading chart into secondary values as follows:

[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Default setting (_:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


With the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter, you set the grading time of the zone for multiphase
short circuits. You must set the Operate delay (multi-ph.) for the specific application.

6.5.9.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z (MHO) #
_:1 Z (MHO) #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Z (MHO) #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:121 Z (MHO) #:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:101 Z (MHO) #:Function • ph-ph only ph-ph only
mode
_:109 Z (MHO) #:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse
_:102 Z (MHO) #:Zr impedance 1 A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
reach 5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:112 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
(multi-ph.)

6.5.9.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Z (MHO) #
_:81 Z (MHO) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Z (MHO) #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z (MHO) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z (MHO) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z (MHO) #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z (MHO) #:Pickup ACD O
_:303 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop AB ACD O

486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:304 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Z (MHO) #:Operate ACT O

6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection

Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the overlapping indications of the distance protection.

General Pickup
With the impedance pickup, the group indication Pickup is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the
working area of a zone.
The signal Pickup is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions, for
example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.

Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and issued as group indications.

[lo pickup RMD, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-85 Pickup Logic

Trip Logic
The trip signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines.
If the device is capable of 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-pole
pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indication.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 487
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[lo operate RMD, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-86 Trip Logic

6.5.11 Application Example

6.5.11.1 Overview
The distance protection clarifies 100 % of faults in a meshed system selectively.
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The RMD
function reduces the unfavorable influence of high fault resistances at high loads. If the electrical power
system shows inhomogeneities, for example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, the reach of the
distance protection can be affected. The reactance method compensates this influence via adjustable compen-
sation angles.
This example describes the use of the RMD function for the protection of a 380-kV overhead-transmission line.
For this example, the following is assumed:
• In the Line function group, the RMD function is selected.
• The distance protection works with load cutout.

• The distance protection has 4 zones.


The following setting values are explained step-by-step:
• Global parameters of the Line function group
• Global parameters of the RMD function

• Parameters of the zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve


The example describes in detail only the parameters of the RMD function that differ from the classic distance
protection.
The parameters relevant for the zones are summarized in a table.
Supplemental functions, such as teleprotection schemes, power swings, switching onto a fault, and direc-
tional ground-fault protection are not dealt with here.

NOTE

i If you wish to add new functions, take note that the visibility of individual parameters depends on the
configuration. Thus, first define the functions for your specific application and then enter the parameters
afterwards.

6.5.11.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data

Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with the line to be protected.

488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dw ueb example, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-87 Block Diagram

The following system data apply to the application example (primary values):
R1 [Ω] X1 [Ω] Angle Z1 [°] R0 [Ω] X0 [Ω] Angle Z0 [°]
Infeed A 2.363 22.487 84 1.534 14.596 84.00
Infeed B 15.635 33.530 65 14.001 25.761 61.48
Overhead line 2.384 25.6 84.68 13.112 82.432 80.96
(80 km)

In the application example, the infeed impedances with a large angle difference were selected in order to
emphasize the benefits of the reactance method (compensation angle). In most real applications, the angle
difference is too small so that you can use the default setting of 0° for the compensation angle.
The following table shows the time grading of the distance zones for the protection device at the installation
location A:
Zone Directional mode Reach X reach [Ω]
[% of the line length]
Zone 1 forward 80 % 20.48
Zone 2 forward 120 % 30.72
Zone 3 forward 150 % 38.4
Zone 4 reverse -50 % 12.8

6.5.11.3 Setting Notes – General Parameters in the Line Function Group


In the following, only the parameters of the Line function group are described that are relevant for the RMD
function.

Parameter: Line angle


Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the data for the positive-sequence system
line impedance of the line to be protected as follows:

[fo ltgwinkel, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Residual Compensation with Kr and Kx


From the line data, calculate the residual compensation factors Kr and Kx as follows:

[fo kr, 1, en_US]

[fo kx, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 489
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

NOTE

i For other applications, for example, mixed sections with cable and overhead line, you can overwrite the
residual compensation factors set here in the distance zones with local parameters.

The following tables show the parameters relevant for the application example in the Line function group:
Parameters Setting Value Description
(_:9001:108) Line 84.68° Positive-sequence system impedance angle
angle
(_:9001:104) Kr 1.58 Rgnd/Rph of the line
(_:9001:105) Kx 0.74 Xgnd/Xph of the line

6.5.11.4 Setting Notes – General Parameters in the RMD Function


Go to General under the RMD function and set the following parameters. The setting values are valid for all
zones in the distance protection.
The parameters V0> threshold value and Min. phase-current thresh are relevant for the pickup
of the RMD function. For use in a grounded electrical power system, Siemens recommends the default
settings.
Parameters Setting Value [Primary] Description
(_:2311:102) V0> 6.335 kV Default setting
threshold value The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
V0> threshold value (secondary) = 6.335 kV ⋅
100 V/380 kV = 1.667 V
(_:2311:101) Min. 100.000 A Default setting
phase-current The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
thresh Min. phase-current thresh (secondary) =
100 A ⋅ 1 A/1000 A = 0.1 A

Load Cutout
The parameters R load cutout and Angle load cutout define the load cutout. With the reactance
method, the load cutout is important only for 3-phase short circuits. The maximum operating current must be
known for calculation of the load-cutout parameters.
The following output data are assumed in the application example for calculating the load-cutout parameters:
Maximum operating current Iload, max = 2000 A
with an unfavorable power factor cosϕ = 0.9
Calculate the primary setting values for the parameter R load cutout and the Angle load cutout with
a safety margin of 10 % as follows:

[fo r lastaus, 1, en_US]

[fo winkel lastaus, 1, en_US]

Parameter: RF (ph-g) and RF (ph-ph)


The following equivalent circuit applies to calculation of the fault resistance with ground faults:

490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-88 Combination of Arc Voltage and Tower-Grounding Resistance

Remote infeed (I remote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-88). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio I remote/I local.
You can obtain the effective tower-grounding resistance values in Figure 6-144 . In the example, the primary
effective tower-grounding resistances is 1.9 Ω. When calculating the setting value for RF (ph-g), consider
the infeed from the opposite end when calculating RTF as follows:

[fo rtf RMD, 1, en_US]

The ratio Iremote/Ilocal can only be calculated approximately using the reactance. For the calculation, a 1-phase
short circuit is assumed at the opposite end of the line. This is used to calculate the Iremote/Ilocal ratio as follows:

[fo rtf iOrt, 1, en_US]

[fo rtf iFern, 1, en_US]

[fo rtf iFern_iOrt, 1, en_US]

[fo_rtf iFern_iOrt, 1, en_US]

The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the fault loop is thus:

[fo rtf max, 1, en_US]

The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground. The arc
length should be 7 m in the example. If you assume a double arc length, you consider the curvature of a
burning arc:
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 7 m = 35 kV

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 491
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc using
the smallest fault current. With Ik min = 1,500 A, calculate Rarc as follows:

[fo r lb, 1, en_US]

For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the parameter RF (ph-g) can be calculated as follows:

[fo rf L-E, 1, en_US]

For the phase-to-phase fault, only the arc voltage must be considered. If you assume double the value for the
arc length and you use the same value for the minimum fault current, the value of 2 ⋅ 23.3 Ω calculated previ-
ously applies for the arc resistance. By adding a safety margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the
parameter RF (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows. For the parameter RF (ph-ph), half of the calculated
arc resistance is set.

[fo rf L-L, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Substitute for IF


The Substitute for IF parameter is used for the calculation of the voltage drop via the fault resistance
(RF) in the phase-to-ground loops. In electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point (zero-sequence
infeed), you can use the zero-sequence current (3I0). As an alternative, for the parameter Substitute for
IF, you can select the negative-sequence current 3I2.
For the decision as to which substitute value you select for the IF, determine the change of the phase angle of
the relevant infeed impedance under different operating conditions.
In the application example, the neutral point is grounded at both ends of the line. Thus there is a strong zero-
sequence infeed at the relay installation location as well as at the remote line end. The impedance of the zero-
sequence infeeds does not change significantly due to the remote changes of the infeed impedance (for
example, by the remote switching operations in the electrical power system). Therefore the impedance angles
of the zero-sequence infeed in the application example are more stable than these of the negative-sequence
system. In the application example, set the parameter Substitute for IF = 3I0.
In applications with a non-constant zero-sequence impedance, it is better to use the setting value 3I2 for the
parameter Substitute for IF. Important differences in the zero-sequence impedance occur, for example,
when the neutral point on the infeed busbar can be activated or deactivated.

Parameter: Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq.
For optimum results, the RMD function must know the phase angle of the current through the fault resis-
tance. As this current cannot be measured, the zero or negative-sequence current is used as equivalent
current for the estimation of the phase angle.

[dw ueb impedanzber, 2, en_US]

492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. For an accurate impedance measurement,
the phase angle of the fault current must at least be estimated. In the measurement, the phase angle of the
fault current IF is derived from the zero or negative-sequence current. In electrical power systems with inho-
mogeneous power infeeds, that is the power infeeds have great differences in the impedance angles, a
compensation angle can be used. In the example, the compensation angles for the zero and negative-
sequence systems are calculated with m = 80 % for the limits of zone Z1.
Calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system as follows:

[fo1 comp zero sequence example, 1, en_US]

[fo2 comp zero sequence example, 1, en_US]

[fo comp zero sequence example, 1, en_US]

Set the parameter Comp. angle zero seq. = 8.35°.


Calculate the compensation angle for the negative-sequence system as follows:

[fo1 comp neg sequence example, 1, en_US]

[fo2 comp neg sequence example, 1, en_US]

[fo comp neg sequence example, 1, en_US]

Set the parameter Comp. angle neg. seq. = 8.61°.

Parameter: Delta Dist. charact. angle


Using the default setting, the inclination of the zones R limit is parallel to the line impedance. For applications
with small line-impedance angles, for example, cable feeders with impedance angles < 50°, it is sometimes
better to set the R limit more vertically. With the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle, you turn the R
limit counterclockwise (see Figure 6-77).
In the application example, the line angle with a value of 84.68° is so large that the inclination of the R limit
should run in parallel to the line angle. Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle = 0.00°.

General Parameters of the RMD Function


The following table summarizes the general parameters of the RMD function for the application example. The
setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.
Parameters Recommended Setting Values (Primary Values)
(_:2311:102) V0> threshold value 6.335 kV
(_:2311:101) Min. phase-current thresh 100.000 A
(_:2311:130) RF (ph-g) 35.200 Ω

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 493
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Parameters Recommended Setting Values (Primary Values)


(_:2311:131) RF (ph-ph) 27.960 Ω
(_:2311:132) Substitute for IF 3I0
(_:2311:134) Comp. angle zero seq. 8.35°
(_:2311:135) Comp. angle neg. seq. 8.61°
(_:2311:136) Delta Dist. charact. angle 0.00°
(_:2311:106) Use load cutout both directions
(_:2311:107) R load cutout 99.700 Ω
(_:2311:108) Angle load cutout 28.4°

6.5.11.5 Setting Instructions Zone Z1 to Z4


The following tables summarize the parameters of the zones Z1 to Z4. The recommended setting values apply
for the application example.

NOTE

i The parameter (_:14191:11) 1-pole operate allowed is only visible in the device variants that can
trip in a 1-pole way!

Zone Z1

Settings Recommended Description


Setting Values
(Primary Values)
(_:14191:121) Blocked no The parameter is only relevant in the 7SLx devices.
if diff.prot.active
(_:14191:11) 1-pole yes Zone Z1 should trip in a 1-pole way.
operate allowed
(_:14191:101) Function ph-gnd and ph-ph The setting value is suitable for all fault types.
mode
(_:14191:109) Direc- forward Zone Z1 acts for faults in a forward direction.
tional mode
(_:14191:102) X reach 20.480 Ω X reach of zone Z1
(_:14191:110) Operate 0.00 s Zone Z1 works without delay.
delay (1-phase)
(_:14191:112) Operate 0.00 s Zone Z1 works without delay.
delay (multi-ph.)
(_:14191:129) Zone Basic Zone Z1 uses the general settings of the RMD func-
settings tion.

494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

NOTE

i If the zone should not work with the general parameters of the RMD function, set the parameter Zone
settings = Advanced.
Then, the respective zone works with the following zone-specific parameters (example for zone Z1):
• (_:14191:130) RF (ph-g)
• (_:14191:131) RF (ph-ph)

• (_:14191:132) Substitute for IF

• (_:14191:134) Comp. angle zero seq.

• (_:14191:135) Comp. angle neg. seq.

• (_:14191:108) Line angle

• (_:14191:136) Delta Dist. charact. angle

• (_:14191:104) Kr

• (_:14191:105) Kx

Zone Z2

Settings Recommended Description


Setting Values
(Primary Values)
(_:14192:121) Blocked no The parameter is only relevant in the 7SLx devices.
if diff.prot.active
(_:14192:11) 1-pole no Zone Z2 should trip in a 3-pole way.
operate allowed
(_:14192:101) Function ph-gnd and ph-ph The setting value is suitable for all fault types.
mode
(_:14192:109) Direc- forward Zone Z2 acts for faults in a forward direction.
tional mode
(_:14192:102) X reach 30.720 Ω X reach of zone Z2
(_:14192:110) Operate 0.30 s Tripping delay of zone Z2
delay (1-phase)
(_:14192:112) Operate 0.30 s Tripping delay of zone Z2
delay (multi-ph.)
(_:14192:129) Zone Basic Zone Z2 uses the general settings of the RMD func-
settings tion.

Zone Z3

Settings Recommended Description


Setting Values
(Primary Values)
(_:14193:121) Blocked no The parameter is only relevant in the 7SLx devices.
if diff.prot.active
(_:14193:11) 1-pole no Zone Z3 should trip in a 3-pole way.
operate allowed
(_:14193:101) Function ph-gnd and ph-ph The setting value is suitable for all fault types.
mode
(_:14193:109) Direc- forward Zone Z3 acts for faults in a forward direction.
tional mode
(_:14193:102) X reach 38.400 Ω X reach of zone Z3

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 495
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Settings Recommended Description


Setting Values
(Primary Values)
(_:14193:110) Operate 0.60 s Tripping delay of zone Z3
delay (1-phase)
(_:14193:112) Operate 0.60 s Tripping delay of zone Z3
delay (multi-ph.)
(_:14193:129) Zone Basic Zone Z3 uses the general settings of the RMD func-
settings tion.

Zone Z4

Settings Recommended Description


Setting Values
(Primary Values)
(_:14194:121) Blocked no The parameter is only relevant in the 7SLx devices.
if diff.prot.active
(_:14194:11) 1-pole no Zone Z4 should trip in a 3-pole way.
operate allowed
(_:14194:101) Function ph-gnd and ph-ph The setting value is suitable for all fault types.
mode
(_:14194:109) Direc- reverse Zone Z4 acts for faults in a reverse direction.
tional mode
(_:14194:102) X reach 12.800 Ω X reach of zone Z4
(_:14194:110) Operate 0.90 s Tripping delay of zone Z4
delay (1-phase)
(_:14194:112) Operate 0.90 s Tripping delay of zone Z4
delay (multi-ph.)
(_:14194:129) Zone Basic Zone Z4 uses the general settings of the RMD func-
settings tion.

Check the setting values on the basis of the following graphical representation of the operate curve:

496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

[sc_KL_RMD_examble, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-89 Operate Curve in DIGSI 5

6.5.12 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:110 General:Zone timer start • on zone pickup on dist. pickup
• on dist. pickup
_:2311:102 General:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 1.667 V
value

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 497
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:105 General:Parallel-line • no no
compensat. • yes
_:2311:101 General:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:130 General:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:2311:131 General:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:2311:132 General:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:2311:134 General:Comp. angle -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
zero seq.
_:2311:135 General:Comp. angle -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
neg. seq.
_:2311:136 General:Delta Dist. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
charact. angle
_:2311:106 General:Use load cutout • no no
• both directions
• forward only
• reverse only
_:2311:107 General:R load cutout 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:2311:108 General:Angle load 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
cutout
_:2311:112 General:Mem. polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
_:2311:114 General:Cross polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
Z 1
_:14191:1 Z 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14191:2 Z 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:14191:121 Z 1:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:14191:11 Z 1:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:14191:101 Z 1:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:14191:109 Z 1:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:14191:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω

498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14191:110 Z 1:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
phase)
_:14191:112 Z 1:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
ph.)
_:14191:129 Z 1:Zone settings • Basic Basic
• Advanced
_:14191:130 Z 1:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:14191:131 Z 1:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:14191:132 Z 1:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:14191:134 Z 1:Comp. angle zero -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14191:135 Z 1:Comp. angle neg. -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14191:108 Z 1:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:14191:136 Z 1:Delta Dist. charact. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
angle
_:14191:104 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:105 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:118 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14191:150 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 2
_:14192:1 Z 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14192:2 Z 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:14192:121 Z 2:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:14192:11 Z 2:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:14192:101 Z 2:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:14192:109 Z 2:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:14192:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:14192:110 Z 2:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
phase)
_:14192:112 Z 2:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
ph.)
_:14192:129 Z 2:Zone settings • Basic Basic
• Advanced
_:14192:130 Z 2:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 499
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14192:131 Z 2:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:14192:132 Z 2:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:14192:134 Z 2:Comp. angle zero -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14192:135 Z 2:Comp. angle neg. -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14192:108 Z 2:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:14192:136 Z 2:Delta Dist. charact. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
angle
_:14192:104 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14192:105 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14192:118 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14192:150 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 3
_:14193:1 Z 3:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14193:2 Z 3:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:14193:121 Z 3:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:14193:11 Z 3:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:14193:101 Z 3:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:14193:109 Z 3:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:14193:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:14193:110 Z 3:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.60 s
phase)
_:14193:112 Z 3:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.60 s
ph.)
_:14193:129 Z 3:Zone settings • Basic Basic
• Advanced
_:14193:130 Z 3:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:14193:131 Z 3:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:14193:132 Z 3:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:14193:134 Z 3:Comp. angle zero -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14193:135 Z 3:Comp. angle neg. -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14193:108 Z 3:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °

500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14193:136 Z 3:Delta Dist. charact. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
angle
_:14193:104 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14193:105 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14193:118 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14193:150 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 4
_:14194:1 Z 4:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14194:2 Z 4:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:14194:121 Z 4:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:14194:11 Z 4:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:14194:101 Z 4:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:14194:109 Z 4:Directional mode • non-directional non-directional
• forward
• reverse
_:14194:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:14194:110 Z 4:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.90 s
phase)
_:14194:112 Z 4:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.90 s
ph.)
_:14194:129 Z 4:Zone settings • Basic Basic
• Advanced
_:14194:130 Z 4:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:14194:131 Z 4:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:14194:132 Z 4:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:14194:134 Z 4:Comp. angle zero -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14194:135 Z 4:Comp. angle neg. -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
seq.
_:14194:108 Z 4:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:14194:136 Z 4:Delta Dist. charact. 0.00 ° to 80.00 ° 0.00 °
angle
_:14194:104 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14194:105 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14194:118 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14194:150 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 501
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

6.5.13 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O
Z 1
_:14191:81 Z 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:14191:500 Z 1:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:14191:501 Z 1:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:14191:54 Z 1:Inactive SPS O
_:14191:52 Z 1:Behavior ENS O
_:14191:53 Z 1:Health ENS O
_:14191:55 Z 1:Pickup ACD O
_:14191:300 Z 1:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:14191:301 Z 1:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:14191:302 Z 1:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:14191:303 Z 1:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:14191:304 Z 1:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:14191:305 Z 1:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:14191:56 Z 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14191:57 Z 1:Operate ACT O
Z 2
_:14192:81 Z 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:14192:500 Z 2:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:14192:501 Z 2:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:14192:54 Z 2:Inactive SPS O
_:14192:52 Z 2:Behavior ENS O
_:14192:53 Z 2:Health ENS O
_:14192:55 Z 2:Pickup ACD O
_:14192:300 Z 2:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:14192:301 Z 2:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:14192:302 Z 2:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:14192:303 Z 2:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:14192:304 Z 2:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:14192:305 Z 2:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:14192:56 Z 2:Operate delay expired ACT O

502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:14192:57 Z 2:Operate ACT O
Z 3
_:14193:81 Z 3:>Block stage SPS I
_:14193:500 Z 3:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:14193:501 Z 3:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:14193:54 Z 3:Inactive SPS O
_:14193:52 Z 3:Behavior ENS O
_:14193:53 Z 3:Health ENS O
_:14193:55 Z 3:Pickup ACD O
_:14193:300 Z 3:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:14193:301 Z 3:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:14193:302 Z 3:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:14193:303 Z 3:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:14193:304 Z 3:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:14193:305 Z 3:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:14193:56 Z 3:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14193:57 Z 3:Operate ACT O
Z 4
_:14194:81 Z 4:>Block stage SPS I
_:14194:500 Z 4:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:14194:501 Z 4:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:14194:54 Z 4:Inactive SPS O
_:14194:52 Z 4:Behavior ENS O
_:14194:53 Z 4:Health ENS O
_:14194:55 Z 4:Pickup ACD O
_:14194:300 Z 4:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:14194:301 Z 4:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:14194:302 Z 4:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:14194:303 Z 4:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:14194:304 Z 4:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:14194:305 Z 4:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:14194:56 Z 4:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14194:57 Z 4:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 503
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.1 Overview of Functions

The Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N) function is available in 3 variants:


• Distance protection for grounded systems with 3-phase tripping
• Distance protection for isolated/resonant-grounded systems with 3-phase tripping

• Distance protection for grounded systems with 1-/3-pole tripping

6.6.2 Distance Protection for Grounded Systems

6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions


The function Distance protection for grounded systems (ANSI 21 N):
• Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more end(s) in
radial, looped or meshed systems,

• Used as backup protection for busbars, transformers and other lines

• Works only in systems with grounded neutral point

• Trips 1- or 3-pole

• Suitable for use in all voltage levels

6.6.2.2 Structure of the Function


The function Distance protection for grounded systems can be placed in function groups that provide
voltage and current measured values as well as line parameters.
The function Distance protection for grounded systems consists of the following blocks:
• General
• Pickup method

• Distance zones (quadrilateral characteristic curve preconfigured)

• 1-pole/3-pole output logic


The function Distance protection for grounded systems is preconfigured with 4 zones at the factory. The
zones are structured identically.
In the Distance protection for grounded systems function, the maximum numbers of zones that can be
operated simultaneously are as follows:
• 16 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve
• 1 zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup

• 16 zones with MHO characteristic curve

• 16 zones with circular characteristic curve


The following figure shows the structural principles of the function Distance protection for grounded
systems.

504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwstg13p-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-90 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impedance is
assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic) of the zones.
In the Impedance pickup method, the load cutout is analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated after
assigning the calculated impedance to the operate curves. The direction to the short-circuit location is then
determined for all picked up loops. The loop selection determines the picked up loops for which the classifica-
tion into the defined zones is processed. The loop elimination removes all the loops that are no longer picked
up after direction determination and querying of the load cutout. For the picked up loops, the time delay in
the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for the zone.
The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the
distance protection.
In the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup, the load cutout is set directly in
the zone and is evaluated for all zones.

Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the meas-
uring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Supervision of the zero-sequence current 3I0
• Supervision of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)

• Supervision of the zero-sequence voltage V0

Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-91). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero-sequence voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-
sequence impedance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases. The Ground-
fault detection parameter specifies which criterion is used to perform ground-fault detection.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection
must be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 505
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

without a primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of
current-transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detections.
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.

[loerdfeh-240511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-91 Logic of Ground-Fault Detection for Grounded Systems

Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Current 3I0

The zero-sequence current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of the phase currents
for exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
The zero-sequence current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Zero-sequence currents due to unbalanced load conditions
• Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of
phase-current transformers

• In the event of detected current-transformer saturation (see Figure 6-91)


Figure 6-92 shows the pickup characteristic of the zero-sequence current criterion. As phase currents increase,
the actual pickup value rises automatically. The dropout threshold is about 95 % of the pickup value.

[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-92 Zero-Sequence Current Criterion: Pickup Characteristic Curve

506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Current/Negative-Sequence Current (3I0/3I2)

For long, highly loaded lines, high load currents can lead to overstabilization of the zero-sequence current
criterion (see Figure 6-92). For the detection of ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence
current criterion is extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current to
negative-sequence current is also monitored. In a 1-pole short circuit, the negative-sequence current I2 is
about as high as the zero-sequence current I0. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence
current exceeds a preset limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current
criterion is stabilized for high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic curve. Figure 6-93
shows the connection. A prerequisite for release of the zero-sequence/negative-sequence current criterion is a
minimum current of 0.2 ⋅ Irated for 3I0.

[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-93 I0/I2 Criterion: Pickup Characteristic Curve

Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Voltage V0

The zero-sequence voltage is monitored for exceeding a set value (parameter V0> threshold value). The
dropout threshold is about 95 % of the pickup value. In grounded systems, monitoring of the zero-sequence
voltage can be used as an additional ground-fault criterion.

Ground-Fault Detection during 1-Pole Pause


Load currents cannot lead to a pickup of the ground-fault detection during a 1-pole disconnection in the
grounded system. For this, the ground-fault detection is modified during the 1-pole disconnection. In addition
to the magnitude, the phase angles between current and voltage are monitored (see following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 507
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[loerdawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-94 Ground-Fault Detection during 1-Pole Disconnection (Example: 1-Pole Pause A)

Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured. The following starting processes are available:
• Impedance pickup
• Overcurrent pickup

• V/I pickup

• V/I φ pickup
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method. You can use different pickup methods in parallel.

Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic curve (description begins in chapter 6.6.9.1 Description)
• Quadrilateral characteristic curve with adaptive pickup (description begins in chapter 6.6.10 Zone with
Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup)

• MHO characteristic curve (description begins in chapter 6.6.11.1 Description)

• Circular characteristic curve (description begins in chapter 6.6.12 Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve

Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.

Loop Selection in the Grounded System


In systems with effective or low-impedance grounded neutral point, each contact of a phase with ground is a
short-circuit-like process. The closest protection equipment must switch off the fault immediately.
For double ground faults, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the same
direction, this can also lead to pickup in the associated phase-to-phase loop. The Loop select. with ph-
ph-g parameter is used to restrict analysis to certain loops.
In a 3-pole fault, all phase-to-phase loops generally pick up. In this case, the 3 phase-to-phase loops are
analyzed. If a ground fault is detected, the phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.

508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Output Logic
The output logic of the function Distance protection for grounded systems links the output indications of
the zones and forms the group trip signal of the function. You can find the description of the output logic in
chapter 6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

Influence of the Inrush-Current Detection


If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the distance protection can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents. In case of interaction with the inrush-current detection
the following configurations are possible:
• Blocking of the pickup for the overcurrent pickup method, V-/I-pickup and V-/I-/ϕ-pickup

• Blocking of individual distance zones

• Blocking of the pickup during impedance pickup by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detec-
tion or the pickup method will not pick up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is indicated and the corresponding time delay starts.
After that time, the operate indication is generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see
section 6.53.1 Overview of Functions) is in effect can the blocking be set.

6.6.2.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings


Set the following settings under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems. The
setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.

Parameter: Zone timer start

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:110) Zone timer start = on zone pickup


The Zone timer start parameter is used to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
Parameter Value Description
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. If the
fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays continue
to run.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent-
time protection functions, select this setting.

Parameter: Dist. characteristic angle

• Default setting (_:2311:107) Dist. characteristic angle = 85.0°


The Dist. characteristic angle parameter allows you to set the inclination angle of the distance
protection characteristic curve. The inclination angle set here for the distance protection characteristic curve
applies to all zones in the function.
Siemens recommends setting the Dist. characteristic angle parameter to the line angle.

Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance on the line to be protected:

[fo1 line angle, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 509
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[fo2 line angle, 1, en_US]

[fo3 line angle, 1, en_US]

If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.

Parameter: Ground-fault detection

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:105) Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0


The Ground-fault detection parameter determines the criteria used for ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
3I0 or V0 If either the zero-sequence current criterion (3I0>) or the zero-sequence
voltage criterion (V0>) leads to ground-fault detection, select this setting.
For grounded systems, the OR operation of the criteria 3I0> and V0> is a
reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one
another. For a weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-
sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the conditions are reversed.
Siemens recommends this setting for grounded systems.
3I0 and V0 If you wish to use both criteria for ground-fault detection (logical AND
linking of zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage criteria), select
this setting.
3I0 only If only the zero-sequence current criterion is to be used for ground-fault
detection, select this setting.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:103) 3I0> threshold value = 0.10 A


The 3I0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence current limit for ground-fault
detection.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter must be set to a value less than the lowest expected ground
current in ground faults on the protected feeder. For the distance protection to trigger for external remote
faults as backup protection, set the 3I0> threshold value parameter to a more sensitive value than that
necessary for internal faults. Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0.10 A.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) V0> threshold value = 1.66 V


The V0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence voltage limit for ground-fault
detection.
For ground faults in a grounded system, there is a zero-sequence voltage. The zero-sequence voltage drops as
the distance between the fault location and the measuring point increases. Siemens recommends keeping the
default setting of 1.66 V. If power-system unbalances can cause higher zero-sequence voltages to occur
during operation, increase the default setting.

Parameter: 3I0 pickup stabilization

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) 3I0 pickup stabilization = 0.10


The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to set the slope of the 3I0> characteristic curve for
ground-fault detection.
Power-system unbalance (for example, untwisted lines) and current-transformer errors can cause a zero-
sequence current flow at the protection device in the case of higher phase currents, even if there is no ground

510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

fault. The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid ground activation. If no extreme power-
system unbalance and unusually large current-transformer errors are expected, Siemens recommends keeping
the default value of 0.10.

Parameter: Loop select. with ph-ph-g

• Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase
The Loop select. with ph-ph-g parameter is used to determine which loops will be analyzed by the
distance protection in the event of double ground faults. You can restrict the analysis to certain loops. If you
wish to restrict analysis to certain loops, they must have the same direction.
In two-end feed to a shared fault resistance to ground, the phase-to-ground loop of the leading phase tends to
overreach. If you set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase, these
loops will not be analyzed.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Loop select. with ph-
ph-g parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loops Evaluated Loop(s)
block leading phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-A
block lagging phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-gnd, C-A
all A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A
ph-ph only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-A
ph-gnd only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd

In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the internal fault
loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for this applica-
tion. To ensure the selectivity of protection, reduce the range of the underreaching zone.

Parameter: Parallel-line compensat.

• Default setting: (_:2311:106) Parallel-line compensat. = no


The Parallel-line compensat. parameter is used to determine for double circuit lines whether you wish
to take into account the influence of the coupling impedance on the loop impedance or not.

NOTE

i You can see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 511
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

NOTE

i Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)

• Cross polarization(ph-g)

• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!

Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-g)

• Default setting: (:_2310:_111) Mem. polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %


With the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with a buffered
voltage for phase-to-ground loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO characteristic curve
depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without exten-
sion, set the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-ph)

• Default setting (:_2310:_112) Mem. polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %


With the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with a
buffered voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO characteristic
curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without
extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-g)

• Default setting (:_2310:_113) Cross polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %


With the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-ground loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-ph)

• Default setting (:_2310:_114) Cross polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %


With the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.

6.6.2.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:110 General:Zone timer start • on zone pickup on dist. pickup
• on dist. pickup
_:2311:107 General:Dist. character- 30.0 ° to 90.0 ° 85.0 °
istic angle
_:2311:105 General:Ground-fault • 3I0 or V0 3I0 or V0
detection • 3I0 and V0
• 3I0 only
_:2311:103 General:3I0> threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A

512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:102 General:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 1.667 V
value
_:2311:104 General:3I0 pickup stabi- 0.05 to 0.30 0.10
lization
_:2311:108 General:Loop select. • block leading phase block leading
with ph-ph-g • block lagging phase phase
• all
• ph-ph only
• ph-gnd only
_:2311:106 General:Parallel-line • no no
compensat. • yes
_:2311:111 General:Mem. polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-g)
_:2311:112 General:Mem. polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
_:2311:113 General:Cross polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-g)
_:2311:114 General:Cross polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
Pickup Z<
_:3661:101 Pickup Z<:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.25 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:3661:102 Pickup Z<:Use ph-g load • no no
cutout • yes
_:3661:103 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 25.000 Ω
(ph-g) 5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
_:3661:104 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
cutout (ph-g)
_:3661:105 Pickup Z<:Use ph-ph • no no
load cutout • yes
_:3661:106 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 20.000 Ω
(ph-ph) 5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 4.000 Ω
_:3661:107 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
cutout (ph-ph)
Z 1
_:3571:1 Z 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3571:2 Z 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3571:121 Z 1:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3571:27 Z 1:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3571:11 Z 1:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:3571:101 Z 1:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3571:114 Z 1:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 513
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3571:109 Z 1:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:3571:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:3571:103 Z 1:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:3571:104 Z 1:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:3571:113 Z 1:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3571:110 Z 1:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
phase)
_:3571:112 Z 1:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
ph.)
_:3571:105 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:106 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:107 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3571:108 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 2
_:3572:1 Z 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3572:2 Z 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3572:121 Z 2:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3572:27 Z 2:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3572:11 Z 2:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:3572:101 Z 2:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3572:114 Z 2:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3572:109 Z 2:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:3572:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:3572:103 Z 2:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:3572:104 Z 2:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:3572:113 Z 2:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3572:110 Z 2:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
phase)

514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3572:112 Z 2:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
ph.)
_:3572:105 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:106 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:107 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3572:108 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 3
_:3573:1 Z 3:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3573:2 Z 3:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3573:121 Z 3:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3573:27 Z 3:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3573:11 Z 3:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:3573:101 Z 3:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3573:114 Z 3:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3573:109 Z 3:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:3573:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:3573:103 Z 3:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:3573:104 Z 3:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:3573:113 Z 3:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3573:110 Z 3:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.60 s
phase)
_:3573:112 Z 3:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.60 s
ph.)
_:3573:105 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:106 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:107 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3573:108 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 4
_:3574:1 Z 4:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3574:2 Z 4:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3574:121 Z 4:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 515
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3574:27 Z 4:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3574:11 Z 4:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:3574:101 Z 4:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3574:114 Z 4:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3574:109 Z 4:Directional mode • non-directional non-directional
• forward
• reverse
_:3574:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:3574:103 Z 4:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:3574:104 Z 4:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:3574:113 Z 4:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3574:110 Z 4:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.90 s
phase)
_:3574:112 Z 4:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.90 s
ph.)
_:3574:105 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:106 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:107 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3574:108 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

6.6.2.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:300 General:Z ph-g WYE O
_:2311:301 General:Z ph-ph DEL O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O
Pickup Z<
_:3661:51 Pickup Z<:Mode (controllable) ENC C

516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:3661:52 Pickup Z<:Behavior ENS O
_:3661:53 Pickup Z<:Health ENS O
Z 1
_:3571:81 Z 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3571:500 Z 1:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3571:501 Z 1:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3571:54 Z 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3571:52 Z 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3571:53 Z 1:Health ENS O
_:3571:55 Z 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3571:300 Z 1:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3571:301 Z 1:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3571:302 Z 1:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3571:303 Z 1:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3571:304 Z 1:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3571:305 Z 1:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3571:56 Z 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3571:57 Z 1:Operate ACT O
Z 2
_:3572:81 Z 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:3572:500 Z 2:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3572:501 Z 2:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3572:54 Z 2:Inactive SPS O
_:3572:52 Z 2:Behavior ENS O
_:3572:53 Z 2:Health ENS O
_:3572:55 Z 2:Pickup ACD O
_:3572:300 Z 2:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3572:301 Z 2:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3572:302 Z 2:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3572:303 Z 2:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3572:304 Z 2:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3572:305 Z 2:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3572:56 Z 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3572:57 Z 2:Operate ACT O
Z 3
_:3573:81 Z 3:>Block stage SPS I
_:3573:500 Z 3:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3573:501 Z 3:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3573:54 Z 3:Inactive SPS O
_:3573:52 Z 3:Behavior ENS O
_:3573:53 Z 3:Health ENS O
_:3573:55 Z 3:Pickup ACD O
_:3573:300 Z 3:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3573:301 Z 3:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3573:302 Z 3:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3573:303 Z 3:Pickup loop AB ACD O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 517
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:3573:304 Z 3:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3573:305 Z 3:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3573:56 Z 3:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3573:57 Z 3:Operate ACT O
Z 4
_:3574:81 Z 4:>Block stage SPS I
_:3574:500 Z 4:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3574:501 Z 4:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3574:54 Z 4:Inactive SPS O
_:3574:52 Z 4:Behavior ENS O
_:3574:53 Z 4:Health ENS O
_:3574:55 Z 4:Pickup ACD O
_:3574:300 Z 4:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3574:301 Z 4:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3574:302 Z 4:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3574:303 Z 4:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3574:304 Z 4:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3574:305 Z 4:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3574:56 Z 4:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3574:57 Z 4:Operate ACT O

6.6.3 Distance Protection for Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems

6.6.3.1 Overview of Functions


The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems (ANSI 21 N):
• Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more end(s) in
radial, looped or meshed systems,

• Works only in isolated or resonant-grounded systems via an arc-suppression coil

• Trips 3-phase

• Suitable for use in all voltage levels

6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function


The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems can be placed in function
groups that provide voltage and current measured values as well as line parameters.
The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems consists of the following
blocks:
• General information
• Pickup method

• Distance zones (preconfigured quadrilateral characteristic)

• AREC zones (not preconfigured)

• Output logic 3-phase


The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems is preconfigured with 4 zones
at the factory. The zones are structured identically. In the function Distance protection for isolated or reso-
nant-grounded systems, maximum of 16 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curves and 16 zones with
MHO characteristic curves can be operated simultaneously.

518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

The following figure shows the structural principles of the function Distance protection for isolated or reso-
nant-grounded systems.

[dwstriso-090212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-95 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. The impedance is calculated for the released loops. The calculated impedance is assigned
to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic 16) of the zones. In the Impedance pickup
method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For all picked up loops,
the direction to the short-circuit location is then determined. The loop selection determines for which of the
picked up loops assignment in the defined zones is done. The loop elimination removes all loops that are no
longer picked up after direction determination and querying the load cutout. For the picked up loops, the time
delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for
the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip
signals of the distance protection.

Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the meas-
uring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the zero-sequence current 3I0
• Monitoring of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)

• Monitoring of the zero-sequence voltage V0

• Monitoring of the balance of phase-to-phase voltages


In isolated/resonant-grounded systems, the pickup of ground-fault detection is unwanted for simple ground
faults. In the event of 1-phase pickup, a simple ground fault is initially presumed. So that the starting oscilla-
tion upon occurrence of the ground fault does not lead to unwanted pickup of the function, the pickup is
suppressed for a settable time. After the Delay 1-phase pickup time has expired, the pickup is released.
This is necessary so that the distance protection can still detect a double ground fault with a base point on a

16 in preparation

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 519
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

stub-end feeder. If phase-to-phase voltages are unbalanced, a double ground fault can be assumed. In that
case, pickup is released immediately. The balance criterion prevents unwanted pickup for a simple ground
fault or unbalanced load conditions (see Figure 6-96). The Max. unbalance Vph-ph parameter specifies
the maximum permitted unbalance for the load case, or in the event of a simple ground fault.

[losymerk-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-96 Balance Detection for Phase-to-Phase Voltages

Figure 6-97 shows the logic of the ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems.
If the following conditions are met, the ground-fault detection responds for double ground faults with very
low ground currents:
• The zero-sequence current is 10 % of the measured negative-sequence current I2
• The zero-sequence current is at least 5 % of the secondary rated current

• The phase-to-phase voltages are unbalanced


Monitoring of the balance in phase-to-phase voltages prevents unwanted pickup in the event of simple
ground faults.
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
· Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.

[loisolie-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-97 Ground-Fault Detection in Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems

Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Current 3I0

The zero-sequence current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).

520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

The zero-sequence current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Zero-sequence currents due to unbalanced load conditions
• Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of
phase-current transformers

• For detected current-transformer saturation (see Figure 6-97)


Figure 6-98 shows the pickup characteristic of the zero-sequence current criterion. As phase currents increase,
the actual pickup value rises automatically. The dropout threshold is about 95 % of the pickup value.

[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-98 Zero-Sequence Currents Criterion: Pickup Characteristic:

Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Current/Negative-Sequence Current (3I0/3I2)

For long lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion (see Figure 6-98).
For the detection of double ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current criterion is
extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence
current is also monitored. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence current exceeds a preset
limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion is stabilized for
high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-99 shows the connection. A prereq-
uisite for release of the zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion is a minimum current of
0.2· Irated for 3I0.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 521
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-99 I0/I2 Criterion: Pickup Characteristic

Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Voltage V0

Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.

Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured. The following pickup methods are available:
• Impedance pickup
• Overcurrent pickup

• V-/I pickup

• V-/I-φ pickup
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method. You can use different pickup methods in parallel.

Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance phasors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic (preconfigured)
• MHO characteristic curve
You can find the description of operate curves in the chapters 6.6.9.1 Description and 6.6.11.1 Description.

Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.

Loop Selection for Double Faults in Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems


In isolated or resonant-grounded systems, no short-circuit-like currents flow in the event of a 1-phase-to-
ground fault. There is only a shift of the voltage triangle (see Figure 6-100). For system operation, this state is

522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

not an immediate danger. In the entire galvanically connected system, the voltage of the phase affected by
the ground fault is approximately 0 V. Thus each load current gives an impedance of approximately 0 Ω. The
distance protection may not respond in this case. A 1-phase phase-to-ground pickup without ground-current
pickup is thus prevented.

[dwerdslu-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-100 Ground Fault in the Non-Grounded System

If a ground fault occurs, a significant starting current can flow in an extended resonant-grounded system. This
can result in a pickup of the ground-current pickup. Special measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
pickups when a ground fault occurs.
Specify a uniform double ground-fault preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which
fault will be switched off.
For a double ground fault in the isolated or resonant-grounded system, it is enough to switch off one base
point. The 2nd fault can remain in the system as a simple ground fault. Specify a uniform double ground-fault
preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which fault will be switched off. The Phase
preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference. The following double ground-
fault preferences can be selected.
Setting for Parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph- Principle of Preference
g)
C(A) acyclical Acyclical C before A before B
A(C) acyclical Acyclical A before C before B
B(A) acyclical Acyclical B before A before C
A(B) acyclical Acyclical A before B before C
C(B) acyclical Acyclical C before B before A
B(C) acyclical Acyclical B before C before A
C(A) cyclical Cyclical C before A before B before C
A(C) cyclical Cyclical A before C before B before A

In the 8 preference cases, a ground fault will be switched off according to the preference program. The 2nd
fault remains as a simple ground fault in the system and can be detected using the Ground-fault detection
function.

Influence of the Inrush-Current Detection


If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the distance protection can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents. In case of interaction with the inrush-current detection
the following configurations are possible:
• Blocking of the pickup for the overcurrent pickup method, V-/I-pickup and V-/I-/ϕ-pickup

• Blocking of individual distance zones

• Blocking of the pickup during impedance pickup by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detec-
tion or the pickup method will not pick up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 523
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is signaled and the corresponding time delay will start.
After that time, the operate indication will be generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see section 6.53 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.

6.6.3.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings

Parameter: Zone timer start

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:110) Zone timer start = on dist. pickup


The Zone timer start parameter is used to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
Parameter Value Description
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. If the
fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays continue
to run.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent
protection functions, select this setting.

Parameter: Dist. characteristic angle

• Default setting (_:2311:107) Dist. characteristic angle = 85.0°


The Dist. characteristic angle parameter allows you to set the inclination angle of the distance
protection characteristic curve (see Figure 6-112). The inclination angle set here for the distance protection
characteristic curve applies to all zones in the function.
Siemens recommends setting the Dist. characteristic angle parameter to the line angle.

EXAMPLE:
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) on the line to be protected in
the following way:

[fo1 line angle, 1, en_US]

[fo2 line angle, 1, en_US]

[fo3 line angle, 1, en_US]

If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:103) 3I0> threshold value = 0.10 A


The 3I0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence current limit for ground-fault
detection.
Determine the maximum ground current for a simple ground fault. Set the parameter 3I0> threshold
value to a slightly higher value.

524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: 3I0 pickup stabilization

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) 3I0 pickup stabilization = 0.10


The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to set the inclination of the 3I0> characteristic curve
for ground-fault detection.
Power-system unbalance (for example, untwisted lines) and current-transformer errors can cause a zero-
sequence current flow at the protection device in the case of higher phase currents, even if there is no ground
fault. The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid unwanted ground activation. If no
extreme power-system unbalance and extraordinary current-transformer faults are expected, Siemens recom-
mends keeping the recommended setting value of 0.10.

Parameter: Delay 1-phase pickup

• Default setting (_:2311:108) Delay 1-phase pickup = 0.04 s


The Delay 1-phase pickup parameter is used to delay pickup in the event of simple ground faults in the
isolated/resonant-grounded system for the duration of the transient.
In resonant-grounded systems (neutral point grounding through an arc-suppression coil), when a ground fault
occurs, it leads to non-system-frequency transients. The starting oscillation can lead to pickup of the I0> crite-
rion. The Delay 1-phase pickup parameter is used to delay the pickup.

Parameter: Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g)

• Default setting (_:2311:116) Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g) = C (A) acyclic


The Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference for double ground
faults.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Phase preferen. (ph-
ph-g) parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loop(s) Analyzed Loop(s)
C (A) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
A (C) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
B (A) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
A (B) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
C (B) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
B (C) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
C (A) cyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
A (C) cyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 525
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter Value Picked Up Loop(s) Analyzed Loop(s)


all A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd; A-gnd

If you wish to switch off both base points of a ground fault, set the parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph-
g) = all.

Parameter: Max. unbalance Vph-ph

• Default setting (_:2311:115) Max. unbalance Vph-ph = 25 %


The parameter Max. unbalance Vph-ph can be used to specify the maximum permitted unbalance for
phase-to-phase voltages in the healthy condition. Determine the setting value for the specific application.

NOTE

i The following parameters will be visible only if you are working with MHO characteristic curves:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)

• Cross polarization(ph-g)

• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!

Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-g)

• Default setting (:_2310:_111) Mem. polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %


With the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-ground loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-ph)

• Default setting (:_2310:_112) Mem. polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %


With the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-g)

• Default setting (:_2310:_113) Cross polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %


With the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-ground loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.

Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-ph)

• Default setting (:_2310:_114) Cross polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %


With the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.

526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.3.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:110 General:Zone timer start • on zone pickup on dist. pickup
• on dist. pickup
_:2311:107 General:Dist. character- 30.0 °to 90.0° 85.0 °
istic angle
_:2311:103 General:3I0> threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:2311:104 General:3I0 pickup stabi- 0.05 to 0.30 0.10
lization
_:2311:108 General:Delay 1-phase 0.00 sto 0.50 s 0.04 s
pickup
_:2311:116 General:Phase preferen. • C (A) acyclic C (A) acyclic
(ph-ph-g) • A (C) acyclic
• C (B) acyclic
• B (C) acyclic
• A (B) acyclic
• B (A) acyclic
• C (A) cyclic
• A (C) cyclic
• all
_:2311:115 General:Max. unbalance 5 % to 50 % 25 %
Vph-ph
_:2311:111 General:Mem. polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-g)
_:2311:112 General:Mem. polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
_:2311:113 General:Cross polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-g)
_:2311:114 General:Cross polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
Pickup Z<
_:3661:101 Pickup Z<:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.25 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:3661:102 Pickup Z<:Use ph-g load • no no
cutout • yes
_:3661:103 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 25.000 Ω
(ph-g) 5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
_:3661:104 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 °to 60.0° 45.0 °
cutout (ph-g)
_:3661:105 Pickup Z<:Use ph-ph • no no
load cutout • yes
_:3661:106 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 20.000 Ω
(ph-ph) 5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 4.000 Ω
_:3661:107 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 °to 60.0° 45.0 °
cutout (ph-ph)
Z 1
_:3571:1 Z 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 527
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3571:2 Z 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3571:121 Z 1:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3571:27 Z 1:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3571:101 Z 1:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3571:114 Z 1:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3571:109 Z 1:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:3571:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:3571:103 Z 1:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:3571:104 Z 1:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:3571:113 Z 1:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3571:110 Z 1:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
phase)
_:3571:112 Z 1:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
ph.)
_:3571:105 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:106 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:107 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3571:108 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 2
_:3572:1 Z 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3572:2 Z 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3572:121 Z 2:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3572:27 Z 2:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3572:101 Z 2:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3572:114 Z 2:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3572:109 Z 2:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:3572:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω

528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3572:103 Z 2:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:3572:104 Z 2:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:3572:113 Z 2:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3572:110 Z 2:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
phase)
_:3572:112 Z 2:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
ph.)
_:3572:105 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:106 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:107 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3572:108 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
Z 3
_:3573:1 Z 3:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3573:2 Z 3:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3573:121 Z 3:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3573:27 Z 3:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3573:101 Z 3:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3573:114 Z 3:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3573:109 Z 3:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:3573:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:3573:103 Z 3:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:3573:104 Z 3:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 1.000 Ω
_:3573:113 Z 3:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3573:110 Z 3:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.60 s
phase)
_:3573:112 Z 3:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.60 s
ph.)
_:3573:105 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:106 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:107 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3573:108 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 529
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z 4
_:3574:1 Z 4:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3574:2 Z 4:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3574:121 Z 4:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:3574:27 Z 4:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:3574:101 Z 4:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:3574:114 Z 4:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:3574:109 Z 4:Directional mode • non-directional non-directional
• forward
• reverse
_:3574:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:3574:103 Z 4:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:3574:104 Z 4:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.000 Ω
5A 0.010 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.400 Ω
_:3574:113 Z 4:Zone-inclination 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
angle
_:3574:110 Z 4:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.90 s
phase)
_:3574:112 Z 4:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.90 s
ph.)
_:3574:105 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:106 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:107 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3574:108 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

6.6.3.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:300 General:Z ph-g WYE O
_:2311:301 General:Z ph-ph DEL O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O

530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O
Pickup Z<
_:3661:51 Pickup Z<:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:3661:52 Pickup Z<:Behavior ENS O
_:3661:53 Pickup Z<:Health ENS O
Z 1
_:3571:81 Z 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3571:500 Z 1:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3571:501 Z 1:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3571:54 Z 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3571:52 Z 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3571:53 Z 1:Health ENS O
_:3571:55 Z 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3571:300 Z 1:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3571:301 Z 1:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3571:302 Z 1:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3571:303 Z 1:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3571:304 Z 1:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3571:305 Z 1:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3571:56 Z 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3571:57 Z 1:Operate ACT O
Z 2
_:3572:81 Z 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:3572:500 Z 2:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3572:501 Z 2:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3572:54 Z 2:Inactive SPS O
_:3572:52 Z 2:Behavior ENS O
_:3572:53 Z 2:Health ENS O
_:3572:55 Z 2:Pickup ACD O
_:3572:300 Z 2:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3572:301 Z 2:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3572:302 Z 2:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3572:303 Z 2:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3572:304 Z 2:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3572:305 Z 2:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3572:56 Z 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3572:57 Z 2:Operate ACT O
Z 3
_:3573:81 Z 3:>Block stage SPS I
_:3573:500 Z 3:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3573:501 Z 3:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3573:54 Z 3:Inactive SPS O
_:3573:52 Z 3:Behavior ENS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 531
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:3573:53 Z 3:Health ENS O
_:3573:55 Z 3:Pickup ACD O
_:3573:300 Z 3:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3573:301 Z 3:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3573:302 Z 3:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3573:303 Z 3:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3573:304 Z 3:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3573:305 Z 3:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3573:56 Z 3:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3573:57 Z 3:Operate ACT O
Z 4
_:3574:81 Z 4:>Block stage SPS I
_:3574:500 Z 4:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:3574:501 Z 4:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:3574:54 Z 4:Inactive SPS O
_:3574:52 Z 4:Behavior ENS O
_:3574:53 Z 4:Health ENS O
_:3574:55 Z 4:Pickup ACD O
_:3574:300 Z 4:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:3574:301 Z 4:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:3574:302 Z 4:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:3574:303 Z 4:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:3574:304 Z 4:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:3574:305 Z 4:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:3574:56 Z 4:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3574:57 Z 4:Operate ACT O

6.6.4 Direction Determination

To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop.
Different methods are implemented for direction determination. The function selects the most appropriate
method depending on the available input variables when a short circuit occurs.
The following factors during short-circuit occurrence influence, for example, the method selection:
• Existing measurands
• Existing storage capacities

• Current system constellation


The following table shows the different input variables of the methods and their properties:
Input Variables for Direction Feature
Determination
Current, actual short-circuit This method determines the ratio between the instantaneous voltage
voltage phasor and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selec-
tive.

532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Input Variables for Direction Feature


Determination
Saved, actual short-circuit The method determines the ratio between the saved voltage phasor and the
voltage instantaneous current phasor. The voltage phasor adapted to the instanta-
neous phase situation is used.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. It is the preferred application for series-compensated systems. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.
Current quadrature voltage The method determines the ratio between the instantaneous healthy
voltage phasor turned by 90° and the instantaneous current phasor.

Figure 6-101 Direction Determination with Quadrature Voltages

The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short


circuit. The method functions only with 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits
without ground contact and is loop-selective.
Saved quadrature voltage The method determines the ratio between the saved healthy voltage phasor
turned by 90° and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions only with 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits
without ground contact and is loop-selective.
Delta variables Direction determination works with static delta variables.
The method uses the delta phasors of current and voltage. The delta phasors
of current and voltage are calculated from the difference between the
instantaneous measured phasor and the phasor saved before the fault.
The ratio between the delta voltage phasor and the delta current phasor
provides information on the direction of the short circuit. The method func-
tions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 533
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Input Variables for Direction Feature


Determination
Symmetrical components The direction determination is based on the symmetrical components.
• The direction determination with zero-sequence variables determines
the zero-sequence impedance from the voltage and current phasors of
the zero-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. The method functions only with short circuits with ground
contact and is not loop-selective.
• The direction determination with negative-sequence variables deter-
mines the negative-sequence impedance from the voltage and current
phasors of the negative-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. It is the preferred application for short circuits during
power swing. It functions only with unbalanced short circuits and is not
loop-selective.

Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-102.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• Source impedance
• Power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve (forwards) has a reserve distance to the limits of the 1st
quadrant in the R-X diagram:

[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-102 Direction-Characteristic Curve in the R-X Diagram

(1) Also valid for non-directional

Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different (reflected through the center)
direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. The entire tripping range applies to it.

Features of Direction Determination


The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve in Figure 6-102 applies to actual short-circuit
voltages.
Figure 6-103 shows the direction-characteristic curve, taking the source impedance into consideration for
external short-circuit or buffered voltages (without load transport). Since these voltages are equal to the corre-

534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

sponding generator voltage E, and they also do not change after the short circuit occurs, the direction-charac-
teristic curve appears in the impedance diagram shifted by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For fault loca-
tion F1 (Figure 6-103a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the back-
ward direction. For all fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer), there is
a consensus for forward (Figure 6-103b). If the current reverses, the orientation of the direction-characteristic
curve changes suddenly (Figure 6-103c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring point
(current transformer). The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the value of I2. During load transport on
the line, the direction-characteristic curve can also rotate by the load angle.

[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-103 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Quadrature or Buffered Voltages

Direction Determination for Series-Compensated Lines


The direction-characteristic curves and their shift by the source impedance also apply for lines with series
capacitors. For a short circuit upstream of the local series capacitor, however, the short-circuit voltage reverses
if the protective spark gap SF has not picked up (see Figure 6-104).

[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-104 Voltage Characteristic for a Short Circuit Upstream of a Series Capacitor

(1) Without pickup of the protective spark gap


(2) With pickup of the protective spark gap

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 535
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. But in this case as well, direction measurement is
correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-105a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus the peaks of the
direction-characteristic curves, depending on the source impedance and load conditions before occurrence of
the fault, appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direction
(Figure 6-105b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction
(Figure 6-105c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.

[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-105 Direction-Characteristic Curves for Series-Compensated Lines

So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.

6.6.5 Pickup Method: Impedance Pickup

6.6.5.1 Description
In impedance pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-
current thresh, the impedances between the phase-to-phase loops are calculated. If a ground fault is
detected, the impedances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
Impedance pickup includes the elimination of apparent impedance and – if activated – monitoring of the load
cutout.

Healthy Loops
In impedance pickup, all 6 line loops are calculated. Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-
circuited lines also influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-
circuit current in line A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B and C-A. The ground
current is also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called "apparent
impedances" occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop. They are therefore of no significance for the zone selectivity of the protection.

536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

In addition to zone selectivity, phase selectivity is also important. Phase selectivity includes the identification
of the faulty phase, the generation of phase-selective indications, and the possibility of executing a 1-pole
automatic reclosing function (AREC). Depending on the infeed conditions, short circuits near the station may
have the result that the healthy loops see the short circuit at a greater distance, but they still see it within a
tripping area. This case leads to a disconnection without the option of a 1-pole AREC. The 3-pole disconnec-
tion of the line then results.
Inspecting the loops reliably assures zone and phase selectivity. Loops are inspected in 2 steps.
• From the calculated loop impedance and their partial impedances (phase or ground), a replication of the
line is first simulated.

• If the replication is plausible, the corresponding loop activation is categorized as valid.


If the impedances of more than one loop lie within the zone range, the smallest is still declared valid. Further-
more, all loops are declared valid whose impedance is greater than the lowest impedance by not more than
50 %. Loops with greater impedances are eliminated. The exception is any loop declared plausible in the first
step. These can then no longer be eliminated.
This eliminates healthy apparent impedances on the one hand, but on the other hand simultaneously detects
unbalanced multiphase short circuits and multiple faults correctly. The loops found valid are converted into
phase information. This allows the pickup to be signaled in a phase-selective manner.

Load Cutout
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the load impedance will be reflected in the operate curve of
the distance protection. For operate curves with high R segments, a load cutout can be configured that elimi-
nates unwanted pickups due to overload. The load cutout (see Figure 6-106 can be configured for phase-to-
phase loops and for phase-to-ground loops.
The parameters are explained in chapter 6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.

NOTE

i Note the following when adding a Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup to
the function Distance protection for grounded systems:
• The parameters for the load cutout are no longer available in impedance pickup.
• You set the parameters for the load cutout directly in the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic
curve and adaptive pickup.

• Here, additional parameters are available for the load cutout.


You will find more information on this in chapter 6.6.10 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and
Adaptive Pickup.

6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Min. phase-current thresh

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.10 A


Set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter to a very sensitive value (10 % of Irated). If the minimum
phase current is exceeded, the distance protection calculates the impedance. The sensitive setting allows you
to ensure the backup function of the distance protection in case of remote faults in other feeders. If the
minimum phase current in some short circuits – depending on system conditions – is not exceeded, you will
have to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens recommends using the default setting Min.
phase-current thresh = 0.10 A.

Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:102) Use ph-g load cutout = Yes
• Default setting (_:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 20.000 Ω

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 537
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

• Default setting (_:104) Angle load cutout (ph-g) = 45.0°

• Default setting (_:105) Use ph-ph load cutout = Yes

• Default setting (_:106) R load cutout (ph-ph) = 25.000 Ω

• Default setting (_:107) Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = 45.0°


The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops (ph-gnd) and phase-to-phase loops (ph-ph). Using
the parameters Use ph-g load cutout and Use ph-ph load cutout , you specify whether the load
range is cut out of the impedance level or not. The load cutout parameters are visible only if you set the
parameters Use ph-g load cutout = yes and Use ph-ph load cutout = yes .
Since there is no restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of a
1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load
current. For these cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic.
In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance zone. The zone
may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific application, calculate the
smallest load impedance and the greatest load impedance angle under heavy load (see Figure 6-106).

[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-106 Load Cutout

The values should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.

EXAMPLE
Calculation of load-cutout parameters in balanced load conditions
110 kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the data:
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 100 MVA
Imax = 525 A
Minimum operating voltage
Vmin = 0.9 Vrated
Current transformer 600 A/5 A
Voltage transformer 110 kV/0.1 kV

The primary minimum load impedance is then calculated as follows:

[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]

The secondary minimum load impedance is then:

538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]

With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 108.9 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 11.9 Ω

Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameters Angle load cutout (ph-ph) and Angle load
cutout (ph-g) ) greater (approx. 5°) than the maximum occurring load angle (corresponding to the
minimum power factor cos φ).

EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load (cos φmax)min = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting notes in Example application high voltage overhead line in 6.6.15.5 Setup
Notes for Pickup Method

When, with double lines, 2 line systems are on a single tower, there is a significant coupling between the 2
line systems. In the event of a 1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, increased load currents and coupled
ground currents can cause a ground pickup. This pickup can be prevented by separate setting of the load
cutout for phase-to-ground loops.
During the 1-pole dead time on the parallel line, a significant ground current flows on the intact line. This
ground current is caused by the coupling in the zero-sequence system. The ground current during the 1-phase
pause on the parallel line must be taken into consideration when setting the R load cutout (ph-g)
parameter.

EXAMPLE
Calculation of the load-cutout parameters for an application on a double circuit line
This example applies to a double line with zero-sequence system coupling of both line systems and 1-pole
tripping on one system in the double line.
The set values for the load cutout parameters are calculated for a 400-kV overhead line with the following
data:
220 km double line on one tower (zero system coupling of both line systems)
Maximum load current per line with both lines in operation:
Pmax = 1200 MVA
Imax = 1732 A

Minimum operating voltage = 0.9 Vrated


Vmin
Current transformer 2000 A/5 A
Voltage transformer 400 kV/100 V
Parameter kr = 1.54

The minimum load impedance results in:

[fofr1bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 539
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

This calculated value applies to phase-to-phase loops. For double lines, the 1-pole dead time on the parallel
line must also be taken into consideration for phase-to-ground loops. During the 1-pole dead time, the load
current on the intact line increases. At the same time, a load current flows in the ground path on the parallel
line in the 1-pole dead time. Calculate the minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops with the load
current in the ground path. For the calculation in this example, this ground current is given as a value relative
to the load current Imax.
For the ratio of Ignd on the healthy line to Imax in the 1-phase pause on the parallel line, the following value is
assumed:

[fofx2bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The line length as well as the source impedance and line impedance have an influence on this ratio. If you
cannot determine the value using a system simulation, you can assume the following approximate values:
Long lines (about 200 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.4
Short lines (about 25 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.6

The minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops results in the following for the calculation example:

[fofr2bs2-270910-01.tif, 1, en_US]

When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values as the primary or secondary varia-
bles. Conversion into secondary values yields:

[fofr3bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]

[fofr4bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]

With a safety margin of 10%, these settings are used:


R load cutout (ph-ph) = 108 Ω (primary) = 10.8 Ω (secondary)
R load cutout (ph-g) = 53.5 Ω (primary) = 5.35 Ω (secondary)

The opening angle of the load cutout, as in the first example for the single line, is calculated using the
minimum power factor.

6.6.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Pickup Z<
_:101 Pickup Z<:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.25 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:102 Pickup Z<:Use ph-g load • no no
cutout • yes
_:103 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 25.000 Ω
(ph-g) 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 5.000 Ω

540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:104 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
cutout (ph-g)
_:105 Pickup Z<:Use ph-ph • no no
load cutout • yes
_:106 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 20.000 Ω
(ph-ph) 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 4.000 Ω
_:107 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
cutout (ph-ph)

6.6.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Pickup Z<
_:51 Pickup Z<:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup Z<:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup Z<:Health ENS O

6.6.6 Pickup Method: Overcurrent Pickup

6.6.6.1 Description
Overcurrent pickup is a phase-specific pickup method which monitors the phase currents per phase. If a phase
current exceeds the set threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, a phase-selective pickup signal is output.
The phase-selective pickup signals are converted to loop information for the distance zones. If the network is
grounded, the loop selection for 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection depends on parameter Loops
with 1-ph. pickup. You will find more information on this in chapter 6.6.6.2 Application and Setting
Notes.
For more information about ground-fault detection in grounded systems, please refer to chapter 6.6.2.2 Struc-
ture of the Function.
If the network is not grounded, the selection of the 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection always
depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. If a ground fault is detected, it will be indicated.

6.6.6.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Recommended setting value (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


You can use the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter to determine whether the zone generates an
operate indication or not.
Parameter Value Description
no If the overcurrent pickup is initiated, it will generate an operate indication
after the time delay has elapsed.
Siemens recommends keeping the setting value for typical applications.
yes The overcurrent pickup does not generate an operate indication.
The operate indication is not included in the formation of the group indica-
tion on the function or function group level. Fault recording is not started
automatically.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 541
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.=no


The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. You can use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to deter-
mine whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.

NOTE

i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.

Parameter: O/C threshold Iph>>

• Default setting (_:105) O/C threshold Iph>> = 1.8 A


Use the O/C threshold Iph>> parameter to set the pickup threshold for the overcurrent pickup. Set the
parameter O/C threshold Iph>> for the specific application. During fault-free operation, the maximum
current must not exceed the pickup threshold.

Parameter: Loops with 1-ph. pickup

• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop

NOTE

i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, the Loops with 1-ph.
pickup parameter will be valid and visible.

You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, for example:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the zone will work
with the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop
will be selected.

Parameter: Op. delay forward pickup

• Default setting (_:115) Op. delay forward pickup = 1.2 s


If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay forward pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the overcurrent pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup
responds independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay forward pickup for the specific application.

Parameter: Op. delay non-dir. pickup

• Default setting (_:116) Op. delay non-dir. pickup = 1.2 s

542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay non-dir. pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the overcurrent pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup
responds independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay non-dir. pickup for the specific application.

6.6.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Pickup I
_:1 Pickup I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Pickup I:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:27 Pickup I:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:105 Pickup I:O/C threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
Iph>> 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.25 A to 175.00 A 9.000 A
_:114 Pickup I:Loops with 1-ph. • phase-to-ground loop ph-ph or ph-gnd
pickup • ph-ph or ph-gnd loop loop
_:115 Pickup I:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
forward pickup
_:116 Pickup I:Op. delay non- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
dir. pickup

6.6.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Pickup I
_:51 Pickup I:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup I:Health ENS O
_:55 Pickup I:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Pickup I:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pickup I:Operate ACT O

6.6.7 Pickup Method: V/I Pickup

6.6.7.1 Description
V/I pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have
exceeded the set threshold value Min. current thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being eval-
uated, both associated phase currents must exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-107 determine the slope of the V/I characteristic.
In systems without a grounded neutral point, a pickup is effectively suppressed with ground faults. You can
find more information on this in chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function, under section Ground-fault detec-
tion.
The following figure shows the V/I pickup characteristic:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 543
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[DwUIanreg-160813-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-107 V/I Characteristic

The geometry of the V/I characteristic is determined by the parameters shown in the figure (dots).
The following table shows which voltage settings define the characteristic in Figure 6-107:

Table 6-2 Assignment of Settings in the V/I Characteristic

Setting When Evaluating Phase-to- Setting when Evaluating Phase-to-Phase


Ground Voltages Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>>

For high-current short-circuits, overcurrent pickup O/C threshold Iph>> is superimposed. If the phase
currents exceed the threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, pickup occurs regardless of the voltage. The
following table shows the measurands used by the pickup modules:
Pickup Module Voltage Current
A VA17 IA
B VB17 IB
C VC17 IC
A-B VAB18 IA
B-C VBC18 IB
C-A VCA18 IC

In isolated/arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems, pickup is undesired for single-phase ground faults. Ground-


fault detection prevents undesired pickup in the case of single-phase ground faults.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. Ground faults are indicated only if at least one phase pickup has
occurred.

17 Phase-to-ground voltage
18 Phase-to-phase voltage

544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Pickup Programs
Pickup programs allow you to adapt to different system states. With the parameter Pickup program, you
control the measurand selection. For different fault types, you can determine whether the phase-to-phase
loops or phase-to-ground loops are the most important or whether the measurand selection depends on the
ground-fault detection. Thus, adaptation to system states is very flexible. The best possible control depends
significantly on the neutral-point grounding.
You can find more information on this in chapter 6.6.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.

6.6.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.=no


The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.

NOTE

i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.

Parameter: Pickup program

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup program = ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage


You can use the Pickup program parameter to define the voltage selection for different fault types. The 1st
position for the setting option applies to ground faults. The 2nd position for the setting option applies to
phase-to-phase faults.
Parameter Value Description
ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are evalu-
ated. If no ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-phase voltages are
evaluated.
Siemens recommends this setting value for all system types. With this
setting, you achieve maximum sensitivity for all fault types.
always ph-ph voltage The phase-to-phase voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
Single-phase ground faults and double ground faults are not always
detected correctly.
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.
always ph-gnd voltage The phase-to-ground voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
This setting value can be used for all fault types as well. If you evaluate the
phase-to-ground voltages in the event of phase-to-phase faults, the sensi-
tivity for pickup is less.
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.
ph-gnd voltage or Iph>> If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are evalu-
ated.
If no ground fault has been detected, only overcurrent pickup applies (O/C
threshold Iph>>).
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 545
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: Min. current thresh. Iph>

• Default setting (_:102) Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A


You can use the Min. current thresh. Iph> parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the
current. Set the threshold to allow operation of the distance protection backup function in the event of
remote faults in other feeders. If the Min. current thresh. Iph> is not exceeded in some short circuits
– depending on system conditions – it is necessary to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens
recommends using the default setting Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A.

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>

• Default setting (_:103) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> = 48.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: Min. current
thresh. Iph>).

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>

• Default setting (_:104) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> = 80.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: Min. current
thresh. Iph>).

Parameter: O/C threshold Iph>>

• Default setting (_:105) O/C threshold Iph>> = 1.800 A


You can use the O/C threshold Iph>> parameter to set the upper pickup threshold for overcurrent
pickup. Set the parameter O/C threshold Iph>> for the specific application. During fault-free operation,
the maximum current must not exceed the pickup threshold.

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>>

• Default setting (_:106) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> = 48.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: O/C threshold
Iph>>).

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>>

• Default setting (_:107) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> = 80.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: O/C threshold
Iph>>).

Parameter: Loops with 1-ph. pickup

• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop

NOTE

i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.

You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.

546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter Value Description


ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, for example:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the zone will work
with the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop
will be selected.

Parameter: Op. delay forward pickup

• Default setting (_:115) Op. delay forward pickup = 1.20 s


If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay forward pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup responds inde-
pendently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay forward pickup for the specific application.

Parameter: Op. delay non-dir. pickup

• Default setting (_:116) Op. delay non-dir. pickup = 1.20 s


If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay non-dir. pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup responds inde-
pendently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay non-dir. pickup for the specific application.

6.6.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Pickup V/I
_:1 Pickup V/I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Pickup V/I:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:27 Pickup V/I:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:101 Pickup V/I:Pickup • ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage ph-gnd or ph-ph
program • always ph-ph voltage voltage
• always ph-gnd voltage
• ph-gnd voltage or Iph>>
_:102 Pickup V/I:Min. current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
thresh. Iph> 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 175.000 A 1.000 A
_:103 Pickup V/I:Undervolt. ph- 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
gnd at Iph>
_:104 Pickup V/I:Undervolt. ph- 1.000 V to 200.000 V 80.000 V
ph at Iph>
_:105 Pickup V/I:O/C threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
Iph>> 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.249 A to 175.000 A 9.000 A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 547
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:106 Pickup V/I:Undervolt. ph- 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
gnd at Iph>>
_:107 Pickup V/I:Undervolt. ph- 1.000 V to 200.000 V 80.000 V
ph at Iph>>
_:114 Pickup V/I:Loops with 1- • phase-to-ground loop ph-ph or ph-gnd
ph. pickup • ph-ph or ph-gnd loop loop
_:115 Pickup V/I:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
forward pickup
_:116 Pickup V/I:Op. delay non- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
dir. pickup

6.6.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Pickup V/I
_:51 Pickup V/I:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup V/I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup V/I:Health ENS O
_:55 Pickup V/I:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Pickup V/I:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pickup V/I:Operate ACT O

6.6.8 Pickup Method: V/I/φ Pickup

6.6.8.1 Description
V/I/ϕ pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:

[DwUIPhia-160813-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-108 V/I/ϕ Characteristic (Normal Characteristic: a-b-c/Sensitive Characteristic: a-d-e)

548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

The basic structure of the V/I/ϕ characteristic is identical to that for V/I pickup with an additional, sensitive
angle-controlled characteristic (short-circuit region ϕ> in Figure 6-108). The sensitive characteristic (a-d-e) is
used if the fault impedance is close to the straight lines. In this way, it is still possible to differentiate reliably
between load and short-circuit conditions in cases where simple V/I pickup fails.
Possible applications include, for instance, protection of long lines or line segments with intermediate infeed
and low external impedance at the same time. In the event of a short circuit at the end of the line or in the
distance protection backup range, the local measured voltage is interrupted only briefly. In this case, the
phase angle between the current and voltage serves as an additional criterion for fault detection.
The angle-dependent region of the characteristic (hatched area in Figure 6-108) can be set for the forward
direction only (line direction) or both directions.

A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must exceed
the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage and the phase angle between the current and voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-108 determine
the slope of the U/I-/ϕ characteristic.
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I-/ϕ characteristic to provide optimum response to
various fault types and network conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the char-
acteristic in Figure 6-108:
Setting When Evaluating Phase- Setting When Evaluating Phase-
to-Ground Voltages to-Phase Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Iph> Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>>
Iph>>
V(Iphi>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iphi>
Iphi>

The phase angle between the current and voltage is determined as follows:
• If you are evaluating phase-to-ground voltages, the phase angle is determined from the phase-to-ground
voltage and the associated phase current without consideration of the ground current. A requirement is
that the corresponding phase current must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.

• If you are evaluating phase-to-phase voltages, the angle is determined from the phase-to-phase voltage
and the associated current difference. A requirement is that both phase currents and the definitive differ-
ential current for the loop must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
With the ϕ< and ϕ> parameters, you define the upper and lower limits of the short-circuit angle range (see
following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 549
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[DwUIphiK-160813-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-109 Limit Angle of the Short-Circuit Angle Range

If the phase angle is greater than the limit angle ϕ> and less than the limit angle ϕ<, the sensitive V/I/ϕ charac-
teristic applies (a-d-e). Otherwise, the lower characteristic applies (a-b-c).

6.6.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.

NOTE

i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.

Parameter: Pickup program

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup program = ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage


You can use the Pickup program parameter to define the voltage selection for different fault types. The 1st
position for the setting option applies to ground faults. The 2nd position for the setting option applies to
phase-to-phase faults.
Parameter Value Description
ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are evalu-
ated. If no ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-phase voltages are
evaluated.
Siemens recommends this setting value for all system types. With this
setting, you achieve maximum sensitivity for all fault types.
always ph-ph voltage The phase-to-phase voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
Single-phase ground faults and double ground faults are not always
detected correctly.
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.

550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter Value Description


always ph-gnd voltage The phase-to-ground voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
This setting value can be used for all fault types as well. If you evaluate the
phase-to-ground voltages in the event of phase-to-phase faults, the sensi-
tivity for pickup is less.
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.
ph-gnd voltage or Iph>> If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are evalu-
ated.
If no ground fault has been detected, only overcurrent pickup applies (O/C
threshold Iph>>).
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.

Parameter: Min. current thresh. Iph>

• Default setting (_:102) Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A


You can use the Min. current thresh. Iph> parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the
current. Set the threshold to allow operation of the distance protection backup function in the event of
remote faults in other feeders. If the Min. current thresh. Iph> is not exceeded in some short circuits
– depending on system conditions – it is necessary to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens
recommends using the default setting Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A.

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>

• Default setting (_:103) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> = 48.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve (parameter: Min.
current thresh. Iph>).

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>

• Default setting (_:104) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> = 80.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve (parameter: Min. current
thresh. Iph>).

Parameter: O/C threshold Iph>>

• Default setting (_:105) O/C threshold Iph>> = 1.800 A


You can use the O/C threshold Iph>> parameter to set the upper pickup threshold for overcurrent
pickup. Set the parameter O/C threshold Iph>> for the specific application. During fault-free operation,
the maximum current must not exceed the pickup threshold.

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>>

• Default setting (_:106) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> = 48.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve (parameter: O/C
threshold Iph>>).

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>>

• Default setting (_:107) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> = 80.000 V

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 551
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve (parameter: O/C
threshold Iph>>).

Parameter: Iφ>

• Default setting (_:108) Iφ> = 1.800 A


You can use the Iφ> parameter to define the pickup threshold for angle-dependent pickup in the U/I/ϕ charac-
teristic curve (ϕ pickup).

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iφ>

• Default setting (_:109) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iφ> = 48.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iφ> parameter to define the threshold value of the phase-to-
ground voltage for the current threshold Iφ> in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve.

Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iφ>

• Default setting (_:110) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iφ> = 80.000 V


You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iφ> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the current threshold Iφ> in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve.

Parameter: Effective direct. φ-pickup

• Default setting (_:111) Effective direct. φ-pickup = forward + reverse


You can use the Effective direct. φ-pickup parameter to specify whether the U/I/ϕ pickup forward
or forward + reverse operates. Set the parameter Effective direct. φ-pickup for the specific
application.

Parameter: φ>

• Default setting (_:112) φ> = 50.0° V


You can use the φ> parameter to define the lower limit of the short-circuit angle range (ϕK).
Set the φ> parameter between the load angle ϕL and the short-circuit angle ϕK. Set the φ> parameter 10° to
20° smaller than the line angle (ϕL = arctan(XL/RL)). Ensure that unfavorable load conditions do not result in
pickup.

Parameter: φ<

• Default setting (_:113) φ< = 110.0° V


You can use the φ< parameter to define the upper limit of the short-circuit angle range (ϕK). This limit is not
critical. Siemens recommends a setting value between 110° and 120°.

Parameter: Loops with 1-ph. pickup

• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop

NOTE

i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.

You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.

552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter Value Description


ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, for example:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the zone will work
with the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop
will be selected

Parameter: Op. delay forward pickup

• Default setting (_:115) Op. delay forward pickup = 1.2 s


If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay forward pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup responds inde-
pendently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay forward pickup for the specific application.

Parameter: Op. delay non-dir. pickup

• Default setting (_:116) Op. delay non-dir. pickup = 1.2 s


If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay non-dir. pickup (non-directional finite time)
has elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup responds
independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay non-dir. pickup for the specific application.

6.6.8.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Pickup V/I/φ
_:1 Pickup V/I/φ:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Pickup V/I/φ:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:27 Pickup V/I/φ:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:101 Pickup V/I/φ:Pickup • ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage ph-gnd or ph-ph
program • always ph-ph voltage voltage
• always ph-gnd voltage
• ph-gnd voltage or Iph>>
_:102 Pickup V/I/φ:Min. current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
thresh. Iph> 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 175.000 A 1.000 A
_:103 Pickup V/I/φ:Undervolt. 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
ph-gnd at Iph>
_:104 Pickup V/I/φ:Undervolt. 1.000 V to 200.000 V 80.000 V
ph-ph at Iph>
_:105 Pickup V/I/φ:O/C 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
threshold Iph>> 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.249 A to 175.000 A 9.000 A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 553
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:106 Pickup V/I/φ:Undervolt. 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
ph-gnd at Iph>>
_:107 Pickup V/I/φ:Undervolt. 1.000 V to 200.000 V 80.000 V
ph-ph at Iph>>
_:108 Pickup V/I/φ:Iφ> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 175.000 A 9.000 A
_:109 Pickup V/I/φ:Undervolt. 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
ph-gnd at Iφ>
_:110 Pickup V/I/φ:Undervolt. 1.000 V to 200.000 V 80.000 V
ph-ph at Iφ>
_:111 Pickup V/I/φ:Effective • forward + reverse forward +
direct. φ-pickup • forward reverse
_:112 Pickup V/I/φ:φ> 30.0 ° to 60.0 ° 50.0 °
_:113 Pickup V/I/φ:φ< 90.0 ° to 120.0 ° 110.0 °
_:114 Pickup V/I/φ:Loops with • phase-to-ground loop ph-ph or ph-gnd
1-ph. pickup • ph-ph or ph-gnd loop loop
_:115 Pickup V/I/φ:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
forward pickup
_:116 Pickup V/I/φ:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
non-dir. pickup

6.6.8.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Pickup V/I/φ
_:51 Pickup V/I/φ:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup V/I/φ:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup V/I/φ:Health ENS O
_:55 Pickup V/I/φ:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Pickup V/I/φ:Pickup Phi ACT O
_:56 Pickup V/I/φ:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pickup V/I/φ:Operate ACT O

554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.9 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve

6.6.9.1 Description

Logic of a Zone

[lopoly13-230511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-110 Logic Diagram of a Zone with a Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 555
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-111 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continued)

Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Impedance calculation from the measured current and voltage values
• Placement of the impedance into the zone

• Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone


If the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the operating polygon of a distance zone, and the direction of
the impedance phasor matches the directional mode of the zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are
processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parameters X reach, R (ph-ph), R (ph-g), and Zone-incli-
nation angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.

556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-112 Operate Curve with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve

NOTE

i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.

6.6.9.2 Impedance Calculation


There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A.
A jump detection synchronizes all calculations to the occurrence of the fault. Synchronization enables
minimum and repeatable operate times to be achieved. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impe-
dances are calculated using the current cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measur-
ands of the current fault condition.

Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Phase Loops


For calculation of a phase-to-phase loop, for example, for a 2-phase A-B short circuit (Figure 6-113), the loop
equation is:

[foflschl-160909-01.tif, 1, en_US]

with

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 557
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

(complex) measurands
(complex) line impedance

The line impedance is calculated as follows:

[folimped-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]

[dwllschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-113 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop

As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in A, for example, the loops A-B and C-A are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.

Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Ground Loops


For calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it must be considered that the impedance of the ground-return
path generally does not match the impedance of the phases. This is the case, for example, for an C-gnd
(Figure 6-114) short circuit.

[dwleschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-114 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop

The voltage VC-gnd, the phase current IC, and the ground current Ignd of the faulty loop are measured.

[fofeschl-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The impedance at the location of the fault is calculated as:

[foreform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]

and

558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[foxeform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]

with
VC-gnd Short-circuit voltage phasor
IC Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
Ignd Ground-fault current phasor
φV Phase angle of the short-circuit voltage
φph Phase angle of the short-circuit current (phase C)
φgnd Phase angle of the ground-fault current

The factors Kr = Rgnd/Rph and Kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.

NOTE

i In the impedance calculation, the factors Kr and Kx are used for residual compensation. If you enter the
grounding resistance factors in the format k0 with Phi(k0), they are automatically converted into Kr and
Kx. Conversion is performed under consideration of the line angle. For this reason, pay attention to the
correct setting of the line angle in the general data of the Line function group (parameter (_:9001:108)
Line angle).

As long as one of the phases involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the auto-
matic reclosing, the phase-to-ground loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time in the
automatic reclosing in C, the C-gnd loop is blocked, for example. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor observes the state of the automatic reclosing and provides the
blocking signal.

Measured-Value Correction for Parallel Lines


For double lines, both line systems are influenced by mutual coupling impedances (see Figure 6-115). With
ground faults, errors in the results of the impedance calculation occur unless particular measures are taken.
You can therefore effectively connect parallel-line compensation. This takes the ground current of the parallel
line into consideration in the line equation, compensating for the coupling influence. This ground current
must be applied to the device for this purpose. The loop equation in this case is similar to that of Figure 6-114:

[fofokpl1-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]

[fofokpl2-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]

IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The ratios R0M/3Rph and X0M/3Xph are line constants that result
from the geometry of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 559
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-115 Ground Fault on a Double Line

Without parallel-line compensation, the ground current of the parallel line typically results in the under-
reaching of the distance protection (the loop impedance seen by the distance protection appears to be larger).
If both lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-115),
overreach can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-115, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is only connected for those line ends where the ground current of
the parallel line is less than that of the end's own line. In example Figure 6-115, Ignd is greater than Ignd-P:
There is compensation in I in that ZM · Ignd-P is coupled in; in II there is no compensation.

6.6.9.3 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blocked if diff.prot.active

• Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if diff.prot.active = no


The Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter is visible only when the Line differential protection
function is available in the application.
Using the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter, you establish whether the distance protection zone
is blocked or not as long as the Line differential protection function is active.
Parameter Value Description
no If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = no is set, the zone will run regard-
less of the line differential protection.
If the zone picks up, it will generate an operate indication after the time
delay has elapsed.
yes If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the Blocked if
diff.prot.active = yes parameter is set, the zone is blocked as long as
the line differential protection function is working.
If the line differential protection is blocked, then the zone is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.=no


The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.

560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

NOTE

i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-
current detection is absolutely necessary.

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only.
Parameter Value Description
ph-gnd and ph-ph The zone works with phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring
elements. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
ph-gnd only The zone works only with the phase-to-ground measuring element.
ph-ph only The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:109) Directional mode=forward


You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the zone operates forward, reverse,
or non-directional. Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed=yes


You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the zone is allowed to execute 1-
pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole tripping is allowed
on overhead lines. For practical use cases, only the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone should be
tripped 1-pole. For the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone, set the parameter 1-pole operate
allowed = yes. For all higher zones, set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = no.

Parameter: X reach

• Default setting (_:102) X reach = 2.500 Ω


You can use the X reach parameter to set the limit of the polygon in the X direction. Determine the setting
value for the specific application.
First, create a time-grading schedule for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths
with their reactances X in Ω/km into the time-grading schedule. The reactances X then define the range of the
distance zones.
Under the title Notes on the R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting at the end of the section, you will find notes on the
R/X setting.
You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.

Parameter: R (ph-g)

• Default setting (_:103) R (ph-g) = 2.500 Ω


You can use the R (ph-g) parameter to set the boundary of the polygon in the R direction for phase-to-
ground loops. The R radius for ground faults is calculated in a manner similar to that used for R (ph-ph)
setting value for phase-to-phase faults. For phase-to-ground faults, the fault resistance is greater than that for
phase-to-phase faults. For overhead lines, not only the arc resistance must be taken into consideration for a
ground fault, but also the tower-grounding resistance.
Under the title Notes on the R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting at the end of the section, you will find notes on the
R/X setting.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 561
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.

Parameter: R (ph-ph)

• Default setting (_:104) R (ph-ph) = 1.250 Ω


You can use the R (ph-ph) parameter to set the boundary of the polygon in the R direction for phase-to-
phase loops. The R (ph-ph) setting value considers the fault resistance at the fault location. The fault resis-
tance is added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resistance is,
for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. Do not set the reserve resis-
tance any larger than necessary. For long, heavily loaded lines, the setting value may enter the load range. A
configurable load cutout prevents the pickup of the zone in the event of overload (see Load cutout in chapter
6.6.5.1 Description.
For overhead lines, the setting value is determined primarily by the arc resistance. No significant arc is possible
in cables. With very short cables, ensure that the arc flashover at the local cable box is included in the set resis-
tance for Zone 1.
Under the title Notes on the R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting at the end of the section, you will find notes on the
R/X setting.
You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Default setting (_:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the grading time of the zone for 1-phase
short circuits. The Operate delay (1-phase) must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Default setting (_:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the grading time of the zone for multi-
phase faults. The Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Zone-inclination angle

• Default setting (_:113) Zone-inclination angle = 0.0°


You can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to set the angle by which the upper limit of the
polygon is inclined in the 1st quadrant.
Under no circumstances may Zone 1 respond in the event of external faults, since this represents a loss of
selectivity. To prevent the loss of selectivity, the limit of the X setting for Zone 1 is inclined downwards by the
set angle. The default angle of 0° is typically retained for greater distance zones.
You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.

Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.

• Default setting (_:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp.=no


You can use the Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter to determine whether the zone operates with its
own, specific residual compensation factors or not.
Parameter Value Description
no The zone works with the residual compensation factors set in the Line func-
tion group.
yes The zone works with the specific residual compensation factors of the zone.

562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

NOTE

i Only if the Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes parameter in the zone is set, the residual compensation
factors set here will be valid and visible. If the parameter is set Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no, the
residual compensation factors set for the device apply.

Parameter: Kr and Kx

• Default setting (_:105) Kr = 1.00

• Default setting (_:106) Kx = 1.00


You can use the Kr and Kx parameters to set the residual compensation with scalar factors.

NOTE

i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.

An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High-voltage over-
head-line application example in chapter 6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .

Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)

• Default setting (_:107) K0 = 1.000

• Default setting (_:108) Angle (K0) = 0.00°


You can use the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters to set the residual compensation with the complex residual
compensation factor.

NOTE

i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.

Notes on the R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting


In practice, the ratio of the resistance to the reactance setting lies in the following ranges:
Section Type R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting
Short cable sections (about 0.5 km to 3 km) 3 to 5
Longer cable sections (> 3 km) 2 to 3
Short overhead-line sections < 10 km 2 to 5
Overhead lines < 100 km 1 to 2
Long overhead lines 100 km to 200 km 0.5 to 1
Long extra-high voltage lines > 200 km ≤ 0.5

NOTE

i For short lines with large R/X ratios, note the following during zone setting: The angle errors of the current
and voltage transformers cause a rotation of the impedance measured in the direction of the R axis. The
risk that external faults will be shifted into the first zone increases if, because of the settings for the
polygon, kr and kx, the loop range is large in the R direction in relation to the X direction for Zone 1. Use
the grading factor of 85 % only up to an R/X ratio ≤ 1 (loop range).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 563
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

For larger R/X settings, you can calculate a reduced grading factor for Zone 1 using the following formula:
STF Grading factor = range of Zone 1 relative to the line length
R Loop range in the direction R for Zone 1 = R1· (1 + kr)
X Loop range in the direction X for Zone 1 = X1· (1 + kx)
δU Angle error of the voltage transformer (typically 1°)
δI Angle error of the current transformer (typically 1°)

[fofdustf-060709-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Alternatively or additionally, you can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to incline the polygon
of Zone 1 in the first quadrant. This also prevents overreach (see Figure 6-112).

6.6.9.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z #
_:1 Z #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Z #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:121 Z #:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:27 Z #:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:11 Z #:1-pole operate allowed • no yes
• yes
_:101 Z #:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:114 Z #:Zone-spec. residu. • no no
comp. • yes
_:109 Z #:Directional mode • non-directional forward
• forward
• reverse
_:102 Z #:X reach 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:103 Z #:R (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:104 Z #:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:113 Z #:Zone-inclination angle 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
_:110 Z #:Operate delay (1-phase) 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
_:112 Z #:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
ph.)
_:105 Z #:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:106 Z #:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:107 Z #:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:108 Z #:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.9.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Z #
_:81 Z #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Z #:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:501 Z #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Z #:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:301 Z #:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:302 Z #:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:303 Z #:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:304 Z #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Z #:Operate ACT O

6.6.10 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup

6.6.10.1 Description
The Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup is essentially the same as the Zone
with quadrilateral characteristic curve.
The chapter describes only the extensions of the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive
pickup.
You can find the description for the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve beginning with chapter
6.6.9.1 Description.
The Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup has the following extensions:
• You set the load cutout directly in the zone. The load cutout applies for all the additional zones in the
Distance protection for grounded systems function.

• The load cutout applies to both the phase-to-phase and the phase-to-ground loops.

• You can additionally limit the load cutout by user-specific minimum/maximum values.
In that way, you can adapt the load cutout better to the load curve.

• The load-cutout settings are available as measured values R load cutout and Angle load cutout.

You can define multiple characteristic curves with different load cutouts and store them in different settings
groups. If you switch the settings group, you can adapt the load cutout in the operate curve of the Distance
protection quickly and flexibly to different load conditions. This increases the safety against erroneous
pickups due to overloads.
You can find more detailed information regarding settings group switching in chapter 3.11.1 Settings-Group
Switching.

Measured Values of the Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup
The measured values are prerouted to the operational and fault log. This supports fault analysis if the function
trips.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 565
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Measured Value Description


(_:306) R load cutout Resistance for defining the load cutout in the R-X
plane
(_:307) Angle load cutout Opening angle of the load cutout

6.6.10.2 Application and Setting Notes

NOTE

i If you insert a Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup into the Distance
protection function, the load-cutout settings migrate from the impedance pickup into this zone.
If you delete this zone in the function, you must again set the load-cutout settings in the impedance
pickup.
In the impedance pickup, you can again set the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground loops.

NOTE

i If you set the load cutout in the Quadrilateral zone with adaptive pickup, the load cutout applies for all
zones, both for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-ground loops.

Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:122) R load cutout = 25.000 Ω
• Default setting (_:123) Max. R load cutout = 600.000 Ω

• Default setting (_:124) Min. R load cutout = 0.050 Ω

• Default setting (_:125) Angle load cutout = 45.0°

• Default setting (_:126) Max. Angle load cutout = 60.0°

• Default setting (_:127) Min. Angle load cutout = 20.0°


The load cutout is set jointly for phase-to-ground loops (ph-gnd) and phase-to-phase loops (ph-ph).
You can find application and setting notes for the R load cutout and Angle load cutout parameters in
the description of impedance pickups in chapter 6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.

Parameters: Max. R load cutout, Min. R load cutout

• Default setting (_:123) Max. R load cutout = 600.000 Ω

• Default setting (_:124) Min. R load cutout = 0.050 Ω


With the Max. R load cutout and Min. R load cutout parameters, you can define an upper and a
lower limiting value for the R load cutout parameter. This allows you to additionally limit the setting range
of the R load cutout parameter and adapt it to specific load conditions. If you set the Max. R load
cutout and Min. R load cutout parameters to the same value, the parameter R load cutout cannot
take on a different value.

Parameters: Max. Angle load cutout, Min. R load cutout

• Default setting (_:126) Max. Angle load cutout = 60.0°

• Default setting (_:127) Min. Angle load cutout = 20.0°


With the Max. Angle load cutout and Min. Angle load cutout parameters, you can define an
upper and a lower limiting value for the Angle load cutout parameter. This allows you to additionally
limit the setting range of the Angle load cutout parameter and adapt it to specific load conditions. If you

566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

set the Max. Angle load cutout and Min. Angle load cutout parameters to the same value, the
parameter Angle load cutout cannot take on a different value.

6.6.10.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z adapt.pickup
_:1 Z adapt.pickup:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Z adapt.pickup:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:121 Z adapt.pickup:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:27 Z adapt.pickup:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:11 Z adapt.pickup:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:101 Z adapt.pickup:Function • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
mode • ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:114 Z adapt.pickup:Zone- • no no
spec. residu. comp. • yes
_:109 Z adapt.pickup:Direc- • non-directional forward
tional mode • forward
• reverse
_:102 Z adapt.pickup:X reach 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 25.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
_:103 Z adapt.pickup:R (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 25.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
_:104 Z adapt.pickup:R (ph-ph) 1 A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 12.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
_:113 Z adapt.pickup:Zone- 0 ° to 45 ° 0°
inclination angle
_:110 Z adapt.pickup:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
delay (1-phase)
_:112 Z adapt.pickup:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:105 Z adapt.pickup:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:106 Z adapt.pickup:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:107 Z adapt.pickup:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:108 Z adapt.pickup:Angle -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
(K0)
_:122 Z adapt.pickup:R load 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 25.000 Ω
cutout 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 5.000 Ω
_:123 Z adapt.pickup:Max. R 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 300.000 Ω
load cutout 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 60.000 Ω
_:124 Z adapt.pickup:Min. R 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 0.100 Ω
load cutout 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.020 Ω
_:125 Z adapt.pickup:Angle 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 45.0 °
load cutout

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 567
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:126 Z adapt.pickup:Max. 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 60.0 °
Angle load cutout
_:127 Z adapt.pickup:Min. 20.0 ° to 60.0 ° 20.0 °
Angle load cutout

6.6.10.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Z adapt.pickup
_:81 Z adapt.pickup:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Z adapt.pickup:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:501 Z adapt.pickup:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z adapt.pickup:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z adapt.pickup:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z adapt.pickup:Health ENS O
_:55 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:301 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:302 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:303 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:304 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z adapt.pickup:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z adapt.pickup:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Z adapt.pickup:Operate ACT O
_:306 Z adapt.pickup:R load cutout MV O
_:307 Z adapt.pickup:Angle load cutout MV O

568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.11 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve

6.6.11.1 Description

Logic of a Zone

[lomho13p-230511-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-116 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 569
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-117 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve (Continued)

Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the polarization voltage from the measured current values
• Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone

• Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone


To arrange the measurands in the tripping level of the MHO characteristic curve, the angle between 2 differ-
ence vectors ΔZ1 and ΔZ2 is determined (see Figure 6-118). These vectors are calculated from the difference
between the 2 peaks of the circle diameter and the fault impedance. The peak Zr corresponds to the setting
value of the zone (parameter Zr impedance reach and φ as in Figure 6-119); the peak k · ZS corresponds
to the polarization value. The difference vectors are calculated as follows:

[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In marginal cases, ZF is on the peak of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is 90°
(Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic, it is less
than 90°.

570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-118 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic Curve

The Zr impedance reach parameter is used to define the zone. Whether the zone works in a forward or
reverse direction is determined. In the reverse direction, the MHO characteristic curve is mirrored across the
coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the MHO characteristic curve of a
distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is converted into phase-selective pickup indications.
The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are processed further in the output logic of the distance
protection and by external additional functions (for example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the
distance protection is described in Chapter 6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

Basic Characteristic Curve of the MHO Circuit


The basic form of the MHO characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-119. The MHO characteristic curve of the
zone is a circle through the coordinate origin in the R-X plane. The diameter is defined by the parameter Zr
impedance reach. The inclination is defined by the parameter Dist. characteristic angle.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 571
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-119 Basic Form of the MHO Characteristic Curve

Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve


The MHO characteristic curve passes through the coordinate origin. The boundary around the origin is unde-
fined, since the measuring voltage there is too small for reliable analysis. The MHO characteristic curve is thus
polarized. The polarization determines the lower peak of the circle, that is, the lower intersection of the diam-
eter line on the periphery of the circle. The upper peak remains unchanged. It is defined by the parameter Zr
impedance reach. Immediately after a fault occurs, the short-circuit voltage is influenced by the compensa-
tion procedure. Hence the voltage buffered before the occurrence of the short circuit is used to perform the
polarization. This shifts the lower peak by the impedance corresponding to the buffer voltage
(seeFigure 6-120). If the buffered short-circuit voltage is too small, a quadrature voltage is used. Theoretically,
this is perpendicular to the actual short-circuit voltages for both the phase-to-ground loops and the phase-to-
phase loops. This is taken into consideration with a 90° rotation during the calculation. The quadrature voltage
also shifts the lower peak of the MHO characteristic curve.

572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-120 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve

Properties of the MHO Characteristic Curve


The cross-polarized or buffered voltage (without load transport) is equal to the corresponding generator
voltage E. After the short circuit, it does not change (see also Figure 6-121). The lower peak of the circle diam-
eter thus appears shifted in the impedance diagram by the polarization value k · ZS1 = k · E1/I1. The upper
peak remains defined by the setting value Zr impedance reach. For fault location F1 (Figure 6-121a), the
short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the reverse direction. All fault loca-
tions up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer) are unambiguously within the MHO
characteristic curve (Figure 6-121b). If the current reverses, the peak of the circle diameter changes suddenly
(Figure 6-121c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring point (current transformer). The
source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the current I2. The peak Zr remains unchanged. It is now the lower
limit of the diameter of the circle. During load transport on the line, the peak phasor can also rotate by the
load angle.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 573
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-121 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages

Selecting the Polarization


For short lines, the reach of the zone must be set as a small value. For small loop voltages, the phase angle
comparison between the differential voltage and the loop voltage is not secure. This can lead to incorrect
direction decisions (tripping or blocking despite backward faults). If a polarization voltage is used for the phase
angle comparison, these problems are avoided. The polarization voltage is proportionally composed of the
loop voltage buffered before the fault occurred and the present loop voltage. The following equation shows
the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:

[fofuspch-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]

An evaluation (factor kpre) for the prefault voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-
phase loops. Memory polarization is only carried out when the RMS value of the corresponding buffer voltage
for phase-to-ground loops is greater than 40 % of the rated voltage (Vrated). For phase-to-phase loops, the RMS
value of the buffer voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For an evolving fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage may be missing. In this case, the
buffer voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-pole short circuits and 2-pole
short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization. This
voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross polarization). The polarization voltage VP
is a mixture of the present voltage and the corresponding external fault voltage. The following equation
shows the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:

[fofukrzp-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]

If the buffer voltage is not available, then cross polarization can be used. An evaluation (factor kcross) for the
voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops.

574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

NOTE

i The following parameters are available as evaluation factors for polarization:


• Mem. polarization(ph-g)

• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)

• Cross polarization(ph-g)

• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters for the distance protection function.

6.6.11.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blocked if diff.prot.active

• Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if diff.prot.active = no


The Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter is visible only when the Line differential protection
function is available in the application.
You can use the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter to establish whether the distance-protection
zone is blocked or not as long as the Line differential protection function is active.
Parameter Value Description
no If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = no is set, the zone will run regard-
less of the line differential protection.
If the zone picks up, it will generate an operate indication after the time
delay has elapsed.
yes If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the Blocked if
diff.prot.active = yes parameter is set, the zone is blocked as long as
the differential protection function is operating.
If the line differential protection is blocked, then the zone is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.=no


The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. Wtith the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.

NOTE

i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes parameter only if blocking based on inrush-
current detection is absolutely necessary.

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only.
Parameter Value Description
ph-gnd and ph-ph The zone works with phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring
elements. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
ph-gnd only The zone works only with the phase-to-ground measuring element.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 575
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter Value Description


ph-ph only The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Recommended setting value (_:109) Directional mode = forward


You can use the Directional mode parameter to specify whether the zone works forward or reverse.
Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the zone is allowed to execute 1-
pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole tripping is allowed
on overhead lines. For practical use cases, only the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone should be
tripped 1-pole. For the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone, set the parameter 1-pole operate
allowed = yes. For all higher zones, set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = no.

Parameter: Zr impedance reach

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Zr impedance reach = 2.500 Ω


You can use the Zr impedance reach parameter to define the reach of the zone. Determine the setting
value for the specific application.
First, create a time-grading schedule for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths
with their primary reactances X in Ω/km into the time-grading schedule. The reactances X then define the
range of the distance-protection zones.

[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-122 Setting of the Range – Example for Device A

Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set the
time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating time.
For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems

• Variation in time delays


The usual grading times are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. Set the range of Zone Z2 to a value that extends to about 80 % of
the lower-level zone of the protection for the shortest subsequent line (see Figure 6-122).
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values in either primary or secondary
variables. If you wish to enter secondary variables during parameterization, convert the primary values from
the time-grading schedule into secondary values as follows:

[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]

576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.11.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z (MHO) #
_:1 Z (MHO) #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Z (MHO) #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:121 Z (MHO) #:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:27 Z (MHO) #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:11 Z (MHO) #:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:101 Z (MHO) #:Function mode • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
• ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:114 Z (MHO) #:Zone-spec. • no no
residu. comp. • yes
_:109 Z (MHO) #:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse
_:102 Z (MHO) #:Zr impedance 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
reach 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:110 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
(1-phase)
_:112 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
(multi-ph.)
_:105 Z (MHO) #:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:106 Z (MHO) #:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:107 Z (MHO) #:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:108 Z (MHO) #:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

6.6.11.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Z (MHO) #
_:81 Z (MHO) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Z (MHO) #:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:501 Z (MHO) #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z (MHO) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z (MHO) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z (MHO) #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z (MHO) #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:301 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:302 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:303 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:304 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay expired ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 577
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:57 Z (MHO) #:Operate ACT O

6.6.12 Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve

6.6.12.1 Description

Logic of a Zone

[locircle, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-123 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve

578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-124 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve (Continuation)

Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Placement of the calculated impedance into the zone
• Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone
If the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the circular characteristic curve of a distance zone and the
direction of the impedance phasor matches the directionality of the zone, the zone picks up. The loop informa-
tion is converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones
are processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.

Base Circle
The operate curve of the zone is a centered impedance circle around the origin of the R-X coordinate system.
The base circle of the circular characteristic curve is defined by the parameter Zr impedance reach.
Since the circle cannot distinguish between positive impedance (forward direction) and negative impedance
(reverse direction), direction-characteristic curves delimit the operating zones to the desired quadrant.
You can find more detailed information regarding the direction determination in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
Figure 6-125 shows an example of the shape of the impedance circles. The circle for the first zone as a
forward-directed zone is shaded. The third zone is shown as a reverse-directed zone. Zone Z5 is non-direc-
tional.
The impedance circle is defined by its radius and it forms the local curve of constant impedance.

[fo_7sa6_fkt-beschr-Grundkreis, 1, en_US]

The radius thus determines the reach of a distance-protection zone in the R-X diagram and is independent of
the short-circuit angle φSC.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 579
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dw_kreis-charakteristik, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-125 Example of Zones with Circular Characteristic Curve

Increased Resistance Reserve


Due to its centered symmetry, the circular characteristic curve includes only a limited resistance reserve for
faults near the zone reach limit. This means that – for overhead lines – arc resistances can only be taken into
consideration to a limited extent. For local faults (X ≈ 0), fault resistances R up to the magnitude of the set
impedance Z (parameter: (_:102) Zr impedance reach) can be detected. For relatively long cables, this
is sufficient if the arc resistance at the local sealing end is covered by the R-segment of the circle. In the cable
itself, no significant arc resistance is possible.
In order to achieve a sufficient resistance reserve for overhead lines, even in the vicinity of the zone reach
limit, an extension of the operate curve in the R-direction can be set. This also makes sense if an increased
resistance reserve is necessary for short cables. This is the case if the resistance of an arc fault at the local
sealing end of the cable is greater than the cable impedance at the zone reach limit of the first distance
protection zone.
The increase of the resistance reserve takes effect below an adjustable limit angle α (parameter: (_:113)
Angle for R-reserve), which should correspond approximately to the line angle. The following figure
shows an example for the 1st zone and α = 60°. The somewhat more darkly shaded section is the increased
resistance relative to the more lightly shaded impedance circle.

580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dw_bsp-erhoehte-resistanzreserve, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-126 Example of Increased Resistance Reserve

The limit angle α can be set separately for each zone. If a zone is set in the reverse direction, the section of the
increased resistance reserve is mirrored at the coordinate origin.
The resistance reserve is increased according to the following equation

[fo_resist_up_circlezone, 1, en_US]

with
ZBreak Balance-point impedance = actual limit of the zone
Zr Set impedance (parameter Zr impedance reach) = radius of the base circle
α Set limit angle (parameter Angle for R-reserve) = angle below which the increased resis-
tance reserve takes effect
φsc Actual short-circuit angle = angle of the calculated short-circuit impedance

At the set limit angle α, the zone reach limit is therefore still on the impedance circle: because φsc = α, sin(α –
α) = 0, and thus ZBreak = Zr. If φsc is greater than the set limit angle α, then the impedance circle takes effect by
definition and the increase of the resistance reserve makes no sense and is ineffective. For smaller angles up
to -45°, the resistance reserve is increased by the expression sin(α – φsc), thus by sin(α) at φsc = 0°.

Load Range
If the impedance circle is used as an implicit pickup method, there is a danger on long, heavily loaded lines
that the load impedance may extend into the operate curves of the distance protection. To avoid faulty
pickups of the distance protection in case of high power transmission, you can adjust a load cutout here. For
operate curves with a high R-range, the load cutout excludes faulty pickups due to overload. For other pickup
methods, this load cutout is unnecessary since the distance zones are only enabled after a pickup has taken
place. That is, in those cases, the pickup distinguishes between load operation and short circuit.
The load cutout cuts the section of the load impedance from the circular characteristic curves (Figure 6-127).
It also acts on the section of increased resistance reserve, as shown in the figure for the 1st zone. The shape of
the load cutout is determined by the load section Rload and the load-range angle φload. These values apply to all
zones.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 581
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dw_kreis-charakteristik-mit-lastk, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-127 Circular Characteristic Curve with Load Cutout – Example

Direction Determination
Since each zone can be set to forward, reverse, or non-directional, there are different (centrally
mirrored) direction-characteristic curves for forward and reverse. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. For such a zone, the entire trip region applies.

6.6.12.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blocked if diff.prot.active

• Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if diff.prot.active = no


The Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter is visible only when the Line differential protection
function is available in the application.
With the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter, you determine whether the distance protection
zone is blocked or not as long as the Line differential protection function is active.
Parameter Value Description
no If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = no, the zone will run regardless of
the line differential protection.
If the zone picks up, it will generate an operate indication after the time
delay has elapsed.
yes If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = yes, the zone is blocked as long as
the line differential protection function is operating.
If the line differential protection is blocked, then the zone is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.

NOTE

i If you have set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup and
operate time for this distance-protection zone is 1.5 power-system cycles even if no transformer inrush
current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really need
the blocking by Inrush-current detection.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether the zone may execute 1-pole tripping
or not. If the circuit breaker can do 1-phase switching, then 1-pole tripping is allowed on overhead lines. For
practical applications, only the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone shall trip in a 1-pole way. Set the
parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes for the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone. For all
higher zones, set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = no.

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Function mode= ph-gnd and ph-ph


With the Function mode parameter, you can determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only.
Parameter Value Description
ph-gnd and ph-ph The zone works with phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring
elements. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
ph-gnd only The zone works only with the phase-to-ground measuring element.
ph-ph only The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.

Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.

• Default setting (_:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no


You can use the Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter to determine whether the zone operates with its
own, specific residual compensation factors or not.
Parameter Value Description
no The zone works with the residual compensation factors set in the Line func-
tion group.
yes The zone works with the specific residual compensation factors of the zone.

NOTE

i The residual compensation factors set here will be valid and visible only if you have set the parameter
Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone. If you have set the parameterZone-spec. residu.
comp. = no, the residual compensation factors set for the device apply.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Recommended setting value (_:109) Directional mode= forward


You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the zone operates forward , reverse
or non-directional . Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 583
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: Incr. resist. tolerance

• Default setting (_:103) Incr. resist. tolerance = no


With the Incr. resist. tolerance parameter, you can set whether the zone is to have an increased
resistance reserve (= yes) or not (= no).

Parameter: Zr impedance reach

• Default setting (_:102) Zr impedance reach = 2.500 Ω


You can use the Zr impedance reach parameter to define the reach of the zone. Determine the setting
value for the specific application.
First, create a time-grading schedule for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths
with their primary reactances X in Ω/km into the time-grading schedule. The reactances X then define the
range of the distance-protection zones.

[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-128 Setting of the Range – Example for Device A

Set the reach of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip without delay.
Set the time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its oper-
ating time. For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems

• Variation in time delays


The usual grading times are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. Set the reach of Zone Z2 to a value that extends to about 80 % of
the lower-level zone of the protection for the shortest subsequent line (see Figure 6-128).
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values in either primary or secondary
variables. If you wish to enter secondary variables during parameterization, convert the primary values from
the time-grading schedule into secondary values as follows:

[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]

EXAMPLE:

Belted cable 10 kV with Al jacket 3 x 120 mm2 and the data:

s (length) 8.5 km
R1/s 0.15 Ω/km
X1/s 0.10 Ω/km
R0/s 0.83 Ω/km
X0/s 0.31 Ω/km
Current transformer 500 A/5 A

584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Voltage transformer 10 kV/0.1 kV

Use the data to calculate the line impedance as follows

[fo_zl_circlezone, 1, en_US]

If you set the first zone to 85 % of the line length, the following setting values result:
Primary:

Secondary:

Parameter: Angle for R-reserve

• Default setting (_:113) Angle for R-reserve = 60.0°


With the Angle for R-reserve parameter, you define the transition from the impedance circle to the
curve of the increased resistance reserve (see Figure 6-132).
The natural resistance reserve of the impedance circle consists in the horizontal distance between the line and
the periphery of the circle.

EXAMPLE:

Resistance reserve for overhead lines


For overhead lines, the presence of a fault resistance (arc) causes underreaching of the distance zones
because the resistance reserve at the breakdown point is 0, but then increases sharply in the direction of the
coordinate origin (see the following figure).

[dw_resistanzreserve-impedanzkreis-bei-freiltg, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-129 Resistance Reserve of the Impedance Circle for Overhead Lines

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 585
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Zr Set reach
ZL Line impedance
φline Line angle
Rarc Arc resistance
Zsc Short-circuit impedance
φsc Short-circuit angle

The resistance reserve Rarc in this case depends on the line angle and on the underreaching of the distance
zone that is to be tolerated. For a line angle of φline = 80° and 10 % underreaching, for example, the resistance
reserve is 30 % of the balance-point impedance.
The following table shows additional values for the resistance reserve at the impedance circle:
Line Angle φline Resistance Reserve Rarc for Tolerable Underreaching of
10 % 15 % 20 %
85° 36 % 45 % 53 %
80° 30 % 40 % 47 %
75° 26 % 35 % 42 %
70° 22 % 31 % 38 %
65° 19 % 27 % 35 %
60° 17 % 25 % 32 %
All percentage values relate to the balance-point impedance (= circle radius)

EXAMPLE:

Resistance reserve for cables


For cables, the resistance reserve in the vicinity of the breakdown point is not relevant, but rather the local
resistance reserve. Since an arc is practically impossible in the cable itself, the resistance reserve only has to
take account of the arc faults in the vicinity of the local sealing end (Figure 6-130).
The impedance circle here covers fault resistances up to the absolute value of the balance-point impedance
(Figure 6-131).

586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dw_kabelabg-mit-lichtbogenfehler-am-oertl-endverschluss, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-130 Outgoing Cable with Arc Fault at Local Sealing End

[dw_oertl-resistanzreserve-impedanzkreis-bei-kabel, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-131 Local Resistance Reserve of the Impedance Circle for Cables

EXAMPLE:

Increased resistance reserve


If you wish to increase the reserve for fault resistances, you must set the parameter Incr. resist.
tolerance = yes. In this case, the impedance circle is increased by an extension in the R direction
(Figure 6-132). The angle α in this case determines the transition from the impedance circle to the curve of
the increased resistance reserve

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 587
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dw_bsp-eine-erhoehte-resistanzreserve-mit-erweiterung, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-132 Example of Increased Resistance Reserve

This extension leads to an increased resistance reserve both in the vicinity of the breakdown limit and in the
vicinity of the installation location. The curvature of the extension curve in the X direction can determine an
overreaching. This overreaching can be tolerated within certain limits, however, because the breakdown limit
in any case normally has a 15 % reserve distance from the next station, that is from the end of the line.
There is no extension-induced overreaching for limit angles α (for example, parameter (_:113) Angle for
R-reserve for the 1st zone) of 45° or less. The greater the set value of α, the greater the possible over-
reaching. The following figure qualitatively shows the shape of the operate curve for different angles α.

[dw_quali-verlauf-ausloesekennl-erhoeht-resistanzreserve, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-133 Qualitative Plot of the Operate Curve for Increased Resistance Reserve

Since the overreaching and the resistance reserve both depend on the line angle φline and on the set limit
angle α, a few reference values are listed in the following sections.
The resistance reserve for short-circuits through an arc near of the breakdown point is primarily relevant for
overhead lines. Select the limit angle α (for example, parameter (_:113) Angle for R-reserve for the
1st zone) so that a high resistance reserve goes into effect without impermissibly high overreaching.
Note the following:
• Do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve to a value greater than the line angle.
• Do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve above 75°.

588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Otherwise, increased overreaching may occur in the event of arc faults. The following table shows the condi-
tions for some examples of the approximate overreaching caused by setting an increased resistance reserve.
α Possible Overreaching Values Due to Arc Faults for a Line Angle of
90° 85° 80° 75° 70° 65° 60° 55° 50°
75° 10 % 11 % 12 % 14 % -19 -19 -19 -19 -19
70° 3% 4% 5% 7% 10 % -19 -19 -19 -19
65° 0% 0% 0% 0% 3% 7% -19 -19 -19
60° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4% -19 -19
55° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 2% -19
50° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 1%

As with the base circle, the level of the resistance reserve Rarc depends on the line angle and on the tolerable
underreaching of the distance zone (also seeFigure 6-132). The following table shows the approximate resis-
tance reserve for tolerable underreaching of 15 %.
α Resistance Reserve Rarc for Tolerable Underreaching of 15 % at a Line Angle of
90° 85° 80° 75° 70° 65° 60° 55° 50°
75° 148 % 141 % 135 % 129 % -19 -19 -19 -19 -19
70° 137 % 131 % 125 % 120 % 116 % -19 -19 -19 -19
65° 125 % 118 % 112 % 108 % 105 % 102 % -19 -19 -19
60° 107 % 100 % 96 % 93 % 91 % 90 % 89 % -19 -19
55° -20 -20 59 % 86 % 71 % 73 % 75 % 77 % -19
50° -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 36 % 55 % 61 % 65 %

The resistance reserve in the near the breakdown point is not relevant for cables but rather the local resis-
tance reserve, that is for φsc = 0°. To avoid overreaching, do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve
to a value greater than the line angle here either. The resistance reserve is derived from the R axis segment (X
= 0) of the expanded operate curve. The following table shows some values for various setting values of the
parameter Angle for R-reserve:
α Resistance Reserve Rarc for X = 0
65° 190 %
60° 186 %
55° 181 %
50° 176 %
45° 170 %
40° 164 %
35° 157 %
30° 150 %
25° 142 %
20° 134 %
15° 125 %
10° 117 %
All percentage values relate to the balance-point impedance (= circle radius)

For the higher zones, a resistance reserve lower than that for the 1st zone makes sense (relative to the impe-
dance reach in each case). To do this, adjust the parameter Angle for R-reserve to a lower value.

19 The condition α ≤ φline is not fulfilled here.


20 Underreaching greater than 15 %

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 589
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Default setting (_:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


With the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter, you set the grading time of the zone for 1-pole short
circuits. Set the Operate delay (1-phase) for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Default setting (_:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


With the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter, you set the grading time of the zone for multi-phase
faults. Set the Operate delay (multi-ph.) for the specific application.

Parameter: Kr and Kx

• Default setting (_:105) Kr = 1.00

• Default setting (_:106) Kx = 1.00


With the Kr and Kx parameters, you set the residual compensation with scalar factors.

NOTE

i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.

An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High voltage over-
head-line application example in chapter 6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .

Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)

• Default setting K0 = 1.000

• Default setting Angle (K0) = 0.00°


You can use the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters to set the residual compensation with the complex residual
compensation factor.

NOTE

i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.

6.6.12.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Z (circle) #
_:1 Z (circle) #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Z (circle) #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:121 Z (circle) #:Blocked if • no no
diff.prot.active • yes
_:27 Z (circle) #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes

590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:11 Z (circle) #:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:101 Z (circle) #:Function • ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
mode • ph-gnd only ph
• ph-ph only
_:114 Z (circle) #:Zone-spec. • no no
residu. comp. • yes
_:109 Z (circle) #:Directional • non-directional forward
mode • forward
• reverse
_:103 Z (circle) #:Incr. resist. • no no
tolerance • yes
_:102 Z (circle) #:Zr impedance 1 A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
reach 5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:113 Z (circle) #:Angle for R- 10 ° to 90 ° 60 °
reserve
_:110 Z (circle) #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
delay (1-phase)
_:112 Z (circle) #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:105 Z (circle) #:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:106 Z (circle) #:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:107 Z (circle) #:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:108 Z (circle) #:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

6.6.12.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Z (circle) #
_:81 Z (circle) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Z (circle) #:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:501 Z (circle) #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z (circle) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z (circle) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z (circle) #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z (circle) #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Z (circle) #:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:301 Z (circle) #:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:302 Z (circle) #:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:303 Z (circle) #:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:304 Z (circle) #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z (circle) #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z (circle) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Z (circle) #:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 591
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.13 Release of Tripping through AREC Zone

6.6.13.1 Description
The AREC zone works together with the Automatic reclosing function. In order for automatic reclosing to be
successful, short circuits on the entire transmission route to all line ends must be switched off at the same
time and with as little delay as possible. In addition, with distance protection, the AREC zone may be func-
tioning as an overreaching distance zone, or example, Zone Z1B, prior to automatic reclosing. After automatic
reclosing, the AREC zone is typically no longer in effect. For the relevant AREC cycle, short circuits up to the
breakdown point of the AREC zone can be switched off quickly (see following figure). Before automatic
reclosing, limited non-selectivity in favor of fast simultaneous disconnection is acceptable. Automatic
reclosing will be performed in any case. The normal stages of the distance protection (Z1, Z2, etc.) are typi-
cally operated independently of the automatic reclosing function.

[dw_reichweite_ar_zone, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-134 Reach Control Before 1st Reclosure for Distance Protection

The automatic reclosing zone is available in the function library in DIGSI (in Line function group → Distance
protection → Zone types). If necessary you can insert the automatic reclosing zone into the Distance protec-
tion function. The automatic reclosing zone can be controlled from the internal automatic reclosing function
and also externally via the automatic reclosing function type Operation with external automatic reclosing
function.

592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Logic

[loarzo13-310112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-135 Logic of the Automatic Reclosing Zone

Mode of Operation
The automatic reclosing zone is an instance of controlled trip logic. You use the parameter Operate with
to select which distance zones will deliver the pickup information. If the selected distance zones have picked
up and a release from the automatic reclosing function is present, the automatic reclosing zone generates an
operate indication.
You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone. If the selected auto-
matic reclosing cycle is only parameterized for 1-pole tripping (indication (_:6601:308) AR only after
1p. trip ), the automatic reclosing zone only trips if this operate indication leads to a 1-pole trip command
in the trip logic of the Circuit breakers function group.
The, both the 3-pole coupling via pickup or trip command and the handling of 2-pole phase-to-phase short
circuits are considered.
If the selected automatic reclosing cycle is parameterized for 1-pole operation and the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed is set to no , the automatic reclosing zone indicates Inactive .
If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect, you can block the automatic
reclosing zone with the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active . The AREC zone is active only if the tele-
protection with distance protection is not in effect, for example, with a communication failure. If the telepro-
tection with distance protection is in effect, you achieve 100% selectivity through the teleprotection method
as distance protection only if the comprehensive AR zone is blocked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 593
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.13.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:105) Operate with = Z1B


You use the parameter Operate with to specify which distance zones will generate an operate indication
when pickup occurs while an automatic reclosing release is present. Typically, you use an overreaching
distance zone. This is called Z1B in the application templates.
The selection texts for the parameter Operate with are identical to the texts you assign during zone config-
uration in the Distance protection function.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


The Operate delay (1-phase) parameter is used to set the tripping delay of the automatic reclosing
zone for 1-phase short circuits. Set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) for the specific application.
If the distance zone selected with the parameter Operate with picks up and all release conditions are met,
the distance zone trips with the Operate delay (1-phase) set here.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the tripping delay for multi-phase short
circuits. Set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) for the specific application. If the distance zone
selected with the parameter Operate with picks up and all release conditions are met, the distance zone
trips with the Operate delay (multi-ph.) set here.

Parameter: Effected by AR cycle

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Effected by AR cycle = 1


You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone. If you use the auto-
matic reclosing function with the operation with external reclosing system or automatic reclosing with
adaptive dead time (ADT) function type, you must retain the default setting 1.
If the selected automatic reclosing cycle is only parameterized for 1-pole tripping (indication (_:6601:308)
AR only after 1p. trip), the automatic reclosing zone only trips if this operate indication leads to a 1-
pole trip command in the trip logic of the Circuit breakers function group. If you do not use the Automatic
reclosing function, you must delete the automatic reclosing zone in the Distance protection function in
order to ensure consistent parameterization in DIGSI.

Parameter: Blocked if 85-21 active

• Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if 85-21 active = yes


The Blocked if 85-21 active parameter is used to block the automatic reclosing zone with the telepro-
tection method in effect. If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect,
Siemens recommends blocking the automatic reclosing zone. To do this, set the parameter Blocked if
85-21 active = yes. If the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active = yes is set, the AR zone is active
only if the teleprotection with distance protection is no in effect (for example, in the case of a communication
failure).

594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.13.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


AR zone #
_:1 AR zone #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:11 AR zone #:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:102 AR zone #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
(1-phase)
_:103 AR zone #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
(multi-ph.)
_:101 AR zone #:Effected by AR 1 to 1 1
cycle
_:121 AR zone #:Blocked if 85-21 • no yes
active • yes
_:105 AR zone #:Operate with Setting options depend on
configuration

6.6.13.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
AR zone #
_:81 AR zone #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 AR zone #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 AR zone #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 AR zone #:Health ENS O
_:56 AR zone #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 AR zone #:Operate ACT O

6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection

Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the superordinate indications of the distance protec-
tion.

General Pickup
In impedance pickup, the signal General is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the working area of
a zone. In the pickup methods I>, V, and V/Phi, the signal General is generated when a pickup condition is
met.
The signal General is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions,
for example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.

Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and output as indications.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 595
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[loanrdis-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-136 Pickup Logic

Operate Logic
The operate signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
The 1-pole operate allowed parameter is used to specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines.
If the device is capable of 1-phase operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-
phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indi-
cation.

[loaus13p-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-137 1-Pole/3-Pole Trip Logic

6.6.15 Application Example: High-Voltage Overhead Line

6.6.15.1 Overview
This example describes the use of the distance protection for the protection of a 400 kV overhead-transmis-
sion line. For this example, the following is assumed:

596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

• For this example, the following is assumed: In the function group Line, the function Distance protection
for grounded systems (3-pole trip) is selected.

• The distance protection operates with the Impedance pickup with load cutout pickup method.

• The distance protection has 4 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve.


the following settings are explained in each step:
• Line parameters in the Line function group
• Global parameters of the Distance protection for grounded systems function (3-pole trip) (ANSI 21)

• Parameters of the pickup method Impedance pickup with load cutout

• Parameters of the zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve


Supplemental functions, such as teleprotection schemes, power swings, switching onto a fault, and direc-
tional ground-fault protection are not dealt with here.

NOTE

i If you wish to add new functions, take the following steps:


• The visibility of individual parameters depends on the configuration.
• First, define the functions for your special use case.

• Then set the parameters.

6.6.15.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data

Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with line 1 to be protected.

[dwplanab-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-138 Block Diagram

Time-Grading Chart
The following figure shows the time-grading chart for the application example:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 597
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwstaffp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-139 Time-Grading Chart

The distance protection works with four time-graded distance zones. The distance zones have the following
function:

Table 6-3 Setting Instructions for Distance Zones

Zone Number Function Range Delay


Zone 1 Selective zone, high speed, for 80 % line 1 0.00 s
line 1
Zone 1B Overreaching zone, high speed, 150 % line 1 0.00 s
for line 1
Zone 3 Forward-direction, delayed backup 20 % less than the Z1 range 1 grading time
stage, overreaching in line 3
Zone 4 Non-directional 120 % line 2 2 grading time

NOTE

i If you use an application template, the numbering of the stages of the distance protection is Z1, Z1B, Z3,
and Z4. If you load the function Distance protection from the DIGSI 5 library, the numbering of the stages
is Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4.

The quadrilateral characteristics of the zones are shown in the R-X plane in Figure 6-140. The setting instruc-
tions for the parameters of the zones can be found in Chapters 6.6.15.6 Setting Instructions for Zone Z1
through 6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 .

598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-140 R-X Diagram of the Quadrilateral Zones

Power-System Data
The following system data and line parameters apply to the application example:

Table 6-4 System Data and Line Settings

Settings Value
Power-system Phase-to-phase rated system voltage 400 kV
data Power frequency 50 Hz
Maximum positive-sequence system source impedance (10 + j 100) Ω
Maximum zero-sequence system source impedance (25 + j 200) Ω
Minimum positive-sequence system source impedance (1 + j 10) Ω
Minimum zero-sequence system source impedance (2.5 + j 20) Ω
Maximum ratio of remote infeed / local infeed(I remote/I local) 3
Transducer Voltage-transformer ratio (TV, LINE) 380 kV/100 V
Current-transformer ratio (TI) 1000 A/1 A
Current-transformer data 5PR20, 20 VA, Pi = 3 VA
Current-transformer connecting cable 2.5 mm2, 50 m
TI/TV for impedance conversion 0.2632

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 599
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Settings Value
Line data Line 1 length 80 km
Maximum load current 250% of full load
Minimum operating voltage 85% of rated voltage
Character convention for power flow Export = negative
Full-load apparent power (S) 600 MVA
Line 1 positive-sequence impedance per km Z1 (0.025 + j 0,21) Ω/km
Line 1 - Zero-sequence system impedance per km Z0 (0.13 + j 0.81) Ω/km
Line 2 - Total positive-sequence impedance (3.5 + j 39.5) Ω
Line 2 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (6.8 + j 148) Ω
Line 3 - Total positive-sequence impedance (1,5 + j 17,5) Ω
Line 3 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (7.5 + j 86.5) Ω
Maximum fault resistance, 250 Ω
Unfavorable power factor under full load 0.9
Tower data Average tower base resistance 15 Ω
Grounding conductor 60 mm2 steel
Distance: Phase-to-tower/phase-to-ground (mid-span) 3m
Distance: phase-to-phase 5m
Circuit Breaker Trip pickup time 60 ms
Operate time 70 ms

Based on the source and line impedance, the minimum fault-current levels can be calculated as follows:

[fofiklg1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

If the fault resistance for 3-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal Sum of synchronous source impedance and line impedance (since only the magnitude of the current
= should be calculated, only the magnitude of the impedance is relevant)

For a 3-pole short circuit at the end of the line, Ztotal is calculated as follows:

[fofztt3p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Thus for 3-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:

[fofi3pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal 1/3 (sum of the positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence source as well as line impe-
= dance)

Ztotal is calculated as follows:

600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[fofztt1p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Thus for single-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:

[fofi1pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is taken into consideration, Ztotal is calculated as follows:

[fofi1prf-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

For 1-phase short circuits with high fault resistance, the minimum fault current is:

[fofi1pir-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line


The following setting notes apply for the example application for the protection of a 400-kV overhead-trans-
mission line.
The basis for calculation of the settings is the system data and line settings from Table 6-4. The line settings
are configured in the Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.

Parameter: Rated current

• Default setting (_:9001:101) Rated current = 866 A


With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current for the line to be protected. The
rated apparent power of the line is 600 MVA. The rated current on the line is thus calculated as follows:

[fofinelg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Rated voltage

• Default setting (_:9001:102) Rated voltage = 400 kV


With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage for the line to be protected. In
the example application, this value is 400 kV.

Parameter: Neutral point

• Default setting (_:9001:149) Neutral point = grounded

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 601
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

The Neutral point parameter allows you to set the type of the neutral point grounding. In the example
application, the system neutral point is grounded.

Parameter: X per length unit

• Setting value(_:9001:113) X per length unit = 0.0553 Ω/km (secondary)


The parameter X per length unit is used to configure the characteristic reactance per unit length of the
line to be protected (in this example in Ω/km). Entry of the X quantity per unit length is needed for the Fault
location function to calculate the distance to the fault. In Table 6-4 the X quantity per unit length for Line 1 is
primarily specified as 0.21 Ω/km. Set the parameter X per length unit to this value. If you are setting
secondary values, calculate the secondary setting value as follows:

[fofxstek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Line length

• Default setting (_:9001:114) Line length = 80 km


With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected (Line 1).

Parameter: Line angle

• Default setting (_:9001:108) Line angle = 83.2°


Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the data for the positive-sequence system
line impedance of the line to be protected as follows:

[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Residual Compensation with Kr and Kx

• Default setting (_:9001:104) Kr = 1,40

• Default setting (_:9001:105) Kx = 0.95


The setting value for Kr is calculated as follows from the line data:

[fof1rerl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The setting value for Kx is calculated as follows from the line data:

[fofdxexl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

NOTE

i For other applications, you can overwrite the residual compensation factors in distance zones set here with
local settings.

602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

6.6.15.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems – General Settings
Set the following settings under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems. The
setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.

Parameter: Zone timer start

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:110) Zone timer start = on dist. pickup


You can use the Zone timer start parameter to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
Parameter Value Description
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. When
the fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays
continue to run together.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent
protection functions, select this setting.

Parameter: Dist. characteristic angle

• Default setting (_:2311:107) Dist. characteristic angle = 83.2°


The Dist. characteristic angle parameter allows you to set the inclination angle of the distance
protection characteristic curve. The inclination angle set here for the distance protection characteristic curve
applies to all zones in the function.
Set the angle of the distance protection characteristic, for example, identical to the line angle. This makes the
resistance coverage for all faults along the line identical (see Figure 6-141).

[dwlwpoly-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-141 Polygon and Line Angle

Parameter: Ground-fault detection

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:105) Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0


You can use the Ground-fault detection parameter to determine the criteria used for ground-fault
detection.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 603
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter Value Description


3I0 or V0 If either the zero-sequence current criterion (3I0>) or the zero-sequence
voltage criterion (V0>) leads to ground-fault detection, select this setting.
For grounded systems, the OR operation of the criteria 3I0> and V0> is a
reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one
another. For a weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-
sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the conditions are reversed.
Siemens recommends this setting for grounded systems.
3I0 and V0 If you wish to use both criteria for ground-fault detection (logical AND
linking of zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage criteria), select
this setting.
3I0 only If only the zero-sequence current criterion is to be used for ground-fault
detection, select this setting.

In the example application, the system is grounded. For grounded systems, the combination of the criteria
3I0> and V0> is a very reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one another. For a
weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the
conditions are reversed. Set the parameter Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:103) 3I0> threshold value = 0.10 A


You can use the 3I0> threshold value parameter to define the zero-sequence current limit for ground-
fault detection.
The parameter 3I0> threshold value must be set to a value less than the lowest expected ground
current in ground faults on the protected feeder. For the distance protection to trigger for external remote
faults as backup protection, set the 3I0> threshold value parameter to a more sensitive value than that
necessary for internal faults. Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0.10 A.

Parameter: 3I0 pickup stabilization

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) 3I0 pickup stabilization = 0.10


You can use the 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter to set the inclination of the 3I0> characteristic
curve for ground-fault detection.
Power-system unbalance (for example, untwisted lines) and current-transformer errors can cause a zero-
sequence current flow at the protection device in the case of higher phase currents, even if there is no ground
fault. The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid ground activation. If extreme power-
system unbalance and extraordinarily large current-transformer errors are not expected, Siemens recommends
keeping the default value of 0.10.

Parameter:V0> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) V0> threshold value = 1.66 V


The V0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence voltage limit for ground-fault
detection.
For ground faults in a grounded system, there is a zero-sequence voltage. The zero-sequence voltage drops as
the distance between the fault location and the measuring point increases. Siemens recommends keeping the
default setting of 1.66 V. If power-system unbalances can cause higher zero-sequence voltages to occur
during operation, increase the default setting.
The zero-sequence voltage results from the following formula:

[fou0bere-011010-01.tif, 1, en_US]

604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: Loop select. with ph-ph-g

• Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g=block leading phase


If a fault resistance (arc voltage) is present, this causes an additional voltage drop for the measured loop impe-
dance in the fault loop. With 2-phase-to-ground faults, this influence is particularly strong since the current in
the fault resistance is coming from 3 different short-circuit loops. Examinations have shown the following
distribution of measured loop impedances for 2-phase-to-ground faults:

[dwzverte-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-142 Impedance Distribution for 2-Phase Ground Faults with Fault Resistance

The influence of the load (remote infeed and load angle) can increase or reduce the rotation of the measured
fault resistances (see Figure 6-142). The leading phase-to-ground loop tends to produce an overreach. For this
reason, set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase for the application
example. In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the
internal fault loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for
this application. To avoid overreach, you must reduce the radius and/or modify the zone inclination (alpha
angle).

6.6.15.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method


Setting notes for the Pickup method In the example application, the distance protection works with the Impe-
dance pickup with load cutout starting process. Setting of the parameters of the pickup method is explained
in the following section.

Parameter: Min. phase-current thresh

• Recommended setting value (_:3661:101) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.10 A


Set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter to a very sensitive value (10 % of Irated). If the minimum
phase current is exceeded, the distance protection calculates the impedance. The sensitive setting allows you
to ensure the backup function of the distance protection in case of remote faults in other feeders. If the
minimum phase current in some short circuits – depending on system conditions – is not exceeded, you will
have to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens recommends using the default setting Min.
phase-current thresh = 0.10 A

Load Cutout
You can configure the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase loops and phase-to-ground loops with the
following parameters:
• Default setting (_:3661:102) Use ph-g load cutout = no
• Default setting (_:3661:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 23.8 Ω

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 605
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

• Default setting (_:3661:104) Angle load cutout (ph-g) = 26°

• Default setting (_:3661:105) Use ph-ph load cutout = no

• Default setting (_:3661:106) R load cutout (ph-ph) = 23.8 Ω

• Default setting (_:3661:107) Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = 26°


In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance protection
zone. The zone may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific applica-
tion, calculate the smallest load impedance and the greatest load impedance angle under heavy load (see
Figure 6-143).

[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-143 Load Cutout

The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops and phase-to-phase loops. Since there is no
restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of a 1-pole tripping
of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load current. For these
cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic. The smallest load impedance is calculated as
follows:

[formnalg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The minimum operating voltage is 85 % of the rated voltage and the maximum load current is 250 % of the
full-load apparent power (see Table 6-4).

[foumnmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The primary minimum load impedance (parameter R load cutout (ph-ph)) can thus be calculated as
follows:

[formnpri-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The secondary setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows:

606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[formnsek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In the following step, you will determine the opening angle of the load cutout for phase-to-phase loops. The
largest angle the load impedance can assume results from the largest angle between the operating voltage
and load current. Since the load current ideally has the same phase as the voltage, the difference is given by
the power factor cos φ. The largest angle of the load impedance results from the least favorable, smallest
power factor. For this calculation, the power factor for full-load conditions must be used, since under light-
load conditions the reactive power flow can dominate. The load impedance under these conditions is not close
to the set impedance range. According to Table 6-4, the least favorable power factor under full-load condi-
tions is 0.9. The maximum load angle can thus be calculated as follows:

[fophlmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-ph) is 26°.
In this example, there is no distinction drawn between the maximum loads for phase-to-phase activation and
phase-to-ground activation. Under this assumption, you can set the load cutout parameters for phase-to-
ground loops to the same values. The setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-g) is 23.8 Ω,
the setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-g) is 26°.

6.6.15.6 Setting Instructions for Zone Z1

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value: (_:3571:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
The possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only, and ph-ph only. In the example appli-
cation, for Zone Z1, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting: (_:3571:109) Directional mode = forward


With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse or
non-directional. In the example application, for Zone Z1, you should set Directional mode =
forward.

Parameter: X reach

• Recommended setting value (_:3571:102) X reach = 3.537 Ω


The X reach is calculated from the graded reach that this zone must provide. The reach of Zone 1 is shown
as 80 % of phase A in Table 6-3. Thus:
X reach = 0.8 · XA
X reach = 0,8 · 80· 0.21 = 13,44 Ω (primary)
With the conversion factor from Table 6-4, the secondary setting value of the X reach parameter can be
calculated as follows:
X reach = 13.44 · 0.2632 = 3.537 Ω (secondary)

Parameter: R (ph-ph)

• Recommended setting value ) R (ph-ph) = 2.83 Ω


You use the R (ph-ph) parameter to set the resistance reach (R) for phase-to-phase loops. The Dist.
characteristic angle parameter inclines the quadrilateral R reach in such a way that it runs parallel to

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 607
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

the line impedance (see Figure 6-141). The resistance settings for the individual zones must therefore only
cover the fault resistance at the fault location. For the setting of Zone 1, arc faults are taken into considera-
tion. For this reason, the arc resistance must be calculated with the following equation:

[foz1rlbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The arc voltage (Varc) is calculated using the following rule of thumb:

[foz1ulbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The rule of thumb is a very conservative estimate. The estimated value Rarc is larger than the actual value. The
arc is pulled into a curve due to thermal and magnetic forces. Thus the length of the arc (Iarc) is greater than
the distance between the phases (phase-to-phase). As an estimate, we assume that larc is twice the distance
between the phases. When calculating the setting value, first calculate the largest value of Rarc. To do so, you
must first calculate Rarc with the smallest value of the fault current (calculated in section 6.6.15.2 Block
Diagram and Power-System Data ):

[foz1rbwr-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

By adding a safety reserve of 20 %, the secondary minimum set value can be calculated as follows: The divi-
sion by 2 is necessary because Rarc appears in the loop measurement, while the set value corresponds to the
conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.

[foz1rsst-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired coverage of arc resis-
tances. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased – depending on
the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line on the high-voltage
or very high-voltage range, the following rule of thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-ph) for the
Zone 1:
0,8 · X reach < R (ph-ph) < 2,5 · X reach
In this example, the lower limit applies. The secondary setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) can be
calculated as follows:
R(ph-ph) = 0.8 ⋅ 3.537 = 2.830 Ω
Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in Zone 1 to 2.830 Ω.

Parameter: R (ph-g)

• Recommended setting value (_:3571:103) R (ph-g) = 3.537 Ω


The R radius for ground faults is calculated in a manner similar to that used for R (ph-ph) setting for phase-
to-phase faults. For ground faults, not only the arc voltage must be taken into consideration, but also the
tower-grounding resistance. The diagram in Figure 6-144 shows that the resulting tower-grounding resistance
due to the parallel connection of multiple tower-grounding resistances is less than 1.5 Ω.

608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwmaster-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-144 Effective Tower-Grounding Resistance

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 609
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-145 Combination of Arc Voltage and Tower-Grounding Resistance

Remote infeed (Iremote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-145). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio Iremote/Ilocal. In Table 6-4, this value is specified as
3. The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the faulty loop is thus:

[foz1rtfx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground (see
Table 6-4):
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 3 m = 15 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc using
the smallest fault current (calculated in section 6.6.15.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ):

[foz1rbmx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
reserve of 20 %, the secondary setting value R (ph-g) can be calculated as follows: The division by the
factor (1 + kr) is necessary because Rarc and RTF appear in the loop measurement, while the setting value corre-
sponds to the conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.

[foz1rsku-250309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired resistance coverage.
To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased – depending on the X
reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line, the following rule of
thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-g) for the Zone 1:

[foz1rez1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

NOTE

i The lower limit is the same as for phase-to-phase faults. This ensures fast tripping. The upper limit corre-
sponds to the loop range. This prevents overreach.

In this example, the lower limit applies. The setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) can be calculated for
Zone 1 as follows:
R (ph-g) = 0.8 · 3.537 = 2.83 Ω

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended set value (_:3571:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


Zone Z1 must trip as quickly as possible. Set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended set value (_:3571:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


Zone Z1 must trip as quickly as possible. Set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s.

Parameter: Zone-inclination angle

• Recommended setting value (_:3571:113) Zone-inclination angle = 15°


The Zone-inclination angle parameter is used to set the angle by which the upper limit of the polygon
is inclined in the first quadrant.
Under no circumstances may Zone 1 respond in the event of external faults, since this represents a loss of
selectivity. The influence of the remote infeed and the fault resistance must therefore be taken into considera-
tion. From the voltage and current phasors in Figure 6-146, the influence of the transmission angle (σ) on the
fault resistance measured can be seen. The transmission angle (σ) is the angle between voltages VA and VB.
The transmission angle turns the phasor Iremote/Ilocal· RF downwards in the impedance level. The risk that an
external fault pushes forward in Zone 1 is shown. To prevent this, the limit of the X setting for Zone 1 is
inclined downwards by the zone inclination.

[dwalphae-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-146 Transmission Angle for the Alpha-Angle Setting (Parameter: Zone Inclination)

To determine the setting value for the zone inclination, the least favorable practical case is assumed. First,
calculate the maximum transmission angle (computer simulation). For the example application, the maximum
transmission angle is 35° (see Table 6-4). The R/X ratio of Zone 1 is 0.8 (2.830/3.537 = 0.8). From
Figure 6-147, use these values to read off the alpha angle. For the example application, the point is valid in
the middle between 30° and 40°. This gives an alpha angle of 15°. Set the parameter to Zone-inclination
angle = 15°.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 611
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

[dwklalph-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-147 Curves to Select the Zone Inclination

Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.

• Recommended setting value (_:3571:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no


The Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter is used to specify whether you wish to work with the local
residual compensation factors of the zone or not.
In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone Z1, the
residual compensation factors set in the Line function group now apply.

6.6.15.7 Setting Notes for Zone Z1B

Zone Z1B
In the application example, Zone Z1B operates as an overreaching zone for phase A. Use Zone Z1B for cooper-
ation with the Automatic reclosing (AREC) and/or Teleprotection scheme functions. These functions process
the output signals (pickup indications) of Zone Z1B. In the example application, Zone Z1B does not trip inde-
pendently, but rather only via the AREC and Teleprotection scheme functions. The independent tripping of
Zone Z1B is suppressed. To do this, set the time delays of Zone Z1B to ∞.

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only. In the example application,
for Zone Z1B, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph .

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:3572:109) Directional mode=forward


You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the zone operates forward, reverse,
or non-directional. In the example application, for Zone Z1B, you should set Directional mode =
forward.

Parameter: X reach

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:102) X reach = 6.633 Ω

612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Zone Z1B must be set to overreach on Line 1. The minimum setting is 120 % of the line reactance. If the line is
not extremely long, a setting of 150 % of more is used in practice. For this application, a line of medium
length, a range of 150 % is selected:
X reach = 1.5 · XLine1
X reach = 1.5 · 80· 0.21 = 25.2 Ω (primary)
The secondary setting value of the X reach of Zone Z1B can be calculated as follows:
X reach = 25.2 Ω · 0.2632 = 6.633 Ω

Parameter: R (ph-ph)

• Recommended setting value R (ph-ph) = 6.633 Ω


Just as for the settings for Zone 1, this setting must cover all internal arc faults. The minimum setting value is
thus equal to the setting value R (ph-ph) = 2.83 Ω. Zone 1 is set to the lower range (80 % of phase A). Z1B
works as an overreaching zone. Thus set an additional range in comparison with Z1. The size of the additional
range R depends largely on the ratio of the setting for the R range to the X range. For Zone Z1B, the following
limit is recommended:
X reach < R (ph-ph) < 4 · X reach
The X reach setting value of Zone Z1B is 6.633 Ω. The minimum setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph)
is thus 6.633 Ω. Set the R (ph-ph) parameter of the Zone Z1B to 6.633 Ω.

Parameter: R (ph-g)

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:103) R (ph-g) = 5.389 Ω


Set the parameter R (ph-g) similarly to the settings for Zone 1 so that all internal arc faults are covered. The
minimum setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) in Zone Z1B is thus 2.83 Ω. Since Z1B operates as an
overreaching zone, use the following rule of thumb to set an additional range:

[foz1brgl-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In the example application, the lower limit applies. The setting value of the R (ph-g) of Zone Z1B can be
calculated as follows:

[foz1brsk-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = ∞


In the example application, Zone Z1B should not trip on its own. Set the parameter to Operate delay (1-
phase) = ∞.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = ∞


In the example application, Zone Z1B should not trip on its own. Set the parameter to Operate delay
(multi-ph.) = ∞.

Parameter: Zone-inclination angle

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:113) Zone-inclination angle = 0°


The polygon of Zone Z1B is not inclined. Set the parameter Zone-inclination angle = 0°.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 613
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.

• Recommended setting value (_:3572:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no


You can use the Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter to specify whether you wish to work with the
local residual compensation factors of the zone or not.
In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone Z1B, the
residual compensation factors set in the Line function group apply.

6.6.15.8 Setting Instructions for Zone Z3

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
The possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only, and ph-ph only. In the application
example, for zone Z3, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:3573:109) Directional mode = forward


With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse, or
non-directional. In the application example, zone 3 is used as the first time-graded overreaching zone.
For zone Z3, set the Directional mode = forward.

Parameter: X reach

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:102) X reach = 6.485 Ω


According to the grading requirements in Table 6-3, the setting value for the X reach should be calculated as
follows:

[foz2xrch-310309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In zone Z3, set the parameter X reach = 6.485 Ω.

Parameter: R (ph-ph)

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:104) R (ph-ph) = 4.15 Ω


The parameter R (ph-ph) of Zone 3 must be set such that it covers all arc faults up to the set range (see
Table 6-3). In the example application, Zone Z3 works as a time-graded overreaching zone. The basis for calcu-
lation of the setting value is the resistance coverage for internal arc faults in Zone 1 (R (ph-ph)) and the X
reach of Zone Z3. Calculate the setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) of Zone Z3 using the following
formula:

[fo1_rll_z3, 1, en_US]

[fo2_rll_z3, 1, en_US]

614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Parameter: R (ph-g)

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:103) R (ph-g) = 4.98 Ω


The minimum range for this setting is based on the setting the value R (ph-g) of zone Z1 and the set value
of the X reach of zone 3. The set value R (ph-g) of zone Z1 covers the entire internal fault resistance, the
set value X reach of zone Z3 specifies the extent of overreach. Alternatively, you can calculate the set value
R (ph-g) for zone Z3 according to this formula:

[fo1_rle_z3, 1, en_US]

[fo2_rle_z3, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.25 s


Set the time delay for Zone Z3 according to the time-grading chart (see Figure 6-139 and Table 6-3). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.25 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.25 s


Set the time delay for Zone Z3 according to the time-grading chart (see Figure 6-139 and Table 6-3). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.25 s.

Parameter: Zone-inclination angle

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:113) Zone-inclination angle = 0°


The polygon of Zone 3 is not inclined. Set the parameter Zone-inclination angle = 0°.

Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.

• Recommended setting value (_:3573:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no


The Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter is used to specify whether you wish to work with the local
residual compensation factors of the zone or not.
In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone 3, the residual
compensation factors set in the Line function group apply.

6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4


Zone Z4 is used in the application example as a non-directional, final backup zone.

Parameter: Function mode

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph


You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
The possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only, and ph-ph only. In the application
example, for zone Z4, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph .

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:3574:109) Directional mode = non-directional

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 615
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse or
non-directional. In the application example, Z4 is used as a non-directional backup stage. For zone 4, set
the parameter Directional mode = non-directional.

Parameter: X reach

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:102) X reach = 17.782 Ω


Set the parameter X reach for zone Z4 according to the grading requirement (see Table 6-3). The set value is
calculated as follows:

[foz3xrch-130509-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In Zone Z4, set the parameter X reach = 17.782 Ω.

Parameter: R (ph-ph)

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:104) R (ph-ph) = 26.32 Ω


The resistance reserve settings for the backup protection with distance zones are defined by a lower and an
upper limit. The lower limit is the minimum fault resistance (arc resistance) that must be covered. The upper
limit is based on the corresponding setting for the X reach. Note that for ohmic contact resistances – not pure
arc faults – the other infeeds into the fault cause significant underreach. Since no detailed values are avail-
able, you can calculate the required arc reserve under the following assumptions: To calculate the arc voltage,
use twice the line distance (5 m) as the arc length, and 50 % of the rated current, or 500 A (primary), for the
fault current.

[foz3rlmn-020409-01.tif, 1, en_US]

With these assumptions, the calculated setting value R (ph-ph)min ensures fault detection in Zone Z4. The
upper limit is determined by restrictions in reach balance. The following apply:
R (ph-ph) < 6· X reach
The X reach of zone Z4 is 17.782 Ω (see section 6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 Parameter: X range). The
upper limit is thus 106.69 Ω. This extends well into the load range (see Parameter R load sector (L-E) in section
6.6.15.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ). Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in zone Z4 to twice the minimum
value. This is a safe compromise.
R (ph-ph) = R (ph-ph)min· 2
R (ph-ph) = 13.16 · 2 = 26.32 Ω
In Zone Z4, set the parameter R (ph-ph) = 26.32 Ω.

Parameter: R (ph-g)

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:103) R (ph-g) = 26.32 Ω


The upper and lower limits are defined by the minimum range and balance – similarly to the settings of the
parameter R (ph-g). In the application example, the parameters R (ph-ph) and R (ph-g) of zone Z4 are
set to the same value, thus to 26.32 Ω.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.75 s

616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method

Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-139 and Table 6-3). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.75 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.75 s


Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-139 and Table 6-3). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.75 s.

Parameter: Zone-inclination angle

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:113) Zone-inclination angle = 0°


The polygon of Zone Z4 is not inclined. Set the parameter Zone-inclination angle = 0°.

Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.

• Recommended setting value (_:3574:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no


The Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter is used to specify whether you wish to work with the local
residual compensation factors of the zone or not.
In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone Z4, the
residual-compensation factors set in the Line function group apply.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 617
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

6.7 Impedance Protection

6.7.1 Overview of Functions

The Impedance protection function (ANSI 21):


• Protects transformers as backup protection for transformer differential protection
• Is used as a backup protection for the transformer and the generator in the block units of power stations

• Functions as backup protection in the event of energy recovery to faults in the upstream electrical power
system beyond a transformer

6.7.2 Structure of the Function

The Impedance protection function is used in protection function groups which provide current and voltage
measurement values.
The Impedance protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB) General and
one zone. A maximum of 4 zones can be operated simultaneously in the function. The zones are structured
identically.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all zones.

[dw_strimpedanceprot, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-148 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.7.3 Description

Impedance Measurement via the Transformer


Pay attention to the following features when measuring impedance in or via transformers:
• Impedance is transferred to the side to be measured using the quadrant of the transformer ratio.
• For star-delta transformers, an opposite phase rotation occurs in the positive-sequence and negative-
sequence system, depending on the vector group. This changes the fault situation on the other side. A
2‑phase short circuit on the star side appears as a 3-phase short circuit with different current distribution
on the delta side (see Figure 6-149).
Since star-delta transformers do not permit the zero-sequence system to be transferred, a 1-phase
ground fault on the star side appears as a 2-phase short circuit on the delta side (see Figure 6-150).

• In the case of auto transformers and transformers grounded on both sides in the star-star connection,
measurement through the transformer is possible. Here, distance protection for lines can be used
without any problems.

618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[dw_ratio-2pol-ifault, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-149 Transformation of a 2-Phase Short-Circuit Current

[dw_ratio-1pol-fault, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-150 Transformation of a 1-Phase Short-Circuit Current

The changed measurand mapping also leads to a different impedance mapping. Figure 6-151 and
Figure 6-152 show, for example, for a 2-phase or 1-phase short circuit on the star side, the resulting phasors
on the delta side. To simplify it, the transformer ratio was assumed to be 1.

[dw_imp-2pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-151 Impedance Measurement with a 2-Phase Short Circuit

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 619
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[dw_imp-1pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-152 Impedance Measurement with a 1-Phase Short Circuit

With a 2-phase short circuit, the phase-to-ground impedance of the phase corresponds to the double phase
current of the actual fault impedance via the transformer. The impedance is correctly measured. All other
impedances are measured as considerably larger. Subtracting the currents results in an infinite impedance
measured value for the C-A loop.
A 1-phase ground fault results in the smallest impedance value based on the calculation with phase-to-phase
voltages (in the example, C-A). Because the zero-sequence system cannot be transferred via a star-delta trans-
former, an impedance is measured that is too large by the amount of the zero-sequence impedances (trans-
former, line). The actual fault location is seen as being farther away.
With a 3-phase short circuit, the impedance measurement for all measuring loops is correct.
The following table summarizes the results of the impedance measurement for a star-delta transformer:

Table 6-5 Fault Mapping and Measuring Errors during the Impedance Measurement of a Star-Delta
Transformer

Power-System Incident Fault Mapping Correct Impedance Loop Measuring Error


on the Star Side on the Delta Side
3-phase short circuit 3-phase short circuit Phase-to-ground and Correct measurement
phase-to-phase loop
2-phase short circuit 3-phase short circuit, Phase-to-ground loop Correct measurement
different fault-current with largest fault current
distribution
1-phase ground fault 2-phase short circuit Phase-to-phase loop, but Impedance measured too
with measuring error large by the amount of
the zero-sequence impe-
dance (0.5 Z0)

620 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

Logic of the Function

[lo_dis-impedance-protection, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-153 Logic Diagram for Impedance Protection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 621
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[lo_block_imp, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-154 Logic Diagram for Impedance Protection (Continued)

Loop Selection
The function Impedance protection can be used in electrical power systems and plants with different neutral
points. With the Loop selection parameter, you control which parameters influence the loop release.
In power systems with effective neutral point grounding – solidly or low-impedance grounded neutral point –
all impedance loops (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops) can work parallel to each other. When all
loops are working in parallel, the loop release is controlled by the parameter Min. phase-current
thresh (see following figure).

[lo_loopselect1 impprot, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-155 Effective Parameter for Loop Release for All Loops

In power systems with a non-effective neutral point grounding – isolated, grounded, or high-impedance
grounded neutral point – the control for the loop selection is necessary to avoid an overfunction, for example,
a ground fault. The loop selection is controlled by the Current-dependent parameter. The following figure
shows which parameter controls the loop selection.

622 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[lo_loopselect2 impprot, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-156 Effective Parameter in Current-Dependent Loop Release

In case of a ground fault, the voltage collapsed – ideally to 0 – and the phase-to-ground loop measures either
a small impedance or 0 Ω. The phase-selective overcurrent detection releases the loops (parameter Overcur-
rent threshold). The undervoltage seal-in (parameter Undervoltage seal in) keeps the overcurrent
erect. The undervoltage seal-in is necessary for use in power plants when an exciting transformer is connected
to the generator bus. During a near short circuit, the excitation voltage collapses and results in a decreased
synchronous generated voltage. Thereby the fault current sinks below the rated current and thereby the
current threshold value (parameter Overcurrent threshold). The parameter V-seal-in threshold
monitors the positive-sequence voltage. The undervoltage seal-in drops out when the threshold value V-
seal-in threshold is topped or the undervoltage seal-in time (parameter Duration of V-seal-in
time) runs out.

The following rules apply for loop selection:


• In the event of 1-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-ground loop is used.
• In the event of 2-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-phase loop with the applicable phase-to-phase
voltage is used for the impedance calculation.

• In the event of a 3-phase pickup, the loop selection is dependent on the ratio of the current amplitudes of
the phases to one another.
The following table shows the measuring-loop selection:
Pickup Measuring Loops
1-phase A Phase-to-ground A-gnd
B B-gnd
C C-gnd
2-phase A, B Phase-to-phase A-B
B, C B-C
C, A C-A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 623
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

Pickup Measuring Loops


3-phase with unequal phase A, 2⋅ B, C When the current in 1 phase is B-gnd
current amplitudes B, 2⋅ C, A double the size, the phase-to- C-gnd
C, 2⋅ A, B ground loops are measured. A-gnd
(A, B) ≈ 2 ⋅ C When the current in 2 phases is A-B
(B, C) ≈ 2 ⋅ A double the size, the phase-to-phase B-C
(C, A) ≈ 2 ⋅ B loops are measured. C-A
3-phase with equal ampli- A, B, C When all voltages are almost equal, A-B
tudes the phase-to-phase loops are meas- B-C
ured. C-A
All 3 loops are released.

Impedance Measurement
From the sampled values of the phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages, the fundamental phasors
are determined per period using an FIR filter (FIR = Finite Impulse Response). The impedances are calculated
from the fundamental phasors. By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance is measured
using another frequency range. This is advantageous for island networks or block-unit power plants, for
example, for start-up processes.
There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are calculated using the current
cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the current fault condition.
The impedance for phase-to-phase loops is calculated as follows:

[fo_schleife_ZLL, 2, en_US]

The impedance of phase-to-ground loops is calculated as follows:

[fo_schleife_ZLE, 2, en_US]

Mode of Operation
If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current thresh. All released impedance loops are
calculated.
To release phase-to-ground loops, it is sufficient if the corresponding phase current exceeds the Min.
phase-current thresh. For phase-to-phase loops, both phase currents and the loop current must exceed
the Min. phase-current thresh.
There is no special ground-fault detection, such as distance protection for lines.
If the released impedance loop(s) lie in one zone, the Impedance protection function generates a pickup indi-
cation with loop information. At the same time, a pickup indication in the picked up zone occurs with specifi-
cation of the relevant phase and direction. The direction is subsequently determined for all picked up impe-
dance loops and the associated time delay started. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of
the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the function.

Direction Determination
The direction is determined either using a stored prefault voltage or negative-sequence system variables. If the
measured negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current exceed 10 % of the rated values of
the device, the variables of the negative-sequence system are used exclusively. For the direction decision, the
angle between the negative-sequence current I2 and the negative-sequence voltage V2 is evaluated.
Figure 6-157 shows the defined directional areas on impedance level.

624 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

For 3-phase symmetrical short circuits, there is no negative-sequence system. In this case, the memory voltage
is used. If the memory voltage is not available either, for example when switching onto a fault, all zones –
regardless of their parameterized direction – pick up and generate an operate indication after the time delay
has expired.
Optionally, you can link the Impedance protection function with the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto
fault function (see chapter 6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes). This enables the selected Impedance-
protection zones to trip without delay.

[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-157 Direction-Characteristic Curve in the R-X Diagram

Inrush-Current Detection
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the zones against trip-
ping due to transformer inrush currents.

Impedance Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (impedance polygon) in the zone is a rectangle in the R-X plane. The polygon
is defined by the parameters X reach (ph-g), X reach (ph-ph), R reach (ph-g), and R reach
(ph-ph) and the Directional mode. This means that, in special situations, a different setting is possible
for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops.
To stabilize the quadrilateral limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies
within a polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions. The following figure shows an example with
2 non-directional zones:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 625
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[dw_klpoly-impedanceprot, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-158 Operate Curve with Quadrilateral Characteristic

6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes

Sample Configuration
The following figure is an example of how the Impedance protection function is used at a feeder point in a
medium-voltage power system.

626 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[dw_example-protection, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-159 Example of a Network Protection Application

The medium-voltage power system is fed on the high-voltage side with a YNd5 transformer. In addition, there
is an infeed that enables energy recovery to faults occurring on the high-voltage side.
The protection device installed on the delta side of the transformer functions as distance protection, which is
the backup protection for the medium-voltage power system.
In addition to distance protection, the protection device on the delta side functions as impedance protection,
which looks in the transformer direction. The power system on the high-voltage side is a meshed system and
also contains distance protection devices.
In the following, you can find recommendations for the protection setting values and a view of the setting
problems. Figure 6-160 shows a possible setting approach.
Zone TZ 1 should be coordinated with the protection system and delayed by approx. 100 ms. The delay makes
preferred tripping possible due to the differential protection and a dropout of the zone.
Zone TZ 2 is intended as a directional reserve stage, whose time must, without fail, be coordinated with the
protection system. At the same time, this stage can be used if, when switching the transformer on, it switches
onto a fault.
In exchange, the function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault must be present and set accordingly
(see function description in chapter 6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 627
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[dw_config-staffel, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-160 System Configuration and Possible Time Grading

For this example, the following data apply:

Table 6-6 Data for Sample Calculations

Transformer Vector group: YNd5


Rated voltages: Upper-voltage side Vrated, UV = 230 kV
Undervoltage side Vrated, LV = 20 kV
Rated power: Srated = 50 MVA
Short-circuit voltage: Vsc = 12 %
Overhead line Reactance per unit length: X´ = 0.3 Ω/km
Length up to Z1, Dis L = 50 km
Transducer Voltage transformer: 20 kV/√3 /100 V/√3 / 100V/3
Current transformer, Undervoltage side: 1500 A/1 A

The primary side reactances are calculated as follows:


Transformer:

Line (transformed to
20 kV):

The sample calculation clearly shows that the line reactance can be disregarded compared to transformer
reactance due to the quadratic transformation.
To avoid overfunction, select the following setting values for the 1st zone (TZ 1)
X1 = 0.9 ⋅ XTr = 0.9 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 0.864 Ω
For the 2nd zone, select the double transformer impedance and set the time delay correspondingly high.
X2 = 2 ⋅ XTr = 2 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.92 Ω.
With the selected setting, Zone TZ 1 does not protect the transformer completely, especially if you take into
account the incorrect measurement for a 1-phase short circuit.
If you want to achieve a reliable tripping for all fault situations (see Table 6-5), the setting value must extend
far beyond the transformer. One possible strategy for the time grading is a setting value of approx. 1.5 XTr.
You must guarantee the selectivity using the Time criterion. The following figure shows the time-grading
chart:

628 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

[dw_staffel-x1-xtr, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-161 System Configuration and Possible Time Grading

The zone range in the R direction must take into account the fault resistance on the fault location. The fault
resistance is added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resis-
tance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. For the zone range in
the R direction, you do not have to take the fault resistance on the upper-voltage side and the line resistance
into account. These are also divided by the transformer-ratio quadrant and can be mostly disregarded.
However, fault resistances on the upper-voltage side during high-current feed on the upper-voltage side also
impact the reactance and resistance measurement on the undervoltage side. This impact is unavoidable and
can result in a short circuit with fault resistance on the upper-voltage side not being detected by the under-
voltage side until the high-current feed on the upper-voltage side is cleared. Do not set the reserve resistance
any larger than necessary. The setting can be adjusted to the maximum load in the direction of the line section
to be protected, in other words, in the transformer direction. The setting value for the R range must be lower
than the resistance under maximum load conditions (RL max). For a sufficient distance to the load range,
Siemens recommends a value of about 20 % to 50 % RL max. This means an incorrect measurement is avoided
by the apparent impedances (seeFigure 6-151 and Figure 6-152).

Parameter: Loop selection

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops


With the parameter Loop selection, you control the measuring-loop selection.
Parameter Value Description
All loops The function evaluates all 6 impedance loops.
Siemens recommends using this setting value for electrical power systems
or plants with an effective neutral-point grounding. For effective neutral-
point grounding the neutral point is either fixed or low-impedance
grounded.
Current-dependent Use this setting value for electrical power systems or plants with a non-
effective neutral-point grounding. For non-effective neutral-point
grounding the neutral point is isolated, grounded or high-impedance
grounded.
Siemens recommends this setting value for generator-protection applica-
tions.

Parameter: Min. phase-current thresh

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.100 A


With the parameter Min. phase-current thresh, you set the lower pickup threshold for the current.
Set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter under the load current. A practical setting value is
approximately 10 % to 20 % of the rated current of the protected object.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 629
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

NOTE

i The parameter (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops is visible only if you set the parameter
Min. phase-current thresh.

Parameter: Overcurrent threshold

• Default setting (_:2311:104) Overcurrent threshold = 1.300 A


With the parameter Overcurrent threshold, you set the lower pickup threshold for the overcurrent.
Set the Overcurrent threshold parameter above the maximum possible load current. A practical setting
value is approximately 1.2 to 1.4 times the generator rated current.

EXAMPLE:
The rated generator current is calculated as:

[fo_1 irated gen, 2, en_US]

The primary setting value is calculated as follows:

[fo_2 irated gen, 3, en_US]

Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:

[fo_3 irated gen, 3, en_US]

Parameter: Undervoltage seal in

• Default setting (_:2311:105) Undervoltage seal in = no


With the parameter Undervoltage seal in, you specify whether you would like to maintain pickup from
undervoltage.
Parameter Value Description
no If the fault current is above the setting value of the parameter Overcur-
rent threshold during the entire error Fault duration, then keep the
default setting.
yes Siemens recommends using this setting value for generator-protection
applications, if during static excitation the exciting transformer is connected
to the generator bus.
In this situation, the excitation voltage dips in case of a near short circuit.
Thereby reducing the synchronous generated voltage, the fault current can
sink after an extended period of time after the fault occurred below the
generator rated current. If a fault occurs the fault current is noticeably
greater than the rated current. The undervoltage seal-in maintains the
pickup.
When selecting this setting value, the following parameters are visible:
• (_:2311:106) V-seal-in threshold
• (_:2311:107) Duration of V-seal-in time

630 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

Parameter: V-seal-in threshold

• Default setting (_:2311:106) V-seal-in threshold = 46.200 V


With the parameter V-seal-in threshold, you set the lower pickup threshold for the undervoltage seal-
in.
80 % of the generator rated voltage is a typical setting value. As the voltage transformers are precisely
adapted to the object rated voltage, you can set 80 % of the secondary rated voltage. The parameter V-seal-
in threshold evaluates the positive-sequence voltage. With a secondary rated voltage V rated, sec = 100 V,
the setting value is determined as follows:

[fo_undervolt pickup, 2, en_US]

Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time

• Default setting (_:2311:107) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s


With the Duration of V-seal-in time parameter, you set how long the pickup must persist. If the
Duration of V-seal-in time is exceeded, the pickup drops off. If the fault is cleared before the end of
the Duration of V-seal-in time, the Undervoltage seal in drops off. If the voltage exceeds
setting V-seal-in threshold again before the end of the Duration of V-seal-in time, the
Undervoltage seal in also drops.
Set the Duration of V-seal-in time above the maximum Operate delay. The default setting 4 s is a
practicable value.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:15301:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


The parameter is only visible when the Inrush-current detection function is present in the application. Use
the parameter to define whether the zone is blocked or not during transformer inrush-current detection.

Parameter: X reach (ph-g)

• Default setting (_:15301:102) X reach (ph-g) = 2.500 Ω


With the X reach (ph-g) parameter, you set the polygon limit in the X direction for phase-to-ground impe-
dance loops. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
If the impedance protection has to be measured well beyond the transformer into the upstream power
system, Siemens recommends, as a setting value for the X reach (ph-g), approx. 1.5 times the trans-
former reactance. Adjust the associated delay time high enough so that short circuits downstream from the
transformer can be initially cleared selectively.

EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
X range = 150 %
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Xprim = 150 %/100 % ⋅ ZKT = 1.5 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.44 Ω (primary)
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:

[fo_Xreichweite_sek, 2, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 631
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

Parameter: X reach (ph-ph)

• Default setting (_:15301:103) X reach (ph-ph) = 2.500 Ω


With the parameter X reach (ph-ph), you set the polygon limit in the X direction for phase-to-phase impe-
dance loops. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
If the impedance protection has to be measured well beyond the transformer into the upstream power
system, Siemens recommends, as a setting value for the X reach (ph-ph), approx. 1.5 times the trans-
former reactance. Adjust the associated delay time high enough so that short circuits downstream from the
transformer can be initially cleared selectively.
Because the phase-to-phase loop applies both to a 3-phase short circuit as well as a 1-phase short circuit, the
3-phase short circuit is taken as the basis.
You can estimate the range for 1-phase short circuits by taking into account the zero-sequence impedance
(reactance). The following applies:
ZSC = (ZKT + 0.5 ⋅ Z0T)
For star-delta transformers, the zero-sequence impedance amounts to approx. 0.8 ⋅ ZKT. This results in the
following impedance measured value:
ZSC = (ZKT + 0.5 ⋅ Z0T) = (ZKT + 0.5 ⋅ 0.8 ⋅ ZKT) = 1.4 ZKT
With a time grading of 1.5 ZKT, measure the entire transformer winding for a 1-phase ground fault.
In the example, the same setting values apply for the phase-to-phase loops as for the phase-to-ground loops.

Parameter: R reach (ph-g)

• Default setting (_:15301:104) R reach (ph-g) = 2.500 Ω


With the parameter R reach (ph-g) , you set the polygon limit in the R direction for phase-to-ground
loops. For phase-to-ground faults, the fault resistance can be greater than that of phase-to-phase faults.

EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
The rated transformer current is assumed as the rated load current. The current is 1443 A on the 20 kV side.
The smallest impedance measured under maximum load conditions (Zmax) is calculated as follows assuming
10 % undervoltage and 10 % overcurrent:

[fo_Zmax_trafo_RLE, 2, en_US]

For the R reach, 20 % ⋅ Zmaxis specified. This means the primary setting value of the R reach (ph-g) param-
eter is calculated as follows:

R reach (ph-g) = 0.2 ⋅ 6.55 Ω = 1.31 Ω


This value corresponds to approx. the X value so that you can select, as a practical setting, R range = X range.
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:

[fo_rReichweite_sek, 2, en_US]

Parameter: R reach (ph-ph)

• Default setting (_:15301:105) R reach (ph-ph) = 1.250 Ω


With the parameter R reach (ph-ph), you set the polygon limits in the R direction for phase-to-phase
loops.

632 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
Set the range for phase-to-phase loops just like for phase-to-ground loops. This results in the following setting
values:
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 1.45 Ω (primary)
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 10.9 Ω (secondary)

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:15301:109) Directional mode = reverse


With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone operates forward, reverse,
or non-directional. Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
If the Impedance protection function is present in a power-system protection device, the directional mode is
in the direction of the line forward. If you want to use the impedance zone as backup protection for a trans-
former, you have to set the parameter Directional mode = reverse.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:15301:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s


With the parameter Operate delay , your set the grading time of the zone. Set the parameter Operate
delay for the specific application.
Select the associated time stage for Zone TZ so that it staggers the power-system protection devices of the
following lines. Therefore, check the grading times in the superposed power system as well as the range in the
power system if 1.5 ZKT is set.

6.7.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:2311:102 General:Loop selection • All loops All loops
• Current-dependent
_:2311:103 General:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:104 General:Overcurrent 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.500 A
_:2311:105 General:Undervoltage • no no
seal in • yes
_:2311:106 General:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.019 V
threshold

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 633
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:107 General:Duration of V- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
seal-in time
TZ 1
_:15301:1 TZ 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:15301:2 TZ 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:15301:27 TZ 1:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:15301:102 TZ 1:X reach (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:15301:103 TZ 1:X reach (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:15301:104 TZ 1:R reach (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:15301:105 TZ 1:R reach (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:15301:109 TZ 1:Directional mode • non-directional reverse
• forward
• reverse
_:15301:6 TZ 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s

6.7.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:55 General:Overcurrent pickup ACT O
_:2311:56 General:Pickup I>+V-seal-in ACT O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O
TZ 1
_:15301:81 TZ 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:15301:54 TZ 1:Inactive SPS O
_:15301:52 TZ 1:Behavior ENS O
_:15301:53 TZ 1:Health ENS O

634 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:15301:55 TZ 1:Pickup ACD O
_:15301:56 TZ 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:15301:57 TZ 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 635
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking

6.8 Power-Swing Blocking

6.8.1 Overview of Functions

Power-swing blocking
• Detects power swings
• Evaluates the impedances per phase accordingly

• Checks the impedance trajectory on a continual basis

• Reports the power-swing detection per phase

• Blocks the selected zones of the distance protection in case of power swings

• Detects 1-phase, 2-phase, and 3-phase short circuits during a power swing and then cancels the blocking
for the specific phase

• Works during a 1-pole dead time

• Activates only when the distance-protection function is active

• Does not generate tripping of the out-of-step condition; a separate out-of-step protection function is
available for this purpose

6.8.2 Structure of the Function

The Power-swing blocking function is a supplementary function to the distance protection. It only works if the
distance-protection function is activated. If a power swing is detected, power-swing blocking blocks the pickup
and tripping through the distance protection. Each distance-protection zone can be blocked separately.
The Power-swing blocking function is included in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and current
inputs. The process monitor delivers status information to the function regarding the protected object (open
poles in particular).

[dwpsdstr-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-162 Power-Swing Blocking Works Together with the Distance-Protection Function

6.8.3 Function Description

Power-Swing Event
After dynamic events such as load jumps, short circuits, automatic reclosing functions, or switching opera-
tions, the generators exposed to the oscillations may have to respond to the new power balance of the
system. In case of power swings, the distance-protection function is fed with high compensating currents and
- especially at the electrical center - low voltages (Figure 6-163). Low voltages combined with high currents

636 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking

represent apparently small impedances that can lead to tripping by the distance protection. Power-swing
blocking prevents tripping by the distance protection in case of power swings.

[dwpendel-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-163 Power Swings

Power swings are 3-phase symmetrical events. As a rule, a certain symmetry of the measurands can be
assumed. Power swings may also occur during unsymmetrical events, such as short circuits or during a 1-pole
dead time. For this reason, power-swing detection is structured to use 3 measuring systems. One measuring
system is available for each phase, which warrants phase-selective power-swing detection. If short circuits
occur, the power swing detected in the respective phase will be discarded, which enables the distance protec-
tion function to initiate selective tripping.

Functionality
In order to detect the power swing, the rate of change will be adjusted to the impedance phasor.

[dwzvekto-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-164 Impedance Vectors During a Power Swing and During a Short Circuit

In order to warrant all functions of the power-swing detection are stable and secure, without the risk of over-
function during a short circuit, the following measurement criteria are used:
• Trajectory monotony:
During a power swing, the measured impedance indicates a directional path of movement. This path
occurs precisely if within the measurement window one of the components ΔR and ΔX at the most indi-
cates a change of directions. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it causes a directional change in ΔR as well
as in ΔX within the measured value window.

• Trajectory continuity:
The spacing of two consecutive impedance values will clearly indicate a change of ΔR or ΔX during a
power swing. If a short circuit occurs, the impedance vector skips to the fault impedance and remains
motionless.

• Trajectory uniformity:
During a power swing the ratio between 2 consecutive changes of ΔR or ΔX do not overshoot a
threshold. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it will cause an erratic movement since the impedance
phasor abruptly skips from load impedance to fault impedance.
If the impedance indicator enters the distance protection pickup range and the power-swing detection criteria
are met, a power swing will be indicated. The pickup range is composed of the largest setting values for R and
X in all active zones.
Figure 6-165 shows the logic of the power-swing blocking. The measurement takes place per phase. A power-
swing detection signal will be transmitted only after the measured impedance is in the distance protection
pickup range ((_:55) Block zones). The power-swing detection signal remains active until a short-circuit

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 637
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking

occurs, the power-swing subsides, or the maximum blocking time has elapsed. You can use the binary input
signal >Block function to block the power-swing detection.

[lopendel-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-165 Power-Swing Blocking Logic

When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can place a time limit on the blocking effect of the
power-swing blockage. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated when using
systems that are slowly drifting apart.
When the impedance enters the distance protection pickup range, the maximum blocking time will be started.
When the impedance exits the pickup range while the maximum blocking time is running, the maximum
blocking time will be reset.

638 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking

Logic

[lopsdlog-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-166 Functionality of Power-Swing Blocking

The distance protection delivers information about the loops contained in its zones to the power-swing
blocking. If the power-swing blocking detects power swings in the activated loops, it delivers phase-selective
information about the zones to be blocked to the distance protection. The actual blocking is carried out in the
distance protection.

6.8.4 Application and Setting Notes

Selection of the Distance Zones to be Blocked

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Zones to be blocked = Zone x

Parameter Value Description


Zones to be blocked Via a parameter, the user can individually select each zone present in the
distance-protection function that is to be blocked during a power swing.

Maximum Blocking Time

• Default setting (_:103) Max. blocking time = ∞

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 639
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking

When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can limit the maximum blocking time of the distance
protection during the power swing. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated
when using networks that are slowly drifting apart.
For tripping during an asynchronous long-lasting power swings, Max. blocking time is not relevant. For
this application, use the function Out-of-step protection.
If there is no operational requirement with regards to a time limit of the power-swing blocking, Siemens
recommends the default setting ∞ (= not in effect).

Further Application Notes


The following table provides application notes for the interaction with other internal or external functions.
Interaction with Other Note
Functions:
Distance Protection Distance protection delivers information about which impedance loops
picked up. If power swings occur, pickup and tripping of the distance
protection are blocked for the specific phases and zones. Power-swing
blocking only works if the distance-protection function is activated.

6.8.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Power-Swing Blocking
_:1 68 P.swing blk:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:103 68 P.swing blk:Max. 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ -1 s
blocking time
_:102 68 P.swing blk:Zones to Setting options depend on
be blocked configuration

6.8.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
68 P.swing blk
_:82 68 P.swing blk:>Block function SPS I
_:54 68 P.swing blk:Inactive SPS O
_:52 68 P.swing blk:Behavior ENS O
_:53 68 P.swing blk:Health ENS O
_:55 68 P.swing blk:Block zones ACD O
_:301 68 P.swing blk:Drop off SPS O
_:302 68 P.swing blk:Max. blocking time exp. SPS O

640 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9.1 Overview of Functions

To enable selective and non-delayed fault clearance of all faults, on the entire line length, information
exchange with the remote line end is applied. You can implement teleprotection using binary inputs and
outputs (transmission and reception contacts) or using a digital communication connection.

6.9.2 Structure of Function

The Teleprotection method is used in protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in combina-
tion with the distance-protection function. The functions outlined in Figure 6-167 are available.

[dwtpsdst-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-167 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Figure 6-168 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the distance protection and generates the associated
transmission signal for transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is optionally coupled via a binary input, via the unblock logic or via
the communication. For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1
and Rec.unblk.sig# are available multiple times, once for each remote line end.
The distance zone parameterized for the teleprotection method provides the pickup information. This pickup
information is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled,
the teleprotection method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 641
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

[lotpsfst-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-168 Function Blocks and Function Control

In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection method are described. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.

6.9.3 Receive Blocks

For the coupling of receipt signals from opposite ends, the 3 receipt block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Rec.unblk.sig# and Rec. PI# are available. The teleprotection schemes described below can be oper-
ated with the suitable receipt blocks if required.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.

642 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Receive Block Binary

[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-169 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Binary Reception

This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via binary signals. If a teleprotection scheme is
configured with a total of 3 ends, for example, 2 Receipt function blocks are required.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. The receipt signals can thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as indi-
vidual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-168.

Receive Block Unblock

[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-170 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Unblock Reception

The teleprotection scheme can optionally be used with the unblock method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 643
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

The unblocking method is preferred under the following conditions:


• With long lines
• If the signal is transmitted via TFH (power line carrier transmission) through the line that is to be
protected

• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so great that reception by the
other line end is not ensured.
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 receipt signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the receipt of the trip logic of the teleprotection scheme is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded to
the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-168.

Receive Block Protection Interface

[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-171 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Protection Interface

This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital). Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The iden-
tity and the number of devices participating in the teleprotection scheme for the protection of the line, are set

644 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

by using the configuration of the protection interface; see 3.6.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the
Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 .

NOTE

i When operating the following functions for communication via a protection interface, you need a
minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s.
• Teleprotection scheme with distance protection or
• Teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection and

• Line differential protection

6.9.4 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

6.9.4.1 Description

[dwtpsmit-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-172 Function Block: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

If a fault occurs within the underreaching zone - this is usually zone Z1 for the distance protection - a transfer-
trip signal is sent to the remote end. The receipt signal leads to accelerated tripping in the device at the
remote end.

Sending Logic Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

[lotpssem-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-173 Sending Logic for Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 645
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Sending takes place upon pickup in the distance zone selected as a send condition. You can use the (_:
5671:101) Send prolongation parameter to compensate the differences in the pickup times at both
line ends.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or
phase-jointly as individual signals (general).
If the internal indication Echo Confirmation from the trip logic is present, the sending logic also generates
the Send signal. If, with a present receive signal, an Operate with parameterized zone has picked up, the
Echo Confirmation raises. Even if the Send zone is set below the operate zone, a definite tripping is
possible for all line ends.

Trip Logic Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

[lotpsalm-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-174 Trip Logic Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter Operate with will be released for trip-
ping. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5671:102) Operate delay
(1-phase); for multi-phase faults use the (_:5671:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
If the permissive underreach transfer trip is used to protect a line configuration with more than 2 ends, the
receive signals from all line ends are linked with OR.
A trip signal results from a simultaneous presence of the distance zone pickup, the release signal, and the time
sequence. The (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping
in 1-/3-pole trip logic devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the distance zone
pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the corresponding time

646 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote end is no longer
present.

Measures in the Event of Weak Infeed


If no or only a weak infeed is available at a line end, the protection does not pick up the phase information or
it does so incorrectly. No trip command can therefore be issued there. In SIPROTEC 5 devices tripping can also
be used together with the permissive underreach transfer trip in the event of weak infeed.
With the permissive underreach transfer trip, the protection trips parallel to the send signal with the under-
reaching distance zone at the line end with strong infeed. An echo from the line end with weak infeed is
therefore unnecessary as a release signal. However, the echo is advisable for manually testing the signal
connection between the protection devices.
The functions are described in more detail in chapter 6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function).

6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Intertrip Process, General

Setting the Process


The various permissive underreach transfer trip methods can be implemented by using both parameters Send
with and Operate with (see Figure 6-173 and Figure 6-174). In addition, the selection of the reception
block must be observed.
The following methods can be ordered:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
DIS permissive underreach transfer Underreaching zone, type Z1 Pickup, general
trip via pickup, non-directional
DIS intertrip process via extended Underreaching zone, type Z1 Overreaching zone, type Z1B
range
DIS intertrip process direct Underreaching zone, type Z1 Permissive underreach transfer trip,
reception (direct tripping)

The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1.

Parameter: Send prolongation

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:101) Send prolongation = 0.05 s


With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compare the differences in the
pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends, Siemens
recommends the setting value 0.05 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:102) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting value 0.00 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the tripping delay for multi-phase faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting value 0.00 s.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 647
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed = Yes


This parameter allows 1-pole tripping of the teleprotection scheme in the event of 1-phase short circuits or
multiphase short circuits and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting Yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.

6.9.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via an Extended Measuring
Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Grading-Time Shortening)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault within the underreaching zone. If
the fault is detected there within the overreaching zone, the receipt signal leads to tripping.

[dwtpsmeb-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-175 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Extended Measuring Range

You can configure the intertrip process via an extended measuring range with the following settings:

Transmit with

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:140) Send with = Z1


With the settings Send with, you can select the underreaching distance zone. The underreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify
during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching
distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1.

Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:141) Operate with = Dis Z1B


With the parameter Operate with, you select the overreaching distance zone Z1B. The selection texts are
identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the distance protection func-
tion. The selection text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 under-
reaching or 2 overreaching distance zones. For example Z1(Ph-E) then takes effect for ground faults and
Z1(Ph-Ph) for phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as send or tripping zones in the teleprotec-
tion method. This applies to parameters Send with and Operate with.

6.9.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup (Distance
Protection with Underreaching and Remote Tripping with Release)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. If the
distance-protection function picks up at the remote end, the signal received there leads to tripping.

648 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

[dwtpsmua-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-176 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup

You can configure the permissive underreach transfer trip via pickup with the following settings:

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:140) Send with = Z1


With the settings Send with, you can select the underreaching distance zone. The underreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify
during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching
distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1.

Parameter: Operate with

• Default setting (_:5671:141) Operate with= Pickup, general


The Operate with parameter is used to set the pickup for the accelerated tripping.
Parameter Value Description
Pickup, general Select this setting value for the non-directional permissive underreach transfer
trip via pickup.
Reception (direct Select this setting value for a direct operate with the received signal.
operate)

6.9.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Intertrip Process
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. The
signal received there leads directly to the tripping.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 649
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

[dwtpsdim-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-177 Function Diagram for the Direct Intertrip Process

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:140) Send with = Z1B


With the settings Send with, you can select the underreaching distance zone. The underreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify
during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching
distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5671:141) Operate with = direct


Set the parameter to direct for the direct intertrip process.

6.9.4.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


85-21Perm.unde
_:5671:1 85-21Perm.unde:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:5671:101 85-21Perm.unde:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5671:11 85-21Perm.unde:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:5671:102 85-21Perm.unde:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5671:103 85-21Perm.unde:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:5671:140 85-21Perm.unde:Send with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5671:141 85-21Perm.unde:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration

650 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9.4.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
85-21Perm.unde
_:5671:81 85-21Perm.unde:>Block stage SPS I
_:5671:501 85-21Perm.unde:>Blocking echo SPS I
_:5671:502 85-21Perm.unde:>Blk. weak infeed trip SPS I
_:5671:54 85-21Perm.unde:Inactive SPS O
_:5671:52 85-21Perm.unde:Behavior ENS O
_:5671:53 85-21Perm.unde:Health ENS O
_:5671:304 85-21Perm.unde:Send ACT O
_:5671:301 85-21Perm.unde:Send signal is echo SPS O
_:5671:302 85-21Perm.unde:Weak infeed trip oper. SPS O
_:5671:56 85-21Perm.unde:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5671:57 85-21Perm.unde:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I

6.9.5 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

6.9.5.1 Description

[dwtpsver-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-178 Function Block: Permissive Modes

If a fault occurs within the overreaching zone, for example zone Z1B for the distance protection, a send signal
is sent to the remote end. In the distance protection device, the received signal leads to accelerated tripping if
the fault is also detected in the forward direction.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 651
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Sending Logic Permissive Modes

[lotpssmv-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-179 Sending Logic for Permissive Modes

Sending takes place upon pickup in the selected overreaching zone or optionally upon pickup in the forward
direction. The send signal can be extended by a parameterizable time (_:5701:101) Send prolonga-
tion if the protection has already issued a trip command. This also enables the release of the other line end if
the short-circuit is deactivated there very rapidly by the underreaching zone. With this, pickup differences
between the cable ends and signal delays can be considered.
If needed, the transmission signal can be delayed with (_:5701:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). No transmission signal is sent in the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive mode for double faults can be improved
on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transmitted per communication direction. Trans-
mission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly as indi-
vidual signals (general).

Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description

652 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Trip Logic Permissive Modes

[lotpsavv-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-180 Trip Logic for Permissive Modes

The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a receive signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5701:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5701:103)
Operate delay (1-phase). For multi-phase faults, use the (_:5701:104) Operate delay (multi-
ph.) parameter.
The (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-pole
tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive mode for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all line ends are combined for the tripping with AND.
A trip signal results from simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the release signal and the
time sequence. For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the
distance zone pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the
corresponding time delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote
end is no longer present.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
mode. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a change of
direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).

Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 653
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Measures in the Event of Weak Infeed


If no or only a weak infeed is available at a line end, the protection does not pick up the phase information or
it does so incorrectly. With this, neither a trip command nor a transmission signal can be sent. With the
permissive mode, the line end cannot be tripped quickly with increased infeed because no release signal is
transferred from the end with the weak infeed.
The teleprotection methods have special measures to enable a rapid trip at both line ends in such cases:
• For the trip of the cable end with a strong infeed, the echo function can be made effective with a weak
infeed.

• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection methods have a func-
tion for trip with weak infeed.

Related Topics
6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)

6.9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Permissive Schemes, General

Setting the process


The various permissive schemes can be implemented using both parameters Send with and Operate
with (see Figure 6-179 and Figure 6-180). In addition, the selection of the reception block must be observed.
The following methods can be set:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
Permissive overreach transfer trip Overreaching zone, type Z1B Overreaching zone, type Z1B
scheme
Direction comparison process Pickup forward Pickup forward
Direction unblock process Overreaching zone, type Z1B Overreaching zone, type Z1B

However, the selected texts are identical to the designations you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selected text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1B.

Conditions for the Distance protection


Note for all permissive overreach transfer trips that pickup of the Distance protection in reverse direction is
longer than the overreaching zone of the opposite end (see shaded areas on the right in the following figure)!
For this, at least one of the distance-protection stages must be set to reverse or non-directional. In
case of a fault in Z1B of the protection in B that occurs in the shaded area (on the left in the figure) in case of
false settings, the Distance protection picks up. As an echo function is typically used, protection A would send
an unexpected echo signal and protection B would trip in an unselective way.

[dw_Dis-prot-vergleich-200314-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-181 Setting Distance Protection with Comparison Process

Parameter: Send prolongation

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:101) Send prolongation = 0.05 s

654 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compensate the differences in
the pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends, Siemens
recommends the setting value 0.05 s.

Parameter: Send delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:102) Send delay = 0.00 s


With the parameter Send delay, you can set an additional tripping delay. Since the teleprotection method
should lead to a fast and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting value 0.00 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:103) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


With the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) , you can set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:104) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


With the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.), you can set the tripping delay for multi-phase faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed = Yes


This parameter allows 1-pole tripping of the teleprotection method in the event of 1-phase short circuits or
multiphase short circuits and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting Yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.

6.9.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme (Distance Protection
with Overreaching and Release)
A send signal is sent to the remote end in the event of a fault in the overreaching zone. If the fault is also
detected there in the overreaching zone, the received signal leads to tripping.

[dwtpssiv-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-182 Function Diagram of the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 655
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

You can use the following settings to configure the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme:

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:140) Send with = Z1B


With the Send with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations you specify during
the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching distance
zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:141) Operate with = Z1B


With the Operate with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching
distance zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you
specify during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the over-
reaching distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 over-
reaching distance zones. For example Z1B(Ph-Gnd) then takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(Ph-Ph) for
phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as send zones or tripping zones in the teleprotection
method. This applies to parameters Send with and Operate with .

6.9.5.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method


If the distance protection detects a fault in the line direction after an activation, it sends a release signal to the
remote end. If the opposite end receives the release signal and also recognizes an error in the cable direction,
the trip signal is created.

[dwtpsriv-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-183 Function Scheme of the Directional Comparison Procedure

With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:140) Send with = Dis pickup fwd


The parameter Send with is used to set the send condition to Dis pickup fwd..

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:141) Operate with = Dis pickup fwd.

656 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

The parameter Operate with is used to set the trip condition to Dis pickup fwd..

6.9.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direction Unblocking Process (Distance Protection with
Overreaching and Unblocking)
The directional unblock method corresponds to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme with a preset
function block Receive Unblock. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme, a tripping
is also possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional unblock method cannot be
operated with a communication via a protection interface owing to the way it functions.

[dwtpsubl-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-184 Function Scheme of the Directional Unblocking Method

With the following settings, you can configure the directional unblocking method:

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:140) Send with = Z1B


With the Send with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations you specify during
the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching distance
zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5701:141) Operate with = Z1B


With the Operate with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching
distance zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations you specify
during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching
distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 over-
reaching distance zones. For example Z1B(Ph-Gnd) then takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(Ph-Ph) for
phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as send zones or tripping zones in the teleprotection
method. This applies to parameters Send with and Operate with .

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 657
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9.5.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


85-21Perm.over
_:5701:1 85-21Perm.over:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:5701:101 85-21Perm.over:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5701:102 85-21Perm.over:Send delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5701:105 85-21Perm.over:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5701:106 85-21Perm.over:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5701:11 85-21Perm.over:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:5701:103 85-21Perm.over:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5701:104 85-21Perm.over:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:5701:140 85-21Perm.over:Send with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5701:141 85-21Perm.over:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
_:5701:142 85-21Perm.over:Trans. Setting options depend on
block. with configuration

6.9.5.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
85-21Perm.over
_:5701:81 85-21Perm.over:>Block stage SPS I
_:5701:501 85-21Perm.over:>Blocking echo SPS I
_:5701:502 85-21Perm.over:>Blk. weak infeed trip SPS I
_:5701:54 85-21Perm.over:Inactive SPS O
_:5701:52 85-21Perm.over:Behavior ENS O
_:5701:53 85-21Perm.over:Health ENS O
_:5701:305 85-21Perm.over:Send ACT O
_:5701:302 85-21Perm.over:Send signal is echo SPS O
_:5701:303 85-21Perm.over:Weak infeed trip oper. SPS O
_:5701:301 85-21Perm.over:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5701:56 85-21Perm.over:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5701:57 85-21Perm.over:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I

658 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I

6.9.6 Blocking Method

6.9.6.1 Description

[dwtpsblo-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-185 Function Block: Blocking Procedure

If the protection function recognizes a fault in the reverse direction, the blocking signal is sent to the opposite
end. If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving line end, it generates the trip
signal after a short time delay.

Transmission Logic

[lotpssbl-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-186 Transmission Logic for the Blocking Procedure

The blocking signal is generated upon activation of the distance protection in the reverse direction or non-
directionally. The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5731:101) Send

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 659
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

prolongation , you can extend the blocking signal. In this way, the remote end can continue to be
blocked, even if the fault has already been cleared locally.
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5731:102) Send
with jump ). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the distance
protection detects a fault in the forward direction, the blocking signal is stopped immediately and the indica-
tion Stop is generated.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for L1, L2, and L3 or phase-
jointly as individual signals.

Trip Logic Blocking Procedure

[lotpsaub-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-187 Trip Logic for the Blocking Procedure

The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:5731:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping. The trip of the blocking procedure must be delayed due to possible differ-
ences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. The time
delay is set with the (_:5731:107) Release delay parameter.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the delay time under Operate delay (1-phase) ; for
multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the
internal release signal and the time sequences.

660 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. The trip is blocked so that an activation in the
selected overreaching zone in the forward direction does not quickly shut down the external fault at the
remote end.
If the blocking procedure for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the recep-
tion signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
The (_:5731:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.

Measures in the Event of Weak Infeed


Owing to the process, there is no option in the blocking process for achieving a trip command release at weak
infeed by the remote end. Rather, the advantage of the blocking process lies in the fact that tripping can also
occur rapidly at the infeed end without release, as no blocking signal can be formed from the non-feeding
end.

6.9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Procedure


The blocking procedure is used frequently:
• If the signal is transmitted with TFH through the protected line and if the attenuation of the transmission
signal at the fault location is so large that the reception from the other cable end cannot be guaranteed.

• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the protection function detects a fault in the reverse direction, a blocking signal is generated. If the other
line end does not receive a blocking signal, the protection function trips in the event of a fault in the over-
reaching zone. For this, the overreaching zone must be set to approximately 120 % of the line length. In the
case of multiple end lines, the overreaching zone must extend over the longer line section, irrespective of
whether an additional infeed is possible via the branching point. Since no release signal is required by the
opposite end, single infeed short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking procedure.

[dwtpsrib-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-188 Function Diagram of the Direction Blocking Procedure

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 661
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Requirements during Distance Protection


When using the blocking procedure, observe that the pickup of the distance protection in the reverse direction
must reach further than the overreach zone of the opposite end! For this purpose, at least one of the distance
steps must be set to reverse or non-directional. If an error has been removed in Z1B (after B) of the
protection in A Figure 6-188, the distance protection in B must safely pick up in the reverse direction, in order
to be able to send a blocking signal from protection B to protection in A.

Parameter: Send with jump

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:102) Send with jump = Yes


With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.

Parameter: Send prolongation

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:101) Send prolongation = 0.05 s


With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compare the differences in the
pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends, Siemens
recommends the setting value 0.05 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:103) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective trip, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:104) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s


You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the tripping delay for multi-phase faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective trip, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:140) Operate with = Z1B


With the Operate with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching
distance zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you
specify during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the over-
reaching distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 over-
reaching distance zones. For example Z1B(Ph-E) then takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(Ph-Ph) for phase
faults. In this case, you must select both zones as tripping zones.

Parameter: Release delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:107) Release delay = 0.020 s


With the parameter Release delay, you must set the release delay after a pickup. The trip of the blocking
procedure must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends
and because of the transmission time. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.020 s.

662 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


85-21 Blocking
_:5731:1 85-21 Blocking:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:5731:101 85-21 Blocking:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5731:102 85-21 Blocking:Send with • no yes
jump • yes
_:5731:108 85-21 Blocking:Send phase • no no
segregated • yes
_:5731:105 85-21 Blocking:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5731:106 85-21 Blocking:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5731:107 85-21 Blocking:Release 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.020 s
delay
_:5731:11 85-21 Blocking:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:5731:103 85-21 Blocking:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5731:104 85-21 Blocking:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:5731:140 85-21 Blocking:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
_:5731:141 85-21 Blocking:Trans. Setting options depend on
block. with configuration

6.9.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
85-21 Blocking
_:5731:81 85-21 Blocking:>Block stage SPS I
_:5731:54 85-21 Blocking:Inactive SPS O
_:5731:52 85-21 Blocking:Behavior ENS O
_:5731:53 85-21 Blocking:Health ENS O
_:5731:305 85-21 Blocking:Teleprot. blocking ACT O
_:5731:307 85-21 Blocking:Stop ACT O
_:5731:301 85-21 Blocking:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5731:56 85-21 Blocking:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5731:57 85-21 Blocking:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 663
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9.7 Reverse Interlocking

6.9.7.1 Description

[dwtpsrwv-260613-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-189 Function Block: Reverse Interlocking

If a fault occurs within the crossover zone and none of the subordinate protection devices transmits a blocking
signal, this will initiate tripping of reverse interlocking.

Trip Logic

[loruever-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-190 Trip Logic for Reverse Interlocking

The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:14311:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under Operate delay (1-phase) ; for
multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the
internal release signal and the time sequences.

664 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

If a receiving signal is pending, tripping will be blocked in order to ensure that a pickup in the selected cross-
over zone does not disconnect quickly the short circuit on the outbound line.
If the Reverse interlocking function is used with several receiving blocks, the receiving signals from all
receiving blocks will be linked with OR.
The (_:14311:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. If the device is capable of only 3-pole tripping, the parameter 1-pole operate
allowed does not apply and is not visible.

6.9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Reverse Interlocking


If the distance protection is used as backward protection at a transformer tap fed in from one side, you can
protect the busbar via reverse interlocking via quick-operating time. The selectivity of the distance protection
for faults on outgoing lines will not be jeopardized.
The distance zones Z1 and Z2 according to Figure 6-191 serve as reserve stage for errors on the out-bound
lines, for example, in F2. Consider the shortest following line for distance staggering.
Typically, the crossover zone Z1B provides the pickup information for the reverse interlocking. The time delay
for the reverse interlocking must be set higher than the pickup time Ta of the protection devices on the out-
bound lines. In the event of subordinate protection pickup, tripping of the reverse interlocking is blocked. The
pickup signals of the subordinate protection devices will be transmitted as receiving signal to reverse inter-
locking (see Figure 6-191). If none of the subordinate protection devices picks up, reverse interlocking gener-
ates a operate indication. This enables quick disconnection in the following scenarios:
• Short circuit on the busbar, for example, in F1
• If the circuit breaker fails during a fault in F2.
If the pickup signals of the subordinate protection devices drop faster than the pickup of the selected cross-
over zones, the transient blocking time prevents an unwanted tripping of the reverse interlocking.

[dwrckver-180613-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-191 Functional Schematic of Reverse Interlocking

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 665
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)

• Recommended setting value (_:14311:103) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.04 s


You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices and due to signal transmission times, tripping of
the reverse interlocking must be delayed. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.

Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)

• Recommended setting value (_:14311:104) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.04 s


You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the tripping delay for multi-phase faults.
Due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices and due to signal transmission times, tripping of
the reverse interlocking must be delayed. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:14311:140) Operate with = Z1B


With the Operate with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching
distance zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you
specify during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the over-
reaching distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 over-
reaching distance zones. For example, Z1B(L-E) takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(L-L) for phase faults. In
this case, you must select both zones as tripping zones.

Parameter: Trans. blk. dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:14311:106) Trans. blk. dropout delay = 0.05 s


With the Trans. blk. dropout delay parameter, you can determine the duration of the transient
blocking. Set the Trans. blk. dropout delay to prevent an unwanted tripping of the reverse inter-
locking during a fast dropout of the pickup signal of the protection devices. Siemens recommends a setting of
0.05 s.

6.9.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


85-21Rev.interlock
_:14311:1 85-21Rev.interlock:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:14311:106 85-21Rev.interlock:Trans. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
blk. dropout delay
_:14311:11 85-21Rev.interlock:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:14311:103 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
delay (1-phase)
_:14311:104 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:14311:140 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration

666 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

6.9.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
85-21Rev.interlock
_:14311:81 85-21Rev.interlock:>Block stage SPS I
_:14311:54 85-21Rev.interlock:Inactive SPS O
_:14311:52 85-21Rev.interlock:Behavior ENS O
_:14311:53 85-21Rev.interlock:Health ENS O
_:14311:56 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14311:57 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate ACT O
_:14311:347 85-21Rev.interlock:Function on SPC C
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I

6.9.8 Transient Blocking

6.9.8.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The transient
blocking is used for blocking and permissive overreach transfer trips, but not for a permissive underreach
transfer trip.

[lotpstrb-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-192 Logic Diagram of the Transient Blocking

If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period Trans. blk. pickup delay. The Transient blocking signal has an
effect on send and trip logic of the permissive overreach transfer trips as well as on the trip logic of the

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 667
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection

blocking method. After the omission of the blocking criterium, the transient blocking will be maintained for a
set time Trans. blk. dropout delay. If a trip command is generated in the underreaching zone during a
transient blocking (signal Release Trip forward (DIS)), the transient blocking time is triggered. In this way,
the blocking of the teleprotection in the event of an internal fault is prevented.
The teleprotection methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection can affect one another. Use
the Trans. block. with parameter to set whether the transient blocking of the teleprotection method for
the ground-fault protection is to affect that of the distance protection. The reciprocal influence is advisable if
the teleprotection methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection work with a common commu-
nication channel.

6.9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking

Trans. Block through

• Default setting (_:5731:141) Trans. block. with = EF: TrBlock XBlk


Set the parameter Trans. block. with to EF: TrBlock XBlk, if the teleprotection method for the
distance protection works on the same communication channel as an teleprotection method for the ground-
fault protection. Set the parameter to invalid if you are using separate communication channels. If no tele-
protection method is used for the ground-fault protection, it will not be possible to set the settings and the
link is automatically deactivated.

Parameter: Trans. blk. pickup delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay = 0.04 s


With the parameter Trans. blk. pickup delay, you can set how long a reverse or non-directional
pickup should remain before the transient blocking occurs. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.

NOTE

i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are recom-
mended.

Parameter: Trans. blk. dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5731:106) Trans. blk. dropout delay = 0.05 s


With the Trans. blk. dropout delay parameter, you can determine the duration of the transient
blocking. The time must be set longer than the duration of the transient compensation methods for the occur-
rence or switching of exterior short circuits.

668 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in


Grounded Systems

6.10.1 Overview of Functions

The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded-neutral systems function
(ANSI 67N):
• Detects high-resistance ground faults in electric equipment in grounded systems
• Detects short circuits phase selectively

• Trips 1- or 3-pole

6.10.2 Structure of the Function

The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems function is used in the
Line protection function group. The function is preconfigured at the factory to have 2 stages with definite-
time delay (definite time-overcurrent protection stages). Within the function, maximum 6 definite time-over-
current protection stages can be operated as well as 1 simultaneously by each inverse type. A maximum of 2
functions can be operated within the function group.
The following stage types are available:
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay (definite-time overcurrent protection)
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI)

• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay with logarithmic inverse characteristics (AMZ-3I0-log)

• Ground-fault protection with zero-sequence power-dependent time delay (S0 inverse)

• Ground-fault protection with zero-sequence voltage-dependent time delay (V0 inverse)


The process for direction determination and phase selection is on the function level and has a uniform effect
on the stages (see Figure 6-193 and section 6.10.9.1 Description). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of a
function receive the same direction result. Each stage can be set non-directional or directional – forwards or
reverse. The process for direction determination is independent of the direction determination for the distance
protection.
The group-indications output logic (see Figure 6-193) generates the following group indications for the entire
Ground-fault protection function by logic OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate delay expired

• Operate

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 669
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[dwgfpstr-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-193 Function Structure/Embedding

If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and delay times of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected from outside
via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Binary input signal
Automatic reclosing (AREC) If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents (see section 6.10.11.1 Description).
The stages can be used for directional-comparison protection via the Teleprotection method with ground-
fault protection function, if necessary (see chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions).

6.10.3 Stage Control

Logic
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types definite-time overcurrent protection
(UMZ), inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ) according to IEC and ANSI and inverse-time overcurrent
protection (AMZ) with logarithmic inverse characteristics.

670 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[loggfp02-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-194 Stage Control for the Stages Types Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Inverse Time-Over-
current Protection, and Logarithmic Inverse

Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stage is blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure,
insofar as the stage works directionally, and the transformer neutral-point current is not connected.
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types S0 inverse and V0 inverse.

[loggfp12-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-195 Stage Control for the Stage Types S0 Inverse and V0 Inverse

Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stages is also blocked upon a measuring-voltage failure.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 671
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.10.4.1 Description

Logic of a Stage

[loggfp01-170611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-196 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection

Measurand
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition equa-
tion

from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.

672 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available
to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this ground current (residual
current). The linear range of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.5 A. At higher currents,
the device automatically switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
zero current from the conductor currents.

Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending
on the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 1 cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

• Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically. Harmonics and transient faults are damped particularly strongly over the extended
filter length in comparison to the standard filter. The extended filter length causes the pickup time to
increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see Technical specifications).

Stabilization with Phase Currents


In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise (see the following graphic).
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.

[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-197 Stabilization with Phase Currents

Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or backward
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description).

Phase Selection
Phase Selection Depending on the distribution of the currents and voltages, the phase selection detects if a 1-
phase (determination of the affected phase) or multiphase short circuit is present (see Chapter 6.10.10 Phase
Selection ).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 673
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Pickup for Signal Supplement


The Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection function can be used to apply the stage for direc-
tional comparison protection as well. The stage provides the internal signal signal supplement pickup
for this. Complete the necessary settings in the function Teleprotection method with ground-fault protec-
tion (see chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions).

Operating Mode upon 1-Pole Interruption


The Op.mode at 1p dead time parameter is used to define whether the stage is blocked during a 1-pole
pause or works non-directionally, even if it is set to directional operation. If the 1-pole pause is ended, the
corresponding device-internal signal is extended (retained) by the time of the Hold mode 1p dead time
parameter.

Blocking of the Stage Pickup


The following blockings suppress the pickup of the stage and fully reset the picked up stage:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see also Figure 6-194 and
Figure 6-195)

• During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead
time parameter is set to blocked .

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.10.13.1 Description)
The blocking cause is indicated.

Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.

• Parameter Blocking by prot. pickup


The pickup type at which the blocking is to occur is defined with this parameter. The blocking can occur
at any pickup or only at 1-pole or only at multipole pickups.
The parameter is also used to set that no blocking is to occur at pickup of the main protection. This also
applies if you have selected one or more zones/stages from the Blocking by parameter.

Blocking of the Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


Blocking of tripping via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function is described in section
6.10.11.1 Description.

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings


If the following functions are present in the device, they can affect the dynamic settings Threshold and
Operate delay of the level:
• Automatic reclosing

• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.10.13.1 Description.

674 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be independent of the current level, select the stage type Definite time-overcurrent
protection.
A multi-stage Definite time-overcurrent protection function is realized by the parallel operation of several defi-
nite time-overcurrent protection stages.

Parameter: Blocking by the main protection

• Default setting (_:4861:140) Blocking by = none

• Default setting (_:4861:130) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup


If you wish to give the selective fault clarification by the main protection function (for example, differential or
distance protection) priority over tripping by ground-fault protection, you can define this via both parameters.
The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or levels of the main protection function(s), upon
whose pickup the ground-fault protection is to be blocked.
The Blocking by prot. pickup parameter can be used to define the type of pickup, which leads to the
blocking.
Parameter Value Description
every pickup Blocking at every pickup
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-pole pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multipole pickup
no pickup No blocking at pickup of the main protection function

Parameter: Operating mode at 1-pole dead time

• Default setting (_:4861:129) Op.mode at 1p dead time = blocked


The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is used to define the behavior of the stage in the event of a 1-pole
interruption.
Parameter Value Description
blocked As the load current also has a zero component in the 1-pole pause, a blocking
with this setting is advisable if the response threshold of the stage is less than /
equal to the maximum load current.
non-directional Select this setting if the ground-fault protection is to continue working in the 1-
pole pause, as a reliable direction measurement is not possible owing to load
current in the zero and negative-sequence system with 1-pole open circuit
breaker.
Set the response threshold of the stage greater than the maximum load
current.

Parameter: Hold mode 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time

• Default setting (_:4861:112) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s


The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is used to define the time by which the operating mode the event
of a 1-pole pause will be extended after the end of the 1-pole pause.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the parameterized operating
mode for a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole dead
time) until the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the
maximum time between connection of the 1st circuit breaker and connection of the last circuit breaker at all
ends of the feeder after a 1-pole pause.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:4861:114) Directional mode = non-directional

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 675
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage also works with this setting if no direction measurement is possible,
for example, owing to lower or no polarization voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:4861:8) Method of measurement = 1-cycle filter


Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the measurand is determined via 1 or 2
cycle filters.
Parameter Value Description
1-cycle filter This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
2-cycle filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select the setting 2 cycle filter. Please note that in this case the pickup
time of the tripping level increases slightly (see Technical specifications).

Parameter: Stabilization with phase currents

• Recommended setting value (_:4861:111) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %


In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.

Dynamic Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:4861:3) Threshold = 1500 A


Define the pickup value corresponding to the application.
At a very sensitive setting, you must ensure that a residual current due to unbalance (for example, untwisted
line) does not cause the level to respond.

Dynamic Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:4861:6) Operate delay = 300 ms


The time delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart for ground faults that has been prepared for
the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, note whether stage tripping is direction-dependent and whether
signal transmission is used. See chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions
If you use a stage direction independently and with signal transmission, it can also have a non-delayed effect
during the release process. Parameterize a short delay for the blocking method equal to the signal-transmis-
sion time plus a reserve of approx. 20 ms.

676 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:4861:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


Specify the parameter for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
yes The stage generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles of
the circuit-breaker to open is not made until central trip command control
becomes involved.
no The stage always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.

6.10.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:114 General:Polarization with • V0 + IY or V2 + I2 V0 + IY or V2 +
• V0 + IY (neutral pt.) I2
• IY (neutral pt.) only
• V2 + I2 (neg. seq.)
• zero-sequence power
_:2311:101 General:Angle forward α 0 ° to 360 ° 338 °
_:2311:102 General:Angle forward β 0 ° to 360 ° 122 °
_:2311:103 General:Min. zero-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V0
_:2311:115 General:Dir.reslt=forw.at • no no
V0<min • yes
_:2311:104 General:Min.3I0 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.030 A
f.increas.dir.sens. 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.150 A
_:2311:105 General:Min. neutral-point 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
curr. IY 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:107 General:Min. neg.-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V2
_:2311:106 General:Min. neg.-seq. 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
current I2 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:108 General:Compensation 0 ° to 360 ° 255 °
angle
_:2311:109 General:Forw. dir. power 1A 0.08 VA to 10.00 VA 0.52 VA
threshold 5A 0.42 VA to 50.00 VA 2.60 VA
_:2311:116 General:Dir.corr.at • no no
ser.comp.lines • yes
General
_:4861:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:4861:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:4861:114 Definite-T 1:Directional • non-directional non-directional
mode • forward
• reverse
_:4861:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:4861:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
measurement • 2-cycle filter

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 677
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:4861:116 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:4861:130 Definite-T 1:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:4861:129 Definite-T 1:Op.mode at 1p • blocked blocked
dead time • non-directional
_:4861:112 Definite-T 1:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:4861:115 Definite-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:4861:111 Definite-T 1:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:4861:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:6 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:4861:117 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:4861:123 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:4861:118 Definite-T 1:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 1 • yes
_:4861:124 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4861:101 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:106 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:4861:119 Definite-T 1:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 2 • yes
_:4861:125 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4861:102 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:107 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:4861:120 Definite-T 1:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 3 • yes
_:4861:126 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4861:103 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:108 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:4861:121 Definite-T 1:Effected by AR • no no
cycle gr. 3 • yes

678 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:4861:127 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4861:104 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:109 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:4861:122 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:4861:128 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4861:105 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:110 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
_:4861:140 Definite-T 1:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration
General
_:4862:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:4862:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:4862:114 Definite-T 2:Directional • non-directional non-directional
mode • forward
• reverse
_:4862:11 Definite-T 2:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:4862:8 Definite-T 2:Method of • 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
measurement • 2-cycle filter
_:4862:116 Definite-T 2:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:4862:130 Definite-T 2:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:4862:129 Definite-T 2:Op.mode at 1p • blocked blocked
dead time • non-directional
_:4862:112 Definite-T 2:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:4862:115 Definite-T 2:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:4862:111 Definite-T 2:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:4862:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4862:6 Definite-T 2:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:4862:117 Definite-T 2:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:4862:123 Definite-T 2:Stage blocked • no no
• yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 679
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:4862:118 Definite-T 2:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 1 • yes
_:4862:124 Definite-T 2:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4862:101 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4862:106 Definite-T 2:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:4862:119 Definite-T 2:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 2 • yes
_:4862:125 Definite-T 2:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4862:102 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4862:107 Definite-T 2:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:4862:120 Definite-T 2:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 3 • yes
_:4862:126 Definite-T 2:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4862:103 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4862:108 Definite-T 2:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:4862:121 Definite-T 2:Effected by AR • no no
cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:4862:127 Definite-T 2:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4862:104 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4862:109 Definite-T 2:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:4862:122 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:4862:128 Definite-T 2:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:4862:105 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4862:110 Definite-T 2:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
_:4862:140 Definite-T 2:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

6.10.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O

680 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:4861:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:4861:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:4861:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:4861:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:4861:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:4861:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:4861:301 Definite-T 1:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:4861:302 Definite-T 1:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:4861:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:4861:63 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:4861:64 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:4861:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:4861:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:4861:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:4861:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:4861:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:4861:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2
_:4862:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:4862:84 Definite-T 2:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:4862:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive SPS O
_:4862:52 Definite-T 2:Behavior ENS O
_:4862:53 Definite-T 2:Health ENS O
_:4862:60 Definite-T 2:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:4862:301 Definite-T 2:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:4862:302 Definite-T 2:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:4862:62 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:4862:63 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:4862:64 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:4862:65 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:4862:67 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:4862:68 Definite-T 2:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:4862:55 Definite-T 2:Pickup ACD O
_:4862:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:4862:57 Definite-T 2:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 681
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection According to IEC and ANSI

6.10.5.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loggfp03-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-198 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection
According to IEC and ANSI

Measurands
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition equa-
tion

682 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available
to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
residual current from the phase currents.

Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant method of measurement,
depending on the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

• Measurement of the fundamental component via 2-cycle filter


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically. Harmonics and transient faults are damped particularly strongly over the extended
filter length in comparison to the standard filter. The extended filter length causes the pickup time to
increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see Technical specifications).

Stabilization with Phase Currents


In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise (see following graphic).
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.

[loggfpst-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-199 Stabilization with Phase Currents

Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 683
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Phase Selection
The phase selection detects whether a 1-pole (determination of the relevant conductor) or a multiphase short
circuit is present via the distribution of the currents and voltages (see section 6.10.10 Phase Selection ).

Pickup for Signal Supplement


The Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection function can be used to apply the stage for direc-
tional comparison protection as well. The stage provides the internal signal signal supplement pickup
for this. Complete the necessary settings in the function Teleprotection method with ground-fault protec-
tion (see chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions).

Pickup, Dropout, and Tripping Behavior of the Dependent Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. This time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between the following options:
• Non-delayed dropout: The summed time is deleted.
• Dropout according to characteristic curve: The summed time is reduced in relation to the characteristic
curve.
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The execution of the characteristic curve after exceeding 1.1 times the threshold value can be delayed by a
constant time ( Additional time delay parameter).

Operating Mode upon 1-Pole Interruption


The Op.mode at 1p dead time parameter is used to define whether the stage is blocked during a 1-pole
pause or works non-directionally, even if it is set to directional operation. If the 1-pole pause is ended, the
corresponding device-internal signal is extended (retained) by the time of the Op.mode at 1p dead time
parameter.

Blocking of the Stage Pickup


The following blockings suppress the pickup of the stage and fully reset the picked up stage:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see also Figure 6-194 and
Figure 6-195)

• During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead
time parameter is set to blocked .

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.10.13.1 Description and section
6.10.6.1 Description)
The blocking cause is indicated.

Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.

684 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

• Parameter Blocking by prot. pickup


The pickup type at which the blocking is to occur is defined with this parameter. The blocking can occur
at any pickup or only at 1-pole or only at multipole pickups.
The parameter is also used to set that no blocking is to occur at pickup of the main protection. This also
applies if you have selected one or more zones/stages from the Blocking by parameter.

Blocking of the Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


Blocking of the tripping via the device-internal inrush-current detection is described in section
6.10.11.1 Description.

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings


If the following functions are present in the device, they can affect the dynamic settings Threshold and
Operate delay of the level:
• Automatic reclosing

• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.10.13.1 Description.

6.10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to the IEC or ANSI standard, select this
type of stage.

Parameter: Blocking by the main protection

• Default setting (_:140) Blocking by = none

• Default setting (_:131) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup


If you wish to give the selective fault clarification by the main protection function (for example, differential or
distance protection) priority over tripping by ground-fault protection, you can define this via both parameters.
The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or levels of the main protection function(s), upon
whose pickup the ground-fault protection is to be blocked.
The Blocking by prot. pickup parameter can be used to define the type of pickup, which leads to the
blocking.
Parameter Value Description
every pickup Blocking at every pickup
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-pole pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multipole pickup
no pickup No blocking at pickup of the main protection function

Parameter: Operating mode at 1-pole dead time

• Default setting (_:130) Op.mode at 1p dead time = blocked


The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is used to define the behavior of the stage in the event of a 1-pole
interruption.
Parameter Value Description
blocked As the load current also has a zero component in the 1-pole pause, a blocking
with this setting is advisable if the response threshold of the stage is less than /
equal to the maximum load current.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 685
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter Value Description


non-directional Select this setting if the ground-fault protection is to continue working in the 1-
pole pause, as a reliable direction measurement is not possible owing to load
current in the zero and negative-sequence system with 1-pole open circuit
breaker.
Set the response threshold of the stage greater than the maximum load
current.

Parameter: Hold mode for 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time

• Default setting (_:113) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s


The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is used to define the time by which the operating mode the event
of a 1-pole pause will be extended after the end of the 1-pole pause.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the parameterized operating
mode for a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole dead
time) until the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the
maximum time between connection of the 1st circuit breaker and connection of the last circuit breaker at all
ends of the feeder after a 1-pole pause.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:115) Directional mode = non-directional


You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage also works with this setting if no direction measurement is possible,
for example, owing to lower or no polarization voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = 1-cycle filter


Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the measurand is determined via a 1 or
2 cycle filter.
Parameter Value Description
1-cycle filter This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
2-cycle filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select the setting 2 cycle filter. Please note that in this case the pickup
time of the tripping level increases slightly (see Technical specifications).

Parameter: Stabilization with phase currents

• Recommended setting value (_:112) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %


In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold

686 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.

Dynamic Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1500 A


Define the pickup value corresponding to the application.
At a very sensitive setting, you must ensure that a residual current due to unbalance (for example, untwisted
line) does not cause the level to respond.

Parameter: Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:133) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


Select the type of characteristic curve specified for the system. The characteristic curves and the associated
formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

Dynamic Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:106) Time dial = 1.00


The time multiplier is derived from the grading chart for ground faults established for the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, note whether stage tripping is direction-dependent and whether
signal transmission is used. See also section 6.10.12 Signal Transmission and section 6.11.1 Overview of
Functions.
If you use a stage direction independently and with signal transmission, it can also have a non-delayed effect
during the release process. Parameterize a short delay for the blocking method equal to the signal-transmis-
sion time plus a reserve of approx. 20 ms.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Recommended setting value (_:132) Additional time delay = 0 s


This additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 so that it has no effect.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:134) Reset = instantaneous


You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Use this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical devices or
other devices, performing a dropout after disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation and
an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


Specify the parameter for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
yes The stage generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles of
the circuit breaker are to open is not made until the central trip command
control is involved.
no The stage always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 687
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:115 Inverse-T #:Directional • non-directional non-directional
mode • forward
• reverse
_:11 Inverse-T #:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
measurement • 2-cycle filter
_:117 Inverse-T #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:131 Inverse-T #:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:130 Inverse-T #:Op.mode at 1p • blocked blocked
dead time • non-directional
_:113 Inverse-T #:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:116 Inverse-T #:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:112 Inverse-T #:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:133 Inverse-T #:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:106 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:132 Inverse-T #:Additional time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
delay
_:134 Inverse-T #:Reset • instantaneous instantaneous
• disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:118 Inverse-T #:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:124 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:119 Inverse-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 1 • yes
_:125 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:101 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:107 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

688 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:120 Inverse-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 2 • yes
_:126 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:102 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:108 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:121 Inverse-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 3 • yes
_:127 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:103 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:109 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:122 Inverse-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:128 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:104 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:110 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:123 Inverse-T #:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:129 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:105 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:111 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:140 Inverse-T #:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

6.10.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 Inverse-T #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:62 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 689
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:63 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:64 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:65 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:67 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 Inverse-T #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 Inverse-T #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

690 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.6 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse


Characteristic Curve

6.10.6.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loggfp05-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-200 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection with
Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic Curve (AMZ-3I0-Log)

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 691
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.1 Description .

Operate Curve
Figure 6-201 shows the effect of the characteristic curve parameters qualitatively.
The Threshold parameter setting is the reference value for all current values. At the same time, the
Threshold multiplier parameter maps the beginning of the characteristic curve, that is, the lower oper-
ating range on the current axis in relation to the threshold value. The time value Max. time of the
curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 = threshold value). The Time dial
parameter changes the slope of the characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve
parameter indicates the lower time limit.

[loggfp04-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-201 Operate Curve

6.10.6.2 Application and Setting Notes


Apart from the characteristic curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with
inverse-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes .

Stage-Type Selection
If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.

Dynamic Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1500 A


Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for the time-graded stages, the setting
for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into account in the grading chart.

692 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter: Threshold multiplier

• Default setting (_:106) Threshold multiplier = 1.1


You can use the Threshold multiplier parameter to define the beginning of the characteristic curve on
the current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Dynamic Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:106) Time dial = 300 ms


You can use the Time dial parameter to change the slope of the characteristic curve.
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: Max. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:113) Max. time of the curve = 1.200 s


The time value Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 =
Threshold).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: Min. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:112) Min. time of the curve = 1.200 s


The time value Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

6.10.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:118 Log.-inv.-T #:Directional • non-directional non-directional
mode • forward
• reverse
_:11 Log.-inv.-T #:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of • 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
measurement • 2-cycle filter
_:120 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:134 Log.-inv.-T #:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:133 Log.-inv.-T #:Op.mode at • blocked blocked
1p dead time • non-directional
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:119 Log.-inv.-T #:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 693
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:3 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:106 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:6 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
_:112 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time of 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
the curve
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time of 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:121 Log.-inv.-T #:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:127 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:122 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 1 • yes
_:128 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:101 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:107 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:123 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 2 • yes
_:129 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:102 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:108 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:124 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle 3 • yes
_:130 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:103 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:109 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:125 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by AR • no no
cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:131 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:104 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:110 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s

694 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.set: bin.input
_:126 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:132 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked • no no
• yes
_:105 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:111 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
_:140 Log.-inv.-T #:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

6.10.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 Log.-inv.-T #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 Log.-inv.-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:62 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:63 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:64 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:65 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:67 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 695
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.7 Stage with S0 Characteristic Curve

6.10.7.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loggfp10-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-202 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence System Power-Dependent
Time Delay (S0 Inverse)

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.1 Description .

696 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Operate Curve
Figure 6-203 shows the operate curve of the stage.
The zero-sequence system power protection operates according to a power-dependent operate curve.
The zero-sequence system power is calculated from the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence system
current. The Sr component in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle φcomp is definitive. This
component is designated as a compensated zero power.
Sr = 3I0 · 3V0 · cos(φ-φcomp) with φ = φV0– φI0
φ comp therefore indicates the direction of maximum sensitivity (cos(φ– φ comp) = 1, if φ = φ comp). The power
calculation automatically contains the direction via its sign information. Reversing the signs also allows the
power for the reverse direction to be determined. Figure 6-209 represents the direction-characteristic curve.
The tripping time results according to the equation:

[fogfp003-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The power-time characteristic curve can be shifted with the reference value Sref (S ref for Sr-charac-
teristic = basic value for the inverse characteristic curve for φ = φcomp) in power direction. The power-
time characteristic curve can be shifted in the time direction by the factor k-fact. for Sr-character..
You can set additional power-dependent delays with the time setting Additional time delay.

[loggfp11-250111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-203 Operate Curve

6.10.7.2 Application and Setting Notes


Apart from the characteristic curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with
inverse-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes .

Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero power according to an inverse characteristic curve, select
this stage type.

Parameter: Compensation angle

• Default setting (_:2311:108) Compensation angle = 255°


The Compensation angle setting is used to define the direction of maximum sensitivity.
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 697
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter: k-fact. for Sr-character.

• Default setting (_:102) k-fact. for Sr-character. = 0.500 s


The k-fact. for Sr-character. parameter can be used to shift the power-time characteristic curve on
the time line.
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: S ref for Sr-characteristic

• Default setting (_:103) S ref for Sr-characteristic = 10 VA


The S ref for Sr-characteristic parameter can be used to shift the power-time characteristic curve
on the power axis.
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Default setting (_:104) Additional time delay = 1.200 s


You can set additional power-dependent delays with the Additional time delay parameter.
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

6.10.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 S0 inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 S0 inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:108 S0 inverse-T #:Directional • non-directional non-directional
mode • forward
• reverse
_:11 S0 inverse-T #:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:8 S0 inverse-T #:Method of • 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
measurement • 2-cycle filter
_:109 S0 inverse-T #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:111 S0 inverse-T #:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:106 S0 inverse-T #:Hold mode 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
1p dead time
_:105 S0 inverse-T #:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:3 S0 inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:101 S0 inverse-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:102 S0 inverse-T #:k-fact. for Sr- 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.500 s
character.
_:103 S0 inverse-T #:S ref for Sr- 1A 0.84 VA to 100.00 VA 17.32 VA
characteristic 5A 4.20 VA to 500.00 VA 86.61 VA

698 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:104 S0 inverse-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
time delay
_:140 S0 inverse-T #:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

6.10.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 S0 inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 S0 inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 S0 inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 S0 inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 S0 inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 S0 inverse-T #:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 S0 inverse-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:55 S0 inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 S0 inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 S0 inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 699
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.8 Stage with U0 Characteristic Curve

6.10.8.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo gfp stage V0 invers 1-/3-pol, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-204 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage-Dependent Time Delay
(V0 Inverse)

700 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Measurands
The device measures the residual voltage. The measured voltage is converted to the zero-sequence voltage V0.
If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand from the broken-delta winding, the zero-
sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC:

[fo_U0 nullspannung, 1, en_US]

The zero-sequence current is used as a measurand. The zero-sequence current is calculated its definition equa-
tion from the sum of the 3 phase currents.

[fo_I0 nullstrom, 1, en_US]

Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the zero-sequence current can be measured or
calculated.
If you connect a current input to the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (zero-sequence current) will be directly
available to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device calculates the
zero-sequence current from the phase currents.

Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the fundamental component via 2-cycle filter


This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. Harmonics and transient faults are damped particularly strongly over the
extended filter length in comparison to the standard filter. The extended filter length causes the pickup
time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see Technical data).

Stabilization with Phase Currents


In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise (see next graphic).
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 701
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-205 Stabilization with Phase Currents

Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description).

Voltage-Dependent Operate Curve


The voltage-dependent operate curve is based on the following formula:

[fo_U0 kennl, 1, en_US]

with
V0 Actually occurring zero-sequence voltage
V0 min Setting value of the parameter Min. zero-seq. volt. V0

The following figure shows the voltage-dependent characteristic curve of the V0-inverse stage:

[dw-GFP-kennl, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-206 Parameter of the Voltage-Dependent Characteristic Curve of the V0-Inverse Stage (without
Additional Times)

702 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

The operate time depends on the value of the zero-sequence voltage. In meshed, grounded systems, the zero-
sequence voltage increases towards the location of the ground fault. Due to the inverse characteristic curve,
the operate time decreases with rising zero-sequence voltage.
The V0> threshold value parameter defines the lower voltage limit (dotted line c in Figure 6-206). The
lower voltage limit c cuts off the characteristic curve b.
The Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direc-
tion of V0.
The Time delay directional parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direction
of time.
The setting value of the Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter is the asymptote a´ of the characteristic
curve a for t → ∞.
Processing the inverse characteristic curve after exceeding the threshold value V0> threshold value can
be delayed by the time set in the Time delay directional parameter.

Blocking of the Stage Pickup


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage (see Figure 6-195).

Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


Blocking of the tripping via the device-internal inrush-current detection is described in chapter
6.10.11.1 Description.

6.10.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero-sequence voltage according to an inverse characteristic
curve, select this stage type.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:108) Directional mode = forward


You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
forward Select this setting if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direction
of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).
non-directional Select this setting if the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in
the direction of the line and busbar).
The stage also works with this setting if no direction measurement is possible,
for example, owing to lower or no polarization voltage.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting 1-pole operate allowed = no


Specify the parameter for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
yes The stage generates a phase-selective operate indication. The decision as to
which poles of the circuit breaker to open is not made until the central trip-
command control becomes involved.
no The stage always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 703
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Default setting (_:8) Method of measurement = 1-cycle filter


Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the measurand is determined via a 1- or 2-
cycle filter.
Parameter Value Description
1-cycle filter This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
2-cycle filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select the setting 2-cycle filter. Note that in this case, the pickup time of
the stage increases slightly (see Technical specifications).

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:109) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the V0-inverse stage is
blocked or not blocked during the detection of the transformer inrush current.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application.

Parameter: Blocking by the Main Protection

• Default setting (_:140) Blocking by = none

• Default setting (_:111) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup


If you wish to give the selective fault clarification by the main protection function (for example, differential or
distance protection) priority over tripping by ground-fault protection, you can define this via both parameters.
The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or stages of the main protection function(s), upon
whose pickup the ground-fault protection is to be blocked.
The Blocking by prot. pickup parameter can be used to define the type of pickup, which leads to the
blocking.
Parameter Value Description
every pickup Blocking at every pickup
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-phase pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multiphase pickup
no pickup No blocking at pickup of the main protection function

Related Topics
6.10.11.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Hold mode 1p dead time

• Default setting (_:106) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s


With the Hold mode 1p dead time parameter you define the time by which the behavior during a 1-pole
dead time is extended.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the device-internal signal for
a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole dead time) until
the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the maximum time
between the connection of the 1st circuit breaker and the connection of the last circuit breaker at all ends of
the feeder after a 1-pole dead time.

Parameter: Stabiliz. w. phase current

• Default setting (_:105) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %

704 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10 % under normal conditions.

Parameter: Threshold 3I0

• Default setting (_:101) Threshold 3I0 = 1.000 A


With the Threshold 3I0 parameter, you define the pickup value for the zero-sequence current. Set the
Threshold 3I0 lower than the minimum ground-fault current.
Define the pickup value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:102) V0> threshold value = 1.667 V


With the V0> threshold value parameter, you set the lower voltage limit of the voltage-dependent
operate curve (see Figure 6-206). The lower voltage limit cuts off the characteristic curve.

Parameter: Min. zero-seq. volt. V0

• Default setting (_:103) Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 = 0.200 V


With the Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter, you shift the voltage-dependent characteristic curves in
the direction of V0 (see Figure 6-206).

Parameter: Time delay directional

• Default setting (_:104) Time delay directional = 0.90 s


With the Time delay directional parameter, you shift the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the
direction of time (see Figure 6-206).

Parameter: Time delay non-direct.

• Default setting (_:112) Time delay non-direct. = 1.20 s


With the Time delay non-direct. parameter, you can set additional direction-independent time delays.
The level of the zero-sequence voltage does not affect the previously set time delay.
Define the value corresponding to the application.

6.10.8.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V0 inverse-T #
_:1 V0 inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 V0 inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:108 V0 inverse-T #:Direc- • non-directional forward
tional mode • forward
• reverse
_:11 V0 inverse-T #:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 705
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8 V0 inverse-T #:Method • 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
of measurement • 2-cycle filter
_:109 V0 inverse-T #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:111 V0 inverse-T #:Blocking • every pickup every pickup
by prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:106 V0 inverse-T #:Hold 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
mode 1p dead time
_:105 V0 inverse-T #:Stabiliz. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
w. phase current
_:101 V0 inverse-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
3I0 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 17.500 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 87.500 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 0.560 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 2.800 A 5.000 A
_:102 V0 inverse-T #:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 1.667 V
threshold value
_:103 V0 inverse-T #:Min. zero- 0.000 V to 200.000 V 0.200 V
seq. volt. V0
_:104 V0 inverse-T #:Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.90 s
delay directional
_:112 V0 inverse-T #:Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.20 s
delay non-direct.
_:140 V0 inverse-T #:Blocking Setting options depend on
by configuration

6.10.8.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V0 inverse-T #
_:81 V0 inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 V0 inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V0 inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V0 inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 V0 inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 V0 inverse-T #:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 V0 inverse-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:55 V0 inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V0 inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V0 inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

6.10.9 Direction Determination

6.10.9.1 Description
The direction determination works across stages. Various methods are available for determining the direction
and for increasing the accuracy of the determination.

706 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

The following diagram shows which variables and settings are used for direction determination.

[logfpri1-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-207 Logic Diagram for Direction Determination

Method for Direction Determination


Use the Polarization with parameter to define the method and variables with which the direction deter-
mination works:
• V0 + IY or V2 + I2 (direction determination with zero-sequence system/transformer neutral-point
current or negative-sequence system)

• V0 + IY (neutral pt.) (direction determination with zero-sequence system/transformer neutral-


point current)

• IY (neutral pt.) only (direction determination with transformer neutral-point current)

• V2 + I2 (neg. seq.) (direction determination with negative-sequence system)

• zero-sequence power (direction determination with zero-system power)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 707
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

The individual methods are described in more detail below.


The device automatically selects a suitable method with the V0 + IY or V2 + I2 setting.

Direction Determination with Current/Voltage Zero-Sequence Variables/Transformer Neutral-Point Current


The forward and backward range is defined by the 2 parameters Angle forward β and Angle forward α
(see also Figure 6-209). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
defined positively in a mathematical sense (that is, counter-clockwise). The range between the limit angle α,
starting in a mathematically positive direction, and the limit angle β is the forward range. The remaining range
is the backward range.
The direction is determined from the measuring current IN and a reference voltage Vp. If no transformer
neutral-point current is connected to the device, the reference voltage Vp is the zero-sequence voltage V0.
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from its definition equation:

Depending on the device connection, it is measured or calculated. If a voltage input is connected at the
broken-delta winding Vdadn of a voltage-transformer set, the device will use this voltage with consideration of
the Matching ratio Vph / VN (see chapter 8.3.9.3 Function Description). Otherwise the device calcu-
lates the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
If the neutral-point current IY of a grounded transformer (supply transformer) is connected, the reference
voltage VP is the sum of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and a variable proportional to the neutral-point current
IY (see Figure 6-208). This corresponds to 20 V at the rated current. With the setting IY (neutral pt.)
only, VP is only derived from the transformer neutral-point current.
To determine the direction, the device sets the measuring current IN (= -3I0) to the real axis. If the phasor of
the reference voltage VP is within the defined forward range, the device determines the direction as forward.
In other cases, the device determines the direction as backward.
As a prerequisite for direction determination, the adjustable minimum variables for the zero-sequence voltage
or the transformer neutral-point current must be exceeded (parameters Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and
Min. neutral-point curr. IY).
If the device detects a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit, the direction determination is
prevented with V0. If the transformer neutral-point current is connected to the device, the direction can be
determined via this.

708 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[logfpri2-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-208 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Variables

Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence Variables


This method works in the same way as the direction determination with zero-sequence current and zero-
sequence voltage. Instead of 3I0 and V0, the negative-sequence variables I2 and V2 are used for the measure-
ment. These measurands must also have a Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 and a Min. neg.-seq.
current I2.

Direction Determination with Zero-System Power


The zero-system power can also be used for the direction determination. The sign of the compensated zero-
system power is then crucial. This is the component mentioned in chapter 6.10.7.1 Description under operate
curve Sr of the zero-system power in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle φcomp, that is, Sr = 3I0 ·
3U0 · cos(φ – φcomp).
The direction determination yields:
• Forward, if Sr positive and |Sr| > Forw. dir. power threshold
• Backward, if Sr negative and |Sr| > Forw. dir. power threshold

Determining the direction requires a minimum residual voltage that can be set as Min. zero-seq.
voltage V0. Another prerequisite is that the compensated zero power must have an adjustable minimum
value (parameter Forw. dir. power threshold).
The following figure shows an example of the direction characteristic curve.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 709
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[logfpri4-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-209 Direction-Characteristic Curve for Direction Determination with Zero-System Power

Measuring-Voltage Failure, 1-Pole Pause


If the device detects a fault in the voltage transformer secondary circuit or a 1-pole dead time, the direction
determination is prevented.
Method for Direction Determina- Response to the Measuring-Voltage Failure and 1-Pole Pause
tion
V0 + IY or V2 + I2 If IY is unavailable, the readiness (Health) does not change and the
directional stages become inactive.
V0 + IY (neutral pt.) If IY is unavailable, the readiness (Health) does not change and the
directional stages become inactive.
IY (neutral pt.) only No change of the directional stages
V2 + I2 (neg. seq.) If IY is unavailable, the readiness (Health) does not change and the
directional stages become inactive.
zero-sequence power Readiness (Health) does not change and the directional stages become
inactive

Increased Directional Sensitivity at Low V0 Voltage


The following figure shows the principle for increasing the directional sensitivity.

710 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[logfpri5-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-210 Principle of Increased Directional Sensitivity at Low V0 Voltage

The V0 voltage at a ground fault with direction = backward is determined with the following equation:
V0F0=backward = I0 · (Z0trf + Z0L)
This equation can be used to determine a I0 threshold with corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0 threshold is
exceeded, the measured V0 voltage at a backward fault must exceed the corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0
threshold is exceeded and the measured V0 voltage is less than the V0 threshold, the direction = forward can
thus be determined.
The method can improve the directional sensitivity in the case of long lines (large Z0L).
Switch on this functionality via the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min parameter.
If the measured V0 voltage falls below the minimum value Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and 3I0 exceeds
the current threshold Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens., the decision is for forward.

Direction Determination for Lines with Series Compensation


The direction determination/direction-characteristic curve of the ground-fault protection is based on the
assumption of a mainly inductive zero-sequence impedance. In case of a series-compensated line this assump-
tion does not apply anymore. According to the degree of compensation, the zero-sequence impedance is
more or less influenced regarding its capacity. If the capacitor is located on the busbar side of the voltage
transformer the situation is especially unfavorable.
In case of a series compensation on the line you can adjust the direction of the measured zero-sequence
voltage V0meas. Perform the adjustment with the Dir.corr.at ser.comp.lines parameter. Set the data
necessary for the adjustment (reactance of the capacitor bank) in the function group Line (see chapter
5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes).
In case of faults on the protected line, the zero-sequence voltage with series compensation consists of 2
components: the voltage drop on the source impedance (mainly inductive) and the voltage drop on the series
capacitor.
If the capacity of the series capacitor is known (and constant), the voltage drop on the series capacitor can be
determined according to the following formula:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 711
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

with

XC0 Parameter Series capacit. reactance in the function group Line

[dw_corr_series_comp_direction_with-0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-211 Adjustment of the Series Compensation for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence
System

The voltage drop on the series capacitor VC0 is subtracted from the measured voltage 3V0meas. The resulting
voltage 3V0Dir is then assigned to the direction-characteristic curve of the ground-fault protection (see
Figure 6-211).

6.10.9.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Polarization with

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:114) Polarization with = V0 + IY or V2 + I2

NOTE

i If a teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection is used, it must be ensured that the direction meas-
urement at all line ends is carried out using the same procedure. The setting for the Polarization with
parameter must be the same at all line ends. If a device is used at a line end that does not have all the
setting options, then the direction measurement must be limited to a single procedure that is possible at all
line ends, for example, only V0 (setting option V0 + IY (neutral pt.)).

Parameter Value Description


V0 + IY or V2 + I2 The default setting V0 + IY or V2 + I2 is universal. The device auto-
matically selects the best (largest) measured value for direction determina-
tion. You can also use this setting if the transformer neutral-point current IY
is not connected to the device.
Siemens recommends using this setting (see note on teleprotection
scheme).
V0 + IY (neutral pt.) If the direction determination is to be deliberately imposed via negative-
sequence variables (V2 and I2), select this setting. You can also use this
setting irrespective of whether the transformer neutral-point current IY is
connected to the device or not. If the transformer neutral-point current is
not connected to the device, the direction measurement only operates with
V0.
For the teleprotection scheme, it can be necessary to carry out the direction
measurement with the zero-sequence system only if a device only provides
this option at the opposite end.

712 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter Value Description


IY (neutral pt.) only This setting can be advisable if a transformer neutral-point current IY is reli-
ably available at the device input at any time. The direction determination is
then not affected by faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage trans-
former. It also works if there is a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary
circuit.
However, this setting requires that ground-fault currents are at least
predominantly fed via the transformer whose neutral-point current is meas-
ured.
V2 + I2 (neg. seq.) Select this setting if you only wish to determine the direction with the nega-
tive-sequence system values I2 and V2.
If zero-sequence voltages occur during ground faults, which are too low for
analysis of the zero-sequence variables, direction determination with nega-
tive-sequence system values is advantageous.
Direction determination with negative-sequence system values is also
advantageous if, for example, parallel lines falsify the zero-sequence varia-
bles through mutual coupling.
You can also use these settings if the zero-sequence voltage is not available
in the device.
zero-sequence power This setting is intended for special applications.

Parameters: Limit angle of the forward range

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Angle forward β = 122°

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Angle forward α = 338°


You can use the Angle forward β and the Angle forward α parameters for all methods based on the
angular measurement between the measuring and reference value which change the position of the direc-
tion-characteristic curve. Only the method for determining the direction via the zero power is excluded.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, as the function reliably determines the direction of ground
faults with this.

Parameter: Directional Correction with Series Compensation

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:116) Dir.corr.at ser.comp.lines = no

Parameter Value Description


no If no series compensation is
used on the line, set this
parameter to no.
yes If a series compensation is
used on the line, set this
parameter to yes. Direction
determination is then
corrected using V0.

Parameter: Minimum zero-sequence voltage V0

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 0.15 V


You can use the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter to define the minimum zero-sequence voltage
for the direction determination with V0. The minimum zero-sequence voltage V0 must be set greater than the
maximum operational unbalance (zero-sequence system) plus voltage-transformer measuring errors. As the
measuring error of the individual voltage transformers in the zero-sequence system is not added up, the crit-
ical measuring error influence is the unbalance of the primary system.
Siemens recommends observing the operational zero-sequence voltage V0 of the protected object (for
example, the line) via the operational measured values of the device and providing the maximum value with a
certainty of 20 %.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 713
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 1.2 · max. operational measured value of voltage zero-sequence
system V0
Example:
Max. operational measured value of voltage zero-sequence system V0 = 0.5 Vsec
Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 1.2 0.5 V = 0.60 Vsec
The setting value refers to the zero-sequence voltage V0 according to the definition equation and not to 3V0,
as with the SIPROTEC 4 devices.

Parameter: Minimum neutral-point current IY

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:105) Min. neutral-point curr. IY = 0.05 A


The Min. neutral-point curr. IY parameter is used to set the lower threshold for the reference
current from the neutral point of a supply transformer. You can set the value relatively sensitive (see recom-
mended setting value), as the neutral-point current detection is naturally accurate.

Parameters: Minimum negative-sequence variables V2 and I2

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:107) Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 = 0.7 V

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:106) Min. neg.-seq. current I2 = 0.05 A


The parameters are used to define the minimum negative-sequence system values for determining the direc-
tion with V2 and I2. The set limiting values must not be exceeded by operational unbalances.

Parameter: Compensation angle

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:108) Compensation angle = 255°


The Compensation angle parameter is used to set the angle of the maximum sensitivity, cos(φ - φcomp) = 1,
if φ = φcomp.
The default setting 255° therefore corresponds to a zero-impedance angle of 75° (255° – 180°). Siemens
recommends using the default settings, as the direction of ground faults is determined reliably with this.

Parameter: Forward direction power threshold

• Default setting (_:2311:109) Forw. dir. power threshold = 0.3 VA


The Forw. dir. power threshold parameter is used to define the value of the compensated zero-
system power, above which the direction is detected as forward. To ensure direction determination even at
low zero-system powers, this value is to be below the reference power S ref for Sr-characteristic
(see chapter 6.10.7.1 Description).

Parameter: Direction result = forward at V0 < minimum zero-sequence voltage

• Default setting (_:2311:115) Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min = no


With long lines it may be the case that the zero-sequence voltage at a remote fault is too low on the line to be
protected. This is due to the high ratio between the zero-sequence impedance of the line and the supply
(source). If the setting for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter is fallen below, it will no longer be
possible to determine the direction by angular measurement. In the case of reverse faults in long lines, the
zero-sequence voltage cannot drop so sharply if the set 3I0 threshold value (Min.3I0
f.increas.dir.sens. parameter) is exceeded.
Parameter Value Description
no If the direction has to remain undetermined under the described condition
and a stage pickup is not therefore possible in a directional stage, you
should select the setting no.
yes If the direction has to be automatically detected as forwards under the
described condition, you should select the setting yes.

714 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter: Minimum zero-sequence current 3I0 for increased directional sensitivity

• Default setting (_:2311:104) Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens. = 0.05 A


The Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens. parameter only has to be set if the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min
parameter has been set to yes.
Then calculate the setting value with the following equation (see also Figure 6-210):

[fofrbest-060110-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In this equation, V0 is the setting value for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter. SM is a reserve
(for example, 1.2).

6.10.10 Phase Selection

As the ground-fault protection works with the zero-sequence or negative-sequence values, direct determina-
tion of the ground fault is not possible. To be able to implement 1-pole automatic reclosing despite high-resis-
tance ground faults, the ground fault protection has a phase selector. The phase selection detects whether a
1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred with the distribution of the currents. The phase selection
detects which phase is affected in the case of a 1-phase short circuit.
The phase selection filters the negative-sequence and the zero-sequence out of the phase currents. The fault
type, that is, whether a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred, is determined from the phase displace-
ment between the negative-sequence current and the zero-sequence current. The phase currents, purged of
the load current, are also evaluated from this. This utilizes the fact that, in the case of a 1-phase short circuit,
the healthy conductors can only conduct either no fault currents at all or only in-phase fault currents.
The phase selection has an action time of approx. 40 ms. If the phase selection is unable to make a decision in
this time, 3-phase is signaled.

6.10.11 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection

6.10.11.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The S0 inverse stage and the V0 inverse stage do not pick up. The start of the time delay and
tripping are blocked. The stage signals this by way of a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite time-overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 715
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

[loggfp13-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-212 Partial Logic Diagram for the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage

6.10.11.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blocking with Inrush-Current Detection

• Default setting (_:4861:116) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

Parameter Value Description


no The transformer inrush current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
1) In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
2) In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This typically applies for the high-current stage. The high-current
stage is set corresponding to the short-circuit voltage uk of the transformer
so that it only responds to high-voltage side faults. The transformer-inrush
current cannot become larger than the maximum transmittable short-circuit
current.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current
that can lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and trip-
ping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.

6.10.12 Signal Transmission

You can extend the ground-fault protection by means of the integrated signal-transmission logic for direc-
tional comparison protection. You can find more detailed information on the possible transmission methods
and their function in section 6.11.1 Overview of Functions.

716 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

6.10.13 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings

6.10.13.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings (DS).
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-213). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically.

[lodynpar-260111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-213 Principle of Dynamic Settings in the Example of the 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage

If the following functionalities are available in the device, they can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3

These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the protection stage
or block it, if necessary. In the latter case, the settings for the threshold value and time delay are of no rele-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 717
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

vance. To each of the signals, the overcurrent-protection stage provides a configuration parameter Affected
by function... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration
settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, that is, whether the dynamic settings should
be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take
effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly active. This means that the setting
assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes inactive, the standard settings apply
again. Activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Where several signals are active in parallel, the specified priority applies. This means that a signal with priority
1 has precedence over a signal with priority 2. The settings assigned to signal 1 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.

718 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Connection to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing

[loeinawe-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-214 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the threshold value and time delay of the protection stage and
its blocking:
• AREC is ready for 1st reclosing (= AREC cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for 2nd reclosing (= AREC cycle 2)

• AREC is ready for 3rd reclosing (= AREC cycle 3)

• AREC is ready for 4th reclosing (= AREC cycle >3)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 719
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

The following signal can only block the protection stage:


• AREC is switched off or not ready (= AREC off/not ready)
You can activate the influence individually for each signal. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.15.2 Structure of the Function.

Connection to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection

[logfpkal-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-215 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the tripping stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters
or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way the Cold-load pickup signal is generated is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup
Detection (Optional) .

Connection to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal

[loeinbin-270111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-216 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the tripping stage. To do so, you must
activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay parame-
ters or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.

6.10.13.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Dynamic settings

• Default setting (_:4861:115) Dynamic settings = no

Parameter Value Description


no The influence on the protection stage by device-internal or external func-
tions is not necessary.

720 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

Parameter Value Description


yes If a device-internal function (for example, Automatic reclosing function) or
an external function is to affect the protection stage (for example, change
to the setting of the threshold value or the time delay, blocking of the
stage), it is necessary to set it to yes.
In this way, the configuration parameters Affected by function... as
well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay, and Stage
blocked of the stage are visible and you can parameterize the specific
influence.

Further application and setting notes can be found in the Overcurrent protection, phases and function in
chapter 6.16.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 721
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

6.11.1 Overview of Functions

Information is exchanged with the remote station so that the ground-fault protection switches off immedi-
ately and selectively on the entire line for all errors. You can implement the teleprotection through reception
and transmission contacts or through a digital communication connection.

6.11.2 Structure of Function

The Teleprotection methods are used in Protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in combina-
tion with the Ground-fault protection function. The methods of the function illustrated in the following figure
are available.

[dwtestru-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-217 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Figure 6-218 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the ground-fault protection and creates the respective
transmission signal for the transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is coupled either through:
• Binary Input
• Unblock logic

• Communication
For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1 and Rec.unblk.sig#
are available multiple times, once for each removed line end.
The stage parameterized for the teleprotection method delivers the pickup information. This pickup informa-
tion is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled, the tele-
protection method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.

722 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

[lotefste-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-218 Function Blocks and Function Control

In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection method are described. Detailed informa-
tion about the function control can be found in chapter 2.3 Function Control.

6.11.3 Receipt blocks

For the coupling of reception signals from opposite ends, the 3 reception block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Unblock reception and Protection interface reception are available. The teleprotection schemes described
in the following can be operated with the suitable reception blocks as needed.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 723
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

Reception Block Binary

[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-219 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Binary Reception

If the communication occurs through binary signals, this reception logic is used. If a teleprotection scheme is
configured, for example, with altogether 3 ends, 2 function blocks Reception are required.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity for double ground faults can be improved on parallel lines if
3 phase-selective transmission signals can be transferred per communication direction. The receipt signals can
thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as individual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-218.

Reception Block Unblock

[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-220 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Unblock Reception

You can use the teleprotection schemes optionally with the unblocking method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.

724 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

The unblocking method is preferred under the following conditions:


• With long lines
• If the signal is transmitted via TFH (power line carrier transmission) through the line that is to be
protected

• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so large that the reception from
the other line end is not provided
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 reception signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the reception of the trip logic of the teleprotection scheme is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded to
the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-218.

Reception Block Protection Interface

[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-221 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Protection Interface

If the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital), this receipt logic is used. Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The
number and the identity of the devices that participate in the teleprotection scheme for protection of the line
configuration can be set in the function group Protection-data communication under Device configuration.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 725
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

NOTE

i Note that the teleprotection scheme requires a minimum bandwidth for communication via a protection
interface.
If the Line differential protection function is available in the device, the bit rate cannot be lower than
512 Kbps.

6.11.4 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

6.11.4.1 Description

[dwtevgve-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-222 Function Block: Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

If the ground-fault protection recognizes a fault in a forward direction, a send signal will be sent to the oppo-
site end. If the fault is also recognized in the forward direction, the received signal in the device on the oppo-
site end will lead to an increased trip.

Sending Logic Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

[loteseve-310511-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-223 Sending Logic for Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

With the parameters Send with, you can select which stage of the ground-fault protection affects the send
signal. The send condition is fulfilled if the selected stage - or stages - are picked up in a forward direction. If
the protection has already submitted a trip command, the send signal can be prolongated by a set time (_:
5761:101) Send prolongation. This allows for the release of the other cable end even if the short circuit

726 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

is very quickly switched off. With this, pickup differences between the cable ends and signal delays can be
considered.
If needed, the send signal can be delayed with (_:5761:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). The detailed description can be found in chapter 6.11.6.1 Description . No send signal is sent in
the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity of the permissive overreach transfer trip for double ground
faults can be improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective send signals are transferred per communication
direction. Send and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly as
individual signals (general).

Trip Logic Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

[loteausv-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-224 Trip Logic for Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection scheme with which the ground-fault protection collabo-
rates.
If a reception signal is present, the stage set through the parameter (_:5761:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. You can set the time delay under Send delay.
With the parameter (_:5761:11) 1-pole operate allowed, the tripping logic can allow for 1-pole trip
in 1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive overreach transfer trip for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is
used, the reception signals from all line ends are combined for the trip with AND.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 727
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

A trip signal results from the simultaneous presence of


• Stage pickup
• Release signal

• Expired time
For applications with delayed trip, a non-recurring receipt signal is only kept until the stage pickup returns.
Through this, it is guaranteed that the release signal is also present if the time-out of the corresponding time
delay releases the trip and the send signal of the protection of the opposite end is no longer imminent.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
overreach transfer trip. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by
a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The detailed
description can be found in chapter 6.11.6.1 Description .

Measures in the Event of Weak Infeed


If no or only a weak infeed is available at a line end, the protection does not pick up the phase information or
it does so incorrectly. With this, neither a trip command nor a send signal can be sent. With the permissive
overreach transfer trip, the line end cannot be tripped quickly with increased infeed, because no release signal
is transferred from the end with the weak infeed.
In order to allow for a quick disconnection on both cable ends in such cases, the teleprotection schemes have
special measures:
• For the trip of the cable end with a strong infeed, the echo function can be made effective with a weak
infeed.

• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection schemes have a func-
tion for trip with weak infeed.
The functions are described in detail in the chapter Echo and Tripping in the event of weak infeed.

6.11.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Comparison Procedures
The various comparison procedures can be implemented by using both parameters Send with and Operate
with (see Figure 6-223 and Figure 6-224) . Additionally, you must observe the selection of the reception
block.
The following methods can be ordered:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
Ground-fault comparison proce- One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
dure
Ground-fault unblock procedure One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
(unblock logic as a reception block)

Parameter: Send prolongation

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:101) Send prolongation = 0.05 s


With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compare the differences in the
pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC devices are used on all cable ends, Siemens recommends the
setting value 0.05 s.

Parameter: Send delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:102) Send delay = 0.00 s


With the parameter Send delay, you can set an additional tripping delay. Since the teleprotection method
should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting value 0.00 s.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes

728 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

With the parameter 1-pole operate allowed, you allow 1-pole trip of the teleprotection method for 1-
phase faults or multi-phase faults and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole trip, Siemens recommends the
setting yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.

6.11.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method


If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in the cable direction after a pickup, it will transmit a release
signal to the opposite end. If the opposite end receives the release signal and also recognizes an error in the
cable direction, the trip signal is created.

[dwtevgvf-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-225 Function Scheme of the Directional Comparison Procedure

With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:140) Send with = ground-fault stage


With the parameter Send with, you can select one or multiple stages of the ground-fault protection as trans-
mission criteria. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to them in the
ground-fault protection.

Parameter: (_:5761:141) Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:141) Operate with = ground-fault stage


With the settings Operate with, select the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection that leads to
trip during signal reception. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to
them in the ground-fault protection.

6.11.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Unblocking Method


The directional unblock method corresponds with the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme with a preset
function block Receive Unblock. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme, a tripping
is also possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional-unblocking method cannot be
operated with a communication through a protection interface (WS) due to its function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 729
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

[dwteublv-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-226 Function Scheme of the Directional-Unblocking Method

With the following settings, you can configure the directional-unblocking method:

Parameter: Send with

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:140) Send with = ground-fault stage


With the parameter Send with, you can select one or multiple stages of the ground-fault protection as trans-
mission criteria. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to them in the
ground-fault protection.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5761:141) Operate with = ground-fault stage


With the settings Operate with, select the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection that leads to
trip during signal reception. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to
them in the ground-fault protection.

6.11.4.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


85-67N Dir.com
_:5761:1 85-67N Dir.com:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:5761:101 85-67N Dir.com:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5761:102 85-67N Dir.com:Send delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5761:105 85-67N Dir.com:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5761:106 85-67N Dir.com:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5761:104 85-67N Dir.com:3I0 0 % to 100 % 75 %
threshold rev./forw.
_:5761:11 85-67N Dir.com:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes

730 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:5761:103 85-67N Dir.com:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5761:140 85-67N Dir.com:Send with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5761:141 85-67N Dir.com:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
_:5761:142 85-67N Dir.com:Trans. Setting options depend on
block. with configuration

6.11.4.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
85-67N Dir.com
_:5761:81 85-67N Dir.com:>Block stage SPS I
_:5761:501 85-67N Dir.com:>Blocking echo SPS I
_:5761:502 85-67N Dir.com:>Blk. weak infeed trip SPS I
_:5761:54 85-67N Dir.com:Inactive SPS O
_:5761:52 85-67N Dir.com:Behavior ENS O
_:5761:53 85-67N Dir.com:Health ENS O
_:5761:305 85-67N Dir.com:Send ACT O
_:5761:302 85-67N Dir.com:Send signal is echo SPS O
_:5761:303 85-67N Dir.com:Weak infeed trip oper. SPS O
_:5761:301 85-67N Dir.com:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5761:308 85-67N Dir.com:Pickup 3I0 ACD O
_:5761:56 85-67N Dir.com:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5761:57 85-67N Dir.com:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 731
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

6.11.5 Blocking Method

6.11.5.1 Description

[dwtefblo-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-227 Function Block: Blocking Method

If the protection function recognizes a ground fault in the backward direction, the blocking signal is sent to
the opposite end (signal Blocking). If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving
line end, it generates the trip signal after a short time delay.

Transmission Logic

[lotesblk-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-228 Transmission Logic for the Blocking Method

The blocking signal is created in the event of pickup of the ground-fault protection in the backward or non-
directional direction. The threshold value for creation of the blocking signal is the percentage of the threshold
value of the level that affects tripping in the blocking procedure. The percentage is set with the parameter (_:
5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. in the teleprotection method. Further information can be
found in the section 6.11.7.1 Description .

732 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5791:101) Send prolonga-
tion , you can extend the blocking signal. Even if the error has already been cleared up locally, the opposite
end can continue to be blocked through this.
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5791:102) Send
with jump ). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the ground-
fault protection recognizes an error in the forward direction, the blocking signal is immediately stopped and
the indication Stop is created.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or phase-
jointly as individual signals.

Trip Logic Blocking Method

[loteaubv-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-229 Trip Logic for the Blocking Method

The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection method with which the ground-fault protection works
together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5791:140) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip of the blocking method must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup
times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. You can set the time delay with
the parameter (_:5791:107) Release delay .
The tripping can be delayed. You can set the time delay under (_:5761:102) Send delay .

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 733
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

The operate indication results for the simultaneous presence


• of the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection
• of the internal release signal

• of the time expirations


No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. In order to make sure that the pickup of the
selected stage(s) does not switch the exterior errors on the opposite end, the trip is blocked for upcoming
reception signals.
If the blocking procedure for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the recep-
tion signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
With the parameter (_:5791:11) 1-pole operate allowed , the trip logic can allow for 1-pole trip in
1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.

Measures in the Event of Weak Infeed


For the blocking procedure, there is not possibility, depending on the procedure, to achieve a trip command
release through the opposite end with a weak infeed. The advantage of the blocking procedure is instead that
there can be a trip on the infeed end without a release, because the end not being fed in cannot form a
blocking signal.

6.11.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Method


The blocking method is often used:
• If the signal is transmitted with TFH through the protected line and if the attenuation of the transmission
signal at the fault location is so large that the reception from the other cable end cannot be guaranteed.

• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a backward direction, a blocking signal is transmitted. If
the other cable end does not receive a blocking signal, the ground-fault protection trips in a forward direction
in the case of a ground-fault current. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end, single infeed
short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking method.

[dwteblve-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-230 Function Scheme of the Blocking Method

Parameter: Send with jump

• Recommended setting value (_:5791:102) Send with jump = Yes

734 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.

Parameter: Send prolongation

• Recommended setting value (_:5791:101) Send prolongation = 0.05 s


With the settings T SENDEVERL. in the transmission logic, you can compare the differences in the pickup
times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC devices are used on all cable ends, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.05 s.

Parameter: Operate with

• Recommended setting value (_:5791:140) Operate with = ground-fault stage


With the parameter Operate with, you can select the ground-fault stage.

Parameter: Release delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5791:107) Release delay = 0.020 s


With the parameter Release delay, you must set the release delay after a pickup. The trip of the blocking
method must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and
because of the transmission time. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.020 s.

6.11.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


85-67N Block.
_:5791:1 85-67N Block.:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:5791:101 85-67N Block.:Send prolon- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
gation
_:5791:102 85-67N Block.:Send with • no yes
jump • yes
_:5791:108 85-67N Block.:Send phase • no no
segregated • yes
_:5791:105 85-67N Block.:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5791:106 85-67N Block.:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5791:107 85-67N Block.:Release 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.020 s
delay
_:5791:104 85-67N Block.:3I0 0 % to 100 % 75 %
threshold rev./forw.
_:5791:11 85-67N Block.:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
_:5791:103 85-67N Block.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5791:140 85-67N Block.:Operate with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5791:141 85-67N Block.:Trans. block. Setting options depend on
with configuration

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 735
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

6.11.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
85-67N Block.
_:5791:81 85-67N Block.:>Block stage SPS I
_:5791:54 85-67N Block.:Inactive SPS O
_:5791:52 85-67N Block.:Behavior ENS O
_:5791:53 85-67N Block.:Health ENS O
_:5791:305 85-67N Block.:Teleprot. blocking ACT O
_:5791:307 85-67N Block.:Stop ACT O
_:5791:301 85-67N Block.:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5791:308 85-67N Block.:Pickup 3I0 ACD O
_:5791:56 85-67N Block.:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5791:57 85-67N Block.:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I

6.11.6 Transient Blocking

6.11.6.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).

[lotetrbl-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-231 Logic Diagram of the Transient Blocking

If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period ((_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay). After the omission of the
blocking criteria, the transient blocking will be maintained for a set time ((_:5791:106) Trans. blk.
dropout delay).

736 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

The teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection can influence each other simultane-
ously. With the parameter Trans. block through, you can set if the transient blocking of the teleprotec-
tion for the distance protection should have an effect on the teleprotection of the ground-fault protection. The
mutual influence is meaningful if the teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection works
with a shared communication channel.

6.11.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking

Parameter: Trans. block. with

• Default setting (_:5791:141) Trans. block. with = DIS: TrBlock XBlk


Set the parameter Trans. block. with to DIS: TrBlock XBlk if the teleprotection method for the
distance protection works on the same communication channel as a teleprotection method for the ground-
fault protection. Set the parameter to invalid if you are using separate communication channels. If you are
not using a teleprotection method for the ground-fault protection, the parameter setting is not possible and
the link is automatically disabled.

Parameter: Trans. blk. pickup delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay = 0.04 s


With the parameter Trans. blk. pickup delay, you can set how long a reverse or non-directional
pickup should remain before the transient blocking occurs. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.

NOTE

i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are recom-
mended.

Parameter: Trans. blk. dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5791:106) Trans. blk. dropout delay = 0.05 s


With the Trans. blk. dropout delay parameter, you can determine the duration of the transient
blocking. The time must be set longer than the duration of the transient compensation methods for the occur-
rence or switching of exterior short circuits.

6.11.7 Sensitive Measuring Stage of Ground-Fault Protection

6.11.7.1 Description
In order to avoid a faulty echo during comparison, it must be ensured that an external ground-fault with a
flowing ground-fault current is recognized on both cable ends. During the blocking method and for the tran-
sient blocking, a secure blocking signal must be created under these conditions.
If the error is not recognized in a ground-fault in accordance with Figure 6-232 the protection in B, this would
be interpreted as an error fed-in from A. With a comparison, protection B would send an echo signal. For the
blocking procedure and for the transient blocking, the required blocking signal would not be created. The
consequence would be a faulty trip of the ground-fault protection in A.

[dwt3i0v1-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-232 Possible Current Distribution with an External Ground-Fault

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 737
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

The teleprotection method with ground-fault protection has a sensitive ground-current stage (_:5791:104)
3I0 threshold rev./forw..

[lotsigzu-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-233 Logic of the Sensitive Ground-Fault Protection

With the permissive overreach transfer trip, the sensitive ground-current stage has an effect on the echo func-
tion and the transient blocking. If the stage for the recognition of a backward fault in B is always more sensi-
tive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees an error from the other line end A in a
forward direction, no fault echo signal can result and the transient blocking will also work correctly.
With the blocking method, the sensitive ground-current stage is the threshold from which the blocking signal
is created if there are reverse errors. For this application, it also applies that the recognition of a reverse error
in B must be more sensitive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees the error from
the other cable end A in a forward direction. Thus, the blocking signal sent from B leads to the required
blocking of the trip ground-current stage on the cable end A.
The setting value for the sensitive ground-current stage is a percent value. For permissive overreach transfer
trips, it automatically relates to the threshold value of the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection,
which are connected with the permissive overreach transfer trip through the parameter Send with.
During the blocking procedure, the percentage setting value is automatically in regards to the stage or stages
of the ground-fault protection, which are connected with the blocking procedure through the parameter
Operate with.

6.11.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault Protection

Parameter: 3I0 threshold rev./forw.

• Default setting (_:5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. and (_:5791:104) 3I0


threshold rev./forw.= 75%
With the parameter 3I0 threshold rev./forw., you can set the threshold value for the ground-fault
signal addition stage in a ratio to the thresholds of the ground-fault stages selected under Send with
The sensitive stage of the ground-fault protection must be more sensitive than the ground-current stage that
works with the transmission or trip stage in order for the teleprotection method to function correctly. The
sensitive stage must be set in a more sensitive manner depending on the size of the capacitive ground current
(3I0c in Figure 6-232). Normally, 70 % to 80 % of the setting for the ground-current stage is adequate for
overhead lines. Siemens recommends the setting of 75 % for this application.
For cables or very long overhead lines, if the capacitive currents in the event of a ground fault have the same
dimensions as the ground-fault currents, the echo function should be avoided or it should only be used for
open circuit-breakers; the blocking procedure should then not be used at all.
For lines with 3 ends (feeder), it must be considered that the ground-fault current is unevenly distributed over
the ends of the line in the event of an external ground fault. The critical case is illustrated in Figure 6-234. In
the least favorable case, the ground current flowing from A divides itself half and half over line ends B and C.
The setting value 3I0 threshold rev./forw.significant for the echo or the blocking signal, must there-

738 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection

fore be below half of the response value of the ground-current stage used for signal transmission. Addition-
ally, the considerations described above apply with regard to the capacitive ground current, which is not dealt
with in Figure 6-234. The conditions are more convenient for a ground-current distribution different than
assumed here, because then one of the 2 ground currents 3I0b or 3I0c must be greater than in the previous
consideration.

[dwt3i0v2-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-234 Possible Inconvenient Current Distribution through a Teed Feeder in the Event of an External
Ground Fault

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 739
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

6.12.1 Overview of Functions

The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function is used to support the teleprotection method for distance
protection and ground-fault protection. Its use is only advisable, therefore, if you are using an appropriate
teleprotection method.
In the following situations, a permissive overreach transfer trip (signal comparison, directional comparison,
and directional unblock method) does not receive a release signal from the opposite end of the line:
• Lines with single-side infeed, from the end of the line without infeed
• Neutral-point grounding at just one end of the line, from the end of the line without residual current

• From the end of the line with no infeed or only weak infeed
To accelerate tripping at both ends of the line in these situations, the Echo and tripping on weak infeed
function supports the Echo function and the TWI function (TWI = tripping on weak infeed).
To trip the end of the line with a strong infeed, the echo function can be implemented at the end of the line
with a weak infeed. In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received
signal back to the other end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be enabled there.
The Echo function can also be used to test the signal connection between the protection devices in the
context of permissive underreach transfer trip.
You can also use the TWI function to trip the end of the line with missing or weak infeed. You can use the TWI
function together with permissive overreach transfer trips and permissive underreach transfer trip.
Please note that the function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.

6.12.2 Structure of Function

The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function comprises the subfunctions shown in the following figure.
The function is used in the Line function group.

[dwwnstru-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-235 Structure/Embedding of the Function

The 2 subfunctions Echo and tripping on weak infeed receive control signals from the teleprotection method
for distance protection and ground-fault protection in the local device; see the following figure.

740 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

[dwwnfblk-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-236 Function Blocks

In the following, the individual function blocks are described.

6.12.3 Echo Function

In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received signal back to the other
end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be released there.

Echo Release
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection method with distance protection is generated as
follows:

[lodisecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-237 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Distance Protection

The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection method with ground-fault protection is gener-
ated as follows:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 741
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

[loeksecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-238 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Ground-Fault Protection

Echo Logic
There are 2 echo logics. Structured in exactly the same way, they are assigned to the distance protection and
ground-fault protection functions. The echo logic is shown in the following figure.

[lodisecl-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-239 Logic Diagram for the Echo Function

The time delay (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay takes effect when the echo release for
distance protection or ground-fault protection is set. This time delay is necessary if the pickup time for the
protection function at the weak end of the line is higher for a reverse fault or if the protection function picks
up later due to unfavorable short-circuit or ground-current distribution. The echo is transmitted at the end of
the time delay. If the circuit-breaker position at the end of the line without infeed is 3-pole open, the echo
time delay is not necessary. The echo time delay is bypassed.
You can set the length of the echo pulse with the (_:5821:103) Echo pulse parameter.
The circuit-breaker position is signaled centrally by the process monitor.
A new echo cannot be transmitted for at least 50 ms (default setting of the (_:5821:101) Echo block
time after Tx parameter) once the echo pulse has been released or for the duration of the send signal

742 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

associated with the release method currently in use. This prevents the echo from being repeated immediately
after the line is disconnected.

Common Communication Channel


If the teleprotection methods with distance protection and ground-fault protection are used in parallel and a
common communication channel is used for the send signals, it is no longer possible at the remote end of the
line to tell whether the original echo signal is coming from distance protection or from ground-fault protec-
tion. The single-channel coordinator ensures that an echo is only transmitted if an echo release is pending for
both protection functions: in other words, if neither protection function picks up.

[lokankoo-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-240 Logic of the Single-Channel Coordinator

Detection of Weak Infeed


If there is a short-circuit, it has to be assumed that there is only a low voltage at the end of the line with weak
infeed, as the weak short-circuit current can only induce a low voltage drop in the short-circuit loop. If there is
no infeed, the loop voltage is close to zero. Therefore, the trip on weak infeed is induced dependent upon the
measured undervoltage V<. The measured undervoltage also permits selection of the faulty phase.
For supply systems with grounded neutral point, detection of the weak infeed is phase-selective. The infeed is
assumed to be weak in the absence of pickup in the phase concerned and if undervoltage is detected when
the circuit-breaker is closed ((_:5821:106) Undervoltage threshold parameter). The information
about the circuit-breaker condition is supplied by the process monitor.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 743
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

[loasephe-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-241 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Ground Voltages (Grounded Systems)

For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, the phase-to-phase voltages are used as the
criteria for undervoltage detection. Phase-selective detection of weak infeed is not possible.

[loasephp-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-242 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Phase Voltages (Isolated or Resonant-Grounded
Systems)

6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)

The TWI function is used to trip the circuit breaker at the end of the line with missing or weak infeed.

744 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

Logic for TWI

[lownfrei-310511-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-243 Release Logic for Tripping on Weak Infeed

Phase-selective TWI pickup is triggered if a weak infeed is detected and a receive signal from the teleprotection
scheme for distance protection or ground-fault protection is pending at the same time. On TWI pickup, the trip
logic of the associated method triggers the trip signal.
TWI pickup and thus tripping can be delayed with the parameterizable time (_:5821:102) Echo and
operate delay. TWI pickup is also delayed by the release time (_:5821:103) Echo pulse. Synchroni-
zation between echo and TWI is achieved by both functions using the same time parameters.
The TWI function can be blocked via the phase-selective signals TWI block. This prevents false pickups, for
example, due to switch-off processes on the line in question or on the parallel line. All phases not picked up
for a 3-pole TWI operate are blocked for 250 ms. If another protection function trips, all 3 phases are blocked
for 250 ms. In the event of a cleared reverse pickup of 1 phase of the corresponding function (depending on
the source of Dis or EF), all 3 phases are blocked for 50 ms.

6.12.5 Application and Setting Notes

To select the Echo and tripping on weak infeed function, use the function library with DIGSI.
The function is designed for working together with permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive over-
reach transfer trips. The function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The function contains the following parameters:

Parameter: Weak infeed action


The basic mode of operation is set with the (_:5821:104) Weak infeed action parameter.
• Recommended setting value (_:5821:104) Weak infeed action = only echo

Parameter Value Description


only echo The echo function is active. There is no tripping on short circuits with
missing or weak infeed.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 745
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

Parameter Value Description


off A missing or weak infeed does not induce echo or tripping.
echo and WI operate The echo function and tripping on short circuits with missing or weak
infeed are active.
only WI operate Only tripping on short circuits with missing or weak infeed is active.

Parameter: 85-21/67N common chan.


If distance protection and ground-fault protection are using the same communication channel and generate
an echo independently of one another, you must set the (_:5821:105) 85-21/67N common
chan.parameter to yes to avoid unwanted tripping.

Parameter: Echo and operate delay


The length of the echo delay time (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay must be set so that
different pickup response times for Distance-protection functions or Ground-fault protection functions at all
ends of the line cannot lead to an unwanted echo if faults occur outside the system.
• Recommended setting value (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay = 40 ms
Parameter: Echo pulse
The echo pulse duration (_:5821:103) Echo pulse can be adapted to transmission-system conditions. It
must be long enough to ensure that the receive signal is detected even if the movement delays of the protec-
tion and transmission devices at the ends of the line are not the same.
• Recommended setting value Echo pulse = 50 ms
Parameter: Echo block time after Tx
To avoid an infinite echo between the ends of the line, a new echo cannot be sent for a period of (_:
5821:101) Echo block time after Tx after an echo signal has been sent. An infinite echo could
otherwise be triggered by interference coupling on the signal path, for example. The echo is also blocked for
this time once distance protection or ground-fault protection has been sent.
• Recommended setting value Echo block time after Tx = 50 ms
Parameter: Undervoltage threshold
This parameter is only relevant if you are using the TWI function (tripping on missing or weak infeed).
The upper limit for this threshold value (_:5821:106) Undervoltage threshold must be below the
minimum voltage to be expected during operation. The maximum voltage drop to be expected at the end of
the line with weak infeed if there is a short circuit on the line to be protected, at which distance protection
might no longer pick up, applies as the lower limit.
In systems with grounded neutral point, phase-to-ground voltages apply as reference values; in systems with
isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, phase-to-phase voltages apply.

6.12.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Weak infeed
_:5821:101 Weak infeed:Echo block 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
time after Tx
_:5821:102 Weak infeed:Echo and 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
operate delay
_:5821:103 Weak infeed:Echo pulse 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s

746 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:5821:104 Weak infeed:Weak • off only echo
infeed action • only WI operate
• only echo
• echo and WI operate
_:5821:105 Weak infeed:85-21/67N • no no
common chan. • yes
_:5821:106 Weak infeed:Under- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 25.000 V
voltage threshold

6.12.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Weak infeed
_:5821:51 Weak infeed:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:5821:52 Weak infeed:Behavior ENS O
_:5821:53 Weak infeed:Health ENS O
_:5821:81 Weak infeed:>Block stage SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 747
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French


Specification

6.13.1 Function Overview

The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification:
• Also switches off the line end with weak infeed with a short circuit on the line
• Selects the faulty phases via a relative undervoltage threshold

• Trips instantaneously or with a delay

6.13.2 Structure of the Function

The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is used in the func-
tion group Line.
The function is preconfigured with an Instantaneous stage and a Delayed stage. The undervoltage and 3I0
detection settings are in the General function block and apply to all stages.

[dw_struck-3I0-erkennung, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-244 Structure/Embedding of the Function

748 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

6.13.3 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection

6.13.3.1 Description

Logic

[lo_unterspann-3I0-erkennung, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-245 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection Logic

Undervoltage Detection
The faulty phases are selected via undervoltage detection. The threshold value of the undervoltage detection
is dynamic and results from the product of the measured phase-to-phase voltage and the Vph-g< factor.
This accounts for operational deviations from the rated voltage in the undervoltage threshold.
The average value is obtained from the measured phase-to-phase voltages of the last 500 ms. The average
value is held via a voltage memory for an adjustable time (Time constant Tau). Changes in the phase-to-
phase voltage thus have an effect on the undervoltage threshold in a time-delayed manner. When a phase
picks up, the most recently determined voltage threshold of the picked-up phase is held until generation of
the operate indication. The voltage threshold is thus not affected by the error in the case of long time delays.
The undervoltage is determined for all 3 phases.
If the stored phase-to-phase voltage drops below the √3 ⋅ Threshold Vph-gnd< threshold, an undervoltage
detection is no longer possible in the respective phase.
Since positive feedback results from tripping, that is, the measured fault condition cannot be removed by trip-
ping, the pickup of both stages automatically drops out again after tripping of at least one stage. If the present
voltage exceeds the dropout threshold again, renewed pickup is possible after a maximum of 1 s.

NOTE

i The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is suited for use
only in grounded systems.

3I0 Detection
The Instantaneous and the Delayed stage both use 3I0 detection. If the zero-sequence current exceeds the
3I0> threshold, the 3I0 detection picks up and generates the indication 3I0> exceeded. If the pickup
drops out, the indication 3I0> exceeded is held for an adjustable time T 3I0> extension.
The Health of the function is set to Warning in the event of a measuring-voltage failure.
If the measured voltage values or the 3I0 measured values are invalid, Health is set to Alarm and the stage/
function is blocked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 749
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

6.13.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: (_:2311:2) Vph-g< factor

• Default setting Vph-g< factor = 0.70


With the Vph-g< factor parameter you specify the factor for the calculation of the undervoltage threshold.
The threshold value of the undervoltage detection results from the product of the measured phase-to-phase
voltage and the Vph-g< factor. The average value is obtained from the measured phase-to-phase voltages
of the last 500 ms and is used for the calculation of the undervoltage threshold.
Set the parameter Vph-g< factor for the specific application.

Parameter: (_:2311:3) Threshold Vph-gnd<

• Default setting Threshold Vph-gnd< = 30.000 V


With the Threshold Vph-gnd< parameter you set the phase-to-ground voltage for the determination of the
dropout threshold. The dropout threshold of the undervoltage detection is calculated from √3 ⋅ Threshold
Vph-gnd<.
If the Voltage criterion is instantiated in the Process monitor function, you must set the Threshold U
open there. Set the Threshold Vph-gnd< to the same value as the Threshold U open parameter.

Parameter: (_:2311:4) Time constant Tau

• Default setting Time constant Tau = 5 s


With the Time constant Tau parameter you determine how long the average value of the phase-to-phase
voltages is stored.
Set the parameter Time constant Tau for the specific application.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold

• Default setting (_:2311:5) 3I0> threshold = 0.500 A


Use the parameter 3I0> threshold to determine the pickup threshold for the zero-sequence current.
Set the parameter 3I0> threshold for the specific application.

Parameter: T 3I0> extension

• Default setting (_:2311:6) T 3I0> extension = 0.60 s


With the T 3I0> extension parameter you determine how long the indication 3I0> exceeded is held.
Set the parameter T 3I0> extension for the specific application.

750 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

6.13.4 Instantaneous Stage

6.13.4.1 Description

Logic

[lo_unverz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-246 Logic of the Instantaneous Stage

(1) Not for devices with 3-pole tripping only

If the input signal >Receive from the remote end is received and an undervoltage is simultaneously
detected, the Instantaneous stage generates an operate indication. The input signal >Receive is held for
an adjustable time (parameter: Receive extension ) so that tripping is also possible in case of a fast
dropout of the signal from the opposite end.
As long as the Distance protection function has picked up in a phase or after a line has been tripped, the
pickup of the Instantaneous stage is blocked. The Instantaneous stage is blocked until the input signal
>Receive drops off again.
If no undervoltage is detected while the input signal >Receive is on, but the 3I0> threshold is
exceeded, an internal fault on the line is indicated. If this state lasts longer than 500 ms, a 3-pole operate indi-
cation is generated.
The Instantaneous stage works only if the binary input signal >Receive OK indicates correct functioning of
the communication channel.
The Instantaneous stage can also be blocked via the phase-segregated signals TWI block. False pickups, for
example, after switching off the local line end are thereby avoided.

6.13.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:15451:1) Operating mode = on

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 751
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

You use the Operating mode parameter to define whether the Instantaneous stage is enabled or disabled.

Parameter: Receive extension

• Default setting (_:15451:2) Receive extension = 0.65 s


With the Receive extension parameter you determine how long the binary input signal >Receive is
held. The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification can thereby
also trip in case of a fast dropout of the sending side.
Set the parameter Receive extension for the specific application.

Parameter: T 3I0> alarm

• Default setting (_:15451:3) T 3I0> alarm = 10.00 s


With the T 3I0> alarm parameter, you define the time delay for the output indication 3I0> detected.
When the T 3I0> alarm has expired and the zero-sequence current still exceeds the threshold value 3I0>
threshold, the indication 3I0> detected is issued.
Set the parameter T 3I0> alarm for the specific application.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:15451:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Instantaneous stage is
allowed to execute 1-pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of switching 1-pole, then 1-pole trip-
ping is allowed on overhead lines.

752 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

6.13.5 Delayed Stage

6.13.5.1 Description

Logic

[lo_verz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-247 Logic of the Instantaneous Stage

With the Delayed stage you can still trip the local line end even in case of a failure in the communication
channel. The Delayed stage picks up in a phase-segregated way with a detected undervoltage and trips after
a configurable time. Depending on how the stage (1-pole operate allowed or 3-pole operate
allowed) functions, different time delays take effect (Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) or Op. delay
multi-ph. (TT)). If no tripping is indicated even after expiration of the the times TM and TT following the
pickup, the voltage memory is reset and the pickup drops out.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 753
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

In the following cases, the phase selection is blocked via the undervoltage detection:
• The internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker or Measuring-voltage failure
detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.

• The Distance protection function has picked up.

6.13.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:15481:1) Operating mode = on


With the Operating mode parameter you determine the functioning of the Delayed stage.
Parameter Value Description
on The Delayed stage is enabled.
off The Delayed stage is disabled.
on receive err. The Delayed stage works only in case of a reception disruption.
In this case, the signal >Receive OK is off.

Parameter: Operate delay 1-ph. (TM)

• Default setting (_:15481:2) Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) = 0.40 s


The Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) parameter is used to set the tripping delay for 1-pole tripping.
The Delayed stage generates a phase-segregated operate indication after expiration of the Operate delay
1-ph. (TM).

Parameter: Op. delay multi-ph. (TT)

• Default setting (_:15481:3) Op. delay multi-ph. (TT) = 1.00 s


The Op. delay multi-ph. (TT) parameter is used to set the tripping delay for 3-pole tripping.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:15481:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Delayed stage is allowed to
execute 1-pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of switching 1-pole, then 1-pole tripping is
allowed on overhead lines.

Parameter: 1-pole operate with 3I0>

• Default setting (_:15481:5) 1-pole operate with 3I0> = yes


With the 1-pole operate with 3I0> parameter you determine whether a 1-pole operate indication is
generated or not depending on the zero-sequence current.
Parameter Value Description
yes If the 1-pole operate with 3I0> = yes parameter is set and the zero-
sequence current exceeds the 3I0> threshold the Delayed stage generates a 1-
pole operate indication.
no When the 1-pole operate with 3I0> = no parameter is set, the Delayed
stage generates a 1-pole operate indication independently of the zero-
sequence current supervision.

Parameter: 3-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:15481:6) 3-pole operate allowed = yes

754 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

You can use the 3-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Delayed stage is allowed to
execute 3-pole tripping or not.

6.13.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2311:2 General:Vph-g< factor 0.10 to 1.00 0.70
_:2311:3 General:Threshold Vph- 0.300 V to 100.000 V 30.000 V
gnd<
_:2311:4 General:Time constant 1 s to 60 s 5s
Tau
_:2311:5 General:3I0> threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 1.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 5.000 A 2.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.050 A to 0.500 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.250 A to 2.500 A 2.500 A
_:2311:6 General:T 3I0> extension 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.60 s
Undelayed
_:15451:1 Undelayed:Operating • off on
mode • on
_:15451:2 Undelayed:Receive 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.65 s
extension
_:15451:3 Undelayed:T 3I0> alarm 0.00 s to 60.00 s 10.00 s
_:15451:11 Undelayed:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes
Delayed
_:15481:1 Delayed:Operating mode • off on
• on
• on receive err.
_:15481:2 Delayed:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.40 s
1-ph. (TM)
_:15481:3 Delayed:Op. delay multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
ph. (TT)
_:15481:11 Delayed:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:15481:5 Delayed:1-pole operate • no yes
with 3I0> • yes
_:15481:6 Delayed:3-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes

6.13.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:83 General:>Receive SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 755
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:2311:84 General:>Receive OK SPS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:55 General:Undervoltage ACT O
_:2311:56 General:3I0> exceeded SPS O
Undelayed
_:15451:55 Undelayed:Pickup ACD O
_:15451:57 Undelayed:Operate ACT O
_:15451:58 Undelayed:Operate 3I0> SPS O
_:15451:59 Undelayed:3I0> detected SPS O
Delayed
_:15481:81 Delayed:>Block stage SPS I
_:15481:55 Delayed:Pickup ACD O
_:15481:56 Delayed:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:15481:57 Delayed:Operate ACT O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O

756 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 External Trip Initiation

6.14 External Trip Initiation

6.14.1 Overview of Functions

The External trip initiation for phase-segregated signals function:


• Processes any signals from external protection or supervision devices
• Enables the integration of any signals from external protection equipment in the indication and tripping
processing, for example transient ground-fault relays or Buchholz protection

• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications

• Enables direct tripping of the circuit-breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end

• Links the teleprotection scheme (permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive overreach transfer
trip) for direct trip command transfer with the signal from the other line end

6.14.2 Structure of the Function

The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals function comes factory-set with 1 tripping stage. A
maximum of 1 stage can be operated in the function. The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals
function can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.

[dwstrext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-248 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 757
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 External Trip Initiation

6.14.3 Stage Description

Logic of the Stage

[lotripha-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-249 Logic Diagram for the External Trip Initiation for Phase-Segregated Signals Stage

3-Phase and Phase-Selective Binary Input Signals


The 3-phase binary input signal >External trip phs ABC and the phase selective input signals
>External trip phs A,>External trip phs B, >>External trip phs C start the Pickup and
the Operate delay. The stage is uniformly phase-selective in structure.

Output Signals
The function provides the binary output signals Pickup, Operate delay expired and Operate. The
signals are available phase-selective.

758 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 External Trip Initiation

Blocking the Stage


The stage can be switched to ineffective via a number of signals. If the stage is in the activate state at the time
of blocking, it will be immediately reset. However, the tripping remains stopped for the minimum operating
time Min.Op.T.

6.14.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:931:6) Operate delay = 50 ms


The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application. After expiry of the Operate delay
the time overshoot and tripping are signaled. The duration of the initiation signal as well as the adjustable
minimum command time determine the signal duration of the Operate.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:931:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


The 1-pole operate allowed parameter allows you to set the tripping option of the stage. If 1-pole trip-
ping is allowed, phase-selective tripping will be possible.

6.14.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:931:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:931:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:931:11 Stage 1:1-pole operate • no no
allowed • yes
_:931:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s

6.14.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Stage 1
_:931:82 Stage 1:>Block function SPS I
_:931:501 Stage 1:>External trip phs ABC SPS I
_:931:502 Stage 1:>External trip phs A SPS I
_:931:503 Stage 1:>External trip phs B SPS I
_:931:504 Stage 1:>External trip phs C SPS I
_:931:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:931:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:931:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:931:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:931:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:931:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 759
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.1 Overview of Functions

The Automatic reclosing function:


• Automatically closes overhead lines after arc short-circuits
• Is only permissible for overhead lines, because only the possibility of self-activated extinguishing of an
arc short-circuit exists here

• Can be controlled by integrated protection functions and by external protection devices

• The automatic reclosing can occur through an external automatic reclosing function via binary inputs.
The automatic reclosing after switching off through a short-circuit protection is taken over by the automatic
reclosing function (AREC). The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time
automatic reclosing where the second automatic reclosing attempt is successful.

[dw2awewz-090210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-250 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing With Action Time (2nd Reclosing Successful)

The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption
cycles can work with different parameters.

6.15.2 Structure of the Function

The automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers. In a function group for circuit
breakers, one of the 3 types of functions illustrated in the following figures can be used. The Automatic
reclosing function has a central function control.

[dwfktawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-251 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function


The Cyclic automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-252) allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Here each disrup-
tion cycle may work with different settings.

760 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can add
and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.

[dwzykawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-252 Structure/Embedding of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time


The Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT) works without fixed disruption cycles
(Figure 6-253). The requirement for the usage of ADT is that voltage transformers on the line-side are
connected or there is a possibility to transfer a close command to a remote line end. With the ADT, the Auto-
matic reclosing function decides independently if and when an automatic reclosing is reasonable and permis-
sible and when it is not. The criteria is the phase-to-ground voltage, which is switched through after reclosing
from the opposite line end. The Automatic reclosing function with ADT occurs as soon as it is known that the
line from the opposite end has been placed back under voltage.

[dwaweasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-253 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)

Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function


The cooperation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the func-
tion mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-254). The function only provides
binary inputs for the influence of the protection functions in the SIPROTEC protection device. The external
automatic reclosing device delivers the close command. The SIPROTEC protection functions then provide for
the trip commands.

[dwextawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-254 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function

Function Control
The automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 761
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[loarcfkt-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-255 Function Control for the Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions

The automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
• The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages. The start is independent of the set operating mode for the AREC.

• Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started, the
blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
• The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of special
stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.

• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the automatic reclosing function provides a signal, based on which
the protection functions can turn off the 1-pole circuit breaker.

• For the application with 1-pole tripping and stage or zone release through the automatic reclosing func-
tion, this function provides a signal that uses the protection functions that lets the stage and zone release
act only if a 1-pole faults occurs.

762 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[loawesig-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-256 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions

The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-256. The configuration occurs in a matrix view
in DIGSI, see Figure 6-257.
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be created separately
• For starting the automatic reclosing function and
• For the blocking of the automatic reclosing function.
The automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which
the external protection devices can be connected to the internal automatic reclosing function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 763
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-257 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5

6.15.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function


For the cyclic automatic reclosing function, there are 4 operating modes, from which one can be selected for
the parameterization (parameter (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode).
The selection of the operating mode is dependent on the tripping behavior of the protection functions and the
circuit breaker.
For applications with 3-pole tripping, all 4 operating modes are available. For applications with 1- and 3-pole
tripping, one can select between 2 operating modes.
Their connections are displayed in the following table.

Table 6-7 Operating modes of the cylindrical automatic reclosing function in accordance with tripping
behaviors

Operating Mode of the Cyclic Tripping Behavior


Automatic Reclosing Function 3-Pole Tripping 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping
(AREC)
Operating mode 1 X X
with op., with act. time
Operating mode 2 X -
w.pickup, w. action time
Operating mode 3 X X
with op., w/o act. time
Operating mode 4 X -
w.pickup, w/o act. time

764 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Operating mode 1: with op., with act. time


The operating mode with op., with act. time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the tripping type and operate time of the protection function(s). With this operating mode, the automatic
reclosing must be started with the operate indications. Additionally, the general pickup must also be consid-
ered.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and clearing operate indication, the automatic reclosing
cycle to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the
expiring automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
• During a 3-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 3-pole dead times are
set.

• During a 1-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 1-pole dead times are
set.
The following example in Figure 6-258 shows a 1-pole tripping that comes after expiration of the action time
of cycle 1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Cycle 2 is set to make a
1-pole tripping possible. Cycle 2 will now become active with the settings for 1-pole tripping.
Within the following reclaim time, there will be another pickup and a 3-pole tripping. Since cycle 2 is already
complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The second trip command comes during the
current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 becomes active with the settings for 3-phase trippings.

[dwawebx1-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-258 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/With Action Time

Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing func-
tion. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with
longer tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed
faults this does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time
allows for different automatic reclosing cycles depending on 1- or 3-pole tripping and the trip time of the
protection function(s).

Operating mode 2: w.pickup, w. action time


The operating mode w.pickup, w. action time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the operate time and type of fault. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole tripping.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 765
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

With this operating mode, the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the
protection functions. Additionally, the pickup sample from the conductor pickups and the general pickup are
considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.

• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.

• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is active
with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.

[dwarcbm2-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-259 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/With Action Time

Operating mode 3: with op., w/o act. time


With the operating mode with op., w/o act. time, the respective dead time is started after each trip
command. The sequence of the automatic reclosing function is exclusively control by the operate indications.
The pickups are not considered. Unless parameters are not set otherwise, a 3-pole operate indication initiates
the 3-pole dead time start, a 1-pole operate indication initiates the 1-pole dead time start. If more than one
automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is identical
with the cycle number (1, 2, and 3.).

766 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[dwawebs3-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-260 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/Without Action Time

Operating mode 4: w.pickup, w/o act. time


With the operating mode w.pickup, w/o act. time, the automatic reclosing must be started with the
operate indications from the protection functions. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole
tripping.
The start of the dead time occurs after each trip command. Additionally, the pickup sample from the
conductor pickups is considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.

• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.

• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).

[dwarcbs4-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-261 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/Without Action Time

6.15.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function


In Figure 6-262, the functional structure of the cyclic automatic reclosing function is illustrated as a block
diagram. The figure displays the important signals, coming from outside of the cyclic automatic reclosing
function, and the most important signals between the individual function blocks.
The automatic reclosing function works as a state machine. From the idle state AREC ready, the automatic
reclosing function gets through the tripping or pickup indications of the protection functions to the Dead time
state. After expiration of the dead time, the subsequent state is reached with the closing indication. The
reclaim time is also started together with the closing indication. If the reclaim time can expire without further
operate or pickup indications, the automatic reclosing is successful and the automatic reclosing function turns
back to idle state.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 767
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

If the automatic reclosing function is restarted during the current reclaim time, there will be either a dynamic
blocking or other reclosing cycles will be executed. If other reclosing cycles are possible, there will be a dead
time start and the described process starts again.
After the end of a dynamic blocking, the automatic reclosing function switches back to idle state or it goes
into the state Static Blocking if the blocking condition is permanently present. In the following sections, the
individual function blocks are described in detail.

[lozykawe-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-262 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Block Diagram of Automatic Reclosing

768 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping


The operate indications are used as starting signals. For operating modes with action time, the start of the
action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications. During all operating modes, the pickup indications are also
required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time.

Applications with 3-Pole Tripping


For applications with only 3-pole tripping options, the internal operate indications are always 3-pole. For
external starts, there is a binary input, which signalizes a 3-pole tripping of the external protection device.
The outputs of the input logic signalize that the reclosing start has occurred through a 3-pole operate indica-
tion.

Application with 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping


Depending on the generated protection function, during the application with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
options, the internal trip indication may be phase-selective or 3-phase. If an external start via binary input is
selected, phase-selective inputs as well as inputs for 3-pole start are available.
The outputs of the input logic indicate whether the reclosing start has occurred through a 1-pole or 3-pole
operate indication. A start initiated by a 3-pole tripping is recognized if more than 1 pole signaled a tripping
during at least one time lapse within the period from the first incoming operate indication up to the last
outgoing operate indication.
At the time of the outgoing operate indication, all tripped poles will be stored. This information is used for the
plausibility check between the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker and assigned operate indication, see
chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping.

[lobtaaus-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-263 Input Logic for Operating Modes: With Tripping

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 769
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup


The operate indications and the pickup indications are used as starting signals. The internal pickup indications
are processed selective to the phase. Through binary inputs, the pickup information can also be coupled by
external protection devices (>Pickup A for start, >Pickup B for start and >Pickup C for
start). Optionally, the pickup information can be externally captured as a pickup sample, thus, as a 1-phase,
2-phase and 3-phase pickup.
The outputs of the input logic signalize if the automatic reclosing start occurs through a 1-phase, 2-phase, or
3-phase pickup:
• On Start with 3-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing outgoing pickup indication.

• On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.

• On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications.
During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all
operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.

[lobtaanr-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-264 Input Logic for Operating Modes: with Pickup

6.15.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-265. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.

770 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Start-Signal Supervision Time


The start-signal supervision stops the automatic reclosing if the short circuit is not switched off within the
normal time; for example, in the case of a circuit-breaker failure.
With the first raising operate indication, the start-signal supervision time is initiated, parameter Start
signal supervis.time. The time is stopped as soon as no operate indication is active.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked if there is an expiration of the start-signal supervision time
through a long operate indication. The blocking lasts until the operate indication stops, extended by a further
0.5 s.

Transition to the Dead-Time State


The transition of the automatic reclosing function to the dead-time state occurs for:
• Clearing operate indications if none of the signal inputs for operate indications are active

• Or if the circuit breaker can no longer be recognized as 3-pole closed

• And the start-signal supervision time is not expired


Additionally, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The circuit breaker signalizes the readiness for automatic reclosing typically through a binary input. If the
circuit breaker is not ready, the automatic reclosing function can be statically blocked. In this situation,
the automatic closing function is not in idle state automatic closing function ready. The control of the
circuit-breaker readiness is optional and can be turned off through settings, see also chapter
6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.17 Blockings.

• The circuit breaker must be 3-pole closed before the trip command. This condition is not considered if the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead-time state through the binary input >Dead Time Start Delay. As long
the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not be
started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set, param-
eter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is present
longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the end of the binary signal,
additionally extended by another 0.5 s. See also chapter 6.15.4.17 Blockings.

[logistar-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-265 Logic for Function-Block Start

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 771
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-266, the cycle control is illustrated.

Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Accordingly, the automatic reclosing does not occur if Dead time aft. 1-
pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic reclosing
cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the associated
automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead to
1-pole tripping.

Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.

772 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[loauswir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-266 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time

6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-267, the cycle control is illustrated.

Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 773
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.

774 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[loanrwir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-267 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time

6.15.4.8 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-268, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing after 1-pole tripping if Dead
time aft. 1-pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective auto-
matic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the
associated automatic reclosing cycle.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 775
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead to
1-pole tripping.

[loauowrk-210311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-268 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time

6.15.4.9 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-269, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic

776 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.

[loanowrk-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-269 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Pickup/Without Action Time

6.15.4.10 Stage Release


The function block Stage release creates output indications for the release or switching over of special stages
for protection functions (stage release in the 1st cycle or stage release in the n. cycle). Examples for this are
the release of overreaching zones with distance protection and the dynamic adjustment of delays or threshold
values with overcurrent protection.
Figure 6-270 shows the tripping stage release for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. With available automatic
reclosing functions, the tripping stage release typically occurs up to the expiration of the dead time. In this
state, the cycle number is 1. However, if the automatic reclosing function cycle is only set to 1-pole, the stage

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 777
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

release will be returned at the start of the 1-pole dead time. This is necessary, since every additional evolving
fault that occurs within the dead time causes a 3-pole cut-off, and subsequently, the automatic reclosing func-
tion can no longer take place.

[lo1awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-270 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle

The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical to
the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end is open.

[lo2awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-271 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting with the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle

6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping


In the Dead-time function block, the dead time which corresponds with the previous trip command is started.
After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status Switch on.
Figure 6-272 shows the dead time logic.
There are 3 time stages that can be set differently:
• Dead time after 3-pole tripping
• Dead time after 1-pole tripping (only available for applications with 1-pole tripping)

• Dead time after evolving fault


In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, if after 1-pole tripping there is no automatic reclosing if Dead
time aft. 1-pole trip is set to invalid.
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead
Time), switching to an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption occurs. With the 3-pole cut-off of the
evolving fault, a separate adjustable dead time for the evolving fault begins. The total dead time is composed

778 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the first disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault to
invalid, no other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault. The trip-
ping through evolving faults is then finished.

3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Condition With 1-Pole Tripping And Implausible Circuit-Breaker Condition
With applications with 1-pole tripping, during the dead time there is a plausibility check between the assigned
trip command and the current flow in the open conductor. If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected pole-selectively, the plausibility check also occurs with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. More
information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition .
The plausibility check determines whether the circuit-breaker poles that have not been switched off after a 1-
pole trip command remain closed.
For an implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip-command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed, provided the trip-command synchronization through the parameter is permitted (parameter 3-
pole operate by 79). After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole automatic reclosing
cycles may follow.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 779
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[lopauaul-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-272 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping

6.15.4.12 Dead time for Operating Modes with Pickup


In the dead time function block, the dead time corresponding to the type of short circuit that led to the trip
command is started. The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with
3-pole tripping. After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status
Switch on. Figure 6-273 shows the dead time logic.

780 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

There are 4 time stages that can be set differently:


• Dead time after 1-phase short circuits

• Dead time after 2-phase short circuits

• Dead time after 3-phase short circuits

• Dead time for evolving faults


In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup.
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead
Time), a separate dead time for faults begins with the stopping of the fault. The total dead time is composed
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the 1st disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the Dead time aft. evolv. fault to invalid, no
other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault. The tripping through
evolving faults is then finished.

[lopauare-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-273 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: with
Pickup

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 781
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time


Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time. This may be
the case during 1-pole tripping and there is a short circuit in the non-switched conductors after this.
After 3-pole tripping there may also be evolving faults if the line is fed through a second (non-3-pole) opened
circuit breaker, for example, for systems with a 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout. Evolving-fault detection does not
start until 50 ms after the dead time starts.
The evolving-fault detection is divided into components:
• Detection of Evolving Faults
• Evolving Faults Processing

• 3-pole circuit-breaker intertripping during evolving faults


The procedure during evolving faults is illustrated in Figure 6-274.

Detection of Evolving Faults


For the detection of an evolving fault, the following criteria can be selected through parameters:
• Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with trip
For this setting, any tripping during the dead time leads to evolving-fault detection. At any tripping it is
decided if an internal protection function is tripped or if the tripping is signaled through a binary input.
Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured for the start of the automatic
reclosing function or not.

• Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with pickup


Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function configured for the automatic
reclosing function start is picked up or if an external pickup is recognized through a binary input.

• Binary input >Evolving fault start


The evolving-fault detection can also be introduced through a binary input without an internal protection
pickup being available.

Reaction to Evolving Faults


After a recognized evolving fault, the automatic reclosing function can be influenced in 2 ways.
• Parameter Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, the reclosing function will be blocked. There are no other
reclosing attempts and the automatic reclosing function is blocked until the pickup and operate indica-
tions causing the evolving fault disappear.

• Parameter Response to evolv. faults = strt. evol.flt.dead time


As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption is
switched to. The automatic reclosing function does not allow any 1-pole tripping until the fault is solved
or there is a final switch off; thus, every following trip command will be 3-pole. When the evolving fault is
fixed, the separate dead time for faults will start, see also chapter Dead time. The further process is as by
3-pole cycles.

[dwbspffe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-274 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault

782 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-275.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.

3-Pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker for Automatic Reclosing Function Blocking through Evolving Faults in a 1-Pole
Dead Time
If due to an evolving fault there is a blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead time
without a protection function submitting a 3-pole trip command, for example, during an evolving-fault detec-
tion with pickup, the automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole trip command. Thus, the circuit breaker
will have 3-pole tripping in which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur.

[lo_fofeer_080115, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-275 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function – Logic of Evolving-Fault Detection

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 783
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command


After the expiration of the dead time, the Automatic reclosing function will be in the closing state.
The closing state can depend on the following influences, see Figure 6-276:
• through a synchrocheck if the circuit breaker was opened during the 3-pole dead time
• Through the readiness of the circuit breaker signaled through the binary input

• Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the
circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation. With the release of the closing indi-
cation, the automatic reclosing function will switch to the reclaim time state.

[loeinsha-141111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-276 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Closing Indication

784 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Testing the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before Closing


For each of the automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a test of the circuit-breaker readiness should occur
directly before closing (parameters CB ready check bef.close, Figure 6-277). Independent of this, a
test of the circuit-breaker readiness before the start of the 1st automatic reclosing cycle can be set, see
Chapter 6.15.4.5 Start and chapter 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition .

[lolsvoei-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-277 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before
Closing

Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a synchrocheck should be executed and
which functionality should be used here, see Figure 6-278. You may only use the internal synchrocheck if the
device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.

[losyncro-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-278 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 785
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the auto-
matic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the automatic reclosing
function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
• Close command after 1-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc)

• Close command after 3-pole tripping in the first cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc)

• Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the second cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)

Creation of the Signal Remote close signal


The cyclic automatic reclosing function can create information Remote close signal. This information
can be transferred to the protection device as a binary signal on the line that is to be protected on the oppo-
site end. From the automatic reclosing function, it can be processed in the operating mode adaptive dead
time. Furthermore, the binary signal may be arranged as data for transmission via an existing protection inter-
face.
The information Remote close signal is created by the closing logic. It can be delayed by a set time over
the local close indication. With this delay, you can make sure that information is only set if the automatic
reclosing was successful and there was no further tripping. The pulse duration of the inter-close signal has a
fixed length of 500 ms.

6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time


With the assignment of the close command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time
state. During this time, it is decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.
• If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle, and
thus the entire automatic reclosing, was successful.

• If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to
continue the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the auto-
matic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.

Short Circuits during Running Reclaim Time


A trip command that occurs during a reclaim time leads to a cancellation of the reclaim time. If further auto-
matic reclosing cycles are allowed, the regulation of the cycle depends on if the automatic reclosing function
is executed in an operating mode with action times or without action times, see Figure 6-279.
• With operating modes with action time, the action times of all higher cycles are started with the begin-
ning of the new general pickup if these are not blocked. The cycle with the lowest cycle number is
selected, whose action time is not yet expired with the incoming trip indication. If no further cycles are
possible or if the action times of all possible cycles are expired before the operate indication, there will be
no further reclosing.

• With the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.

786 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[losperre-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-279 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Reclaim Time

6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition


The automatic reclosing function requires the readiness of the circuit breaker for the following purposes, see
Figure 6-280:
• Recognition of the circuit-breaker readiness from the beginning:
In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, an unavailable circuit breaker leads to the blocking of
the automatic reclosing function. This monitoring is optional and must be switched off through settings if
the readiness signal is not available for the protection device.

• Analysis of the circuit-breaker readiness directly before the close command:


For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, it can be set whether the circuit-breaker readiness
is a requirement for the assignment of the close command. This monitoring is also optional.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 787
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[lolsbere-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-280 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness

The automatic reclosing function uses the information from the circuit breaker for the following purposes (see
Figure 6-281):
• Detection of a non-closed circuit breaker before the start:
In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, a non-3-pole closed circuit breaker leads to the blocking
of the automatic reclosing function, see also chapter 6.15.4.17 Blockings. This monitoring is not needed
if the auxiliary-contact signals are not available.

• Detection of the reaction of the circuit breaker after a trip command:


The automatic reclosing function dead time is started immediately with the opening of the circuit breaker
if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected. Here a decision is made based on the opening of
the circuit breaker if the circuit breaker is no longer 3-pole closed.
An exception is the reaction to an evolving fault. As the circuit breaker already has 1 pole open before the
occurrence of an evolving fault, the dead time is started if the circuit breaker is detected as having 3
poles open.
If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected, the automatic reclosing function dead time will
start with the dropout of the operate indication.

• After a 1-pole trip, a check is done during the dead time to determine whether the circuit-breaker poles
that were not switched off remain closed. The circuit-breaker position recognition is delivered from the
central circuit-breaker position recognition of the Circuit-breaker function group.
For implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed provided the settings allows this. After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole
automatic reclosing cycles may follow, see also chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with
Tripping.

788 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[lolsuebe-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-281 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for Circuit-Breaker Condition and Supervision

6.15.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-282:
• Static blocking
• Dynamic blocking

Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The static blocking is signaled with the
indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary Inactive
input or internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the
parameter Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for AREC, recognition through Inactive
binary input. This cause can be switched on or off via the param-
eter CB ready check bef.close.
Circuit breaker not closed on 3-poles, recognition through binary Inactive
input.
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 789
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Condition Indication
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
• AREC cycle is not set.
• AREC cycles are set, but all are blocked, for example, via
binary input.
• There is no device-internal function and no binary input
configured for starting the Automatic reclosing function.
• With operating modes with tripping:
– both 1-pole and 3-pole cycles are blocked via binary
inputs
• With operating modes with pickup:
– 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase AREC cycles are blocked
via binary inputs.
• With operating modes without action time:
– the first automatic reclosing cycle is blocked via binary
input.
• With the dead-line check functionality:
– if the voltage measurement is not available or is
disrupted

Dynamic Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is blocked dynamically if a blocking condition occurs while an Automatic
reclosing function is running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked in intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can be
removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime, the
blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the Automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:
Condition Indication
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
• With operating modes with tripping: Block. by no cycle
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs at the auto-
matic reclosing function starting process, however, the
Automatic reclosing function does not start in accordance
with the parameterization for this type of tripping, the
respective dead time will be set to invalid.
• With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup indication occurs at
the automatic reclosing function starting process, but the
Automatic reclosing function may not be started in accord-
ance with the parameterization for this type of pickup.
If a protection function causes the Automatic reclosing function Not ready
to be blocked in accordance with the configuration Block. by protection
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of the Not ready
dead time through the binary input >Dead time start Blk.by max. d.t. delay
delay expires without the binary input becoming inactive
during this period of time
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after Not ready
the expiration of the maximum dead-time extension are not Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
fulfilled before the assignment of the close command

790 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Condition Indication
If the query of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready
directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup.
the maximum dead-time extension expires Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input Not ready
>Delay close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead time Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
extension is exceeded before the assignment of the close
command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to Not ready
evolv. faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the starting-signal supervision time for the operate indication Not ready
starting from the AREC or the starting binary input expires. Blk.by strtsig.superv.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the AREC a dead time is already running and a Not ready
blocking binary input is active, with the following binary inputs: Block. by binary input
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of Automatic reclosing attempts is Not ready
reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles Blk.by action time exp
expire without a trip command
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not
fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the
measuring voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the
dynamic blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued
failure of the measuring voltage.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 791
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[lobloawe-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-282 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Blocking Logic as an Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and
Dynamic Blocking)

6.15.4.18 1-/3-pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker


During short circuits, a 1-pole may shut off the circuit breaker if the corresponding protection functions
generate trip indications in accordance with the parameterization and short circuit type, and the automatic
reclosing function is parameterized such that 1-pole reclosing cycles are allowed.

792 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

By displaying the message 79 permits 1-pole trip (see Figure 6-282 in Section 6.15.4.17 Blockings)
the automatic reclosing function signals the 1-pole tripping option of the circuit breaker within the associated
function group of the circuit breaker.
Subject to the following conditions, the message 79 permits 1-pole trip will neither be generated nor
reset:
• during the current 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle if a blocking of the automatic reclosing func-
tion occurs prior to the reclosing

• If an automatic reclosing function start is signaled with 2-pole tripping, for example, through external
binary inputs

• During operating modes with tripping, if there is a 1-pole trip indication and the automatic reclosing
function does not allow for 1-pole cycles in accordance with their parameterization.

• If during a 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle the monitoring of the circuit-breaker pole recognizes
an implausible condition.
The automatic reclosing function may generate a 3-pole trip command (3-pole intertrip), if a blocking of the
automatic reclosing function occurs based on the above-mentioned causes, e.g., during the detection of an
evolving fault with pickup and blocking of evolving faults. Thus, the circuit breaker will have 3-pole tripping in
which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur, see also Chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for
Operating Modes with Tripping.

6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)


The additional functions Dead-line check (DLC) and Reduced dead time (RDT), are only possible for applica-
tions with a voltage-transformer connection. Another requirement is that the voltage of the line being
switched on can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This is only possible if the voltage trans-
former is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
Both additional functions DLC and RDT are mutually exclusive, because the DLC checks if the value falls below
a voltage threshold, while the RDT checks if the value exceeds the voltage threshold.
The respectively selected additional function runs in the automatic reclosing state dead time.

Reduced Dead Time (RDT)


With the Reduced dead time, a close command can be assigned before the expiration of the set dead times if
the line to switch on is recognized as fault-free through the measurement of the line voltage.
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-phase-voltages.
In systems with a grounded neutral point, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages are additionally observed.
In systems with compensated or with isolated neutral points, the largest 2 of the 3 phase-to-ground voltages
are additionally considered. Through this, a RDT can also be executed with 1-phase ground connections.
For the approval of the close command with RDT, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
• Each measured voltage is above the set threshold values Volt. thres.f. live line/bus
The phase-to-phase voltages are divided by √3 prior to comparison with the threshold value. Thus, the
phase-to-ground voltage UN√3 applies as the reference size for the parameterization.

• Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.

Dead-Line Check (DLC)


If after switching off a short-circuit the voltage on the switched off line does not disappear, the automatic
reclosing function can be avoided with the dead-line check (DLC).
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-ground voltages.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 793
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

For the release of the close command with DLC, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.

• All measured voltages for the set duration Voltage supervision time are below the set threshold
Volt. thres.f. live line/bus.

• The set dead time is expired.


As soon as the voltages fall below the threshold value for the set duration, the allowance for automatic
reclosing with DLC is assigned. This also applies if the values are not below the voltage threshold until the
expiration of the set dead time. In this way, an automatic reclosing is executed if the automatic reclosing func-
tion is first switched to at the end of the protected line and thus, the line is exposed to voltage again.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked by the DLC under the following conditions:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the Closure state, the dead time has expired
• All measured voltages were not simultaneously below the set threshold values Voltage supervision
time for the set durationVolt.thres. f. dead line/bus during the dead time.

794 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[lovrkarc-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-283 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line Check

6.15.4.20 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:6601:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:6601:101 General:79 operating • with op., w/o act. time with op., with
mode • with op., with act. time act. time
• w.pickup, w/o act. time
• w.pickup, w. action time

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 795
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:6601:102 General:CB ready check • no no
bef. start • yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready superv. 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
time
_:6601:107 General:3-pole operate • no yes
by 79 • yes
_:6601:108 General:Evolving-fault • with trip with trip
detection • with pickup
_:6601:109 General:Response to • strt. evol.flt.dead time blocks 79
evolv. faults • blocks 79
_:6601:110 General:Max. dead-time 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:112 General:Send delay f. 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ ∞
remot. close
DLC, RDT
_:6601:113 General:Dead-line check/ • without without
reduc.d.t • Reduced dead t. RDT
• Dead-line check DLC
_:6601:114 General:Voltage supervi- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
_:6601:116 General:Volt.thres. f. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 30.000 V
dead line/bus
Cycle 1
_:6571:102 Cycle 1:Start from idle • no yes
state allow. • yes
_:6571:103 Cycle 1:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 0.20 s
_:6571:108 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 3- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 0.50 s
pole trip
_:6571:107 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 1- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
pole trip
_:6571:104 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
1ph. pickup
_:6571:105 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
2ph. pickup
_:6571:106 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 0.50 s
3ph. pickup
_:6571:109 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.20 s
evolv. fault
_:6571:111 Cycle 1:CB ready check • no no
bef.close • yes

796 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:6571:110 Cycle 1:Synchroch. aft. • none none
3-pole d.t. • internal
• external
_:6571:112 Cycle 1:Intern. synchro- Setting options depend on
check with configuration

6.15.4.21 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:6601:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I
_:6601:502 General:>Blk. with 1-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:503 General:>Blk. with 2-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:504 General:>Blk. with 3-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:505 General:>Blk. 1-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:506 General:>Blk. 3-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:510 General:>Pickup 1ph for start SPS I
_:6601:511 General:>Pickup 2ph for start SPS I
_:6601:512 General:>Pickup 3ph for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:518 General:>Trip 1-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:519 General:>Trip 3-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:520 General:>Evolving fault start SPS I
_:6601:521 General:>Dead time start delay SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:6601:53 General:Health ENS O
_:6601:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 797
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:313 General:Evolv.-fault detected SPS O
_:6601:314 General:RDT CloseCmd indicat. SPS O
_:6601:315 General:Dead t. aft.1pole trip SPS O
_:6601:316 General:Dead t. aft.3pole trip SPS O
_:6601:317 General:Dead t. aft.1ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:318 General:Dead t. aft.2ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:319 General:Dead t. aft.3ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:320 General:Dead t. aft.evolv.flt. SPS O
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:322 General:Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:323 General:Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:324 General:CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc SPS O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:326 General:Remote close signal SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:332 General:Blk.by max. d.t. delay SPS O
_:6601:333 General:Blk. by evolving fault SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:334 General:Blk.by dead-line check SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
_:6601:339 General:Cyc1 1p AR INS O
_:6601:340 General:Cyc1 3p AR INS O
_:6601:341 General:Cyc2+ 1p AR INS O
_:6601:342 General:Cyc2+ 3p AR INS O
Cycle 1
_:6571:51 Cycle 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6571:500 Cycle 1:>Block 79 cycle SPS I
_:6571:52 Cycle 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6571:53 Cycle 1:Health ENS O
_:6571:301 Cycle 1:Cycle running SPS O
_:6571:302 Cycle 1:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6571:303 Cycle 1:Synchrocheck request SPS O

798 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)

6.15.5.1 Description
Description
It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the
other end or ends. The requirements for this is that the voltage transformer aligned on the line side or a possi-
bility to transfer a close command to a remote line end exists.
Figure 6-284 shows an example with a voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I works with defined
dead times, while the adaptive dead time is configured in device II. It is important that the line is at least fed
from busbar A, so from the side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at the line end II decides independently if and
when a reclosing is reasonable and permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the voltage of the line at the
end II, which is switched through after reclosing from end I. The reclosing at end II occurs, as soon as it exists,
so that the line from end I is set back under voltage. Basically, all phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
voltages are monitored.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time
(RDT) ) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
If the short circuit has been cleared after successful reclosing, the line A-B from the busbar A will be set under
voltage through the position I. Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate voltage
measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared.
If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I, I will be switched to the fault again. At line end II,
now no healthy voltage will appear. The device here recognizes this and does not close again.
With multiple reclosing, the process may repeat if the reclosing is unsuccessful until one of the reclosings is
successful or a final disconnection occurs.

[dwarcasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-284 Example for Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)

As the example shows, the adaptive dead time brings along the following advantages:
• The circuit breaker at position II does not switch off again with a remaining fault and is protected through
this.

• With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III, no further disruption cycles may occur here
because the short-circuit path via busbar B and the position II remains disrupted even with multiple
reclosing.

• At position I, with multiple reclosing and even with a final tripping, an overlapping is allowed, because
the line at position II remains open and thus, no actual overreaching can occur at position I.
The adaptive dead time also contains the reduced dead time (RDT), because the criteria are the same. A
special setting of the reduced dead time (RDT) is unnecessary if the automatic reclosing function is used with
adaptive dead time (ADT).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 799
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.5.2 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:6601:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:6601:101 General:79 operating mode • with op., w/o act. time with op., with
• with op., with act. time act. time
• w.pickup, w/o act. time
• w.pickup, w. action time
_:6601:102 General:CB ready check bef. • no no
start • yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready superv. 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
time
_:6601:107 General:3-pole operate by • no yes
79 • yes
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:114 General:Voltage supervi- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
ADT
_:6631:101 ADT:1-pole trip allowed • no no
• yes
_:6631:104 ADT:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 0.20 s
_:6631:105 ADT:Maximum dead time 0.50 s to 3000.00 s 5.00 s
_:6631:102 ADT:CB ready check • no no
bef.close • yes
_:6631:103 ADT:Synchroch. aft. 3-pole • none none
d.t. • internal
• external
_:6631:106 ADT:Intern. synchrocheck Setting options depend on
with configuration

6.15.5.3 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:6601:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I

800 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:6601:502 General:>Blk. with 1-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:503 General:>Blk. with 2-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:504 General:>Blk. with 3-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:505 General:>Blk. 1-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:506 General:>Blk. 3-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:510 General:>Pickup 1ph for start SPS I
_:6601:511 General:>Pickup 2ph for start SPS I
_:6601:512 General:>Pickup 3ph for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:518 General:>Trip 1-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:519 General:>Trip 3-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:6601:53 General:Health ENS O
_:6601:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:312 General:Max. dead time expired SPS O
_:6601:315 General:Dead t. aft.1pole trip SPS O
_:6601:316 General:Dead t. aft.3pole trip SPS O
_:6601:317 General:Dead t. aft.1ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:318 General:Dead t. aft.2ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:319 General:Dead t. aft.3ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:322 General:Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:323 General:Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 801
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
_:6601:339 General:Cyc1 1p AR INS O
_:6601:340 General:Cyc1 3p AR INS O
ADT
_:6631:51 ADT:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6631:501 ADT:>Remote close signal SPS I
_:6631:52 ADT:Behavior ENS O
_:6631:53 ADT:Health ENS O
_:6631:301 ADT:ADT is running SPS O
_:6631:302 ADT:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6631:303 ADT:Synchrocheck request SPS O

6.15.6 Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.6.1 Description
The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function
mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function. In this function mode, the SIPROTEC protec-
tion functions create the trip command and the external reclosing device creates the close command.
The following figure shows the interaction of an external reclosing device with the functions of the SIPROTEC
5 device.

802 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

[loaweext-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-285 Connection of an External Automatic Reclosing Function

There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
• From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching zone
with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.

• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.

6.15.6.2 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Ext
_:6661:51 Ext:Mode (controllable) C
_:6661:501 Ext:>Release stages I
_:6661:502 Ext:>1-pole trip permitted I
_:6661:503 Ext:>1-pole AR only I
_:6661:52 Ext:Behavior O
_:6661:53 Ext:Health O
_:6661:54 Ext:Inactive O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 803
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

6.15.7 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings

For the automatic reclosing function, there are 3 functions available in the function library. In each circuit-
breaker function group, a function from the automatic reclosing function can be used.
Configure one of the 3 following function specifications:
• Cyclic automatic reclosing function
• Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT)

• Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function

Starting the Automatic Reclosing Function


The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and the automatic reclosing func-
tion can be set separately for each protection function. The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI. The
Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which the
external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
Configure the starting and blocking condition for the automatic reclosing function at the position shown in
Figure 6-286 in DIGSI or route the corresponding binary inputs.

[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-286 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI

General Settings
If you use the Cyclic automatic reclosing function or Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead
time function, set the following settings under General.
There are no settings for the function Operation with external automatic reclosing function. The control
occurs exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.

Parameter: 79 operating mode

• Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time

804 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

You can use the 79 operating mode parameter to determine which start criteria the automatic reclosing
function works with.
Parameter Value Description
with op., with act. The automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s). The start occurs with all protection function(s) or
protection stages that are configured through the automatic reclosing function
start matrix.
Siemens generally recommends this setting for applications with 1/3-pole trip-
ping and for applications with 3-pole tripping if a single dead time, independent
of the type of connection working, is required in the automatic reclosing func-
tion cycle.
Detailed information can be found in Chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating mode 1
w.pickup, w. action The automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s) and the type of fault. The start occurs with all protec-
tion function(s) or protection stages that are configured through the automatic
reclosing function start matrix.
For applications with 3-pole tripping and dead time dependent on the circuit
type, Siemens recommends this setting.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 2
with op., w/o act. Each operate indication starts the automatic reclosing function. The start occurs
time with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through
the automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur
after tripping.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 3
w.pickup, w/o act. Each operate indication starts the automatic reclosing function. The automatic
time reclosing function cycles are dependent on the type of fault. The start occurs
with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through
the automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur
after tripping.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 4

Parameter: CB ready check bef. start

• Default setting (_:6601:102) CB ready check bef. start = no


With the CB ready check bef. start parameter, you can determine if the readiness of the circuit
breaker should be tested before starting the automatic reclosing function.
Additionally or alternatively, it is possible to check the readiness of the circuit breaker after the expiration of
the dead time, directly before the assignment of the close command. There is another parameter described in
the chapter 6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function for
this function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 805
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Parameter Value Description


yes The automatic reclosing function checks the readiness of the circuit breaker for
a switching cycle, consisting of a tripping-reclosing-switching.
If the circuit breaker is ready - signaled through a binary input - the startup of
the automatic reclosing function can occur. If the circuit breaker is not ready,
the automatic reclosing function reports the static blocking.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
Note: The presetting of this parameter does not correspond with the recom-
mended setting for operation. The automatic reclosing function would other-
wise be blocked with a non-available circuit breaker-ready-signal. Please set the
parameter as recommended.
no The readiness of the circuit breaker is not checked before starting the automatic
reclosing function. The test also does not occur if the readiness signal from the
circuit breaker is connected to a binary input on the device.

Parameter: Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc.

• Default setting (_:6601:103) Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. = 3.00 s


With the Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. parameter, set the time used to decide if the currently running
reclosing cycle was successful or not. Detailed information about the function of the reclaim time can be
found in the chapter 6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time .
The presetting for the reclaim time can be frequently maintained. In regions where thunderstorms and storms
often occur, a shorter reclaim time makes sense in order to minimize the danger of the final disconnection due
to sequential lightning strikes or cable spark over.
Select a long reclaim time if there is no possibility for circuit-breaker supervision with multiple automatic
reclosing, for example, due to missing auxiliary contacts or lacking circuit-breaker-ready-information. In this
case, the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker.

Parameter: Block. time aft. man.close

• Default setting (_:6601:104) Block. time aft. man.close = 1.00 s


With the Block. time aft. man.close parameter, the time is determined for which the automatic
reclosing should be blocked after a manual connection.
Set the time so that the circuit breaker can be safely switched on and off during connection to a short circuit
without the automatic reclosing function being automatically closed.

Parameter: Start signal supervis.time

• Default setting (_:6601:105) Start signal supervis.time = 0.25 s


With the Start signal supervis.time parameter, set the maximum time after which a circuit breaker
must be opened after a trip command. If the time expires, a failure of the circuit breaker is assumed and the
automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
Detailed information about the function of the start supervision time can be found in the chapter
6.15.4.5 Start.

806 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

NOTE

i With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
• The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay. With
this, you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the
busbar, no automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)

• During a 1-pole trip command repeat caused by the circuit-breaker failure protection, the start supervi-
sion time must be longer than the delay time for the 1-pole trip command repeat. With this, it can be
ensured that the trip command is not connected before the 1-pole trip command repeat through the
circuit-breaker failure protection from the trip-command synchronization of the 3-pole automatic
reclosing function.

• The start supervision time must be longer than the time delay for the tripping of the busbars if a 1-
pole trip command for the line branch should not be coupled by the automatic reclosing function or
the circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole before the circuit-breaker failure protection can trip the
busbars. With this case, the automatic reclosing function must be blocked with the trip command for
the busbars. This helps to avoid an automatic reclosing function being executed after the tripping of
the busbars for the line branch. The blocking of the automatic reclosing function can occur with a CFC
link to the binary input >Block function.

Parameter: CB ready superv. time


The setting of this parameter is only important if the cycle-specific parameter CB ready check bef.close
is set to yes. Otherwise, this parameter has no effect.
• Default setting (_:6601:106) CB ready superv. time = 3.00 s
With the CB ready check bef. start parameter, you can determine after which maximum time after
the tripping the circuit breaker must be ready for the reclosing function.
Set the time somewhat longer than the regeneration time of the circuit breaker after an OFF-ON-OFF cycle.
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .

Parameter: 3-pole operate by 79


This parameter is irrelevant and cannot be set if the circuit breaker is configured exclusively for 3-pole trip-
ping.
• Recommended setting value (_:6601:107) 3-pole operate by 79 = yes
With the 3-pole operate by 79 parameter, you can determine if the automatic reclosing function creates
a 3-pole operate indication to the 3-pole coupling of the circuit-breaker pole.
Parameter Value Description
yes The automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole operate indication under
the following conditions:
• With the blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead
time, for example, through an evolving fault or external blocking
• If an automatic reclosing function start is signalized with 2-pole tripping,
for example, through external binary inputs
• For operating modes with tripping, if there is a 1-pole operate indication
and the automatic reclosing function does not allow for 1-pole cycles in
accordance with their parameterization.
• If during a 1-pole the automatic reclosing function cycle the supervision of
the circuit-breaker pole recognizes an implausible condition.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
no The automatic reclosing function does not create 3-pole tripping.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 807
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the chapters 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating
Modes with Tripping, 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.

Parameter: Evolving-fault detection


This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time).
• Default setting (_:6601:108) Evolving-fault detection = with trip
With the Evolving-fault detection parameter, you can determine which criteria is used to recognize an
evolving fault. The actual effect of the recognized evolving fault on the automatic reclosing function can be
set with the parameter described below Response to evolv. faults.
Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time.
You can find detailed information about evolving-fault detection in the chapter 6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault
Detection During the Dead Time.
Parameter Value Description
with trip Evolving faults are recognized if an operate indication occurs during the dead
time. Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured
for the start of the automatic reclosing function or not.
The pickup of a protection function without an operate indication does not lead
to evolving-fault detection.
with pickup Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function
configured for the automatic reclosing function start is picked up or if an
external pickup is detected through a binary input.

For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is
adequately interconnected.
If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.

Parameter: Response to evolv. faults


This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time).
• Default setting (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79
With the Response to evolv. faults parameter, you can determine how the automatic reclosing func-
tion reacts to recognized faults.
You can find detailed information about the automatic reclosing function for faults in the chapter
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
Parameter Value Description
blocks 79 The automatic reclosing function is immediately blocked until the disconnec-
tion of the fault.
For blockings through faults during the 1-pole dead times, you can force a 3-
pole trip command through the automatic reclosing function if the you set the
parameter 3-pole operate by 79 to yes.
strt. evol.flt.dead After the 3-pole trip command to clear up the fault, the automatic reclosing
time function starts a new 3-pole automatic reclosing function cycle with the set
Dead time aft. evolv. fault.

808 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Parameter: Max. dead-time delay


This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time).
• Default setting (_:6601:110) Max. dead-time delay = 0.5 s
With the Max. dead-time delay parameter, you determine at which time the starting of the dead time
may be delayed before the automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
The delay of the start of the dead time is possible with the binary input >Dead time start delay.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.5 Start.

Parameter: Max. dead-time extension

• Default setting (_:6601:111) Max. dead-time extension = 1.2 s


With the Max. dead-time extension parameter, you determine the time by which the dead time may be
extended before the automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
With the setting oo (invalid), the extension is unlimited.
An extension of the dead time can be required under the following conditions:
• Waiting for the readiness of the circuit breaker

• Inquiry of a synchronous test

• Delay through binary input in order e.g. to give the leading automatic reclosing function priority in a
system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and
Close Command .

Parameter: Voltage supervision time


This parameter is only important if you use the subfunctions RDT, DLC, or the ADT function. If you do not use
any of these functions, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:114) Voltage supervision time = 0.1 s
With the Voltage supervision time parameter, you can determine the measuring time that is available
as a criteria for the voltage decision. It should be longer than all transient oscillations through switching oper-
ations.
For the subfunctions Reduced dead time and Reclosing function with adaptive dead time, this measuring
time applies for the determination of the surpassing of a voltage threshold. For the subfunction Dead-line
check, the surpassing of a voltage threshold is checked.
Siemens recommends the setting 0.10 s.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the following parameters and in the chapters
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.15.5.1 Description.

Parameter: Volt. thres.f. live line/bus


This parameter is only important if you use the subfunction RDT or the function ADT. If you do not use any of
these functions, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:115) Volt. thres.f. live line/bus = 48 V
With the Volt. thres.f. live line/bus parameter, you can determine the limit voltage above which
the line should be seen as fault-free. It must be lower than the smallest expected operating voltage. The
phase-to-ground voltage applies as the reference value.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the following settings and in the chapters
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.15.5.1 Description.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 809
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Parameter: Dead-line check/reduc.d.t


This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time).
• Default setting (_:6601:113) Dead-line check/reduc.d.t = without
With the Dead-line check/reduc.d.t parameter, you can determine if the automatic reclosing function
should work with one of the additional functions Dead-line check DLC or Reduced dead t. RDT.
Parameter Value Description
without The automatic reclosing function occurs after the expiration of the parameter-
ized dead times. DLC or RDT are not activated.
Reduced dead t. RDT The automatic reclosing function works with a reduced dead time (RDT).
Dead-line check DLC The automatic reclosing functions works with dead-line check. The closing indi-
cation is only assigned if the line was really de-energized during the dead time.

You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT) .

NOTE

i Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This
is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.

Parameter: Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus


This parameter is only important if you use the Dead-line check subfunction. If you do not use any of this
subfunction, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:116) Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus = 30 V
With the Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus parameter, you can determine the limit voltage below which
the line should be seen with certainty as dead or turned off. The threshold value is used by the Dead-line
check subfunction (dead-line check). The reference size is the phase-to-ground voltage.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT) .

Parameter: Send delay f. remot. close


With the Send delay f. remot. close parameter, you can determine after which time after the auto-
matic reclosing function the information is sent to the remote closing.
• Default setting (_:6601:112) Send delay f. remot. close = oo (invalid)
The transmission delay prevents the device operating in the adaptive dead time mode on the opposite side
from closing unnecessarily if the local reclosing function remains unsuccessful. On the other hand, it must be
remembered that the line is not available for transporting energy as long as the opposite end is also closed.
Thus, the Send delay f. remot. close must be added to the dead time in order to determine the
system stability.
You can find detailed information about this functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and
Close Command .

6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function

For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.

810 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Parameter: Start from idle state allow.


This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with action time.
• Default setting (_:6571:102) Start from idle state allow. = yes
With the parameter Start from idle state allow. you can determine whether the action time of this
automatic reclosing cycle is started, if the automatic reclosing function is in idle state during with incoming
general pickup. Please set the parameter always to yes, if the automatic reclosing function is configured for
only 1 cycle. If several cycles are configured, you can control the effectiveness of the automatic reclosing
cycles with this parameter and various action times.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating
Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time und 6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With
Action Time .

Parameter: Action time


This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with action time.
• Default setting (_:6571:103) Action time = 0.2 s
With this parameter Action time you can determine, within which time frame the trip command must
appear, in order to start the automatic reclosing function. If the trip command occurs only after the action
time has expired, automatic reclosing does not occur within the active automatic reclosing cycle.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in
Chapters 6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time and 6.15.4.7 Cycle
Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time .

Parameter: Dead time aft. 3-pole trip, Dead time aft. 1-pole trip
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with tripping.
• Default setting (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip = 0.5 s

• Default setting (_:6571:107) Dead time aft. 1-pole trip = 1.2 s


With this parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip and Dead time aft. 1-pole trip, you can
determine after which dead time the automatic reclosing function will be executed. You can set different dead
times for 1-pole and 3-pole reclosing cycles. Whether a trip occurs for 1-pole or 3-pole depends on the type of
the protection function, and if the tripping protection function for the start of the automatic reclosing function
has been configured.

NOTE

i If you would like to permit the automatic reclosing function only after a 1-pole tripping of the circuit
breaker, set the dead time after the 3-pole trip (parameter dead time after 3-pole OFF) to ∞. If the auto-
matic reclosing function should only occur after a 3-pole trip, set the dead time after the 1-pole trip
(parameter Dead time aft. 1-pole trip) to ∞. Therefore, all protection functions will be tripped as
3-pole after each type of fault.

After a 3-pole trip of the circuit breaker, the system stability is priority. Since the switched off line cannot
develop synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is permitted in most cases. The usual duration is 0.3 s to
0.6 s. A longer period can be tolerated if a synchrocheck is carried out prior to reclosing. Even in radial systems
longer 3-pole dead times are possible. The dead time after a 1-pole trip of the circuit breaker must be long
enough to ensure the short circuit arc has extinguished and the ambient air is deionized. It is only then that
the automatic reclosing function can be successful. Due to the charge reversal of the conducted capacity, this
time is longer, depending on the length of the line. Standard durations are between 0.9 s and 1.5 s.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 811
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with pickup.
• Default setting (_:6571:104) Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s

• Default setting (_:6571:105) Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = 1.2 s

• Default setting (_:6571:106) Dead time aft.3ph. pickup = 0.5 s


With the 3 dead-time parameters, you can determine after which dead time the automatic reclosing function
will be executed. Please set the times as desired for the respective type of short circuit.
• The parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup applies to dead times after 1-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A, B, C, or A-Gnd, B-Gnd, C-Gnd

• The parameter Dead time aft.2ph. pickup applies to dead times after 2-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd

• The parameter Dead time aft.3ph. pickup applies to dead times after 3-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd

NOTE

i If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).

Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 sec. The automatic
reclosing function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
• Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s
• Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = oo (invalid)

• Dead time aft.3ph. pickup = oo (invalid)

Parameter: Dead time aft. evolv. fault


These parameters are only significant if the parameter (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults is
set to strt. evol.flt.dead time.
• Default setting (_:6571:109) Dead time aft. evolv. fault = 1.2 s
With the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault, you can determine after which dead time the auto-
matic reclosing function should be executed, if based on an evolving fault during the current dead time, a 3-
pole trip has occurred. For this 3-pole dead time, stability concerns for the system are also important. Often,
this dead time as well as the parameter (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip can be set.
Detailed information about the function during evolving faults during dead time are described in Chapter
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.

Parameter: CB ready check bef.close

• Default setting (_:6571:111) CB ready check bef.close = no


With the parameter CB ready check bef.close you can determine if after the expiration of the dead
time (meaning, directly prior to assigning the close command) readiness of the circuit breaker should be
queried.

812 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function

Parameter Value Description


no With the setting no, the automatic reclosing function does not check again the
readiness of the circuit breaker prior to assigning the close demand.
Siemens recommends this setting, if it is sufficient to check the readiness of the
circuit breaker for the entire switching cycle once before the start of a reclosing
function, consisting of tripping-reclosing-tripping. The setting for checking the
readiness of the circuit breaker prior to the start of the automatic reclosing
function is done using the parameter (_:6601:102) CB ready check
bef. start.
yes With the setting yes, the dead time can be extended if after the expiration of
the dead time the circuit breaker is not ready for the next ON-OFF cycle. The
maximum delay of the dead time can be set with the parameter (_:
6601:111) Max. dead-time extension.
Siemens recommends this setting, if it can be assumed that the circuit breaker
becomes available to switch on the reclosing function only after an additional
waiting period.

Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .

Parameter: Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t.

• Default setting (_:6571:110) Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. = none


With the parameter Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. you can determine if a synchrocheck must be carried
out for the configured automatic reclosing cycle.
If during a 3-pole interruption in the system stability problems may be a concern, the synchrocheck should be
carried out. If only 1-pole reclosure cycles are possible or stability problems are not to be expected during the
3-pole dead time, for example, due to a highly intermeshed system or radial system, please select the param-
eter none.
Parameter Value Description
none During the automatic reclosing cycle a synchrocheck is not executed.
internal In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
For the synchrocheck a synchrocheck stage of the internal synchronization
function is used, which is contained in the same function group as the circuit
breaker and the automatic reclosing function. The selection of the synchro-
check stage that is used in the automatic reclosing cycle occurs through the
following described parameter Internal synchrocheck.
external In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
An external synchrocheck device initiates the synchrocheck. The external
synchrocheck device is connected with the binary signals Synchrocheck
request and >Release by ext.sync.. Detailed information about the
function can be found in Chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command under the section Synchrocheck.

Parameter: Internal synchrocheck


These parameters are only significant if the previously described parameter (_:6571:110) Synchroch.
aft. 3-pole d.t. is set to internal.
With the parameter Internal Synchrocheck, you can determine which function block of the synchroniza-
tion function for the automatic reclosing function is used after a 3-pole dead time. This selection is only
possible for function blocks of the synchronization function, and which are included in the same circuit-
breaker function group as the automatic reclosing function. The setting options of the parameter will be
generated dynamically, according to the actual parameterization.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 813
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.1 Overview of Functions

The Overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 50/51):


• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection

6.16.2 Structure of the Function

The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (50/51 OC-3ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, phases – basic (50/51 OC-3ph-B)
Only the Advanced function type is available in the devices of the line protection family. The Basic function
type is provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the Overcurrent protection, phase – advanced function type, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced

• 1 stage User-defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve

• 1 stage Definite-time overcurrent protection – stage with adaptive pickup


In the Overcurrent protection, phases – basic function type, the following stages can be operated simulta-
neously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic
The Advanced function type is implemented such that the emergency mode can act across all advanced over-
current-protection stages (see Figure 6-287).
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
characteristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The optional function block Filter offered in the advanced function allows to gain harmonics or to compensate
the amplitude attenuation for the RMS value.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

814 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[dwocpap1-210113-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-287 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Advanced

[dwocpbp1-210113-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-288 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic

If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 815
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain

6.16.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter

• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.

Logic

[lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-289 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter

The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards, the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the values of the respective parameters
h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), and h(4).

NOTE

i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.

The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes. Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.

Functional Measured Values

Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


Iph:A Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current A
Iph:B Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current B

816 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


Iph:C Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current C

You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Overcurrent
protection, phases – advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the functional measured values are shown as ---.

6.16.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Enable filter

• Default setting (_:1) Enable filter = no.


With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
Parameter Value Description
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.

Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4)

• Default setting (_:2) h(0) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:3) h(1) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:4) h(2) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:5) h(3) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:6) h(4) = 1.000


With the default value of the coefficients, the filter has no effect and no gain is applied.
If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor,
the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response (gain factors) for the reactor. To
determine the coefficients h(0) to h(4) for the FIR filter, you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary PC
tool which is available in the SIPROTEC download area. The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool.
They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter. The amplitude attenuation of higher
frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated
by the filter.
To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device, set the following coefficients in the
filter.
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 817
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Filter
_:1 Filter:Enable filter • no no
• yes
_:2 Filter:h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:3 Filter:h(1) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:4 Filter:h(2) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:5 Filter:h(3) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:6 Filter:h(4) -100.000 to 100.000 1.000

6.16.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Filter
_:301 Filter:Iph:A MV O
_:302 Filter:Iph:B MV O
_:303 Filter:Iph:C MV O

818 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.16.4.1 Description

Logic of the Basic Stage

[loocp3b1-280113-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-290 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 819
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Logic of the Advanced Stage

[Lo_ocp_umz_ad.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-291 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

820 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[loocp3p1-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-292 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced

Emergency mode (Advanced Stage)


You use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcurrent
protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. This happens,
for example, in the case of distance protection when a short circuit occurs in the voltage-transformer secon-
dary circuit or the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected, or in the case of line differential
protection where protection communication is disconnected. This means that the emergency mode replaces
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 821
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Method of measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage)


If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS
measurement.
• Normal RMS value
• Gained RMS value from the function block Filter
If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati-
cally used.

NOTE

i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.

I0 Elimination (Advanced Stage)


In order to increase the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side, use the
I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent-protection application on one transformer.
In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents, the transformer neutral point current IY must be
measured.

[dwsgaocp-230414-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-293 I0 Elimination Principle

The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the current interface of thePhase function group. In the function group Line, the function Overcurrent
protection, phases is used.

822 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[sccmpoint-230414-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-294 Connection of the Measuring Point Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the Line
Function Group

In case of an I0 elimination, the following calculations result:


IA-elim. = IA - 1/3 IY
IB-elim. = IB - 1/3 IY
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is applied.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.

Pickup delay (Advanced Stage)


If the current exceeds the threshold value, the pickup delay is generated. If the threshold remains exceeded
during the pickup delay time, the pickup signal is generated.

Dropout Delay (Advanced Stage)


If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for the
specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still main-
tained, the stage operates.

Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description ).

Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 823
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.16.9.1 Description .

6.16.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Emergency mode

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Emergency mode = no


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the
function.
Parameter Value Description
no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection can
no longer operate, overcurrent protection automatically starts to operate.
The situations in which main protection can no longer operate are:
• Main protection, distance protection: Measuring-voltage failure
• Main protection, line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure
caused by binary input Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Default setting (_:661:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay

• Default setting (_:661:3) Threshold = 1.500 A (for the 1st stage)

• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload

824 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

protection. Therefore, set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to
approx. 20 % above the maximum load that is expected.

EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1

Settings in primary and secondary values result in the setting values:

[foocpph1-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.

2nd Stage (High-Current Stage):


This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.

EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the begin-
ning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A

Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:

[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 825
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]

The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:

[fo_ocpph4_030311, 1, en_US]

The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:

[foocp004-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance and line impedance have different angles, you have to use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold .

Parameter: I0 elimination

• Default setting (_:661:120) I0 elimination = no


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer. This
increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side. The following condi-
tions must be fulfilled:
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
• The parameter Method of measurement is set to fundamental comp. .
With the I0 elimination parameter, you can switch the I0 elimination function on or off.

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:661:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
For special applications, it is desirable that a short exceeding of the current threshold does not lead to the
pickup of the stage and start fault logging and recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not triggered
if the current threshold is exceeded.
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s as a default.

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Default setting (_:661:101) Dropout delay = 0.00 s


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.

826 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Default setting (_:661:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:661:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


The parameter must be set for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
no The stage always operates 3-pole.
yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device (generated in
the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always 3-pole because the
device does not support phase-selective tripping.

6.16.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency • no no
mode • caused by main prot.
• caused by binary input
General
_:661:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:661:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:661:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:661:26 Definite-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:661:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:661:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:661:120 Definite-T 1:I0 elimina- • no no
tion • yes
_:661:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 827
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:661:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:661:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:661:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:661:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:661:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:661:35 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:661:29 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:661:36 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:661:14 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:20 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:661:30 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:661:37 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:661:15 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:21 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:661:31 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:661:38 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:661:16 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

828 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:661:22 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:661:32 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:661:39 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:661:17 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:23 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:661:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:661:40 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:661:18 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:24 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:661:34 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:661:41 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:661:19 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:25 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay

6.16.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 829
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:661:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:661:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:661:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:661:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:661:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:661:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:661:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:661:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:661:63 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:661:64 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:661:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:661:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:661:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:661:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:661:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:661:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:661:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
_:661:302 Definite-T 1:I0el.Iph WYE O
Definite-T 2
_:662:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:662:84 Definite-T 2:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:662:500 Definite-T 2:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:662:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive SPS O
_:662:52 Definite-T 2:Behavior ENS O
_:662:53 Definite-T 2:Health ENS O
_:662:60 Definite-T 2:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:662:62 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:662:63 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:662:64 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:662:65 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:662:66 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:662:67 Definite-T 2:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:662:68 Definite-T 2:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:662:55 Definite-T 2:Pickup ACD O
_:662:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:662:57 Definite-T 2:Operate ACT O
_:662:302 Definite-T 2:I0el.Iph WYE O

830 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.5 Stage with Independent Characteristic Curve, Definite-Time Overcurrent


Protection and Adaptive Pickup

6.16.5.1 Description
The Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive pickup is essentially the same as the Stage
with definite-time characteristic curve.
The chapter describes only the extensions of the Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive
pickup.
You can find the description for the Stage with definite-time characteristic curve beginning with chapter
6.16.4.1 Description .
The Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive pickup has the following extensions:
• You can additionally limit the setting range for the Threshold parameter by user-specific minimum/
maximum values.
In that way, you can adapt the setting range for the Threshold parameter in a better way to the specific
application cases.

You can additionally define a minimum and maximum value for the setting range of the Threshold param-
eter and store it in various settings groups, for example. If you switch the settings groups, you can quickly and
flexibly adapt the setting range for the Threshold parameter to different application cases.
You can find more detailed information regarding settings group switching in chapter 3.11.1 Settings-Group
Switching.

6.16.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: max threshold, min threshold

• Default setting max threshold = 35.000 A

• Default setting min threshold = 0.030 A


With the max threshold and min threshold parameters, you can define an upper and a lower limiting
value for the Threshold parameter. This allows you to additionally limit the setting range of the Threshold
parameter and to adapt it to specific application cases. If you set the max threshold and min threshold
parameters to the same value, the parameter Threshold cannot take on a different value.

NOTE

i You can find the description of the additional parameters of the stage in chapter 6.16.4.1 Description .

6.16.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 Def.-T adap.p.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:11 Def.-T adap.p.:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:26 Def.-T adap.p.:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:27 Def.-T adap.p.:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 831
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8 Def.-T adap.p.:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:120 Def.-T adap.p.:I0 elimi- • no no
nation • yes
_:3 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:42 Def.-T adap.p.:max 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 35.000 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 175.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 35.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 175.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 35.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 175.000 A
_:43 Def.-T adap.p.:min 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:4 Def.-T adap.p.:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:102 Def.-T adap.p.:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:101 Def.-T adap.p.:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:6 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 Def.-T adap.p.:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready • yes
_:35 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 Def.-T adap.p.:Effected • no no
by AR cycle 1 • yes
_:36 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:14 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:20 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay

832 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:30 Def.-T adap.p.:Effected • no no
by AR cycle 2 • yes
_:37 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:15 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:21 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:31 Def.-T adap.p.:Effected • no no
by AR cycle 3 • yes
_:38 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:16 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:22 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:32 Def.-T adap.p.:Effected • no no
by AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:39 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:17 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:23 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 Def.-T adap.p.:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:40 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 833
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:18 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:24 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:34 Def.-T adap.p.:Effected • no no
by binary input • yes
_:41 Def.-T adap.p.:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:19 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:25 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay

6.16.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Def.-T adap.p.
_:81 Def.-T adap.p.:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 Def.-T adap.p.:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 Def.-T adap.p.:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Def.-T adap.p.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Def.-T adap.p.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Def.-T adap.p.:Health ENS O
_:60 Def.-T adap.p.:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:63 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:64 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:65 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 Def.-T adap.p.:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:55 Def.-T adap.p.:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Def.-T adap.p.:Operate ACT O
_:302 Def.-T adap.p.:I0el.Iph WYE O
_:303 Def.-T adap.p.:Threshold MV O

834 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.6 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.16.6.1 Description

Logic of the Basic Stage

[loocp3b2-280113-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-295 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 835
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Logic of the Advanced Stage

[Lo_ocp_amz_ad.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-296 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

836 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[loocp3p2-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-297 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced

RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage)


If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS
measurement.
• Normal RMS value
• Gained RMS value from the function block Filter
If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati-
cally used.

NOTE

i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 837
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Emergency mode (Advanced Stage)


You use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcurrent
protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. This happens,
for example, in the case of distance protection when a short circuit occurs in the voltage-transformer secon-
dary circuit, when the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected or in the case of line differential
protection where protection communication is disconnected. This means that the emergency mode replaces
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

Minimum Time of the Curve (Advanced Stage)


With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time.

[DwOcp3Mi_20140715-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-298 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve

838 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage)


With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time.

Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

I0 Elimination (Advanced Stage)


In order to increase the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side, use the
I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent-protection applications on one transformer.
In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents, the transformer neutral point current IY must be
measured.

[dwsgaocp-230414-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-299 I0 Elimination Principle

The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the current interface of the Phase function group. In the function group Phase, the function Overcurrent
protection, phases is used.

[sccmpoint-230414-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-300 Connection of the Measuring Point Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the Line
Function Group

In case of an I0 elimination, the following calculations must be considered:


IA-elim. = IA - 1/3 IY
IB-elim. = IB - 1/3 IY
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 839
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is operating.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.

Pickup Delay (Advanced Stage)


If the current exceeds the threshold value, the pickup delay starts. If the threshold is exceeded during the
pickup delay time, the pickup signal is generated.

Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description ).

Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.16.9.1 Description .

6.16.6.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Emergency mode

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Emergency mode = no


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the func-
tion.
Parameter Value Description
no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection can
no longer operate, overcurrent protection automatically starts to operate.
The situations in which main protection can no longer operate are:
• Main protection, distance protection: Measuring-voltage failure
• Main protection, line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure

840 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter Value Description


caused by binary input Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:691:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:691:130) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 11.18.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.

Parameter: Min. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:691:113) Min. time of the curve = 0.00 s


This parameter is only available in the advanced stage.
With the Min. time of the curve parameter, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time. If the
setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.

NOTE

i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Default setting (_:691:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s


With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
time.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 841
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:691:3) Threshold = 1.500 A


Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.

EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A

Settings in primary and secondary values result in the setting values:

[foocp005-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Parameter: I0 elimination

• Default setting (_:661:120) I0 elimination = no


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer. This
increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the low-voltage side of the transformer. The following
conditions must be fulfilled:
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
• The parameter Method of measurement is set to fundamental comp..
With the I0 elimination setting, you can switch the I0 elimination function on or off.

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:661:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
For special applications it is desirable if the current threshold is briefly exceeded, that this will not lead to the
pickup of the stage and starts fault logging or recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not trigger if
the current threshold is exceeded.
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s and is considered as a default.

842 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:691:101) Time dial = 1.00


With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays
might be reasonable (one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the
main protection function fails.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:691:131) Reset = disk emulation


With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:691:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


The parameter must be set for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
no The stage always operates 3-pole.
yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device
(generated in the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always
3-pole because the device does not support phase-selective tripping.

6.16.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency • no no
mode • caused by main prot.
• caused by binary input
General
_:691:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:691:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:691:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:691:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:691:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:691:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 843
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:691:120 Inverse-T 1:I0 elimina- • no no
tion • yes
_:691:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:108 Inverse-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:691:130 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:691:113 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
_:691:131 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:691:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
_:691:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:691:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:691:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:691:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:691:36 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:691:14 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:102 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:691:30 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:691:37 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:691:15 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:103 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00

844 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:691:31 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:691:38 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:691:16 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:104 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:691:32 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:691:39 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:691:17 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:105 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:691:33 Inverse-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:691:40 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:691:18 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:106 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:691:34 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:691:41 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:691:19 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:107 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 845
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Inverse-T 1
_:691:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:691:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:691:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:691:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:691:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:691:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:691:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:691:62 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:691:63 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:691:64 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:691:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:691:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:691:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:691:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:691:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:691:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:691:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:691:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O
_:691:302 Inverse-T 1:I0el.Iph WYE O

6.16.7 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

6.16.7.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.16.6.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).

User-Defined Characteristic Curve


With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30
value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve


When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed. An
integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the charac-

846 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

teristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char-
acteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.

[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-301 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve

NOTE

i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.

If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.

• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 847
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.7.2 Application and Setting Notes


This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only differences are described in chapter 6.16.7.1 Description . This chapter provides only the application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold (absolute) parameter. You
can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6.16.6.2 Application and Setting
Notes .

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)


With these settings, you define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1


With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:110) Reset = disk emulation


With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
but an instantaneous dropout is desired.

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)


With these settings, you define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

848 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


The parameter must be set for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
no The stage always operates 3-pole.
yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device (gener-
ated in the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always 3-pole
because the device does not support phase-selective tripping.

Parameter: Threshold (absolute)

• Default setting (_:113) Threshold (absolute) = 0.000 A


With the Threshold (absolute) parameter, you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the
stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve.
The parameter is only used for special applications. With the default setting, this functionality is disabled. You
can find more information in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve ,
Page 846.

6.16.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 User curve #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:11 User curve #:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:26 User curve #:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8 User curve #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:120 User curve #:I0 elimina- • no no
tion • yes
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:113 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
(absolute) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:111 User curve #:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 849
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:110 User curve #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 User curve #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready • yes
_:35 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:36 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:14 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:102 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:30 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:37 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:15 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:103 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:31 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:38 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:16 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:104 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:32 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes

850 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:39 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:17 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:105 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 User curve #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:40 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:18 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:106 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:34 User curve #:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:41 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:19 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:107 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.16.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:63 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:64 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 851
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:65 User curve #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 User curve #:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O

6.16.8 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection

6.16.8.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the blocking.
Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see chapter 11.53 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect
can the blocking be set.

[loocp3pha-210812-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-302 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage

6.16.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:661:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

852 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter Value Description


no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that is
set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.

6.16.9 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings

6.16.9.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-303). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is
only available in function type Advanced.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 853
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[loocp3dpa-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-303 Principle of the Dynamic Settings Exemplified by 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage

If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3

These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be
active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these settings become dynamic, that is,
instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal
becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.

854 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.

Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)

[loocp3awe-040311-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-304 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 855
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)

• AREC is ready for reclosing 3 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 3)

• AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)


The following signal can only block the protection stage:
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of AREC
off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.15.1 Overview of Functions.

Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)

[loocp3kal-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-305 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to
Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions.

Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)

[loocp3bin-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-306 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must
activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.

856 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.16.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)

Parameter: Dynamic settings

• Default setting (_:661:26) Dynamic settings = no

Parameter Value Description


no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or
external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.

Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing
describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent stage (1st stage) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to be
used as fast stage before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.

Influence of External Devices


The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, the AR ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 857
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.1 Overview of Functions

The Overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 50N/51N):


• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection

6.17.2 Structure of the Function

The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (50N/51N OC-gnd-A)
• Overcurrent protection, ground – basic (50N/51N OC-gnd-B)
Only the function type Advanced is available in the devices of the line protection family. The function type
Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced

• 1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection


In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – basic the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic
The function type Advanced is implemented such that the emergency mode can act across all advanced over-
current-protection stages (see Figure 6-307).
The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay charac-
teristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The measured-value selection (only advanced stage) is general functionality and has a uniform effect on the
stages (see Figure 6-307 and chapter 6.17.3.1 Description). This ensures that all stages of the function receive
the same measured current value.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

858 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

[dwocpga1-060213-01.tif, 5, en_US]

Figure 6-307 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced

[dwocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-308 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic

If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).

6.17.3 General Functionality

6.17.3.1 Description

Measured-Value Selection
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 859
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

[loMasValue-201507-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-309 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection

Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase +
IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.

Table 6-8 Threshold Setting Range

Connec- Measured CT Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting
tion Value Terminal Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.:
Type Type ph = 1 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 1 A, IN = 5 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 5 A)
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
3ph + IN

urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
3 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
3ph + IN-separate

4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A


urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
3 * Protec- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement

6.17.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Measured value

• Recommended setting value Measured value = IN Measured


This parameter is not available in the basic function.
Parameter Value Description

860 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.

6.17.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:9 General:Measured • 3I0 calculated IN measured
value • IN measured

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 861
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.17.4.1 Description

Logic of the Basic Stage

[loocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-310 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic

862 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Logic of the Advanced Stage

[loocpgr1-081111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-311 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced

Emergency mode (Advanced Stage)


You use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcurrent
protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. This happens,
for example, in the case of distance protection when a short circuit occurs in the voltage-transformer secon-
dary circuit, when the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected or in the case of line differential
protection where protection communication is disconnected. This means that the emergency mode replaces
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 863
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.

Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Dropout Delay (Advanced Stage)


If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for the
specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still main-
tained, the stage operates.

Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see chapter Influence of other functions via
dynamic settings and section 6.17.8.1 Description ).

Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.17.7.1 Description.

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.17.8.1 Description .

6.17.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Emergency mode

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Emergency mode = no


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the func-
tion.

864 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Parameter Value Description


no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection can
no longer operate, overcurrent protection automatically starts to operate.
The situations in which main protection can no longer operate are:
• Main protection distance protection: measuring-voltage failure
• Main protection line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure
caused by binary input Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:751:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay

• Default setting (_:751:3) Threshold = 1.20 A (for the first stage)

• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).

1st stage (overcurrent stage):


The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
For very small ground-fault currents, Siemens recommends using the Ground-fault protection against high-
resistance ground faults in grounded systems function.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.

2nd stage (high-current stage):


This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 865
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.

EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A

Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:

[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]

[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]

The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:

[fo_ocp005_030311, 1, en_US]

The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:

[foocpgr4-030311-01.tif, 3, en_US]

In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:751:101) Dropout delay = 0


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.

866 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:751:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.

6.17.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency • no no
mode • caused by main prot.
• caused by binary input
_:2311:9 General:Measured value • 3I0 calculated IN measured
• IN measured
General
_:751:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:751:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:751:26 Definite-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:751:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:751:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:751:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:751:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:751:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:751:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 867
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:751:35 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:751:29 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:751:36 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:751:14 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:20 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:751:30 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:751:37 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:751:15 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:21 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:751:31 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:751:38 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:751:16 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:22 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:751:32 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:751:39 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

868 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:751:17 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:23 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:751:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:751:40 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:751:18 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:24 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:751:34 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:751:41 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:751:19 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:751:25 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
General
_:752:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:752:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:752:26 Definite-T 2:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:752:27 Definite-T 2:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:752:8 Definite-T 2:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 869
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:752:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:4 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:752:101 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:752:6 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:752:28 Definite-T 2:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:752:35 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:752:29 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:752:36 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:752:14 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:20 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:752:30 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:752:37 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:752:15 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:21 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:752:31 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:752:38 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

870 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:752:16 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:22 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:752:32 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:752:39 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:752:17 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:23 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:752:33 Definite-T 2:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:752:40 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:752:18 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:24 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:752:34 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:752:41 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:752:19 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:752:25 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 871
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:751:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:751:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:751:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:751:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:751:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:751:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:751:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:751:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:751:63 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:751:64 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:751:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:751:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:751:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:751:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:751:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:751:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:751:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O

872 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.17.5.1 Description

Logic of the Basic Stage

[lo_ocp_gr2, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-312 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 873
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Logic of the Advanced Stage

[loocpgn2-291112-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-313 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced

Emergency mode (Advanced Stage)


You use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcurrent
protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. This happens,
for example, in the case of distance protection when a short circuit occurs in the voltage-transformer secon-
dary circuit, when the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected or in the case of line differential
protection where protection communication is disconnected. This means that the emergency mode replaces
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.

874 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

Minimum Time of the Curve (Advanced Stage)


With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define the minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time.

[Dwocpgr3Mi_20140716-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-314 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve

Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage)


With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time.

Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 875
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and chapter 6.17.8.1 Description ).

Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.17.7.1 Description.

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.17.8.1 Description .

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Binary input signal
The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.17.8.1 Description .

6.17.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Emergency mode

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Emergency mode = no


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the func-
tion.
Parameter Value Description
no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection can
no longer operate, overcurrent protection automatically starts to operate.
The situations in which main protection can no longer operate are:
• Main protection, distance protection: measuring-voltage failure
• Main protection, line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure

876 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Parameter Value Description


caused by binary input Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:781:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:781:108) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter11.19.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.

Parameter: Min. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:781:113) Min. time of the curve = 0.00 s


This parameter is only available in the advanced stage.
With the Min. time of the curve parameter, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time. If the
setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.

NOTE

i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Recommended setting value (_:781:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s


With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
curve.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 877
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:781:3) Threshold = 1.20 A


The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:781:101) Time dial = 1


With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays
might be reasonable (one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the
main protection function fails.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:781:109) Reset = disk emulation


With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

6.17.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency • no no
mode • caused by main prot.
• caused by binary input
_:2311:9 General:Measured value • 3I0 calculated IN measured
• IN measured
General
_:781:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:781:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:781:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:781:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:781:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.

878 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:781:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:108 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:781:113 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
_:781:109 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:781:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
_:781:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:781:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:781:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:781:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:781:36 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:781:14 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:102 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:781:30 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:781:37 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:781:15 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:103 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:781:31 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:781:38 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 879
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:781:16 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:104 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:781:32 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:781:39 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:781:17 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:105 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:781:33 Inverse-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:781:40 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:781:18 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:106 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:781:34 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:781:41 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:781:19 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:781:107 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00

880 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Inverse-T 1
_:781:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:781:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:781:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:781:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:781:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:781:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:781:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:781:62 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:781:63 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:781:64 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:781:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:781:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:781:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:781:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:781:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:781:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:781:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:781:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O

6.17.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

6.17.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.17.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).

User-Defined Characteristic Curve


With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30
value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve


When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed. An
integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the charac-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 881
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

teristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char-
acteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.

[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-315 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve

NOTE

i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.

If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.

• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.

882 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.6.2 Application and Setting Notes


This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only differences are described in chapter 6.17.6.1 Description . This chapter provides only the application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold (absolute) parameter. You
can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6.17.5.2 Application and Setting
Notes .

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)


With these settings, you define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1


With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:110) Reset = disk emulation


With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
but an instantaneous dropout is desired.

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)


With these settings, you define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 883
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Parameter: Threshold (absolute)

• Default setting (_:113) Threshold (absolute) = 0.000 A


With the Threshold (absolute) parameter, you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the
stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve.
The parameter is only used for special applications. With the default setting, this functionality is disabled. You
can find more information in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve ,
Page 881.

6.17.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 User curve #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:26 User curve #:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8 User curve #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:113 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
(absolute) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:110 User curve #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 User curve #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready • yes
_:35 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:36 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

884 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:102 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:30 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:37 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:15 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:103 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:31 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:38 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:16 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:104 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:32 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:39 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:17 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:105 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 User curve #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:40 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 885
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:18 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:106 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:34 User curve #:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:41 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:19 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:107 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.17.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:63 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:64 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:65 User curve #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 User curve #:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O

886 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

6.17.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection

6.17.7.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-
current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section 11.53 Inrush-Current
Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.

[loocpgrd-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-316 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage

6.17.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:751:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

Parameter Value Description


no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that is
set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 887
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Parameter Value Description


yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.

6.17.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings

6.17.8.1 Description
The Threshold and Operate delay settings used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically. Depending on
other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function type
Advanced.

888 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

[loocpgnd-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-317 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage

If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3

These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 889
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.

Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)

[loocpgrnd-040311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-318 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

890 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)

• AREC is ready for reclosing 3 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 3)

• AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)


The following signal can only block the protection stage:
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of AREC
off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.15.1 Overview of Functions.

Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)

[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-319 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detec-
tion (Optional) .

Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)

[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-320 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 891
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detec-
tion (Optional) .

Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)

[loocpbingnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-321 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.

6.17.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)

Binary Input Signal: Dynamic settings

• Default setting (_:751:26) Dynamic settings = no

Parameter Value Description


no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or
external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.

Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic
reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.

892 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground

If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.

Influence of External Devices


The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, an AREC ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 893
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.1 Overview of Functions

The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 67):


• Detects short circuits at electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection

• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end

• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies

• Trips 1- or 3-pole

6.18.2 Structure of the Function

The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurements.
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function comes factory-set with 2 Definite time-overcur-
rent protection stages and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage. In this function, the following
stages can be operated simultaneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection

• 1 stage User-defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve


Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping-delay
characteristic, these stages are identical in structure.
The protection function is implemented so that the emergency mode can act across all overcurrent-protection
stages (see following figure).
The directional characteristic curve is set on the function level and has a uniform effect on the stages (see
following figure and section 6.18.7.1 Description ). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of a function
receive the same direction result. Every stage can be set to the forward or reverse direction. The process of
direction determination is independent of the direction-determination procedure of other functions (for
example, distance protection, if this function is permitted for the device and available).
The group-indication output logic (see Figure 6-322) generates the following group indications for the Direc-
tional overcurrent protection, phases function by the logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

894 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[dwdocp01-190912-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-322 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents.

6.18.3 Stage Control

6.18.3.1 Description

Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 895
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[lodocp02-251110-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-323 Stage-Control Logic Diagram

Emergency Mode
You can use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcur-
rent protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. With the
setting Emergency mode = caused by binary input, the emergency mode can also be activated from
an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel.

Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions)

• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

6.18.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Emergency mode

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Emergency mode = no

896 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the func-
tion.
Parameter Value Description
no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection can
no longer operate, directional overcurrent protection automatically starts to
operate. Main protection can no longer work in the following situations:
• Main protection, distance protection: measuring-voltage failure
The use of directional overcurrent protection in emergency mode is
not recommended in this case, as the function also requires voltage
measurement (for direction determination). Non-directional overcur-
rent protection is the appropriate emergency mode.
• Main protection, line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure
caused by binary input Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:8311:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter Value Description


yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked. Siemens recom-
mends that you retain the default setting, as correct direction determination
cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 897
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.18.4.1 Description

Logic of a Stage

[lodocp01-141013, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-324 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)

Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see chapter 6.18.7.1 Description ).

898 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory


If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter 6.18.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the stage response
can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty
setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the
function does not pick up.

Directional Comparison Protection


The stage can be used for directional comparison protection. This is set using the Directional compar-
ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold value violation to determine the direc-
tion (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent of the
directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the Release via input
signal input signal is active.

Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Dropout delay
If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the pickup dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for
the specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still main-
tained, the stage operates.

Blocking of the Stage


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)

• Via the dynamic settings functionality (see section Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings ,
Page 900 and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description )

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 899
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.16.9.1 Description .

6.18.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:8311:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


Specify the parameter for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
yes The stage generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles
of the circuit-breaker to open is not made until central trip command
control becomes involved.
no The stage always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:8311:105) Directional mode = forward


You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in
direction of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work only in a reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:8311:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

900 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal

• Default setting (_:8311:104) Directional comparison = no

• Default setting (_:8311:106) Release via input signal = no


You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
Directional comparison protection is performed via the Direction and >Release delay & op. signals.
Parameter Value Description
no The stage is not used for directional comparison protection.
yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release
via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the
>Release delay & op. input signal become available.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start of
the time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are only
enabled if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The
>Release delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release
information from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal); see also the application example in chapter
6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

Parameter: Non-directional pickup

• Default setting (_:8311:107) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< & mem.empty

Parameter Value Description


at volt.< & mem.empty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed
at low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may
exist, for example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the
circuit breaker (CB) trips.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:8311:3) Threshold = 1.50 A (for the 1st stage)


The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection. For
further information, refer to chapter 6.16.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:8311:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable (one
grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function
fails.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in the chapters 6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:8311:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 901
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect heavily fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:8311:101) Dropout delay = 0 s


Siemens recommends using this setting value, since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as
fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it
together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electro-
mechanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Tech-
nical Data) and set the result.

6.18.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency • no no
mode • caused by main prot.
• caused by binary input
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
_:8311:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:8311:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:8311:105 Definite-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse
_:8311:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:8311:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:8311:107 Definite-T 1:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
tional pickup • at volt.< & mem.empty mem.empty
_:8311:104 Definite-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison • yes
_:8311:106 Definite-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal • yes
_:8311:10 Definite-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:8311:26 Definite-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:8311:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8311:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

902 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8311:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:8311:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:8311:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:8311:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:8311:35 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:8311:29 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:8311:36 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8311:14 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8311:20 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:8311:30 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:8311:37 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8311:15 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8311:21 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:8311:31 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:8311:38 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8311:16 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 903
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8311:22 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:8311:32 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:8311:39 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8311:17 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8311:23 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:8311:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:8311:40 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8311:18 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8311:24 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:8311:34 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:8311:41 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8311:19 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8311:25 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
General
_:8312:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:8312:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:8312:105 Definite-T 2:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse

904 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8312:11 Definite-T 2:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:8312:8 Definite-T 2:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:8312:107 Definite-T 2:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
tional pickup • at volt.< & mem.empty mem.empty
_:8312:104 Definite-T 2:Directional • no no
comparison • yes
_:8312:106 Definite-T 2:Release via • no no
input signal • yes
_:8312:10 Definite-T 2:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:8312:26 Definite-T 2:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:8312:27 Definite-T 2:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8312:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:4 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:8312:101 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:8312:6 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:8312:28 Definite-T 2:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:8312:35 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:8312:29 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:8312:36 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8312:14 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:20 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:8312:30 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 905
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8312:37 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8312:15 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:21 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:8312:31 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:8312:38 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8312:16 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:22 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:8312:32 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:8312:39 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8312:17 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:23 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:8312:33 Definite-T 2:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:8312:40 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8312:18 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:24 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay

906 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.set: bin.input
_:8312:34 Definite-T 2:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:8312:41 Definite-T 2:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8312:19 Definite-T 2:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:8312:25 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
delay

6.18.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:8311:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:8311:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8311:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:8311:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:8311:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:8311:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:8311:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:8311:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:8311:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:8311:63 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:8311:64 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:8311:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:8311:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:8311:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:8311:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:8311:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:8311:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O
_:8311:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:8311:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 907
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.18.5.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lodocp03-120612-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-325 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)

Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.18.7.1 Description ).

908 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory


If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter 6.18.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the stage response
can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty
setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the
function does not pick up.

Directional Comparison Protection


The stage can be used for directional comparison protection. This is set using the Directional compar-
ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold value violation to determine the direc-
tion (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent of the
directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the >Release delay &
op. input signal is active.

Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

Minimum Time of the Curve


With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time.

[DwDocpMin_040715-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-326 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 909
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Additional Time Delay


With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time.

Blocking of the Stage


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings , Page 910 and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description ).

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .

Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings


If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing
• Cold-load pickup detection

• Binary input signal


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.16.9.1 Description .

6.18.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Default setting (_:8341:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


Specify the parameter for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
yes The stage generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles
of the circuit-breaker to open is not made until central trip command
control becomes involved.
no The stage always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:8341:111) Directional mode = forward


You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the direc-
tion of the busbar).

910 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:8341:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal

• Default setting (_:8341:110) Directional comparison = no

• Default setting (_:8341:112) Release via input signal = no


You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
Directional comparison protection is performed via the Direction and >Release delay & op. signals.
Parameter Value Description
no The stage is not used for directional comparison protection.
yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release
via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the
>Release delay & op. input signal become available.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start of
the time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are only
enabled if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The
>Release delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release
information from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal); see also the application example in chapter
6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

Parameter: Non-directional pickup

• Recommended setting value (_:8341:113) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< &


mem.empty

Parameter Value Description


at volt.< & mem.empty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed
at low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may
exist, for example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the
CB trips.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 911
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:8341:130) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:8341:3) Threshold = 1.50 A


The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection.
Therefore, refer to chapter 6.16.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for further information.

Parameter: Min. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:8341:114) Min. time of the curve = 0.00 s


With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time. If the
setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.

NOTE

i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Default setting (_:8341:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s


With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:8341:101) Time dial = 1.00


Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays
might be reasonable (one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the
main protection function fails.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:8341:131) Reset = disk emulation


You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.

912 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter Value Description


instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

6.18.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency • no no
mode • caused by main prot.
• caused by binary input
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
_:8341:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:8341:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:8341:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse
_:8341:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:8341:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:8341:113 Inverse-T 1:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
tional pickup • at volt.< & mem.empty mem.empty
_:8341:110 Inverse-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison • yes
_:8341:112 Inverse-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal • yes
_:8341:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:8341:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:8341:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:8341:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:130 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:8341:114 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
_:8341:131 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:8341:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:8341:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 913
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:8341:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready • yes
_:8341:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:8341:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:8341:36 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8341:14 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:102 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:8341:30 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:8341:37 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8341:15 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:103 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:8341:31 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:8341:38 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8341:16 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:104 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:8341:32 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:8341:39 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

914 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8341:17 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:105 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:8341:33 Inverse-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:8341:40 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8341:18 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:106 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:8341:34 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:8341:41 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:8341:19 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8341:107 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.18.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Inverse-T 1
_:8341:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:8341:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8341:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:8341:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 915
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:8341:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:8341:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:8341:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:8341:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:8341:62 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:8341:63 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:8341:64 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:8341:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:8341:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:8341:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:8341:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:8341:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:8341:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:8341:301 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O
_:8341:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:8341:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O

6.18.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

6.18.6.1 Description
This stage is structured in the same way as the level with a directional, inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.

User-Defined Characteristic Curve


With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the tripping curve point by point using
up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic
curve from these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.

Pickup and Dropout Behavior with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve


When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.

916 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-327 Pickup and Dropout Behavior when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve

NOTE

i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.

6.18.6.2 Application and Setting Notes


This stage is structured in the same way as the level with a directional, inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application
and setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)


Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-curve
point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1.00


Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 917
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve
is required, leave the Time dial parameter set to 1.00.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:115) Reset = disk emulation


You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)


Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-curve
point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

6.18.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 User curve #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:110 User curve #:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse
_:11 User curve #:1-pole • no no
operate allowed • yes
_:8 User curve #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:112 User curve #:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
tional pickup • at volt.< & mem.empty mem.empty
_:109 User curve #:Directional • no no
comparison • yes
_:111 User curve #:Release via • no no
input signal • yes
_:10 User curve #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes

918 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:26 User curve #:Dynamic • no no
settings • yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:115 User curve #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 User curve #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready • yes
_:35 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1 • yes
_:36 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:14 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:102 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
_:30 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 2 • yes
_:37 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:15 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:103 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
_:31 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 3 • yes
_:38 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 919
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:16 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:104 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
_:32 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle gr. 3 • yes
_:39 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:17 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:105 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 User curve #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup • yes
_:40 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:18 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:106 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:34 User curve #:Effected by • no no
binary input • yes
_:41 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked • yes
_:19 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:107 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

920 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 User curve #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:63 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle2act. SPS O
_:64 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle3act. SPS O
_:65 User curve #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 User curve #:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:309 User curve #:Direction ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O

6.18.7 Direction Determination

6.18.7.1 Description

General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.

Measurands for Direction Determining


The directional measuring element uses the short-circuit current of the phase concerned and the cross-polar-
ized phase-to-phase voltage (as the reference voltage) to determine the direction. This means that the direc-
tion can still be determined unambiguously and correctly, even if the short-circuit voltages collapse
completely when a 1 or 2-phase fault occurs (close-up fault).
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated when phase-to-ground voltages are connected.
The cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit voltages for 1-phase-
to-ground faults (Figure 6-328, left). For 2-phase short circuits, the position of the reference voltages changes
up to 30o, depending on the extent to which the short-circuit voltages collapse (Figure 6-328, right).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 921
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[dwdocp02-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-328 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination

The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.

Table 6-9 Measurands for Direction Determining

Threshold- Measuring Element


Value A B C Ground
Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A IA VBC – – – – – –
B – – IB VCA – – – –
C – – – – IC VAB – –
Gnd – – – – – – Ir V0
A, Gnd – VBC – – – – Ir V0
B, Gnd – – IB VCA – – Ir V0
C, Gnd – – – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B IA VBC IB VCA – – – –
B, C – – IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, C IA VBC – – IC VAB – –
A, B, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA – – Ir V0
B, C, Gnd – – IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
A, C, Gnd IA VBC – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B, C IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, B, C, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0

Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient for
reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available after the
storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain any voltages
(when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the Non-direc-
tional pickup parameter.

Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit

922 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-329 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IscA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φSC. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A, is
rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt. param-
eter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.

[dwdocp03-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-329 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Phase-Measuring Element

The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range; see Figure 6-330. The forward range is
calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is located in
this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on the back-
ward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.

[dwdocp04-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-330 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function, Phase-Measuring Element

Direction Determination for Test Purposes


If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined as soon
as current and voltage are greater than approx. 7 % of their secondary rated values.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 923
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= 45o


The directional characteristic, that is, the position of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rota-
tion angle of ref. volt. parameter. The short-circuit angle is typically to be found in a range from 30°
to 60° inductive. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of +45o can be retained to position the reference
voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear in the following (Table 6-10). Please note that for
phase-to-ground faults (PG faults), the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-
circuit voltage. This results in the following setting for the rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φSC phase-measuring elements (PG faults)
Please also note that for phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is rotated between 0° (distant fault) and
30o (close-up fault) dependent upon the collapse of the faulted voltage (see Figure 6-329). You can take this
into account with an average value of 15°.
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φSC - 15o phase-measuring elements (PP faults)

Table 6-10 Example settings

Application φSC typical Setting


Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60o Range 30o to 0o for PP faults
Selected: 15o

30o Range 60o to 30o for PP faults


Selected: 45o

30o Range 60o to 30o for PP faults


Selected: 45o

Input signal: >Test of direction


If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.

6.18.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings

The influence of other functions via dynamic settings is described in the chapters 6.16.9.1 Description and
6.16.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) (Application and Setting Notes).

924 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

Parallel Lines or Transformers


In parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end (see Figure 6-331), if there is no directional measuring
element, a fault on feeder T1 will also trip the other feeder T2. In contrast, a directional measuring element in
the devices on busbar B prevents the tripping of the circuit-breaker in the parallel feeder. Therefore, in
Figure 6-331, directional overcurrent protection is used in the places marked with direction arrows. Please
note that the forward direction of the protection device represents the direction towards the object to be
protected. This does not have to be the same as the power direction of normal load flow.
Set time grading in opposition to the load flow with increasing time. As load can only flow in one direction,
you can set the directional devices without time delay.

[dwdocp05-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-331 Parallel Line with Transformers

Legend for Figure 6-331


Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time

Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends


Cable runs with infeed at both ends and lines connected to form ring topologies also require that you supple-
ment overcurrent protection with the directional criterion. Figure 6-332 shows a ring system implementation,
with the 2 infeeds shown merging in the ring to form a single infeed. For the directional devices whose
forward direction matches the power-flow direction, set time grading in opposition to the power flow with
increasing time. As power flow from both ends is possible, grading has to be set at both ends.

[dwdocp06-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-332 Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

Legend for Figure 6-332


Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 925
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection

The direction determination of directional overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional
comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends. Directional comparison protection is used for
the selective isolation of a faulted line section (for example, subsections of closed rings). Sections are isolated
in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the disadvantage of long grading times.
This technique requires that directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection
stations. You can implement this information exchange using a communication channel (protection interface
or IEC 61850 GOOSE) or with pilot wires for signal transmission via an auxiliary voltage loop.

Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-333. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite time-overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite time-overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following situa-
tions:
• Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
• Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.

[dwdocp07-240611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-333 Selectivity through Directional Comparison Protection

Legend for Figure 6-333


Stage ▶: Stage is set in the forward direction; stage 1 is instantaneous, stage 2 is graded
▶, ◀: If a threshold value is exceeded, the stage indicates the direction (forward or reverse)

If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, we recommend operation based on a closed-circuit connection. The device
uses a function chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period. In
contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a loss of
communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and indicated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it you
must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all circum-

926 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases

stances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the event of
failure followed by a system incident.

Configuration of the Stage, Function Chart


To configure the stage, proceed as follows:
• The Directional mode parameter of both stages must be set to forward
• The Directional comparison and Release via input signal parameters of the first stage
must be set to yes. This is so that the first stage is only released if the >Release delay & op. input
signal is active. Furthermore, the direction is indicated if a threshold value is exceeded.

• The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded

• The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the oppo-
site end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission

• A function chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information)
and release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 927
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

6.19.1 Overview of Functions

The Instantaneous high-current tripping function has the following tasks:


• Instantaneous tripping when switching onto an existing fault, for example, if a grounding switch is
closed.

• Instantaneous breaking of extremely high currents above the highest overcurrent protection stage.

• Trips 1- or 3-pole.

6.19.2 Structure of the Function

The Instantaneous high-current tripping function offers 2 different increment types:


• Stage with standard release method
• Stage with release method via protection interface (only applicable if the device is equipped with a
protection interface)
The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory-set.

[dwihcstr-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-334 Structure/Embedding of the Function

928 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

6.19.3 Standard Release Procedure

Logic

[lohlore1-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-335 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method

Activation
Using the (_:3961:101) Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released.
• on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open) or if
the circuit breaker is being closed or the binary input signal>release is active. The way signals are generated
Rel. by CB switch on is described in section 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.
• always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and from the
binary input signal >release.
• only with binary signal
The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 929
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

Method of Measurement, Threshold Value


The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold.

• Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:


If the current exceeds a preset threshold value by
current ≥ 2·√2·threshold value
this stage will use unfiltered measurands in addition. Thus, very short operate times are possible.

6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Activation

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:101) Activation = on CB closure


Using the parameter Activation, you define the conditions under which the stage is released.
Parameter Value Description
on CB closure Select this setting to activate the stage only when the circuit breaker is closed.
always active Select this setting to release the stage statically.
only with binary signal Select this setting to release the stage via an external signal.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:3) Threshold = 10.0 A for Irated = 1 A or 50.0


A for Irated = 5 A

The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, shunt reactors or long lines with
low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.

EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110 kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 Ω/km;
X1/s = 0.43 Ω/km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:

[foglchzv-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):

930 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

[foglchik-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting value results:

[foglnste-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

If short-circuit currents exceed 1,496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to
be protected. It can be disconnected immediately.

NOTE

i The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:102) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


The parameter must be set for the specific application.
Parameter Value Description
no The function always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.
yes The function generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles
of the circuit breaker to open is not made, however, until central trip command
control becomes involved.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:4) Dropout ratio = 0.90


The default setting of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain high-precision measurements, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.

6.19.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface

This stage can be applied only if the device is equipped with a protection interface.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 931
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

Logic

[lohinre1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-336 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface

Release
If one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is present) (for
further information, see chapter 5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line)):
• No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or

• Switching to the local circuit breaker is imminent.


These conditions are recognized internally if a circuit breaker is open or just closed
Furthermore, the stage can be activated externally via the >release binary input signal.

NOTE

i To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of
the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be routed).

Method of Measurement, Threshold Value


The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement.

932 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

• Measurement of the fundamental component:


This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold value.

• Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:


If the current exceeds a preset threshold value by the amount
current ≥ 2·√2·threshold value
this stage will use unfiltered measurands in addition. Thus, very short operate times are possible.

6.19.6 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:3) Threshold = 2.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 12.5


A for Irated = 5 A

Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.

Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:102) 1-pole operate allowed = yes


The parameter must be set for the specific application.
Parameter value Description
no The function always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.
yes The function generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles
of the circuit breaker to open is not made, however, until central trip command
control becomes involved.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:3961:4) Dropout ratio = 0.90


The default setting of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate measurements,
the dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold, you
can increase the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.

6.19.7 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Standard 1
_:3961:1 Standard 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:3961:102 Standard 1:1-pole operate • no yes
allowed • yes
_:3961:101 Standard 1:Activation • on CB closure on CB closure
• only with binary signal
• always active
_:3961:3 Standard 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 10.000 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 50.000 A
_:3961:4 Standard 1:Dropout ratio 0.50 to 0.90 0.90

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 933
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

6.19.8 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Standard 1
_:3961:500 Standard 1:>release SPS I
_:3961:81 Standard 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3961:54 Standard 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3961:52 Standard 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3961:53 Standard 1:Health ENS O
_:3961:300 Standard 1:Rel. by CB switch on ACT O
_:3961:55 Standard 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3961:57 Standard 1:Operate ACT O

934 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions

6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions

6.20.1 Description

The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate
indications of the following functions:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground

• Directional overcurrent protection, phases

• Directional overcurrent protection, ground

• Ground-fault protection for high-impedance ground faults in grounded systems

• Instantaneous high-current tripping


The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage-selective pickup
and operate indications of the functions listed above (see also Figure 6-337):
• Pickup
• Operate
The pickup and operate indications are output, where present, with direction information.

[loocgrin-240112-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-337 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Group Indications

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 935
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.1 Function Overview

The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function (ANSI 50N/51N):


• Detects and monitors the current measured in a transformer neutral point grounding
• Can operate as sensitive tank leakage protection

• Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks

• Switches off high-current faults instantaneously

6.21.2 Structure of the Function

The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are available:
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced (50N/51N OC-1ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic (50N/51N OC-1ph-B)
The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
tionality and is provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection (UMZ)
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ)

• 1 stage Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection

• 1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection

• 1 Fast stage
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic, the following stages can operate simultane-
ously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection
The non-preconfigured stages in Figure 6-338 and Figure 6-339 are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-
delay characteristic curve, the Definite-time overcurrent protection stage, the Inverse-time overcurrent
protection stage, the Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection stage, and the User-defined char-
acteristic curve-time overcurrent protection stage are structured identically.
The Fast stage uses a fast tripping algorithm. It is therefore suited in particular for sensitive ground-fault
detection according to the high-impedance principle.

936 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

[dwocp1pa-280113-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-338 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Advanced

[dwocp1pb-310113-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-339 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Basic

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 937
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.21.3.1 Description

Logic of a Stage

[loinvocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-340 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

938 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

Blocking of the Stage


The picked up stage can reset completely via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can block the operate indication of the stage
for a threshold-value violation due to the inrush current. In case of a blocking, the stage picks up. The start of
the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function signals this through a corresponding indi-
cation. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is
started. When complete, the stage generates an operate indication. The blocking can only be set if the central
function Inrush-current detection is effective.
Blocking of tripping with the Inrush-current detection function is possible only if the following conditions
have been met:
• The central Inrush-current detection function has to be available in another protection function group
with 3-phase current measurement.

• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.

Related Topics
6.16.8.1 Description

6.21.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:12661:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay

• Default setting (_:12661:3) Threshold = 1.200 A (for the first stage)

• Default setting (_:12661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 939
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Definite-T 1
_:12661:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12661:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:12661:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:12661:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:12661:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:12661:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay

6.21.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:12661:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12661:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:12661:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:12661:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:12661:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:12661:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:12661:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:12661:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12661:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2
_:12662:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:12662:500 Definite-T 2:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:12662:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive SPS O
_:12662:52 Definite-T 2:Behavior ENS O
_:12662:53 Definite-T 2:Health ENS O
_:12662:60 Definite-T 2:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:12662:55 Definite-T 2:Pickup ACD O
_:12662:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12662:57 Definite-T 2:Operate ACT O

940 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.21.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lodefocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-341 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 941
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Blocking of the Stage


The picked up stage can reset completely via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can block the operate indication of the stage
for a threshold-value violation due to the inrush current. In case of a blocking, the stage picks up. The start of
the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function signals this through a corresponding indi-
cation. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is
started. When complete, the stage generates an operate indication.
Blocking of tripping with the Inrush-current detection function is possible only if the following conditions
have been met:
• The central Inrush-current detection function has to be available in another protection function group
with 3-phase current measurement.

• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.

6.21.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:12691:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.

942 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

Parameter Value Description


RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:12691:108) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:12691:3) Threshold = 1.200 A


Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:12691:101) Time dial = 1


Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:12691:109) Reset = disk emulation


You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

6.21.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Inverse-T 1
_:12691:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12691:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:12691:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 943
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:12691:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:12691:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:12691:108 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:12691:109 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:12691:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.21.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Inverse-T 1
_:12691:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12691:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:12691:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:12691:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:12691:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:12691:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:12691:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:12691:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:12691:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12691:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O

944 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse


Characteristic Curve

6.21.5.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-342 Logic Diagram of the Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
(see chapter 6.21.4.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.21.4.1 Description .

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 945
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value 1/
Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve deter-
mines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the charac-
teristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit.

[dw_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-343 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse-Time Characteristic

The time to operate is calculated with the following formula:

[fo_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]

Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
I 1-phase current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)

If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.

946 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.5.2 Application and Setting Notes


Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse-
time delay according to IEC and ANSI (see chapter 6.21.4.1 Description ).
This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.21.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .

Stage Type Selection


If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current level according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1.20 A


With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so,
for the time-graded stages, the setting for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into
account in the grading chart.

Parameter: Threshold multiplier

• Default setting (_:116) Threshold multiplier = 1.1


With the parameter Threshold multiplier, you define the beginning of the characteristic curve on the
current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

EXAMPLE

Threshold (Secondary current) Ithresh = 1.2 A


Threshold multiplier Imul = 1.1
Pickup value (Secondary current) IPU = 1.2 A ×1.1 = 1.32 A

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 1.250 s


With the parameter Time dial, you change the slope of the characteristic curve.
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: Max. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:114) Max. time of the curve = 5.800 s


The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for I =
Threshold).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: Min. time of the curve

• Default setting (_:113) Min. time of the curve = 1.200 s


The parameter Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Default setting (_:115) Additional time delay = 0 s

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 947
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

With the parameter Additional time delay, you set an additional current-independent time delay. This
additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.

6.21.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Log.-inv.-T #
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:27 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:3 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:6 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
of the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
of the curve
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.000 s
time delay

6.21.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate ACT O

948 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

6.21.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

6.21.6.1 Description
The User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func-
tion type.
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only differ-
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.

User-Defined Characteristic Curve


With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30
value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve


When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.

[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-344 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 949
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

NOTE

i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.

6.21.6.2 Application and Setting Notes


This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only differ-
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)


Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-curve
point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1


Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting Reset = disk emulation


You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)


Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-curve
point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.

950 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase

NOTE

i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.

6.21.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 User curve #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8 User curve #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
_:110 User curve #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.21.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 951
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.1 Overview of Functions

The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V) function:


• Detects short circuits affecting electric equipment
• Can be used for special network conditions where the overcurrent pickup level should be decreased
depending on the fault voltage

• Can be used for generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals and the
overcurrent pickup should be kept depending on the fault voltages

6.22.2 Structure of the Function

The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurement.
The function Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory-set stages:
• Inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-dependent stage
• Definite-time overcurrent protection, undervoltage seal-in stage
In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-dependent stages
• A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-released stages

• A maximum of 2 definite-time overcurrent protection, undervoltage seal-in stages

• A maximum of 2 definite-time overcurrent protection, voltage-released undervoltage seal-in stages

[dw_stuvol_release, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-345 Structure/Embedding of the Function

952 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.3 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent

6.22.3.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lovoldep-210713-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-346 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent

Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 953
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:


This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Voltage-Dependent Pickup Threshold


The pickup threshold of the overcurrent stage depends on the voltage magnitude. A lower voltage decreases
the current pickup value (see Figure 6-347). In the range between V/Vrated = 1.00 to 0.25 a linear, directly
proportional dependence is realized.

[dwvolpic-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-347 Voltage Influence of the Pickup Threshold

With:
V = Measured phase-to-phase voltage
Vrated = Rated voltage (parameter Rated voltage in the function block General of the protec-
tion function group)
PU sett. = Pickup threshold setting (parameter address: _11491:3)
PU(V) = Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence

The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0.03 * Irated. This value cannot be decreased any further even
not by voltage-dependent pickup threshold factor.
Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Table 6-11.

Table 6-11 Controlling Voltages in Relation to the Fault Current

Current Controlling Voltage


IA VAB
IB VBC
IC VCA

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed.

954 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by 1.045 times (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to the characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical data.

Influence On the Operate Curve


The current pickup threshold is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently, for a constant
current I the I/Threshold-value ratio is increased and the operate time is reduced. Compared with the standard
curves represented in the Technical Data, the operate curve shifts to the left side as the voltage decreases.

Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection


In case of a measuring-voltage failure detection the input voltage value is automatically set to Vrated, so that
the pickup threshold factor will be 1.

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .

6.22.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:11491:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

Parameter Value Description


no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage. Select
this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-current stage that is
set according to the short-circuit voltage uk of the transformer in such
a way that the stage only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side.
The transformer-inrush current cannot become larger than the
maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 955
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:11491:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:11491:3) Threshold = 1.500 A


The recommended setting value of 1.500 A is suitable for most applications.
Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection.
Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx.10 %, for transformers and motors to approx. 20 % above
the maximum expected load.
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.

Parameter Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:11491:101) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application.

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:11491:102) Reset = disk emulation


The Reset parameter allows you to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout character-
istic curve (behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disc) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout does not have to be performed after a disk
emulation and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:11491:103) Time dial = 1


You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.

956 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).

6.22.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V-dependent 1
_:11491:1 V-dependent 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11491:2 V-dependent 1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:11491:27 V-dependent 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:11491:8 V-dependent 1:Method • fundamental comp. fundamental
of measurement • RMS value comp.
_:11491:3 V-dependent 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
1:Threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:11491:101 V-dependent 1:Type of
character. curve
_:11491:102 V-dependent 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:11491:103 V-dependent 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.22.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
V-dependent 1
_:11491:81 V-dependent 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11491:500 V-dependent 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:11491:54 V-dependent 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11491:52 V-dependent 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11491:53 V-dependent 1:Health ENS O
_:11491:60 V-dependent 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:11491:59 V-dependent 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:11491:55 V-dependent 1:Pickup ACD O
_:11491:56 V-dependent 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:11491:57 V-dependent 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 957
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released

6.22.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lovolrel-210713-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-348 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released

This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see
chapter 6.22.3.1 Description). The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the
operate curve.

958 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Measuring-Element Release
When the controlling voltage drops below the setting Undervoltage threshold, the respective measuring
element is released.
The release of the measuring elements is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Figure 6-347.

Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the picked up stage is
reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

6.22.4.2 Application and Setting Notes


This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage. The
only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate curve. This chapter only
provides the application and setting notes for the setting Blk. by meas.-volt. failure and Under-
voltage threshold. For guidance on the other parameters of this stage, refer to chapter 6.22.3.2 Applica-
tion and Setting Notes.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You can use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


no The overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage
failure is detected.
yes The overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage
failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as
correct operation of the stage cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage
failure occurs.

Parameter: Undervoltage threshold

• Default setting (_:104) Undervoltage threshold = 75.0 V


When the controlling voltage is below the set value, the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage is
released.
The parameter is set to a value just below the lowest phase-to-phase voltage admissible during operation, for
example, from 75 % to 80 % of Vrated.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 959
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V-release #
_:1 V-release #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 V-release #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:10 V-release #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:27 V-release #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:8 V-release #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:3 V-release #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:101 V-release #:Type of char- • ANSI long-time inv. IEC normal
acter. curve • ANSI short-time inv. inverse
• ANSI extremely inv.
• ANSI very inverse
• ANSI normal inverse
• ANSI moderately inv.
• ANSI definite inverse
• IEC normal inverse
• IEC very inverse
• IEC extremely inv.
• IEC long-time inverse
_:102 V-release #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:103 V-release #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:104 V-release #:Under- 0.300 V to 175.000 V 75.000 V
voltage threshold

6.22.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V-release #
_:81 V-release #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 V-release #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 V-release #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V-release #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V-release #:Health ENS O
_:60 V-release #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 V-release #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 V-release #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V-release #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V-release #:Operate ACT O

960 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.5 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-In

6.22.5.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo_Seal-in_20150215, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-349 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-in

Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 961
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.

Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal-in with Measuring-Voltage Failure


The Undervoltage seal-in can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the
pickup signal Pickup I>+V-seal-in drops out immediately. The following blocking options are available
for the Undervoltage seal-in:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.

6.22.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:16951:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:16951:3) Threshold = 1.350 A


The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current.
Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate delay time is set. Set the
Threshold parameter for generators to a value between 20 % and 30 %, for transformers and motors
approx. 40 % above the expected peak load.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:16951:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s


The parameter Operate delay must be coordinated with the time grading of the network protection to
guarantee the selectivity. Practical time delays are between 1 s to 2 s.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Default setting (_:16951:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you can activate (yes) or deactivate (no) the
blocking by the Measuring voltage failure detection function. The recommended setting is the default
setting.

Parameter: State of V-seal-in

• Default setting (_:16951:101) State of V-seal-in = off


With the parameter State of V-seal-in, the seal-in functionality can be activated (switched on). Siemens
recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator.

962 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: V-seal-in threshold

• Default setting (_:16951:102) V-seal-in threshold = 46.2 V


The V-seal-in threshold (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage admissible during an operation, for example 80 % of the rated voltage of a generator. The positive-
sequence voltage is evaluated. The practicable value for a voltage transformer with a rated secondary voltage
of 100 V is 46.2 V.
The following table shows an example of a specification:
Threshold 1.4 * Irated, Gen
Operate delay 3.00 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 * Vrated, Gen
Duration of V-seal-in time 4.00 s
Dropout ratio 0.95
Rated current Irated, Gen 483 A Rated voltage Vrated, Gen 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, prim 500 A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, sec 1A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, sec 100 V

The following secondary setting values result from this specification:

[fo_OCP_UVSI_threshold, 1, en_US]

[fo_OCP_UVSI_Seal-in, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time

• Default setting (_:16951:104) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s


The parameter Duration of V-seal-in time limits the pickup seal-in induced by an overcurrent or
undervoltage. The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay. The difference
shall be greater than 0.5 s. In the default setting, a difference of 1 s is used.

6.22.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V-seal-in 1
_:16951:1 V-seal-in 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:16951:2 V-seal-in 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:16951:3 V-seal-in 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.75 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.75 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.750 A
_:16951:6 V-seal-in 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
_:16951:10 V-seal-in 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 963
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:16951:101 V-seal-in 1:State of V- • off off
seal-in • on
_:16951:102 V-seal-in 1:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.200 V
threshold
_:16951:104 V-seal-in 1:Duration of V- 0.10 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
seal-in time

6.22.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V-seal-in 1
_:16951:81 V-seal-in 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:16951:500 V-seal-in 1:>Block V-seal-in SPS I
_:16951:52 V-seal-in 1:Behavior ENS O
_:16951:53 V-seal-in 1:Health ENS O
_:16951:54 V-seal-in 1:Inactive SPS O
_:16951:55 V-seal-in 1:Pickup ACD O
_:16951:300 V-seal-in 1:Pickup I>+V-seal-in SPS O
_:16951:56 V-seal-in 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:16951:57 V-seal-in 1:Operate ACT O

964 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.6 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released


Undervoltage Seal-In

6.22.6.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo_Seal-in_Rel20150215, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-350 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 1

Signal 4 in the following figure refers to Figure 6-350.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 965
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

[lo_Seal-in_Rel2, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-351 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 2

Voltage Release
In addition to the current criterion with undervoltage seal-in, a voltage-released logic must be present to issue
the indication Pickup. The voltage-released logic monitors the negative-sequence voltage and phase-to-
phase voltages respectively for detecting unsymmetrical faults and symmetrical faults. With the voltage-
released logic, the setting value of the parameter Threshold can be reduced in a certain range and the relia-
bility and sensibility of this function can be improved correspondingly.

Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.

Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal-in with Measuring-Voltage Failure


The Undervoltage seal-in can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the
pickup signal Pickup I>+V-seal-in drops out immediately. The following blocking options are available
for the Undervoltage seal-in:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.

6.22.6.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log.

966 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1.350 A


The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current.
Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate delay time is set. Set the
Threshold parameter for generators to a value between 20 % and 30 %, for transformers and motors
approx. 40 % above the expected peak load.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s


The parameter Operate delay must be coordinated with the time grading of the network protection to
guarantee the selectivity. Practical time delays are between 1 s to 2 s.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you can activate (yes) or deactivate (no) the
blocking by the Measuring voltage failure detection function. The recommended setting is the default
setting.

Parameter: State of V-seal-in

• Default setting (_:101) State of V-seal-in = off


With the parameter State of V-seal-in, the seal-in functionality can be activated (switched on). Siemens
recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator.

Parameter: V-seal-in threshold

• Default setting (_:102) V-seal-in threshold = 46.2 V


The V-seal-in threshold (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage admissible during an operation, for example 80 % of the rated voltage of a generator. The positive-
sequence voltage is evaluated. The practicable value for a voltage transformer with a rated secondary voltage
of 100 V is 46.2 V.
The following table shows an example of a specification:
Threshold 1.4 * Irated, Gen
Operate delay 3.00 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 * Vrated, Gen
Duration of V-seal-in time 4.00 s
Dropout ratio 0.95
Rated current Irated, Gen 483 A Rated voltage Vrated, Gen 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, prim 500 A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, sec 1A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, sec 100 V

The following secondary setting values result from this specification:

[fo_OCP_UVSI_threshold, 1, en_US]

[fo_OCP_UVSI_Seal-in, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 967
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time

• Default setting (_:104) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s


The parameter Duration of V-seal-in time limits the pickup seal-in induced by an overcurrent or
undervoltage. The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay. The difference
shall be greater than 0.5 s. In the default setting, a difference of 1 s is used.

Parameter: Vph-ph< threshold

• Default setting (_:105) Vph-ph< threshold = 60.000 V


With the parameter Vph-ph< threshold, you can set the threshold at which the output signal Voltage
release is activated when the minimum phase-to-phase voltage falls below this threshold.

Parameter: V2> threshold

• Default setting (_:106) V2> threshold = 4.600 V


With the parameter V2> threshold, you can set the threshold at which the output signal Voltage
release is issued when V2 exceeds the threshold.

6.22.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Vseal-in+Vrel#
_:1 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:3 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 6.750 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 6.750 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.750 A
_:6 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay
_:10 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:101 Vseal-in+Vrel#:State of • off off
V-seal-in • on
_:102 Vseal-in+Vrel#:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.200 V
threshold
_:104 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Duration 0.10 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
of V-seal-in time
_:105 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Vph-ph< 0.300 V to 175.000 V 60.000 V
threshold
_:106 Vseal-in+Vrel#:V2> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 4.600 V
threshold

968 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

6.22.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Vseal-in+Vrel#
_:81 Vseal-in+Vrel#:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Vseal-in+Vrel#:>Block V-seal-in SPS I
_:52 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Health ENS O
_:54 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Inactive SPS O
_:55 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Pickup I>+V-seal-in SPS O
_:301 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Voltage release SPS O
_:56 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 969
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.1 Overview of Functions

2 functions are available for ground-fault detection: a directional one and a non-directional one.
The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns) serves:
• For directional detection of permanent ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For directional detection of fast extinguishing transient ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems

• For determination of the faulty phase

• For detection of high-impedance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-impedance (semi-solidly)


grounded systems
The Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 51Ns) serves:
• For ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For detection of high-impedance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-impedance (semi-solidly)
grounded systems

6.23.2 Structure of the Function

Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection


The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups that
make current and voltage zero-sequence systems (3I0 and V0) available. The function comes factory-set with
a non-directional V0> stage with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage, a directional 3I0> stage with cos
φ or sin φ measurement, and a directional transient ground-fault stage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 2 non-directional V0> stages with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• 4 directional 3I0> stages with cos φ or sin φ measurement

• 2 directional transient ground-fault stages

• 4 directional 3I0> stages with φ(V0, 3I0) measurement

• 4 directional Y0> stages with G0 or B0 measurement (admittance method)

• 4 directional stages with phasor measurement of a harmonic

• 4 non-directional 3I0> stages

• 2 non-directional Y0> stages

• 2 non-directional pulse-pattern detection stages


The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication

970 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[DwStrGFP-250113-01, 5, en_US]

Figure 6-352 Structure/Embedding of the Directional Function in Protection Function Groups

Non-Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection


The Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups
that only make the zero-sequence system (3I0) available. The function comes factory-set with a non-direc-
tional 3I0> stage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 4 non-directional 3I0> stages
• 2 non-directional Y0> stages

• 4 non-directional 3I0> harmonic stages

• 2 non-directional pulse-pattern detection stages


The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 971
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[DwSGFPu4-230113-01, 5, en_US]

Figure 6-353 Structure/Embedding of the Non-Directional Function in Protection Function Groups

6.23.3 General Functionality

6.23.3.1 Description

Logic

[LoGFPger-280113-01, 7, en_US]

Figure 6-354 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Directional Function

972 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[logfpnon-261012-01.tif, 5, en_US]

Figure 6-355 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Non-Directional Function

Operational Measured Value φ(I,V)


The function block calculates the angle between IN and V0 and makes the angle available as function meas-
ured value Phi(I,V).

[DwPhINU0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-356 Sign Definition for the Measured Value

Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending on
the system conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously falling
zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0, then the fault is considered extin-
guished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.

Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. Using the characteristic shown in the following figure, the device approaches the angle
error of the core balance current transformer with sufficient precision.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 973
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[dwerdwdl-110512-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-357 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer

Ground-Fault Indication, Stabilization at Intermittent Ground Fault


The indication Ground fault indicates the ground fault and manages the ground-fault log (see Ground-
Fault Log, Page 974). The corresponding information of the stages used is accessed for the generation of this
indication.
The indication Ground fault contains the direction information, independent of the parameterized
working direction of a stage. The indication is thus suited for transfer to a station.
To avoid a flood of indications in case of an intermittent ground fault, a maximum of 30 status changes of this
indication is logged per ground fault. An intermittent ground fault must be treated as a ground fault so that
the stabilization can take action. This is ensured with the parameter Dropout delay, by the dropout of the
indication Ground fault being delayed. If the next ignition of the ground fault takes place during the
dropout delay, the indication does not drop out and the log remains open.

NOTE

i The Ground fault indication in the general stage must be routed to the ground-fault log. If not, you can
meet an overflow of the ground-fault log when an intermittent ground fault occurs.

Ground-Fault Log
Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer, the ground-fault log. As long as the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked parameter is set to yes, all indications routed into the ground-fault log are written in
the ground-fault log.
The criterion for opening the ground-fault log is the raising of any indication which is routed to the ground-
fault log, for example, the indication Ground fault . The criterion for closing is the clearing of all routed
indications.

Related Topics
You can find general notes on the ground-fault login chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log.

Value Indications
If the following value indications can be calculated, they are written into the log (ground-fault log or fault log)
at the time of the 1st raising ground-fault indication and the 1st operate indication of any stage.
• 3I0 (value)
• 3I0 active component

• 3I0 reactive component

974 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

• V0

• φ (IN, V0)

6.23.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Indication: Ground fault


To indicate the ground fault and its direction via the protocol, Siemens recommends using the indication (_:
2311:302) Ground fault. The indication contains the direction information, independent of the parame-
terized working direction of a stage. And this indication is also stabilized against a flood of indications in case
of an intermittent ground fault.

Parameter: Decay time V0

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Decay time V0 = 0.10 s


With the Decay time V0 parameter, you specify the time slot for the detection of a fault extinction. If V0
continuously falls within this time, fault extinction is detected and the indication Flt. extinction det. is
issued.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Dropout delay = 1.00 s


To avoid chattering of the indication Ground fault during an intermittent ground fault and thus a frequent
opening and closing of the ground-fault log, the dropout of the indication Ground fault (and thus the
closing of the log) can be delayed by the Dropout delay.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Using the default setting ensures that no flood of indications arises in case of an intermittent ground fault for
the indication Ground fault. The intermittent ground fault is then treated as a ground fault, and the stabili-
zation of the indication Ground fault can thus take action.

Angle-Error Compensation of the Core Balance Current Transformer

• Default setting (_:2311:103) Core balance CT- current 1 = 0.050 A

• Default setting (_:2311:104) Core balance CT- current 2 = 1.000 A

• Default setting (_:2311:105) CT angle error at I1 = 0.0°

• Default setting (_:2311:106) CT angle error at I2 = 0.0°


The high reactive-power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. For the burden actually connected, the maximum angle error CT angle error at I1
and the corresponding secondary current Core balance CT- current 1 as well as a further operating
point CT angle error at I2/Core balance CT- current 2 are entered, from which point the angle
error no longer changes appreciably.
In the isolated or grounded system, angle compensation is not necessary.

6.23.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Decay time V0 0.03 s to 0.20 s 0.10 s
_:2311:102 General:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 975
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:103 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
CT- current 1 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:104 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
CT- current 2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:2311:105 General:CT angle error at 0.0 ° to 5.0 ° 0.0 °
I1
_:2311:106 General:CT angle error at 0.0 ° to 5.0 ° 0.0 °
I2

6.23.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:302 General:Ground fault ACD O
_:2311:303 General:Flt. extinction det. SPS O
_:2311:309 General:Pos. measuring window SPS O
_:2311:301 General:Phi(I,V) MV O

6.23.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement

6.23.4.1 Description

Logic

[logfp3i0stufe-280314-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-358 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

976 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[logfp3i0f-280314-01, 5, en_US]

Figure 6-359 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement

Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to
the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement


The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 977
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the setting of the Connection type parameter of the measuring point I-3ph as well as the
current terminal block used, the following different linearity and settings ranges result in addition to the
common application:
Connection Type of the Current Threshold 3I0/IN Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Measuring Point I-3ph Settings Range
(Secondary)21
3-phase Calculated 3I022 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN23 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep Measured IN and calculated 3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep Measured IN 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep 4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A

With the use of the function within a 1-phase function group and therefore at a 1-phase measuring point
I-1ph, the following different linearity and settings ranges result:
Measuring Point Current Threshold Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
I-1ph Settings Range
(Secondary) 24
Measured Sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A

The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, especially
the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.

Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup


If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value and
the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value,
the stage recognizes the ground fault. The direction determination (see the next paragraph) is started when
the V0 threshold value is exceeded. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the
General function block). If the direction result equals the parameterized direction (parameter Directional
mode), the stage picks up.

Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
cos-φ direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0 (parameter

21 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
22 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
23 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
24 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.

978 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

φ correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-
suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 ⋅ cos φ is decisive for the direction determination.

[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-360 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Cos φ Measurement

The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0reactive axis for this example. For the direction determina-
tion, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is
decisive (3I0 dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current 3l0dir.
(here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. If
the current 3I0 dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current 3I0 dir. exceeds
the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured in case
of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45°.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45°.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 979
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[dwphicor-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-361 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos φ Measurement with Angle Correction

If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin φ and the φ correction parameter to 0, the
symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis. Since the
portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3l0dir.),
here, the current 3l0reactive is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here = 3I0reac-
tive) exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward. If the
current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

980 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[dwsinphi-011112-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-362 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Sin φ Measurement

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction


Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the Blk.
after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault extinc-
tion.

Blocking the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 981
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.

6.23.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:12601:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:12601:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
enabled.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Recommended setting value (_:12601:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
detection of an inrush current.
Siemens recommends disabling the blocking. The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage is a
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by an enabling procedure.

Parameter: Blk. after fault extinction

• Recommended setting value (_:12601:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes


If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection of
the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:12601:108) Directional mode = forward


When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or backward direction.

982 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value

• Default setting (_:12601:109) Dir. measuring method = cos φ

• Default setting (_:12601:107) φ correction = 0.0°

• Default setting (_:12601:102) Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. = 0.030 A

• Default setting (_:12601:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A


These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only a portion of the current vertical to the set direction-
characteristic curve (3I0dir.) is decisive, refer to 6.23.4.1 Description. This portion of the current is compared
to the threshold value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. In contrast, the absolute value of the current 3I0
is compared with the 3I0> threshold value parameter.
System Type/ Description
Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = cos φ
• φ correction = 0.0°
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger capacitive or inductive reactive current is superimposed on the small watt-metric
residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the fault eval-
uation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary considerably in its
values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device should only
evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Min.polar.
3I0> for dir.det. parameter, the rule of thumb is: Set the pickup value only to
half of the expected measuring current as only the watt-metric residual current can be
put into use.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter can also be set to half of the expected
measuring current, whereby here the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = sin φ
• φ correction = 0.0°
In an isolated system, the capacitive ground-fault currents of the entire electrically
connected system flow through the measuring point in case of a ground fault. The
ground current of the faulty feeder is compensated in the measuring point. As the
pickup value of the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold
value parameters, select about half of this capacitive ground-fault current flowing via
the measuring point.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 983
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

System Type/ Description


Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is decisive
Grounded for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = cos φ
• φ correction = -45.0°
Set the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold value parame-
ters to a value below the minimum ground-fault current to be expected.

Parameter: α1 reduction dir. area, α2 reduction dir. area

• Recommended setting value (_:12601:105) α1 reduction dir. area = 2°

• Recommended setting value (_:12601:106) α2 reduction dir. area = 2°


With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°.
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:12601:103) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage.
Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 that must
still be detected.

Parameter: Dir. determination delay

• Default setting (_:12601:104) Dir. determination delay = 0.00 s


The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:12601:6) Operate delay = 2.0 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

6.23.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


3I0> cos/sinφ1
_:12601:1 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12601:2 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:12601:10 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:12601:27 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes

984 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:12601:110 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction • yes
_:12601:108 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode • reverse
_:12601:109 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Dir. • cos φ cos φ
measuring method • sin φ
_:12601:107 3I0> cos/sinφ1:φ correc- -45 ° to 45 ° 0°
tion
_:12601:102 3I0> cos/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
sinφ1:Min.polar.3I0> for 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
dir.det.
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A
_:12601:105 3I0> cos/sinφ1:α1 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:12601:106 3I0> cos/sinφ1:α2 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:12601:101 3I0> cos/sinφ1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
_:12601:103 3I0> cos/sinφ1:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:12601:104 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Dir. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
determination delay
_:12601:6 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

6.23.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
3I0> cos/sinφ1
_:12601:81 3I0> cos/sinφ1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12601:501 3I0> cos/sinφ1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:12601:54 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Inactive SPS O
_:12601:52 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Behavior ENS O
_:12601:53 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Health ENS O
_:12601:60 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:12601:302 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Ground fault ACD O
_:12601:55 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Pickup ACD O
_:12601:56 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12601:57 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate ACT O

6.23.5 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage

6.23.5.1 Description

Overview
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems often extinguish a short time after the igni-
tion, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In order

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 985
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special method of measurement
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are not
suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs in
healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by an energy-integrating method to determine the
ground-fault direction. This method ensures high sensitivity and positive stability against parasitic signals in
the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process in healthy phases, those errors
will be detected as well.
This stage is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating zero-
sequence currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.

Stage-Control Logic

[lostuwis-240113-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-363 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or not.

986 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Logic of the Transient Ground-Fault Functionality

[lowisfut-240113-01.tif, 8, en_US]

Figure 6-364 Logic Diagram of the Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage

Measured Values, Method of Measurement


The zero-sequence voltage and zero-sequence current are measured directly or calculated from the phase vari-
ables. When measuring directly, the following is detected:
• Zero-sequence voltage on the broken-delta winding
• Zero-sequence current via Holmgreen connection or via core balance current transformer
The voltage measured on the broken-delta winding will be converted to the zero-sequence voltage V0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) that are sampled at a high frequency (8 kHz)
serve to determine the point in time of the ground fault occurrence T0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) and the ground current 3i0(t), which are sampled
at a high frequency (8 kHz), are the basis for direction determination.
The fundamental-component values of the zero-sequence voltage V0 serve to release the directional result
and the pickup as well as a criterion for the stabilization against switching operations.
The positive-sequence system (if it exists as a measured value) serves as an additional criterion for the stabili-
zation against switching operations.
The fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 will be used for the pickup and the
optional trip logic.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 987
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Operational, meaning circulating zero-sequence currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems. This
type of zero-sequence current is also present in case of a failure and can falsify the directional result. There-
fore, an operational zero-sequence current is eliminated.

Determining the Time of the Ground-Fault Ignition


The algorithm uses the evaluation of the instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage to verify continu-
ously whether a ground fault occurred. This takes place regardless of whether the set threshold value for V0 is
exceeded. If a ground fault occurs, the measuring window for determining the direction is positioned and the
direction determination is performed. The position of the measuring window is logged via the indication Pos.
measuring window (in FB General). The precise identification of the time T0 at which the ground fault
occurs is decisive for the correct direction determination.

Determination of Direction, Method of Measurement


The active energy of the zero-sequence system is calculated for the direction determination. Once the ground-
fault occurrence has been detected, the active energy will be calculated across approximately 1 cycle
frequency. If the active energy of the zero-sequence system is negative, a forward fault is present; otherwise it
is a backward fault.

Directional Ground-Fault Signal, Pickup


Determining the time of the ground-fault ignition and the direction is always done with maximum sensitivity.
With the parameters V0> threshold value and 3I0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for
the indication of the direction and the pickup of the stage.
If both of the following conditions are met, the direction result will be reported:
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the V0> threshold
value within 100 ms after detecting the ground-fault ignition.

• The true RMS value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold value.
In this way, high-impedance ground faults are also reported in which the zero-sequence system values rise
only slowly, and, for this reason, the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably earlier than the
exceedance of the parameterized threshold value.
The direction result will be reported to the function via the (_:2311:302) Ground fault of the function
block General information. This indication is reported irrespective of the parameterized direction of the func-
tion.
If the determined direction corresponds with the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), a
pickup occurs.

Reset of the Algorithm


To allow a new directional measurement, the algorithm needs to be reset. The normal reset takes place when
all the following conditions are met:
• The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage V0 drops below the V0 reset threshold. This
reset threshold is a small device-internal V0 threshold. It is also depending on an operational V0 and is
thus a dynamic threshold. The threshold value is 2.0 V secondary without dynamic influence.

• The duration of 120 ms after T0 has expired.

Stabilization against Switching Operations


Switching operations in the system to be protected can cause transient signals in the zero-sequence system.
The stage is stabilized against possible overfunction due to switching operations.

988 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The following mechanisms are applied:


• For reporting the direction result, the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage must
exceed the V0> threshold value in a time slot of 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition. This effec-
tively suppresses wrong indications as a result of switching operations.

• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 is not influenced by switching oper-
ations and is thus a good criterion for distinguishing the ground fault from a switching procedure. The
condition that the fundamental-component value must exceed the V0> threshold value for
reporting the direction result effectively suppresses the influence of switching operations.
For rare cases in which high zero-sequence voltages occur over longer time ranges after switching off the
feeder or line, a criterion based on the positive-sequence current is also effective. This criterion compares
the positive-sequence current before and after the transient event and thus detects a disconnection. In
case of disconnection, the direction result is not reported.
Through stabilization mechanisms, the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition.
Thus a pickup occurs with a 100-ms delay.
If the stage is used in a 1-phase function group, the additional criterion via the positive-sequence current
is not effective.

• The function detects transient ground faults using the zero-sequence voltage. In systems with opera-
tional zero-sequence voltages, if the measuring voltage is switched on, the function can internally be
started. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage does not exceed the threshold
of the Maximum operational V0 parameter in a time slot of 100 ms after the function start, the func-
tion is reset internally.

Trip Logic

[loauswis-240113-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-365 Trip Logic Diagram

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 989
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains disabled. However, this stage can also be used to disable a permanent
ground fault. For this, you enable the optional trip logic with the Operate functionality parameter. If
the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the
tripping delay (Operate delay parameter) starts with the pickup. If the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked is set to no, the stage operates when the tripping delay expires.
An intermittent ground fault has the characteristics of periodical extinction and reignition within one half
period up to several periods. You can find more information in chapter 6.25.1 Overview of Functions. Due to
the tripping delay and the too short fault durations (contact to ground), reliable tripping is not possible. To
ensure reliable tripping under such conditions, the parameter Dropout delay can be used. When the fault
extinguishes, the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 drop below the
threshold values. A dropout can be delayed for a time specified with the Dropout delay parameter. The
tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires within the dropout delay, the stage operates. You can
set the Dropout delay according to the application. The default setting is 0 s. The setting of the dropout
delay does not affect the direction determination. When the fault reignites, a new direction determination
takes place if the function has dropped out before. If the determined direction is opposite to the parameter-
ized direction or is unknown, the tripping delay is reset immediately.

Blocking the Tripping Delay with Detection of the Fault Extinction


Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value cycle of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction of the
ground fault can be detected faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the
pickup value. The fast detection of the fault extinction (see function block General information) blocks the
tripping delay after the dropout delay expires. With the parameter Blk. after fault extinction, this
accelerated blocking mechanism can be enabled or disabled.

6.23.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate functionality

• Default setting (_:13021:108) Operate functionality = no


If the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction, this optional trip logic is not required
and remains disabled. If the transient ground-fault stage is used to disable permanent faults as well, this
optional trip logic is enabled. Pickup of the stage will initiate the tripping delay.

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:13021:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:13021:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
enabled.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

990 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Parameter: Blk. after fault extinction

• Recommended setting value (_:13021:107) Blk. after fault extinction = yes


If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the tripping delay is reset after the detec-
tion of the fault extinction. Therefore, if the tripping delay is set for a short time, the possibility of an overfunc-
tion is avoided. The reason for an overfunction is a slower attenuation in the zero-sequence system following
the fault extinction. Siemens recommends keeping this default setting if the stage is used for tripping.
To protect against intermittent ground faults, the stage uses the parameter Dropout delay to delay a
dropout due to fault extinction. If you are using the stage for protection against intermittent ground faults,
disable the blocking.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:13021:106) Directional mode = forward


When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or backward direction.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:13021:103) V0> threshold value = 15.000 V


With the parameter V0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction and
the pickup of the stage.
Note that the sensitivity of the direction determination itself is not influenced. The direction determination
always works with maximum sensitivity.
If high-resistive ground faults must also be reported, very sensitive settings are possible, for example, V0>
threshold value = 5 V secondary.

Parameter: Maximum operational V0

• Recommended setting value (_:13021:105) Maximum operational V0 = 3.000 V


With the parameter Maximum operational V0, you define the maximum operational zero-sequence
voltage V0. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 does not exceed the param-
eter Maximum operational V0 in a time slot of 100 ms after the function has started, the stage is reset.
The setting is made with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0 according to its definition.
Network Structure Description
Radial network In radial networks, operational zero-sequence voltages are rather small.
Siemens recommends using the default value of 3.000 V.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 991
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Network Structure Description


Ring network, meshed network Greater operational zero-sequence voltages can occur in ring or meshed
networks.
The secondary operational zero-sequence voltages can be determined by
reading the residual voltage VN sec or the zero-sequence voltage V0 sec under
the symmetrical components from the device or via DIGSI.
In case you read the secondary residual voltage VN sec, you convert it to V0 sec
with the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter. You can find more
information in chapter 6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring
Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph).
If V0 sec is greater than 2.5 V, the value of Maximum operational V0
shall be increased to V0 sec ⋅ 1.2.
Example:
VN sec = 5.000 V
Matching ratio Vph / VN = √3
V0 sec = 5.000 V ⋅ √3 / 3 = 2.887 V
Maximum operational V0 = 2.887 V ⋅ 1.2 = 3.464 V
In most cases, the operational zero-sequence voltages are smaller than
2.500 V. Siemens recommends using the default value of 3.000 V.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:13021:109) 3I0> threshold value = 0.000 A


With the parameter 3I0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction
and the pickup of the stage.
In ring or meshed systems, you can use this parameter to reduce the number of ground-fault reporting
devices. The parameter needs to be set according to the user experience on the specific network. For radial
systems, normally you can keep the default value of 0 A which sets this parameter to inactive.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold for operate

• Default setting (_:13021:104) 3I0> threshold for operate = 0.030 A


The setting is significant only for optional trip logic for switching off permanent ground faults. Select the
setting such that the static ground-fault current exceeds the threshold value. You can disable this criterion by
setting the value to 0 A.

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Default setting (_:13021:7) Dropout delay = 0.00 s


The parameter Dropout delay allows you to use the function also as a protection against intermittent
ground faults. With the parameter Dropout delay, the dropout of the pickup state after fault extinction is
delayed or held until the next ignition. Thus, the operate delay can go on and trip the fault.
Set the time to a value within which the new ignition can still be assigned to the previous fault. Typical values
are in a range between several hundred milliseconds and a few seconds.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:13021:6) Operate delay = 0.50 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.
The setting of the Operate delay depends on the specific application. Ensure that the pickup is delayed by
100 ms regarding the time of the ground-fault ignition.

992 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Trans.Gnd.flt1
_:13021:1 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13021:2 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:13021:10 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:13021:107 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction • yes
_:13021:108 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate • no no
functionality • yes
_:13021:106 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode • reverse
_:13021:103 Trans.Gnd.flt1:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 15.000 V
threshold value
_:13021:105 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Maximum 0.300 V to 200.000 V 3.000 V
operational V0
_:13021:109 Trans.Gnd.flt1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:13021:104 Trans.Gnd.flt1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
threshold for operate 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:13021:6 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:13021:7 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

6.23.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Trans.Gnd.flt1
_:13021:81 Trans.Gnd.flt1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13021:54 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Inactive SPS O
_:13021:52 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Behavior ENS O
_:13021:53 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Health ENS O
_:13021:302 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Ground fault ACD O
_:13021:55 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Pickup ACD O
_:13021:56 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13021:57 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 993
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.6 Usage Information for Detection of Intermittent Ground Faults

The stage type 3I0> with cos φ or sin φ measurement is suited for directional detection of intermittent
ground faults. Many years of field experience and field tests have shown that the direction determination of
this stage type reliably determines the direction of the current peaks. Between the current peaks, the direction
is detected as unknown. To generate a tripping or an alarm, you can analyze the individual pickups of a stage
(each directional pickup corresponds to a current peak) in a time-based way or count them via an additional
user logic (CFC chart).
You can also ensure the result in the user logic via a 2nd directional stage that works in the backward direc-
tion, as well as a V0 stage.
You can operate a 3rd directional stage in parallel for detection of permanent ground faults.
In the following, certain settings are explained that are necessary for this application (detection of intermittent
ground faults):
• Parameter: (_:2311:102) Dropout delay
The function must treat the intermittent process as one ground fault. For this, it is necessary that the
indication Ground fault does not drop out between 2 consecutive current peaks. This is ensured via
the Dropout delay parameter (FB General). A dropout delay of 1 s is a feasible value.

• Parameter: (_:12601:104) Dir. determination delay


You must set the delay of the direction determination to 0 s so that the direction of the current peaks can
be determined.

• Parameter: (_:12601:105) α1 reduction dir. area and (_:12601:106) α2 reduction


dir. area
The current peaks show a clear ohmic component. With these parameters, you can limit the direction
characteristic and ensure a reliable direction result.
Siemens recommends setting both parameters to 10°.

• Parameter: (_:12601:110) Blk. after fault extinction


To make possible a continuous and immediate detection of the current peaks, you must switch off the
blocking after fault suppression.
No further parameters need particular consideration with regard to an intermittent ground fault. You can set
these as for the detection of permanent ground faults.

994 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.7 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement

6.23.7.1 Description

Logic

[logfppvi-291112-02.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-366 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 995
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[lo_dir sensGFP 3I0 phi VI, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-367 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement

Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device
as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA,
VB, and VC using the defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement


The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

996 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Depending on the connection type of the measuring point and on the current terminal blocks used, different
linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in chapter Measured Value 3I0, Method of
Measurement , Page 977.

Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup


If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 vector exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value
and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 vector exceeds the threshold value Min. V0> for
dir. determ., the stage detects the ground fault. The direction determination (see in the following para-
graph) is started when the zero-sequence voltage exceeds the threshold. The result from the direction deter-
mination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 vector has also exceeded its threshold
value. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block).
As long as the direction result equals the parameterization direction (parameter Directional mode), the
stage picks up.

Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage V0, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can be
rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the vector
of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of direc-
tion determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. The value ±
Δφ is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. The remaining area besides the forward area is the
reverse area. Between the forward and reverse area, a hysteresis is defined, refer to Figure 6-368.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 997
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[dwdirrot-011112-02.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-368 Directional Characteristic in Forward Mode

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or not.

Blocking the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.

998 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
enabled.

• The binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
detection of an inrush current.
Siemens recommends disabling the blocking. The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage is a
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by an enabling procedure.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:106) Directional mode = forward


When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or reverse direction.
When the parameter Directional mode is set as non-directional, the direction determination is not
considered. The pickup condition depends only on the absolute values 3I0 and V0 and the respective thresh-
olds. The forward direction is the direction towards the motor.

Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.,Forward section +/-

• Default setting (_:104) Rotation angle of ref. volt. = -45°

• Default setting (_:103) Forward section +/- = 88°


With the Rotation angle of ref. volt. and Forward section +/- parameters, you set the direc-
tion characteristic, that is, the areas of forward and reverse. With this, you set the direction characteristic
according to the system conditions and the neutral-point treatment.
Typical settings for the Rotation angle of ref. volt.parameter are:
• Arc-suppression-coil-ground system: 0°

• Isolated system: +45°

• Grounded system: -45°

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 999
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. A reduction of the forward
area by a few degrees is practical, for example, in an arc-suppression-coil-ground system with long cable
feeders, that generate high capacitive fault currents.

Parameter: Min. V0> for dir. determ.

• Default setting (_:102) Min. V0> for dir. determ. = 2.000 V


With the Min. V0> for dir. determ. parameter, you determine the minimum voltage V0 necessary for
the release of the direction determination that must be attained within the time delay Dir. determina-
tion delay.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A


The 3I0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the ground-current sensitivity of the stage. Set
the threshold value lower than the minimum absolute value of the ground-fault current 3I0 that must still be
detected.

Parameter: Dir. determination delay

• Default setting (_:105) Dir. determination delay = 0.10 s


The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 0.50 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

6.23.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


3I0> φ(VI) #
_:1 3I0> φ(VI) #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:10 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:27 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:106 3I0> φ(VI) #:Directional • non-directional forward
mode • forward
• reverse
_:104 3I0> φ(VI) #:Rotation -180 ° to 180 ° -45 °
angle of ref. volt.
_:103 3I0> φ(VI) #:Forward 0 ° to 180 ° 88 °
section +/-
_:102 3I0> φ(VI) #:Min. V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 2.000 V
for dir. determ.

1000 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:101 3I0> φ(VI) #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:105 3I0> φ(VI) #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.50 s
delay

6.23.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
3I0> φ(VI) #
_:81 3I0> φ(VI) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 3I0> φ(VI) #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> φ(VI) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> φ(VI) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> φ(VI) #:Health ENS O
_:301 3I0> φ(VI) #:Fault not in trip area SPS O
_:60 3I0> φ(VI) #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:303 3I0> φ(VI) #:Ground fault ACD O
_:55 3I0> φ(VI) #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate ACT O

6.23.8 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement

6.23.8.1 Description

Logic

[lo_stage_control_Y0G0B0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-369 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1001
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[LoY0G0B0-300713-01, 6, en_US]

Figure 6-370 Logic Diagram of the Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement

Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to
the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the definition equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement


The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very
large linearity and settings range.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically. The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to
harmonics, especially the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.

1002 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 977.

Y0, G0, B0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. You can
choose to use G0 or B0 to determine the direction.

Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup


If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> release thresh.
value and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold
value, the stage recognizes the ground fault. The calculation of G0 or B0 is started with exceeding the
threshold values and then, the direction determination (see the following) is performed. The direction result is
indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block). If the direction result equals the para-
meterized direction (parameter Directional mode), the stage picks up.

Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter φ
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.

[DwY0Dire-171012-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-371 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the G0 Measurement

The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0 axis.
The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for this
example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set direc-
tion-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the active
component G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and
compared with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the
positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value,
the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1003
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-372. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).

[DwY0meas-171012-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-372 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction

If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the φ correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance B0dir.
(B0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is forward. If
the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between,
the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

1004 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[DwSiCoY0-011112-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-373 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the B0 Measurement

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction


Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the Blk.
after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault extinc-
tion.

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1005
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.

6.23.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
enabled.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
detection of an inrush current.
Siemens recommends disabling the blocking. The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage is a
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains untouched by an enabling procedure.

Parameter: Blk. after fault extinction

• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes


If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection of
the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:108) Directional mode = forward


When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or backward direction.

Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value

• Default setting (_:109) Dir. measuring method = G0

• Default setting (_:107) φ correction = 0.0°

• Default setting (_:102) Polarized G0/B0 threshold = 2.00 mS

• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> release thresh. value = 0.002 A

1006 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only the component of the admittance perpendicular to
the set direction-characteristic curve is decisive, see chapter 6.23.8.1 Description. This admittance component
is compared to the threshold value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. In contrast, the absolute value of the
current 3I0 is compared with the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter.
System Type/ Description
Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0
• φ correction = 0.0°
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger reactive current of capacitive or inductive character is superimposed on the small
watt-metric residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and
the fault evaluation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary consider-
ably in its values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device
should only evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Polarized
G0/B0 threshold parameter, the following formula applies:

where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt-metric residual current) of
the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0 must
also be smaller than:

where:
ks: Safety margin ≥ 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here, the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1007
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

System Type/ Description


Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = B0
• φ correction = 0.0°
In isolated systems, a ground fault allows the capacitive ground-fault currents of the
entire electrically connected system, except for the ground current in the faulty cable
itself, to flow through the measuring point as the latter flows directly away from the
fault location (that is, not via the measuring point). The following formula can be used
to determine the pickup value of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter.

where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case

V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.02


In healthy operation, B0 ≤ 0.
For the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter, select around half of this capac-
itive ground-fault current flowing via the measuring point.
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is decisive
Grounded for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0
• φ correction= -45.0°
For the setting of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter, the rule of thumb
is: Set the pickup value according to the following formula where only the active
ground-fault current can be put into use.

where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.02
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.

Parameter: α1 reduction dir. area, α2 reduction dir. area

• Recommended setting value (_:105) α1 reduction dir. area = 2°

• Recommended setting value (_:106) α2 reduction dir. area = 2°


With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°.

1008 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:103) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage.
The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.

Parameter: Dir. determination delay

• Default setting (_:104) Dir. determination delay = 0.10 s


The start of the ground fault normally indicates a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed for this reason from the occurrence of the zero-
sequence voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The duration of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault charac-
teristics. If you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 2.0 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

6.23.8.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Y0> G0/B0 #
_:1 Y0> G0/B0 #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:10 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:27 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:110 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction • yes
_:108 Y0> G0/B0 #:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse
_:109 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. meas- • G0 G0
uring method • B0
_:107 Y0> G0/B0 #:φ correc- -45 ° to 45 ° 0°
tion
_:102 Y0> G0/B0 #:Polarized 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
G0/B0 threshold
_:105 Y0> G0/B0 #:α1 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:106 Y0> G0/B0 #:α2 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1009
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:101 Y0> G0/B0 #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
release thresh. value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:103 Y0> G0/B0 #:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:104 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

6.23.8.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Y0> G0/B0 #
_:81 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> G0/B0 #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> G0/B0 #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> G0/B0 #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate ACT O

6.23.9 Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic

6.23.9.1 Description
The Directional stage with phasor measurement of a harmonic is based on a continuous measuring direc-
tion-determination method. The stage determines the direction via the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasors of
the zero-sequence voltage V0 and current 3I0.

1010 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Logic

[lo_sensGFP V0 dir harmonic, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-374 Logic Diagram of the Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1011
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[lo_start condition and dir. determ, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-375 Logic Diagram of the Start Conditions and of the Direction Determination

Measured Values, Methods of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device
as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA,
VB, and VC using the defining equation.
For the measured value 3I0 and the method of measurement, you can find more information in section Meas-
ured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement , Page 977.
The function uses the fundamental-component value of V0 and the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor of V0
and 3I0 for direction determination. The specific harmonic phasor to be used is determined by the Harmonic
selection setting.

Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup


If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold V0>
threshold value, the stage detects the ground fault and the timer Dir. determination delay starts.
If the following 2 conditions are met, the ground-fault signaling and direction determination start:
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 keeps exceeding the threshold V0>
threshold value during the period of the timer Dir. determination delay.

• The absolute value of the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. exceeds the threshold Min. 3I0>
harmonic when the timer Dir. determination delay expires.

1012 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

To carry out the direction determination, the following condition must also be met in addition to the
preceding 2 conditions:
The zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm. must exceed the threshold which is 0.02 % of the secondary
rated voltage of the voltage transformer. If this condition is not met, the direction result is unknown.
The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal.
The stage pickup depends on the direction result and on the Directional mode parameter:
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the direc-
tion result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined direction.

• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.

Direction Determination
With the Harmonic selection parameter, you can select the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor for direction
determination. The direction is determined via the calculation of the phase angle between the following
values:
• Zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm.
• Rotated zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm., indicated in the following as reference voltage Vref,rot

The reference voltage is rotated by the angle +90° in relation to V0. This provides the maximum security for
the direction determination assuming that 3I0harm. is a reactive current.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. For details, refer to Figure 6-376.
The areas in the following figure are as follows:
• The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. You can set the value
± Δφ with the Forward section +/- parameter. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is forward.

• The mirror area of the forward area is the reverse area. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is reverse.

• In the intermediate range, the direction is unknown.

[dw_sensGFP V0 dir harmonic, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-376 Direction Characteristic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1013
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Stabilization Counter
To determine a reliable direction result, the function uses a stabilization counter. For indicating a direction
result, the determined direction must be stable for 4 successive measuring cycles. The cycle time is 10 ms.

Direction-Result Extension
With the timer Dir.-result extension, you can extend the last determined direction result if the condi-
tions for a further direction determination are no longer met. The last direction result is held until the condi-
tions for a further direction determination are met again (timer is reset) or until the timer expires. The
behavior of the direction-result extension varies according to the setting of the Directional mode param-
eter:
• Directional mode = forward or reverse
As soon as the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. or the zero-sequence harmonic voltage
V0harm. falls below its respective dropout value, the timer Dir.-result extension starts. If the
direction result equals the setting of the Directional mode parameter, the last Pickup signal is also
extended.
If both 3I0harm. and V0harm. exceed their thresholds again, the timer Dir.-result extension is
reset immediately and the direction determination is carried out again.

• Directional mode = non-directional


As soon as the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. falls below its dropout value, the timer Dir.-
result extension starts.
In this directional mode, the Pickup is signaled only with the direction information unknown regardless
of the actual direction that is indicated via the Ground fault signal. Therefore, the Pickup signal with
the unknown information is extended.
If 3I0harm. exceeds its threshold again, the timer Dir.-result extension is reset immediately and
the direction determination is carried out again.

Measured Value Display


After the timer Dir. determination delay expires and the V0 fundamental-component value keeps
exceeding the V0> threshold value, the following measured values are issued:
• V0 harm.
• 3I0 harm.
• Phi(I,V) harm.
These measured values are displayed as --- if 3I0harm. or V0harm. is smaller than 0.005 % of the rated secon-
dary current or voltage.

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion blocks the stage or not.

1014 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.9.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:102) V0> threshold value = 20.000 V


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence (fundamental) voltage sensi-
tivity of the stage. Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence
voltage V0 that must still be detected. Typical values are in the range of 15 V to 25 V.

Parameter: Dir. determination delay

• Default setting (_:105) Dir. determination delay = 0.00 s


The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

Parameter: Forward section +/-

• Default setting (_:103) Forward section +/- = 80°


With the Forward section +/- parameter, you set the direction characteristic, that is, the forward and
reverse areas.
The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. With reducing the forward
area, you can provide more security for the direction result, but on the other hand, you increase the proba-
bility of an underfunction.

Parameter: Dir.-result extension

• Default setting (_:110) Dir.-result extension = 5.00 s


With the Dir.-result extension parameter, you define the time for extending the last determined direc-
tion result if the conditions for further direction determination are no longer met.
This timer can be used to generate a stable direction indication under fluctuating zero-sequence harmonics. A
stable direction indication again can be required for the implementation of a prioritization schema between
different parallel working detection methods (stages).

Parameter: Harmonic selection

• Default setting (_:201) Harmonic selection = 5th harmonic


With the Harmonic selection parameter, you select to use the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor of the
zero-sequence voltage V0 and of the zero-sequence current 3I0 for direction determination.

Parameter: Min. 3I0> harmonic

• Default setting (_:203) Min. 3I0> harmonic = 0.030 A


With the Min. 3I0> harmonic parameter, you define the threshold value of the zero-sequence harmonic
current 3I0harm. for detecting the ground fault and for starting direction determination. You can find more
information in the section Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup, Page 1012.
This parameter needs to be set according to the experience from the specific network. This requires the anal-
ysis of permanent ground faults from the network. If such information is unavailable, Siemens recommends a
rather low setting in the area of 5 mA to 10 mA secondary.

Parameter: 3I0 harm. dropout ratio

• Default setting (_:204) 3I0 harm. dropout ratio = 0.60

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1015
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

With the 3I0 harm. dropout ratio parameter, you define the dropout threshold for the Min. 3I0>
harmonic parameter.
Lowering this dropout threshold enlarges the range and the period of direction determination under fluctu-
ating zero-sequence harmonics. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:106) Directional mode = forward


With the Directional mode parameter, you define for which direction result the function generates the
pickup state:
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the direc-
tion result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined direction.

• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 1.00 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

NOTE

i When both the Operate delay and the Dir.-result extension are applied, the Operate delay
should usually be set to a considerably greater value than the Dir.-result extension. If the Operate
delay is less than the Dir.-result extension, the function will operate for each fault regardless of
the fault duration, as long as the fault direction equals the set direction.

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


With the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter, you block the operate indication, the fault recording,
and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
enabled.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

1016 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.9.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V0>dir.harm.#
_:1 V0>dir.harm.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:10 V0>dir.harm.#:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:106 V0>dir.harm.#:Direc- • non-directional forward
tional mode • forward
• reverse
_:103 V0>dir.harm.#:Forward 0 ° to 90 ° 80 °
section +/-
_:102 V0>dir.harm.#:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 20.000 V
threshold value
_:201 V0>dir.harm.#:Harmonic • 3rd harmonic 5th harmonic
selection • 5th harmonic
• 7th harmonic
_:203 V0>dir.harm.#:Min. 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
harmonic 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:204 V0>dir.harm.#:3I0 harm. 0.10 to 0.95 0.60
dropout ratio
_:110 V0>dir.harm.#:Dir.-result 0.00 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
extension
_:105 V0>dir.harm.#:Dir. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
determination delay
_:6 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

6.23.9.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V0>dir.harm.#
_:81 V0>dir.harm.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 V0>dir.harm.#:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 V0>dir.harm.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V0>dir.harm.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V0>dir.harm.#:Health ENS O
_:303 V0>dir.harm.#:Ground fault ACD O
_:55 V0>dir.harm.#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate ACT O
_:308 V0>dir.harm.#:Phi(I,V) harm. MV O
_:307 V0>dir.harm.#:V0 harm. MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1017
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:306 V0>dir.harm.#:3I0 harm. MV O

6.23.10 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

6.23.10.1 Description

Logic

[lo_gfps v0, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-377 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

1018 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Measured Value, Method of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to
the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component (standard filter):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value (true RMS):


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value.

• Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
11.24.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).

Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.

Determination of the Faulty Phase


With the Detection of faulty phase parameter, you can enable or disable the determination of the
ground-fault phase. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the threshold value
V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and one phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty ph-to-gnd
volt., the last phase is determined to be faulty and is signaled as such.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• From inside on pickup of the measuring-voltage failure detection function. The Blk. by meas.-
volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or
does not block it.

• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or not.

6.23.10.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:12391:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1019
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Parameter Value Description


fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example at capacitor banks).
fund. comp. long filter To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length of the
filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note that in this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (see
11.24.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage).

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Recommended setting value (_:12391:107) Pickup delay = 0 ms


The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0 ms.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:12391:3) Threshold = 30 V


The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. Siemens recommends setting the value between
20 V and 40 V. A higher sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.

• Siemens recommends setting a more sensitive (smaller) value in grounded systems. This value must be
higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.

EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.

• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V


Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:12391:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:12391:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s


The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

1020 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:12391:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
enabled.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
linked with the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase

• Default setting (_:12391:109) Detection of faulty phase = no


The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the stage responds to determine which phase
is affected by the ground fault.
Parameter Value Description
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults, for example for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to determine which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.

Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.

• Default setting (_:12391:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V


Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V.

Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.

• Default setting (_:12391:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V


Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground measurand.
The set value must be above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 70
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, the generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1021
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.10.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V0> 1
_:12391:1 V0> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12391:2 V0> 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:12391:10 V0> 1:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure • yes
_:12391:109 V0> 1:Detection of faulty • no no
phase • yes
_:12391:8 V0> 1:Method of meas- • fundamental comp. fundamental
urement • fund. comp. long filter comp.
• RMS value
_:12391:3 V0> 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
_:12391:4 V0> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:12391:107 V0> 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:12391:6 V0> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 3.00 s
_:12391:101 V0> 1:V> healthy ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 70.000 V
gnd volt.
_:12391:104 V0> 1:V< faulty ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
gnd volt.

6.23.10.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V0> 1
_:12391:81 V0> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12391:54 V0> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:12391:52 V0> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:12391:53 V0> 1:Health ENS O
_:12391:300 V0> 1:Faulty phase ACT O
_:12391:55 V0> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:12391:56 V0> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12391:57 V0> 1:Operate ACT O

6.23.11 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage

6.23.11.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional 3I0 stage also works on
demand.

1022 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Logic

[lo_sensitive ground-current protection 3I0, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-378 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional 3I0 Stage

Measured Value 3I0


The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 977.

Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1023
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

Blocking the Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function
indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the
stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started.

6.23.11.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the tripping is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 0.050 A


The Threshold parameter allows you to set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0.

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

1024 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

6.23.11.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


3I0> #
_:1 3I0> #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:27 3I0> #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:8 3I0> #:Method of meas- • fundamental comp. fundamental
urement • RMS value comp.
_:3 3I0> #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:102 3I0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 3I0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s

6.23.11.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
3I0> #
_:81 3I0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 3I0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 3I0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 3I0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> #:Operate ACT O

6.23.12 Non-Directional Y0 Stage

6.23.12.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional Y0 stage also works on
demand.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1025
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Logic

[logfpsy0-240614-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-379 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional Y0 Stage

Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available,
the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage V0 from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and
VC using the defining equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

1026 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement


The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 977.

Y0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 through the
formula Y0 = 3I0/V0. This stage uses Y0 as a condition to recognize the ground fault.

Minimum 3I0 Threshold


To start the Y0 calculation, the IN/3I0 value must exceed a minimum 3I0 threshold. For protection-class
current transformers, the threshold value is 30 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 150 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A). For sensitive
current transformers, the threshold value is 1 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 5 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A).

Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup


If the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value
and Y0 exceeds the threshold value Threshold Y0>, the stage recognizes the ground fault. If the threshold
values remain exceeded during the Pickup delay, the stage picks up.

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


Blocking of the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the
event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

Blocking of the Time Delay


You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

Blocking of the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function
indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the
stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1027
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.12.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected. A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if 1 of the following 2
conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting).
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the operate is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:101) V0> threshold value = 5.000 V


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage.
The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.

Parameter: Threshold Y0>

• Default setting (_:102) Threshold Y0> = 2.00 mS


With the parameter Threshold Y0>, you set the threshold value of the ground admittance Y0. If the ground
admittance for the setting value is unknown, you can assume the following relation:

[fo_SeGfY0-270614-01, 2, en_US]

ks Factor, takes into account the ohmic components of the current


(1.2 for overhead lines, 1.0 to 1.05 for cable systems)
Ic,line Secondary capacitive ground-fault current for the protected line
Vph-gnd Secondary phase-to-ground voltage in the healthy case
3I0min Secondary ground current in the healthy case (resulting from transformer error),
5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0> Secondary pickup threshold of the residual voltage

1028 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:103) Pickup delay = 0.00 s


With the parameter Pickup delay, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s


The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

6.23.12.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Y0> #
_:1 Y0> #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Y0> #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:10 Y0> #:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure • yes
_:27 Y0> #:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect. • yes
_:101 Y0> #:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 5.000 V
value
_:102 Y0> #:Threshold Y0> 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
_:103 Y0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 Y0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

6.23.12.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Y0> #
_:81 Y0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> #:Operate ACT O

6.23.13 Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage

6.23.13.1 Description

Overview
The Pulse-pattern detection stage detects a faulty feeder during a permanent ground fault in overcompen-
sated systems. This method is not reliably applicable to undercompensated systems.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1029
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The following figure shows a simplified network that applies the pulse-pattern detection method.
The pulse pattern in the ground current 3I0 is generated by switching on and off a capacitor in parallel to the
arc-suppression coil:
• When the capacitor is switched on, an additional capacitive ground current is generated and the 3I0
compensation changes.

• When the capacitor is switched off, the additional capacitive ground current is vanished and the 3I0
compensation returns to the normal state.

[dw_pulse detection network, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-380 Network that Uses the Pulse-Pattern Detection

Cs Capacitance of the switched capacitor


L Inductance of the arc-suppression coil

Pulse Pattern during a Ground Fault


The following figure shows the 3I0 pulse pattern in an overcompensated system for a low-impedance ground
fault and a high-impedance ground fault.
• For low-impedance ground faults, the 3I0 pulse pattern exists only in the faulty feeder.
• For high-impedance ground faults, the pulse pattern is also present in the healthy feeders with lower
amplitude but in phase opposition to the faulty feeder.
Applying a different switch-on/switch-off duration allows distinguishing between faulty and healthy
feeders in case of high-impedance ground faults.

1030 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

[dw_pulse pattern in overcompensation network, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-381 Current Pulse Pattern in the Overcompensated System

For the faulty feeder, the current pulse pattern is as follows:


• When the clocking pulse is on, the capacitor is switched on, the zero-sequence current 3I0 in the faulty
feeder is reduced, and the corresponding current pulse pattern is off.

• When the clocking pulse is off, the capacitor is switched off, 3I0 in the faulty feeder is increased, and the
current pulse pattern is on.

Clocking Pulse Capacitor 3I0 in the Faulty Feeder Current Pulse Pattern of the Faulty Feeder
On On Reduced Off
Off Off Increased On

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1031
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Logic

[lo_sensGFP pulse detection, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-382 Logic Diagram of the Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage

Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement


The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to
the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement


The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very
large linearity and settings range.

1032 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 977.

Pulse Detection, Pulse Counter


For this stage, voltage routing is optional and current routing is mandatory.
• If VN or V0 is available, the voltage is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When the
fundamental-component value of V0 exceeds the V0> threshold value, the pulse-detection logic is
started.

• If VN or V0 is not available, the current is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When
the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold
value, the pulse-detection logic is started.
If the measured current pulse-off duration equals to the value of the Pulse-on duration parameter and
the measured current pulse-on duration equals to the value of the Pulse-off duration parameter, a valid
pulse is detected.
After the first valid pulse is detected, the pulse counter is started to count the number of pulses continuously
until the stage resets.

Pickup, Operate
After the first valid pulse is detected, the stage picks up.
If the number of detected pulses within the pulse monitoring time reaches the setting of the No. of
pulses for operate parameter, the stage operates. The pulse monitoring time is calculated via the
following formula:
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)
For example, the value of the No. of pulses for operate parameter is 3, and the value of the Moni-
toring time(in pulses) is 5. Then the pickup and operate time diagram is as follows:

[dw_pulse pickup and operate, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-383 Pickup and Operate Time

• After the 3rd valid pulse is detected, the stage does not operate because the time between the 1st and
the 3rd valid pulses is greater than the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.

• After the 4th valid pulse is detected, the stage operates because the time between the 2nd and the 4th
valid pulses is within the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1033
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

Dropout Delay
Switching on the capacitor usually causes 3I0 to decrease in the faulty feeder. This must not cause the stage to
drop out. For that reason, a dropout delay is active for the sum of the Pulse-on duration and Pulse-off
duration values.

Detected Pulses of the Ground Fault


The stage records the total number of detected pulses during the permanent ground fault. If the function
resets or the operate condition is met, this number is issued via the signal Detected pulses.

Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal


You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

6.23.13.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: V0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:102) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence (fundamental) voltage sensi-
tivity of the stage. Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence
voltage V0 that must still be detected.
If VN or V0 is not available, the V0> threshold value parameter is hidden and the 3I0> threshold
value parameter is visible and used.

Parameter: 3I0> threshold value

• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.200 A


If VN or V0 is not available, the 3I0> threshold value parameter is visible and used.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence (fundamental) current sensi-
tivity of the stage. Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence
current 3I0 that must still be detected.

Parameter: Pulse-on duration, Pulse-off duration

• Default setting (_:104) Pulse-on duration = 1.00 s

• Default setting (_:105) Pulse-off duration = 1.50 s


With the Pulse-on duration and Pulse-off duration parameters, you define the switch-on and
switch-off duration of the capacitor.
These values must be set according to the operation of the clocking device that determines the switch-on and
switch-off duration of the capacitor. If you set these 2 parameters to the same or similar values, there is a risk
of failure because the stage cannot distinguish the healthy and faulty feeders by only evaluating the ground
current during a high-impedance ground fault.

Parameter: Max.tolera.pulse-on or off

• Default setting (_:109) Max.tolera.pulse-on or off = 0.15 s


With the Max.tolera.pulse-on or off parameter, you define the tolerance for the measured pulse-on/
pulse-off duration. The tolerance is the maximum deviation from the set values for the Pulse-on duration
and Pulse-off duration parameters.
The recommended setting for this parameter is the maximum tolerance of the clocking device plus 40 ms
(tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device). For the tolerance of the clocking device, you have to consider the toler-
ances of the pulse-on and pulse-off durations individually and select the larger tolerance of both.

1034 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

EXAMPLE

Clocking device:

Set pulse-on duration for the clocking device 1.00 s


Max. tolerance pulse-on duration of the clocking device 70 ms
Set pulse-off duration for the clocking device 1.50 s
Max. tolerance pulse-off duration of the clocking device 110 ms
Larger tolerance of both 110 ms

Tolerance to be set:

Tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device 40 ms


Total tolerance to be set 110 ms + 40 ms = 150 ms

Consequently, you must set the respective device settings as:


• Pulse-on duration = 1.00 s
• Pulse-off duration = 1.50 s

• Max.tolera.pulse-on or off = 0.15 s


The following figure shows the measured pulse durations which are within the maximum stated tolerances of
the example.

[dw_tolerance, 1, en_US]

If you have no information about the tolerance of the clocking device, you can carry out a test recording while
the clocking device is in operation. From the test recording, you can read the inaccuracy of the pulse-on/pulse-
off durations. Add a safety margin of 20 ms on the read inaccuracy and consider this as the maximum toler-
ance of the clocking device. For the setting, add another 40 ms for the tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device.

Parameter: 3I0 delta pulse off-on

• Default setting (_:103) 3I0 delta pulse off-on = 10 %


With the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter, you define the minimum percentage value of the ground-
current delta between the capacitor switched-on and capacitor switched-off states to detect the pulse pattern.
That is, to detect the pulse pattern, the following condition must be met:

[fo_delta ratio, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1035
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

To prevent minor current fluctuations from leading to a maloperation of the function, the setting of the 3I0
delta pulse off-on parameter cannot be less than 5 %.
The setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter can be calculated with the following formula:

[fo_3I0_delta_pulse_off-on, 1, en_US]

Where
Kf Safety factor
Siemens recommends applying the factor 0.6 to also detect high-impedance ground faults.
Cs Capacitance of the switched capacitor
ω Angular frequency, which equals to 2πf, where f is the power frequency
L Inductance of the arc-suppression coil
C0Σ Zero-sequence capacitance of the whole network
C0i Zero-sequence capacitance of the protected feeder

EXAMPLE

Kf 0.6
Cs 1.1 ⋅ 10-6 F
ω 314 rad/s
L 0.577 H
C0Σ 5.4297 ⋅ 10-6 F
C0i 1.5502 ⋅ 10-6 F

Then the setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter is calculated as follows:

[fo_delta calculate, 1, en_US]

If the network information for the setting calculation is not available, Siemens recommends using the default
setting of 10 %.

Parameter: No. of pulses for operate, Monitoring time(in pulses)

• Default setting (_:107) No. of pulses for operate = 3

• Default setting (_:108) Monitoring time(in pulses) = 5


With the No. of pulses for operate parameter, you determine the number of pulses to be detected
within the pulse monitoring time, so that the stage operates.
With the Monitoring time(in pulses) parameter, you define the pulse monitoring time, which is calcu-
lated via the following formula:
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)

1036 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

6.23.13.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Pulse detect.#
_:1 Pulse detect.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Pulse detect.#:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:102 Pulse detect.#:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:101 Pulse detect.#:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.000 A
_:103 Pulse detect.#:3I0 delta 5 % to 50 % 10 %
pulse off-on
_:104 Pulse detect.#:Pulse-on 0.20 s to 10.00 s 1.00 s
duration
_:105 Pulse detect.#:Pulse-off 0.20 s to 10.00 s 1.50 s
duration
_:109 Pulse 0.02 s to 2.00 s 0.15 s
detect.#:Max.tolera.puls
e-on or off
_:107 Pulse detect.#:No. of 2 to 100 3
pulses for operate
_:108 Pulse detect.#:Moni- 2 to 100 5
toring time(in pulses)

6.23.13.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Pulse detect.#
_:81 Pulse detect.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Pulse detect.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Pulse detect.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pulse detect.#:Health ENS O
_:302 Pulse detect.#:Detected pulses MV O
_:55 Pulse detect.#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Pulse detect.#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pulse detect.#:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1037
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.24.1 Overview of Functions

A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often extinguish automatically and strike
again after some time. The fault duration can last between a few milliseconds and many seconds. Thus, such
faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are
extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path can pick up. Thus, selective tripping is not
ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function, such faults are too short to initiate switching off
the faulted cable. The short-circuit protection can clear such ground faults selectively only if the ground faults
have become permanent.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of damaging the equipment thermally. This is why
SIPROTEC 5 devices feature a protection function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and
accumulates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the
thermal rating has been reached. If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the
ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool
down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function is used to protect against intermittent
ground faults which occur, for example, in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints.

6.24.2 Structure of the Function

The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function can be used in protection function
groups with current measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously. The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the
following figure.

[DwIntGFP, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-384 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1038 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.24.3 Stage Description

Logic

[LoIntnon, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-385 Logic of the Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Measured Value 3I0


The intermittent ground-fault current 3I0 can either be measured via the standard ground-current input IN or
via the sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3-phase currents. The
current value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1039
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Table 6-12 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types

Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting


the Measuring Point Range
I-3ph (Secondary)25
3-phase Calculated 3I026 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN27 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured IN and calculated 3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A

Method of Measurement
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.

Maximum 3I0 of the Fault


The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault. The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. With the coming operate signal, this value is logged via the information 3I0
max..

Pickup and Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication


When 3I0 exceeds the threshold value, the pickup signals Pickup and Limited pickup (log) are issued.
The stage generates the Stabilized pickup signal by extending the Pickup for a defined time (param-
eter Pickup extension time).
The stage counts the Pickup signals. If the counted number reaches the configured No. pickups till
interm.GF, the Intermittent gnd.flt. signal is issued. The signal Limited pickup (log) is not
issued anymore after the issue of the Intermittent gnd.flt. signal.

[DwIntFaD, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-386 Fault Detection of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

25 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
26 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
27 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.

1040 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Text. Defined time for extending the Pickup signal

Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of Pickup signals during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.

Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal stress,
the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value reaches
the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage issues the
signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.

Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs, the
Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike the
integrator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires, that is,
no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. Timer T-
reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermit-
tent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new
fault event.

Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
• The Intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
• Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.

• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.

Fault Log and Fault Recording


You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault
recording. If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and
fault recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.

Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.

Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals


Intermittent ground faults may cause other functions, based on overcurrent measurement, to pick up, which
may result in a burst of signals. In order to avoid an overflow of the fault log, a special mechanism is applied to

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1041
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

the signals of these functions after detection of an intermittent ground fault (signal Intermittent
gnd.flt.).
The special mechanism is applied for the following listed functions and other functions are not influenced:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground

• Directional overcurrent protection, phases

• Directional overcurrent protection, ground

• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase

• Negative-sequence protection with definite-time characteristic curve

• Directional negative-sequence protection with definite-time delay

• Directional overcurrent-protection stage with cos phi or sin phi measurement

• Directional overcurrent-protection stage with 3I0-phi (V,I) measurement

• Sensitive ground-current protection with 3I0


If a function picks up, normally its output signals are sent directly to the information targets, for example, the
pickup signal is written to the fault log. To avoid overflow of logs due to intermittent ground faults, a special
log buffer mechanism is used. If one of the preceding functions or stages picks up after an intermittent ground
fault has been detected (signal Intermittent gnd.flt. has been issued), its output signals are processed
as shown in the following 2 tables.

Table 6-13 Processing of the Signal Status Changes

Processing of Signal Status Changes Description


Special buffering mechanism The status changes of signals are written to a special
buffer. This buffer can store a maximum of 2 status
changes (the most recent ones) for each signal.
With the pickup signal as example, if one of the
preceding protection functions or stages picks up
during an active Intermittent gnd.flt. signal,
the pickup signal is not written in the fault log
anymore unless one of the preceding functions oper-
ates. After the operation, the buffered signals are
written to the information target with the original
time stamp. This measure ensures that a pickup
signal, although delayed, is always signaled in associ-
ation with each operate command.
Discard The signal status changes are discarded.
Pass through The signal is forwarded to the information target
without restriction.
Special buffering does not apply for specific informa-
tion targets as protection measure, for example,
reverse interlocking, need these signals for proper
operation.

Table 6-14 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes

Information Target Processing of Signal Status Changes


Processing of Signal Status Operational log Special buffering mechanism
Changes Fault log
Ground-fault log
User-defined log

1042 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Information Target Processing of Signal Status Changes


Communication interface IEC 61850-8-1 Client/Server Special buffering mechanism
IEC 60870-5-103/104
DNP V3.0
Protection interface PDI Pass through
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE Pass through
CFC Pass through
LEDs Pass through
Binary output Pass through
Fault recorder Pass through
Automatic reclosing function Discard
Circuit-breaker failure protection Discard
Group indications Discard

6.24.4 Application and Setting Notes

No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function


Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the protection function
only operates after repeated detection of a fault or after the integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times. Besides this, its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons, the
intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the automatic reclosing function.

Rooting of Pickup Signals


The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to LED and relay. The signal Limited pickup (log) is only
reported to the fault log and communication interface before the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued.
This scheme prevents a burst of messages.

NOTE

i To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:11341:3) Threshold = 1.00 A


With the Threshold parameter, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.

Parameter: No. pickups till interm.GF

• Default setting (_:11341:101) No. pickups till interm.GF = 3


With the parameter No. pickups till interm.GF, you set the number of counted Pickup signals after
which the ground fault is considered as intermittent.

Parameter: Pickup extension time

• Default setting (_:11341:102) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s


You can get a stabilized pickup signal with the Pickup extension time parameter. This stabilization is
especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent protections.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1043
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Parameter: Sum of extended PU times

• Default setting (_:11341:103) Sum of extended PU times = 20 s


With the Sum of extended PU times parameter, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the
integration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the pickup state is present.
This Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 4 selectivity criteria (pickup threshold, pickup
extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of the relays on adjacent feeders.
It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection. The protection in the radial system which is
closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, has the shortest summation time Sum of extended PU
times.

Parameter: Reset time

• Default setting (_:11341:104) Reset time = 300 s


With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:11341:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

EXAMPLE

[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-387 Example of Selectivity Criteria of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.24.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:11341:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11341:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes

1044 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:11341:3 Stage 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:11341:101 Stage 1:No. pickups till 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:11341:102 Stage 1:Pickup extension 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:11341:103 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 100.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:11341:104 Stage 1:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s

6.24.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:11341:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11341:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11341:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11341:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:11341:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:11341:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:11341:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:11341:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:11341:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:11341:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:11341:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
_:11341:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:11341:307 Stage 1:No. of pickups MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1045
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.25.1 Overview of Functions

The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection:


• Detects the intermittent ground faults in grounded, compensated, or isolated cable systems selectively
• Can be operated in 2 different modes:
– Operate only by counting directional ground-current pulses
– Operate by integration of the fault current in combination with a directional criterion by counting
directional ground-current pulses
The intermittent ground faults in cable systems are frequently caused by weak insulation or water ingress in
cable joints. The ground faults are characterized by the following properties:
• Intermittent ground faults show very short high ground-current pulses (up to several hundred amperes)
with a duration of less than 1 ms.

• Intermittent ground faults are self-extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several
periods, depending on the power-system conditions and the fault type.

• Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods (several seconds to minutes) and develop to
static ground faults.

6.25.2 Structure of the Function

The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function groups
with current and voltage measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and
a maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously.

[DwStrDirIGFP_20140618, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-388 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1046 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

6.25.3 Stage Description

Overview

[LoOverview, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-389 Logic of the Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure


The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1047
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Logic for Direction Determination and Pulse Counting

[LoIntdir1, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-390 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination and Pulse Counting

(1) The input signal 3 is from Figure 6-391.

Measurement Values for Direction Determination


The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection uses the zero-sequence active energy to
determine the direction of the ground-current pulse.
The zero-sequence active energy is calculated from v0(t) and 3i0(t). The zero-sequence voltage v0(t) can
either be measured via the voltage input VN or can be calculated from the sum of 3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The measured value depends on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point V-3ph.
The intermittent ground-fault current 3i0(t) can either be measured via the ground-current input IN or via the
sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3 phase currents. The current
value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.

Table 6-15 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types

Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting


the Measuring Point Range
I-3ph (Secondary)28
3-phase Calculated 3I029 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN30 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured IN and calculated 3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A

28 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
29 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
30 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.

1048 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Direction Determination and Pulse Counting


When the RMS value of 3I0 exceeds the set threshold value (signal no. 3 in Figure 6-390), the direction deter-
mination process is started and is continuously carried out until the function resets. At first, the current pulse
(current peak) detection takes place. If a current pulse is detected, the direction determination for this pulse is
carried out.
The direction is determined by calculating the active zero-sequence energy of the current pulse. The active
zero-sequence energy of the pulse is compared to internal threshold values resulting in the directional deci-
sion forward, reverse, or non-directional. During the ongoing intermittent ground fault, the direc-
tional results for all current pulses are counted.

Directional Mode and Directional Pulse Counter Criterion


The parameter Directional mode defines whether the function operates in forward or in reverse direc-
tion. The pulses in the specified direction are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the threshold value set in
the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the signal Pulse no. reached is issued. Depending on
the operating mode (Counter or Integrator and counter) of the function, the signal can immediately
cause the operate of the function (Counter mode) or it is processed as directional release criteria (Inte-
grator and counter operating mode). Refer to the further description in the following sections.
The directional pulse counter is reset when a different direction than the set Directional mode is detected.
An undefined direction result does not reset the counter.

Operating Mode
2 different functional operating modes are available: Counter and Integrator and counter. You can
select the different operating modes using the parameter Operating mode.
• Operating mode Counter:
Many ground-current pulses of intermittent ground faults can result in a damage of the protected object.
In this mode, the criterion for operate is only the number of directional current pulses. This is similar to
the SIPROTEC 4 implementation.

• Operating mode Integrator and counter:


An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected object. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-current pulses are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal
stress, the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value
reaches the threshold value, one criterion for the operate is fulfilled. The 2nd criterion for the operate is
the ground-fault direction. The ground-fault direction is determined by counting the directional ground-
current pulses.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1049
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Counter Mode

[LoIntdir2, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-391 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter

(1) The internal signal 4 is from Figure 6-390.

1050 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Integrator and Counter Mode

[LoIntdir3, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-392 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Integrator and Counter

(1) The internal signal 4 and 5 are from Figure 6-390.

Measurement Value for Pickup and Integration


The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonic
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.

Pickup, Limited Pickup, and Stabilized Pickup


Whenever 3I0 exceeds Threshold, the stage issues the signal Pickup. The signal is intended to be applied
for LED and relay output.
Stabilized pickup is formed by prolonging the pickup indication by a settable time Pickup extension
time. This stabilization is especially important for the coordination with the existing static or electromechan-
ical overcurrent protection.
The Limited pickup (log) signal is intend to be applied for logging and communication interface. The
Limited pickup (log) signal will be entered in the fault log and reported via the system interface unless
the Intermittent gnd.flt. indication is given. This behavior prevents a burst of indications.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1051
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication


The stage counts the 3I0 pulses. If the sum of forward pulse counts, reverse counts, and directional undefined
counts is equal to or greater than No.of pulses for interm.GF, the signal Intermittent gnd.flt.
is issued.
If the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued, the pickup indications of some protection functions will be
restraint to avoid an indication burst during an intermittent ground fault.

Operate
The conditions for issuing the signal Operate depend on the operating mode.
Operating Mode Conditions for Issuing the Operate Signal
Counter • The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
Integrator and counter • The 3I0 current integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times, which is signaled via the Sum limit
reached indication.
• The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.

When an opposite current pulse against the setting Directional mode is detected, the Integrator T-sum
and the Counter are reset.

Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, no operate is neces-
sary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer
T-reset with the setting Reset time and the Integrator T-sum are launched simultaneously. Unlike the inte-
grator, each new ground-current pulse restarts the reset time with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset
expires, that is, no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are
reset. The Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be
processed yet as intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs
later is considered as a new ground-fault event.

Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset:
• The intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state:
• The Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.

• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.

Maximum Value 3I0 of the Ground Fault


The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault.The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. If the function resets or operates, this value is logged via the signal 3I0 max..

1052 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Fault Log and Fault Recording


You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault
recording. If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and
fault recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.

Start and Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the func-
tion group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.

Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Indications


In this case, the function uses the same mechanism as the Non-directional intermittent ground-fault
protection. For more information, refer to chapter Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals,
Page 1041.

6.25.4 Application and Setting Notes

No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function


Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults. For this reason, the Direc-
tional intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the Automatic reclosing func-
tion.

Routing of Pickup Signals


The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to an LED and a relay. The signal Limited pickup (log) is
only reported to the fault log and communication interface until the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is
issued. This scheme prevents a burst of indications.

NOTE

i To avoid a burst of indications, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and to the fault log.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:16291:3) Threshold = 1.00 A


With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:16291:101) Directional mode = forward


With the parameter Directional mode, you define if the function operates in forward or in reverse
direction.

Parameter: Pickup mode

• Default setting (_:16291:102) Pickup mode = with 3I0>

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1053
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

With the parameter Pickup mode, you define under which conditions pickup is detected and fault logging
and recording start:
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with 3I0>, the signal Pickup is released without consid-
ering the ground fault direction. The signal Pickup is issued once the IN/3I0 exceeds the threshold
value.

• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with direction, the signal Pickup is issued when at
least one pulse direction is the same as the direction specified by the set value of parameter Direc-
tional mode.

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:16291:103) Operating mode = Counter


With the parameter Operating mode, you define if the function operates in Counter or in Integrator
and counter mode.
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes
Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate criterion. This
is a simple method which is similar to the implementation in the 7SJ
SIPROTEC 4 devices. Siemens recommends using this method if no time
grading or only simple time grading between protection devices (time
grading of only 2 or 3 devices) is required.
Time grading is then carried out by increasing the parameter value No.
of pulses for operate towards the infeed.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate criteria while
the counter criterion is only used for the direction determination. The inte-
grator works in the same way as for the non-directional intermittent
ground fault function. This allows the same time-grading principles as for
the non-directional intermittent ground fault function. Refer to this func-
tion for more description.

Parameter: No.of pulses for interm.GF

• Default setting (_:16291:104) No.of pulses for interm.GF = 3


With the parameter No.of pulses for interm.GF, you set the total number of pulse counts (forward,
reverse and non-dir. pulses) at which the ground fault is considered to be intermittent. Siemens
recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Pickup extension time

• Default setting (_:16291:105) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s


With the parameter Pickup extension time, you get a prolonged and thus stabilized pickup signal. This
stabilization is especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent
protections.

Parameter: No. of pulses for operate

• Default setting (_:16291:108) No. of pulses for operate = 5


The pulses in the specified direction from Directional mode are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the
set value of the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the directional counter criterion is fulfilled.
The setting of parameter No. of pulses for operate depends on the Operating mode.

1054 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes


Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate
criterion. Thus do not set the value for parameter No. of
pulses for operate too small. Consider that a permanent
intermittent ground fault will cause many current pulses. If no
time-grading considerations are required, Siemens recommends
using a value in the range of 10 to 20.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate
criteria while the counter criterion is only used for the direction
determination. The value for parameter No. of pulses for
operate to fulfill the directional criterion can be set to a rather
small value in the range of 3 to 5.

Parameter: Sum of extended PU times

• Default setting (_:16291:106) Sum of extended PU times = 20.00 s


This parameter is only relevant in the operating mode Integrator and counter.
With the parameter Sum of extended PU times, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the
integration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the Pulse no. reached signal
and the pickup state is present.
The parameter Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 5 selectivity criteria (ground-fault direc-
tion, pickup threshold, pickup extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of
the relays on subordinate devices. It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection.
The Sum of extended PU times has the shortest summation time in the radial system for the device that
is closest to the intermittent ground fault and that picks up.

Parameter: Reset time

• Default setting (_:16291:107) Reset time = 300 s


With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:16291:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

6.25.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:16291:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:16291:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:16291:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure • yes
_:16291:101 Stage 1:Directional • forward forward
mode • reverse

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1055
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:16291:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode • with 3I0> with 3I0>
• with direction
_:16291:103 Stage 1:Operating mode • Counter Counter
• Integrator and counter
_:16291:3 Stage 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:16291:105 Stage 1:Pickup extension 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:16291:104 Stage 1:No.of pulses for 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:16291:106 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 100.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:16291:107 Stage 1:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
_:16291:108 Stage 1:No. of pulses for 2 to 100 5
operate

6.25.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:16291:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:16291:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:16291:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:16291:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:16291:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:16291:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:16291:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:16291:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:16291:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:16291:308 Stage 1:Pulse no. reached SPS O
_:16291:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:16291:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
_:16291:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:16291:310 Stage 1:Forward pulses MV O
_:16291:311 Stage 1:Reverse pulses MV O
_:16291:312 Stage 1:Non-dir. pulses MV O

1056 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

6.26.1 Overview of Functions

The function Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46):


• Detects 1-phase or 2-phase short circuits in the electrical power system with clearly increased sensitivity
compared to the classical overcurrent protection

• Protects electric machines during excessive unbalanced load

• Reports unbalanced load conditions in the electricity supply system

• Detects phase interruptions in the primary system

• Locates short circuits or inversions in the connections to the current transformers

6.26.2 Structure of the Function

The Negative-sequence protection function is used in protection function groups with current measure-
ment.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time negative-sequence protection
stages.
In the function Negative-sequence protection, the following stages can be operated simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time negative-sequence protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time negative-sequence protection
The stages have an identical structure. Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following
figure.

[dwnspstr-271112-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-393 Structure/Embedding of the Function

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1057
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

6.26.3 General Functionality

6.26.3.1 Description

Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the general functionality which applies across all configured
stages. It contains:
• Selection of the reference value
• Current-release criterion

[lo_General Functionality.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-394 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality

(1) Switchover to I1 with (_:2311:106) Reference value = pos. seq. current

Reference Value
With the parameter Reference value, the negative-sequence current I2 is normalized to the rated object
current Irated, obj or to the positive-sequence current I1. When I2 is normalized to I1, the sensitivity of the func-
tion for low short-circuit currents is increased.

Current Limitation and Maximum Phase Current


With the parameters Current limitation Imax and Maximum phase current, you restrict the oper-
ating range of the function. When the limiting is activated, pickup of the stages is blocked as soon as the
maximum phase-current threshold value is exceeded. For more information, refer to the stage description.

Release Current
The threshold value of the Release current serves to release the negative-sequence protection.

6.26.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Reference value

• Default setting (_:2311:106) Reference value = rated current


With the parameter Reference value, you define the normalization of the negative-sequence current I2 to
the rated object current Irated, obj (I2/Irated, obj) or to the positive-sequence current I1 (I2/I1).

1058 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

Parameter Value Description


I2/Irated, obj The negative-sequence current is referred to the rated current of the
protected object. This is a preferred normalization for electrical machines,
because the permissible limiting values are indicated exclusively referred to
the machine rated current. You can also use this normalization for other
applications.
I2/I1 The normalization of the negative-sequence system to the positive-
sequence system yields a higher sensitivity. Use this normalization when
detecting interruptions in the primary system.

Set the parameter depending on the application.

Parameter: Current limitation Imax, Maximum phase current

• Default setting (_:2311:107) Current limitation Imax = no

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Maximum phase current = 10.0 A at 1 A


If the protection function needs a maximum current limitation, set the value of the Current limitation
Imax parameter from no to yes. With the parameter Maximum phase current, you set the upper limit of
the phase current. CT saturation will cause negative-sequence current in the secondary system. To avoid over-
function due to the CT saturation, a suitable phase-current limit value is 10 times of the rated protection-
object current.

Parameter: Release current

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Release current = 0.05 A at 1 A


For the safe calculation of negative-sequence currents, the current in at least one phase must be greater than
5 % of the secondary rated device current. For a 1-A device, the value of Release current is 0.05 A (0.25 A
for a 5-A device).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1059
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

6.26.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.26.4.1 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[logiknsp-070312-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-395 Logic Diagram of the Stage Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Characteristic
Curve

Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.

Blocking of the Stage


When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out.
Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the time delay and tripping are however blocked. The stage signals this by way of a

1060 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.

6.26.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:1981:3) Threshold = 10 %


The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is
a practicable value for fault indications of electrical machines.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:1981:6) Operate delay = 1500 ms


The setting of the Operate delay depends on the application. Observe the time grading in the power-
system protection and do not set the time for monitoring too short. The default setting is practicable. For
motors, the time depends on the permissible time period for the set unbalanced load.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:1981:104) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.

6.26.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:106 General:Reference value • pos. seq. current rated current
• rated current
_:2311:107 General:Current limita- • no no
tion Imax • yes
_:2311:101 General:Maximum phase 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:2311:104 General:Release current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
_:1981:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:1981:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:1981:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 10.0 %
_:1981:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.40 to 0.99 0.95
ratio

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1061
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:1981:104 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:1981:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:1981:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s
delay
Definite-T 2
_:1982:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:1982:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:1982:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 65.0 %
_:1982:4 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.40 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:1982:104 Definite-T 2:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:1982:101 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:1982:6 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay

6.26.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:Overcurrent blocking SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:1981:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:1981:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:1981:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:1981:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:1981:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:1981:300 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:1981:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:1981:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2
_:1982:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:1982:52 Definite-T 2:Behavior ENS O
_:1982:53 Definite-T 2:Health ENS O
_:1982:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive SPS O
_:1982:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:1982:300 Definite-T 2:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:1982:55 Definite-T 2:Pickup ACD O
_:1982:57 Definite-T 2:Operate ACT O

1062 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

6.26.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.26.5.1 Description

Logic of a Stage

[lo_NSP_Inverse, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-396 Logic Diagram of the Negative-Sequence Protection with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.

Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the stage picks up, and the inverse-
time characteristic curve is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time.
The weighted time results from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present
current value is determined from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the
stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 0.95 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup is indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1063
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

Blocking of the Stage


When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out.
Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the time delay and tripping are however blocked. The stage signals this by way of a
corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.

6.26.5.2 Application and Settings Notes

Parameter: Type of character. curve

• Default setting (_:105) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 11.27.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 10.0 %


The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is
a practicable value for fault detection for different applications.

Parameter: Time dial

• Recommended setting value (_:107) Time dial = 1.00


With the parameter Time dial, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the parameter Time dial is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:106) Reset = disk emulation


With the parameter Reset, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
Parameter Value Description
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:104) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

1064 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection

With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.

6.26.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Inverse-T #
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 10.0 %
_:104 Inverse-T #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect. • yes
_:105 Inverse-T #:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:106 Inverse-T #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:107 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

6.26.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:300 Inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 Inverse-T #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1065
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-


Independent Time Delay

6.27.1 Overview of Functions

The function Directional negative-sequence protection with current-independent time delay (ANSI 46)
serves as the backup short-circuit protection for unbalanced faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various supervision and protection tasks can be realized, for example:
• Recording of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the system with a higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent
protection. The pickup value can be set under the rated object current.

• Recording of phase conductor interruptions in the primary system and in the current-transformer secon-
dary circuits

• Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the current transformers

• Indication of unbalanced states in the energy system

• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or
conductor interruptions (for example, through a defective fuse)

6.27.2 Structure of the Function

The Directional negative-sequence protection with definite time delay function can be used in protection
function groups with 3-phase current and voltage measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.

[dwnspdir-271112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-397 Structure/Embedding of the Function

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.

6.27.3 Function Description

Stage Control
The following figure shows a stage control. It is available separately for each stage.

1066 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

[lostensp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-398 Stage Control of the Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection

In addition to the generally valid stage control, the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring voltage
failure, provided the stage is working directionally.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1067
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

Logic of the Stage

[lonspdir-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-399 Logic Diagram of the Function Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection with Current-
Independen Time Delay

Measurand
The negative-sequence current I2 is used as a measurand. From the 3-phase currents, the fundamental
phasors are determined via a 1-cycle filter and, corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical
components, the negative-sequence system is calculated from this.

1068 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

Functioning
The stage picks up if the negative-sequence system current exceeds the set threshold value and the parame-
terized direction agrees with the measured direction. The pickup drops out if the negative-sequence system
current falls below 95 % of the set threshold.

Stabilization with Phase Current


Unbalance in operation and unbalanced transformer ratios can lead to spurious pickups and incorrect tripping.
In order to avoid this, the directional negative-sequence system stage is stabilized with the phase currents.
The threshold value increases with rising phase currents (see next image).
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.

[dwstabil-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-400 Stabilization with Phase Currents

Direction Determination
The direction determination takes place with the negative-sequence system measurements I2 and V2.
The forward and reverse region is defined through the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward
β (see next figure). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
positively defined in a mathematical sense (counter-clockwise). The region between the limit angle α and the
limit angle β - counted from the former in a positive direction - is the forward region. The remaining region is
the reverse region.
For determining of the direction, the function places the measuring current I2 on the real axis. If the phasor of
the negative-sequence system voltage V2 is located within the defined forward region, the function deter-
mines the direction as forward. In the other case, the function determines the direction as reverse.
The requirement for determining the direction is that the adjustable minimum variables have been exceeded
for the negative-sequence system current and negative-sequence system voltage (parameters Min. neg.-
seq. current I2 and Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1069
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

[dwphasor-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-401 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values

If the device determines a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit (through the binary input
voltage transformer circuit-breaker dropout or through measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion), direction determination will be disabled and every directionally set stage will be blocked. Non-direction-
ally set stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit.

[lorichtu-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-402 Logic of Direction Determination

Directional Mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.

1070 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

Operating Mode upon 1-Pole Interruption


With the parameter Op.mode at 1p dead time, you determine if the stage is blocked during a 1-pole
dead time, or if it works in a non-directional manner, even if it is set for directional operation. When the 1-pole
dead time is complete, the corresponding device-internal signal is extended by the time of the parameter
Hold mode 1p dead time.

NOTE

i The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.

Blocking the Tripping by Pickup of the Main Protection Functions


The pickup and type of pickup for the main protection functions can block the tripping of the stage. You can
perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Blocking by
This setting is used to select the zone or stage at which blocking is to occur in the event of pickup.

• Blocking by prot. pickup


The pickup type at which the blocking is to occur is defined with this parameter. The blocking can occur
at any pickup or only at 1-pole or only at multipole pickups.
This parameter is also used to set that no blocking should occur when the main protection has picked up.

Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function


If the device is equipped with the additional Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer inrush currents.
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the time delay and tripping are however blocked. The stage signals this by way of a
corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.

6.27.4 Application and Setting Notes for Direction Determination

Parameter: Limit Angle Region Forward

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Angle forward α = 338°

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Angle forward β = 122°


With the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward β, you can change the location of the direc-
tional characteristic curve.
Siemens recommends using the defaults, because the function with these settings reliably determines the
direction.

Parameter: Minimum Negative-Sequence System Variables V2 and I2

• Default setting (_:2311:107) Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 = 0.7 V

• Default setting (_:2311:106) Min. neg.-seq. current I2 = 0.05 A


With the parameters Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 and Min. neg.-seq. current I2, you can
specify the minimum negative-sequence system values for direction determination with V2 and I2. The set
limiting values must not be exceeded by operational unbalances.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1071
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

6.27.5 Application and Setting Notes for Stages

Parameter: Directional mode

• Default setting (_:8101:114) Directional mode = forward


You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage will work with this setting even if no direction measurement is
possible, for example due to insufficient polarization voltage (or none at all), or
due to failure of the measuring voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.


If the device is equipped with the additional Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer inrush currents.
• Default setting (_:8101:116) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no
Parameter Value Description
no The transformer inrush current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
1) In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
2) In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of
the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the transformer.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that
can lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and tripping of
the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value
of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the transformer.

Parameter: Blocking by the main Protection

• Recommended setting value (_:8101:140) Blocking by =


If you wish to give selective fault clarification through the main protection function precedence over tripping
through the directional negative-sequence protection, you can define this via the 2 parameters Blocking by
and Blocking by prot. pickup. The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or tripping
stages of the main protection function(s), upon whose pickup the negative-sequence protection is to be
blocked.

Parameter: Blocking by prot. pickup

• Default setting (_:8101:130) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup


The Blocking by prot. pickup parameter can be used to define the type of pickup, which leads to the
blocking.
Parameter Value Description
every pickup Blocking at every pickup
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-pole pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multipole pickup

1072 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

Parameter Value Description


no pickup If the pickup of the main protection function should not lead to blocking of the
negative-sequence protection, select this setting.

Parameter: Op.mode at 1p dead time

• Default setting (_:8101:129) Op.mode at 1p dead time = blocked


The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is used to define the behavior of the stage in the event of a 1-pole
interruption.
Parameter Value Description
blocked The energy-transmission system is unbalanced in the 1-pole dead time. A
mode-dependent negative-sequence system results from this, which can lead to
an undesired pickup of the directional negative-sequence protection. That is
why blocking with this setting makes sense if the pickup threshold of the stage
is lower than/equal to the maximum mode-dependent negative-sequence
system current in the 1-pole dead time.
non-directional If the directional negative-sequence protection is to continue to work in the 1-
pole dead time, select this setting. The directional measurement works in a
non-directional manner, because a reliable direction dead time measurement is
not possible due to load current in the zero and negative-sequence system with
the circuit breaker open on one pole.
Set the pickup threshold of the stage higher than the maximum mode-
dependent negative-sequence system current in the 1-pole dead time.

NOTE

i The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.

Parameter: Hold mode 1-p dead time

• Default setting (_:8101:112) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s


The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is used to define the time by which the device-internal signal for the
1-pole interruption is extended after the end of the 1-pole interruption.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the parameterized operating
mode for a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole dead
time) until the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the
maximum time between the switch-in of the 1st circuit breaker and the switch-in of the last circuit breaker at
all ends of the feeder after a 1-pole dead time.

NOTE

i The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.

Parameter: Stabiliz. w. phase current

• Recommended setting value (_:8101:111) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %


In order to avoid unwanted pickups and tripping, the negative-sequence system current stage is stabilized
with the phase currents.
More information can be found in chapter 6.27.3 Function Description.
The threshold value increases as the phase currents increase.
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a default setting of 10 % under normal operations.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1073
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:8101:3) Threshold = 1.5 A


Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for the time-graded stages, the setting
for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into account in the grading chart.
With a very sensitive setting, you must make sure that the negative-sequence system current does not lead to
undesired response of the stage due to unbalance (for example non-twisted line).

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:8101:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s


The tripping delay (time delay) to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for
the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, pay attention to whether the stage must work dependent on the
direction.

6.27.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Angle forward α 0 ° to 360 ° 338 °
_:2311:102 General:Angle forward β 0 ° to 360 ° 122 °
_:2311:107 General:Min. neg.-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V2
_:2311:106 General:Min. neg.-seq. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
current I2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
_:8101:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:8101:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:8101:114 Definite-T 1:Directional • non-directional forward
mode • forward
• reverse
_:8101:111 Definite-T 1:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:8101:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:8101:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
_:8101:116 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:8101:130 Definite-T 1:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup • 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup

1074 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:8101:129 Definite-T 1:Op.mode at • blocked blocked
1p dead time • non-directional
_:8101:112 Definite-T 1:Hold mode 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
1p dead time
_:8101:140 Definite-T 1:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

6.27.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Test direction ACD O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:8101:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:8101:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:8101:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:8101:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:8101:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:8101:302 Definite-T 1:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:8101:301 Definite-T 1:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:8101:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:8101:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:8101:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1075
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection

6.28 Undercurrent Protection

6.28.1 Overview of Functions

The Undercurrent protection function (ANSI 37):


• Detects the going current in a feeder after the opening of the infeed circuit breaker
• Detects the loss of loads

• Detects and protects pumps from running idle

6.28.2 Structure of the Function

The Undercurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory. A
maximum of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function. The protection stages are
structured identically.

[lostuundcu-150813, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-403 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1076 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection

6.28.3 Stage Description

Logic of the Stage

[loundcur-200713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-404 Logic Diagram of the Undercurrent Protection

Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1077
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection

• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:


This measurement method processes the sampled current values and numerically filters out the funda-
mental component.

• Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:


This measurement method determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
definition equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).

Blocking the Stage


When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out. Blocking the stage is possible externally or inter-
nally via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Activation and Blocking of the Stage Depending On the Circuit-Breaker Condition


With the parameter Activation, you define if the Undercurrent protection stage is always active or only
active if the circuit breaker is indicating closed.
If the parameter Activation is set to with CB closed and the local circuit breaker is not closed, the func-
tion Undercurrent protection is blocked and no pickup is generated.
The circuit-breaker position is detected as closed if one of the following conditions is met:
• The binary inputs are connected to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. The circuit-breaker switch
position is detected as closed via the related binary inputs of the Position indication. This is also true
under the condition that no phase current is flowing.

• The current-flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed. This is also true under the condition
that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open.

6.28.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Activation

• Default setting (_:13051:103) Activation = with CB closed

Parameter Value Description


with CB closed The Undercurrent protection is active only when the circuit-breaker posi-
tion is detected as closed.
A precondition is, that the Position indication is routed to binary inputs to
obtain the CB position information via the CB auxiliary contacts. If this is not
the case, the function will always be inactive.
always active The Undercurrent protection stage is always active independent of the
position of the circuit breaker.

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:13051:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.

1078 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection

Parameter Value Description


RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

Parameter: Pickup mode

• Default setting (_:13051:102) Pickup mode = 3 out of 3


Use the Pickup mode parameter to define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:13051:3) Threshold = 0.050 A


Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:13051:6) Operate delay = 0.05 s


Operate delay must be set according to the specific application. No general application notes can be given.

6.28.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:13051:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13051:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:13051:103 Stage 1:Activation • always active with CB closed
• with CB closed
_:13051:8 Stage 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:13051:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 3 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:13051:3 Stage 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:13051:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1079
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection

6.28.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:13051:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13051:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13051:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13051:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:13051:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13051:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13051:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O

1080 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.29.1 Overview of Functions

The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Monitor the permissible voltage range
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage

• Decouple systems (for example, wind power supply)


Abnormally high voltages in power systems are caused by voltage controller failure at the transformer or on
long transmission lines under low-load conditions.
When using common-mode reactors in the protected power system, the device must shut down the line
quickly if the reactors fail (for example, due to fault clearance). The insulation is endangered by the over-
voltage condition.
Overvoltages at capacitor banks can be caused by resonances with line or transformer inductances.
In power plants increased voltage levels can be due to one of these factors:
• Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually
• Failure of the automatic voltage controller

• After full load shedding of a generator

• Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode

6.29.2 Structure of the Function

The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time over-
voltage protection stages. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time overvoltage protection
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.

[dw3phovp-030211-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-405 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1081
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.29.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.29.3.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo3phasi-090611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-406 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

1082 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the overvoltage
condition (1 out of 3).

Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

6.29.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:181:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.

Parameter: Measured value

• Default setting (_:181:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

Parameter Value Description


phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:181:3) Threshold = 110 V


Depending on the Measured value , the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-
to-ground quantity. The default setting assumes that the voltage range is monitored on long-distance trans-
mission lines under low-load conditions.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1083
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:181:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:181:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

Parameter: Pickup mode

• Recommended setting value (_:181:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3


With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition (1 out of 3).
Parameter Value Description
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:

Threshold value: 10 % above Vrated

Vthreshold, sec = 1.1 Vrated, sec = 1.1 × 100 V = 110 V


This requires that the primary rated voltages of protected object and voltage transformer are identical. If they
are different, you have to adjust the pickup value.
For the Operate delay set a value of 3 s.
• 2. Stage:
The second overvoltage-protection stage is intended for high overvoltages with short duration. A high
pickup value is selected here, for example, 1.5 times the rated voltage. A time delay setting of 0.1 s to
0.2 s is sufficient then.

Stage Setting Values


Threshold value Time delay
1 1.1 Vrated 3s

1084 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Stage Setting Values


2 1.5 Vrated 0.1 s to 0.2 s

6.29.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Definite-T 1
_:181:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:181:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:181:9 Definite-T 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:181:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:181:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:181:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:181:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:181:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
delay
Definite-T 2
_:182:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:182:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:182:9 Definite-T 2:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:182:8 Definite-T 2:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:182:101 Definite-T 2:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:182:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 130.000 V
_:182:4 Definite-T 2:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:182:6 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 300.00 s 0.50 s
delay

6.29.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:181:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:181:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:181:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1085
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:181:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:181:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:181:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:181:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:181:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:181:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:181:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2
_:182:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:182:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive SPS O
_:182:52 Definite-T 2:Behavior ENS O
_:182:53 Definite-T 2:Health ENS O
_:182:55 Definite-T 2:Pickup ACD O
_:182:300 Definite-T 2:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:182:301 Definite-T 2:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:182:302 Definite-T 2:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:182:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:182:57 Definite-T 2:Operate ACT O

1086 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.29.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.29.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo3phinv, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-407 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value .
• Measurement fundamental comp. :
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1087
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

• Measurement RMS value :


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).

Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.

Pickup and Operate Curve


When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor , the stage picks up
and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. Operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum of
inverse-time delay and additional time delay.

Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay )

After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay expires.

1088 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure.

[dwovpinv, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-408 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic

The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:

Where
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial )
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold )
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k )
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c )

When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.

Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 × pickup factor × threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time . Instan-
taneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired
delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1089
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage .

6.29.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.

Parameter: Measured value

• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the tripping stage monitors the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

Parameter Value Description


phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 110.000 V

• Default setting (_:101) Pickup factor = 1.10


The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-to-
ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay after
pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.

Parameter: Pickup mode

• Recommended setting value (_:182:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3


With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition (1 out of 3).

1090 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Parameter Value Description


1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).

Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, Charact. constant c

• Default setting (_:102) Charact. constant k = 1.00

• Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant α = 1.000

• Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant c = 0.000


With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:105) Time dial = 1.00


With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Default setting (_:106) Additional time delay = 0.00 s


With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.

Parameter: Reset time

• Default setting (_:107) Reset time = 0.00 s


With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise Siemens
recommends to keep the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.

6.29.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Inverse-T #
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:108 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1091
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup factor 1.00 to 1.20 1.10
_:102 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.00 to 300.00 1.00
constant k
_:103 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.010 to 5.000 1.000
constant α
_:104 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.000 to 5.000 0.000
constant c
_:105 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:106 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:107 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

6.29.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

1092 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.30.1 Overview of Functions

The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages
• Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.

6.30.2 Structure of the Function

The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
identical structure.

[dwovpu1s-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-409 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1093
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.30.3 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[logovpu1-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-410 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

6.30.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:211:3) Threshold = 65 V


The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default (_:211:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

1094 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:211:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The default value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement precision, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

6.30.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:211:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:211:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:211:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 65.000 V
_:211:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:211:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
_:212:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:212:2 Stage 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:212:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
_:212:4 Stage 2:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:212:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

6.30.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:211:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:211:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:211:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:211:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:211:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1095
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:211:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:211:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:212:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:212:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:212:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:212:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:212:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:212:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:212:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

1096 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

6.31.1 Overview of Functions

The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function (ANSI 47) monitors the electrical
power system for voltage unbalance.
Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.

• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.

• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example, due to a tripped 1-phase fuse.

6.31.2 Structure of the Function

The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups
with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The stages have an identical structure.

[dwu2ovps-030211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-411 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1097
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

6.31.3 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[lou21pol-090611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-412 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

Method of Measurement
The stage uses the negative-sequence voltage. The negative-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defined equation.

Blocking the Stage


When it is blocked, the tripping stage drops out. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• During a 1-pole dead time associated with the device's internal AR function. The occurring negative-
sequence system variable is determined only by the unbalanced power flow

• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

1098 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

• From an internal source on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Chapter
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that
the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.

• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

6.31.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:301:3) Threshold = 5.800 V31


The Threshold parameter is set according to the definition of the negative-sequence system.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:301:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s


The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:301:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:301:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

Further Application Notes


The following table provides application notes for interaction with other internal or external functions.

31 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1099
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

Interaction with: Note


External automatic reclosing If the device is working together with an external automatic reclosing func-
function tion, or another protection device (working in parallel) is capable of 1-pole
External 1-pole tripping protec- tripping, the stage must be blocked by the binary input signal >Block
tion stage during 1-pole disconnection.

6.31.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:301:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:301:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:301:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure • yes
_:301:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 5.800 V
_:301:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:301:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
_:302:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:302:2 Stage 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:302:10 Stage 2:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure • yes
_:302:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 9.000 V
_:302:4 Stage 2:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:302:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

6.31.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:301:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:301:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:301:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:301:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:301:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:301:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:301:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:302:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I

1100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:302:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:302:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:302:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:302:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:302:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:302:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1101
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding

6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and


Compounding

6.32.1 Overview of Functions

The Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding function (ANSI 59) detects
stationary overvoltages at the opposite line end.
On long, unloaded or weakly loaded transmission lines stationary overvoltages are caused by the capacitance
per unit length (Ferranti effect). The overvoltage is present at the opposite line end in this case, but it can only
be eliminated by switching off the local line end.

6.32.2 Structure of the Function

The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and compounding function is used in protec-
tion function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding comes with 2
factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The trip-
ping stages have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured so that the line data parameters can act on all stages (see Figure 6-413).

[dwovpuko-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-413 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding

6.32.3 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[lovpu1ko-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-414 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and
Compounding

Method of Measurement
The compounding calculates the positive-sequence system of the voltage at the opposite line end. For this,
the function uses the line data (X per length unit, C1 per length unit, Line angle, Line
length).

NOTE

i Compounding is not suitable for lines with series capacitors or common-mode reactor.

The voltage Vend at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local line end and from
the flowing current based on the equivalent circuit diagram for the line (see Figure 6-415):

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1103
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding

[fofuende-170309-01.tif, 2, en_US]

with
VEnd Calculated voltage at the opposite line end
Vmeas Measured voltage at the local line end
Imeas Measured current at the local line end
CB Effective capacitance of the line
RL Ohmic operating resistance of the line
LL Working inductance of the line

[dwerskom-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-415 Equivalent Circuit Diagram of the Line

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

6.32.4 Application and Setting Notes

Line Data/Method of Measurement


For the correct calculation, the compounding function needs the line data. Values, which are unsuitable for
practical application have the result that the compounding calculates a too high voltage at the line end that
immediately initiates a pickup when measurands are applied. The line data (X per length unit, C1 per
length unit,C0 per length unit, Line angle, Line length) is set centrally in the power-system
data (see Power-System Data chapter).
Compounding together with series capacitors is only possible if the voltage transformer is installed on the line
side of the capacitors. In this case, the model (see Figure 6-415) calculates the voltage at the opposite end
without corruption caused by the series voltage across the series capacitor.
To prevent that the compounding result is corrupted when using common-mode reactors, install the current
transformer on the line side (contrary to the usual recommendation). If common-mode reactors exist, the
function only has to be active at the line end without reactor. If the compensation is used for both ends, the
function must be inactive.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:241:3) Threshold = 65 V


The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:241:6) Operate delay = 3 s


Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

1104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:241:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

6.32.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:241:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:241:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:241:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 65.000 V
_:241:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:241:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
_:242:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:242:2 Stage 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:242:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
_:242:4 Stage 2:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:242:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

6.32.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:V1 compounding MV O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:241:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:241:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:241:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1105
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:241:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:241:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:241:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:241:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:242:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:242:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:242:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:242:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:242:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:242:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:242:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

1106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual


Voltage

6.33.1 Overview of Functions

The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function (ANSI 59):
• Detects ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems
• Determines which phase is affected by the ground fault

6.33.2 Structure of the Function

The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function is used in protection
function groups with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function comes factory-set with
1 stage. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.

[dwu0ovps-030211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-416 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1107
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

6.33.3 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[lou01pol-070611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-417 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

Measured Value, Method of Measurement


The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted to
the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the zero-
sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.

1108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp. (standard filter):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value parameter value (true RMS):


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value.

• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical Data).

Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the threshold value with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the threshold value.

Determination of the Faulty Phase


You can use the Detection of faulty phase parameter to enable or disable the determining of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the
threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• During 1-pole dead time of the device-internal automatic reclosing function (AR)

• From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.

• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

6.33.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:361:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1109
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

Parameter Value Description


RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
fund. comp. long filter To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length of the
filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
In this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (see Technical
Data).

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Recommended setting value (_:361:107) Pickup delay = 0.00 ms


The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0.00 ms.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:361:3) Threshold = 30.000 V32


The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. It should range between 20 V and 40 V. A higher
sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.

• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher than
the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.

Example
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.

• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V


Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:361:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:361:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s


The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

32 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.

1110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:361:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase

• Default setting (_:361:109) Detection of faulty phase = no


The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the stage responds to determine which phase
is affected by the ground fault.
Parameter Value Description
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the trip-
ping stage to detect ground faults, e.g. for applications in
grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to
determine which phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppres-
sion-coil-grounded systems.

Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.

• Recommended setting value (_:361:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V33
Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V.

Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.

• Recommended setting value (_:361:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V34
Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must lie above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 75
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. =
75.000 V.

33 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
34 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1111
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

6.33.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:361:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:361:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:361:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure • yes
_:361:109 Stage 1:Detection of faulty • no no
phase • yes
_:361:8 Stage 1:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment • fund. comp. long filter comp.
• RMS value
_:361:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 30.000 V
_:361:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:361:107 Stage 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 320.00 s 0.00 s
_:361:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
_:361:101 Stage 1:V> healthy ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
gnd volt.
_:361:104 Stage 1:V< faulty ph-to-gnd 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
volt.

6.33.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:361:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:361:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:361:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:361:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:361:300 Stage 1:Faulty phase ACT O
_:361:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:361:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:361:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O

1112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.34.1 Overview of Functions

The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is
intended for special applications.

6.34.2 Structure of the Function

The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of 3
tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical struc-
ture.

[dwovpuxs-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-418 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1113
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.34.3 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[louxovpr-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-419 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

NOTE

i If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.

Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.

1114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

6.34.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:391:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.

Parameter: Measured value

• Default setting (_:391:9) Measured value = VA measured


The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)

• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC (VC measured)

• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)

• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)

• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)

• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)

• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)

• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)

• Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)


The selection depends on the corresponding application.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1115
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

NOTE

i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can use either the following methods instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version:
• Select the value V0 calculated for the Measured value parameter in the function Overvoltage
protection with any voltage.

• Use the function Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage.


If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:391:3) Threshold = 110 V


Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.
Depending on the measured value, the Threshold is set either as Measured voltage or as Phase-to-
phase quantity.

NOTE

i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:

You can find more information about the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter in chapter 6.1.6 Appli-
cation and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph).

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:391:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:391:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95


The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

1116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.34.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:391:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:391:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:391:9 Stage 1:Measured value • VA measured VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:391:8 Stage 1:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment • RMS value comp.
_:391:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:391:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:391:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
_:392:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:392:2 Stage 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:392:9 Stage 2:Measured value • VA measured VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:392:8 Stage 2:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment • RMS value comp.
_:392:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 130.000 V
_:392:4 Stage 2:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:392:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

6.34.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:391:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1117
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:391:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:391:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:391:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:391:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:391:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:391:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:392:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:392:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:392:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:392:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:392:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:392:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:392:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

1118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.35.1 Overview of Functions

The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 27):


• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage

• Handles disconnection or load shedding tasks in a system

6.35.2 Structure of the Function

The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time under-
voltage protection stages.
In the function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time undervoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time undervoltage protection
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-420). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.

[dwstru3p-110211-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-420 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1119
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.35.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

6.35.3.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[louvp3ph-140611-01_stagecontrol.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-421 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

1120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

[louvp3ph-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-422 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Method of Measurement
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
• Measurement fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1121
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).

Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay param-
eter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved
by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.

Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-422 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.

NOTE

i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.

• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

6.35.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:421:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.

1122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Parameter Value Description


fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.

Parameter: Measured value

• Recommended setting value (_:421:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. Parameter Value

Parameter Value Description


phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:421:3) Threshold = 80 V


The Threshold is set in accordance with the Measured value as either a phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground variable.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.
For the default setting, the lower limit of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the
rated voltage of the protected object.

EXAMPLE:

Rated voltage of the protected object: Vrated, obj.= 10 kV


Voltage transformer:

Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.

The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:

[foschwlw-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Parameter: Pickup mode

• Recommended setting value (_:421:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3


With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1123
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Parameter Value Description


1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:421:102) Pickup delay = no


The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
Parameter Value Description
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default (_:421:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:421:4) Dropout ratio = 1.05


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Default setting (_:421:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-
uring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.

1124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Parameter Value Description


no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Current-flow criterion

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged on either the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

Parameter Value Description


on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup drops out when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.

Parameter: Threshold I>

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A


The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit breaker is closed. Siemens recom-
mends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated transformer
current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To speed
up dropout, increase the default setting.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

6.35.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion • on
_:2311:101 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
_:421:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:421:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:421:10 Definite-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1125
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:421:9 Definite-T 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:421:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:421:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:421:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:421:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V
_:421:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
ratio
_:421:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay
Definite-T 2
_:422:1 Definite-T 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:422:2 Definite-T 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:422:10 Definite-T 2:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:422:9 Definite-T 2:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:422:8 Definite-T 2:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:422:101 Definite-T 2:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:422:102 Definite-T 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:422:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 65.000 V
_:422:4 Definite-T 2:Dropout 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
ratio
_:422:6 Definite-T 2:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay

6.35.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1
_:421:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:421:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:421:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:421:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:421:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O

1126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:421:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:421:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:421:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:421:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:421:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2
_:422:81 Definite-T 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:422:54 Definite-T 2:Inactive SPS O
_:422:52 Definite-T 2:Behavior ENS O
_:422:53 Definite-T 2:Health ENS O
_:422:55 Definite-T 2:Pickup ACD O
_:422:300 Definite-T 2:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:422:301 Definite-T 2:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:422:302 Definite-T 2:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:422:56 Definite-T 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:422:57 Definite-T 2:Operate ACT O

6.35.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

6.35.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo_UVP3ph_In_StageControl, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-423 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1127
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

[lo_UVP3ph_In, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-424 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Method of Measurement
With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

1128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.

Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).

Pickup and Operate Curve


When the input voltage falls below the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks
up and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the
sum of inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)

After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:

[fo_UVP3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]

Where
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1129
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure:

[dwUVP3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-425 Inverse-Time Characteristics for Undervoltage Protection

Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.

Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal is
going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time. Instanta-
neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay
time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.

Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-422 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.

1130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

NOTE

i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions) . The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.

• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

6.35.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.

Parameter: Measured value

• Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

Parameter Value Description


phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 80.000 V

• Default setting (_:109) Pickup factor = 0.90

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1131
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after
pickup, Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.

Parameter: Pickup mode

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3


With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Parameter Value Description
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = no


The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
Parameter Value Description
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.

Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, Charact. constant c

• Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant k = 1.00

• Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant α = 1.000

• Default setting (_:105) Charact. constant c = 0.000


With the Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c parameters,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic.

1132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

Parameter: Time dial

• Default setting (_:106) Time dial = 1.00


With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

Parameter: Reset time

• Default setting (_:108) Reset time = 0.00 s


With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage exceeds
the dropout value. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value > 0 s to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens
recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.

Parameter: Additional time delay

• Default setting (_:107) Additional time delay = 0.00 s


With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-
uring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Current-flow criterion

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged on either the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage-transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

Parameter Value Description


on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup drops out when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1133
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

6.35.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Inverse-T #
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value • phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:102 Inverse-T #:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V
_:109 Inverse-T #:Pickup factor 0.80 to 1.00 0.90
_:103 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.00 to 300.00 1.00
constant k
_:104 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.010 to 5.000 1.000
constant α
_:105 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.000 to 5.000 0.000
constant c
_:106 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:107 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:108 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

6.35.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

1134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.36.1 Overview of Functions

The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function (ANSI 27):


• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damages caused by under-
voltage
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-phase
measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This makes this
function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.

6.36.2 Structure of the Function

The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 tripping
stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-426). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.

[dwstuvu1-110211-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-426 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1135
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.36.3 Stage Description

Logic of the Stage

[louvpu1p-280912-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-427 Logic Diagram of the Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.

1136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup
delay parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker
opens. This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.

Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled via the binary input signal Threshold I>. The function
reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-427 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.

NOTE

i If the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched off, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• During a 1-pole dead time associated with the device's internal AR function. The reduced positive-
sequence variable, which occurs when the voltage transformer is located on the output side, is only
conditional upon the unbalanced power flow. A fault in the electrical power system has no effect on this
reduced positive-sequence variable.

• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not
block the tripping stage when the measuring-voltage failure detection picks up.

• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

6.36.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:511:3) Threshold = 46 V


Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application. For the default setting, the lower limit
of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the rated voltage of the protected object.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1137
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

EXAMPLE:

Rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the Vrated,obj. = 120 kV
line):
Voltage transformer:

Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.

With regard to the setting, please note that according to the definition, with symmetrical voltages the value of
the zero-sequence voltage must correspond to Vrated/√3.

[foswprim-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:

[foswseku-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Parameter: Pickup delay

• Default setting (_:511:101) Pickup delay = no


The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
Parameter Value Description
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want tripping-stage pickup to be
subject to a time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup
and, where applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the tripping stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for
undervoltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted
tripping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in tripping-stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:511:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:511:4) Dropout ratio = 1.05


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate indi-
cations, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).

1138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Default setting (_:511:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and
switched on.

• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter Value Description


yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.

Parameter: Current-flow criterion

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers can be located on the supply or the output side. These 2
possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and opening
of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the output side, the voltage does not exist.

Parameter Value Description


on If the voltage transformers are located on the output side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup drop out when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.

Parameter: Threshold I>

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A


The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit-breaker is closed. Siemens recom-
mends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated transformer
current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To speed
up dropout, increase the default setting.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

Further Application Notes


The following table provides application notes for interaction with other internal or external functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1139
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

Interaction with: Note


External automatic reclosing If the device interacts with an external automatic reclosing function or is
function capable of 1-pole tripping of protection equipment (operating in parallel),
External 1-pole tripping protec- the tripping stage of the undervoltage protection must be blocked via the
tion binary input signal >Block stage while 1-pole disconnection is being
performed. Failure to observe this results in the tripping stage picking up
and tripping.

6.36.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion • on
_:2311:101 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Stage 1
_:511:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:511:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:511:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure • yes
_:511:101 Stage 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:511:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 46.000 V
_:511:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
_:511:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
_:512:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:512:2 Stage 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:512:10 Stage 2:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure • yes
_:512:101 Stage 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:512:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
_:512:4 Stage 2:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
_:512:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

1140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

6.36.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:511:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:511:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:511:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:511:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:511:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:511:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:511:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:512:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:512:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:512:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:512:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:512:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:512:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:512:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1141
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.37.1 Overview of Functions

The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.

6.37.2 Structure of the Function

The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of 3
tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical struc-
ture.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-428).

[dwstuvux-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-428 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

6.37.3 Stage Description

Logic of a Stage

[louvpuxx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-429 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

NOTE

i If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.

Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.

• Measurement of the RMS value:


This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1143
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.

Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-
criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-429 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.

NOTE

i If the (_:2311:101) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally
via the binary input signal >Block stage.

6.37.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Method of measurement

• Recommended setting value (_:571:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
Parameter Value Description
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.

Parameter: Measured value

• Default setting (_:571:9) Measured value = VA measured


The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)

• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC VC measured)

1144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)

• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)

• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)

• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)

• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)

• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)

• Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)


The selection depends on the corresponding application.

NOTE

i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can select the value V0 calculated instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:571:3) Threshold = 80 V


Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as measured voltage or as a phase-
to-phase variable.

NOTE

i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:

You can find more information about the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter in chapter 6.1.6 Appli-
cation and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph).

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:571:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:571:4) Dropout ratio = 1.05


The recommended set value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 1.02, for example.

Parameter: Current-flow criterion

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Current-flow criterion = on

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1145
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

Parameter Value Description


on Because of the application, it makes sense that the stage is only active (that
is, not blocked) when a certain current flow is present (see note).
off Current flow monitoring does not make sense for the application.

NOTE

i Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine the
current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by the
user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.

Operation as Supervision Function


If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

6.37.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion • on
Stage 1
_:571:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:571:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:571:9 Stage 1:Measured value • VA measured VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:571:8 Stage 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:571:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
_:571:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
_:571:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
_:572:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:572:2 Stage 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes

1146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:572:9 Stage 2:Measured value • VA measured VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:572:8 Stage 2:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement • RMS value comp.
_:572:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 65.000 V
_:572:4 Stage 2:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
_:572:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s

6.37.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:571:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:571:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:571:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:571:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:571:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:571:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:571:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:572:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:572:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:572:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:572:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:572:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:572:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:572:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1147
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.38.1 Overview of Functions

The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function (ANSI 27/Q):


• Detects critical power-system situations, mainly in case of regenerative generation
• Prevents a voltage collapse in power system by disconnecting the power-generation facility from the
main power systems

• Ensures reconnection under stable power-system conditions

6.38.2 Structure of the Function

The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.

[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-430 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.38.3 Protection Stage

6.38.3.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-431 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1149
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.

Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.

Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.

• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the para-
meterized threshold value).

Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.

Blocking of the Stage


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage

• Measuring-voltage failure

Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.16.8.1 Description .

6.38.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:13921:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The Protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is
detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as there is
no assurance that the Protection stage will function correctly if the
measuring voltage fails.

1150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

no The Protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure


is detected.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:13921:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


You use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to determine whether the operate delay and
operate signal are blocked during the detection of an inrush current.

Parameter: I> release threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:13921:105) I> release threshold = 0.100 A


You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can pick up. The
default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: V< threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:13921:103) V< threshold value = 85.000 V


You use the V< threshold value parameter to define one of the 2 pickup criteria. If all 3 phase-to-phase
voltages drop below the parameterized undervoltage threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
The setting should be set below the lower value of the permissible voltage range, according to the national
transmission code. In Germany, the recommended undervoltage threshold is 85 % of the rated voltage. There-
fore Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Q> threshold value

• Default setting (_:13921:3) Q> threshold value = 5 %


You use the Q> threshold value parameter to define the second of the 2 pickup criteria. If the positive
reactive power exceeds the parameterized Q> threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
In the following example, the pickup takes place if Q exceeds 5 % of the power-supply system rated power.

EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:

[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:13921:6) Operate delay grid CB = 1.50 s

• Default setting (_:13921:108) Oper. delay generator CB = 0.50 s


You can set the Operate delay grid CB for the circuit breaker at the power-supply system connection
point, or set the Oper. delay generator CB for the circuit breaker of the facility, for example, the gener-
ator.
The time of the Operate delay grid CB should always be set longer than the time of the Oper. delay
generator CB.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1151
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Parameter: Trip interface contains

• Default setting (_:13921:101) Trip interface contains = operate (grid)


The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid).
You use the Trip interface contains parameter to define whether one or none of them will be
forwarded to the trip interface of the circuit-breaker interaction. The selected operate signal will trip the circuit
breaker that has been connected to the protection function group.
The setting depends on the specific application.

Parameter: Q sign

• Default setting (_:13921:102) Q sign = not reversed


The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the main protected object (for example, a feeder). You use the Q
sign parameter to reverse the sign and therefore the direction of the reactive-power flow Q. This reversal
may be required for specific application, where the main protected object (for example, a line towards the
main power systems) is in different direction to the power-generation facility.
Parameter Value Description
not reversed The protected object is in the same direction as the power-gener-
ation facility.
reversed The protected object is not in the same direction as the power-
generation facility.

6.38.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Prot. stage 1
_:13921:1 Prot. stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13921:2 Prot. stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:13921:10 Prot. stage 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:13921:27 Prot. stage 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:13921:101 Prot. stage 1:Trip inter- • no operate operate (grid)
face contains • operate (generator)
• operate (grid)
_:13921:102 Prot. stage 1:Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed
_:13921:3 Prot. stage 1:Q> 1.00 % to 200.00 % 5.00 %
threshold value
_:13921:103 Prot. stage 1:V< 3.000 V to 175.000 V 85.000 V
threshold value
_:13921:105 Prot. stage 1:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13921:108 Prot. stage 1:Oper. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
generator CB

1152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:13921:6 Prot. stage 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s
delay grid CB

6.38.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Prot. stage 1
_:13921:81 Prot. stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13921:54 Prot. stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13921:52 Prot. stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13921:53 Prot. stage 1:Health ENS O
_:13921:60 Prot. stage 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:13921:55 Prot. stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13921:301 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(gen.) ACT O
_:13921:302 Prot. stage 1:Operate (generator) ACT O
_:13921:56 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(grid) ACT O
_:13921:57 Prot. stage 1:Operate (grid) ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1153
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.38.4 Reclosure Stage

6.38.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-432 Logic Diagram of Reclosure Stage in Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.

Release for Reconnecting


The release for reconnecting the power-generation facility is given under the following conditions:

1154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the threshold value.

• The power frequency is within a specified range.

• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.

External Start of Reclosure Time Delay


Reclosure time delay can be started via the binary input signal >V, f trip, which can be connected to
external voltage and frequency protection trip signals.

Blocking of the Stage


The stage can be blocked via the binary input signal >Block stage.

6.38.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Configuration

• Default setting (_:13951:102) Configuration = no stage


You use the Configuration parameter to define which operate signal of specific protection functions starts
the release time delay of the Reclosure stage:
• Overfrequency protection
• Underfrequency protection

• Overvoltage protection

• Undervoltage protection

• Protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection


When the protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection is selected, only the signal
Operate (generator) can start the release time delay of this stage. The signal Operate (grid) cannot
start the release time delay.
The configuration depends on the specific application.

Parameter: I> release threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:106) I> release threshold = 0.100 A


You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can work.
The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: V> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:101) V> threshold value = 95.000 V


You use the V> threshold value parameter to set one of the 2 release criteria. The setting should be set
above the lower value of the allowed voltage range, according to the national transmission code. In Germany,
the recommended overvoltage threshold is 95 % of the rated voltage. Therefore Siemens recommends using
the default setting.

Parameter: Frequency range

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:104) f difference positive = 0.05 Hz

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:105) f difference negative = -2.50 Hz


You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f differ-
ence positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the lower
frequency range limit.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1155
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.

Parameter: Time delay

• Default setting (_:13951:108) Time delay = 0.00 s


You use the Time delay parameter to specify the minimum time delay for releasing the reconnection of the
power-generation facility after tripping by protection.
The setting depends on the specific application.

6.38.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Reclos. stage
_:13951:1 Reclos. stage:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13951:101 Reclos. stage:V> 3.000 V to 340.000 V 95.000 V
threshold value
_:13951:104 Reclos. stage:f difference 0.01 Hz to 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz
positive
_:13951:105 Reclos. stage:f difference -5.00 Hz to -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz
negative
_:13951:106 Reclos. stage:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13951:108 Reclos. stage:Time delay 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 0.00 s
_:13951:102 Reclos. stage:Configura- Setting options depend on
tion configuration

6.38.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Reclos. stage
_:13951:81 Reclos. stage:>Block stage SPS I
_:13951:501 Reclos. stage:>V, f trip SPS I
_:13951:54 Reclos. stage:Inactive SPS O
_:13951:52 Reclos. stage:Behavior ENS O
_:13951:53 Reclos. stage:Health ENS O
_:13951:301 Reclos. stage:Release closure ACT O

1156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

6.39.1 Overview of Functions

The Voltage-comparison supervision function (ANSI 60):


• Monitors the voltage-transformer circuits by comparing the voltages from 2 voltage transformers
If failures in the voltage circuits are detected, voltage-related protection functions can be blocked.

• Requires the connection of 2 voltage measuring points to the voltage interface of the function group
You can take one of the voltages as the reference voltage and then the other becomes the main voltage.
The reference voltage is used for comparison.

NOTE

i The voltage selection for the protection function in the FGs works independent of the status of the
Voltage-comparison supervision function.

6.39.2 Structure of the Function

The Voltage-comparison supervision function can be used in the following function groups:
• Generator stator

• Generator side

• Voltage-current 3-phase (VI 3ph)

• Transformer side

• Auto transformer autoside (Auto trf. autoside)


The Voltage-comparison supervision function supports only 1 stage. The stage is preconfigured at the
factory.

[dw_structure_VBP, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-433 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1157
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

6.39.3 Stage Description

6.39.3.1 Description

Function Application
The following figure shows an application example.

[dw_VBP application, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-434 Application Example

Connecting Measuring Points to a Function Group


The following figure shows the connection of the function group Generator stator with several measuring
points in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the brackets after the name.

[sc_VBStoFG, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-435 Connecting the Measuring Points to the Generator Stator Function Group

There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.

• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.

• 2 voltage measuring points must be connected to one voltage interface.

• Either the Voltage-comparison supervision function or the Voltage measuring-point selection func-
tion must be instantiated. They must not be instantiated at the same time.
About the Voltage measuring-point selection function, you can find more information in chapter
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.

1158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

Voltage Selection
2 voltage measuring points are connected to a voltage interface of a function group. In the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function, you can set one of the voltages as the reference voltage via the parameter Refer-
ence voltage, and the other voltage becomes the main voltage.
• The reference voltage is used for voltage comparison.

• The main voltage is used for all voltage-related functions in the FGs that contain the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function.
If the main voltage transformer is disconnected, the Voltage-comparison supervision function issues
the blocking signal Meas.-volt failure. The signal is transmitted to all voltage-related protection
functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison supervision.

Logic of the Stage

[lo_stage VBP, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-436 Logic Diagram of the Supervision Stage

The voltage inputs in the preceding figure are calculated with the following equations:
ΔV1 = |v(n)ref.| - |v(n)main|
ΔV2 = |v(n)main| - |v(n)ref.|
ΔV3 = |Vref. - Vmain|
ΔV4 = Max. (V1ref., V1main)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1159
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

The following table shows the description of the voltages.

Table 6-16 Voltage Description

Voltages Description
v(n)ref. Sampled value of the reference voltage
v(n)main Sampled value of the main voltage
Vref. Fundamental value of the reference voltage
Vmain Fundamental value of the main voltage
V1ref. Positive-sequence value of the reference voltage
V1main Positive-sequence value of the main voltage

Pickup
If the voltage difference between each 2 of 3 continuous sampling points is over 8 % Vrated of the plant, the
supervision stage picks up.

Voltage Supervision
For the Voltage-comparison supervision function, the following 2 connection types are allowed:
• Phase-to-ground
The phase-to-ground voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.

• Phase-to-phase
The phase-to-phase voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.

NOTE

i The 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN and 2 ph-to-ph voltages connection types are not allowed.

Voltage-Failure Indication
For different connection types, the indications are different.
• Phase-to-ground
You can get the voltage-failure information from the output signals Main-voltage failure and
Ref.-voltage failure.
• Phase-to-phase
– If one phase is influenced, the phase information is indicated.
– If more than one phase is influenced, the phase-to-phase information is indicated.
Take the main voltage transformer for example. You can determine the faulty phase with the
following table.

Determination Criteria Calculated Result


(|vAB(n)ref.| - |vAB(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated >0 >0 <0
(|vBC(n)ref.| - |vBC(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated <0 >0 >0
(|vAC(n)ref.| - |vAC(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated >0 <0 >0
Failure Information Phase A is failed. Phase B is failed. Phase C is failed.

Release Voltage
If the main positive-sequence voltage or the reference positive-sequence voltage is between 50 % Vrated and
130 % Vrated, the function is released.

1160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

Selection Invalid
An invalid measuring-point selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as Failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to Invalid.

• The indication Health is set to Alarm.

• The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

Blocking of the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up function is reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

6.39.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Reference voltage

• Default setting Reference voltage = None


With the parameter Reference voltage, you can set a measured voltage as the reference voltage.

NOTE

i You must assign a voltage measuring point to the parameter Reference voltage. The assignment influ-
ences the voltage-related protection functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison
supervision function. These voltage-related protection functions use the unassigned voltage measuring
point, which is defined as the main voltage in the Voltage-comparison supervision function. You can find
more information in section Voltage Selection, Page 1159.

EXAMPLE
Meas.point V-3ph 1 and Meas.point V-3ph 2 are connected to the Voltage-comparison supervision func-
tion. Then you have 2 more setting options, as shown in the following figure. You must select one of these
setting options for the parameter Reference voltage.

[sc_VBS_ref.voltage, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Mode

• Default setting (_:2311:1) Mode = off


With the parameter Mode, you can activate and deactivate the Voltage-comparison supervision function. If
you switch to test mode, the Voltage-comparison supervision function is marked as invalid.

6.39.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


VolCmpSup 1
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off off
• on
• test

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1161
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:101 General:Reference Setting options depend on None
voltage configuration

6.39.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
VolCmpSup 1
_:2311:81 General:>Block stage SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:307 General:Main-voltage failure ACD O
_:2311:308 General:Ref.-voltage failure ACD O
_:2311:309 General:Selection invalid SPS O

1162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator

6.40 Fault Locator

6.40.1 Overview of Functions

The Fault locator function serves for measuring the fault distance in the event of a short circuit.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Determining the fault location is based on the
loop-impedance calculation of short-circuited measuring loops.

6.40.2 Structure of the Function

The Fault locator function is used in the Line protection function group.

[dwstrufo-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-437 Structure/Embedding of the Function

The recording of phase currents and voltages is a prerequisite for calculation of fault locations. The Fault
locator function contains all necessary control parameters.
Fault-location calculation starts only if the functions Distance protection, Differential protection, Ground-
fault protection, or Overcurrent protection have picked up or triggered.

6.40.3 Function Description

Starting Conditions
The fault location is an independent function with its own measurand memory and its own filter algorithms.
To define the valid measuring loop and the most favorable time interval for the measured variable saving, only
a start command is required by the short-circuit protection. The fault location can be started by tripping of the
short-circuit protection or also at each pickup. If another protection device causes the disconnection of a
short-circuit, a fault-location calculation is then also possible for each pickup. In the event of a fault outside
the line to be protected, the fault-location indication cannot always be relevant, however, because the meas-
urands can be falsified by the center infeed for example.

Determining the Fault Location


The recorded sampled values of the short-circuit voltage and voltage are frozen shortly after tripping of the
protection. No error in the measured value has then occurred through the switch-off process, even in the case
of very fast circuit breakers. The measurands and the impedance calculations are automatically filtered and
only indicate a steady-state measured value in the determined data window.
After disconnection of the short-circuit, the measured values are analyzed and the fault location calculated
from the short-circuit loops. If no fault location can be calculated, the indication FO invalid is output.

Output of the Fault Location


The following results for the fault location are output:
• Short-circuit loop determined from the fault reactance

• Fault reactance X in Ω primary

• Fault resistance R in Ω primary

• Fault impedance in polar coordinates (amount in Ω, angle in degrees)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1163
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator

• Fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the basis of
the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line

• Fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized reac-
tance per unit length and the parameterized line length

• Selected fault loop for calculation of the fault location

NOTE

i Specification of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is relevant only for homogenous line sections. If
the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-line-
cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate calcula-
tion of the fault distance.

Measured-Value Correction for Parallel Lines


In the event of ground faults on double lines, the values determined for the impedance calculation are influ-
enced by the coupling of the ground impedances of both line systems. Without special measures, this leads to
measuring errors in the impedance-calculation result. The device is therefore equipped with parallel-line
compensation. This parallel-line compensation takes into account the ground current of the parallel line in the
line equation and consequently compensates the coupling influence, similar to determining of the distance in
distance protection. The ground current of the parallel line must be connected to the device and configured
for this. The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation is not
possible for faults located externally including those on the parallel line.
You can activate and deactivate the parallel-line compensation with the Parallel-line compensat.
parameter.

Measured-Value Correction at Load Current on Lines Fed on Both Sides


In the case of faults on lines fed on both sides and with load transport (see next figure), the fault voltage ΥF1 is
not only influenced by the source voltage Ε1, but also by the source voltage Ε2, if both voltage sources feed to
the common fault resistance RF. Without special measures, this leads to measuring errors in the impedance-
calculation result, since the current component ΙF2 cannot record at the measuring point M. For long lines and
lines subject to high loads, this measuring error can be considerable in the crucial X component of the fault
impedance (for the distance calculation).
The fault location has a load compensation, which corrects this measuring error in 1-pole short-circuits. A
correction is not possible for the R component of the fault impedance. However, the measuring error is not
critical here, as only the X component is decisive for the fault distance.
The load compensation acts in 1-phase short circuits. In doing so, both the positive-sequence and zero-
sequence system of the balanced components are analyzed for the correction. You can activate and deactivate
the load compensation via the Load compensation parameter.

1164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator

[dwfailur-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-438 Fault Currents and Voltages in a Line Fed on Both Sides

M Measuring point
S1, S2 Source voltage (EMF)
IF1, IF2 Partial fault currents
IF1 + IF2 Total fault current
VF1 Fault voltage at the measuring point
RF Common fault resistance
ZF1, ZF2 Fault impedances
ZF1gnd, Ground fault impedances
ZF2gnd
ZS1, ZS2 External impedances
ZS1gnd, Ground external impedances
ZS2gnd

6.40.4 Application and Setting Notes

The function requires the following key line data to calculate fault distance:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length

• Residual-compensation adjustment factors in the setting format KR and KX or K0

NOTE

i The visibility of the parameter Parallel-line compensat. depends on the selected setting format of
the Line.
The parameter Parallel-line compensat. is visible if you have connected a parallel line for the
device.

Parameter: Start

• Default setting (_:101) Start = with going pickup


The Start parameter is used to define the criterion for starting the fault location.
Parameter Value Description
with going pickup The calculation of a fault location occurs with a going protection pickup.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1165
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator

Parameter Value Description


with operate The calculation of a fault location is started upon an operate of the protec-
tion function.

Parameter: Parallel-line compensation

• Default setting (_:102) Parallel-line compensat. = no


If you wish to apply the parallel-line compensation for double lines, set the Parallel-line compensat.
parameter to yes.
Parameter Value Description
no The parallel-line compensation is deactivated with this setting.
yes The parallel-line compensation becomes effective with this setting.

The following conditions have to be fulfilled so that the parallel-line compensation functions:
• Connect the ground current of the parallel line in the correct polarity to an additional current input.
• Set the input used for the parallel current in the correct ratio to the phase currents for the power-system
data.

• Set the coupling impedances to the parallel system for the line data.

Parameter: Load compensation

• Default setting (_:103) Load compensation = no


The Load compensation parameter can be used to correct measuring errors for 1-pole short circuits on
lines fed on both sides. This is the case for overhead lines without grounding cable or with unfavorable
grounding conditions of the towers, if high transition resistances can occur in the event of 1-pole short
circuits.
Parameter Value Description
no The load compensation is deactivated with this setting.
yes The load compensation becomes effective with this setting.

6.40.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Fault locator
_:1 Fault locator:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Fault locator:Start • with operate with going
• with going pickup pickup
_:102 Fault locator:Parallel-line • no yes
compensat. • yes
_:103 Fault locator:Load • no no
compensation • yes

6.40.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Fault locator
_:54 Fault locator:Inactive SPS O

1166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:52 Fault locator:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Fault locator:Health ENS O
_:302 Fault locator:Fault resistance prim. MV O
_:303 Fault locator:Fault reactance prim. MV O
_:308 Fault locator:Fault resistance sec. MV O
_:309 Fault locator:Fault reactance sec. MV O
_:304 Fault locator:Fault distance MV O
_:305 Fault locator:Fault distance in % MV O
_:306 Fault locator:Fault loop ENS O
_:307 Fault locator:FLO invalid ENS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1167
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection

6.41 Overfrequency Protection

6.41.1 Overview of Functions

The Overfrequency protection function (ANSI 81O):


• Detect overfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications

• Disconnect generating units when the power frequency is critical

• Provide additional turbine protection if the speed limiter fails


Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Over-
frequency is caused by load shedding (island network), power system disconnection or disturbances of the
frequency controller. Overfrequency implies a risk of self excitation of machines which are connected to long
lines without load.
Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.

6.41.2 Structure of the Function

The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.

[dwstofqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-439 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection

6.41.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage

Logic of a Stage

[lostofqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-440 Logic Diagram of the Overfrequency-Protection Stage

Frequency-Measurement Method
Overfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.

• Filtering method (method B):


The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1169
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection

Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short pickup
time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.

Functional Measured Value


The angle-difference method provides the following measured value:
Measured Value Description
f Frequency calculated with the angle-difference method

Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range


The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Externally or internally via the logical binary input >Block stage

• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage

6.41.4 Application and Setting Notes

Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:31:3) Threshold = 50.20 Hz for frated = 50 Hz

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:31:6) Operate delay = 10 s


The Operate delay parameter is used to set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.

Parameter: Minimum voltage

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37.5 V


For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the protected object's rated voltage is recommended.

1170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection

When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.

Parameter: Dropout differential

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz


Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 50.20 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 50.10 Hz.

Application example of the overfrequency protection


Overfrequency protection can be used for monitoring the frequency range. If the frequency deviates from the
rated frequency by for example, 0.2 Hz, a fault indication is generated. The trip command is delayed to avoid
overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example, switching operations). A delay of a few seconds (for
example, 10 s) is deemed to be a good value. You can leave the Dropout differential at the default
value of 20 mHz. The following table shows a setting recommendation.
For this application, 1 stage of the overfrequency protection is used. The following table shows a setting
suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1> Warning 50.20 Hz 60.20 Hz 10.00 s
f2> Not used (OFF) - - -

NOTE

i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.

6.41.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
Stage 1
_:31:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:31:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:31:3 Stage 1:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 51.50 Hz
_:31:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 10.00 s
Stage 2
_:32:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:32:2 Stage 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:32:3 Stage 2:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 54.00 Hz

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1171
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:32:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 5.00 s

6.41.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
_:2311:301 General:f MV O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:31:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:31:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:31:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:31:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:31:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:31:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:31:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:32:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:32:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:32:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:32:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:32:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:32:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:32:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O

1172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection

6.42 Underfrequency Protection

6.42.1 Overview of Functions

The Underfrequency protection function (ANSI 81U) is used to:


• Detect underfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications

• Decouple power systems

• Load shedding to ensure power system stability and protect motors

• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)

Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Under-
frequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the power
generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or distur-
bances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.

6.42.2 Structure of the Function

The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. A maximum of 5 tripping stages
can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.

[dwstufqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-441 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1173
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection

6.42.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage

Logic of a Stage

[lostufqp-040411-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-442 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency-Protection Stage

Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.

• Filtering method (method B):


The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

1174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection

Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.

Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range


The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage

6.42.4 Application and Setting Notes

Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:61:3) Threshold = 49.80 Hz for frated = 50 Hz

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:61:6) Operate delay = 10.00 s


The Operate delay parameter is used to set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.

Parameter: Minimum voltage

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37 500 V


For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the protected object's rated voltage is recommended.
When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.

Parameter: Dropout differential

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1175
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection

Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage
will drop out at 49.9 Hz.

Application example of the underfrequency protection


Frequency protection can be used for load shedding. The UCTE has defined a 5-stage plan for the Western
European power grid. The setting values of the stages are based on that plan (see table below).

Table 6-17 Stage Plan

Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3rd load shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system

For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00 s
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00 s
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00 s

NOTE

i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.

6.42.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
Stage 1
_:61:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:61:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:61:3 Stage 1:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 49.80 Hz
_:61:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 10.00 s
Stage 2
_:62:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test

1176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:62:2 Stage 2:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:62:3 Stage 2:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 47.50 Hz
_:62:6 Stage 2:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 10.00 s
Stage 3
_:63:1 Stage 3:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:63:2 Stage 3:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:63:3 Stage 3:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 47.00 Hz
_:63:6 Stage 3:Operate delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s 10.00 s

6.42.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:61:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:61:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:61:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:61:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:61:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:61:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:61:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:62:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:62:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:62:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:62:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:62:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:62:56 Stage 2:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:62:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O
Stage 3
_:63:81 Stage 3:>Block stage SPS I
_:63:54 Stage 3:Inactive SPS O
_:63:52 Stage 3:Behavior ENS O
_:63:53 Stage 3:Health ENS O
_:63:55 Stage 3:Pickup ACD O
_:63:56 Stage 3:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:63:57 Stage 3:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1177
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

6.43.1 Overview of Functions

The function Rate of frequency change protection is used to:


• Detect a frequency change quickly
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power

• Network decoupling

• Load shedding

6.43.2 Structure of the Function

The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate simul-
taneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.

[dwdfdt01-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-443 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.43.3 General Functions (Undervoltage Test, df/dt Calculation)

6.43.3.1 Description

Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.

1178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

[lodfdtgf-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-444 Logic Diagram of General Functionality

Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.41.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.

Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.

Functional Measured Value

Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change

6.43.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Minimum voltage

• Recommended setting value (_:13171:101) Minimum voltage = 37.500 V


For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended.
The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage. When determining the setting
value, keep in mind that the absolute value of the sound positive-sequence voltage is equal to the absolute
value of the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.

Parameter: Measuring window

• Default setting (_:13171:137) Measuring window = 5 periods


You can use the Measuring window parameter to optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function. For information regarding pickup time and measuring accuracy, refer to the technical data.
The default setting provides maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1179
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.

6.43.4 Stage Description

6.43.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lodfdtst-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-445 Logic Diagram of Rate of Frequency Change Protection

(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.

Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.

Blocking of the Stage


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage

• Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage

1180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

6.43.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:13231:3) Threshold = 3.000 Hz/s


The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power-system conditions. In most cases, a
network analysis will be necessary. A sudden disconnection of loads leads to a surplus of active power. The
frequency rises and causes a positive frequency change. On the other hand, a failure of generators leads to a
deficit of active power. The frequency drops and results in a negative frequency change.
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation. They apply for the change rate at the begin-
ning of a frequency change (approximate 1 s).

Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant

Typical data for H:


For hydro generators (salient-pole machines) H = 1.5 s to 6 s
For turbine-driven generators (non-salient pole rotors) H = 2 s to 10 s
For industrial turbine-driven generators H = 3 s to 4 s

EXAMPLE

frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:13231:6) Operate delay = 1.00 s


You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example,
switching operations). If the protection function is supposed to respond quickly, set the Operate delay
parameter to 0 s.
For monitoring small changes (< 1 Hz/s), a small time delay is useful to avoid overfunctioning.

Parameter: Dropout differential

• Recommended setting value (_:13231:4) Dropout differential = 0.10 Hz/s


You can use the Dropout differential parameter to define the dropout value. The recommended value
is 0.10 Hz/s.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1181
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

NOTE

i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func-
tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking
input >Block stage and connect it via CFC.

6.43.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:13171:101 General:Minimum 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
voltage
_:13171:137 General:Measuring 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
window
df/dt falling1
_:13231:1 df/dt falling1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13231:2 df/dt falling1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:13231:3 df/dt falling1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13231:4 df/dt falling1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13231:6 df/dt falling1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay
df/dt rising1
_:13201:1 df/dt rising1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13201:2 df/dt rising1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:13201:3 df/dt rising1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13201:4 df/dt rising1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13201:6 df/dt rising1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

6.43.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:13171:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
_:13171:301 General:df/dt MV O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
df/dt falling1
_:13231:81 df/dt falling1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13231:54 df/dt falling1:Inactive SPS O

1182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:13231:52 df/dt falling1:Behavior ENS O
_:13231:53 df/dt falling1:Health ENS O
_:13231:55 df/dt falling1:Pickup ACD O
_:13231:56 df/dt falling1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13231:57 df/dt falling1:Operate ACT O
df/dt rising1
_:13201:81 df/dt rising1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13201:54 df/dt rising1:Inactive SPS O
_:13201:52 df/dt rising1:Behavior ENS O
_:13201:53 df/dt rising1:Health ENS O
_:13201:55 df/dt rising1:Pickup ACD O
_:13201:56 df/dt rising1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13201:57 df/dt rising1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1183
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

6.44.1 Overview of Functions

The Underfrequency load shedding function:


• Detects underfrequencies in the electrical power systems
• Switches off the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that consume active power to stabilize the frequency

• Maintains operations for the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that generate active power

6.44.2 Structure of the Function

The Underfrequency load shedding function can be used in the Voltage/Current 3-phase function group
and in the Line function group.
The Underfrequency load shedding function comes factory-set with 8 stages. A maximum of 12 stages can
be operated simultaneously within the function. These stages are identical in structure.

[dw_load shedding_Structure, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-446 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

6.44.3 General Functionality

6.44.3.1 Description

Logic

[lo_UFLS_General functionality, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-447 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality

(1) n means the number of the protection stage.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1185
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

Measurands
The general functionality requires the following input measurands:
• Positive-sequence voltage V1
• Positive-sequence current I1

• Positive-sequence system apparent power S1

• Positive-sequence system active power P1

• Frequency
S1 and P1 are both calculated from V1 and I1. The frequency is calculated from V1.
The frequency and the frequency change rate df/dt are calculated via the angle difference algorithm. You can
find more information in chapter 6.41.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.

Undervoltage Blocking
The frequency of the Underfrequency load shedding function is calculated from the positive-sequence
voltage V1. In order to obtain a reliable and accurate frequency calculation result, the magnitude of V1 is
monitored. If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all the protection stages are
blocked and the V1< block indication is issued.

Power Criterion
If a feeder delivers active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar delivers active power to
the high-voltage busbar, it is meaningless to switch off this feeder or the medium-voltage busbar during the
load-shedding process. The power criterion determines the power-flow direction and includes this information
as a blocking criterion into the load-shedding decision of all protection stages.
The Positive power direction parameter defines the positive active-power flow direction of the func-
tion in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality. You can find more informa-
tion in chapter 6.44.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
In the following figures, if the power flow is located in the release area which is marked in gray, the protection
stages are released. In the remaining area, the protection stages are blocked.
The release area is configured via the following parameters:
• The parameter Phi (power criterion) defines the area which limits the range of the power angle.
• The parameter Min. current (power crit.) defines the minimum positive-sequence current that
must be present to calculate the active power in a reliable way. In the following figures, the minimum
current is indicated as the circle whose center is the origin of the coordinates.
The power criterion is checked only when the following 2 conditions are fulfilled:
• The positive-sequence current I1 exceeds the threshold Min. current (power crit.), that is, I1 is
out of the circle in the following figures.

• The undervoltage blocking is not fulfilled, that is, the magnitude of V1 is not smaller than the Minimum
voltage.
The dashed lines in the figures show the dropout characteristics. The dropout differential of the power angle is
1°.
The symbol φ in the following figures represents the setting value of the parameter Phi (power crite-
rion).

1186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

[dw_load shedding_Power crit.<0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-448 Power-Criterion Checking at Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0

[dw_load shedding_Power crit.>0, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-449 Power-Criterion Checking at Phi (power criterion) > 0

The power criterion contains the check of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion.
You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter.
The power criterion is carried out only when the Power criterion parameter is set to yes.
The working method of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion differ at Phi (power crite-
rion) ≤ 0 and Phi (power criterion) > 0.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1187
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

For Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0, the power criterion is checked as follows:


• When the positive-sequence current I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), the current
criterion is not fulfilled and the I1< blocking indication is issued. Therefore, all the protection stages
are blocked and the power-angle criterion is not considered.

• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
For Phi (power criterion) > 0, the power criterion is checked as follows:
• When I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), all the protection stages are released and
the power-angle criterion is not considered.

• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.

df/dt Blocking
If the change rate of df/dt is too high, the Underfrequency load shedding function may not be applicable
anymore.
The df/dt blocking comprises the df/dt-rising blocking and the df/dt-falling blocking.
The df/dt-rising criterion and the df/dt-falling criterion can be individually switched on or off. These 2 df/dt
criteria are operative only when the magnitude of the positive-sequence voltage V1 is greater than the
Minimum voltage:
• The df/dt-rising blocking takes place when the df/dt-rising value exceeds the setting value of the param-
eter df/dt-rising blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-rising blocking.

• The df/dt-falling blocking takes place when the df/dt-falling value exceeds the setting value of the param-
eter df/dt-falling blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-falling
blocking.

Activating/Deactivating Protection Stages


The mechanism of exclusive stage activation is described in section Exclusive Stage Activation, Page 1192.

Functional Measured Value

Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change

6.44.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Minimum voltage

• Default setting (_:18121:101) Minimum voltage = 0.700 p.u.


If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all protection stages are blocked.
The Minimum voltage parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated voltage of the connected
voltage measuring point. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Positive power direction

• Default setting (_:18121:115) Positive power direction = inv. to CT neu.pnt sett.


With the Positive power direction parameter, you define the positive active-power flow direction of
the function in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality.

1188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

The following figure shows 2 application scenarios of protection devices with the Underfrequency load shed-
ding function.

[dw_UFLS_positive power direction, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-450 Application Scenarios

Dotted arrow: Standard forward direction of the protection functionality


Solid arrow: Positive active-power flow direction

The standard forward direction of the protection functionality is from the busbar to the protected object which
is the transformer for device 1 or the feeder for device 2. The standard forward direction of the protection
functionality is configured via the (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the
measuring point I-3ph (see chapter 6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase
(I-3ph)). For the load-shedding function, the positive active-power flow direction can differ from the standard
forward direction of the protection functionality, such as for device 1. To adapt the function to this condition,
the Positive power direction parameter is used. With the Positive power direction parameter,
you can set the positive active-power flow direction either to the same as or to the inverse of the standard
forward direction.
• For device 1, set the Positive power direction parameter to inv. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is opposite to the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the medium-voltage busbar when the positive power-flow direction is from the high-voltage
busbar to the medium-voltage busbar.

• For device 2, set the Positive power direction parameter to acc. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is the same as the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the feeder when the positive power-flow direction is from the medium-voltage busbar to the
feeder.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1189
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

Parameter: Power criterion, Phi (power criterion), Min. current (power crit.)

• Default setting (_:18121:103) Power criterion = yes

• Default setting (_:18121:106) Phi (power criterion) = -5°

• Default setting (_:18121:104) Min. current (power crit.) = 0.050 p.u.


The power criterion evaluates the power-flow direction as a blocking criterion for the protection stages.
• With the Power criterion parameter, you configure whether to apply the power criterion or not.
If a feeder can deliver active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar can deliver
active power to the high-voltage busbar, Siemens recommends using the power criterion to exclude the
feeder or the medium-voltage busbar from being shed under this condition. If a feeder or the medium-
voltage busbar is always consuming active power, the power criterion is not required.

• With the Phi (power criterion) parameter, you decide whether the protection stage is blocked or
released in the case of low active-power flow. If the active-power flow is low, the determined active
power-flow direction is not always reliable.
For Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0, the protection stage is released for a clear forward active power-
flow direction. If the active power-flow direction is not reliable, the protection stages are blocked. For
Phi (power criterion) > 0, the behavior is the contrary.
The Phi (power criterion) parameter can be set depending on your philosophy.

• With the Min. current (power crit.) parameter, you set the minimum positive-sequence current
threshold to achieve a reliable active-power criterion result. The Min. current (power crit.)
parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated current of the connected current measuring
point. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: df/dt-rising blk. criterion, df/dt-rising blk. threshold, df/dt-falling blk.


criterion, df/dt-falling blk. threshold

• Default setting (_:18121:107) df/dt-rising blk. criterion = no

• Default setting (_:18121:108) df/dt-rising blk. threshold = 1.0 Hz/s

• Default setting (_:18121:109) df/dt-falling blk. criterion = no

• Default setting (_:18121:110) df/dt-falling blk. threshold = 3.0 Hz/s


If the change rate of df/dt is too high, the Underfrequency load shedding function may not be applicable
anymore.
With the parameters df/dt-rising blk. criterion and df/dt-falling blk. criterion, you
determine whether to check the df/dt-rising blocking and the df/dt-falling blocking.
With the parameters df/dt-rising blk. threshold and df/dt-falling blk. threshold, you set
the threshold rates of df/dt-rising and df/dt-falling.

Parameter: df/dt measuring window

• Default setting (_:18121:111) df/dt measuring window = 5 periods


With the df/dt measuring window parameter, you optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function.
The default setting provides the maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.
For a non-sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the df/dt measuring window parameter to
a value which is smaller than 5 periods.

Parameter: df/dt dropout differential

• Default setting (_:18121:112) df/dt dropout differential = 0.1 Hz/s


With the df/dt dropout differential parameter, you define the dropout threshold of the parameters
df/dt-rising blk. threshold and df/dt-falling blk. threshold.

1190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

The default setting is a reasonable value. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

6.44.4 Stage Description

6.44.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[lo_load shedding_stage, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-451 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency Load Shedding Stage

Pickup and Operate


If the following 3 conditions are all fulfilled, a Pickup indication is issued:
• The frequency value drops below the Threshold.

• The Blocking input from the function block General is inactive.

• The preceding 2 conditions are fulfilled during the configured number of frequency measurement cycles
(cycle time = 10 ms). You can set the number with the parameter f< stabilization counter.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1191
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

If the Pickup signal is maintained during the Operate delay time, an Operate indication is issued.

Exclusive Stage Activation


A load-shedding schema defines in which order feeders (power consumers) are disconnected. To not discrimi-
nate power consumers, this order is changed regularly. The mechanism of exclusive stage activation supports
this order change efficiently.
Even though multiple protection stages are instantiated and their Mode parameters are set to on, you can only
activate one stage at a time via the exclusive stage activation in an Underfrequency load shedding function.
The exclusive stage activation comprises the following input signals:
• The SPS signal >Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.

• The SPC signal Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.
This SPC signal allows the exclusive stage activation from a station controller.

• The SPS signal >Activate all stages which is offered in the function block General.
The protection stage which receives the newest SPS signal >Exclusive activation or SPC signal Exclu-
sive activation remains active and all other stages are deactivated. If 2 or more protection stages simul-
taneously receive the SPS signals >Exclusive activation and/or the SPC signals Exclusive activa-
tion, only the protection stage with the largest stage number is activated.
If the SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated, the exclusive stage activation is reset, that is, all
protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on become active again.
After a normal device restart (reset), the statuses of the protection stages which were influenced by the SPS
signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal Exclusive activation are still maintained.
After an initial startup, the exclusive stage activation is reset.

EXAMPLE
Configured protection stages: Protection stages 1 to 8
Protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on: Protection stages 1 to 8

The following cases occur in sequence:


• Case 1:
Scenario: In the protection stage 1, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 1 remains active and stages 2 to 8 are deactivated.

• Case 2:
Scenario: In the protection stage 2, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 2 is activated, the stage 1 is deactivated, and stages 3 to 8 remain deacti-
vated.

• Case 3:
Scenario: The SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated.
Result: The protection stages 1 to 8 are activated.

• Case 4:
Scenario: In the protection stages 2 to 4, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated simultaneously.
Result: The protection stage 4 is activated and the other stages are deactivated.

• Case 5:
Scenario: A normal device restart (reset) occurs.
Result: After the device restart, the protection stage 4 remains activated and the other stages remain
deactivated.

1192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

• Via the Inactive input from the function block General

Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range


The sampling frequency tracking makes a wide frequency-operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency-operating range, the pickup is maintained. The Pickup signal is reset when a
blocking condition becomes active.

6.44.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:18151:3) Threshold = 49.00 Hz for frated = 50 Hz

With the Threshold parameter, you define the underfrequency pickup value of the stage. The specific value
depends on the application and the total number of the stages applied in parallel.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:18151:6) Operate delay = 0.10 s


Set the Operate delay parameter for the specific application.

Parameter: Dropout differential

• Default setting(_:18151:5) Dropout differential = 20 mHz


With the Dropout differential parameter, you define the dropout threshold. For example, if you set the
Threshold to 49.00 Hz and the dropout differential to 20 mHz, the stage drops out at 49.02 Hz.
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the setting value can remain at the default value of
20 mHz.

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:18151:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


With the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log.

Parameter: f< stabilization counter

• Default setting(_:18121:113) f< stabilization counter = 6


You can configure the f< stabilization counter parameter in the function block General.
With the f< stabilization counter parameter, you set the number of measurement cycles in which the
measured frequency value must be lower than the frequency threshold to meet the pickup condition. With
this setting, you can optimize the pickup-condition reliability versus the pickup time.
The measuring cycle time is 10 ms. With the default setting of 6, the pickup time is the sum of the inherent
frequency measuring time (approx. 10 ms to 30 ms) plus the 6 times measuring repetition of 60 ms, which is
70 ms to 90 ms in total.
In order to avoid a wrong pickup in case of a phase jump, Siemens recommends setting the value of the f<
stabilization counter parameter not below 5.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1193
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

6.44.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:18121:101 General:Minimum 0.300 p.u. to 0.900 p.u. 0.700 p.u.
voltage
_:18121:103 General:Power criterion • no yes
• yes
_:18121:104 General:Min. current 0.020 p.u. to 0.200 p.u. 0.050 p.u.
(power crit.)
_:18121:115 General:Positive power • inv. to CT neu.pnt sett. inv. to CT
direction • acc. to CT neu.pnt sett. neu.pnt sett.
_:18121:106 General:Phi (power crite- -30° to 30° -5°
rion)
_:18121:107 General:df/dt-rising blk. • no no
criterion • yes
_:18121:108 General:df/dt-rising blk. 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s 1.0 Hz/s
threshold
_:18121:109 General:df/dt-falling blk. • no no
criterion • yes
_:18121:110 General:df/dt-falling blk. 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s 3.0 Hz/s
threshold
_:18121:111 General:df/dt measuring 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
window
_:18121:112 General:df/dt dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:18121:113 General:f< stabilization 1 to 20 6
counter
Stage 1
_:18151:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:18151:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:18151:3 Stage 1:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 49.00 Hz
_:18151:5 Stage 1:Dropout differ- 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
ential
_:18151:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

6.44.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:18121:501 General:>Activate all stages SPS I
_:18121:300 General:V1< block SPS O
_:18121:301 General:Power crit. blocking SPS O
_:18121:302 General:I1< blocking SPS O
_:18121:303 General:df/dt-rising blocking SPS O
_:18121:304 General:df/dt-falling blocking SPS O
_:18121:305 General:df/dt MV O

1194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:18151:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:18151:500 Stage 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:18151:502 Stage 1:>Exclusive activation SPS I
_:18151:347 Stage 1:Exclusive activation SPC C
_:18151:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:18151:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:18151:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:18151:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:18151:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:18151:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1195
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

6.45.1 Overview of Functions

The Phase-sequence reversal function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and supervi-
sion functions, independently of the phase sequence of the phases in a system or system section.
The phase sequence is set via parameters. You can select between the phase sequences ABC or ACB.
Binary inputs also provide the option of switching over the phase sequence with respect to the parameter
setting. For example, in pumped-storage hydropower plants with motor or motor/generator operation you
temporarily change the direction of rotation by changing over the phase sequence.
The phase sequence has an effect on calculation of the positive-sequence system and negative-sequence
system values and on calculation of phase-to-phase values. A phase-rotation reversal therefore has an effect
on all protection and supervision functions that use these values.
You can change the phase sequence in 2 ways via binary inputs.
• Change over the phase sequence for the entire device.
In doing so, all 3-phase measuring points are switched over. All analog inputs are therefore affected (for
example current and voltage inputs simultaneously).

• Change over the phase sequence per measuring point.


In doing so, only the activated measuring points are switched over. The other measuring points remain
unaffected.

6.45.2 Structure of the Function

The Phase-sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power-system data. You will find the signals in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings. There you will find the parameter for setting
the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influence a change in the phase sequence.

[dwphrein-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-452 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.45.3 Function Description

General
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter. You will find the
signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Power-system data → General.
There are 3 methods to change the phase sequence for different operational requirements.
• Changing the phase sequence via the setting parameter.
– Note: With version V7.50 and higher, this setting parameter is a reset parameter. If the parameter is
changed and transmitted to the device, the device performs a startup. The parameter change affects
all 3-phase measuring points. If the device is in operation and if measurands are present at the
measuring points, perform a parameter change carefully since this affects all measuring points.

1196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

• With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal, you change over the phase sequence of all meas-
uring points.

• With the binary signal >Invert Phases, you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available for each measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3‑phase measuring point.
The 2 binary-signal mechanisms are explained separately below.

Switchover of the Phase Sequence of All Measuring Points


The direction of rotation of the currents and voltages depends on the phase sequence. The following drawing
shows the vector definitions for the 2 phase sequences.

[dwphrdrf-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-453 Vector with Different Phase Sequences

The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is initi-
ated via the binary input >Phs-rotation reversal. This switches over the phase sequence simultane-
ously at all 3-phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC, activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the phase
sequence ACB.

NOTE

i The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase meas-
uring points are below 5 % of the rated variables, this is recognized as machine standstill.

A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred posi-
tion.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1197
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

[dwphrpsys1-151013, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-454 Phase Sequence Switchover

Changing Over the Phase Sequence per Measuring Point


A switchover of the phase sequence per measuring point can also be necessary for operational reasons. This
switchover enables proper behavior of the protection equipment, for example at the transition from generator
operation to motor operation (pump operation).
The following example shows an application in a pumped storage plant. The switchover of the phase
sequence (change in rotational direction) realizes the transition there from generator operation to motor oper-
ation. Which phases and measuring points are changed over depends on the conditions in the system.

[dwphrapp-240211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-455 Application Example for Phase-Rotation Reversal in a Pump Station

The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3) with
the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.

1198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert Phases.
The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring point.
In accordance with Figure 6-455 the phase sequence is set to ABC. A is swapped with C in motor operation.
The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the measuring points of current measured values 2
and current measured values 3. As a result, the phase assignment for the differential protection IED2 and the
impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence current is calculated
correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending
at the selected measuring points. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change
in the phase sequence is only implemented if the measurands at the measuring points that are to be switched
are under 5 % of the rated variables. If the currents of the measuring points of current measured values 2 and
current measured values 3 of the example fall below 5 % of their rated variables, the switchover is released
and the set phases are switched with active binary input.

[lophrgph-190517-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-456 Measured Values for Changed-Over Phases

6.45.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Phase sequence

• Default setting (_:101) Phase sequence = ABC

ABC Phase sequence A, B, C


ACB Phase sequence A, B, C

Parameter: Inverted phases

• Default setting (_:106) Inverted phases = none

none No phase exchange


AC Phase A changed over with phase C
BC Phase B changed over with phase C

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1199
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

AB Phase C changed over with phase B

NOTE

i If you change the setting value of the parameter Inverted phases, consider the following:
The device can take the new setting value only if the binary input signal >Invert Phases is not active.

Input signal: >Phs-rotation reversal


The >Phs-rotation reversal binary input is used to switch between the ABC phase sequence and the
ACB phase sequence. The switchover direction depends on the setting of the Phase sequence parameter. In
doing so, the phase sequence of all 3-phase measuring points is changed. Changing of the phase-rotation
reversal via the binary input is only possible if no measurands (< 5 % of the rated variables) are present at all 3-
phase measuring points.

Input signal: >Invert Phases


The binary input >Invert Phases is used to activate the setting of the parameter Inverted phases. In
doing so, the phase sequence of the selected measuring point is changed. Changing of the phase sequence
via the binary input is only possible if no measurand (< 5 % of the rated variables) is present at the respective
3-phase measuring point.

6.45.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB
General
_:101 VT 3-phase:Rated primary 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
_:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:103 VT 3-phase:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:104 VT 3-phase:VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN 3 ph-to-gnd
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
_:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted phases • none none
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:107 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID

1200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover

6.45.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:322 General:f sys MV O
_:323 General:f track MV O
General
_:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1201
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault

6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault

6.46.1 Overview of Functions

The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto
a fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).

6.46.2 Structure of the Function

The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups . The
function is preconfigured with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.

[dwstrsto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-457 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault

6.46.3 Stage Description

Logic of the Stage

[logisotf-170312-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-458 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault

Connection of the Stage


The stage is intended to initiate instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault. To do this, the stage must
be connected to one or more pickups from protection functions or protection stages, for example, to Distance
protection pickup or the pickup of an overcurrent-protection stage. That is, the stage of the Instantaneous
tripping at switch onto fault function does not have its own measuring function but requires the pickup of
another protection function or protection stage to pick up.
The stage is active only if switching is pending or executed (for this, see chapter 6.6 Distance Protection with
Classic Method or 6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases).

NOTE

i If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush-current detection function, the Instan-
taneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up. In this case there is no fault recording
either.
Despite this, if a fault recording is necessary, you can activate it with the parameter (_:114) Start
flt.rec of the Inrush-current detection function (see chapter 6.53 Inrush-Current Detection).

6.46.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Configuration

• Default setting (_:5941:102) Configuration = no stage

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1203
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault

The Configuration parameter is used to define the pickup of a protection function or protection stage that
the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function uses to respond.
Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected:
• Distance protection
• Overcurrent protection (phase and ground)

• Directional time-overcurrent protection (phase and ground)

• Ground-fault protection for grounded systems


A specific protection stage is generally used. This can be one of the protection stages provided for the protec-
tion application, which itself trips with a delay. An additional protection stage with settings optimized for this
use case, for example, increased threshold value and blocking of self-tripping, can also be used.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:5941:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s


When switching onto a fault, the tripping should usually be instantaneous. The tripping delay is therefore set
to 0.

6.46.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 1
_:5941:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5941:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:5941:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5941:102 Stage 1:Configuration Setting options depend on config-
uration

6.46.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:5941:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5941:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:5941:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:5941:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:5941:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:5941:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O

1204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

6.47.1 Overview of Functions

The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables) against
thermal overloads

• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables

6.47.2 Structure of the Function

The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function is used in protection function groups with
current measurement.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
advanced stage.
The non-preconfigured function block Filter can optionally be applied to gain the RMS value used by the
Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced stage.

[dw_TOLP_with Filter stage, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-459 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.47.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain

6.47.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter

• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies by the device (due to the anti-
aliasing filter)
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1205
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

Logic

[lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-460 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter

The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the respective parameters h(0), h(1),
h(2), h(3) and h(4).

NOTE

i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.

The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes . Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.

Functional Measured Values

Values Description Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
Iph:A Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current A
Iph:B Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current B
Iph:C Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current C

You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Thermal over-
load protection, 3-phase - advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the function values are shown as ---.

6.47.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Enable filter

• Default setting (_:1) Enable filter = no.

1206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
Parameter Value Description
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.

Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4)

• Default setting (_:2) h(0) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:3) h(1) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:4) h(2) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:5) h(3) = 0.000

• Default setting (_:6) h(4) = 1.000


With the default value of the coefficients, the filter has no effect and no gain is applied.
If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor,
the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response (gain factors) for the reactor. To
determine the coefficients h(0) to h(4) for the FIR filter, you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary PC
tool which is available in the SIPROTEC download area. The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool.
They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter. The amplitude attenuation of higher
frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated
by the filter.
To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device, set the following coefficients in the
filter.
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170

6.47.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Filter
_:1 Filter:Enable filter • no no
• yes
_:2 Filter:h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:3 Filter:h(1) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:4 Filter:h(2) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:5 Filter:h(3) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:6 Filter:h(4) -100.000 to 100.000 1.000

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1207
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

6.47.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Filter
_:301 Filter:Iph:A MV O
_:302 Filter:Iph:B MV O
_:303 Filter:Iph:C MV O

6.47.4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

6.47.4.1 Description

Logic

[lo_TOLP_withFilterstage, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-461 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Stage

1208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

[lo_Stage Control, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-462 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

RMS-Value Selection
The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement:
• Normal RMS value
• Gained RMS value from the function block Filter
The gained RMS value is automatically used if the function block Filter is configured and the filter has been
enabled.

NOTE

i When the function block Filter is applied, only one current measuring point I-3ph is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.

Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents based on a thermal single-
body model according to the thermal differential equation with

[fo_diffgl-170914, 2, en_US]

With the following standardization:

[fo_normie-170914, 3, en_US]

Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permissible


phase current k Irated, obj
ΘAmb Standardized ambient temperature, where ϑAmbdescribes the coupled ambient temperature.
The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can be the measured ambient temperature or the
ambient temperature preset using the Default temperature parameter.
Δ ϑrated obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
τ th Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1209
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers
to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated, obj)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object

At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
• In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.

• The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control

• In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.

• In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold Θwarn ( Threshold thermal warn. ), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and corre-
sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-463 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.

[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-463 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents ( K-factor = 1.1)

The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the thermal
threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping temper-
ature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling , the Cooling time
constant is activated.

1210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you can get the operate curve as following:

[foauslos-211010-01.tif, 1, en_US]

t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object

Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration. The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40°C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit increases.
The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated ).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog unit. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is faulty, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the RTD
unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function changes to
Warning. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under
the Default temperature parameter, depending on which value is the highest.

Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal
replica must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding l threshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Freezing of the thermal memory

• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.

Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing
rated current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1211
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate , the
trip command is canceled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).

Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure


The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the setting parameter
Storage of thermal replica . You can save the thermal state for a time of 500 min. Once the supply
voltage returns, the thermal replica continues to function with the saved thermal state.
If the thermal replica is not saved, it will be reset to 0 upon failure of the auxiliary voltage.

Resetting the Thermal Map


You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica . The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.

Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start , tripping is
blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel .

Blocking the Function


Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The tripping function can be blocked externally or inter-
nally by the binary input signal >Block stage .
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.

Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and canceled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.

Functional Measured Values

Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


(_:601:305) Time until trip Expected time until tripping s s s
(_:601:304) Time until close Time until close release s s s
(_:601:306) Overload phase A Thermal measured values of % % Tripping temperature
(_:601:307) Overload phase B the phases
(_:601:308) Overload phase C
(_:601:309) Overload Thermal measured value of the % % Tripping temperature
maximum overload protection
(_:601:310) Equival. current Current measured value which A A Rated operating current of
phs A serves as basis for the overload the primary values
(_:601:311) Equival. current measured value
phs B
(_:601:312) Equival. current
phs C
(_:601:313) Equival. current Maximum current measured A A Rated operating current of
max. value which serves as basis for the primary values
the overload measured value

1212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

6.47.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold current warning

• Default setting (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.000 A at Irated = 1 A

Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for the K-factor .

Parameter: Threshold thermal warn.

• Default setting (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %


The default setting can be left at a K-factor , of 1.1, as the thermal memory results for 83 % at continu-
ously flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to ( K-factor )2 and
x % corresponds to 12.

[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]

At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.

Parameter: Dropout threshold operate

• Default setting (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %


The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to drop out pickup and tripping when the value
drops below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended.
You can select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling or longer blocking of
closing.
Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.

Parameter: Emerg. start T overtravel

• Default setting (_:112) Emerg. start T overtravel = 300 s


This functionality is not required for protection of lines and cables. If the logical binary indication is not routed,
the Emerg. start T overtravel will be ineffective. The Emerg. start T overtravel presetting
can therefore be retained.

Parameter: K-factor

• Default setting (_:106) K-factor = 1.10


The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous load.
The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, cable) is the basic current for overload sensing.
You can determine the K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:

[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]

NOTE

i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1213
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.

EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj= 369 A

Parameter: Thermal time constant

• Default setting (_:110) Thermal time constant = 900 s


The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the tripping characteristics of the stage. If no
data on the Thermal time constant is available, you can determine this from the short-time current-
rating capacity of the cable, for example, from the 1-s current. The 1-s current is the maximum current permis-
sible for 1 s application time. The 1-s current can be found in the cable specifications. Calculate the Thermal
time constant according to the following formula:

[fo_perm_1.0-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]

If the short-term current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-term current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:

[fo_perm_0.5-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]

EXAMPLE for a Cable


For a cable
Permissible continuous current: Imax, perm = 406 A
Maximum short-circuit current for 1 s: I1s = 21.4 kA
Therefore, for the Thermal time constant, it follows

[fokonsta-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]

with 46.29 min = 2777 s

Parameter: Cooling time constant

• Default setting (_:111) Cooling time constant = 3600 s


The Cooling time constant parameter is used to define the dropout behavior of the stage. Cables and
overhead lines have the same time constant for both heating and cooling. Therefore, set the same value for
the Cooling time constant as for the parameter Thermal time constant.

1214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

Parameter: Imax thermal

• Default setting (_:107) Imax thermal = 2.5 A at Irated = 1 A

The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.

Parameter: Imin cooling

• Default setting (_:108) Imin cooling = 0.500 A


If only the thermal time constant (parameter Thermal time constant ) must provide protection, set the
current parameter Imin cooling to 0 A.

Parameter: Temperature rise at Irated

• Default setting (_:109) Temperature rise at Irated = 70 K


As a value, set the overtemperature that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the rated
current and at an ambient temperature of 40°C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object. You can
find the temperature value in the technical data of the equipment or measure it. If you use a temperature
sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or the coolant tempera-
ture from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40°C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (ϑmax) and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:

[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]

EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120°C (80 K + 40°C) can be derived when using a temperature sensor for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155°C (105 K + 40°C) derives.
From these values, the K factor can be derived:

[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]

If you select a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.

NOTE

i For electrical machines, the limits can vary depending on the type of coolant.
Consult the machine manufacturer to agree on a setting value for the overtemperature.

Parameter: Storage of thermal replica

• Default setting (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no


If a continuous auxiliary voltage for the bay units is ensured, the bay default setting can be retained.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1215
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

Parameter: Behav. at I> Imax therm.

• Default setting (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting


The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
Parameter Value Description
freeze therm. rep. If input currents exceed the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal
replica will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This param-
eter value is provided to enable compatibility with older products!
current limiting The input currents are limited to the value set in the Imax thermal
parameter. If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the
limited current value is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current
threshold is approx. 2 to 2.5 Irated, obj.

Parameter: Temperature sensor

• Default setting (_:44) Temperature sensor = none


With the Temperature sensor parameter, you determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor is used to measure the ambient temperature of the protected object and to feed it to
the device via an RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) or via an IO111 module. The Thermal
overload protection, 3-phase - advanced function receives the measured temperature value via the func-
tions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit Serial, or Temperature module IO111 from the function group Analog
units.

Parameter: Default temperature

• Default setting (_:118) Default temperature = 40°C


The Default temperature is set as ambient temperature under the following conditions:
• No temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is connected.

• The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Minimal temperature

• Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20°C


If the measured ambient temperature drops below the set value, the set value is assumed as the ambient
temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this temperature
drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal temperature is also
used.

6.47.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes

1216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:112 49 Th.overl. #:Emerg. 0 s to 15000 s 300 s
start T overtravel
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:111 49 Th.overl. #:Cooling 10 s to 60000 s 3600 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
thermal 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:108 49 Th.overl. #:Imin 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
cooling 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated
_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of • no no
thermal replica • yes
_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at • current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm. • freeze therm. rep.
_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55°C to 55°C 40°C
temperature
_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55°C to 40°C -20°C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration

6.47.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:502 49 Th.overl. #:>Emergency start SPS I
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1217
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase A MV O
_:307 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase B MV O
_:308 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase C MV O
_:309 49 Th.overl. #:Overload maximum MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs A MV O
_:311 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs B MV O
_:312 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs C MV O
_:313 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current max. MV O

1218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

6.48.1 Overview of Functions

The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (reactors or resistors in the neutral point of a transformer) from thermal overload

6.48.2 Structure of the Function

The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function is used in 1-phase protection function groups with
current measurement.
The Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function is steplessly preconfigured.

[dwtolp1p-270613-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-464 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1219
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

6.48.3 Function Description

Logic

[lotolp1p-250713-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-465 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection Function

Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the current flowing in the protected object (for
example, reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point) on the basis of a thermal single-body model
according to the thermal differential equation with

[fodiffgl-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]

1220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

With the following standardization:

[fonormie-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permissible


current k Irated,obj
ΘV Standardized ambient temperature, where ϑAmb describes the coupled ambient tempera-
ture. The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can be the measured ambient temperature or
the ambient temperature preset using the Default temperature parameter.
Δ ϑrated,obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
τth Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object
k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers
to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated,obj)
Irated,obj Rated current of the protected object

At the same time, Irated,obj is the rated current of the protected object.
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold Θwarn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and corre-
sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-466 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.

[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-466 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1221
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent.
An indication of 100 % means that the thermal threshold has been reached.
The analysis of the RMS value of the current over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic compo-
nents. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.

Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you get the following operate curve:

[foauslos-211010-01.tif, 1, en_US]

t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated,obj Rated current of the protected object

Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40 °C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit
increases. The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated).
The measured ambient temperature is recorded by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog units. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is disrupted, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function changes to Warning. In this
case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under the Default
temperature parameter, whichever value is the highest.

Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica must be influenced
for overcurrents (exceeding llimit). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Freezing of the thermal memory

• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.

1222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated
current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.

Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the trip
command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see technical data).

Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure


The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the Storage of
thermal replica parameter. You can save the thermal state for a down time of 500 min. If the supply
voltage returns, the thermal replica continues to function with the saved thermal state.
If the thermal replica is not saved, it will be reset to 0 upon failure of the auxiliary voltage.

Resetting the Thermal Map


You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica. The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.

Blocking the Function


Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The function can be blocked externally or internally by the
binary input signal >Block stage.
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.

Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.

Functional Measured Values

Measured Value Description


(_:310) Equival. Besides the thermal measured values in percent, the equivalent current is
current also issued as a thermal current-measured value (A or kA). The current
equivalent is the primary current, which corresponds to the thermal meas-
ured value in percent, assuming steady-state conditions.
(_:304) Time until The Time until close is the expected time until it is possible for the
close protected object for reclosure. The calculation of this value is based on the
assumption of constant currents. The thermal replica has then fallen below
the setting value of the dropout threshold.
(_:305) Time until trip The Time until trip is the expected time until tripping (100 % value
exceeded) occurs. The calculation of this value is based on the assumption
of constant currents.
(_:306) Overload The value Overload indicates the current temperature of the protected
object in percent. Tripping occurs if 100 % is exceeded.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1223
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

6.48.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold current warning

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A for lrated = 1 A

Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for K-factor.

Parameter: Threshold thermal warn.

• Recommended setting value (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %


The default setting can be left at a K-factor of 1.1, because the thermal memory sets itself to 83 % at
continuously flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to (K-factor)2
and x % corresponds to 12.

[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]

At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is 91% filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95%.

Parameter: Dropout threshold operate

• Recommended setting value (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %


The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to cancel pickup and tripping when the value drops
below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended. You can
select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling, or longer blocking of switching
on.
The calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.

Parameter: K-factor

• Recommended setting value (_:106) K-factor = 1.1


The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous load.
The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, resistance) is the basic current for overload
sensing.
You can determine K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:

[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]

NOTE

i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!

Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications.

Parameter: Thermal time constant

• Default value (_:110) Thermal time constant = 900 s (15 min)


The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the operate curve of the stage. If no time
constant is given, you can derive it from other values.

1224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

EXAMPLE

Protection of a current-limiting resistance


Rated current of the resistance: Irated = 100 A
Values for the overload capability:
• 1.1 Irated permanent (k-Factor = 1.1; k = 1.1)
• 1.5 Irated for 20 s for charge by cold

The following time constant results from these assumed values:

[fo_time_constance_11082015, 1, en_US]

For Thermal time constant, set 26 s.


The following time-dependent characteristic results from the data. In case of a current increase to 1.5 I rated,
the tripping occurs in 20 s.

[dwtime-dependent-110815-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Imax thermal

• Recommended setting value (_:107) Imax thermal= 2.5 A for lrated = 1 A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1225
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected current threshold of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.

Parameter: Temperature rise at Irated

• Default setting (_:109) Temperature rise at Irated = 70 K

NOTE

i For an application as a 1-phase overload protection, the ambient temperature measured via the tempera-
ture sensor is not taken into account. Therefore, the setting has no influence. You can keep the default
setting. If you take into account the temperature, note the following descriptions.

Set the overtemperature as the value that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the
rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40°C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object.
You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value. If
you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or
the coolant temperature from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40 °C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (ϑmax) and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:

[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]

EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a measuring element for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155 °C (105 K + 40 °C) derives.
From these values, the magnitude of the K factor can also be derived.

[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]

If selecting a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.

Parameter: Storage of thermal replica

• Recommended setting value (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no


If a continuous auxiliary voltage of the bay units is ensured, the default setting can be retained.

Parameter: Behav. at I> Imax therm.

• Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further temper-
ature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.

1226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

Parameter Value Description


current limiting The input current is limited to the value set in the Imax thermal parameter. If
the measured current exceeds the set current value, the limited current value is
supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current threshold is approx. 2 to
2.5 Irated, obj.
freeze therm. rep. If the input current exceeds the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value is
provided to enable compatibility with older products!

Parameter: Temperature sensor

• Default setting (_:44) Temperature sensor = none


Use the Temperature sensor parameter to determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor is used to measure the ambient temperature of the protected object and to feed it to
the device via an RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) or via an IO111 module. The function
Thermal overload protection receives the measured temperature value via the function RTD unit Ether., RTD
unit Serial, or Temperature module IO111 from the function group Analog units.

Parameter: Default temperature

• Recommended setting value (_:118) Default temperature = 40°C


Under the following conditions, the Default temperature will be set as ambient temperature:
• A temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is not connected.

• The temperature measurement is interrupted and the measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Minimal temperature

• Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20°C


If the measured ambient temperature drops below the preset value, the set value will be assumed as the
ambient temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this
temperature drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal tempera-
ture can also be used.

6.48.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1227
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
thermal 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated
_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of • no no
thermal replica • yes
_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at • current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm. • freeze therm. rep.
_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55°C to 55°C 40°C
temperature
_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55°C to 40°C -20°C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration

6.48.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current MV O

1228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

6.49 Temperature Supervision

6.49.1 Overview of Functions

The Temperature supervision function checks the thermal state of:


• Motors
• Generators

• Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD =
Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. or
RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group.

6.49.2 Structure of the Function

The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 tempera-
ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function.
Each temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.

[dwstrtmp-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-467 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1229
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

6.49.3 Function Description

Logic

[lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-468 Logic Diagram for a Temperature Supervision Location

The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value
in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units
function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.

NOTE

i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.

6.49.4 Application and Setting Notes

If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit .

1230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

Parameter: Sensor location

• Default setting (_:11101:46) Sensor location = Other


You inform the device of the sensor installation location using the Sensor location parameter. Oil,
Ambient, Turn, Bearing and Other are available for selection. The selection is not evaluated in the device,
it only serves an informational purpose in the medium in which the temperature measurement takes place.

Parameter: Sensor number

• Default setting(_:11101:44) sensor number = no function block selected


With the sensor number parameter, you assign a specific sensor whose temperature is to be monitored to
the Location function block. You perform the assignment in DIGSI using a list box that contains all connected
RTD units and their sensors.

Parameter: Threshold stage 1

• Default setting (_:11101:40) Threshold stage 1 = 100°C


With the Threshold stage 1 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 1st tripping stage.

Parameter: Operate delay of stage 1

• Default setting (_:11101:41) Operate delay of stage 1 = 5 s


With the Operate delay of stage 1 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 1st
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to ∞ the operate indication is blocked.

Parameter: Threshold stage 2

• Default setting (_:11101:42) Threshold stage 2 = 120°C


With the Threshold stage 2 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 2nd tripping stage.

Parameter: Operate delay of stage 2

• Default setting (_:11101:43) Operate delay of stage 2 = 0 s


With the Operate delay of stage 2 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 2nd
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to ∞ the operate indication is blocked.

Temperature Unit
Temperature Unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt
the DIGSI user default settings accordingly (see 5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor).

6.49.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Point 1
_:11101:46 Point 1:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1231
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:11101:1 Point 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11101:40 Point 1:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11101:41 Point 1:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11101:42 Point 1:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11101:43 Point 1:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11101:44 Point 1:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 2
_:11102:46 Point 2:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11102:1 Point 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11102:40 Point 2:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11102:41 Point 2:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11102:42 Point 2:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11102:43 Point 2:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11102:44 Point 2:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 3
_:11103:46 Point 3:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11103:1 Point 3:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11103:40 Point 3:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11103:41 Point 3:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11103:42 Point 3:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11103:43 Point 3:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11103:44 Point 3:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 4
_:11104:46 Point 4:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

1232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:11104:1 Point 4:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11104:40 Point 4:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11104:41 Point 4:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11104:42 Point 4:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11104:43 Point 4:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11104:44 Point 4:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 5
_:11105:46 Point 5:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11105:1 Point 5:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11105:40 Point 5:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11105:41 Point 5:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11105:42 Point 5:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11105:43 Point 5:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11105:44 Point 5:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 6
_:11106:46 Point 6:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11106:1 Point 6:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11106:40 Point 6:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11106:41 Point 6:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11106:42 Point 6:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11106:43 Point 6:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11106:44 Point 6:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 7
_:11107:46 Point 7:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1233
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:11107:1 Point 7:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11107:40 Point 7:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11107:41 Point 7:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11107:42 Point 7:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11107:43 Point 7:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11107:44 Point 7:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 8
_:11108:46 Point 8:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11108:1 Point 8:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11108:40 Point 8:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11108:41 Point 8:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11108:42 Point 8:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11108:43 Point 8:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11108:44 Point 8:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 9
_:11109:46 Point 9:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11109:1 Point 9:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11109:40 Point 9:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11109:41 Point 9:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11109:42 Point 9:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11109:43 Point 9:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11109:44 Point 9:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 10
_:11110:46 Point 10:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

1234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:11110:1 Point 10:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11110:40 Point 10:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11110:41 Point 10:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11110:42 Point 10:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11110:43 Point 10:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11110:44 Point 10:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 11
_:11111:46 Point 11:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11111:1 Point 11:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11111:40 Point 11:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11111:41 Point 11:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11111:42 Point 11:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11111:43 Point 11:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11111:44 Point 11:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 12
_:11112:46 Point 12:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11112:1 Point 12:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11112:40 Point 12:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11112:41 Point 12:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
_:11112:42 Point 12:Threshold stage 2 -50°C to 250°C 120°C
_:11112:43 Point 12:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 0s
stage 2
_:11112:44 Point 12:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1235
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

6.49.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Point 1
_:11101:81 Point 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11101:54 Point 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11101:52 Point 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11101:53 Point 1:Health ENS O
_:11101:61 Point 1:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11101:62 Point 1:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11101:63 Point 1:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11101:64 Point 1:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 2
_:11102:81 Point 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:11102:54 Point 2:Inactive SPS O
_:11102:52 Point 2:Behavior ENS O
_:11102:53 Point 2:Health ENS O
_:11102:61 Point 2:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11102:62 Point 2:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11102:63 Point 2:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11102:64 Point 2:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 3
_:11103:81 Point 3:>Block stage SPS I
_:11103:54 Point 3:Inactive SPS O
_:11103:52 Point 3:Behavior ENS O
_:11103:53 Point 3:Health ENS O
_:11103:61 Point 3:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11103:62 Point 3:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11103:63 Point 3:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11103:64 Point 3:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 4
_:11104:81 Point 4:>Block stage SPS I
_:11104:54 Point 4:Inactive SPS O
_:11104:52 Point 4:Behavior ENS O
_:11104:53 Point 4:Health ENS O
_:11104:61 Point 4:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11104:62 Point 4:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11104:63 Point 4:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11104:64 Point 4:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 5
_:11105:81 Point 5:>Block stage SPS I
_:11105:54 Point 5:Inactive SPS O
_:11105:52 Point 5:Behavior ENS O
_:11105:53 Point 5:Health ENS O
_:11105:61 Point 5:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11105:62 Point 5:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11105:63 Point 5:Pickup stage 2 SPS O

1236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:11105:64 Point 5:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 6
_:11106:81 Point 6:>Block stage SPS I
_:11106:54 Point 6:Inactive SPS O
_:11106:52 Point 6:Behavior ENS O
_:11106:53 Point 6:Health ENS O
_:11106:61 Point 6:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11106:62 Point 6:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11106:63 Point 6:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11106:64 Point 6:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 7
_:11107:81 Point 7:>Block stage SPS I
_:11107:54 Point 7:Inactive SPS O
_:11107:52 Point 7:Behavior ENS O
_:11107:53 Point 7:Health ENS O
_:11107:61 Point 7:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11107:62 Point 7:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11107:63 Point 7:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11107:64 Point 7:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 8
_:11108:81 Point 8:>Block stage SPS I
_:11108:54 Point 8:Inactive SPS O
_:11108:52 Point 8:Behavior ENS O
_:11108:53 Point 8:Health ENS O
_:11108:61 Point 8:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11108:62 Point 8:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11108:63 Point 8:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11108:64 Point 8:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 9
_:11109:81 Point 9:>Block stage SPS I
_:11109:54 Point 9:Inactive SPS O
_:11109:52 Point 9:Behavior ENS O
_:11109:53 Point 9:Health ENS O
_:11109:61 Point 9:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11109:62 Point 9:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11109:63 Point 9:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11109:64 Point 9:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 10
_:11110:81 Point 10:>Block stage SPS I
_:11110:54 Point 10:Inactive SPS O
_:11110:52 Point 10:Behavior ENS O
_:11110:53 Point 10:Health ENS O
_:11110:61 Point 10:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11110:62 Point 10:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11110:63 Point 10:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11110:64 Point 10:Operate stage 2 SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1237
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Point 11
_:11111:81 Point 11:>Block stage SPS I
_:11111:54 Point 11:Inactive SPS O
_:11111:52 Point 11:Behavior ENS O
_:11111:53 Point 11:Health ENS O
_:11111:61 Point 11:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11111:62 Point 11:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11111:63 Point 11:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11111:64 Point 11:Operate stage 2 SPS O
Point 12
_:11112:81 Point 12:>Block stage SPS I
_:11112:54 Point 12:Inactive SPS O
_:11112:52 Point 12:Behavior ENS O
_:11112:53 Point 12:Health ENS O
_:11112:61 Point 12:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11112:62 Point 12:Operate stage 1 SPS O
_:11112:63 Point 12:Pickup stage 2 SPS O
_:11112:64 Point 12:Operate stage 2 SPS O

1238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

6.50.1 Overview of Function

The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.

6.50.2 Structure of the Function

The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.

[dwstrbfp-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-469 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Figure 6-470 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system checks continuously whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1239
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[losvsbfp-090712-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-470 Function Logic Overview

6.50.3 Function Description

The function is started via the device-internal protection functions and/or externally (via a binary input or
interface, for example, GOOSE). The start can be done 1-pole or 3-pole. Figure 6-471 and Figure 6-472 show
the functionality.

Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage that has to control the local circuit breaker starts the circuit-
breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In case of phase-
selective tripping, the start will also be phase-selective. In addition, circuit-breaker failure protection is started
with 3-pole tripping of automatic reclosing (AREC). In the default setting, the starting signal Internal
start (see Figure 6-471) is held when the pickup signal is cleared or the protection function has tripped. The
Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only drop out if the circuit breaker is detected to be
open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If necessary, the
Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the pickup signal is cleared or the protection
function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
Using routing, you can specify whether individual protection stages or protection functions are to be used as
the starting source or whether starting happens only externally.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device, Project tree in DIGSI 5 (excerpt)).

1240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[lointsta-160611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-471 Internal CBFP Start

External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.

[loanwext-180713-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-472 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function

In 1-channel mode, start for 1-pole tripping is initiated only with the binary input signals >Start pole A,
>Start pole B or >Start pole C. In the case of 3-pole tripping, start is initiated only with the input
signal >Start 3-pole (see Figure 6-473).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1241
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

In 2-channel mode, to initiate the start, the binary input signal >Release 1-pole must also be activated, in
case of the 1-pole start, and >Release 3-pole in case of the 3-pole start. In the default setting, the internal
starting signals External start phsx and External start 3-pole drop out immediately when the
binary input signals are cleared (see Figure 6-473). If necessary, the internal starting signal can be held. In this
case the start remains active when the binary input signals are cleared.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set monitoring time of the appro-
priate signal without the function picking up, a fault in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corresponding
signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output, and the
Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal drops out.
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.

• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the super-
vision blocking the function.
If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of a settable monitoring time for the
starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes to
the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-473).

1242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[loexlsvs-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-473 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic

1-Pole or Multi-Pole Start


Based on the starting signals, it is determined whether the start in question is 1-pole or multi-pole (see
Figure 6-474). This information is required for starting the various time delays.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1243
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[loveranw-100311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-474 Processing the Starting Signals of CBFP

Current-Flow Criterion
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker position. A circuit-breaker
pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase currents
exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the associated
threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the threshold
value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the sensitive
threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of a criterion.
In the case of ground faults, the sensitive threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase currents as
well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value.
The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for
the switchover.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, you block the plausibility check of the zero-
sequence current. In this way a pickup can only be achieved by way of this current. The Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. The Threshold I2 dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold
value to be exceeded.
When there is Direct release of the I2 criterion, plausibility is checked via the phase currents with
1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release. This is to prevent a false pickup of the current-flow criterion in the
open pole after a 1-pole OFF.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.

1244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[lostromk-300610-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 6-475 Current-Flow Criterion

Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion


Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the
circuit-breaker position.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1245
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

The following settings are possible:


• In this function, circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not used for determining the CB position.
• The position is determined (pole-selective) via the double-point indications Position phsx (from the
Circuit breaker function block).

• The double-point indication 3-pole position (from the Circuit breaker function block) is used to
determine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed.
If the double-point indications are not routed, an error message is issued. The Health signal changes to the
state Warning. You must do the routing with the closed contact or the closed and open contact. If this is not
the case, an error message is output, and the Health signal changes to the Warning state.
A detected static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion is not used (the signals Aux.co.crit. CB Clsd phsx are inactive).

[lohikols-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-476 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion

Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker or the individual circuit-breaker pole is closed.
The current-flow criterion and the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because it is the most reliable criterion for determining whether the CB or CB pole is closed. This
means that the CB or CB pole is considered to be closed if it is closed according to the current-flow criterion
but, at the same time, open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker or a circuit-breaker pole is detected as closed and a start occurs in this pole, the function
picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the time delay is running, the system checks contin-
uously whether the circuit breaker or a CB pole has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit
breaker is checked on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion
because it is preferred. If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has
been detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion becomes effective.

1246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the CB or CB
pole to be open (dropout with auxiliary-contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-471 and Figure 6-473). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur with a cleared starting signal (that is, with a cleared pickup signal or operate of the protection function),
holding of the start signal must be disabled.

[loanregu-170611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-477 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function

Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. You can set various T1 times for a 1-pole and multipole start. In case of a 1-pole start, trip-
ping can be repeated in a 1-pole or 3-pole way depending on the setting. If the local CB was not yet tripped,
for example, in the event of an external start of the circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of the
circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1 elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1. You can set various T2 times for a 1-pole and multipole start.
If the assigned 1-pole period is initially started by a 1-pole start and a multiphase short circuit and multiphase
start occur subsequently, the corresponding multiphase period is also started so that the both periods run in
parallel. Tripping is determined by the period that expires first.
When there is a 1-pole start with 3-pole trip repeat, the 3-pole T2 time is started.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed, and the backup
tripping signal Trip T2 is generated. This tripping is always 3-pole. If the device is equipped with a protec-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1247
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

tion interface, a transfer-trip signal can be sent to the opposite end if necessary (see chapter Protection inter-
face 3.6.3.1 Overview of Functions).
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the set
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named superordinate parameter that is set in the Device settings.

1248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[lo-bbp-verzau-1ph.vsd, 5, en_US]

Figure 6-478 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function

6.50.4 Application and Setting Notes

Figure 6-479 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1249
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

[loschema-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-479 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Pole-Selective Start, Pole-Selective Tripping
Repetition, and 3-Pole Tripping (T2)

Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function)


Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit-
breaker interaction entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device).
By default, the function can be started by any tripping of the internal protection functions that control the
local circuit breaker. Depending on the specific application, it can be necessary to exclude certain device-
internal protection functions from starting the CBFP. For instance, busbar disconnection following a local
circuit-breaker failure may be undesirable in the case of load-shedding applications or ground faults in
isolated/resonant-grounded systems.
Where a start exclusively from external sources is required, all internal protection functions must be routed so
that they are excluded as starting source.

Parameter: Start via binary input

• Default setting (_:107) Start via binary input = no

Parameter Value Description


no If no external start is intended, the parameter is set to no.

1250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Parameter Value Description


2 channel 2-channel start is used if there is a risk that the circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion causes a tripping due to a faulty activation of the start binary input.
This is the case in the following situations:
a) The CBFP pickup value (threshold value) is set to less than the load
current.
b) There may be operating conditions under which the current flow is
higher than the pickup value.
To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-channel
start.
1 channel The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit is available
for starting the CBFP.

Input Signals: >Start, >Release


The start and release input signals have a filtering time of 10 ms as default setting. If a transient control signal
to the binary inputs is to be expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and due to
environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended. This delays the start of the CBFP function.
Input Signals Description
>Start pole A The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection
>Start pole B device. When the external protection trips phase-segregated, the CBFP can
>Start pole C be started phase-segregated using the input signals >Start phsx (see
Figure 6-479).
>Start 3-pole
>Release 1-pole The release input signal is normally linked with the pickup of the external
>Release 3-pole protection device (see Figure 6-479). Another common configuration is the
parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs (start and
release).

Parameter: Monitoring time release signal

• Default setting (_:108) Sup.time for release signl = 0.06 s


The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal. If the pickup or tripping of
the external protection is used as release signal, the default setting can be kept. If it is ensured that the release
signal is always present before the starting signal, the time can be set to 0.

Parameter: Holding internal signal

• Recommended setting value (_:105) Holding int. start signal = yes

Parameter Value Description


yes In the case of an internal start, the starting signal is latched. The dropout of
the CBFP depends exclusively on the determination of the CB position.
This setting must be selected if it is not ensured that all 3 poles of the CB
have opened when the pickup signal of the protection function has a falling
edge.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
no Latching of the starting signal can be deactivated if it is ensured by the
application that the CB has reliably opened when the starting signal has a
falling edge. If the CBFP is explicitly required to drop out when the starting
signal has a falling edge, latching of the starting signal can also be deacti-
vated.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1251
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

EXAMPLE

Holding internal starting signal (setting value: yes)


In the presence of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.

Parameter: Holding external signal

• Recommended setting value (_:106) Holding ext. start signal = no

Parameter Value Description


no The CBFP drops out when the external starting signal has a falling edge. This
setting prevents the CBFP from generating a tripping signal when an
unwanted pulse is received at the binary input and the current flow is high
enough.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
yes You can hold the starting signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is
open when the external starting signal has a falling edge.

EXAMPLE

Holding external starting signal (setting value: Yes)


The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.

NOTE

i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start!

Parameters: Threshold phase current/Threshold sensitive

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold sensitive = approx. 0.50 Isc,min

In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can dropout
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.

Input Signal: >Threshold sensitive


In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power system (examples:
opposite end of line open, switching onto a ground fault), the parameter Threshold sensitive can be
applied dynamically to all currents – including phase currents – in the presence of ground faults. For this
purpose, the binary signal >Threshold sensitive must be activated. This can be done via a device-
internal function for ground-fault detection (if provided in the device), for example, using Overvoltage
protection with zero-sequence voltage. In this case, the pickup of the V0> function must be linked with the
binary signal. Alternatively, the signal from a separate sensitive ground fault detection device can be injected
using a binary input.

1252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Parameter: Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion Allowed

• Recommended setting value (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit. allowed = no

Parameter Value Description


no If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed,
Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite-
rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the
current flow is the most reliable criterion.
w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.' The auxiliary contacts are permitted as a further criterion in applications
w. 'CB pos. closed Lx' (see the following examples) where the current is no reliable criterion for
determining the circuit-breaker position.
When the protection trips phase-segregated, it makes sense to link also the
auxiliary contacts to the device phase-segregated to ensure a pole-selective
detection of the position To do this, select w. 'CB pos. closed Lx'.
If pole-selective detection is not possible, set to w. 'CB pos. closed
3p.'. Observe that the CB is deemed open as soon as the 1st pole has
opened.

Parameter: 3I0 criterion

• Recommended setting value (_:120) 3I0 criterion = Plausibility check

Parameter Value Description


Plausibility check The ground current is only used to check the plausibility of the phase
currents. The value set under the parameter Threshold sensitive is
used as the threshold for the ground current.
Direct release The current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the ground current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The value
set under the parameter Threshold 3I0 dir. release is used in this
case as the threshold for the ground current.

NOTE

i The setting value Direct release can cause inadvertent tripping of the circuit-breaker failure protection
when 1-pole tripping of the circuit breaker is set.

If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
even with this setting, you can select 3I0 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold 3I0 dir.
release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.

Parameter: I2 criterion

• Recommended setting value (_:121) I2 criterion = Plausibility check

Parameter Value Description


Plausibility check The negative-sequence current is only used to check the plausibility of the
phase currents. The value set under the parameter Threshold sensi-
tive is used as the threshold for the negative-sequence current.
Direct release If a phase current exceeds 1/3 of the Threshold I2 dir. release, the
current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the negative-sequence current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The
threshold for the negative-sequence current uses the value set in the
Threshold I2 dir. release parameter in this case.

If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1253
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

anced errors even with this setting, you can select I2 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold
3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.

Parameter: Threshold 3I0 dir. release


Recommended setting value (_:122) Threshold 3I0 dir. release = approx. 0.5 Iscmin
This parameter is effective only if the 3I0 criterion parameter is set to Direct release. Siemens
recommends setting the threshold to half the minimum short-circuit current (Iscmin) to ensure that the discon-
nection of the error is promptly detected and the function can drop out quickly.

Parameter: Threshold I2 dir. release


Recommended setting value (_:123) Threshold I2 dir. release = approx. 0.5 I2min
This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterion parameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom-
mends setting the parameter to half the permissible negative-sequence current (I2min) to achieve a quick fault
clarification in the event of an undesired negative-sequence system component.

Parameters: Monit. time for BI ">Start"/Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release"

• Default setting (_:124) Monit. time for BI ">Start" = 15 s

• Default setting (_:125) Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release" = 15 s


The parameters are used to set the monitoring time of the binary inputs >Start/>Release. If the Circuit-
breaker failure protection does not pick up during this monitoring time, a failure in the binary input circuit is
assumed. Siemens recommends retaining the default setting of 15 s.

EXAMPLES

Applications which require you to permit the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion:

• Tripping of the high and low voltage side CB on the transformer: If only one of the two CBs trips, there is
no more current flow.

• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions

• Injection of the tripping signal from Buchholz protection

Parameter: Dropout

• Recommended setting value (_:104) Dropout = with effective criterion


The parameter Dropout is available if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted (see param-
eter CB aux.cont. crit. allowed).
Parameter Value Description
with effective crite- Siemens recommends keeping the default setting, because it prefers the
rion current as a reliable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for
dropout of the CBFP function.
w. aux.c. and Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators (see the
curr.crit. preceding examples) in which the current flow is such that the current is no
longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB.

Parameter: Retrip

• Default setting (_:110) Retrip after T1 = no

Parameter Value Description


no Where no redundant CB control is provided, a repetition of the trip signal to
the local CB is not required.

1254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Parameter Value Description


start T2 after T1 Where a redundant CB control (2nd trip coil with 2 trip circuits) is provided,
a repetition of the trip signal to the local CB makes sense.
Siemens recommends the setting start T2 after T1 because it
provides a clear chronological separation of the processes for trip repeat
and backup tripping. Remember here that the overall fault-clearance time in
case of a failure of the local CB is the sum of T1 and T2.
parallel start T2, T1 Alternatively to setting start T2 after T1, parallel start T2,
T1 can be started.

Parameter: Retrip 1-/3-pole

• Default setting (_:109) Retrip 1-/3-pole = 3-pole


In the event of 1-pole errors, you may select 1-pole or 3-pole for the trip repetition.

Parameter: Vers. T1 Trip.rep 1-pole vers. T1 Trip.rep 3-pole

• Default setting (_:113) Delay T1 for 1-pole retrip = 0.05 s

• Default setting (_:111) Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip = 0.25 s


The parameters are visible only when the repetition of tripping is set.
For most applications, the time delays for the 1-pole and the 3-pole (multipole) start are set equally.
The setting depends on the user's philosophy.
The following settings make sense:
• If the minimum fault-clarification time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.

• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.

• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.

EXAMPLE

Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:

Time of binary device output 5 ms


(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T1) 130 ms

EXAMPLE

Different T1 times, depending on whether the start was 1-pole or 3-pole:


The protection tripping can be 1-pole. 1-pole tripping results in a 1-pole AREC. The trip repeat prompted by the
CBFP should be 3-pole on principle.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1255
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Under these circumstances, the T1 time can be set short (for example 50 ms) in a 3-pole start. The T1 time for
1-pole start, however, must be set to the full clearance time (for example, 130 ms) because the two healthy
phases are to be tripped only in case of an authentic circuit-breaker failure.

Parameter: Delay T2 1-pole, Delay T2 3-pole

• Default setting (_:114) Delay T2 for 1-pole trip = 0.13 s

• Default setting (_:112) Delay T2 for 3-pole trip = 0.13 s


This setting has to ensure that after opening of the local CB the function drops out reliably and that backup
tripping is avoided under all circumstances. The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1.
If T2 is started afterT1, there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2.

EXAMPLE

Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:

Time of binary device output 5 ms


(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T2) 130 ms

If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.

EXAMPLE

Simultaneous start of T2 and T1

Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms


opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms

Various times can be set for a 1-pole and 3-pole (multipole) start. In the presence of 1-pole short circuits –
that do not jeopardize network stability – it can make sense to allow more time to the local CB (such as twice
the clearance time: 2 x 130 ms = 260 ms), expecting that the CB will open yet. This way, tripping of the
surrounding CBs can be avoided.

Parameter: Minimum tripping time

• Default setting (_:115) Minimum operate time = -


The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function.

1256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device
contacts will burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reaches its final position open-
circuited reliably after a control operation.

Input Signal: >CB failure


The input signal >CB defect has a default filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the CB opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient pick up of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the CB
design.

Output Signal: Trip Retrip T1


If only 1 control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal does not necessarily have to
be routed because the signal also controls the circuit-breaker trip logic.
If a 2nd Control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary
output.

Output Signal: Trip T2


For operational handling of the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2) must be
routed to a binary output; andif necessary, to an interface (intertripping to opposite end).

6.50.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


50BF CB fail.#
_:1 50BF CB fail.#:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:105 50BF CB fail.#:Holding • no yes
int. start signal • yes
_:107 50BF CB fail.#:Start via • no no
binary input • 2 channel
• 1 channel
_:106 50BF CB fail.#:Holding • no no
ext. start signal • yes
_:108 50BF CB fail.#:Sup.time 0.06 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
for release signl
_:103 50BF CB fail.#:CB • no no
aux.cont. crit. allowed • w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.'
• w. 'CB pos. closed Lx'
_:104 50BF CB fail.#:Dropout • with effective criterion with effective
• w. aux.c. and curr.crit. criterion

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1257
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:110 50BF CB fail.#:Retrip • no no
after T1 • start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
_:109 50BF CB fail.#:Retrip • 3-pole 3-pole
1-/3-pole • 1-pole
_:102 50BF CB fail.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
phase current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 2.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:101 50BF CB fail.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
sensitive 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 1.250 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:111 50BF CB fail.#:Delay T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.250 s
for 3-pole retrip
_:113 50BF CB fail.#:Delay T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.050 s
for 1-pole retrip
_:112 50BF CB fail.#:Delay T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s 0.130 s
for 3-pole trip
_:114 50BF CB fail.#:Delay T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s 0.130 s
for 1-pole trip
_:115 50BF CB fail.#:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:120 50BF CB fail.#:3I0 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion • Plausibility check check
_:121 50BF CB fail.#:I2 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion • Plausibility check check
_:122 50BF CB fail.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
3I0 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:123 50BF CB fail.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
I2 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:124 50BF CB fail.#:Monit. 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
time for BI ">Start"
_:125 50BF CB fail.#:Monit.tm. 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
f.BI ">Release"

6.50.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
50BF CB fail.#
_:501 50BF CB fail.#:>Start 3-pole SPS I
_:502 50BF CB fail.#:>Start pole A SPS I
_:503 50BF CB fail.#:>Start pole B SPS I
_:504 50BF CB fail.#:>Start pole C SPS I

1258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:506 50BF CB fail.#:>Release 3-pole SPS I
_:505 50BF CB fail.#:>Release 1-pole SPS I
_:82 50BF CB fail.#:>Block function SPS I
_:507 50BF CB fail.#:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF CB fail.#:>Threshold sensitive SPS I
_:54 50BF CB fail.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF CB fail.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF CB fail.#:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF CB fail.#:Pickup ACD O
_:309 50BF CB fail.#:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:310 50BF CB fail.#:Trip T2 ACT O
_:306 50BF CB fail.#:BI start routing miss. SPS O
_:308 50BF CB fail.#:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. SPS O
_:300 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start 3pole' SPS O
_:301 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start poleA' SPS O
_:302 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start poleB' SPS O
_:303 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start poleC' SPS O
_:305 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'release 3p.' SPS O
_:304 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'release 1p.' SPS O
_:311 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI release 3p SPS O
_:312 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI rel.pole A SPS O
_:313 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI rel.pole B SPS O
_:314 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI rel.pole C SPS O
_:315 50BF CB fail.#:Immediate Operate SPS O
_:316 50BF CB fail.#:CB failure pole ACD O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1259
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

6.51.1 Overview of Function

The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function:


• Monitors the circuit breaker against restriking, for example, caused by an overvoltage over the circuit-
breaker poles after switching off a capacitor bank

• Generates a backup operate signal in case of a circuit-breaker restriking

6.51.2 Structure of the Function

The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group. A maximum
of 2 functions can operate simultaneously within the function group.

[lo_strrestrike_2014-03-05.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-480 Structure/Embedding of the Function

The function logic is grouped into the parts shown in Figure 6-481. In the following chapter, these logic parts
are described in detail.

[lo_respro-210113-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-481 Logic Overview of the Function

6.51.3 Function Description

Plausibility Release
The function Circuit-breaker restrike protection issues a trip command to a superordinated circuit breaker,
usually the infeed circuit breaker of a busbar. Overfunction of this protection can cause extreme problems for
the whole application.
The logic of plausibility release strongly reduces the risk of a false start of the function by adding an extra
release criteria for a function start.
Each criterion can be switched on or off individually.

1260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

The plausibility-release logic checks the following conditions:


• When the parameter Plausibility via 50BF fct. is set to yes, the pickup signal of the Circuit-
breaker failure protection is monitored. The plausibility release is given if the Circuit-breaker failure
protection has picked up.

• When the parameter Plaus. via open/trip cmd is set to yes, the trip/open command is moni-
tored. The plausibility release is given if the trip/open command has been generated.

• When the parameter Plaus. via binary input is set to yes, the >release signal is monitored.
The plausibility release is given if the >release signal has been received.
If one of the conditions is fulfilled, the plausibility release is given for 5 s. The 5-s timer ensures that the
release criterion and start condition relate to the same circuit-breaker opening/tripping process.
If all the 3 plausibility settings are set to no, the start/stop-monitoring logic considers the release as fulfilled.
For safety reasons, the input signal >release has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.

Start/Stop Monitoring
Via the start/stop monitoring logic, the monitoring duration of the current signal regarding restriking is deter-
mined.
The monitoring is started if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected as open via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts during the time
set with the parameter Position recognition delay.
The Position recognition delay time is used for safety means to ensure that the circuit breaker is
definitely open when the monitoring starts. This parameter allows to adapt this start criterion to all kinds
of auxiliary-contact configurations.
For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
In addition to the active start criterion, the plausibility release (refer to the Plausibility Release, Page 1260)
must be present to start the monitoring duration.
With the fulfilled start condition, the Monitoring duration timer is started. This timer defines how long
the current signal is monitored regarding restriking. If the time expires, the monitoring is terminated.
The monitoring is also terminated immediately if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected no longer as open.
• A close command is given by the device.

• The binary input signal >Stop is activated.


For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.

Measuring Value, Pickup/Dropout


During the Monitoring duration, the current signal is monitored phase-selectively regarding restriking.
As a measuring value, the fundamental component of the current is used.
• On one hand, current peaks are damped but still detected reliably by the fundamental-component value.
• On the other hand, a DC (Direct Current) component is suppressed. A DC component can occur after
switching off the circuit breaker.
Thus, the fundamental-component value is a good choice for a reliable restrike detection.
If any phase current exceeds the set current threshold value, the function picks up. The coming pickup indi-
cates the first restrike current pulse. With the pickup, the operate delay timers are started, see also the
following description Delay/Tripping, Page 1262.
If restriking occurs, the current signal drops below the current threshold if the time between restrike pulses is
long enough. In this case, the operate delay must not be reset. During the dropout delay, the pickup is
extended to ensure that the operate delay timers are not reset. However, if the dropout delay time expires (no
new current peak occurred), the function drops out and the operate delay timers are reset.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1261
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

Delay/Tripping
In the first step, tripping of the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of
the settable delay T1. The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism as well. In the event of a
wrong start and pickup, only the local circuit breaker is opened instead of the superordinated circuit breaker.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can start in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of time
T1.
If time delay T2 expires, circuit-breaker restriking takes place and the backup-tripping signal Trip T2 is
generated.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup-trip-
ping signal Trip T2 is generated immediately (without delay). For safety reasons, a default software filter
time of 20 ms is preset (configurable in DIGSI) for the binary input signal >CB defect.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for the trip command of the func-
tion. In contrast to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the
setting is independent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.

[lo_deltrip-030211-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-482 Logic Diagram for Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

6.51.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Switch On or Off Additional Plausibility Release Criteria

• Default setting (_:101) Plausibility via 50BF fct. = no

• Default setting (_:102) Plaus. via open/trip cmd = no

• Default setting (_:103) Plaus. via binary input = no


When using the plausibility release, the start condition and the release condition instead of only the start
condition must be present to start the current monitoring regarding restriking. Since the current threshold
value is set below the operating current, a false start would directly cause tripping. Thus, the plausibility
release strongly reduces the risk that a falsely given start criterion leads to a wrong tripping of the superordi-
nated circuit breaker.
3 different release criteria are available. You can use one or more than one or none of them. The selection
depends on the application.

1262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

NOTE

i When using release criteria, it must be ensured that the criteria are given under all the conditions where
the Circuit-breaker restrike protection shall be started. If you choose no release criteria, the release is
permanently given.

• Open/trip command by the device


Use this criterion in case that all control or trip commands are given by the protection device.

NOTE

i Opening the circuit breaker manually without using the device will not release the start of the Circuit-
breaker restrike protection.

• Pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection


Use this criterion if the Circuit-breaker restrike protection should only be started in case that the Circuit-
breaker failure protection was started (picked up) before.

NOTE

i Opening the circuit breaker by control or manually will not trigger the Circuit-breaker failure protection.
Consequently the Circuit-breaker restrike protection cannot be released either.

• Binary input signal


Use this option if neither of the above 2 release criteria fit the application and you want to define your own
release criterion.

Parameter: Position recognition delay

• Default setting (_:105) Position recognition delay = 0.02 s


With the parameter Position recognition delay, you define how long the circuit breaker must be
detected as open (via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts) before the monitoring time is started. This defini-
tion is a safety feature to ensure that the monitoring is not started too early. For example, in case that due to a
non-standard auxiliary-contacts configuration, the circuit-breaker is already detected as open while current
flow is still present.
The setting depends on the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contacts configuration. If it can be ensured that the auxil-
iary contacts announce the circuit breaker as open after the current flow is interrupted, the time can be set to
zero.

Parameter: Monitoring duration

• Default setting (_:104) Monitoring duration = 200.00 s


With the parameter Monitoring duration , you define how long the current signal is monitored regarding
restriking after the circuit breaker has been opened.
With ongoing discharging of the capacitor bank, the probability of restriking is decreasing. There is no need to
set the monitoring time longer than the discharging time. Siemens recommends setting the monitoring time
in the range of 0.5 * discharging time to 1 * discharging time.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 0.250 A


After opening of the circuit breaker, the phase currents are compared with the threshold value. If no restriking
takes place, the current is zero. Consequently the threshold for detecting restriking can be set much smaller
than the operating current. A typical value is 25 % of the operating current.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1263
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

With a threshold below the operating current, a falsely-given start directly cause tripping. For minimizing this
risk, Siemens recommends applying a release criterion additionally. Refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off Addi-
tional Plausibility Release Criteria , Page 1262.

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Default setting (_:7) Dropout delay = 0.05 s


The parameter Dropout delay ensures that a short dropping below the current threshold does not cause
the operate delay timers to be reset.
Since restriking is normally a periodical effect, the dropout delay can be set to a rather small time. Siemens
recommends applying the default value of 50 ms.

Input signal: >CB defect


The input signal >CB defect has a preset filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the circuit breaker opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient response of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the
circuit-breaker design.

Parameter: Retrip after T1

• Default setting (_:106) Retrip after T1 = start T2 after T1

Parameter Value Description


start T2 after T1 The retrip on the local circuit breaker is a safety mechanism to avoid
false tripping of the superordinated circuit breaker. With generating a
retrip, only the local circuit breaker is tripped in the event of a false
start. Afterwards the Circuit-breaker restrike protection function drops
out during the T2 delay time.
Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens also recommends applying the parameter value start T2
after T1. The parameter value provides a clear chronological separa-
tion of the processes for trip repeat and backup tripping. Remember that
the overall fault-clearance time in case of circuit-breaker restriking is the
sum of T1 and T2.
no No retrip is given
parallel start T2, T1 As an alternative to the setting parallel start T2, T1 the
customer can start T2 and T1 in parallel.

Parameter: Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip

• Default setting (_:109) Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip = 0.00 s


The parameter is visible only when the parameter Retrip after T1 is set to start T2 after T1 or
parallel start T2, T1 .
The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism to avoid false tripping of the superordinated
circuit breaker. In the event of a false start, only the local circuit breaker is tripped by the retrip. Afterwards the
Circuit-breaker restrike protection function will drop out during the T2 delay time.
Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker. Since the retrip is a safety mechanism, it
can be given without a delay time. Siemens recommends setting the delay time to 0 s.

Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip

• Default setting (_:110) Delay T2 for 3-pole trip = 0.15 s


This parameter defines the duration of restriking after the backup tripping is sent. The following should be
considered:

1264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

• When using the retrip functionality, this delay time must ensure a safe function dropout after giving the
retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens recommends applying a delay time of 150 ms which is the default setting.

Parameter: Minimum operate time

• Default setting (_:109) Minimum operate time = 0.15 s


The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
function.

! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts
burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open) after a control operation.

Output signal: Retrip T1


The output signal Retrip T1 must be routed to a binary output.
If only one control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal must be routed to the
binary output to which the general circuit breaker trip command (command Position) is routed.
If a second control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal can be routed to the associated binary
output.

Output signal: Trip T2


In order to trip the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2 ) must be routed to a
binary output and if necessary, to an interface (intertripping to the opposite end). Thus, the circuit breaker on
the opposite end can be tripped without delay.

6.51.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Restrike prt.#
_:1 Restrike prt.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Restrike prt.#:Plausibility • no no
via 50BF fct. • yes
_:102 Restrike prt.#:Plaus. via • no no
open/trip cmd • yes
_:103 Restrike prt.#:Plaus. via • no no
binary input • yes
_:106 Restrike prt.#:Retrip after • no start T2 after T1
T1 • start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
_:104 Restrike prt.#:Monitoring 1.00 s to 600.00 s 200.00 s
duration

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1265
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:105 Restrike prt.#:Position 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.02 s
recognition delay
_:3 Restrike prt.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:7 Restrike prt.#:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
delay
_:107 Restrike prt.#:Delay T1 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
for 3-pole retrip
_:108 Restrike prt.#:Delay T2 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.15 s
for 3-pole trip
_:109 Restrike prt.#:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.15 s
operate time

6.51.6 Information List

1266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

6.52.1 Overview of Functions

The Out-of-step protection function (ANSI 78)


• Detects an out-of-step condition (asynchronous operation) between machines connected and the power
system and between power systems

• Protects generators from unacceptable electromechanical stresses

• Prevents damage and unacceptable aging of equipment

• Ensures the stability of the entire power system by disconnection

• Suitable for integration into more complex automatic operations for power system monitoring and
disconnection

• Serves as a basic function for the protection of larger power plant units

• Used in the protection of power systems for selective disconnection in case of power swings

6.52.2 Structure of the Function

The Out-of-step protection function is preconfigured with one zone by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4
zones can be operated simultaneously in the function (see Figure 6-483). All zones are configured identically.
The Out-of-step protection function is contained in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and
current inputs. The process monitor provides the function with status information regarding the protected
object (open poles on the line in particular). The protected object can be a line or a power plant unit (gener-
ator with main transformer).

[dwoosstr-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-483 Structure of the Function

6.52.3 Description of a Zone

Measuring Principle of Out-of-Step Protection


Out-of-step protection is based on measuring the impedance and analyzing the history of the impedance
phasor. The simplified 2-machines model shown in the following figure is used for that purpose. The left side
of the figure shows the generator with a driving voltage VG. The impedances - generator impedance ZG, trans-
former impedance ZTr, and system impedance ZN – are located between the 2 sources. The power system with
a voltage VNet can be found as a backup machine on the right side.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1267
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwmodlpe-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-484 The 2-Machines Model to Explain a Power Swing

Measuring point m divides the total impedance into 2 impedances m· Ztotal and (1-m)· Ztotal. The following
details apply to the impedance at a measuring point m:

[foimpdnz-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Current I does not depend on the measuring point m:

[fostroms-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Voltage V at the measuring point m is calculated for:

[fospanng-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

In combination with

[foumesor-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

the data results in the formula:

[fozmesrt-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Angle δ is the angle between the generator voltage and the power system voltage. In normal operation, this
angle depends on the load profile and is relatively constant. In contrast, in the event of an out-of-step condi-
tion, the angle changes continuously and passes through all values between 0° and 360°. Figure 6-485 shows
the impedance process at the measuring point m according to the equation mentioned above. The point of
origin corresponds to the point where the protection device is built in (measuring point of the voltage-trans-
former substitute). Assuming a constant ratio between VNet/VG and a variable angle δ, the locus diagram is a
set of circles. The center and the radius are specified through the ratio VNet/VG. All centers of the circles are
located on one axis specified by the direction of Ztotal. The maximum and minimum impedance values are the
result for the 2 extreme values δ = 0° and δ = 180°. If the measuring point coincides directly with the electrical
center of the system, the measured voltage and thus the operating impedance result in 0 at an angle δ = 180°.

1268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwzverla-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-485 Impedance Trajectories for Different Voltage Conditions

Impedance Method of Measurement


The fundamental components are determined from the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase currents and
are the basis for calculating the phasors of the positive sequence system. The phasors of the positive-sequence
system are the basis for calculating the impedance.
Special cases:
• If an unbalanced fault occurs during swinging, the zone (zones) is/are frozen.
• If an open circuit-breaker pole is detected, the loop resistance of a healthy loop is calculated temporarily.
Out-of-step detection works when the positive-sequence current flow is high enough. If the flow falls below
the adjustable positive-sequence current threshold I1<threshold blocks zone, the zone (zones) is/are
frozen.

Behavior in the Event of Unbalanced Faults


To avoid overfunctioning of the Out-of-step protection in the event of unbalanced faults (for example, short-
circuits), the negative sequence current is evaluated. If the negative-sequence current exceeds the pickup
threshold I2>threshold blocks zone, the zones for the detection of an out-of-step condition are
blocked. Figure 6-486 shows the partial logic and the input variables for the impedance calculation.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1269
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[lo0imped-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-486 Impedance Measurement and Monitoring of the Positive and Negative Sequenced of the
Currents

Identifying the Out-of-Step Condition/Central Logic


Figure 6-487 shows the central logic. Cycling of the positive-sequence impedance phasor through the set
impedance zone is monitored and counted. The power swing counter is incremented depending on the
setting of the parameter (_:3691:108) Count at. Each counter increment is signaled. The signal duration
can be set via the (_:3691:100) Signal time parameter. The trip command is issued when the counter
status (parameter (_:3691:107) Number of power swings) is reached after incrementing. Between
each counter increment, the function checks whether another power swing occurs within a specified time
(parameter (_:3691:101) Re-entry time). If this is not the case, the counter is reset. The central logic
detects the direction of the power swing and issues an indication. In generator mode, for example, the impe-
dance swings into the zone from the right.

NOTE

i If the impedance phasor enters through the straight lines, which can be set using the parameters Zone
limit X top or Zone limit X bottom, the power swing direction is not determined. Since the direc-
tion determination is coordinated with the setting parameter Count at, the above limitation applies only
to the setting entry, entry left and entry right.

1270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[loostzon-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-487 Logic Diagram of a Zone

Impedance Zone (Characteristic Curve)


An impedance phasor within the impedance zone is the essential criterion for the out-of-step condition. In
order to implement different applications, resistance and reactance are freely settable. The resistance setting
parameter Zone limit R works inversely to the imaginary axis. A lower and an upper setting value (Zone
limit X bottom and Zone limit X top) can be selected for reactance. The zone can be shifted in any X
direction. Figure 6-488 shows 2 possible setting examples. To map the power system impedance (R, jX), the
zone can also be rotated through an angle Rotation angle. If several zones are used in power system
protection applications, they are typically interleaved.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1271
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwzonein-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-488 Zone Setting

Power-Swing Counter
Passing though the impedance zone is the criterion for incrementing the power swing counter. Use the setting
parameter (Count at) to define when the counter is incremented. Depending on the application, there are
different selection options available for this parameter. For machine protection applications, you only see 3
selection options without direction dependency.
entry The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone.
entry left The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the left.
entry right The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the right.
axis The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone.
axis from left The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
axis from right left.
The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
right.
exit The counter is incremented upon exit of the zone.
exit left The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the left.
exit right The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the right.
In all cases, the impedance phasor must first have crossed the entry line and the
middle ordinate.

Figure 6-489 shows how counting is done for the different trajectories of the impedance phasor. 2 zones are
shown as an example. Each zone has a counter of its own.
4 cases are shown:
Case A: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1.
Case B: The counter for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the
settings (entry, entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case C: The counter for zone 2 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 2. The counter
for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case D: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1. The counter
for zone 2 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry left, axis, axis from left, exit, exit right).

1272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwerhzae-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-489 Incrementing the Power Swing Counter for Different Impedance Phasor Trajectories

6.52.4 Application and Setting Notes (System Protection)

The protection setting is exemplified by a power-system configuration. If a power swing occurs in the power
system, the out-of-step protection must separate the power system into islands. Each system island must be
able to establish a stable operating state. Although a certain amount of load shedding must be taken into
account, the aim is to minimize power loss. Figure 6-490 shows the power-system configuration used in the
example.

[dwbspnet-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-490 Power-System Configuration

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1273
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

If an asynchronous swing condition occurs, the out-of-step protection function separates the 2 systems A and
C from each other. To allow the subnetwork with power reserve to remain connected to the busbar (and the
local load), either the lines A1 and A2 or the lines C1 and C2 must be disconnected from the busbar,
depending on the direction of the impedance curve. This ensures that the infeeding side remains connected
with the busbar and the local load.

Focus of the Example


In the example (Figure 6-490), the setting values for relay A are determined. All information and calculations
in this section are therefore based on relay A. Out-of-step tripping by this relay is also passed to the circuit -
breakers for lines A1 and A2, since both lines must be disconnected if an out-of-step condition occurs. Simi-
larly, relay C affects the circuit breakers for lines C1 and C2. Since the out-of-step impedance measurement in
relay A is also affected by the power flows in line A2, 2 separate setting values are determined for relay A. The
appropriate setting characteristic is enabled depending on the switch position of the line A2 circuit breaker
(On or OFF).
The parameters for the 2 zones (zone 1 and 2) are shown below with reference to the operating state of line
A2 (active or open). In practice, the corresponding zone must be blocked or enabled using the binary input
(GOOSE). Settings that are the same for both zones are not described separately.

Blocking the Zone

• Recommended setting value (_:2311:100) I2>threshold blocks zone = 20 %


Out-of-step tripping must be prevented in case of unbalanced faults and single open-pole conditions. To do so,
the negative-sequence current threshold (parameter I2>threshold blocks zone) is set to 20 %
(default).
If swing frequencies greater than 7 Hz are expected to occur, Siemens recommends increasing the setting
value to 40 % to 45 %.
The setting value should not be set to be too sensitive in the case of a 1-pole AWE. Check the possible nega-
tive-sequence current on the line to be protected if a pole on the adjacent line is open following a 1-pole AWE.
As a result, a certain negative-sequence current flows on the healthy line (parallel line).

Zone Impedance Calculation


To set the zones, the electrical center of the power system, as seen from the relay, must be determined. Note
that the infeed conditions are not fixed to the sources and that the parallel line is not always available. There-
fore, the electrical center of the power system is not located at a fixed point. For setting the zone limit, you
have to calculate the electrical center active and open using the maximum and minimum infeed and with
parallel line. The source impedances of the infeeds and lines in Figure 6-491 are specified for the purposes of
the example. All impedance values are secondary values and are related to a secondary rated current of 1 A.
Power system simulation tests are recommended in practice to determine the zone limits.

1274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwvorimp-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-491 Source Impedances of Infeeds and Feeders

To determine the source impedances as seen from relay A, Figure 6-491 is simplified as follows for the state =
line A2 open (zone 2 active):

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1275
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwvrimp2-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-492 Calculation of Source Impedances with Open Line A2 (Zone 2 Active)

The impedances of lines C1 and C2 and of infeed C are combined in Figure 6-492. Only one of the two lines is
used for calculation in the case of a weak infeed (10 Ω); both are used in parallel for a strong infeed (5 Ω).
Since the values for zone 2 are calculated with line A2 open here, simply add the impedance in the direction of
power system A for strong infeed to the line impedance of 10 Ω and 25 Ω for weak infeed. The results for
zone 2 are entered in Table 6-18.

1276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwvorim1-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-493 Calculation of Source Impedances with Closed Line A2 (Zone 1 Active)

When line A2 is in operation, the current is split between lines A1 and A2. The impedance seen from Relay A is
therefore doubled at the infeeds. Figure 6-493 shows the relevant values for strong and weak infeed. The
impedances for zone 1 are entered in Table 6-18. Zone 1 is effective when line A2 is active.

Table 6-18 Extreme Conditions: Extreme Conditions: Impedance, Seen from Relay A

Condition Activated Zone in Line A2 Impedance / Ωsecon- Impedance / Ωsecon-


Relay A
dary dary

In the direction of In the direction of


source A source C
Strong source power Zone 1 active 50 Ω 70 Ω
system A Zone 2 Open 30 Ω 35 Ω
Weak source power
system C
Weak source power Zone 1 active 110 Ω 30 Ω
system A Zone 2 Open 60 Ω 15 Ω
Strong source power
system C

The condition in which both sides provide a weak or strong source is not relevant for the determination of the
outermost ends of the electrical center.
If one end shows a maximum source impedance and the other a minimum one, you obtain the outermost end
of the electrical center. Use the following equation for calculation (shown for relay A):

[foeztrum-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1277
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

The results must be calculated separately for zone 2 and zone 1 according to the open or closed switch posi-
tions of infeed B. Table 6-19 shows the electrical center, as seen from relay A.

Table 6-19 Calculation Results for the Electrical Center

Source Side A / Source Side C / Activated Zone in Line A2 Electrical Center


Ωsecondary Ωsecondary Relay A (Impedance, Seen
from Relay A) /
Ωsecondary
50 Ω 70 Ω Zone 1 active -10 Ω
30 Ω 35 Ω Zone 2 Open -2.5 Ω
110 Ω 30 Ω Zone 1 active 40 Ω
60 Ω 15 Ω Zone 2 Open 22.5 Ω

If the 2 sources have different voltage levels, the power-swing impedance differs from the electrical center.
This fact must be considered when determining the outermost ends of the electrical center:

[fodvitio-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Table 6-20 shows the results obtained for relay A.

Table 6-20 Impedance Deviation from Electrical Center

Ztotal / Ωsecondary Activated Zone Line A2 Electrical Deviation with Outer End of
in Relay A Center (Seen a Voltage Level the Electrical
from Relay A) / Difference of Center / Ωsecon-
Ωsecondary 10 % / Ωsecondary
dary

50 + 70 Ω Zone 1 active -10 Ω -6 Ω -16 Ω


30 + 35 Ω Zone 2 Open -2.5 Ω -3.25 Ω -5.75 Ω
110 + 30 Ω Zone 1 active 40 Ω 7Ω 47 Ω
60 + 15 Ω Zone 2 Open 22.5 Ω 3.75 Ω 26.25 Ω

Figure 6-494 shows the outer ends of the electrical center for relay A, zone 2 (line A2 is open), including the
possible power-swing impedance locations.

1278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwimpelo-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-494 Swing Impedance Locations and Outer Ends of the Electrical Center for Relay A (Line A2 is
Open)

To ensure that the power swing zone in Figure 6-494 covers the power swing trajectories, the upper and
lower zone limits X are calculated as shown in the following formula. The calculated values reliably cover the
determined outermost electrical centers in Table 6-20. The safety clearance is half the distance between the
determined centers. Depending on the application, another formula can be used to satisfy the requirements
placed on the geometry of the zone:

[foznengr-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Table 6-21 shows the zone limit X setting for relay A based on this formula.

Table 6-21 jX Setting for the Zones

Activated Zone Line A2 Most Extreme Most Extreme Upper Zone Lower Zone
in Relay A Electrical Electrical Limit X Limit X
Center, 1st Center, 3rd
Quadrant Quadrant
Zone 1 active 47 Ω -16 Ω 78.5 Ω -47.5 Ω
Zone 2 Open 26.25 Ω -5.75 Ω 42.25 Ω -21.75 Ω

To determine the Zone limit R, the out-of-step tripping mode must be considered:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1279
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

• If an out-of-step tripping on entry occurs, the R setting must equal the smallest value which occurs when
the power swing reaches the transient stability limit angle.

• The R setting is less critical if the out-of-step condition trips when the axis of symmetry is exceeded. It can
be set to the 0.9-fold minimum stable load impedance or to the 0.25-fold distance between the values of
zone limit X. Note that the circuit breaker is exposed to a very strong recovery voltage after switching.

• If an out-of-step tripping on exit occurs, the R setting depends on how long the trip command is to be
present after the axis of symmetry has been exceeded (180°-condition). The calculation of the R setting
can be based on the currently set swing locus angle.
In the example, tripping is to occur when the zone is entered. Therefore, you have to calculate the R setting
using the transient stability limit angle δ. Based on the maximum transmission angle under stable operating
conditions, the transient stability limit angle is calculated as follows:
Transient stability angle = 180 - maximum transmission angle.
A maximum transmission angle of 60° can be assumed in most cases. The result is a transient stability limit δ
of 120°.
To ensure that the R setting is not too high, it must be determined on the basis of the minimum source impe-
dances. The minimum source impedances (with closed/open line A2) or relay A are shown in Table 6-22.

Table 6-22 Calculated R Setting Values

Condition Activated Zone Line A2 Impedance in Impedance in Zone Limit R


in Relay A the Direction of the Direction of Setting
Source A Source C
Strong source A Zone 1 active 50 Ω 30 Ω 23.1 Ω
Strong source C Zone 2 Open 30 Ω 15 Ω 13.0 Ω

[dwreinst-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-495 Calculation of the R Setting with Minimum Source Impedances (Line A2 Active, Zone 1)

[forfmel1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]

1280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

Determination of the Rotation Angle of the Characteristic


Not all impedances in the power system have the same angle. Set the rotation angle to the same value as the
impedance angle of the total impedance between the 2 sources (sum of the impedances of power system A
and C). This example uses the typical angle of 85° for transmission lines.
(_:3691:102) Rotation angle = 85°

Counting of Power Swings


In this application, power swing tripping is to take place immediately on entry. Therefore the number of power
swings is set to 1:
(_:3691:107) Number of power swings = 1
Power swing tripping is to cause selective disconnection to keep the busbar connected to the infeeding power
system. Figure 6-496 and Figure 6-497 show the swing impedance trajectory for relay C and A depending on
the energy flow. Power swing tripping is to cause a selective disconnection of the power system that draws
energy from the busbar. Therefore, power swing tripping takes places at entry from the right. In Figure 6-496,
line A1 is disconnected from the busbar by relay A with swing tripping. Power system C remains connected to
the busbar via lines C1 and C2 and feeds the load connected there.
(_:3691:108) Count at = entry right

[dwenergc-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-496 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System C to Power
System A

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1281
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

[dwenerga-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-497 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System A to Power
System C

In Figure 6-497, the energy flows in the opposite direction. Out-of-step tripping must take place at lines C1
and C2. In this case, power system A remains connected to the local load of the busbar.

Setting the Time Function Elements

• Recommended setting value (_:3691:101) Re-entry time = 20 s


Use the Re-entry time parameter to define the resetting condition for the counter. If the counter was
incremented and if there is no new swing cycle during the reentry time, the swing counter is set back to 0.
Assuming slow power swings of approx. 0.2 Hz (corresponds to a duration of 5 s), the setting value of 20 s
offers sufficient safety.
• Recommended setting value (_:3691:100) Signal time = 0.05 s
Use the Signal time parameter to define how long a binary indication (incrementing or swing direction), is
present, for instance at a contact. The time depends on the speed of subsequent evaluation units. A value
between 50 ms and 100 ms is sufficient for fast further processing.

6.52.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:I1<threshold 10 % to 400 % 20 %
blocks zone
_:2311:100 General:I2>threshold 5 % to 500 % 20 %
blocks zone

1282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Zone 1
_:3691:1 Zone 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3691:2 Zone 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked • yes
_:3691:103 Zone 1:Zone limit R 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:3691:104 Zone 1:Zone limit X top 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 10.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 2.000 Ω
_:3691:105 Zone 1:Zone limit X 1A -600.000 Ω to 600.000 Ω -10 000 Ω
bottom 5A -120.000 Ω to 120.000 Ω -2000 Ω
_:3691:102 Zone 1:Rotation angle 60.0 ° to 90.0 ° 90.0 °
_:3691:108 Zone 1:Count at • exit exit
• axis
• entry
• exit left
• exit right
• axis from left
• axis from right
• entry left
• entry right
_:3691:107 Zone 1:Number of 1 to 20 1
power swings
_:3691:101 Zone 1:Re-entry time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 20.00 s
_:3691:100 Zone 1:Signal time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s

6.52.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Zone blocked SPS O
_:2311:302 General:I1< blocking SPS O
_:2311:301 General:I2> blocking SPS O
Zone 1
_:3691:81 Zone 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3691:54 Zone 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3691:52 Zone 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3691:53 Zone 1:Health ENS O
_:3691:55 Zone 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3691:56 Zone 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3691:57 Zone 1:Operate ACT O
_:3691:300 Zone 1:Counter status reach. SPS O
_:3691:301 Zone 1:Out-of-step condition SPS O
_:3691:302 Zone 1:Power swing from left SPS O
_:3691:303 Zone 1:Power swing from right SPS O
_:3691:304 Zone 1:No. of power swings INS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1283
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O

1284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

6.53.1 Overview of Functions

The function Inrush-current detection


• Recognizes an inrush process on transformers
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for
protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on

• Allows a sensitive setting of the protection functions


The following protection functions evaluate the blocking signal
• Overcurrent protection with a pickup value below the maximum inrush current
• Negative-sequence protection as sensitive backup protection for transformers

• Distance protection for impedance stages graded through the transformer

6.53.2 Structure of the Function

The function Inrush-current detection is not an individual protection function. In the connection process of a
transformer, it transmits a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the inrush-current
detection must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be blocked.
The following figure shows the embedding of the function. The setting parameter Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. establishes the connection between inrush-current detection and the functions that are to be
blocked. If the parameter is set to yes, the connection is effective.
A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for
synchronization of the internal measurement methods.
The jump detection reacts to changes in the current. The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an
internal pickup of the protection function that is to be blocked.

[dwirsh01-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-498 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.53.3 Function Description

The function Inrush-current detection analyzes the trigger signal of the jump detection or the threshold-
value violation of the function to be blocked in a start logic, and synchronizes the method of measurement. In
order to securely record the inrush processes, the function uses the Harmonic analysis method of measure-
ment and the CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods work in parallel and link the results
through a logical OR.
If you wish to work with only one process, deactivate the other method by way of the parameters Blocking
with 2. harmonic or Blocking with CWA .

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1285
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

[loinru02-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-499 Basic Structure of the Inrush-Current Detection

Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 95 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.95).

1286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

[loinru10-040912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-500 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function (T = 1 Period)

CWA Method (Current Wave Shape Analysis)


The CWA method executes a wave shape analysis of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC. If all 3 phase currents
show flat areas at the same point in time, the inrush-current detection signal will be issued. This signal applies
for all 3 phases simultaneously. The following figure shows a typical inrush-current characteristic, with the
simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable.

[dwinru03-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-501 Inrush-Current Characteristic

The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1287
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

[loinru05-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-502 Logic of the CWA-Method Function (T = 1 Period)

Logic of the Inrush-Current Detection


The following logic diagram shows the link of the 2 methods of measurement Harmonic Analysis and CWA
method.
The crossblock function influences the Harmonic Analysis process. If you have set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes, you will receive in the event of threshold-value violation a blocking indication for all 3
phase currents and the measured or calculated zero-sequence current (l2nd harm / l1st harm). The crossblock func-
tion works via a timer. Set parameters for the time depending on the expected duration factor via the param-
eter Cross-blocking time.
If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat.-range limit Imax, the inrush-
current detection will be blocked.

1288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

[loinru12-060912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-503 Logic Diagram of the Inrush-Current Detection

6.53.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operat.-range limit Imax

• Recommended setting value (_:106) Operat.-range limit Imax = 7.5 A


With the parameter Operat.-range limit Imax, you can specify at which current the inrush-current
detection is blocked internally. Set the value to be greater than the RMS value of the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. A practicable value is 7.5 times the transformer rated current.

Parameter: Blocking with CWA

• Recommended setting value = (_:111) Blocking with CWA = yes

Parameter Value Description


yes CWA process activated.
no CWA process deactivated.

Parameter: Blocking with 2. harmonic

• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blocking with 2. harmonic = yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1289
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

Parameter Value Description


yes Harmonic analysis process activated.
no Harmonic analysis process deactivated.

NOTE

i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values.

Parameter: 2nd harmonic content

• Recommended setting value (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %


With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the pickup value of the harmonic anal-
ysis function. The setting value of 15 % is practicable for most transformers.

Parameter: Cross-blocking

• Recommended setting value (_:112) Cross-blocking = no

Parameter Value Description


no Through the CWA process working in parallel in the inrush-current detec-
tion, the function is not activated as standard.
yes If a subfunction of the inrush-current detection is identified in the course of
the closure trials during commissioning, set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes.

Parameter: Cross-blocking time

• Default setting (_:109) Cross-blocking time = 0.06 s


You define the duration of this blocking with the Cross-blocking time parameter. The default
setting of 0.06 s (about 3 periods) has proven practicable. Set the time as short as possible and check
the value during the closure trials. The parameter Cross-blocking time is inactive at Cross-
blocking = no.

Parameter: Start flt.rec

• Default setting (_:114) Start flt.rec = yes


With the Start flt.rec parameter, you determine whether a fault record should be started upon
pickup of the inrush-current detection. The following settings are possible:

Parameter Value Description


no No fault recording starts with pickup.
yes The fault recording starts with pickup. When the protection function is
blocked by the inrush-current detection, a fault recording is started never-
theless.

6.53.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Inrush detect.
_:1 Inrush detect.:Mode • off on
• on
• test

1290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:106 Inrush detect.:Operat.- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
range limit Imax 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 37.500 A
_:111 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with CWA • yes
_:110 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with 2. harmonic • yes
_:102 Inrush detect.:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content
_:112 Inrush detect.:Cross- • no no
blocking • yes
_:109 Inrush detect.:Cross- 0.03 s to 200.00 s 0.06 s
blocking time
_:114 Inrush detect.:Start • no yes
flt.rec • yes

6.53.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Inrush detect.
_:81 Inrush detect.:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inrush detect.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inrush detect.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inrush detect.:Health ENS O
_:300 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase A SPS O
_:301 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase B SPS O
_:302 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase C SPS O
_:305 Inrush detect.:CWA SPS O
_:306 Inrush detect.:Cross-blocking SPS O
_:55 Inrush detect.:Pickup ACD O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1291
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

6.54.1 Overview of Functions

The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to:
• Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold
• Monitor agreed power limits and output warning indications

• Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines

• Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.

• Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)

6.54.2 Structure of the Function

The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function can be integrated in function groups, which provide measured
voltages and currents of the 3-phases for calculation of the power.
The 3-phase power protection (P,Q) function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and the
reactive power. The following stages are preconfigured:
• Power P>
• Power Q>

• Power P<

• Power Q<
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the func-
tion. The tripping stages have an identical structure.

[dw_GPP 3-phase structure, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-504 Structure/Embedding of the Function

Logical Combination of Output Signals


The operate indications of the active and reactive power stage(s) can be logically combined in CFC. When an
operate indication is present in both the active and the reactive power stage, an alarm indication is generated.

1292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

[lo_GPP operate indication logical comb, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-505 Logical Combination of Operate Indications in CFC

6.54.3 Active Power Stage

Logic of a Stage

[lo_3-phase active power, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-506 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)

Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.

Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power P<).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1293
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.

[dw_tilt-power active power, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-507 Tilt-Power Characteristic

Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> or Power P<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.

Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• Internally or externally via the binary input signal >Block stage

• The frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz.

1294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

6.54.4 Reactive Power Stage

Logic of a Stage

[lo_3phase reactive power, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-508 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)

Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.

Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power Q<).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1295
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

[dw_tilt-power reactive power, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-509 Tilt-Power Characteristic

Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> or Power Q<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.

Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally
via the binary input signal >Block stage.

6.54.5 Application Example

The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-510 tripping zone defined by characteristics), an
alarm indication is generated. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications of
the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement. Figure 6-510
shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.

1296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

[dw_GPP PQ diagram, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-510 Pickup Values and Characteristic Curves

6.54.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage

Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-phase
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P<.

Parameter: Measured value

• Recommended setting value (_:6271:105) Measured value = positive seq. power


The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:6271:3) Threshold = 0 %


The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the active power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to
0 %.

NOTE

i If you use several settings groups, consider the following:


• The dropout value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.

• Switching from a positive dropout value to a negative dropout value or vice versa is not allowed. As a
result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.

• If you want to change the sign of the dropout value of a stage in an additional settings group, instan-
tiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group,
disable the stage there.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:6271:101) Dropout ratio = 1.05


A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 1.05.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1297
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

Parameter: Tilt power characteristic

• Recommended setting value (_:6271:103) Tilt power characteristic = +70°


The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the above
example, an inclination is required. The setting value is +70° (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-507).

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:6271:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms


The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:6271:6) Operate delay = 100 ms


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.

6.54.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage

Stage Type
In the example, the reactive power is to be monitored if it falls below the threshold. In the 3-phase circuit
breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power Q<.

Parameter: Measured value

• Recommended setting value (_:6331:105) Measured value = positive seq. power


The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:6331:3) Threshold = 0 %


The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to
0 %.

NOTE

i If you use several settings groups, consider the following:


• The threshold value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive threshold value to a negative threshold value or vice versa is not allowed. As
a result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.

• If you want to change the sign of the threshold value of a stage in an additional settings group, instan-
tiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group,
disable the stage there.

Parameter: Dropout ratio

• Recommended setting value (_:6331:101) Dropout ratio = 0.95


A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 0.95.

1298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

Parameter: Tilt power characteristic

• Recommended setting value (_:6331:103) Tilt power characteristic = +20°


The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the example
(see Figure 6-510), the power characteristic has a tilt of 20°. Set the Tilt power characteristic param-
eter to +20° (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-509).

Parameter: Dropout delay

• Recommended setting value (_:6331:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms


The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Recommended setting value (_:6331:6) Operate delay = 100 ms


The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.

6.54.8 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Power P> 1
_:6241:1 Power P> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6241:2 Power P> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:6241:104 Power P> 1:Measured value • power of phase A positive seq.
• power of phase B power
• power of phase C
• positive seq. power
_:6241:3 Power P> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 80.0 %
_:6241:101 Power P> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6241:103 Power P> 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6241:7 Power P> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6241:6 Power P> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power P< 1
_:6271:1 Power P< 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6271:2 Power P< 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:6271:105 Power P< 1:Measured value • power of phase A positive seq.
• power of phase B power
• power of phase C
• positive seq. power
_:6271:3 Power P< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 5.0 %
_:6271:101 Power P< 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.10 1.05
_:6271:103 Power P< 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1299
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:6271:7 Power P< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6271:6 Power P< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q> 1
_:6301:1 Power Q> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6301:2 Power Q> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:6301:105 Power Q> 1:Measured • power of phase A positive seq.
value • power of phase B power
• power of phase C
• positive seq. power
_:6301:3 Power Q> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 70.0 %
_:6301:101 Power Q> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6301:103 Power Q> 1:Tilt power -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
characteristic
_:6301:7 Power Q> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6301:6 Power Q> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q< 1
_:6331:1 Power Q< 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6331:2 Power Q< 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:6331:105 Power Q< 1:Measured • power of phase A positive seq.
value • power of phase B power
• power of phase C
• positive seq. power
_:6331:3 Power Q< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % -30.0 %
_:6331:101 Power Q< 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6331:103 Power Q< 1:Tilt power -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
characteristic
_:6331:7 Power Q< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6331:6 Power Q< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

6.54.9 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Power P> 1
_:6241:81 Power P> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6241:54 Power P> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6241:52 Power P> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6241:53 Power P> 1:Health ENS O
_:6241:55 Power P> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6241:56 Power P> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6241:57 Power P> 1:Operate ACT O
Power P< 1
_:6271:81 Power P< 1:>Block stage SPS I

1300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:6271:54 Power P< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6271:52 Power P< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6271:53 Power P< 1:Health ENS O
_:6271:55 Power P< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6271:56 Power P< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6271:57 Power P< 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q> 1
_:6301:81 Power Q> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6301:54 Power Q> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6301:52 Power Q> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6301:53 Power Q> 1:Health ENS O
_:6301:55 Power Q> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6301:56 Power Q> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6301:57 Power Q> 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q< 1
_:6331:81 Power Q< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6331:54 Power Q< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6331:52 Power Q< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6331:53 Power Q< 1:Health ENS O
_:6331:55 Power Q< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6331:56 Power Q< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6331:57 Power Q< 1:Operate ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1301
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.55.1 Overview of Functions

The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function (ANSI 27/Q):


• Detects critical power-system situations, mainly in case of regenerative generation
• Prevents a voltage collapse in power system by disconnecting the power-generation facility from the
main power systems

• Ensures reconnection under stable power-system conditions

6.55.2 Structure of the Function

The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.

[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-511 Structure/Embedding of the Function

1302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.55.3 Protection Stage

6.55.3.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-512 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1303
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.

Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.

Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.

• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the para-
meterized threshold value).

Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.

Blocking of the Stage


The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage

• Measuring-voltage failure

Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.16.8.1 Description .

6.55.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:13921:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter Value Description


yes The Protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is
detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as there is
no assurance that the Protection stage will function correctly if the
measuring voltage fails.

1304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

no The Protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure


is detected.

Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.

• Default setting (_:13921:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no


You use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to determine whether the operate delay and
operate signal are blocked during the detection of an inrush current.

Parameter: I> release threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:13921:105) I> release threshold = 0.100 A


You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can pick up. The
default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: V< threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:13921:103) V< threshold value = 85.000 V


You use the V< threshold value parameter to define one of the 2 pickup criteria. If all 3 phase-to-phase
voltages drop below the parameterized undervoltage threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
The setting should be set below the lower value of the permissible voltage range, according to the national
transmission code. In Germany, the recommended undervoltage threshold is 85 % of the rated voltage. There-
fore Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Q> threshold value

• Default setting (_:13921:3) Q> threshold value = 5 %


You use the Q> threshold value parameter to define the second of the 2 pickup criteria. If the positive
reactive power exceeds the parameterized Q> threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
In the following example, the pickup takes place if Q exceeds 5 % of the power-supply system rated power.

EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:

[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:13921:6) Operate delay grid CB = 1.50 s

• Default setting (_:13921:108) Oper. delay generator CB = 0.50 s


You can set the Operate delay grid CB for the circuit breaker at the power-supply system connection
point, or set the Oper. delay generator CB for the circuit breaker of the facility, for example, the gener-
ator.
The time of the Operate delay grid CB should always be set longer than the time of the Oper. delay
generator CB.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1305
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Parameter: Trip interface contains

• Default setting (_:13921:101) Trip interface contains = operate (grid)


The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid).
You use the Trip interface contains parameter to define whether one or none of them will be
forwarded to the trip interface of the circuit-breaker interaction. The selected operate signal will trip the circuit
breaker that has been connected to the protection function group.
The setting depends on the specific application.

Parameter: Q sign

• Default setting (_:13921:102) Q sign = not reversed


The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the main protected object (for example, a feeder). You use the Q
sign parameter to reverse the sign and therefore the direction of the reactive-power flow Q. This reversal
may be required for specific application, where the main protected object (for example, a line towards the
main power systems) is in different direction to the power-generation facility.
Parameter Value Description
not reversed The protected object is in the same direction as the power-gener-
ation facility.
reversed The protected object is not in the same direction as the power-
generation facility.

6.55.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Prot. stage 1
_:13921:1 Prot. stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13921:2 Prot. stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:13921:10 Prot. stage 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure • yes
_:13921:27 Prot. stage 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect. • yes
_:13921:101 Prot. stage 1:Trip inter- • no operate operate (grid)
face contains • operate (generator)
• operate (grid)
_:13921:102 Prot. stage 1:Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed
_:13921:3 Prot. stage 1:Q> 1.00 % to 200.00 % 5.00 %
threshold value
_:13921:103 Prot. stage 1:V< 3.000 V to 175.000 V 85.000 V
threshold value
_:13921:105 Prot. stage 1:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13921:108 Prot. stage 1:Oper. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
generator CB

1306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:13921:6 Prot. stage 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s
delay grid CB

6.55.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Prot. stage 1
_:13921:81 Prot. stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13921:54 Prot. stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13921:52 Prot. stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13921:53 Prot. stage 1:Health ENS O
_:13921:60 Prot. stage 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:13921:55 Prot. stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13921:301 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(gen.) ACT O
_:13921:302 Prot. stage 1:Operate (generator) ACT O
_:13921:56 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(grid) ACT O
_:13921:57 Prot. stage 1:Operate (grid) ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1307
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

6.55.4 Reclosure Stage

6.55.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-513 Logic Diagram of Reclosure Stage in Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.

Release for Reconnecting


The release for reconnecting the power-generation facility is given under the following conditions:

1308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the threshold value.

• The power frequency is within a specified range.

• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.

External Start of Reclosure Time Delay


Reclosure time delay can be started via the binary input signal >V, f trip, which can be connected to
external voltage and frequency protection trip signals.

Blocking of the Stage


The stage can be blocked via the binary input signal >Block stage.

6.55.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Configuration

• Default setting (_:13951:102) Configuration = no stage


You use the Configuration parameter to define which operate signal of specific protection functions starts
the release time delay of the Reclosure stage:
• Overfrequency protection
• Underfrequency protection

• Overvoltage protection

• Undervoltage protection

• Protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection


When the protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection is selected, only the signal
Operate (generator) can start the release time delay of this stage. The signal Operate (grid) cannot
start the release time delay.
The configuration depends on the specific application.

Parameter: I> release threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:106) I> release threshold = 0.100 A


You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can work.
The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: V> threshold value

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:101) V> threshold value = 95.000 V


You use the V> threshold value parameter to set one of the 2 release criteria. The setting should be set
above the lower value of the allowed voltage range, according to the national transmission code. In Germany,
the recommended overvoltage threshold is 95 % of the rated voltage. Therefore Siemens recommends using
the default setting.

Parameter: Frequency range

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:104) f difference positive = 0.05 Hz

• Recommended setting value (_:13951:105) f difference negative = -2.50 Hz


You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f differ-
ence positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the lower
frequency range limit.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1309
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.

Parameter: Time delay

• Default setting (_:13951:108) Time delay = 0.00 s


You use the Time delay parameter to specify the minimum time delay for releasing the reconnection of the
power-generation facility after tripping by protection.
The setting depends on the specific application.

6.55.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Reclos. stage
_:13951:1 Reclos. stage:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13951:101 Reclos. stage:V> 3.000 V to 340.000 V 95.000 V
threshold value
_:13951:104 Reclos. stage:f difference 0.01 Hz to 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz
positive
_:13951:105 Reclos. stage:f difference -5.00 Hz to -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz
negative
_:13951:106 Reclos. stage:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13951:108 Reclos. stage:Time delay 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 0.00 s
_:13951:102 Reclos. stage:Configura- Setting options depend on
tion configuration

6.55.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Reclos. stage
_:13951:81 Reclos. stage:>Block stage SPS I
_:13951:501 Reclos. stage:>V, f trip SPS I
_:13951:54 Reclos. stage:Inactive SPS O
_:13951:52 Reclos. stage:Behavior ENS O
_:13951:53 Reclos. stage:Health ENS O
_:13951:301 Reclos. stage:Release closure ACT O

1310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Current-Jump Detection

6.56 Current-Jump Detection

6.56.1 Overview of Functions

The Current jump detection function has the following tasks:


• Detection of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current (ΔI)
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system period to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current is an additional function used for indi-
cation purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore neither
opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.

6.56.2 Structure of the Function

The Current-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on current measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.

[dwstruki-111026-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-514 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.56.3 Function Description

Current-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the current. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
Using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from 3 line currents or the residual current.
Current-jump detection is phase-selective for the line current A, B and C.
The difference from the previous sampled value of the first system cycle is calculated for each sampled value.
The rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δi(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔI by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔI is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If you have
selected the phase currents for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the separate
phase information. If you have selected the residual current for measurement, the output indication data type
used includes the NI information. If the current-jump detection responds (ΔILimit), the general information is
generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value (ΔILimit) in accordance with the logic in
Figure 6-515. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
The output indication Pulse is formed with the configurable timer (_:102) Minimum pulse length. As
a consequence this output indication has a consistent minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse
extension, you can prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has
been activated, the indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of
the binary input is detected.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1311
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Current-Jump Detection

Logic

[lojumpii-271011-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-515 Current-Jump Detection Logic

6.56.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Measured value

• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase currents


With the parameter Measured value, you set whether the line current(s) or the residual current is to be
used for jump detection.
Parameter Value Description
phase currents The tripping stage evaluates the line currents IL1, IL2
and IL3 phase-selectively to detect a jump.
zero-sequence current The tripping stage evaluates the residual current
IN/3I0 to detect a jump.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 0.10 A for Irated = 1A or 0.50 A for Irated = 5 A

With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump.

1312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Current-Jump Detection

Parameter: Minimum pulse length

• Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s


With the parameter Minimum pulse length, you specify a consistent minimum size for the output indica-
tion Pulse.

6.56.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


I-jump det. #
_:1 I-jump det. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9 I-jump det. #:Measured • phase currents phase currents
value • zero-sequence current
_:101 I-jump det. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 I-jump det. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:102 I-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

6.56.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
I-jump det. #
_:81 I-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 I-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 I-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 I-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 I-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1313
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection

6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection

6.57.1 Overview of Functions

The Voltage-jump detection function has the following tasks:


• Recognition of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage (ΔV)
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system cycle to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage is an additional function used for indi-
cation purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore neither
opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.

6.57.2 Structure of the Function

The Voltage-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on voltage measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.

[dwstruku-011211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-516 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.57.3 Function Description

Voltage-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the voltage. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
By using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-
phase voltages or the zero-sequence voltage. Voltage-jump detection is phase-selective.
The difference from the previous sampled value of 1 system cycle is calculated for each sampled value. The
rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δv(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔV by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔV is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If the measured
value is set to phase-to-phase, the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Jump VAB, Jump VBC or Jump VCA). If you have selected the phase-to-
phase or phase-to-ground voltages for measurement, the output indication data type used included the sepa-
rate phase information. If you have selected the zero-sequence voltage for measurement, the output indica-
tion data type used includes the N information. If the voltage-jump detection responds (ΔVLimit), the general
information is generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value ΔULimit in accordance with the information in
Figure 6-517. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
A timing element is added to the indication Jump. The element generates a pulse from this. The length of this
pulse can be set using the parameter (_:102) Minimum pulse length. This gives the output indication
Pulse a reliable minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse extension, you can prolong the
pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has been activated, the indication
Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of the binary input is detected. If

1314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection

the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the pulse duration is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse VCA).

Logic

[lojumpuu-011211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-517 Voltage-Jump Detection Logic

6.57.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Measured value

• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-ground


With the parameter Measured value , you specify which measured values of voltage are to be used for
determining the voltage jumps.
Parameter Value Description
phase-to-ground The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB and VC.
phase-to-phase The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC and VCA.
zero-sequence voltage The tripping stage evaluates the zero-sequence
voltage VN/V0.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1315
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 5.000 V


With the parameter Threshold , you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump .

Parameter: Minimum pulse length

• Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s


With the parameter Minimum pulse length , you specify a consistent minimum size for the output indica-
tion Pulse .

6.57.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


V-jump det. #
_:1 V-jump det. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9 V-jump det. #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-ground
value • phase-to-phase
• zero-sequence voltage
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:102 V-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

6.57.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V-jump det. #
_:81 V-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 V-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 V-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 V-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 V-jump det. #:Jump VAB SPS O
_:303 V-jump det. #:Jump VBC SPS O
_:304 V-jump det. #:Jump VCA SPS O
_:305 V-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O
_:306 V-jump det. #:Pulse VAB SPS O
_:307 V-jump det. #:Pulse VBC SPS O
_:308 V-jump det. #:Pulse VCA SPS O

1316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

6.58.1 Overview of Functions

The Vector-jump protection function:


• Is used for network decoupling of the power generating unit in case of a load loss
• Evaluates the phase-angle jump of the voltage phasors

6.58.2 Structure of the Function

The Vector-jump protection function can be used in the following function groups:
• Voltage-current 3-phase
• Voltage 3-phase
The Vector-jump protection function comes factory-set with a Δφ stage.
The following stages can operate simultaneously within the function:
• 1 Δφ stage
• 1 I1 < Release stage

[dw_VJP_Structure, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-518 Structure/Embedding of the Function

6.58.3 General Functionality

6.58.3.1 Description

Basic Principle of Vector-Jump Protection


The following 2 figures show the basic principle of the Vector-jump protection function.
The following figure shows the voltage vector of the steady state condition. The load current causes a voltage
drop between the internal voltage Vp and the generator terminal voltage V.
If the load is switched off, the following situations occur:
• The current is reduced.
• A smaller voltage drop is caused.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1317
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

[dw_load loss, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-519 Voltage Vector of the Steady State

The following figure shows the situations after the load is switched off:
• The terminal voltage V changes to V'.
• An additional phase-angle jump occurs.
A phase-angle jump occurs with load loss and is the evaluation criterion for the Vector-jump protection func-
tion. If the phase-angle differential exceeds a set threshold, the generator circuit breaker or the circuit breaker
of the system switch opens. Therefore, the generator unit can be protected against unacceptable stress.

[dw_vector change, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-520 Vector Change after the Load Shedding

Table 6-23 Vector Description

Vector Description
Vp Vector of the generator internal voltage (rotor voltage)
V Vector of the generator terminal voltage
ΔV Vector of the voltage differential
V' Vector of the terminal voltage after the load shedding
ΔV' Vector of the voltage differential after the load shedding

1318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

The following measures are applied to avoid unwanted tripping:


• Correction of steady-state deviations from rated frequency
• Frequency operating range limited to frated ± 3 Hz

• High measuring accuracy by using frequency-tracked measured values and evaluation of the positive-
sequence phasor

• Enabling the minimum voltage for the Vector-jump protection function

• Blocking the function when the primary voltage is switched on or off as switching can lead to a phase-
angle jump

Logic

[lo_VJP_General, 1, en_US]

[lo_VJP_General_2, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-521 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality

Phase-Angle Calculation
The phase-angle differential is calculated at different time intervals (t-T, t-2T, t-3T) from the vector of the posi-
tive-sequence voltage via a delta-interval measurement. With the current measured power frequency, the
measuring errors of the angle measurement caused by frequency deviations are compensated.

Range
If the measured frequency or voltage is below the set threshold, the Vector-jump protection is blocked.
The voltage and frequency bands have the following limits:
• The threshold of the voltage band is configurable.
• The frequency band ranges is fixed from frated - 3 Hz to frated + 3 Hz.

Measurand
The general functionality calculates the phase-angle displacement Δφ and sends it to the Δφ stage. Δφ is used
for comparison with the parameter Threshold Δφ. Δφ is displayed in the functional measured value and can
be routed in a fault record and displayed in the fault log.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1319
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

The functional measured values of Δφ in HMI are displayed differently in the following situations:
• If the Vector-jump protection function is inactive, the function value of Δφ is displayed as “---”
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has not picked up, the functional measured value of
Δφ is displayed as 0.0°

• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has picked up, the functional measured value of Δφ
is displayed as a calculated value (for example, 12.0°) and remains unchanged until the next pickup of
the Vector-jump protection function.

6.58.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold V1 min

• Default setting (_:2311:102) Threshold V1 min = 46.189 V


With the parameter Threshold V1 min, you can define the minimum threshold of the voltage band.
The setting value is closed to the allowed lower limit of the voltage band. The default setting is 80 % of the
rated positive-sequence voltage. The value of the rated positive-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3.

Parameter: Threshold V1 max

• Default setting (_:2311:101) Threshold V1 max = 75.058 V


With the parameter Threshold V1 max, you can define the maximum threshold of the voltage band.
The setting value is closed to the allowed higher limit of the voltage band. The default setting is 130 % of the
rated positive-sequence voltage. The value of the rated positive-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3.

Parameter: T Block

• Default setting (_:2311:6) T Block = 0.10 s


With the parameter T Block, you set the dropout delay of the Δφ stage.
When voltages are connected or disconnected, the overfunction can be avoided with the timer T Block.
Siemens recommends to use the default setting of the parameter T Block. Keep in mind that the parameter
T Block has always to be set to 2 cycles more than the measuring window for vector-jump measurement.

6.58.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:102 General:Threshold V1 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.189 V
min
_:2311:101 General:Threshold V1 0.300 V to 175.000 V 75.058 V
max
_:2311:6 General:T Block 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

6.58.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:Δφ MV O
_:2311:300 General:Δφ out of meas. range SPS O

1320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

6.58.4 Δφ Stage

6.58.4.1 Description

Logic

[lo_DeltaPhi_Stage, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-522 Logic Diagram of the Δφ Stage

In the logic diagram, the I1 < Release stage is instantiated. You can find more information in chapter
6.58.5.1 Description.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the AND operation has no influence. The Operate indication is
issued under the following conditions:
• The parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked is set to no.
• The operate delay expires.

• The phase-angle differential exceeds the parameter Threshold Δφ.

Measurand
The Δφ stage gets the measured value Δφ from the general functionality.

Pickup
The Δφ stage compares the value of the vector jump Δφ with the Threshold Δφ.
If the value of the Threshold Δφ is exceeded, the pickup delay starts.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1321
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

The vector jump Δφ is stored in an RS flip-flop. Trippings can be delayed by the associated time delay.

Blocking the Stage


In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• The parameter Mode is in the state off.
• The binary input signal >Block stage is active.

• The signal Δφ out of meas. range is active.

6.58.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked

• Default setting (_:19261:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log. If you want the stage to have a warning indication only, set the parameter
Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes.

Parameter: Threshold Δφ

• Default setting (_:19261:101) Threshold Δφ = 10°


With the parameter Threshold Δφ, you can set the pickup value of the Δφ stage.
The parameter value to be set for the vector jump depends on the supply and load conditions. Load changes
cause a jump of the voltage vector. The value to be set must be established in accordance with the particular
power system. An estimation can be done based on the system equivalent circuit in Figure 6-520. A network
calculation considering the relevant source and load situations will be more precise.
If the setting for the parameter Threshold Δφ is too sensitive, every time loads are connected or discon-
nected, the protection function performs a network decoupling. Therefore, If no other calculated value is
applicable to the setting of this parameter, Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Operate delay

• Default setting (_:19261:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s


With the parameter Operate delay, you can set the operate delay of the Δφ stage. For the tripping stage,
set the operate delay between 0.00 s and 60.00 s.
Siemens recommends the default setting.
The following requirements can necessitate a change of the parameter Operate delay with respect to the
default setting:
• The operate indication should be transmitted with delay to a programmable logic.
• There shall be enough time for an external blocking to take effect.

Parameter: T Reset

• Default setting T Reset = 5.00 s


With the parameter T Reset, you can set the reset time for the Pickup indication stored in the RS flip-flop.
When the timer T Reset expires, the protection function is reset automatically.
The reset time meets the following conditions:
• The reset time depends on the decoupling requirements
• The reset time must expire before the circuit breaker is reclosed

1322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

6.58.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage Δφ 1
_:19261:1 Stage Δφ 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:19261:2 Stage Δφ 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:19261:101 Stage Δφ 1:Threshold 2.0° to 30.0° 10.0°
Δφ
_:19261:6 Stage Δφ 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:19261:7 Stage Δφ 1:T Reset 0.00 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s

6.58.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Stage Δφ 1
_:19261:81 Stage Δφ 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:19261:54 Stage Δφ 1:Inactive SPS O
_:19261:52 Stage Δφ 1:Behavior ENS O
_:19261:53 Stage Δφ 1:Health ENS O
_:19261:55 Stage Δφ 1:Pickup ACD O
_:19261:56 Stage Δφ 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:19261:57 Stage Δφ 1:Operate ACT O

6.58.5 I1 < Release Stage

6.58.5.1 Description

Logic

[lo_UndercurrentRelease_Stage, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-523 Logic Diagram of the I1 < Release Stage

The I1 < Release stage is an optional stage and is used to reduce the risk of overfunction.
The indication Undercurrent release is an additional safety criterion to avoid an unexpected trip. It indi-
cates a load loss of the connected line to the system and the phase-angle criterion is released. If any load in
the network is switched on or off, an unexpected trip can occur.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the Δφ stage works without current-flow criterion. You can find
more information in chapter 6.58.4.1 Description.
If the positive-sequence current falls below the parameter I< Threshold, the message Undercurrent
release is issued and is forwarded to the Δφ stage.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1323
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection

6.58.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: I< Threshold

• Default setting (_:101) I< Threshold = 0.100 A


With the parameter I< Threshold, you can set the pickup value of the I < Release stage corresponding to
the specific application. Consider that the current measuring point must be on the line side. The parameter I<
Threshold depends on the load situation.

6.58.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


I1 < Release #
_:101 I1 < Release #:I< 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
Threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

6.58.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
I1 < Release #
_:300 I1 < Release #:Undercurrent release SPS O

1324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

6.59 Arc Protection

6.59.1 Overview of Function

The function Arc protection:


• Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgear parts without delay and in a fail-safe way
• Limits system damage through instantaneous high-speed tripping

• Protect systems from thermal overload

• Increases safety of personnel

• Trips in a 3-pole way

• Is suitable for use in all voltage levels

6.59.2 Structure of the Function

The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
• General
• 3 stages

• Output logic 3-phase


The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages. A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated
simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function.

[dw_structure_arcprot, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-524 Structure/Embedding of the Arc Protection Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1325
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

6.59.3 Function Description

General Logic of the Function Block

[lo_fb0_arcprot, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-525 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block

1326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

Logic of the Stage

[lo_stage_arcprotection, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-526 Logic Diagram of the Stage

TheArc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.

NOTE

i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!

NOTE

i Once an optical sensor has detected an arc, you must replace the affected optical sensor!

Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1327
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

Method of Measurement, Current-Flow Criterion


The current-flow criterion works with 2 different methods of measurement.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. A direct-current component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the funda-
mental component is compared with the set threshold.

• Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:


If the current exceeds the threshold value set by the current amount ≥ 2 ⋅√2 ⋅ threshold value, the stage
uses additional unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short operate times are possible.

NOTE

i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
If you use the current-flow criterion, arcs are typically detected in 4 ms!

Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to the
arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module. If the
test signal is not returned to the arc protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure is
generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm and the stage/function is
blocked.

6.59.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings

Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply
to all stages.

Parameter: Threshold I>

• Default setting (_:2311:3) Threshold I> = 2.000 A


Use the parameter Threshold I> to define the trigger threshold of the phase currents. The Threshold I>
is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold I> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold I> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.16.4.2 Application and Setting
Notes .

Parameter: Threshold 3I0>

• Default setting (_:2311:4) Threshold 3I0> = 1.000 A


Use the parameter Threshold 3I0> to determine the tripping threshold for the zero-sequence current. The
Threshold 3I0> is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold 3I0> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold 3I0> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.17.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

NOTE

i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.

1328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

6.59.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage

Parameter: External trip initiation

• Default setting (_:14551:9) External trip initiation = no


With the External trip initiation parameter, you set whether an external input signal is used to
trigger the stage.
Parameter Value Description
no The stage does not operate with an external input signal.
current The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External current must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
In this setting option, the binary input signal >External current is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
light The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External light must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing. In
this setting option, the binary input signal >External light is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
Note: When working with the light external trip initiation, do not select a
channel. If an additional channel is selected with this setting value, the
DIGSI 5 will signal an inconsistency.

Parameter: Operating mode

• Default setting (_:14551:8) Operating mode = current and light


With the Operating mode parameter, you define the basic functionality of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light.
The current-flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an
arc.
Siemens recommends using this setting value.
light only This stage operates only with the input signal 'light' and is triggered even if
current is not measured.
This operating mode can cause a overfunction if light is detected suddenly.
Use this setting value only if the effect caused by external light signals is
impossible.

Parameter: Sensor

• Default setting (_:14551:11) Sensor = point sensor


With the Sensor parameter, you set which sensor type is connected to the device.
Parameter Value Description
point sensor A point sensor is connected to the device.
line sensor A line sensor is connected to the device.
custom If you select this setting option, the parameter Threshold light is
visible.
Siemens recommends the default setting values point sensor or line
sensor. This allows arcs to be detected reliably regardless of diffused light.

Parameter: Threshold light

• Default setting (_:14551:7) Threshold light = -20.00 dB

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1329
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

With the Threshold light parameter, you set the light sensitivity. If you set Threshold light to a
smaller value, the sensitivity increases. If you set Threshold light to a higher value, the sensitivity
decreases. If the sensors even pick up in case of a switching arc of the circuit breaker, set the Threshold
light parameter to a higher value.
Siemens recommends the default settings for point or line sensors.
Set the parameter Threshold light manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.

Parameter: Channel

• Default setting (_:14551:10) Channel = No channel is selected


With the Channelparameter, you select which sensor channel the stage uses.
If the Arc protection function has several stages, a different channel must be selected for each stage.
For parameter Channel, the selection texts are identical to the name of the arc-protection module and its
channels.

6.59.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:3 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:2311:4 General:Threshold 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
Stage 1
_:14551:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14551:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:14551:9 Stage 1:External trip • no no
initiation • current
• light
_:14551:8 Stage 1:Operating mode • light only current and light
• current and light
_:14551:11 Stage 1:Sensor • point sensor point sensor
• line sensor
• custom
_:14551:7 Stage 1:Threshold light -34.00 dB to -10.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14551:10 Stage 1:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration

1330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Stage 2
_:14552:1 Stage 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14552:2 Stage 2:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:14552:9 Stage 2:External trip • no no
initiation • current
• light
_:14552:8 Stage 2:Operating mode • light only current and light
• current and light
_:14552:11 Stage 2:Sensor • point sensor point sensor
• line sensor
• custom
_:14552:7 Stage 2:Threshold light -34.00 dB to -10.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14552:10 Stage 2:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration
Stage 3
_:14553:1 Stage 3:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14553:2 Stage 3:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked • yes
_:14553:9 Stage 3:External trip • no no
initiation • current
• light
_:14553:8 Stage 3:Operating mode • light only current and light
• current and light
_:14553:11 Stage 3:Sensor • point sensor point sensor
• line sensor
• custom
_:14553:7 Stage 3:Threshold light -34.00 dB to -10.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14553:10 Stage 3:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration

6.59.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
_:2311:301 General:Current detected SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Stage 1
_:14551:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:14551:501 Stage 1:>External current SPS I
_:14551:502 Stage 1:>External light SPS I

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1331
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:14551:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:14551:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:14551:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:14551:318 Stage 1:Fault arc counter INC C
_:14551:58 Stage 1:Arc detected SPS O
_:14551:301 Stage 1:Light detected SPS O
_:14551:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:14551:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
_:14552:81 Stage 2:>Block stage SPS I
_:14552:501 Stage 2:>External current SPS I
_:14552:502 Stage 2:>External light SPS I
_:14552:54 Stage 2:Inactive SPS O
_:14552:52 Stage 2:Behavior ENS O
_:14552:53 Stage 2:Health ENS O
_:14552:318 Stage 2:Fault arc counter INC C
_:14552:58 Stage 2:Arc detected SPS O
_:14552:301 Stage 2:Light detected SPS O
_:14552:55 Stage 2:Pickup ACD O
_:14552:57 Stage 2:Operate ACT O
Stage 3
_:14553:81 Stage 3:>Block stage SPS I
_:14553:501 Stage 3:>External current SPS I
_:14553:502 Stage 3:>External light SPS I
_:14553:54 Stage 3:Inactive SPS O
_:14553:52 Stage 3:Behavior ENS O
_:14553:53 Stage 3:Health ENS O
_:14553:318 Stage 3:Fault arc counter INC C
_:14553:58 Stage 3:Arc detected SPS O
_:14553:301 Stage 3:Light detected SPS O
_:14553:55 Stage 3:Pickup ACD O
_:14553:57 Stage 3:Operate ACT O

Information about the self-monitoring function of the arc protection module

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
channel #
_:307 channel #:Sensor failure SPS O

1332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

6.59.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only

6.59.8.1 Description

Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear

• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed

• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed

• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors:

[dw_arcprot-light-only, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-527 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Light only)

For this example, the following is assumed:


• The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off. This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart-
ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders are off.
Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartments (BB compartment) of the infeed and feeders.
Install additional optical point sensors in the circuit-breaker compartment (CB compartment) of the
feeders. Connect all optical point sensors to the protection device of the infeed.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1333
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

• The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart-
ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect it
to the protection device of the feeder. This allows for the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-
connection compartment.
Due to the pressure waves that occur during the formation of an arc, partitions can deform and cause
undesirable light influences in adjacent compartments. This can result in a non-selective tripping.

• If there is an arc in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must switch off.

NOTE

i If the Arc protection function operates in Operating mode = light only, the effects of external light
can result in non-selective tripping.

NOTE

i It must be considered that the number of arc protection modules connected to the device depends on the
hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular devices, a
maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.

6.59.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

General Notes

• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection
device in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit
breaker in feeder 1.

• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection
device in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2.

• Connect optical point sensors from all busbar compartments and all circuit-breaker compartments of
feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and
cleared by the device in the infeed.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1


The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no

• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1


The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 2


The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no

• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1

1334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed


The Arc protection function operates with 5 stages.
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)

• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in


feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (Stage 2) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 1 (Stage 4) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 2 (Stage 5) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed
The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.

6.59.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light and Current

6.59.9.1 Description

Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed

• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed

• Setting notes about selected parameters in the stages of the function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1335
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

[dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-528 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)

For this example, the following is assumed:


• The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light
influences.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder,
the current will therefore be evaluated in the infeed.

• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect
the optical point sensors to the protection device in the infeed.

• The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker
compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection
device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed.

• If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the
protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.

• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must trip.

NOTE

i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.

1336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

NOTE

i This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection
device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular devices,
a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.

6.59.9.2 Application and Setting Notes

General Notes

• Connect the optical point sensors from the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in the
busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable-connection compartment of
feeders 1 and 2 are detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.

• Connect an optical point sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in
the infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
the infeed.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed


The Arc protection function operates with 7 stages.
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)

• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in


feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (Stage 2) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 1 (Stage 4) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 2 (Stage 5) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 3 (Stage 6) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 3 channel 1 (Stage 7) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.59.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.

6.59.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip
Initiation

6.59.10.1 Description

Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1337
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

The following items are considered in the example below:


• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed

• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed

• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function

[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 3, en_US]

Figure 6-529 Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation

For this example, the following is assumed:


• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeder and the infeed. Connect the optical point sensors to the
respective protection device in the feeder and infeed.

• If the optical point sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment
of the feeders, the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface,
or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection device in the infeed
evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.59.10.2 Application and Setting Notes

• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can also be switched off selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the Current detected pickup indication from the
infeed unit must be sent to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.

• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device trips.

1338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

NOTE

i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point
sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection
module).
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is feasible.

6.59.10.2 Application and Setting Notes

General Notes:

• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.

• Arcs in the busbar compartment and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders must be switched
off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder device must
send the indication Light detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection
interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off faults on the busbar and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders.
Connect the signals over 4 stages, using the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.

• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders are switched off locally. The protection device
in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold
I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in
the feeders. If, at the same time, an optical sensor in a cable-connection compartment detects light, the
protection device trips in the corresponding feeder.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1


The Arc protection function operates with 3 stages.
Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no

• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes

• Parameter: Channel = (Stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in feeder 1


Parameter: Channel = (Stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision in feeder 1
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = current


The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1339
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

• Parameter: Channel =

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 2


The Arc protection function operates with 3 stages.
Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no

• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes

• Parameter: Channel = (Stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in feeder 2


Parameter: Channel = (Stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision in feeder 2
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = current


The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

• Parameter: Channel =

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed


The Arc protection function operates with 7 stages.
Stage 1 (busbar-compartment supervision):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no
If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment of the infeed and the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0> are exceeded, an operate indication is generated immediately.

• Parameter: Channel =

• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light

• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no


Stage 2 (circuit-breaker compartment supervision):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
If an arc is detected in the circuit-breaker compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-529), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.

• Parameter: Channel =

• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light

1340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no


Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment supervision):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-529), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.
Depending where the arc is generated in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, it is not
always possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the current must be evaluated by the superordinate protection device.

• Parameter: Channel =

• Parameter: Operating mode = light only

• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no


Stage 4 to 7 (External trip initiation):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light

• Parameter: External trip initiation = light


If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeder, the
feeder device sends the Light detected indication to the infeed device. Only if the indication in the
infeed device Light detected is connected with the signal >External light, an external trip
initiation via these stages is effective.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off the arc.

6.59.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current

6.59.11.1 Description

Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with 1 infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Optical line sensor placement in the switchgear
• Optical line sensor connection to the protection device in the infeed

• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the infeed protection device

• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1341
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

[dw_Liniensensor, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-530 Layout and Connection of the Optical Line Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)

For this example, the following is assumed:


• The current-flow criterion offers additional protection to prevent unwanted tripping caused by the
sudden effects of light.

• Figure 6-530 shows how the optical line sensors should be routed. Start in the infeed busbar compart-
ment and route the optical line sensor along the busbar and back again to the protection device in the
infeed. Connect the optical line sensor to the protection device in the infeed.

• Depending on the routing options in the control cabinet, you can also route the optical line sensor
through the circuit-breaker and cable-connection compartments of the feeders.
If this is not possible, you can detect arcs in these compartments using point sensors. For more detailed
information, see chapters 6.59.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light Only and 6.59.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light and Current.

• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device will shut off.

NOTE

i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion will prevent unwanted tripping caused by external light effects.

NOTE

i Note that the number of arc protection modules that are connected to the device depend on the hardware
configuration of the equipment.
When using modular equipment, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular equip-
ment, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Depending on the use case, you can combine point and line sensors.

1342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection

6.59.11.2 Application and Setting Notes

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed


The Arc protection function operates with 1 stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light
• Parameter: Sensor = line sensor

• Parameter: External trip initiation = no

• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision (infeed,
feeder 1, feeder 2)
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.59.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1343
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection

6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection

6.60.1 Overview of Functions

The function block Voltage measuring-point selection can:


• Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring
points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group

• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.

6.60.2 Function Description

The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of 1-phase voltage measuring
points or of 3-phase voltage measuring points by a logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input
>MP-ID selection depending on the switch positions of disconnectors.

Example
Figure 6-531 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank
in a double busbar application.

[dwbusbardouble.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-531 Double Busbar with Capacitor Bank

Connecting Measuring Points to Capacitor Bank Function Group


Figure 6-532 shows the connection of the function group Capacitor bank with several measuring points in
DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the bracket after the name.

1344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection

[scconnection, 1, en_US]

Figure 6-532 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group

There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.

• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.

• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.

6.60.3 Application and Setting Notes

CFC Control
The voltage measuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than
one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block
Voltage measuring-point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 6-531.
If the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 (QB2) is, the value 2
is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the Meas.point
V-3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is selected as
the reference voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is not closed (open or in intermediate position) while
Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.

[SclocfcVP, 1, --_--]

Figure 6-533 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID

However, the disconnectors might be both open or in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the block
bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 is used as the ID for voltage selection input ( >MP-ID selection). If
ID 0 is selected, then all voltage values of the respective function-group interface are set to 0 V immediately.
An alarm indication Selection invalid is issued and the indication Health is issued as OK. In case you
want to supply the function group with voltage values under the condition that both disconnectors are open
or in transient state from one or the other busbar, you can alter the CFC chart respectively.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1345
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection

NOTE

i An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID
selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to invalid.

• The indication Health is set to Alarm.

• The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

6.60.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
V-MP selection
_:501 V-MP selection:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:53 V-MP selection:Health ENS O
_:301 V-MP selection:Selection invalid SPS O

1346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
7 Control Functions

7.1 Introduction 1348


7.2 Switching Devices 1351
7.3 Switching Sequences 1380
7.4 Control Functionality 1387
7.5 Synchronization Function 1411
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control] 1451
7.7 CFC-Chart Settings 1454
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers 1456
7.9 Voltage Controller 1469

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1347
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction

7.1 Introduction

7.1.1 Overview

The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.

7.1.2 Concept of Controllables

The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).

1348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction

[sc_control, 1, en_US]

(1) Position (connect with binary inputs)


(2) Signalization of the current condition
(3) Command output (connect with relay)

The trip, opening and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.

Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1349
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction

4 different control models are available:


• Direct without feedback monitoring (direct w. normal secur.)
• With reservation (SBO)35 without feedback monitoring (SBO w. normal secur.)

• Direct with feedback monitoring (direct w. enh. security)

• With SBO with feedback monitoring (SBO w. enh. security)


The next figure shows the command sources, command types, and control models.

[dwsteuer-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-1 Command Sources, Command Types and Control Models

The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.

35 SBO: Select Before Operate

1350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

7.2 Switching Devices

7.2.1 General Overview

The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching-
devices function groups (see the following images).

[sccbausw, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Menu

[scswausw, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu

7.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker

7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device


This chapter describes the control properties of the Circuit-breaker switching device.
The Circuit-breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control:
• Function block Circuit breaker
• Function block Control

• Function block Interlocking


This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices, additional functions can be
contained in the Circuit-breaker switching device, for example, Synchrocheck, the Automatic reclosing
(AREC), the Trip logic or Manual On function. However, these are not relevant for the control function. The
description of these functions can be found in the chapter Protection and Automatic Functions. In addition,
other functions can be initialized. The description of these functions can be found in the chapter Protection
Functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1351
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[dwbreake-220512-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-4 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device

The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
The Circuit-breaker switching device is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library in 3 different variants:
• 3-pole circuit breaker
This switching device contains additional base function blocks for protection functions (for example, trip
logic, Manual close, circuit-breaker test).

• 1-pole circuit breaker


This switching device is intended for 1-pole tripping via the protection functions and contains the same
base function blocks for protection as the 3-pole circuit breaker switching device.

• Circuit breaker (status only)


This switching device contains only the Circuit-breaker function block. It is used to acquire the position
of a switch, for example, from a neighboring bay. This object type can be used to model switches that
can only be read but not controlled by the SIPROTEC 5 device.

1352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

NOTE

i When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole
tripping)
- Circuit breaker (status only)

Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker

Table 7-1 Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

Function Description Parameters Function


Block
Circuit The Circuit-breaker function Output time The circuit breaker forms the
breaker block in the SIPROTEC 5 switch position from the posi-
device represents the physical tions of the binary inputs and
switch. also outputs the command via
the binary outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command check, communica-
SBO time-out tion with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block Circuit breaker
Check switching
authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Check blk. by protection
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (depos- The Interlocking functionality
locking protection ited in CFC) generates the releases for
switchgear interlocking
protection.

The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.

Additional Setting Options of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Element


The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance.
Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function
blocks are nevertheless available:

Table 7-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker.

Properties Function To Be Found in


Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control function
detection block 36
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filtering time on/off by changing block36
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block36
time stamp

36 First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1353
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Properties Function To Be Found in


Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block36
the duration of the software
filtering time.
Treatment of spontaneous If you select the General soft- Position of the Control function
position changes (Gen. Soft- ware filter setting, the general block36
ware Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and
for position changes caused by a
switching command apply. By
selecting Spontaneous soft-
ware filter, a separate filtering
is activated for spontaneous posi-
tion changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control function
filtering time neous position changes block36
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block36
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block36
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Inhibit intermediate posi- When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control function
tion for a spontaneous neous change to the intermediate block36
chng. (yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.

Table 7-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Properties Function To Be Found in


Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Circuit-breaker
function block36

Table 7-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings having Effects on the Circuit Breaker

Properties Function To Be Found in


Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
status changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter idle time
Chatter check time

The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit-breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (see 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).

Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see the overreaching chapter
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.

1354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes

Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.

[dwfuncls-140212-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks

Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.

EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.

Table 7-5 Inputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block

Signal Name Description Type Default Value if


Signal Quality =
invalid
>Ready The signal >Ready indicates that the OFF-ON-OFF SPS Going
cycle is possible with the circuit breaker.
This signal is used for the AREC standby status.
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting the acquisition blocking and the substi-
tution is blocked.
>Reset switch Among other things, the binary input sets the opera- SPS Unchanged
statist. tion counter for the switch to the value 0.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1355
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Signal Name Description Type Default Value if


Signal Quality =
invalid
External health The binary input External health reflects the ENS Unchanged
circuit-breaker status (EHealth).
This input will be set by the CFC using the BUILD_ENS
block. In turn, BUILD_ENS can query binary inputs that
represent the conditions OK, Warning, or Alarm (as
a result of the function Trip-circuit supervision).
Position The signal Position can be used to read the circuit- DPC Unchanged
breaker position with double-point indication.

If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.

Table 7-6 Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block

Signal Name Description Type


Definitive trip Protection has finally been tripped. SPS
Alarm suppression The signaling contact for external alarm inhibition is suppressed during SPS
the runtime of automatic reclosing (optional) as well as during the
command output of switching commands.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of switching cycles of the circuit INS
breaker.
Trip/open cmd. This logic output is responsible for the command output Off. SPS
Close command This logic output is responsible for the command output On. SPS
Command active The binary output Command active is responsible for signaling a SPS
running command (relay active or selected switching device (SEL)).
CB open hours The statistical value counts the hours the circuit breaker is open. INS
Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is INS
greater than the Current thresh. CB open parameter.

Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation37), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security38 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)

37 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
38 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

1356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values


(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes

The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.

[dwsteue1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block

Table 7-7 Control Function Block Input and Output

Signal Description Type Value if Signal


Name Quality=Invalid
Cmd. with With the Cmd. with feedback signal, the circuit- Controllable Unchanged
feedback breaker position is accepted via the double-point indi- (DPC)
cation of the Circuit-breaker function block and the Unchanged
command is issued.

In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.

7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker


For each switching device, you can establish the number of poles (for example, 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole)
that are switched with or without feedback. This results in the necessary amount of information to be
processed, thus establishing the command type.
Whether the circuit breaker is triggered 1-, 1.5-, or 2-pole, depends on the design of the auxiliary and control-
voltage system. In most cases, the activation of the opening coil of the circuit breaker is 1-pole.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1357
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Table 7-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants

Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviation of the Connection Variants


BO Binary output
L+; L- Control voltage
A Trip command
Gnd Close command

Table 7-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI

Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI


V Unsaved trip command
Click the right mouse button and enter V.
X Close Command
Click the right mouse button and enter X for the respective binary output.
OH The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter OH.
OL The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (L).
Click the right mouse button and enter OL.
GH The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CH.
CL The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CL.
TL Trip command stored
Click the right mouse button and enter TL.

Connection Variant: 3-Pole Circuit Breaker


This is the standard type for the control function. All 3 individual poles of the circuit breaker are triggered
together by a double command.

[dw3polls-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-7 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

1358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

1-Pole Triggering

[dw1polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-8 1-Pole Triggering

[scrang1pLS1p, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-9 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1359
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

1.5-Pole Triggering

[dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-10 1.5-Pole Triggering

[scrang1pLS15p, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-11 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

1360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

2-Pole Triggering

[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-12 2-Pole Triggering

[scrang1pLS13p, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-13 2-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker


The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit
breaker. It is intended for common use by 1-pole protection and control functions.

NOTE

i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device .

The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1361
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally, only the open
poles are closed.

[dw1polls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-14 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering

For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).

[dw1panls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-15 1-Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker

1362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[scrang1pLS13pz, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-16 Routing in DIGSI

In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the
3 phases (Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition,
the 3 U (Unlatched) routings of the trip and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also used by
protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.

Example: Trip Command during Transition from 1-Pole to 3-Pole


During a transition from 1-pole to 3-pole tripping, Trip only pole A remains active. To inform, for
example, an external AREC whether it is a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, you can use the indication Trip
logic:Trip indication:1-pole and Trip logic:Trip indication:3-pole.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1363
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]

Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position


The binary inputs for feedback of the switch position are routed as shown in the previous figure (also see
chapter 5.5.5.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).

1364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[scrang1pLSHk, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-17 Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI

The meaning of abbreviations can be found in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.

7.2.2.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
normal current
_:2311:102 General:Rated 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
thresh. CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:113 General:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1365
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:2311:136 General:Op. mode • unbalancing unbalancing
BFP • I> query
Trip logic
_:5341:101 Trip logic:Trip at • 3-pole 3-pole
2ph short circuit • 1-pole, leading phase
• 1-pole, lagging phase
_:5341:102 Trip logic:3-pole • with pickup with trip
coupling • with trip
_:5341:103 Trip logic:Reset of • with I< with I<
trip command • with I< & aux.contact
• with dropout
Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
break.:Output time
_:4261:105 Circuit • with trip always
break.:Indicat. of • always
breaking values
Manual close
_:6541:101 Manual 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
close:Action time
_:6541:102 Manual close:CB 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
open dropout delay
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control • status only SBO w. enh.
model • direct w. normal secur. security
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
monitoring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
• advanced
_:4201:105 Control:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached • yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check • no yes
double activat. blk. • yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. • no yes
by protection • yes
Switching authority
_:4201:151 Control:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth. • 1
_:4201:152 Control:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities • 1
_:4201:115 Control:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for • station/remote
• remote
_:4201:153 Control:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.

1366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:4201:155 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1
_:4201:156 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 2
_:4201:157 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 3
_:4201:158 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 4
_:4201:159 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 5
_:4201:154 Control:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth. • 1
CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
_:6151:102 CB test:Trip only • 0 false
• 1
_:6151:103 CB test:Consider • 0 false
current criterion • 1
_:6151:104 CB test:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

7.2.2.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA DPC C
_:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB DPC C
_:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:401 Circuit break.:Trip only pole A SPS O
_:4261:402 Circuit break.:Trip only pole B SPS O
_:4261:403 Circuit break.:Trip only pole C SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1367
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A INS O
_:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B INS O
_:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O
Reset LED Group
_:13381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:13381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:4201:309 Control:Enable sw. auth. 2 SPC C
_:4201:310 Control:Enable sw. auth. 3 SPC C
_:4201:311 Control:Enable sw. auth. 4 SPC C
_:4201:312 Control:Enable sw. auth. 5 SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O

1368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
CB test
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C
_:6151:312 CB test:Pole A open-close SPC C
_:6151:313 CB test:Pole B open-close SPC C
_:6151:314 CB test:Pole C open-close SPC C

7.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device

7.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device


Like the circuit breaker, the Disconnector switching device contains the following 3 function blocks:
• Function block Disconnector
• Function block Control

• Function block Interlocking


This corresponds to the logical nodes XSWI, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.

NOTE

i In contrast to the Circuit-breaker switching device, the Disconnector switching device cannot contain any
additional functions because protection functions or synchronization can have no effect on the discon-
nector.

The following figure shows the structure of the Disconnector switching element:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1369
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[dwdiscon-190612-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-18 Control-Relevant Function Blocks of the Disconnector Switching Device

The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference is
the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit
breaker). Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block.
The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants:
• Disconnector with 3-pole connection
The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously.

• Disconnector without triggering (only status detection, no control)


This variant is rarely encountered. It is encountered with grounding switches that frequently cannot be
controlled, but only provide their current position. In addition, the position of a disconnector in a neigh-
boring bay can be acquired.

1370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Function Blocks of the Disconnector

Table 7-10 Function Blocks of the Disconnector Function Group

Function Description Parameters Function


Block
Discon- The disconnector represents Maximum output time The disconnector replicates
nector the physical switch in the Seal-in time the switch position from the
SIPROTEC 5 device. Switching-device type status of the binary inputs
and also transmits the
command via the binary
outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command checks, commu-
SBO time-out nication with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the func-
tion block Disconnector
Check switching authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (deposited The Interlocking function-
locking protection in CFC) ality generates the releases
for switchgear interlocking
protection.

The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.

Additional Settings of Disconnector Switching Element


The settings of the disconnector are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance. Additional
disconnector settings that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks and are identical to the
circuit-breaker settings are available:

Table 7-11 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker

Characteristics Function To Be Found in


Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control(1) function
detection block
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filtering time on/off by changing block
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control(1) function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block
the duration of the software
filtering time.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1371
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Characteristics Function To Be Found in


Spontaneous position If the General software Position of the Control(1) function
changes filtered by (Gen. filter setting is selected, the block
Software Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) general settings for software
filtering of spontaneous position
changes and for position changes
caused by a switching command
apply. By selecting Spontaneous
software filter, a separate
filtering is activated for sponta-
neous position changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
filter time neous position changes block
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Spontaneous suppress When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
intermediate position neous change to the intermediate block
(yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
(1) First click Position and then the Details key in the Properties window (below).

Table 7-12 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Disconnector Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Characteristics Function To Be Found in


Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Disconnector (1)
function block
(1) First click Position and then the Details key in the Properties window (below).

Table 7-13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with effect on the Disconnector

Characteristics Function To Be Found in


Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
state changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter dead time
Chatter test time

The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Disconnector switch function block are described
in the next chapter (see 7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector). The Control function block is described
identically as the Circuit-breaker function block, with the exception that the command check blocking is avail-
able through protection only with the circuit breaker.
More information on this is can be found in chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.

Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see chapter 7.4.1 Command
Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.

1372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Disconnector
The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is to
replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that
register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
The Disconnector function block makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:5401:101) Maximum output time 10.00 s 0.02 s to 1800 s
The Maximum output time specifies the duration (Increment: 0.01 s)
of the output pulse created by the switching
command.
(_:5401:102) Seal-in time 0.00 s 0 s to 60 s
If the target actuating position is not yet attained
although feedback has already been received, the
output time is extended by the Seal-in time. The
Seal-in time is relevant for equipment that sends
feedback before the switching operation is
completely performed. The Seal-in time is only
considered for control models with feedback moni-
toring.
(_:5401:103) Switching-device type disconnector switch-disconnector
The Switching-device type specifies the type of disconnector
the switching device. grounding switch
fast grounding switch

NOTE

i The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. This parameter is
used to set the disconnector switching device type for communication via IEC 61850. It is a mandatory data
object in the IEC 61850 standard.

The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Disconnector function block.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1373
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[dwoutinp-150212-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block

Table 7-14 and Table 7-15 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.

Table 7-14 Inputs of the Disconnector Function Block

Signal Name Description Type Value if Signal


Quality=Invalid
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting of the acquisition blocking and of the
substitution is blocked.
>Reset switch The binary input sets the operation counter for the SPS Unchanged
statist. switch to the value 0.
Position The binary input Position can be used to read the DPC Unchanged
disconnector position with double-point indication.

If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.

Table 7-15 Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block

Signal Name Description Type


Open command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output Off.
Close command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output On.
Command active The binary output Command active is a running SPS
command for the signalization (command active or
selected switching device). During Command active
either an On or Off command is active.

1374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

Signal Name Description Type


Op.ct. The information counts the number of disconnector INS
switching cycles.

Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation39), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security40 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s -
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 10.00 s -
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes

7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector


The activation types are identical to those for the circuit breaker. The meaning of abbreviations can be found
in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
Whether the disconnector is triggered for 1-, 1.5-, or 2-phases depends on the design of the auxiliary and
control voltage system.

1-Pole Triggering

[dw1ptren-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-20 1-Pole Triggering

39 In the IEC 61850 standard, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
40 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1375
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[scrangtrenn1p, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-21 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.

1.5-Pole Triggering

[dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-22 1.5-Pole Triggering

1376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[scrangtrenn15p, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-23 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

2-Pole Triggering

[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-24 2-Pole Triggering

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1377
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

[scrangtrenn2p, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-25 2-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

The feedback is routed via the position with the disconnector.

7.2.3.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
• direct w. normal secur. security
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
toring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority • yes
_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached • yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk. • yes
Disconnector
_:5401:101 Disconnector:Maximum 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
output time
_:5401:102 Disconnector:Seal-in time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5401:103 Disconnector:Switching- • switch-disconnector disconnector
device type • disconnector
• grounding switch
• fast grounding switch

1378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices

7.2.3.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:4201:309 Control:Enable sw. auth. 2 SPC C
_:4201:310 Control:Enable sw. auth. 3 SPC C
_:4201:311 Control:Enable sw. auth. 4 SPC C
_:4201:312 Control:Enable sw. auth. 5 SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
Disconnector
_:5401:500 Disconnector:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:5401:501 Disconnector:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:5401:53 Disconnector:Health ENS O
_:5401:58 Disconnector:Position DPC C
_:5401:300 Disconnector:Open command SPS O
_:5401:301 Disconnector:Close command SPS O
_:5401:302 Disconnector:Command active SPS O
_:5401:305 Disconnector:Op.ct. INS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1379
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

7.3 Switching Sequences

7.3.1 Overview of Functions

Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.

7.3.2 Function Description

The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.

[scudeffb-150816-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-26 Function block Switching Sequence in the Library

These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block is
to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking condi-
tions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 7-27). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.

1380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

[dwswseq1-110913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-27 Switching Sequence Function Block

Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence


One of the following methods can be used to start a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page

• Input >Start during rising edge, for example, via binary input

• Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP

• Input >Start via a function key

• Controllable Start via a function key


One of the following methods can be used to cancel a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Cancel during rising edge, for example, via binary input

• Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or
DNP

• Input >Cancel via a function key

• Controllable Cancel via a function key

On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry is
shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 7-28, example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1381
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

Figure 7-28
Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display

7.3.3 Application and Setting Notes

The function block offers similar settings to the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector (see
chapter 7.2.1 General Overview).

[scccs4pa-13112014_DE, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-29 Settings of the Switching Sequence Function Block

Parameter: Check switching authority


• Default setting (_:101) Check switching authority = yes
With the Check switching authority parameter, you can determine whether the switching authority
should be checked before the execution of the switching sequence.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:102) Check double activat. blk. = yes
With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you can determine whether the double activation of
switching devices should be checked. The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will be
started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are active, provided that double-
activation blocking was activated for those switching devices.
Parameter: Time-out monitoring
With the Time-out monitoring parameter, you can determine whether the feedback from the process
should be evaluated. The feedback is gathered via the inputs >Successful and >Failed.
Parameter: Monitoring time
• Default setting (_:104) Monitoring time = 30.00 s
With the Monitoring time parameter, you can determine the duration of the monitoring time.

1382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

Parameter: Control model


• Default setting (_:105) Control model = SBO w. normal secur.
With the Control model parameter, you select between direct w. normal secur. or SBO w.
normal secur. to start the switching sequence.
It is not possible to set a control model for cancelation of the switching sequence. The control model direct
w. normal secur. is always used to cancel the function.

Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data:

[scinfof1-13112014, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-30 Data Provided by the Switching Sequence Function Block

In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it
is possible to use it in the switching sequence:
• >Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.

• >Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the time-out monitoring is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback must take
place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching sequence
was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feedback of the last
switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and does not have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current state of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out monitoring is activated. The
event Start Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.

Example for a Switching Sequence with CFC


The following figure shows a single-line diagram for a substation with 4 bays: Busbar grounding, infeed, bus
coupler, and feeder bay.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1383
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

[dwbspunt-120913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-31 Example of a Substation

The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 7-32) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.

[Scssc4as-110913-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-32 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off

1384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

Command Execution
As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 1381, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC-
DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs. The
DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
• VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
• SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)

• OPERATE = Switch switching device (1 = Switching device is switched on or off)


Using the connected DPC-EXE building block, the command checks can be deactivated (REL_...). In the appli-
cation example, all inputs are set to 0 and therefore, all checks are activated.
After the open command of circuit breaker QA1 is acknowledged via the auxiliary contacts, the OK output of
the CFC block DPC_EXE becomes active and triggers the next switching object. With the input PT the signal for
the OK output is time-delayed (in the example by 10 ms) and creates a dead time between individual
switching commands and the switching sequence. This dead time is important for the updating of the inter-
locking conditions.
If QB1 is closed, QB1 will be opened. If QB2 is closed, QB2 will be opened. In order to implement this logic, the
OK output signal of QA1 is linked with the respective positions of circuit breakers QB1 and QB2 via the logical
AND function. This signal serves as a trigger for the trip command of QB1 or QB2.
Because in this example the time-out monitoring is activated, the feedback about the successful or unsuc-
cessful execution of the switching sequence must be parameterized. The Switching sequence function block
provides the inputs >Successful and >Failed. In order to acknowledge the entire switching sequence
positively, the OR operation of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient. The feedback
of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices. The
benefit of such assessment is the fact that, in case of a failure, waiting for the time-out is not necessary, but
the active switching sequence can be ended immediately.
In this example, the use of the EN_I input of building block DPC-DEF fulfills 2 tasks:
• Cancelation of the entire switching sequence
• Resetting of the outputs OK and ERR on building block DPC-EXE
By linking all EN_I inputs and EN_O outputs of building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE, the execution of the
switching sequence can be controlled centrally since the value is transmitted between the building blocks.
Only if input EN_I on the DPC-EXE is set to 1, a switching command is issued. If the input drops back to 0 while
a command is being processed, this command will be canceled. With this behavior, cancelation of an entire
switching sequence can be achieved. As recognition of a cancelation, the canceled signal of the indication
Execution is used in the CFC chart and connected with the input EN_I of the first switching device, in this
example, with the DPC-DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1.
Since the OK and ERR outputs of the DPC-EXE building block maintain their value until execution of the next
command, it is necessary to reset the continuous output after each execution of the switching sequence for
correct execution of the entire CFC switching sequence multiple times. In this case, the use of the EN_I input
is also helpful. In the input drops back to 0, the OK and ERR outputs are also reset to 0. The triggers for ending
the switching sequence are the events failed and successful. For this reason, in the above example, the
signals failed and successful of the indication Execution were connected with EN_I of the DPC-DEF
building block.

7.3.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Swi. seq. #
_:101 Swi. seq. #:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
• advanced

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1385
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:102 Swi. seq. #:Check double • no yes
activat. blk. • yes
_:103 Swi. seq. #:Time-out • 0 true
monitoring • 1
_:104 Swi. seq. #:Monitoring 0.02 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s
time
_:105 Swi. seq. #:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. normal
model • SBO w. normal secur. secur.
_:106 Swi. seq. #:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
Switching authority
_:151 Swi. seq. #:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth. • 1
_:152 Swi. seq. #:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities • 1
_:115 Swi. seq. #:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for • station/remote
• remote
_:153 Swi. seq. #:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:154 Swi. seq. #:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth. • 1

7.3.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Swi. seq. #
_:501 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start SPS I
_:502 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start (fixed) SPS I
_:503 Swi. seq. #:>Start SPS I
_:504 Swi. seq. #:>Cancel SPS I
_:505 Swi. seq. #:>Successful SPS I
_:506 Swi. seq. #:>Failed SPS I
_:53 Swi. seq. #:Health ENS O
_:302 Swi. seq. #:Execution ENS O
_:304 Swi. seq. #:Start SPC C
_:305 Swi. seq. #:Cancel SPC C

1386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

7.4 Control Functionality

7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection

Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote)

• Switching direction (set=actual)

• Bay interlocking and substation interlocking

• 1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking)

• Blocking by protection function

Confirmation IDs (with Inactive RBAC)


SIPROTEC 5 devices can operate using role-based access control (RBAC). If RBAC is active in the device, the
authorizations to execute various actions are linked directly to the role concept.
If RBAC is inactive in the device, various actions are secured using the confirmation IDs. The following confir-
mation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:

[scconf89-061016-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-33 Confirmation IDs in DIGSI 5: Settings Menu

The following table identifies the meanings of the confirmation IDs:

Table 7-16 Relevant Confirmation IDs for Controls

Confirmation ID Meaning Description


Set/operate Changing settings The confirmation ID is requested before device
parameters can be changed.
Operation (function Process data access via Access to process data is possible with the help of
buttons) function buttons push-buttons and function buttons. The confirma-
tion ID of Set/operation is requested.
Control (process) General release for control The confirmation ID is usually not needed for bay
of switching devices controllers. In the case of protection devices, this
confirmation ID can be used to safeguard control
of switching devices.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1387
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

Confirmation ID Meaning Description


Control (non-interlocked) Switching non-interlocked Switching mode:
Release for switching without querying the inter-
locking conditions (S1 operation). The fixed
interlocking conditions (for example, >Enable
opening(fixed) and >Enable closing
(fixed)) are still queried if this is set in the
parameters.
The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
Switching authority Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.

The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values:


• Set/operate 222222

• Control (process, interlocked) 333333

• Control (not-interlocked) 444444

• Switching authority local 666666


If you have configured a device with key switches, the confirmation IDs for non-interlocked switching and
switching authority are not displayed or editable in DIGSI; the function is handled by the position of the key
switch.
To increase security, change these codes with DIGSI.

Switching Mode (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked)


The switching mode determines whether or not the switchgear interlocking that has been configured in the
CFC is checked before the command is output.
You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 (interlocking off/normal). For devices without a
key switch, you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display (after
entering a confirmation ID). You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources
DIGSI, station or remote.

! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off.
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.

In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).

1388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[scmoscha-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-34 Switching Mode in Function Block General

The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.

Table 7-17 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks

Command Check Switching Mode


Interlocked Non-Interlocked
Switching authority Checked Checked
Switching direction (set=actual) Checked Checked
Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked
Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked
1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking) Checked Not checked
Blocking by protection function Checked Not checked

Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Local) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of on-site operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.

• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance) is
accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.

• Station:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Station or Automatic station) is accepted if the
switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from the
device or from outside the station (cause-of-error source Local, Remote, or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the this switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1389
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Station is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set to
Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the station (cause-of-error source Local, Station or Automatic station) are rejected.

[schoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-35 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)

Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to non-interlocked.
The following table shows the dependency of the switching mode on the key-switch position and the
switching authority. In the case of switching commands from Remote, the information on whether a locked
or non-interlocked switching should take place is also sent. For this reason, the position of the key switch is
irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases. The information in the table assumes that, in the case of
remote switching commands or those from the station, the switching mode is interlocked in each case.

Table 7-18 Dependency of the Switching Mode on the Key-Switch Position and Switching Authority

Switching Authority
Key Switch for Switching Mode Local Remote Station
Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
Non-interlocked Non- interlocked Interlocked Interlocked

1390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

The signals shown in Figure 7-35 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.

• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.

• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 7-36 and Figure 7-37).

[dwhoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-36 Establishing Switching Authority

[dwmodsch-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-37 Establishing Switching Mode

In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1391
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

The following additional settings are available for the switching authority:
• Activation of Switching Authority Station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2):
If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control.

• Multiple Switching Authority Levels:


This option permits switching commands from several command sources in the device if the switching
authority Remote is selected. Subsequently, a distinction between these command sources can also be
made. You can find more details in the following table. Activate this option by setting the check mark
General/Control.

• Specific sw. authorities:


You can enable additional options for the switching authority check. You can find more information
about these options in section Specific Switching Authority, Page 1393. By default, these are not used.

[scakthoh-161014, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-38 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels

Table 7-19 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled with/
without Activation of the Station Switching Authority

Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting


Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
Levels vated Authority
Local – – – Local

No Signed on – – DIGSI

Remote No – Station and


Not signed on
remote
Yes Set Station
Not set Remote
Local – – – Local

Yes Signed on – – DIGSI

Remote No – Local and station


Not signed on
and remote
Yes Set Local and station
Not set Local and station
and remote

1392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority
and the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command
sources when using Station and Remote).

Table 7-20 Result of a Switching-Authority Check

Cause Source Switching Authority


Local DIGSI Station Remote
Local Release Blocked Blocked Blocked
Station Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
Remote Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
Local automatic Release Release Release Release
operation
Station automatic Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
operation
Remote automatic Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
operation
DIGSI Blocked Release Blocked Blocked

Specific Switching Authority


Special switching authorities can be configured as extension of the switching-authority check. This makes it
possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level. Switching authority can be routed to
or revoked from different control centers that can, for example, belong to different companies. Thus, precisely
one of these command sources can switch at a certain time. This function is based on extending the
switching-authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source (field Originator/orIdent of
switching command). In order to turn on the function, go to General/Control and set the check mark for the
parameter Specific sw. authorities. More settings for the configuration of the identifiers and the
behavior of the function as well as additional signals appear (see Figure 7-40). In order to permit an additional
command source to switch, you must activate this specific switching authority. In order to do this, set the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1393
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[sc_act additional options sw authority, 3, en_US]

Figure 7-39 Activating Additional Options of the Switching Authority

The additional parameters allow you to set the following options:


• Specific sw.auth. valid for (for station/remote, only remote or only station):
With this parameter, you determine for which command source the extended switching-authority check
is used.

Table 7-21 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw.auth. valid
for and the Level of the Command Source (Field Originator/orCat of the Switching
Command)

Command Source Specific sw.auth. valid for


station station/remote remote
Local, local automatic No check No check No check
Station, station automatic Check Check No check
Remote, remote auto- No check Check Check
matic
DIGSI No check No check No check

1394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

• Num. of specific sw.auth.:


With this parameter, you determine how many specific switching authorities are available. This deter-
mines the number of parameters Identifier switching authority as well as the controllable
Active. Sw. auth..

• Identifier switching authority 1 to Identifier switching authority 5:


The number of names that appear corresponds to the number set in the previous parameter. You can
select the names as you wish, 1 to 64 characters are allowed. The command check verifies whether these
titles correspond with those sent by the command source. This applies to the switching commands as
well as to the activation of a specific switching authority. The requirement for this is the system interface
IEC 61850. The field Originator/orIdent is used.

• Multiple specific sw.auth. ensures the simultaneous validity of the various command sources.
The following table shows how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating
the command sources of Remote or Station. If this parameter is activated, all parameterized command
sources get permissible automatically (see last row in the table) and they cannot be deactivated via the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5. Otherwise, the enabled command
source with the lowest number has always the highest priority and prevails against the other numbers.

Table 7-22 Determining Switching Authority if Multiple Command Sources Are Available

Multiple Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Resulting
specific auth. 1 auth. 2 auth. 3 auth. 4 auth. 5 Specific
sw.auth. Switching
Authority
No On * * * * Switch. auth. 1
No Off On * * * Switch. auth. 2
No Off Off On * * Switch. auth. 3
No Off Off Off On * Switch. auth. 4
No Off Off Off Off On Switch. auth. 5
No Off Off Off Off Off None
Yes On On On On On All

The * symbol in the previous table refers to any value.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1395
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[sc_sw authority and mode in info routing, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-40 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Information Routing (in Function
Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities

Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices
In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority as
described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all
switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit. In addition, you can configure an individual switching
authority and specific switching authority as well as individual switching modes for single switching devices.
Therefore, individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta-
neously.
This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks:
• Circuit-breaker function group
• Disconnector function group

• Transformer tap changer function group

• Switching sequence function block


This allows to select individual settings for each switching device. This is useful if, for example, switching
devices of different utilities are managed within a single bay.
In order to activate this option, go to the function block Control of a switching device and set the parameter
Check switching authority to advanced. An additional table containing initially 2 parameters is
displayed.

1396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[sc_add parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-41 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device

When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as
an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured. Additional signals are displayed in the
Control function block of the corresponding switching device.

[sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-42 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device

[sc_switching auth sw mode changeable, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-43 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices

The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching
mode for the switching devices. For this switching device, these inputs overwrite the central switching

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1397
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the
states only for this switching device.
When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching
device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed.

[sc_Parameters FB control all additional options, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-44 Parameters of the FB Control with All Additional Options

The functionality of the specific switching authority for the individual switching device and the significance of
the additional parameters is identical to the operating mode of the central specific switching authority. Addi-
tional signals are displayed in the Control function block.

[sc_Specific sw authority changeable per sw device, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-45 Specific Switching Authority, Modifiable for Each Switching Device

Switching Direction (Set = Actual)


With this check, you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved. For
instance, before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker, its current position is determined. If this circuit
breaker is already in the Off position, no command is issued. This is logged accordingly.

Switchgear Interlocking Protection


Switchgear interlocking protection means avoiding maloperation by checking the bay and substation inter-
locking and thus preventing equipment damage and personal injury. The interlocking conditions are always
system-specific and for this reason are stored as CFC charts in the devices.
SIPROTEC 5 devices recognize 2 different types of interlocking conditions:
• Normal interlocking conditions:
These can be revoked by changing the switching mode to non-interlocked.

1398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

• Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions:


These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked.
Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium-
voltage switch.
Each of the 2 categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the
result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure
below). The default setting for all release signals is TRUE, so that no switchgear interlocking checks take place
if no CFC charts have been prepared.

[scverrie-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-46 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking

EXAMPLE

For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1399
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[ScAbgang-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-47 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System

The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.

[scverpla-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-48 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking

Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for the linkage. A simple OR suffices.

1400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 7-48).

EXAMPLE

For system interlocking


This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupler bay = E02 (see the figure below).

[ScAnlage-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-49 System with Feeder and Coupler Bays

The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus-coupler circuit-breaker command block at the end:
If the 2 busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the CFC
of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Bus coupler closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure below).

[scplanve-241013, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-50 Interlocking Chart for Substation Interlocking

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1401
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking)


The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You
can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block.
The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).

[scdoppel-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-51 Activating the Double-Activation Blocking

With SIPROTEC 5, it is also possible to achieve multibay double-activation blocking.


In this case, send the signal not selected to other devices for analysis using IEC 61850-GOOSE. This signal
is available under Position in every Circuit-breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching device
function groups (see figure below).

[scnotselected-090315_de, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-52 Signal Not selected in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block

The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).

External 1-of-N Check (Cross-Bay Double-Activation Blocking)


The function block Ext. 1-of-N check offers another option to implement a cross-bay 1-out-of-n check. You
can select this function block in the FG Circuit breaker – Control in the DIGSI library. This function makes it
possible to interlock other switching devices across all bays before the allocation of the switching device takes
place in its own assigned bay or before the switching operation can be executed.

1402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

You can use the function block Ext. 1-of-N check in the Circuit breaker and Disconnector function groups. In
order to use the function, a control model with feedback monitoring must be configured in the circuit-
breaker control.

[sc_library properties info routing Ext 1-out-of-n control, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-53 Command Execution

If the external 1-of-N check is instantiated, the output Release request prompts a central bay controller
before executing a switching command. This bay controller must permit the switching operation (see the
following figure). If the allocated switching devices were locked in another bay, the release is issued. Only
when the release was issued via the input >Release active is the allocation (Control model: SBO w.
enh. security) or the switching command (Control model: direct w. enh. security) executed
and confirmed. The central bay controller is parameterized to reject a 2nd switching request.

[dw_block-ext-setzen, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-54 Setting the Blocking

Once the switch position has been reached, interlocking of the switching devices is canceled via the output
Release request. The switching command is completed and acknowledged with CMT (see the following
figure) only when interlocking termination has been acknowledged positively via the input >Release
active.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1403
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[dw_block-aufheben-1, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-55 Terminating the Blocking

User I/O Objects of the External 1-of-N Check Function Block

Name I/O Description Range


Release request O This output remains active true/false
from the time of the
switching prompt until
the new position is
reached.
>Release active I If this input is set, the true/false
switching device is
released for switching
operation. As long as this
input is set, this switching
device is blocked for addi-
tional switching opera-
tions.

Blocking by Protection Function

• Default setting (_:107) Check blk. by protection = yes


In devices with protection and control functions, Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be
issued while protection functions have picked up.

1404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

This applies to automatic reclosing as well. Switching commands must be prevented as long as automatic
reclosing is active.
The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this
blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 7-51).

NOTE

i Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.

NOTE

i The command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling circuit breakers,
because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions and automatic reclosing has been
configured. In disconnectors, this relationship is not always unique, precisely with regard to the 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout, and it must be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following
indications (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
• Group indication: Pickup (Function group Line)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)

• General: In progress (Automatic reclosing function)

7.4.2 Command Logging

All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Name of the switching device (or function group)

• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)

• Status or switching direction

EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
• Successful command output

• Interrupted command

• Command interrupted by switchgear interlocking

• Command ended due to missing feedback

• Spontaneous change of switch position without command output


Figure 7-56 to Figure 7-62 indicates command logging for various scenarios of the standard control model
SBO with feedback monitoring.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1405
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[scposcas-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-56 Positive Case (Display 1)

[scposca2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-57 Positive Case (Display 2)

1406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[scposcan-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-58 Positive Case with Command Cancellation

[scnegint-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-59 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1407
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[scnegtim-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-60 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1)

[scnegti2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-61 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 2)

1408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

[scsponta-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-62 Spontaneous Status Change

Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.

Table 7-23 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged

Reason for Transmission Value


Selected (SEL) Desired value
Operate (OPR) Desired value
Command cancellation (CNC) Desired value
Command execution and termination (CMT) Actual value
Spontaneous change (SPN) Actual value

7.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Control
_:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
• direct w. normal secur. security
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority • yes
_:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached • yes

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1409
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk. • yes
_:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection • yes

7.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Control
_:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C

1410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.1 Overview of Functions

The Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk to the
stability of the system when interconnecting 2 parts of an electrical power system.
Typical applications are as follows:
• Synchronization of a line and a busbar
• Synchronization of 2 busbars via a cross-coupling

• Synchronization of a generator and a busbar


A power transformer between the 2 measuring points can also be taken into consideration.
The following operating modes are covered:
• Synchrocheck
• Switching synchronous power systems

• Switching asynchronous power systems

• Switching to dead line/busbar

7.5.2 Structure of the Function

The Synchronization function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group.


The following stage types can be used within the function:
• Synchrocheck stage
• Synchronous/asynchronous stage
The Synchrocheck and Synchronous/Asynchronous (Sychr./Asycr.) stage types are preconfigured at the
factory.
In addition, the stage type Extended delta-f options are available in the function library. This has not been
preconfigured.
You can operate a maximum of 2 stages of the Synchrocheck stage type or 6 stages of the Synchronous/
asynchronous in parallel.
As soon as the function is available in the device, the functional measured values are calculated and displayed.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1411
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[dwsynfn1-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-63 Structure/Embedding of the Function

7.5.3 Connection and Definition

Connection
You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 7-66 shows
an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler.
The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference
side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2). The reference voltage of side 1 is
designated in the synchronization function as V141 This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is
connected to the Sync. voltage 1 interface of the Circuit-breaker function group. The voltage to be set as
reference is designated with V241. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the
Sync. voltage 2 interface of the Circuit-breaker function group. The assignment of the measuring points to
the interfaces of the Circuit-breaker function group can be configured, see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding
in the Device.
The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary
system:
• Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1-phase and a 3-phase meas-
uring point (Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-66):
The voltage connected to the 1-phase measuring point is definitive here. If. for example, this is the
phase-to-ground voltage VA, the voltage VA is also used by the other side of the 3-phase measuring point.

• Connection of the primary system via 6 voltage inputs and hence use of two 3-phase measuring points
(Figure 7-65):
The phase-to-phase voltage VAB of both sides is always used for the test.

You can connect both the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase-to-phase voltages to the device. The
possible interface connections are listed in the Appendix.

41 Donot confuse the designations V1 and V2 with the numbering of the voltage inputs V1 to V4 (Figure 7-64) and V1 to V8
(Figure 7-65).

1412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[dwsyns01-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-64 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs

[dwsyns02-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-65 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1413
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[dwsyns03-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-66 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs

Definition of the Variables


The definition of the variables is important for understanding the following implementation. The reference
side 1 indicates the function with 1. This yields the reference values voltage V1, frequency f1, and phase angle
α1. The side to be synchronized indicates the function with 2. The electrical variables of side 2 are then the
voltage V2, frequency f2, and phase angle α2.
When forming the differential variables, the function is oriented to the definition of the absolute measuring
error (Δ x = measured value – real value). The reference value and hence the real value is side 1. This results in
the following calculation specifications:
Differential voltage dV = V2 – V1
A positive sign means that the voltage V2 is greater than the voltage V1. In other cases, the sign is negative.
Differential frequency df = f2 – f1
A positive result means that according to the example from Figure 7-64 the busbar frequency is greater than
the line frequency.
Phase-angle difference dα = α2 – α1
The representation is limited to ±180o. A positive result means that α2 leads by a maximum ofo. In the case of
a negative value, α2 lags by a maximum of 180o. Figure 7-67 shows the circumstances. The phase angle α1
was added to the zero axis as a reference system.
If asynchronous systems are present and the frequency f2 is greater than f1, the angle dα then changes from
the negative value to 0 and then to the positive value. As shown in Figure 7-67, the direction of rotation is
counterclockwise (mathematically positive). At f2 < f1, the direction of rotation is clockwise.

1414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[dwsynp04-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-67 Phase-Angle Difference Representation dα

Only positive values are permissible for the setting parameters. Inequalities are used to characterize the
setting parameters uniquely. The representation is explained with the example of differential voltage. 2
setting values are necessary to allow unbalanced settings.
The inequality V2 > V1 yields a positive value for dV. The associated parameter is Max. voltage diff.
V2>V1. For the 2nd setting parameter Max. voltage diff. V2<V1, the inequality V2 < V1 applies. It
corresponds to a negative dV.
The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle.

7.5.4 General Functionality

7.5.4.1 Description

Overview of a Synchronization Stage (Sync Stage)


A synchronization stage can be integrated in the following blocks (see Figure 7-68):
• Stage control with mode, state control, standby and blocking (description in this chapter)
• Supervision (description in this chapter)

• Functional sequence for issuing the closing release (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1415
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[losyn001-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-68 Overview of the Stage Logic

Stage Control
The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage (see Figure 7-68).
Note the following special features:
• As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measured values are calculated
and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to start
the stage for this purpose.

• If all synchronization stages are deactivated within the function, closure via the control will no longer be
possible, as none of the stages can generate an closing release. If the synchronization function is deleted,
the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization. In this case, it is
possible to activate via the control without synchronization.

• If more than one synchronization stage is switched on, then the >Selection signal must be active for
exactly one stage, so that it can be activated via the controls.
You can block the entire synchronization stage via the binary signal >Block stage. A started process is
completed and the entire stage reset after blocking. The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching
procedure. The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions. The measured values are still
calculated and displayed.

1416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Operating Range

[losyn002-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-69 Logic of the Operating Ranges

The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configurable voltage limits Min.
operating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax as well as by the specified frequency band
frated ±4 Hz.
If one or both voltages are outside the permitted operating range when the measurement is started or a
voltage leaves the range, this is displayed via corresponding indications Frequency f1 > fmax,
Frequency f1 < fmin, Voltage V1 > Vmax, Voltage V1 < Vmin etc. The closing conditions are
then not checked.

Supervision
The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the monitors picks up, the
Health goes to alarm. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close command is not
possible in this case.
• For consistency of settings of specific parameters
Definite threshold-value settings are checked after a parameter change. If there is an inconsistency, the
error message Setting error is set.

• For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization
If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time, the error
message Multiple selection is set.

Measuring-Voltage Failure
If a voltage-transformer fault (measuring-voltage failure) is recorded via the binary input signal >Open of one
of the voltage-measuring points, then the closing commands of the synchronization stage are no longer
tested. In other words, a release of the closure based on the measurement is no longer possible. The readiness
of the stage turns to warning. Direct close command is still possible.
The device-internal supervision function measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) does not
have any effect on the synchronization stage.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1417
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Function Measured Values


The function measured values for the Synchronization function are displayed in their own primary, secondary
and percentage measured-value windows. Voltage measurements are always displayed as ph-ph voltages,
even if the associated measuring point records phase-to-ground voltages. The function measured values are
determined and displayed as soon as the device is functional. The difference values are calculated as soon as
the stage is activated.

Table 7-24 Protection-Specific Values of the Synchronization

Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
V1 Reference voltage V1 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V2 Voltage to be synchronized V2 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
f1 Frequency of the voltage V1 Hz Hz Rated frequency
f2 Frequency of the voltage V2 Hz Hz Rated frequency
dV Voltage difference V2-V1 kV V –
df Frequency difference f2-f1 Hz Hz –
dα Angle difference α2-α1 o – –

Multiple Synchronization Points


The synchronization function can only be used within a Circuit-breaker function group. It always operates on
the circuit breaker that is linked to the Circuit-breaker function group. The reference to the circuit breaker is
therefore unique. If you wish to switch several circuit breakers (synchronization points) with the device, you
must create several Circuit-breaker function groups.

Different Synchronization Conditions per Synchronization Point


Within the synchronization function, you can operate maximum 2 stages of the stage type Synchrocheck and
maximum 6 stages of the type Synchronous/asynchronous in parallel. All setting parameters for a synchroni-
zation point are included in each synchronization stage.
If you have to synchronize with different synchronization conditions (parameter settings), several synchroniza-
tion stages are used for a synchronization point/circuit breaker. In this case, you must define which of the
synchronization stages is currently active via the binary signal >Selection (synchronization stage x). The
closing conditions are checked if the respective stage is activated via the >Selection binary signal and the
stage is activated.
The fault indication Multiple selection is issued upon simultaneous selection of different synchroniza-
tion stages. If several synchronization stages are activated and the input signal >Selection (synchronization
stage x) is missing at the starting time, a valid selection is awaited during the supervision time Max.durat.
sync.process. If this does not come, the process is terminated.

Different Voltage-Transformer Ratios of Both Parts of the Electrical Power System


The settings of the rated parameters of the transformer for the measuring points automatically takes the
different voltage-transformer transformation ratios of both parts of the electrical power system into account.
The Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed for this purpose.

Synchronization via a Transformer


There are systems in which a power transformer is located between the voltage measuring points of the circuit
breaker to be synchronized. The device automatically considers the different voltage stages by setting the
transformer ratios (within the measuring points).
A phase displacement must be taken into account based on the transformer vector group, via the Angle
adjust. (transform.) parameter.

1418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

The parameter is defined as -Δα = –(α2 – α1).


To calculate the Delta parameters, the voltage of side 2 is converted to the voltage of side 1 using to the
settings of both parameters.
In the Application and Setting Notes, several examples are provided for using both parameters.

Different Connection Types on Both Sides


If both of the measuring points used by the synchronization functions record different voltages of the 3-phase
system, the calculation of the phase displacement angle is automatically taken into consideration.

EXAMPLE:
The 1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 1 records the phase-to-phase voltage VAB. The 1-
phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 2 records VA. In this case the phase angle between VAB
and VA takes into consideration the delta variable Δα during calculation..
This automation guarantees that several voltage sources can be switched between during running operation,
each of which records different voltages.

7.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Stage-Type Selection
The following 2 types of stage are available:
Stage Type Application
Synchrocheck stage Select this type of stage to issue, for example, an additional release
during an automatic reclosing or a manual reclosing for safety reasons.
With this type, the variables ΔV, Δf and Δα are checked before
connecting the 2 parts of the power system.
Synchronous/asynchronous stage Select this type of stage if it is necessary to differentiate between
synchronous and asynchronous systems, depending on the switch posi-
tion.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous
systems are present. A typical characteristic for synchronous systems is
equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). In this state, the conditions Δα and ΔV
are checked.
If the systems are galvanically isolated, asynchronous systems can be
present. At the same time, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV
and frequency difference Δf conditions is checked. The time of the
direct close command is calculated taking into account the angle differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. The time of the
direct close command is calculated so that the voltages are equal at the
moment of pole contact of the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0. Δα ≈ 0).

Configuration of the Voltages V1 (Reference Side) and V2


The voltages V1 and V2 are established via the connection of the measuring points to the interface of the
function groups (refer to chapter 7.5.3 Connection and Definition). The measuring point connected to the
interface Voltage is the reference side 1 with the reference voltage V1. The measuring point connected to the
interface Sync. voltage is the side 2 with V2. The definition of the Delta parameters that can be derived from
this is also described in chapter 7.5.3 Connection and Definition.

Parameter: Min. operating limit Vmin, Max. operat. limit Vmax

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:101) Min. operating limit Vmin = 90 V

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:102) Max. operat. limit Vmax = 110 V


The values define the voltage operating range of the synchronization stage. A normal setting is approx. ±10 %
of the rated voltage.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1419
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

NOTE

i All voltages connected according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to
the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test. Therefore, connected phase-to-ground voltages are multiplied by √3 as
the threshold values with reference to the rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) must be set.

[lohyster-010415-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

If the Synchronization function is started within the hysteresis, no switching is performed as a result of the
minimum and maximum operating limit (parameters Min. operating limit Vmin and Max. operat.
limit Vmax). If the Synchronization function is started within the voltage operating range and the voltage
exceeds the minimum or maximum operating limit during the synchronization process, selecting can occur in
the area of the hysteresis.

Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process

• Default setting (_:5071:110) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s


The parameterized conditions must be fulfilled within this time. If the conditions are not fulfilled, no further
closing release takes place and the synchronization stage is stopped. If this time is set to ∞the conditions are
checked until they are fulfilled. This is also the default setting. Observe the operating conditions when
defining the time limitation. This must be defined specifically for each system. If 0 or 0.01 s is set, then all
conditions are checked once at the starting time point. Thereafter the process is stopped immediately.

Parameter: Voltage adjustment

• Default setting (_:5071:126) Voltage adjustment = 1.00


The parameter can be used for correction of amplitude errors, for example, due to indirect measurement (for
example, tap changer).
To apply a transformer between measuring points, the Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed. The
transformer ratios are set for the measuring points and the function will take them into account automatically.

Parameter: Angle adjust. (transform.)

• Default setting (_:2311:127) Angle adjust. (transform.) = 0 o

1420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

The parameter can be applied under the following conditions:


• 1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points
• 2. Correction of phase-angle errors
1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points:

[losynae1-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-70 Transformer Between the Measuring Points

If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized,
you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a vector group deviating from 0. Figure 7-70 shows such
an application. The Angle adjust. (transform.) parameter is used to save the phase-angle rotation.
The vector group of the transformer is defined by the upper voltage side to the lower voltage side. If the refer-
ence voltage transformer V1 is connected on the upper voltage side of the transformer (as in Figure 7-70),
enter the phase-angle rotation directly according to the vector group. A vector-group figure of 5, for example,
means an angular rotation of 5 ⋅ 30o = 150o. Set this value for the Angle adjust. (transform.) param-
eter.
If the voltage connection V1 is on the lower voltage side due to the system, you then have to apply the exten-
sion angle with 360o. A transformer with vector group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o –
(5 ⋅ 30o) = 210o
2. Correction of phase-angle errors: You can correct a phase-angle error between the voltage transformers in
increments. Ascertain a possible correction value during commissioning.

Parameter: CB make time

• Default setting (_:5041:113) CB make time = 0.06 s


If you are to interconnect under asynchronous system conditions with the device as well, the closing time of
the circuit breaker must be taken into account. The device uses this to calculate the time of the direct close
command, so that the voltages are in phase at the moment of closure of the switch poles. Note that apart
from the operating time of the switch, this also includes the pickup time of an auxiliary relay that may be
upstream. You can determine the closing time using the protection device (see commissioning notes in
chapter 10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function).
This parameter only occurs for the stage type Synchronous/asynchronous.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1421
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:127 General:Angle adjust. -179.0 ° to 180.0 ° 0.0 °
(transform.)
General
_:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
operating limit Vmin
_:5071:102 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct • no no
close command • yes
_:5071:126 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
General
_:5041:1 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5041:101 Sychr./Asycr.1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:5041:102 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./Asycr. 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct • no no
close command • yes
_:5041:126 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment

7.5.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching

Dynamic measuring-point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro-
check function to various measuring points. In this way, for example, it is possible to use the correct voltage
on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices. If more than 1 measuring point is connected to V
sync1 or V sync2, you must create the V sync select. function block in the Circuit-breaker function
group.
Selection of the desired voltage measuring points (V sync1 and V sync2) for the Circuit-breaker function
group is controlled via Continuous Function Chart.

Example
Figure 7-71 shows an example of a Synchrocheck in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. If circuit breaker QA2
is to be closed, the reference voltages must be selected from several possible measuring points. This selection
of measuring points is dependent on the switch positions of all circuit breakers and disconnectors.

1422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[dwdynmsu-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-71 Synchronization in a Breaker-and-a-Half Arrangement

Each synchronization function requires 2 comparison voltages. For the circuit breaker QA2 located in the
middle, there are 2 options for each side (Vsync1 and Vsync2). The selection of synchronization voltages for each
side depends on the position of the circuit breaker and the disconnectors.
For circuit breakers QA1 and QA3, the busbar voltage (Vsync1) is available for one side, and 3 voltages (Vsync2)
are available for the other side.

Connecting Measuring Points to Circuit-Breaker Function Group


The following figure shows the connection of the Circuit-breaker function group with several measuring
points in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in parentheses after the name.

[scdynms2-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-72 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1423
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface.
• It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN.

• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.

• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to 1 voltage interface, a function block must be expanded to
enable selection of the synchronization voltage.

CFC Control
The voltages are selected by CFC logic on the basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than one measuring
point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit-breaker function group, the V sync select.
function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit-breaker function group. A CFC logic (see
following example) has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to
ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function.

[scdynmsx-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-73 CFC Logic: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID

If no measuring point can be selected because of the switch or disconnector positions, the ID0 is used. If ID0 is
selected, the indication (_:2311:304) Blocked no V selected is set. The synchrocheck is blocked. If
you have activated the parameter (_:5071:108) Direct close command, unsynchronized switching is
still possible.

1424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.6 Sequence of Functions

[losynf01-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-74 Sequence of Functions

Start
The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be
started device-internally by the control and the reclosing, or externally via binary input signals, for example, by
an external automatic reclosing (AREC), (see chapter 7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing
(AREC), and External Triggering).
At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection of the synchronization stage (see chapter
Supervision in chapter 7.5.4.1 Description). If this is the case, the process is terminated. After a successful
start, the indication In progress is cleared and the supervision time for the maximum duration of the
synchronization process (parameter Max.durat. sync.process) is started. The system also checks
whether the voltages and frequencies are in the operating range (see chapter 7.5.4.1 Description). If this is
not the case, the closing conditions are not checked.

Checking the Closing Conditions, Closure


After starting, the parameterized closing conditions are checked depending on the operating mode selected
(see chapter 7.5.8.1 Description to 7.5.11 Direct Close Command ). Every condition fulfilled is explicitly indi-
cated here. Conditions not fulfilled are also indicated. If all conditions are fulfilled, the synchronization stage
sets the indication All sync. conditio. OK. The indication is active until all conditions are fulfilled. The
further behavior for issuing the release for closing depends on the type of the stage (see chapters
7.5.7.1 Description and 7.5.8.1 Description). The release is signaled via the Release close cmd. indica-
tion. This indication is active for 100 ms. With an internal start, the control or the AREC performs the actual
closure, depending on the starting source.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1425
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Switching to Dead Line/Busbar


If operating modes for switching to dead parts of an electrical power system are configured, the associated
conditions are also checked after the start (see chapter 7.5.10.1 Description). The fulfilled conditions are
signaled. An adjustable supervision time is started after the closure conditions are fulfilled (parameter CB
make time). If the conditions remain valid until expiry of the time, the function gives the release for closure
after expiry of the time.

Direct Close Command


If the Direct close command operation is active, the function instantaneously initiates the release for closure
after the successful start (see chapter 7.5.11 Direct Close Command ). A combination of direct close command
with other release conditions is not advisable, as these conditions are bypassed by the direct close command.

End of the Process


If the function is started via the device-internal control or AREC, these functions also terminate the synchroni-
zation process upon closure. The process is terminated via the corresponding binary signals in case of external
starting.
If the supervision time (Max.durat. sync.process parameter) has expired, the process is also completed
and the indication Max. time exceeded is issued. A renewed synchronization is only possible if the stage is
restarted.

Blocking Closure
You can use the input signal >Block close command to block the release signal for the closure (signal
Release close cmd.) as well as the closure itself. The measurement continues to operate during the
blocking. If the blocking is revoked and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release is given for closure.

1426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.7 Stage Synchrocheck

7.5.7.1 Description

Checking Closing Conditions

[losynche-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-75 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Function

With this operating mode, the values ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before connecting the 2 parts of the elec-
trical power system. The indication All sync. conditio. OK signals that the setting values (conditions)
have been reached and that the release for closure has been given (see Checking the Closing Conditions,
Closure in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK, Frequency
diff. OK, and Angle difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica-
tions. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt
for sync. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt syn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is issued.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1427
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Maximum Differential Values of Voltage, Frequency and Angle

• Default setting (_:5071:122) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 5.0 V

• Default setting (_:5071:123) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 5.0 V

• Default setting (_:5071:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz

• Default setting (_:5071:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz

• Default setting (_:5071:124) Max. angle diff. α2>α1 = 10o

• Default setting (_:5071:125) Max. angle diff. α2<α1 = 10o


2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing ranges
can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts of
the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.

7.5.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
operating limit Vmin
_:5071:102 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct • no no
close command • yes
_:5071:126 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5071:105 Synchrocheck 1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2> • yes
_:5071:106 Synchrocheck 1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1> & V2< • yes
_:5071:107 Synchrocheck 1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2< • yes
_:5071:103 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:5071:104 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:5071:109 Synchrocheck 1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time

1428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Synchr. conditions
_:5071:122 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
voltage diff. V2>V1
_:5071:123 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5071:117 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
_:5071:118 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2<f1
_:5071:124 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:5071:125 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1

7.5.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Synchrocheck 1
_:5071:81 Synchrocheck 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5071:500 Synchrocheck 1:>Selection SPS I
_:5071:502 Synchrocheck 1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5071:503 Synchrocheck 1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5071:504 Synchrocheck 1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5071:506 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5071:505 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5071:507 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5071:508 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5071:501 Synchrocheck 1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5071:54 Synchrocheck 1:Inactive SPS O
_:5071:52 Synchrocheck 1:Behavior ENS O
_:5071:53 Synchrocheck 1:Health ENS O
_:5071:328 Synchrocheck 1:In progress SPS O
_:5071:324 Synchrocheck 1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5071:305 Synchrocheck 1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5071:325 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5071:326 Synchrocheck 1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5071:327 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5071:307 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:306 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:308 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:309 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:310 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:311 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:312 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:313 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:314 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5071:315 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:316 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1429
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:5071:317 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5071:318 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5071:319 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5071:320 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5071:329 Synchrocheck 1:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:5071:321 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5071:322 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5071:304 Synchrocheck 1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5071:323 Synchrocheck 1:Setting error SPS O

7.5.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous

7.5.8.1 Description
A distinction according to synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made with this type of stage.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical character-
istic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). If the frequency difference falls below the
setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the
frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, asynchronous
systems are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions. Both operating modes can be
switched on and off separately (parameter Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the operating mode asynchronous is active.
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN the
operating mode is exclusively active asynchro-
nously.
on off If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the stage is inactive, i.e. a switching release
cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No activa-
tion release can be be given via these operating
modes either.

1430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Checking the Closing Conditions in Synchronous Systems

[losynsyn-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-76 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems

The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication.
The parameters ΔV and Δα are checked for issuing an activation release (see Figure 7-77). The indication All
sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions remain
fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is given (see
also chapter 7.5.7.1 Description).
Every condition fulfilled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica-
tions. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:142) Limit dfdiff/dt
for asyn. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is generated.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1431
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[losynzus-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-77 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions

1432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Checking Closing Conditions in Asynchronous Systems

[losynasy-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-78 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems

In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is
checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at
the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).

Ranges in the Voltage-Frequency Diagram (V-f Diagram)


Figure 7-79 shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V-f diagram.
The frequency range is very narrow owing to the functional principle in the case of synchronous systems.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1433
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[losynarb-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-79 Operating Range Under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)

7.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Synchronous operating mode, Asynchronous operating mode

• Default setting (_:5041:119) Sync. operating mode = off

• Default setting (_:5041:114) Async. operating mode= off


The operating modes of the stages can be activated or deactivated via the parameters. The operating modes
are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons.
The following combination options are possible:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description
on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases, the
operating mode asynchronous is active.
If you wish to interconnect galvanically isolated
systems, then select this operating mode.

1434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description


off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
operating mode active is exclusively asynchronous.
The closing time of the circuit breaker is this always
taken into account for determining the connecting
point.
Select this operating mode if you wish to activate
machines, for example generators or asynchronous
motors.
If the same frequency is present on the sides to be
interconnected, then this operating mode is not
possible. Since, in the case of dependency on the
phase angle position (Δα), release of the closure may
not be issued.
on off Use this operating mode for galvanically connected
systems.
Closure is only possible with synchronous systems
(with low Δf).
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No closing
release can be therefore be given via this operating
mode.
This configuration is only advisable for special applica-
tions. Select this operating mode if you only wish to
switch, for example de-energized parts of the power
system.

Parameter for asynchronous operation: Max. voltage diff. of voltage and frequency

• Default setting (_:5041:115) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 2.0 V

• Default setting (_:5041:116) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 2.0 V

• Default setting (_:5041:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz

• Default setting (_:5041:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz


For information, see Parameter for synchronous operation

Parameter for synchronous operation: Maximum voltage diff. of voltage and angle

• Default setting (_:5041:122) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 5.0 V

• Default setting (_:5041:123) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 5.0 V

• Default setting (_:5041:124) Max. angle diff. α2>α1 = 10o

• Default setting (_:5041:125) Max. angle diff. α2<α1 = 10o


2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing ranges
can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts of
the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.

Parameter: Switchover between synchronous and asynchronous operation

• Recommended setting value (_:5041:120) f-threshold ASYN<->SYN = 0.01 Hz

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1435
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

This parameter is used to set the frequency difference for switching over between synchronous and asynchro-
nous operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 0.01 Hz.

7.5.8.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:5041:1 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5041:101 Sychr./Asycr.1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:5041:102 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./Asycr. 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct • no no
close command • yes
_:5041:126 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5041:105 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2> • yes
_:5041:106 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1> & V2< • yes
_:5041:107 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2< • yes
_:5041:103 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:5041:104 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:5041:109 Sychr./Asycr.1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:5041:114 Sychr./Asycr.1:Async. • off on
operating mode • on
_:5041:113 Sychr./Asycr.1:CB make 0.01 s to 0.60 s 0.06 s
time
_:5041:115 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
voltage diff. V2>V1
_:5041:116 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:117 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
_:5041:118 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2<f1
Synchr. op.mode
_:5041:119 Sychr./Asycr.1:Sync. • off on
operating mode • on
_:5041:120 Sychr./Asycr.1:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
threshold ASYN<->SYN

1436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:5041:122 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
voltage diff. V2>V1
_:5041:123 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:124 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:5041:125 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:5041:121 Sychr./Asycr.1:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command

7.5.8.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Sychr./Asycr.1
_:5041:81 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5041:500 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Selection SPS I
_:5041:502 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5041:503 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5041:504 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5041:506 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5041:505 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5041:507 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5041:508 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5041:501 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5041:54 Sychr./Asycr.1:Inactive SPS O
_:5041:52 Sychr./Asycr.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5041:53 Sychr./Asycr.1:Health ENS O
_:5041:328 Sychr./Asycr.1:In progress SPS O
_:5041:324 Sychr./Asycr.1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5041:305 Sychr./Asycr.1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5041:303 Sychr./Asycr.1:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:5041:325 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5041:326 Sychr./Asycr.1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5041:327 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5041:307 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:306 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:308 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:309 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5041:310 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:311 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:5041:312 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:313 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:314 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:315 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:316 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:317 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5041:318 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1437
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:5041:319 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5041:320 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5041:329 Sychr./Asycr.1:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:5041:321 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5041:322 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5041:304 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5041:323 Sychr./Asycr.1:Setting error SPS O

7.5.9 Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations)

When configuring the Expanded delta-f options function block, you can expand the synchronization checks
to include the following aspects:
• Limitation of the frequency change rate
With this option, you can define additional upper limits for the rate of permissible requency difference
change. The release checks for both stage types take these additional upper limits into consideration.
Both activation (parameters (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt for sync. op and (_:142) Limit
dfdiff/dt for asyn. op) and the upper limits (parameters (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt
syn and (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) for the frequency change rate are adjustable
selectively for synchronous and asynchronous conditions. Both stage types consider the frequency
change rate when issuing the release for switching and indicate when the rate is exceeded.
If you also activate the option to compensate for low-frequency oscillations (parameter (_:150)
Suppr. frequ. oscillations), the frequency change rate is stabilized in the presence of such oscil-
lations. Stabilization is in effect for asynchronous as well as synchronous operating modes.

1438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

• Compensation for low-frequency oscillations


If you activate this option (parameter (_:150) Suppr. frequ. oscillations), low-frequency
oscillations, for example, as a consequence of power swings in the range of 0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz are detected
and smoothed. This stabilizes the release checks in the presence of frequently changing violations of
upper and lower limits for the specified frequency threshold values. The option affects the frequency
check of the Synchrocheck stage types and the synchronous operating mode of the Synchronous/Asyn-
chronous stage type. It does not affect the asynchronous operating mode.
In the example of the following figure, the synchrocheck function would initiate energization, if the
allowed frequency difference was set to 10 mHz without the parameter Suppr. frequ. oscilla-
tions as soon as the frequency f2 enters the 10-mHz band. If the parameter Suppr. frequ. oscil-
lations is activated, energization is not initiated, since the average value of f2 is outside the band.

[dwsynfre-101013-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-80 Example: Frequency Difference between the Constant Frequency f1 and the Sinusoidal
Oscillating Frequency f2

With this option active, the range of function measured values is expanded by the smoothed frequency.
Release of switching in synchronous networks occurs after one second at the earliest. This time is needed
to smooth the frequency measured values.
The actual frequency can be larger or smaller than the smoothed value at any instant. The Max. diff.
"f threshold" parameter makes it possible to limit the increase in instantaneous frequency value in
relation to the respective frequency threshold value.

7.5.10 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar

7.5.10.1 Description
If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes.
If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the part
of the electrical power system is detected. In this case, all phases are compared to the parameter V1, V2
without voltage. The energized side must be in the defined operating range with respect to voltage and
frequency (see chapter 7.5.4.1 Description) and all phases must exceed the threshold V1, V2 with
voltage.
The following additional closing conditions can be selected, which are then applied next to the closing condi-
tions for the synchronism:
Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1> & V2< Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is energized and the part of the electrical power system
U2 is de-energized.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1439
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1< & V2> Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is de-energized and the part of the electrical power
system U2 is energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2< Closing release provided mains adapters V 1 and V2 are de-ener-
gized.

Each of these conditions can be made effective individually via parameters or binary input. You can also set
parameters for combinations, for example a release for closure, if Close cmd. at V1> & V2< or Close
cmd. at V1< & V2> has been fulfilled.

[losyn003-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-81 Release Conditions for Switching to De-Energized Line/Busbar

The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled and Cond. V1<V2<
fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled.
You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which the closing conditions
must at least be fulfilled with de-energized connection, before closing is allowed.

1440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.10.2 Application and Setting Notes


If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes. The above potential release conditions are
independent of one another and can also be combined.

NOTE

i For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no.
Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no for
reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for
example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also Figure 7-81). This prevents one of these operating
modes from being incorrectly activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.

Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2>

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:105) Close cmd. at V1< & V2> = no

Settings Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1of the power system is de-energized and part V2 of the power
system is energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.

Parameter: Close cmd. at V1> & V2<

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:106) Close cmd. at V1> & V2< = no

Settings Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1of the power system is energized and part V2 of the power
system is de-energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.

Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2<

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:107) Close cmd. at V1< & V2< = no

Settings Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If the parts V1 and V2 of the power system are de-energized, the release
for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the
supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.

Parameter: V1, V2 with voltage

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:104) V1, V2 with voltage = 80 V


The setting value indicates the voltage above which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as activated with certainty.
You must set the value below the minimum expected operational undervoltage. Siemens therefore recom-
mends a setting value of approx. 80 % of the rated voltage. All voltages connected according to the parame-
terized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1441
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Parameter: V1, V2 without voltage

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:103) V1, V2 without voltage = 5 V


The setting value indicates the voltage below which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as deactivated with certainty.
Siemens recommends a setting value of approx. 5 % of the rated voltage for this. All voltages connected
according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax
test.

Parameter: Supervision time

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:109) Supervision time = 0.1 s


The parameter defines a supervision time for which the above additional closing conditions have to be at least
fulfilled at de-energized switching, before the release for closing is given. In order to include transient
phenomena, Siemens recommends a value of 0.1 s.

Parameter: Direct close command

• Recommended setting value (_:5071:108) Direct close command = no


In this operating mode, the function initiates a closing release without any testing upon start of the synchroni-
zation stage. The closure occurs immediately.

NOTE

i For safety reasons, Siemens recommends leaving the setting atno. If a direct close command is necessary,
Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' (see also Figure 7-83). This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly acti-
vated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.

7.5.11 Direct Close Command

You can activate the operating mode direct close command statically via the Direct close command
parameter or dynamically with the binary input signal >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see Figure 7-82).

[losyndir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-82 Activation of the Operating Mode Direct Close Command

The operating mode Direct close command function initiates a closure release without any testing upon start
of the synchronization stage. The closure occurs immediately.
The combination Direct close command with other operating modes is not recommended, as the other oper-
ating data is bypassed.
If the synchronization function is defective (standby of the sync stage = alarm or warning), a direct close
command is executed or not executed, depending on the type of fault (see also supervisions in chapter
7.5.4.1 Description).

1442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering

With Control
The control and synchronization function are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. The control
and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the function
group Circuit breaker.
As soon as the synchronization function is in the function group Circuit breaker, the circuit breaker is subject
to compulsory synchronization. If all synchronization stages are deactivated, the circuit breaker cannot be acti-
vated via the control, as no release can be generated for the closure. The circuit breaker is no longer subject to
compulsory synchronization after deletion of the synchronization function. Closure without synchronization is
then possible via the control.
If closure is to be synchronized via the control, the control automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the control, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.

[losynaw1-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-83 Interaction of the Control with the Synchronization Function

With Automatic Reclosing


The automatic reclosing mechanism (AREC) can also work with the synchronization function. Both functions
are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. Consequently the AREC and synchronization function
always work with the circuit breaker that is linked to the function group Circuit breaker.
You must select a synchronization stage via settings within the AREC so that closure is synchronized by the
AREC. The tests for the synchronization stage are used for the closure by the AREC. If no synchronization stage
is selected, the AREC then activates without synchronization.
If closure is to be synchronized via the AREC, the AREC automatically generates an internal signal which starts
the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions.
After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the AREC, which closes the
circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1443
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[losynaw2-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-84 Connection of the AREC to the Synchronization Function

With External Control


You have the option of controlling the synchronization function externally via binary input signals. This can be
done as follows:
• Edge-controlled
• Via the signals >Start syn. process and >Stop syn. process

• State-controlled, via the signal >Start / stop syn.proc. (see also chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions).
The start is followed by the functional sequence (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions). If the conditions
are fulfilled, the output signal Release close cmd. is issued. The switched object QAx of the function
group Circuit breaker is not closed. The output signal Release close cmd. must be explicitly assigned to
the binary output in order to close the circuit breaker.

[losynaw3-160311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-85 Interaction of the Synchronization Function with External Control

1444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.13 External Synchronization

7.5.13.1 Description
The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device.

[dw_ctrl_ext_sync_device, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-86 Triggering an External Synchronization Device

The bay controller in bay x should switch the circuit breaker in bay x in synchrony. The synchronization check
is carried out in the central paralleling device 7VE6. In addition to the paralleling device, another central bay
controller ensures the switching of the correct measuring voltages and the routing of the CB close command
from the 7VE6 to the correct circuit breaker in bay x. The bay controller x provides the information to the
central bay controller via IEC61850-GOOSE.
The External synchronization is designed as a function block which can be used in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group. The additional External synchronization function block integrates the external synchronization
into command processing, so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source.
If a circuit-breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present, the external synchroniza-
tion device is started. After successfully checking the synchronization conditions, the close command is issued
from the external synchronization device to the circuit breaker. If a circuit-breaker close command without
synchronization requirement is present, the circuit-breaker close command is issued directly from the Circuit-
breaker function group to the circuit breaker. Also, each circuit-breaker trip command is issued directly to the
circuit breaker.
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1445
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

[dwextsyn-02, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-87 Interaction between Control and External Synchronization

Parameterization with DIGSI


In the DIGSI library, the function is visible inside the Circuit-breaker function group as the External synchro-
nization function block. You can instantiate the function block in the Circuit-breaker function group and the
Circuit-breaker (control) function group. You can instantiate only 1 External synchronization function block
within these function groups at a time.

[scextsyn-041116-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-88 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit-Breaker Function
Group

It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchroniza-
tion function in the same Circuit-breaker function group.

1446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Notes for Optional Input Interconnections


You have the option of connecting the input signals >Close cmd. released and >In progress. If you
omit these interconnections, observe the following instructions:
Input >Close cmd. released:
If you do not interconnect the input signal >Close cmd. released, the execution of a circuit-breaker close
command with synchronization requirement is confirmed directly (execution successful: OPR+), as soon as the
output signal Start syn. process is set. In this case, the (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process
setting has no meaning. If you use a control model with feedback monitoring, consider that the feedback
monitoring will start immediately when the Start syn. process signal is tripped. The (_:4201:103)
Feedback monitoring time setting must therefore be set higher than the maximum synchronization
time of the external synchronization device plus the circuit-breaker closing time. If >Close cmd. released
is not routed, the output Start/stop syn. proc. is not set.
Input >In progress:
The interconnection of the input signal >In progress is intended to check whether the synchronization
device has received the Start syn. process signal. If you do not interconnect this input signal and the
external synchronization device rejects a start command, the negative acknowledgment of the circuit-breaker
close command does not occur until the maximum synchronization time (parameter (_:109) Max.durat.
sync.process) has expired.
Input >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd':
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions. To do this, activate the input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' or the parameter (_:110) Direct close command. The close command is then issued
directly by the bay controller.

7.5.13.2 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)

Parameter: Mode

• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on


With the Mode parameter, you switch the external synchronization function on or off. If you set the Mode
parameter to off, a circuit-breaker close command with synchronization requirement is rejected.

Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process

• Default setting (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s


The Max.durat. sync.process parameter defines the maximum synchronization time. The time starts
when the External synchronization function block sends a close command to the external synchronization
device. The command must be executed within this time. If the close command is not executed within this
time, the External synchronization function block sends a command to cancel closing to the external
synchronization device.

Parameter: Direct close command

• Default setting (_:110) Direct close command = no


In case of a failure of the external synchronization device the Direct close command parameter is used to
close the circuit breaker directly without considering the synchronization conditions. If the parameter is acti-
vated a close command with synchronization requirement will not be transmitted to the external synchroniza-
tion device, but directly carried out by the bay controller.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1447
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

7.5.13.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:102 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:110 Syn./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asy.bal.#:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:108 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Direct • no no
close command • yes
_:126 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:105 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2> • yes
_:106 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Close • no no
cmd. at V1> & V2< • yes
_:107 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2< • yes
_:103 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:104 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:109 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:114 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Async. • off off
operating mode • on
_:113 Syn./Asy.bal.#:CB make 0.01 s to 0.60 s 0.06 s
time
_:115 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 2.000 V
voltage diff. V2>V1
_:116 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 2.000 V
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:117 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
_:118 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2<f1
Synchr. op.mode
_:119 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Sync. • off off
operating mode • on
_:120 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
threshold ASYN<->SYN
_:122 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 2.000 V
voltage diff. V2>V1
_:123 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 V to 170.000 V 2.000 V
voltage diff. V2<V1

1448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:124 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:125 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:121 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command
Balancing V
_:131 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Balancing • off off
voltage V2 • transformer tap
• balancing pulses
_:132 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T V pulse 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0.10 s
min
_:133 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T V pulse 0.01 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
max
_:134 Syn./Asy.bal.#:dV per 0 V/s to 0 V/s 0 V/s
second
_:135 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause V 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:136 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:137 Syn./Asy.bal.#:(V/ 1.00 to 1.40 1.10
Vrated)/(f/frated)
Balancing f
_:141 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Balancing • off off
frequency f2 • balancing pulses
_:142 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T f pulse 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0.10 s
min
_:143 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T f pulse 0.01 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
max
_:144 Syn./Asy.bal.#:df/dt of 0.05 Hz/s to 5.00 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s
the controller
_:145 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause f 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:146 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf set -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
point for balancing
_:147 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:148 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T close 1.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
without balancing
_:149 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Release • off off
for the kick pulse • on
_:150 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf for the -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
kick pulse
_:151 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Stabiliza- 0 to 1000 0
tion

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


External sync.
_:1 External sync.:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:109 External 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
sync.:Max.durat.
sync.process

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1449
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:110 External sync.:Direct • 0 false
close command • 1

7.5.13.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
External sync.
_:506 External sync.:>Synch. device ready SPS I
_:508 External sync.:>In progress SPS I
_:507 External sync.:>Close cmd. released SPS I
_:509 External sync.:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:52 External sync.:Behavior ENS O
_:54 External sync.:Health ENS O
_:55 External sync.:Start syn. process SPS O
_:56 External sync.:Stop syn. process SPS O
_:57 External sync.:Start/stop syn. proc. SPS O

1450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]

7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]

7.6.1 Overview of Functions

The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching-authority check of a control command and
the check of whether the circuit breaker has reached the position for user-defined controllables.

7.6.2 Function Description

The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5
Library.
You can instantiate the user-defined function blocks on the top level (in parallel to other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
The task of the function block is to check the switching authority. For control commands, the function block
checks whether the switching direction is the same as the current switch position. You can instantiate every
user-defined signal (for example, SPS, DPC, INC) in the function block and route the corresponding indications
(see following figure).

[scbenutz, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-89 Information Routing with Inserted User-Defined Function Block [Control]: Process Indications
and Some Individual Indications

7.6.3 Application and Setting Notes

The function block contains the parameters (_:104) Check switching authority, (_:105) Check
if pos. is reached, and (_:150) Check swi.auth. for Mode. The parameter settings Check
switching authority and Check if pos. is reached affect all controllables instantiated in the
function block. Other signal types are not affected by these parameters and objects.
On the other hand, the parameter setting Check swi.auth. for Mode affects the controllable Mode
(controllable) of the function block.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1451
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]

[scfbudct, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-90 Parameterization Options of the User-Defined Function Block [Control]

Parameter: Check switching authority


• Default setting (_:104) Check switching authority = yes
With the Check switching authority parameter, you determine whether the command source of
switching commands must be checked (see chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking
Protection).
Parameter: Check if pos. is reached
• Default setting (_:105) Check if pos. is reached = yes
With the Check if pos. is reached parameter, you check at a switching command whether the
switching direction equals the current position.
Parameter: Check swi.auth. for Mode
• Default setting (_:150) Check swi.auth. for Mode = no
With the Check swi.auth. for Mode parameter, you specify whether the switching authority for the
command source must be checked when switching the controllable Mode (controllable) to the mode
On, Off, or Test. If you set the parameter Check swi.auth. for Mode to yes, the switching command
is only executed with appropriate switching authority (see chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear
Interlocking Protection).

7.6.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


U-def.FB ctl.#
_:104 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
• advanced
_:105 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached • yes

1452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Switching authority
_:150 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
swi.auth. for Mode • yes
_:151 U-def.FB ctl.#:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth. • 1
_:152 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • 0 true
sw. authorities • 1
_:115 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for • station/remote
• remote
_:153 U-def.FB ctl.#:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:155 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1
_:156 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 2
_:157 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 3
_:158 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 4
_:159 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 5
_:154 U-def.FB ctl.#:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth. • 1

7.6.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
U-def.FB ctl.#
_:503 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:504 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:505 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:506 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:51 U-def.FB ctl.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 U-def.FB ctl.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 U-def.FB ctl.#:Health ENS O
_:302 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:308 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:309 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 2 SPC C
_:310 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 3 SPC C
_:311 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 4 SPC C
_:312 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 5 SPC C
_:313 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching authority ENS O
_:314 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching mode ENS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1453
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.7 CFC-Chart Settings

7.7 CFC-Chart Settings

7.7.1 Overview of Functions

If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime using
DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of integer
parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters. Instantiate the appropriate function block
depending on the parameter value needed (logical, integer, or floating point). In this way, the current value of
the parameter can then be used in the CFC chart at runtime.

7.7.2 Function Description

You can find the CFC-chart parameters Chrt sett.Bool , Chart setting Int , and Chrt sett.real
in the DIGSI library in the User-defined functions folder. Drag and drop the desired function block into a func-
tion group or a function. Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param-
eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item. You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC
charts.

NOTE

i The user-defined function groups and the user-defined functions can be used to group the CFC-chart
parameters. You can rename for the function block and change the parameter value in the DIGSI Informa-
tion routing matrix to suit your specific application.

[sccfcparam, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-91 CFC-Chart Parameters within Information Routing

7.7.3 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Chrt sett.Bool

• Default setting Chrt sett.Bool = False

1454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.7 CFC-Chart Settings

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This
input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.

Parameter: Chart setting Int

• Default setting Chart setting Int = 10


You can use the parameter Chart setting Int in a CFC chart as an input signal with an integer value.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.

Parameter: Chrt sett.real

• Default setting Chrt sett.real = 100.000


You can use the parameter Chrt sett.real in a CFC chart as an input signal with a floating-point number.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.

7.7.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Chrt sett.Bool
_:105 Chrt sett.Bool:Value • 0 false
• 1

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Chart setting Int
_:105 Chart setting Int:Value -2147483648 to 2147483647 10

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Chrt sett.real
_:105 Chrt sett.real:Value -10000000000.000 % to 100.000 %
10000000000.000 %

7.7.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Chrt sett.Bool
_:305 Chrt sett.Bool:Setting value SPS O

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Chart setting Int
_:305 Chart setting Int:Setting value INS O

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Chrt sett.real
_:305 Chrt sett.real:Setting value MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1455
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

7.8.1 Function Description

With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor
the proper execution of the adjusting commands.
The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervision
and monitoring functions. The supervision and monitoring functions are used to check the voltage and supply
information about the tap position for adaptive matching of the transformer differential protection.

The following options are provided for control:


• Direct user commands via the device keypad or routed binary inputs
• User-defined conditions via the CFC
If the transformer tap changer reaches the end positions, the control function issues the (_:301) End
higher pos.reached or (_:302) End lower pos.reached indication.
The transformer tap controller is controlled by the function group Transformer tap changers, which you can
select from the DIGSI library (group Switching devices).

[sc_tssdig, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-92 Transformer Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix

The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position Information,
based on IEC 61850). You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired number of binary inputs that
indicate the current tap position.
You can find more information in chapter 7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Position Controllable also contains parameters. If you wish to change the settings, you must select the
Controllable in the DIGSI information matrix and change the settings by way of the Properties dialog. The taps
are controlled via the commands Higher command and Lower command, each of which must be connected
to one binary output.

1456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

Example
The following 2 figures show a CFC chart as an example for transformer tap control with the routing of the
function keys for stepping up or stepping down.

[schilocd-280316-01, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-93 Routing of the Function Keys and CFC Signals

To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications (SPS). These are used for the func-
tion keys (for example, <F1>, Higher function key and <F2>, Lower function key) and as the input signals for
the appropriate CFC blocks. In addition, you must use the controllable Cmd. with feedback for the CFC
chart.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1457
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

You can select the control direction using the following values at the Val input of the BSC_DEF building block.
• 1 means step up

• 0 means step down

[scbivctv-280715-01, 3, en_US]

Figure 7-94 CFC Chart

Pressing the function keys to step up or down incrementally can be displayed using this simple CFC chart.

Motor Supervision Time


The runtime of the motor-drive mechanism can be monitored from the device. This function is used to identify
failures of the motor-drive mechanism during the switching procedure and to trip actions if necessary. To use
the Motor supervision time, you must route the motor sliding contact (most significant binary input)
and set the proper motor runtime.
The motor sliding contact is active until the tap changer has reached the new position. This time is compared
to the Motor supervision time. If the new tap position is not reached within the motor runtime, the
Motor sup. time expired indication is set. The Trigger motor prot. sw. indication with which
the motor can be switched off is output for a duration of 1.5 s.

Adjusting-Command Supervision
Adjusting-command supervision is used for checking the proper operation of the tap-changer mechanism. The
Transformer tap changer function calculates the next logical tap position as a result of the higher/lower
command. The time of position detection is determined as a function of the availability of the motor sliding
contact. After resetting the active motor sliding contact, the Transformer tap changer function reads the new
tap position value. If the value for the calculated tap position could not be received within the parameterized
time Motor supervision time, the error message Position failure is output.
The following position errors of the transformer tap changer are taken into consideration during this:
• Invalid tap position: The tap position is outside the predefined range of minimum value and maximum
value

• Adjusting command in the wrong direction (for example, if a higher tap was commanded and the tap
changer responds with a lower position and vice versa)

• No operation of the tap changer (for example, if the tap-changer motor is defective or the position indi-
cation is not functioning)

• Illogical tap-change operation (for example, if no logical tap position following the previous position is
indicated)

1458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

The value of 0 during an unexpected interruption of the auxiliary voltage represents a special case. An invalid
tap-changer position without a corresponding adjusting command is signaled in the Position controllable
only as an invalid tap position.

[lotcmoue-090713-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 7-95 Position and Motor Supervision Logic

The user-defined signals Higher command and Lower command are provided via a CFC chart (see
Figure 7-94).

Supervision Behavior
Depending on the setting of the Supervision behavior parameter, the function reaches a health state of
Alarm or Warning. You can set the parameter Supervision behavior to off, alarm block, or
warning.
In the alarm block mode, the function is set to the health state Alarm. All tap-changer commands are
blocked.
In the warning mode, the function is set to the health state Warning. Executing tap-changer commands is
still possible.
You can manually reset the health state of alarm block or warning using the controllable Reset errors
(Main menu → Device functions → Reset functions → Tap changer). As an alternative to this, you can also
switch off the supervision function and then switch it on again.

Operating Counter
The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting commands with the Op.ct. switching
cycle counting value. The counting and memory levels are protected against an auxiliary-voltage failure. The
switching cycle counting value can be set to 0 or to any other starting value.
You can access the statistical values via the operation panel on the device (measured values/statistics), via
DIGSI, or using various communication protocols.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1459
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameters of the Transformer Tap Changer Function Group

[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-96 Parameters of the Tap Changer

NOTE

i If run positions, this means internal tap changer positions without voltage changes, are available, the
following must be observed:
If these tap changer positions contain a suffix a and c or + and -, and additional switching pulses are not
required, adjust the parameter for the feedback and motor supervision time to the actual motor runtime
when passing through a run position. Siemens recommends parameterization with capturing of the motor
sliding contact.

Parameter: Check switching authority

• Default setting (_:104) Check switching authority = yes


With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (on site,
remote) is checked in the case of an adjusting command (see also chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and
Switchgear Interlocking Protection).

Parameter: Control model

• Default setting (_:108) Control model = SBO w. enh. security


Use the Control model parameter to specify the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2. The following
selection options are available:
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.

• direct w. enh. security

• SBO w. enh. security

• status only

1460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

Parameter: SBO time-out

• Default setting (_:109) SBO time-out = 30 s


With this setting, you specify the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).

Parameter: Feedback monitoring time

• Default setting (_:110) Feedback monitoring time = 10 s


Reaching a new tap position after the switching command is monitored. If a new tap position is not reached,
you specify with this setting the time when the command is canceled. The range of values extends from 0.01 s
to 1800.00 s.

Parameter: Maximum output time

• Default setting (_:111) Maximum output time = 1.50 s


This parameter specifies the maximum output time. The range of values extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. For
activating motors to change the tap position, a time of 1.50 s is practical.

Parameter: Supervision behavior

• Default setting (_:112) Supervision behavior = alarm block


You can select whether the supervision is switched off (off) or if only a warning is indicated (warning). With
the alarm block setting, an alarm indication is generated and the function is blocked.

Parameter: Motor supervision time

• Default setting (_:113) Motor supervision time = 10 s


After the motor supervision time has elapsed, the indication Motor sup. time expired is displayed. You
can find additional information in section Motor Supervision Time, Page 1458. The range of values extends
from 5 s to 100 s.

Parameter: Highest tap changer pos.

• Default setting (_:116) Highest tap changer pos. = Lowest voltage tap
With the Highest tap changer pos. parameter, you specify whether the lowest or highest voltage is
present at the highest tap changer position.

Additional Settings (Properties Dialog Position)


Additional settings are assigned to the controllable Position. To display and adjust the settings, select
Position in the DIGSI information matrix and select the Properties dialog. To do this, click the Properties
tab.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1461
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

[scdeegts-170216-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-97 Properties Dialog

Parameter: Minimum value

• Default setting Minimum value = 1

Parameter: Maximum value

• Default setting Maximum value = 15


The parameters Minimum value and Maximum value are initially calculated by DIGSI 5 on the basis of the
tap coding, the Number of tap positions, and the Tap-display offset. They represent the allowed
control area of the position value. Positions outside this area are defined as invalid. This control area can be
further restricted within the initially set physical range (see Number of tap positions and Tap-
display offset).

Parameter: Tap-display offset

• Default setting Tap-display offset = 0


If you want to move the height of the displayed value in a positive or the negative direction with respect to
the height of the actual value, enter the value for this in the Tap-display offset field.

Parameter: Number of bits f. tap code

• Default setting Number of bits f. tap code = 4


With the Number of bits f. tap code parameter, you set the number of bits you need for encoding the
transformer taps. The number is dependent on the selected Encoding and on the Moving contact. For
example, you need 3 bits for 7 binary-encoded transformer taps. The range of values extends from 2 to 32.

1462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

Parameter: Number of tap positions

• Default setting Number of tap positions = 15


With the Number of tap positions parameter, you set the number of transformer taps. The range of
values extends from 2 to 127. The output of the tap position is limited from -63 to +63. If the number of taps
is > 63, set the Tap-display offset parameter so that the output of the tap position is within the range of
-63 to +63.

Parameter: Tap-coding type

• Default setting Tap-coding type = binary


In the Tap-coding type list box, select the interpretation type of the indication pending at the binary input.
You can select from the following options:
• binary
• 1-of-n

• BCD

• table

• BCD signed

• gray
The tap changer position can also be routed via a GOOSE signal (BSC) or a 20-mA measuring transducer input.
You can find more information on this in the document Measuring the transformer tap changer using an
analog measuring transducer input in SIPROTEC 5 in the Download area under SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI
5 downloads → SIPROTEC 5 General → Application Notes → Control.
A selection of tap-coding types is described in greater detail using examples in the following text.

Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type binary)


The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 3) with 4 transformer tap positions desig-
nated 3 to 6. BI4 is the moving contact. The encoding is in binary.

Table 7-25 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type binary)

Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X X – –
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving – –
contact
Tap = 1 1 0 0 – –

With 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 23 -1 = 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code. If all routed binary
inputs indicate 0, this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position --- or -64 with quality
invalid. The representation of transformer taps should start with the numerical value 3. You must configure
the information properties as follows for the example:
Tap-coding type: binary
Number of tap positions: 7
Number of bits f. tap code: 4
Tap-display offset: 2
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes

The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, and BI 4 for the moving
contact.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1463
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD)


The following table shows the routing of 6 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 6) with 39 transformer tap positions desig-
nated 1 to 39. The encoding is in BCD. BI 7 is the moving contact.

Table 7-26 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD)

Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7
Tap changer X X X X X X X
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 BCD 4 BCD 8 BCD 10 BCD 20 Moving
contact
Tap = 21 1 0 0 0 0 1 –

With 6 binary inputs, a maximum of 39 tap positions can be mapped with the tap-coding type of BCD. This
yields the number of tap positions from 1 to 39. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is detected as tap 0.
The 7 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, BI 4, BI 5, BI 6, and BI 7 for
the moving contact.
Tap-coding type: BCD
Number of tap positions: 39
Number of bits f. tap code: 7
Tap-display offset: 0
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes

Individual Tap-Coding Type (table)


With the table parameter setting, you can specify an individual Tap-coding type.
In the Representation of encoding section, select the number system in which your code table entries
will take place, alternatively:
• Binary (2 characters)
• Octal (8 characters)

• Decimal (10 characters)

• Hexadecimal (16 characters)


The selected option is valid for all inputs in the Encoding column.
If you change the number system and there are already entries in this column, these will be converted to the
new number system. The selection area becomes visible as soon as you have selected the setting table in the
Tap-coding type list box.

1464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

[sccotabi-111016-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-98 Code Table for the Tap-Code Type table

NOTE

i If the binary inputs used for encoding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of
the display offset). For an invalid tap position, the display shows the position --- or -64 with quality invalid,
exception BCD signed, see Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed), Page 1465.

Enter the encoding for the tap in the Encoding column in the Code table. Enter the value according to the
number system previously selected. Select the desired number of taps and number of bits for tap coding. Taps
with the same encoding and taps with 0 coding are not permitted.

Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)


The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI -3) with 7 transformer tap positions desig-
nated 3 to 3. The encoding uses BCD signed.

Table 7-27 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)

Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X – – –
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 Sign – – –
Tap = 1 1 0 1 – – –

Using 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD signed.
This yields the number of tap positions from -3 to 3. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is recognized as
tap 0. The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially.
Tap-coding type: BCD signed
Number of tap positions: 7
Number of bits f. tap code: 3
Tap-display offset: 0
Moving contact (highest binary input): No

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1465
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

Routing the Tap Position to Binary Outputs


For the output of the adjusting commands, route the information step up and step down on one relay each,
see following figure.

[sc_trass7, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-99 Routing the Tap Setting Commands

Parameter: Moving contact (highest binary input)

• Default setting Moving contact (highest binary input) = no


If the tap position is only to be recognized as valid and implemented when the motor sliding contact signals
that it has reached the taps, then activate the Moving contact (highest binary input) option. If this
parameter is set, the new position is only labeled with an * when the moving contact drops out.

Parameter: Software filter time

• Default setting Software filter time = 1000 ms


With this parameter, you set the Software filter time for capturing the tap position. The range of
values extends from 0 ms to 86400000 ms. Within this time, brief changes on the binary inputs are
suppressed.

Parameter: Retrigger filter

• Default setting Retrigger filter = Yes


With this parameter, you switch retriggering of the filtering time by a position change on or off.

Parameter: Indication timestamp before filtering

• Default setting Indication timestamp before filtering = no


With this parameter, you specify whether the hardware filtering time is accounted for in the time stamp of
position capture.

Parameter: Chatter blocking

• Default setting Chatter blocking = no


With this parameter, you switch Chatter blocking on or off.

1466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

7.8.3 Settings (Properties Dialog)

The settings listed here can only be reached and changed by way of the Properties dialog of the Position
Controllable.
Addr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting
General Information
- Minimum value Calculated -
- Maximum value Calculated -
- Tap-display offset –63 to +63 0
- Number of bits f. tap code 2 to 32 4
- Number of tap positions 2 to 63 15
- Tap-coding type • binary binary
• 1-of-n
• BCD
• table
• BCD signed
• gray
Software filter
- Software filter time 0 ms to 86400000 ms 500 ms

7.8.4 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Control
_:104 Tap changer:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
• advanced
_:108 Tap changer:Control • status only SBO w. enh.
model • direct w. normal secur. security
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:109 Tap changer:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:110 Tap changer:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
monitoring time
Tap changer
_:111 Tap changer:Maximum 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 1.50 s
output time
_:112 Tap changer:Supervision • off alarm block
behavior • warning
• alarm block
_:113 Tap changer:Motor 5 s to 100 s 10 s
supervision time
_:116 Tap changer:Highest tap • Lowest voltage tap Lowest voltage
changer pos. • Highest voltage tap tap
_:114 Tap changer:Lowest tap -64 to 64 1
position
_:115 Tap changer:Highest tap -64 to 64 15
position

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1467
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Switching authority
_:117 Tap changer:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth. • 1
_:118 Tap changer:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities • 1
_:119 Tap changer:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for • station/remote
• remote
_:120 Tap changer:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:121 Tap changer:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth. • 1

7.8.5 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Tap changer
_:500 Tap changer:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:501 Tap changer:>Enable SPS I
_:507 Tap changer:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:508 Tap changer:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:509 Tap changer:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:510 Tap changer:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:504 Tap changer:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:53 Tap changer:Health ENS O
_:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached SPS O
_:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached SPS O
_:308 Tap changer:Position BSC C
_:305 Tap changer:Higher command SPS O
_:306 Tap changer:Lower command SPS O
_:307 Tap changer:Command active SPS O
_:309 Tap changer:Motor sup. time expired SPS O
_:310 Tap changer:Trigger motor prot. sw. SPS O
_:311 Tap changer:Position failure SPS O
_:312 Tap changer:Op.ct. INS O
_:313 Tap changer:Switching authority ENS O
_:314 Tap changer:Switching mode ENS O
_:319 Tap changer:Reset failure SPC C
_:317 Tap changer:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:320 Tap changer:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:321 Tap changer:Enable sw. auth. 2 SPC C
_:322 Tap changer:Enable sw. auth. 3 SPC C
_:323 Tap changer:Enable sw. auth. 4 SPC C
_:324 Tap changer:Enable sw. auth. 5 SPC C

1468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

7.9 Voltage Controller

7.9.1 Overview of Functions

The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is used to control power transformers (two-
winding transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling transformers) and auto transformers using a
motor-operated tap changer. In addition, the voltage control can be used for two-winding transformers
connected in parallel.
The function provides automatic voltage control within a specified voltage range on the secondary side of the
transformers or, as an alternative, at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X compensation) in the
network. In order to compensate for the voltage variations in the meshed system, use the LDC-Z procedure (Z
compensation). For voltage drops on the line, use the LDC-XandR procedure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that a higher or lower adjusting command to the tap changer, as a
function of the voltage change (ΔV) per tap, causes a voltage increase or decrease.
The voltage control operates on a tap-for-tap basis and compares the measured actual voltage (Vact) with the
specified target voltage (Vtarget). If the voltage difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a higher or
lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed. Specifying the
time delay (T1) depends on the set controller response (inverse or linear), so as to avoid unnecessary adjusting
commands during brief voltage deviations from the target value and for coordination with other automatic
voltage controllers in the system.
The voltage controller function also monitors the currents on the upper-voltage side and the low-voltage side
of the transformer to block the voltage controller during impermissible operating states (overcurrent/under-
current/undervoltage). The voltage controller function also has limiting values that, in special operating cases,
suppress higher adjusting commands in the case of overvoltage and lower adjusting commands in the case of
undervoltage.
You can also use the voltage controller function for parallel control of up to 8 two-winding transformers in
different groups. You can carry out parallel control based on the Master-Follower method or using circulating
reactive current minimization method. You can find more detailed information about parallel control in
chapter 7.9.3.8 Parallel Operation.

7.9.2 Structure of the Function

The Two-winding transformer voltage controller , Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and
Grid coupling transformer voltage controller function groups consist of 5 function blocks. Depending on
the application, the function groups are preconfigured in the relevant application template by the manufac-
turer or can be copied into the corresponding device project during engineering.
The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Two-winding transformer voltage
controller function group.

[dwvolctl-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]

Figure 7-100 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1469
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

The functions General (GAPC), Tap changer (YLTC), and Voltage controller (ATCC) are logical node points in
IEC 61850-8-1.
The tap changer (YLTC) is the interface between the voltage controller (ATCC) and the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). This means that the voltage controller (ATCC) sends higher and lower
adjusting commands to the tap changer. This tap changer issues command pulses to the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). The tap changer (YLTC) measures the tap positions and monitors the
action of the motor-operated tap changer (OLTC).
The Parallel control function is needed for the parallel operation of 2 to 8 transformers. The Parallel control
function can only be instantiated in the Voltage controller function group.
The function group has interfaces to the following measuring points:
• Two-winding transformer:
– Voltage, 3-phase
– Current, 3-phase (optional)

• Three-winding transformer:
– 2 x voltage, 3-phase
– 2 x current, 3-phase (optional)

• Grid coupling transformer:


– 2 x voltage, 3-phase
– 2 x current, 3-phase
Figure 7-101 shows these interfaces as a block structure.

[dwvocnti-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]

Figure 7-101 Structure of the Voltage Control Function Group

You can find the information and function measured values of the voltage controller in the DIGSI routing
matrix.

7.9.3 Function Description

7.9.3.1 General
If the load is increased in an electricity-supply system, the voltage is reduced and vice versa. The power trans-
formers are usually equipped with transformer tap changers (OLTC) so as to keep the power-system voltage at
a constant level.
As a result, the transformer ratio is changed in predefined steps. Changes to the transformer taps cause the
voltage to change.
The Voltage control function is intended to control transformers with motor-operated transformer tap
changers.

1470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

This function is designed to control the following:


• For two-winding transformers (2W): the voltage on the secondary circuit of the power transformer and
parallel control of several transformers feeding the same busbar or a nodal point of a system

• For three-winding transformers (3W): the voltage of the secondary winding 1 or winding 2

• For grid coupling transformers (GC): voltage of winding 1 or winding 2, selectively depending on the
power direction
Control operation is based on a step-by-step principle. To move the tap changer one position higher or lower,
a single control pulse is issued to the motor-drive mechanism of the tap changer. The length of the control
pulse can be set over a large range so as to handle the different types of tap-changer drives. The control pulse
is issued if the measured voltage deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset voltage range
for more than a given time period.
The voltage can be controlled at the voltage measuring point or at the load point in the electrical power
system. In this case, the load-point voltage is calculated on the basis of the measured load current and the
known impedance between the voltage measuring point and the load point.
The following figures show possible configurations of the voltage controller for two-winding transformers
with and without current measurement.

[dwkonlst-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-102 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for
Load Compensation at the End of the Line

(1) Only if a transformer side is present

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1471
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[dwkonlsK-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-103 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers without Current Measurement

Three-Winding Transformers
Three-winding transformers are special power transformers that have 2 separate windings on the secondary
circuit and typically supply 2 different busbars. The voltage levels on the secondary circuit of the power trans-
formers can either be the same or different. In addition to designs with 2 tap changers on the secondary
circuits, in most cases, three-winding transformers are equipped with only one tap changer or on-load tap
changer on the primary side. It is therefore necessary to feed both voltages of the secondary windings to the
voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and to specify one of them, depending on the busbar situation, to the
voltage controller as the control variable.
The voltages of side 1 and 2 of the three-winding transformer are simultaneously monitored. In the process,
the voltage to be controlled can be automatically selected via the load current of both sides or by using one
parameter. This parameter is the settings group switching via binary input, protocol, or function keys. The
uncontrolled voltage can be monitored in parallel to ensure that it remains within the defined voltage limits.
If a current measuring point is assigned to a function group, the voltage to be controlled can be automatically
selected dependent on the load.
For automatic on-load tap changing, the voltage of the transformer side into which the larger load current
flows is controlled. The respective uncontrolled voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage.
In contrast to overvoltage on the controlled side, for overvoltage on the uncontrolled side, the higher
adjusting command is blocked and no fast step down to a lower tap occurs. In case of undervoltage on the
uncontrolled side, the lower adjusting commands are blocked if this behavior is activated for undervoltage
supervision.

1472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[dw_V-constell-3wind-with-imeas.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-104 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement
for Load Compensation at the End of the Line

(1) Only if a transformer side is available

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1473
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[dw_V-constell-3wind-without-imeas-091014.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-105 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers without Current Measure-
ment

Grid Coupling Transformers


Grid coupling transformers are special power transformers that connect 2 electrical power systems to one
another. The load-side voltage is controlled. The power flow can change during operation. That is why both
voltages and currents, winding 1 and winding 2, voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and current measuring
inputs (I1 and I2) must be fed. A voltage must be specified as a function of the load situation to the voltage
controller as the control variable.
The voltages of the windings 1 and 2 of the grid coupling transformers are simultaneously monitored. In the
process, you can select the voltage to be controlled using one parameter. This parameter can be changed
using the settings group switching via the binary input, protocol, or function keys.

1474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[dw_V-constell-2wind-coupl-transf.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-106 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Grid Coupling Transformers

On-Load Tap Changer


On-load tap changers are used to set the desired tap of a stepped winding of the transformer while under
load. During switchover, the desired tap of the stepped winding is first selected by means of the tap selector.
Next, the on-load tap changer switches over from the current-carrying tap to the selected tap. During this
switchover, one tap of the stepped winding is briefly bridged by an ohmic resistor so that the load switchover
takes place without current interruption. Physically, the tap changer is installed in the transformer tank or in a
separate tank.

Tap Changer
The Tap changer function issues the adjusting commands to the on-load tap changer and receives the corre-
sponding feedback. The function of the tap changer inside the voltage controller corresponds to that of the
separate tap changer. The higher and lower adjusting commands are generated by the voltage controller. The
Check switching authority, Control model, SBO time-out, and Feedback monitoring time
parameters are set only in the voltage controller.
You can find more information in chapter 7.9.4.1 General.

Voltage Controller
The Voltage controller function controls the voltage within the bandwidth and within the set voltage limits.
Using the Mode parameter, you can turn the voltage controller on or off or set it for test mode.
With the Number of target voltage parameter, you can specify up to 4 target voltages. You can only
activate one of these target voltages at a time using function key, communication, or a binary input. Use the
Set point mode active parameter to specify a valid target voltage via a communication network.
If the voltage controller is switched off, adjusting commands cannot be given to the tap changer in automatic
operation or in manual operation. The set on-site or remote switching authority is independent of this.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1475
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

You can set the voltage controller operating mode using the Operating mode parameter or the Operating
mode command to automatic operation or manual operation. In automatic operation, the voltage is
controlled automatically in accordance with the set parameters.

Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller


For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the feedback
control are permanently defined.
With the voltage controller for the three-winding transformer, these measurands can be specified using one
parameter (parameter Winding selection = Winding 1 or Winding 2) or they can be automatically
selected (Winding selection = WithMaxLoad).
The winding is automatically selected by evaluating the load current in the windings. If the load current in one
of the two windings is greater than the load current in the other winding by 5 % of the rated current for 10 s,
then the winding voltage is controlled using the larger load current.

Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller


For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the feedback
control are permanently defined.
With the grid coupling transformer voltage controller, these measurands can be selected using a parameter
(parameter Winding selection = Winding 1 or Winding 2).
You can change the winding selection during operation using the settings group switching.
You can monitor the power-flow direction. If the difference in the power of Winding 1 and Winding 2 is
greater than 10 % of the rated power on the control side, the indication Power-flow superv. appears and
the function switches to alarm status.

1476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

7.9.3.2 Logic of the Function

[lovoltco-060913-01.vsd, 4, en_US]

Figure 7-107 Superordinate Logic of the Voltage Controller

1) Manual operation
2) Automatic operation
3) Controllable
4) Command
5) Position and motor supervision (Figure 7-95)

In accordance with the IEC 61850 standard, DOI LTCBlk (Block automatic operation command), automatic
control can be blocked with a command.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1477
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

The voltage controller measures the actual voltage (Vact) and compares it to the target voltage (Vtarget). If
the difference between the measured voltage (control deviation D) is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a
higher or lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed.
You can change the settings for control during operation with the settings group switching.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device

• Via binary inputs

• Via a communication connection to substation automation technology (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
You can find more information in chapter 3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching.

7.9.3.3 Control Response

Control Deviation
The control deviation is calculated from the present actual voltage and the target voltage in relation to the
rated voltage.

[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]

D = Control deviation

Bandwidth
To minimize the number of switching operations by the tap changer, a permitted bandwidth is defined. If the
actual voltage is within the bandwidth, no adjusting control commands are issued to the tap changer. If the
actual voltage exceeds the defined bandwidth, an adjusting command is issued after the set time delay T1
delay. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth before T1 delay elapses, no
adjusting control command is issued.
If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth within the time delay T1, the running time
delay T1 continues to count down, starting at the already elapsed time. If the actual voltage returns again to
the set bandwidth while the time is counting down, the time delay T1 is started at the remaining time. In this
way, the time delay is reduced in the event of frequent violations of the lower limit of the bandwidth.

[dwistspn-060913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-108 Actual-Voltage Curve during Control Deviation

1478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

(a) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth


(b) Actual voltage before T1 elapses within the bandwidth - no switching
(c) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth, T1 begins to elapse
(d) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth after T1, switching procedure initiated
(e) Switching procedure concluded, actual voltage within the bandwidth

Linear, Inverse
With linear control response, the voltage controller reacts independently of the control deviation after the set
time T1 delay. If more than one tap-position change is required to bring the actual voltage back within the
bandwidth, the set time T2 delay takes effect.
With inverse control response, the time T1 delay depends on the magnitude of the control deviation. Small
deviations are tolerated for longer than larger ones. If the time delay is very small in accordance with the set
characteristic curve, the time T1 Inverse Min takes effect.
The set inverse characteristic curve is a function of the parameter T1 delay. The characteristic curves arising
for different settings of the time T1 delay are shown in chapter 7.9.4.1 General, margin title Parameter: T1
characteristic.

Zero Potential or Voltage Recovery


If the actual voltage is not within the defined bandwidth after a voltage recovery, it can be necessary for the
voltage controller to send the 1st adjusting command with the T2 time. For this purpose, the parameter
Regulate with T2 at start must be activated.

[dw_istgro-130215, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-109 Actual-Voltage Curve during Control with T2

(1) Actual voltage below the minimum voltage


(2) After switching on, the change to a higher tap occurs with time T2
(3) After the voltage recovery, the actual voltage is above the bandwidth
(4) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth. A fast step down mode is carried out with the time T2 until
the bandwidth is reached.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1479
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Larger Voltage Deviations

[dwistgro-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-110 Actual-Voltage Curve During Larger Control Deviations

(1) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth


(2) The change to a higher tap occurs after T1 and then T2
(3) Actual voltage inside the bandwidth
(4) Actual voltage outside the limit for a fast step down. A fast step down mode is carried out until
the bandwidth is reached.

Fast Step Up Mode and Fast Step Down Mode


The fast step down mode and the fast step up mode allow a quick reaction to abnormal voltage situations.
Figure 7-110 shows such a situation at point (4). A fast step down mode occurs until the bandwidth has been
reached. The tap-position time between 2 consecutive lower adjusting commands results from the following 2
conditions:
• The completion of a tap change command after the new valid position was detected
• The measurement time for capturing the new actual voltage
The activity of the fast step down mode and the fast step up mode is displayed with the indications (_:
14011:308) Fast Step Down active and (_:14011:307) Fast Step Up active.

[losnlruk-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-111 Logic of the Fast Step Down Mode

The fast step up mode works in a similar fashion.

1480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

7.9.3.4 Function Supervision

Automatic Operation
If the actual voltage exceeds or falls below the set bandwidth for longer than the set time delay, this situation
is shown by the indication (_:14011:309) Auto Monitor. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage
range, the indication is reset. You can switch off the function monitor with a time delay = 0 min.

[lofktueb-090913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-112 Logic of the Function Supervision for Automatic Operation

7.9.3.5 Line Compensation


When using line compensation, the voltage drop of a phase that is connected to a transformer can be
included. In this case, 2 processes are available:
• Z compensation (LDC-Z)
• X and R compensation (LDC-XandR)

NOTE

i Line compensation is only active if power is flowing in the direction of the line.

Z Compensation (LDC-Z)
Z compensation allows you to include the voltage drop of a line connected to the transformer. You can switch
Z compensation on or off. If cos φ is roughly constant, you can use Z compensation. Setting the parameters
requires the calculation of the voltage increase (Target voltage rising) taking into consideration the
load current (Max load current).
The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a % under rated
load.
You can find more information and the calculation in chapter 7.9.4.1 General.
In case of active Z compensation, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to the
target voltage to avoid too high voltage at the transformer. To do this, set the parameter Max load
current. In addition, the parameter Vmax threshold is active. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold
value, no more higher adjusting commands are issued.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1481
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[dwregchr-090913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]

Figure 7-113 Control Characteristic with Z Compensation

X and R Compensation (LDC-XandR)


During the application of the X and R compensation, you need the phase data. With this data, it is possible to
precisely compensate the voltage drop of the transmission lines. The following figure shows the effect of this
compensation type.

[dw-line-drop-kompensation-250214-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-114 Phasor Diagram of the X and R Compensation

Vtransf Voltage on the transformer, voltage to be controlled


Vload Voltage of load point (target voltage, Vload = Vtransf - Vdrop)
Vdrop Voltage drop of the phase
IR, IX Voltage drop due to R and X of the line

1482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Iload Load current


φ Rotor angle

You can also use X and R compensation for parallel control of transformers. If the X value is positive, the
voltage losses of the phase are compensated. If you are implementing parallel control with X and R compensa-
tion, then the X value is negative and considers the voltage increase from the busbar to the transformer.
If the X and R compensation are active, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to
the target voltage in order to avoid a voltage at the transformer that is too high. To do this, set the parameter
Vmax threshold. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold value, no more higher adjusting commands
are issued.

7.9.3.6 Limiting Values


The limiting values cause no higher or lower adjusting commands to be given to the tap changer in the event
of an upper limit violation (Vmax threshold) or lower limit violation (Vmin threshold). In this way,
changing taps under abnormal voltage conditions and changing taps in the incorrect direction (for example, in
the event of wiring errors) is prevented.
The lower and upper tap changer limits are included in the limiting values. The parameters Lower tap-
position limit and Higher tap-position limit cause an additional restriction of the control range.

7.9.3.7 Blockings
The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions. The following blocking functions are
available:
• Undervoltage
• Overcurrent, load current

• Undercurrent

• External blocking (binary input)

• Blocking command LTCBlock IEC 61850

• Blocking in the event of pickup of the transformer differential protection


Using the parameter Blocking behavior, you specify whether the blockings are to take effect only in auto-
matic operation (Auto) or in both automatic and manual operation (Auto-Manual).
Overcurrent blocking prevents tap-change operations in the event of an overload. For the current blockings,
the positive-sequence system of the load current and of the current on the upper-voltage side of transformers
is calculated.
By assigning the tap changer to the transformer side, you also arrange the current of the upper-voltage side.
Perform this assignment in the appropriate Transformer side function group. Here, you must use the tap
changer of the voltage controller.
Undervoltage blocking prevents tap-change operations in the event of a network collapse. The output signals
of the voltage controller are blocked and, depending on the operating mode, the indication Auto Blocking
and/or Manual Blocking is issued.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1483
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-115 Logic Blockings

1) If transformer differential protection is available


2) If a current measurement is available
3) If parallel proxys are available (max. 7)

If assignment of the tap changer for the transformer side is available, the current of the upper-voltage side is
also monitored and the differential-protection pickup automatically blocks the voltage controller.

Additional Blockings for the Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller


The blockings described in the above sections also apply to the controlled winding of the three-winding trans-
former. In addition, the blockings for undervoltage, minimum voltage, and overcurrent are used for the meas-
urands of the uncontrolled side.

Additional Blockings for the Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller


For voltage control in grid coupling transformers, the voltages and currents of both windings are always used
for the blockings.

7.9.3.8 Parallel Operation

General
The parallel operation of 2 or more power transformers is intended to increase the electrical throughput or
short-circuit power at a power-system node. An additional reason for the parallel operation of transformers is
a reserve in case of a failure of a transformer.
If power peaks are to be expected in the power system, multiple transformers can be connected in parallel on
different busbars. This allows several feeders to be supplied simultaneously. You can control up to 8 trans-
formers in parallel in one group. The evaluation of the measured and status values takes place via the IEC
61850 GOOSE communication.
If for the transformers used the tap positions differ, thus creating a different transformation ratio, the no-load
voltages on the low-voltage side are different. A circulating reactive current flows via the transformers. Since
the transformer impedance consists mainly of leakage inductance, the current is inductive. These currents can
result in an overload of the transformer.
The parallel operation is intended for two-winding transformers. For this application case, additionally instan-
tiate the function Parallel operation. For each of the transformers connected in parallel you need an addi-
tional function block ParallelProxy. The 1st ParallelProxy is preinstantiated. For a configuration with
8 transformers working in parallel, you can instantiate a maximum of 7 ParallelProxy. The exchange of
the necessary information takes place via this proxy. 8 transformers can be configured to a maximum of
4 groups.

1484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

For the Parallel operation, the following 2 methods are available:


• Master-follower method

• Method of minimizing circulating reactive current

Table 7-28 Conditions for the Use of Both Methods

Requirements for the Transformers Requirement for the Voltage Method


Controller
Voltage change Rated power Short-circuit Current meas- Tap position
per tap voltage devia- urement
tion
Same Same or <10 % Optional Necessary Master/Follower
different
Different Same or Different Necessary Recommended Minimizing circu-
different lating reactive
current

As the preceding table shows, before selecting the method, you must check whether the corresponding
requirements are met. If you place transformers in parallel, whose short-circuit voltages differ by more than
10 % from each other, then Siemens recommends the Method of minimizing circulating reactive current.

Control of the Function


You can control the Parallel operation function using setting values or commands.
Parameters Values
With setting values Parallel mode Master, No mode, Follower, Circulat. react
current
Parallel mode changeable by setting, controllable
Force master changeable by setting, controllable
With command Parallel operation (ParOp) independent, parallel
Set master (ForceMast) off, on
Parallel groups (ParGrp) 1 to 4

The state of the control is reported as:


• No mode
• Independent

• Master

• Follower

• Circulating reactive current


If the Parallel operation is connected to further transformers via the communication, the state is checked for
correctness. If this is not the case, an inconsistency indication is output. The communication to the trans-
formers of a group is also monitored. If a fault is present, this is reported.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1485
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_infogroup, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-116 Assigned Control Modules in Information Routing

Grouping
Each transformer in the parallel operation is assigned to a group. The group number can be set by a superordi-
nate control system or locally using a CFC logic. Once the group assignment is fixed, enter a value for the
initial start via the Properties tab of the command Parallel group in the information routing of DIGSI 5.

[sccfcgrouprel, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-117 CFC Chart for Group Assignment and Group Display

1486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_para_grouping_vc, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-118 Properties Tab of the Parallel Group

During operation you can change this assignment by command, depending on the switching state of the
transformers.

Logic of the Function

[lo_proxy-logic-part_01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-119 Grouping Logic

Parallel-Operation Detection via Group Inputs


You can control up to 8 transformers in parallel in one group or in 4 groups without detecting the system
topology. The devices in parallel operation use exclusively the information transmitted from devices of the

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1487
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

same parallel-operation group via GOOSE. The groups of the transformers to be controlled in parallel are set
and changed using the control Parallel group. Thus, you assign the device to a parallel-operation group.
You can do this remote or locally on the device. If No mode is set for the parallel operation, no group
assignment takes place.

Parallel-Operation Detection via Topology


In addition, you have the option to detect the group assignment in parallel operation based on the position of
the disconnectors and circuit breakers. To report its status, every disconnector and circuit breaker is equipped
with a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. These binary signals can be processed in a CFC chart and can be
dynamically adapted to the switching state of the system.
The signals Parallel group, Remote parallel mode, and Parallel mode active are transmitted
via the GOOSE communication between the other transformers in the group.

[lo_proxy-logic-part_03, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-120 Logic of the Blocking of Automatic Operation in the ParallelProxy

1) Only applies to the Master-follower method

The signals automatic operation, automatic-block. local, Health, and Remote parallel
mode are transmitted via the GOOSE communication between the other transformers in the group.
If the other voltage controllers in the group are set to the mode No mode or if the communication is
disturbed, the automatic operation is blocked. The blocking is reported. If a fault in the tap position is detected
via the difference in the tap positions of the transformers, the indication Error tap difference is issued.

1488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[lo_proxy-logic-part_02, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-121 Logic of the Parallel-Operation State Detection

Controlling Locally/Remote
The parallel operation can be done with a parameter or via the control. With the parameter setting control-
lable, with a CFC block, you can also use a binary input and the status signal of a circuit breaker
(Figure 7-124).
First, for the control of the Parallel operation, set the parameters Parallel mode changeable and
Force master changeable.
You can select one of the 2 options:
• by setting
• controllable

[sc_para_oper_change, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-122 Selection for Parallel Operation

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1489
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

If you set Parallel mode changeable to controllable, you can read and change the settings for the
parallel operation on the device under the following path:
• Main menu → Commands → Functionality → Voltage cont. 2w1 → Operation

[sc_para_hmi_oper, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-123 Menu Item for Parallel Operation on the Device Display

Figure 7-124 shows an example of a CFC chart for switching to parallel mode via the binary input of the circuit
breaker.

[sc_switchparop_cfc, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-124 CFC Chart

Master-Follower Method
As a prerequisite for the application of this method, the following values must be almost equal:
• Transformation ratios of the transformers used
• Number of the taps

• Voltage differential between the taps


The Master-Follower method regulates the Follower devices to the same tap position as the Master trans-
former. One voltage controller takes the lead (Master device), whilst the other voltage controllers (Follower
devices) follow its tap position (Master-Follower method). The Master device controls the busbar voltage auto-
matically according to the same principles of the available voltage-controller functionality for a two-winding
transformer. Compared with the Master-Slave method, this method has the advantage that losing a higher/
lower adjusting command (for example due to communication loss or auxiliary-voltage failure of the Follower
device) does not result in asynchrony of the transformers.
The Master-Follower method is suitable for transformers of the same design. If transformers of different
power are controlled with the Master-Follower method, you must make sure that the same tap positions

1490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

result in the same ratios. The relative short-circuit voltages of the transformers must not deviate significantly
from each other (max. 10 %).

Logic of the Master-Follower Method

[lo_parallel_voltage_contrl-master-follower, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-125 Logic of the Master-Follower Method

The Master-Follower method can be blocked using the automatic function in the systems control. In case of a
communication failure the function is also blocked.
The Master device controls the voltage of the transformer. The Follower device updates its tap position
according to the Master device. When doing so, the maximum tap-position difference between the trans-
formers is taken into account. If the tap-position difference is exceeded for a predefined time, an error is
reported (Error tap difference). If the supervision of a group detects that there is more than one
Master device, this is reported and the automatic operation is blocked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1491
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Manual Operation Master-Follower


Changing the tap of the tap changer using the Master device leads to an adjustment of the taps by all Follower
devices within the group.
In case of a communication error, a tap change can be done by the Follower device by switching to manual
operation. In the Master device and all Follower devices the Automatic mode is blocked.

Method of Minimizing Circulating Reactive Current


If the ratios of the transformers connected in parallel are different (>10 %), Siemens recommends the method
of Minimizing circulating reactive current. The prerequisite for the method of Minimizing circulating reac-
tive current is a data exchange between the ATCC function blocks (one ATCC function for each transformer in
the parallel group). The data exchange for ATCC functions in different devices occurs via the GOOSE communi-
cation of the IEC 61850 protocol. All data of the devices in a group is exchanged cyclically via GOOSE; both
analog and binary signals are exchanged.
The following advantages can be achieved with the method of Minimizing circulating reactive current for
parallel voltage control:
• Setting the load voltage to a preset value
• Minimizing circulating reactive current for transformers operated in parallel

Calculation of the Circulating Reactive Current


To calculate the circulating reactive current, the measured values of the individual transformers must be trans-
mitted between the affected voltage controllers. The suitable reference variable for all transformers in a
parallel group is the bus voltage. With this, there is a common reference between all devices within one
parallel transformer group. The measured bus voltage is the reference value of the devices used.

[dw_CCM_01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-126 Detection of the Circulating Reactive Current of a Parallel Group

The following formulas are used to calculate the circulating reactive current.
For each device, a direct-axis reactance relating to the control side of the transformer is calculated from the
following 3 parameters:
• Rated apparent power Srated of the transformer
• Rated voltage Vrated of the transformer

• Short-circuit voltage of the transformer VSC in percent

1492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

If the ohmic longitudinal resistance is neglected, the direct-axis reactance of the transformer Tk (k = 1,2,3 ... n
in the example) relating to the control side results in:

[fo_reakccm, 1, en_US]

This direct-axis resistance is transferred to the other voltage controllers as a measured value via GOOSE. This
value is displayed as a check. To determine the total load current, from each voltage controller the measured
current with magnitude and phase angle is transferred as a GOOSE CMV measured value.
The total load current results in:

[fo_summccm, 1, en_US]

The total inductive susceptance, the total susceptance of all transformers results in:

[fo_suszccm, 1, en_US]

The partial load current value of the individual transformers results from the ratio between susceptance and
total susceptance multiplied with the total load current. Only the inductive value, that is, the imaginary part
Im(IA) of the calculated total load current is used.

[fo_loadcurccm, 1, en_US]

The circulating reactive current at transformer k is the difference of the current measured at the transformer
and the calculated partial load current ILkImag. This is multiplied with -1 so that its positive no-load voltage
difference results in a positive circulating reactive current:

[fo_ccmtrafo, 1, en_US]

where:
ILkImag Calculated inductive part (imaginary part) of the partial load current of transformer k
IKBSk Circulating reactive current
IkImag Measured inductive part of the current at transformer k
ISC Measured current at the transformer
X Reactance of the transformer
k 1, 2, 3, ... 8 (number of the transformer)

Calculation of the Control Deviation


The control deviation DKBSk is calculated from the calculated circulating reactive current IKBSk:

[fo_regelabwdcc, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1493
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

where:
Xk Reactance of the transformer
Bp Total susceptance (total susceptance value) of all parallel transformers (sum of the reciprocals
of the transformer reactance)
Bk Susceptance of the transformer (reciprocal of the reactance)
Vrated Rated voltage of the transformer

With the parameter Reactive I control factor, you can adjust the control deviation DKBSk so that the
circulating reactive current caused by a tap difference results in exceeding the control bandwidth. A Reac-
tive I control factor which is set too high can affect the control stability. In most cases, control
quality and control stability are available with the default setting of 1.
The sum of the control deviation resulting from voltage deviation DV and the control deviation DKBSk, caused by
the circulating reactive current, results in:
Dk = DKBSk + DV
and is compared with the set bandwidth. The following 2 diagrams explain the summations of the control
deviation at negative and positive voltage deviation. A possible control deviation initiated by the circulating
reactive current, is on transformer T1 in contrast to transformer T2. This results for both voltage controllers in a
different total deviation.

Negative voltage deviation -DV Positive voltage deviation DV


Changing to higher tap of T2 with DV + DKBS2 < -B Changing to lower tap of T1 with DV + DKBS1 > B

For the calculation of the voltage deviation, the voltages of all voltage controllers are transferred with GOOSE
as a measured value and an average value is calculated. The voltage can be monitored. If the data are not
plausible the voltage controller is blocked after a time delay which can be set.

Error Behavior
If the value of the circulating reactive current exceeds the set time delay Circul. current time delay
for a longer time than the threshold value Circul. current threshold, the indication Circul.
current blocking is issued and the voltage control blocked.
If the circulating reactive current value drops below the preset value, the signal is automatically reset. You can
achieve this by manually controlling the tap changer.

Blocking the Tap Changer in Case of a Fault


To activate the supervision functions in Follower mode when used with the transformer differential protec-
tion, you must set the parameter Blocking in the voltage controller function to Auto-Manual.

1494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[scblockVC-240117-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-127 Parameter in the Voltage Controller

The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions.

[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-128 Blocking Logic

1) If transformer differential protection is available


2) If a current measurement is available
3) If parallel proxies are available (max. 7)

In addition to present blockings a parallel operation of the number of proxies used is taken into account.

Maintenance of Transformers Connected in Parallel


If you want to take the device out of service and disconnect it from the power supply, you must first function-
ally log off the device. If you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated in the device (state and
measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked = TRUE. This also applies to the output
from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can analyze the quality. After a switch off
of the transmitting device, the receiver devices detect that the transmitting device has been functionally
logged off and did not fail. Now the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states.

Table 7-29 Decommissioning

Binary input

Controllable/device display

NOTE

i Decommissioning the device is only allowed if the Parallel mode of the voltage controller is set to No
mode. After the decommissioning you must commission the voltage controller again.

The decommissioning can be done with binary input indications or via the control.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1495
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Supervision of the Communication


A communication fault can occur in the following cases:
• The connection between 2 SIPROTEC 5 devices is interrupted.
• A hard- or software error is present in the device.

• The supply voltage of one or more devices is not present.


If the receipt of GOOSE messages is disturbed, a GOOSE time-out is signaled and all GOOSE messages arriving
are signaled as invalid. If No mode is set in one of the devices, then the parallel operation is not blocked. If
a communication error is present, the parallel mode in the Master and Follower device cannot be determined.
In this case the operating mode automatic operation in the Master and Follower device is blocked for security
reasons. Once the communication error has been cleared, the blocking is removed.
You can find more information about setting a GOOSE connection between the devices in the following
chapter.

7.9.3.9 Creating a GOOSE Later Binding for Parallel Control


To create the GOOSE later binding between the devices for parallel control, proceed as described in the
following example:

[dw_overview_sys-config_and_iec61850-goose, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-129 Example of a Parallel Control

Step 1
• Create the 1st device for parallel control in the DIGSI 5 project.
• Create the configurations and make the necessary settings for the IEC 61850 structure.

1496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_para_dev_set, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-130 IEC 61850 Structure Settings

For using Port J for the GOOSE communication:


• Activate the device functionality for Port J.

[sc_para_dev_func, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-131 Setting for the Integrated Ethernet Interface

• Instantiate the voltage controller function for the two-winding transformer and the Parallel control
function and the proxies that are necessary for parallel operation. One ParallelProxy is required for
each transformer to be controlled in parallel, that is, for 3 transformers in the project, it must be addition-
ally instantiate 2 ParallelProxies.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1497
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_para_instanz, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-132 Selecting Parallel Control

• Make the necessary communication settings.

[sc_para_com_prot, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-133 Ethernet-interface settings

NOTE

i Note that you must assign a separate IP address for each device.

NOTE

i Note the hardware equipment of the device and the settings for the IEC 61850 communication (IEC 61850
Edition 2 required).

• Under Device Information in DIGSI, change IEC 61850 Edition 1 to Edition 2.

1498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_change_edition, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-134 Changing the IEC 61850 Edition

• Confirm the conversion to IEC 61850 Edition 2 with Yes.


Step 2
• Copy the 1st device as many times as are needed for the parallel transformers. The copied devices
contain the same settings.

• Adapt the IP addresses of the copied devices in the project tree under Hardware and protocols.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1499
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_para_ether_portj, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-135 Adapting the IP Address

• Adapt the entries of the copied devices for the other transformers (device name and IEC 61850 name).

[sc_lbnametrafo, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-136 Adapting the Devices in DIGSI

• Assign a unique transformer ID for the other transformers in the copied devices.

1500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

NOTE

i Note that in the Master-Follower method, you must configure one device as the Master device and the
additional devices as Follower devices.

[sc_par_trafo_id, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-137 Adapting the Parallel Transformer ID in DIGSI

Step 3
• Double-click Add new station.

• Double-click the first IEC 61850 station.

• Change the IEC 61850 station name for example in parallel operation.

• Change IEC 61850 Edition 1 to Edition 2.

[sc_par_stat_iec_edi, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-138 Selecting the IEC 61850 Edition

• Confirm the conversion to IEC 61850 Edition 2 with Yes.

• Use >> to assign the devices to the IEC 61850 station.

[sc_par_assign_syscon, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-139 Assigning the Devices

• Export the IEC 61850 station as an ICD file to the IEC 61850 System Configurator.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1501
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_par_exp_syscon, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-140 Export to the IEC 61850 System Configurator

If the following dialog appears, confirm with OK and specify a storage location for the SCD file.

[sc_para_assinged, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-141 Export dialog

Step 4
• Import the ICD files into the system configurator. After the export to the system configurator, the config-
urator starts automatically.

• Create a single-line configuration in the system configurator.

1502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[sc_para_single_line_konfig, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-142 Creating a Single-Line Configuration in the System Configurator

• Create a substation. Right-click Parallel operation and select Substation.

• Create the individual bays (bays 1-3) and instantiate for each a function and subfunction.

• Rename the function to VoltageControlParallel.

• Rename the subfunction to Proxies.

NOTE

i If you use the specified function and subfunction names, the GOOSE application will be created without
faults.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1503
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

• Connect the LN Trafo1\VCtrl1\ATCC1 of the device to the function and the other LN
Trafo2\Ctrl_90VParallelOperation\ProxyATCC1 to the proxies according to Figure 7-142.
Step 5
• Create a new GOOSE application and subsequently perform the GOOSE later binding using the applica-
tion template. With the GOOSE application template, all the links between the devices and the proxies
are automatically connected.

• Set all the settings for GOOSE communication between the Master and the Follower devices in the
IEC 61850 System Configurator.

• If you have done all the links and settings in the IEC 61850 System Configurator, save the project and
close the IEC 61850 System Configurator.

[sc_parasyscon_goose, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-143 Creating the GOOSE Application

Step 6
• Import the SCD file generated and stored in the IEC 61850 System Configurator back to DIGSI.

[sc_para_import, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-144 Import from the IEC 61850 System Configurator into DIGSI

• Load the created configuration to the devices.

7.9.3.10 Functional Measured Values


You can read the current status of the measured values for the two-winding transformer, the parallel control/
proxy, the three-winding and grid coupling transformer at any time. The following tables show you the avail-
able measured values.

1504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Measured Values, Two-Winding Transformer

Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


V act. Current, measured positive- kV V Target voltage of the primary
sequence voltage (referenced system referenced to the rated
to phase-to-phase) voltage
ΔV act. Voltage difference between % % Voltage difference referenced
the target voltage and the to the rated voltage of the
actual voltage controlled winding
I load Current measured load current A A Load current referenced to the
(positive-sequence system) rated value of the function
V max Maximum positive-sequence kV V Maximum voltage of the
voltage ever measured (refer- winding referenced to the
enced to phase-to-phase) rated voltage of the winding
V min Minimum positive-sequence kV V Minimum voltage of the
voltage ever measured (refer- winding referenced to the
ence to phase-to-phase) rated voltage of the winding
V target Calculated target voltage with kV V Target voltage of the winding
consideration of Z compensa- referenced to the rated voltage
tion of the winding
PhAng Phase angle of the currently ° ° -
measured load current
I load Σ Sum of the currently measured A A Load current referenced to the
load currents. Active when line rated current of the function
compensation is activated.
I circul. Currently measured circulating A A Circulating reactive current
reactive current
Vact.m Currently measured control kV V Current voltage of the control
voltage referenced to the rated voltage
of the function
ΔVactV Voltage difference % % Voltage difference referenced
to the rated voltage of the
function
ΔVactC Voltage difference % % Voltage difference referenced
to the rated voltage of the
function

The function measured values V max and V min can be reset with the input indication >Reset min./max..
For the two-winding transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the
device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → 90V V.contr.2w
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → Statistics → 90V V.contr.2w

Measured Values for Parallel Control, Proxy

Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


V act. Actual voltage of winding kV V Target voltage of the primary
system referenced to the rated
voltage of the function
1/X trf. Susceptance, internal value for 1/Ω
GOOSE transmission
I load Load current A - Load current referenced to the
rated current of the function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1505
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


PhAng Phase angle of the load current ° ° Phase angle of the load current
relative to the voltage with a 100 % = 180°
power factor of 1.0

For the parallel control, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → Functional measured values → Parallel operation
Measured Values, Three-Winding Transformer

Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


Vact.w1 Actual voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of the primary
system referenced to the rated
voltage
Vact.w2 Actual voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of the primary
system referenced to the rated
voltage
ΔV act. Voltage difference between % % Voltage difference referenced
the target voltage and the to the rated voltage of the
actual voltage controlled winding
I load w1 Load current of winding 1 A A Load current referenced to the
rated current of winding 1
I load w2 Load current of winding 2 A A Load current referenced to the
rated current of winding 2
Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 1
Vmax 2 Maximum voltage of winding 2 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 2
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 2
Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 1
Vmin 2 Minimum voltage of winding 2 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 2
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 2
V tar.w1 Target voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of winding 1
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 1
V tar.w2 Target voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of winding 2
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 2

The function measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1, and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
For the three-winding transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of
the device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 3w → 90V V.contr.3w
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 3w → Statistics → 90V V.contr.3w

1506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Measured Values Grid Coupling Transformer

Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to


Vact.w1 Actual voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of the primary
system referenced to the rated
voltage
Vact.w2 Actual voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of the primary
system referenced to the rated
voltage
ΔV act. Voltage difference between % % Voltage difference referenced
the target voltage and the to the rated voltage of the
actual voltage controlled winding
I load w1 Load current of winding 1 A A Load current referenced to the
rated current of winding 1
I load w2 Load current of winding 2 A A Load current referenced to the
rated current of winding 2
Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 1
Vmax 2 Maximum voltage of winding 2 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 2
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 2
Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1
referenced to rated voltage of
winding 1
Vmin 2 Minimum voltage of winding 2 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 2
referenced to rated voltage of
winding 2
V tar.w1 Target voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of winding 1
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 1
V tar.w2 Target voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of winding 2
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 2

The function measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1, and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
For the grid coupling transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the
device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control gc → 90V V.contr.gc
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control gc → Statistics → 90V V.contr.gc

Fundamental-Component Values and Power Measured Values


The fundamental-component values and power measured values are always present in the Two-winding
transformer voltage controller, Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and Grid coupling trans-
former voltage controller function groups. Furthermore, you can find the fundamental-component values
and power measured values for winding 1 and winding 2 in the Three-winding transformer voltage
controller and Grid coupling transformer voltage controller function groups. These values cannot be
deleted.
The following tables show Table 7-30 and Table 7-31 the total scope for the case in which a 3-phase voltage
measuring point is also connected.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1507
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Table 7-30 Possible Fundamental Values for the Voltage Controller Function Group

Fundamental-Component Values Primar Secon- % Referenced to


y dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the
primary system
IN Zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the
primary system
VA, VB,VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary system/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary system
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V Rated operating voltage of the
ment voltage primary system/√3

Table 7-31 Possible Power Measured Values of the Voltage Controller Function Group

Power Measured Value Primar Secon- % Referenced to


y dary
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary system
(total power) √3 ⋅ Vrated ⋅ Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary
(total power) system
√3 ⋅ Vrated ⋅ Irated
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary
(total power) system
√3 ⋅ Vrated ⋅ Irated
Cos φ Active power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1

7.9.4 Application and Setting Notes

7.9.4.1 General
The following application and setting notes refer to a two-winding transformer. The additional parameters for
a three-winding transformer or for a grid coupling transformer are marked correspondingly.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV
The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.

1508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and Grid Coupling Transformer: General
Winding 1
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

Winding 2
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated current = 1000.00 A
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV
The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.

Tap Changer
The parameters of the tap changer inside the voltage controller correspond to those of the tap changer in
chapter 7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
For the tap changer inside the voltage controller, the parameters for the control model are copies of those
from the voltage controller. This concerns the parameters:
• Checking the switching authority
• Control model

• SBO42 Time-out

• Feedback.monitor.time

General
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:14011:1) Mode = on
With the Mode parameter, you switch the voltage controller in on, off, or in test operation.
Parameter: Operating mode
• Default setting (_:14011:101) Operating mode = Manual
With the Operating mode parameter, you specify whether the controller is operating in Auto mode or in
Manual mode.
Three-Winding Transformer only:
Parameter: Winding selection
• Default setting (_:15601:157) Winding selection = Winding 1
With the Winding selection parameter, you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of
Winding 1 or Winding 2. With the WithMaxLoad parameter, the voltage to be controlled is selected
automatically depending on the load current. With this method, you can toggle using the parameter
Winding selection or the controllable Automatic winding selection.
If the controllable Automatic winding selection is set to Off or is not set, you can influence the
winding to be controlled using the following 2 options:
• Using the Winding selection parameter
• Using the Manual winding selection controllable
The function value Active winding shows the winding selection.

42 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is known as Select Before Operate (SBO).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1509
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Grid Coupling Transformer only:


Parameter: Winding selection
• Default setting (_:16351:161) Winding selection = Winding 1
With the Winding selectionparameter, you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of
Winding 1 or Winding 2.
You may select the winding to be controlled using the Winding selection parameter or the Manual
winding selection controllable. The function value Active winding shows the winding selection.

7.9.4.2 Controlling
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:107) Check switching authority = yes
With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (On-site,
Remote) is checked during an adjusting command.
Parameter: Control model
• Default setting (_:109) Control model = SBO w. enh. security
This parameter Control model specifies the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2 that corresponds to
the behavior of the data (SBO – Select Before Operate).
You can select one of the following settings:
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.

• direct w. enh. security

• SBO w. enh. security


Parameter: SBO time-out
• Default setting (_:110) SBO time-out = 30.00 s
This parameter specifies the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Parameter: Feedback monitoring time
• Default setting (_:111) Feedback monitoring time = 10.00 s
Reaching a new tap position after the adjusting command is monitored via the feedback-monitoring time. If a
new tap position is not reached, the command is canceled after this time.

7.9.4.3 Voltage Controller


Parameter: Number of target voltage
• Default setting (_:14011:156) Number of target voltage = 1
With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 to 4). You can select a target
voltage from the available ones using the function key, communication, or binary input.

NOTE

i Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 to 4) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.

Parameter: Target voltage 1


• Default setting (_:14011:112) Target voltage 1 = 110.000 V
With the Target voltage 1 parameter, you specify the voltage that the voltage controller is supposed to
reach.

1510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Parameter: Target voltage 2


• Default setting (_:14011:157) Target voltage 2 = 110.000 V
With the Target voltage 2 parameter, you specify the 2nd voltage that the voltage controller is supposed
to reach.
Parameter: Target voltage 3
• Default setting (_:14011:158) Target voltage 3 = 110.000 V
With the Target voltage 3 parameter, you specify the 3rd voltage that the voltage controller is supposed
to reach.
Parameter: Target voltage 4
• Default setting (_:14011:159) Target voltage 4 = 110.000 V
With the Target voltage 4 parameter, you specify the 4th voltage that the voltage controller is supposed
to reach.
Three-Winding Transformer only:
Parameter: Number of target voltage
• Default setting (_:15601:164) Number of target voltage = 1
With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can
select a target voltage from the available ones using the function key, communication, or binary input.

Note:
Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:112) Target voltage 1 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:146) Target voltage 1 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:165) Target voltage 2 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:168) Target voltage 2 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:166) Target voltage 3 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:169) Target voltage 3 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:167) Target voltage 4 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:170) Target voltage 4 w2 = 110.000 V

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1511
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Grid Coupling Transformer only:


Parameter: Number of target voltage
• Default setting (_:16351:164) Number of target voltage = 1
With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can
select a target voltage from the available ones using the function key, communication, or binary input.

Note:
Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:112) Target voltage 1 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:146) Target voltage 1 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:165) Target voltage 2 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:168) Target voltage 2 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:166) Target voltage 3 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:169) Target voltage 3 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:167) Target voltage 4 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:170) Target voltage 4 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Bandwidth
• Default setting (_:113) Bandwidth = 1.0 %
With the Bandwidth parameter, you specify the voltage range where no control action higher or lower is to
occur at the Target voltage 1. If the actual voltage is outside the bandwidth referenced to the Target
voltage 1, no correction takes place.
Calculation of the Bandwidth:

NOTE

i When calculating the Bandwidth B, keep the maximum accepted voltage deviation in the electrical power
system and the tap voltage of the tap changer on the secondary side of the transformer in mind. Select the
bandwidths so that it is not passed through within an increment.

NOTE

i Instable Controlling (Hunting)


The tolerance band is defined by the double bandwidth. If you select the bandwidth – and thus the admis-
sible control deviation D – in such a way that the tolerance band is smaller than the step adjustment of the
transformer, then, with the next step adjustment operation, the voltage controller adjusts over the other
side of the band after exceeding the tolerance band. In this case, no stable controlling is possible. This
operation is also called Hunting. Keep also in mind that the load of the tap changer, that is the amount of
operated tap changes, increases with lower bandwidth.

1512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

On the secondary side, the increment ∆Vsec is not linear. The largest ∆Vmax,sec in an increment results with the
increment to the highest stage (smallest ratio) and with maximum power-system voltage on the primary side.

[fobdnvrz-150816, 1, en_US]

If the control deviation and the bandwidth are thus correlated, this results in a minimal bandwidth that is to be
set:

[fospnvrz-150816, 1, en_US]

Vrated,sec Secondary rated voltage of the transformer


V Primary tap voltage of the transformer of tap N
V Primary tap voltage of the transformer of tap N-1
Vmax,prim Maximum primary voltage of the transformer
Vmax,sec Maximum secondary voltage of the transformer

Parameter: T1 characteristic
• Default setting (_:114) T1 characteristic = Linear
Parameter: T1 delay
• Default setting (_:115) T1 delay = 40 s
You can adjust the control action so that the smallest number of adjusting commands possible is necessary. To
do this, using T1 characteristic, you set the control response and, using T1 delay, you set a time
delay.
In the Linear setting (linear control response), the control response is independent of the voltage deviation.
A constant time delay applies here.
In the Inverse setting (inverse control response), the time delay is a function of the voltage deviation refer-
enced to Target voltage 1. The greater the control deviation, the faster the control response. The control
quality improves, but the switching frequency increases. The effective time delay results from:

[fovrzzet-211013, 2, en_US]

T1 – Parameter T1 delay

[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]

D = Control deviation

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1513
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

[dwrglchr-160913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

Figure 7-145 Inverse Control Characteristic

Parameter: T1 Inverse Min


• Default setting (_:116) T1 Inverse Min = 5 s
With the T1 Inverse Min parameter, you define the minimum time delay for the control action. This time
applies only to the control response Inverse and the response cannot be shorter.
Parameter: T2 delay
• Default setting (_:117) T2 delay = 5 s
With the T2 delay parameter, you set the time the tap changer has to wait from one tap position to the
next. During this time, several adjusting commands can be sent to the tap changer in one direction, which
permits a correction of the actual voltage. The time delay T2 has an independent characteristic. The time T2 is
generally set shorter than the time T1. If the time T2 is switched off by a setting equal to 0, the delay T1 is
always active.
Parameter: Fast step up
• Default setting (_:118) Fast step up = off
Parameter: Fast step up limit
• Default setting (_:119) Fast step up limit = –6.0 %
Parameter: Fast step up T delay
• Default setting (_:120) Fast step up T delay = 2.0 s
With this parameter, you specify the time delay of the fast step up mode. If the actual voltage is less than the
value of the limit for the fast step up mode (_:119), the fast step up mode is activated. A fast step up mode is
not activated if the value drops below the voltage limit for only a brief period within the time delay.
Parameter: Fast step down
• Default setting (_:121) Fast step down = on
Parameter: Fast step down limit
• Default setting (_:122) Fast step down limit = 6.0 %
Parameter: Fast step down T delay
• Default setting (_:123) Fast step down T delay = 0.0 s

1514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

With this parameter, you specify the time delay of the fast step down mode. If the actual voltage is greater
than the value of the limit for the fast step down mode (_:122), the fast step down mode is activated. A fast
step down mode is not activated if the voltage limit is exceeded for only a brief period within the time delay.
Parameter: Function monitoring
• Default setting (_:124) Function monitoring = 15 min
You can delay the pickup of the function monitor. With the setting Function monitoring = 0 min, the
function monitor is switched off.
Grid Coupling Transformer Only:
Parameter: Power-flow supervision
• Default setting (_:16351:162) Power-flow supervision = on
With the Power-flow supervision parameter, you monitor the power flow. You can switch the param-
eter on or off.

Parameter: Regulate with T2 at start


• Default setting (_:14011:155) Regulate with T2 at start = on
With the Regulate with T2 at start parameter, you can activate a shorter time than T1. This can be
necessary for controlling a voltage recovery or after switching on a transformer. If voltage was not present
beforehand, this setting controls with the shorter time T2 when starting the control action. You can switch
this functionality on or off. If you always want to use the time T2 for control, you must set the Block T1
controllable to On.
For the three-winding transformer, the address of the Regulate with T2 at start parameter is
_:15601:163 while it is _:16351:163 for the grid coupling transformer.
Parameter: Set point mode active
• Default setting (_:14011:160) Set point mode active = on
With the Set point mode active = on parameter, you can send a target voltage to the controller via a
communication network. The voltage controller uses the specified voltage value as target voltage. If the
controller does not receive any valid voltage values, it uses the original target voltage. You can enable or
disable the parameter.
For the three-winding transformer, the address of the parameter Set point mode active is
_:15601:171, for the grid coupling transformer, it is _:16351:171.

7.9.4.4 Line Compensation


Parameter: Line drop compensation
• Default setting (_:14011:125) Line drop compensation = off
You can use the Line drop compensation parameter to select the correction procedure of the load-
dependent line voltage drop. There are 2 procedures available for selection: LDC-Z and LDC-XandR.
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z, consider the following parameter:
Parameter: Target voltage rising
• Default setting (_:14011:126) Target voltage rising = 4.0 %
With the Target voltage rising parameter, you set the voltage drop across the line. The value repre-
sents the voltage rising in % of the Target voltage 1 that occurs at rated load. Only the magnitude of the
current is considered. The set value is added to Target voltage 1.

Set point value increase [%] = ΔVload [%] if Iload = 100 %

[foschlst-211013, 2, en_US]

where:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1515
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

VSetComp Target voltage at the end of the line


VSet Target voltage
Iload Load current in %

With the following equation, you can determine the percentage of the primary load current of the line from
the rated current of the transformer k (k = 1, 2, …, 8).

[fo_ibs_load_cur_perc, 1, en_US]

where:
Iload Primary load current
Irated Rated current of the transformer

Example
Application example of the LDC-Z line compensation for the voltage control of 2 transformers connected in
parallel.

[dw_target_voltage_2exam, 1, en_US]

Figure 7-146 LDC-Z Line Compensation of 2 Parallel Transformers

In the example, a load current of Iload = 1430 A results in a voltage drop of Vload = 500 V.

Value Transformer T1 Transformer T2

Iload(%) 100 % 50 %

Target voltage rising ΔVload(%) 4.8 % 9.6 %

1516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

NOTE

i Make sure that you configure the parameter Max load current on the voltage controller on the trans-
former T1 to 200 %, as this summation load current is used for the line compensation.

Parameter: Max load current


• Default setting (_:14011:127) Max load current = 100.0 %
With the setting of the parameter Max load current, you can prevent the voltage at the transformer from
becoming too high in the event of extraordinarily high load current. If the load current exceeds the set value,
no additional load-current compensation is calculated.
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: R line
• Default setting (_:14011:153) R line = 0.00 Ω
With the R line parameter, you to set the ohmic resistance of the line.
Parameter: X line
• Default setting (_:14011:154) X line = 0.00 Ω
With the X line parameter, you set the reactance for the line to be protected.
In order to determine the voltage drop by the line, entering the parameter R line and X line is necessary
for the procedure Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR. If the primary values are known and you
would like to set the secondary values, use the following formula for the calculation:

[fo-I-V-Ratio-250214, 1, en_US]

As an example, calculate Xsec with the following parameters:

Current transformer ratio : 1000 A/1 A


Voltage transformer ratio : 380 kV/0.1 kV
Xprim : 21 Ω

Therefore, the result for Xsec is:

[fo-I-V-Ratio_Value-250214, 1, en_US]

If you are implementing a parallel control with the X and R compensation, then the X value is negative and
considers the voltage rising from the busbar to the transformer.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1517
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer
Parameter: Line drop compensation
• Default setting (_:125) Line drop compensation = off
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: Target voltage rising w1
• Default setting (_:126) Target voltage rising w1 = 4.0 %
Parameter: Target voltage rising w2
• Default setting (_:147) Target voltage rising w2 = 4.0 %
Parameter: Max load current
• Default setting (_:127) Max load current = 100.0 %
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: R line w1
• Default setting (_:153) R line w1 = 0.0 Ω
Parameter: R line w2
• Default setting (_:155) R line w2 = 0.0 Ω
Parameter: X line w1
• Default setting (_:154) X line w1 = 0.0 Ω
Parameter: X line w2
• Default setting (_:156) X line w2 = 0.0 Ω
7.9.4.5 Limiting Values
Parameter: Lower tap-position limit
• Default setting (_:14011:102) Lower tap-position limit = 1
Parameter: Higher tap-position limit
• Default setting (_:14011:103) Higher tap-position limit = 1
With the parameters Lower tap-position limit and Higher tap-position limit, you can restrict
the taps available in automatic operation. For example, using the parameter Higher tap-position
limit, changes to higher taps to excessive ratios that would result in overvoltages in the event of a sudden
loss of load are blocked.
Parameter: Vmin limiting
• Default setting (_:14011:128) Vmin limiting = on
Parameter: Vmin threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:129) Vmin threshold = 105.000 V
Parameter: Vmin time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:130) Vmin time delay = 10 s
Parameter: Vmax limiting
• Default setting (_:14011:131) Vmax limiting = on
Parameter: Vmax threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:132) Vmax threshold = 115.000 V
Parameter: Vmax time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:133) Vmax time delay = 10 s
The voltage limits are necessary only for special control situations. The overvoltage limit prevents a change to
a higher tap by the voltage controller if the limiting value Vmax threshold is exceeded. The undervoltage
limit prevents a change to a lower tap by the voltage controller if the voltage drops below the limiting value
Vmin threshold.

1518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer
Parameter: Vmin threshold w1
• Default setting (_:129) Vmin threshold w1 = 105.000 V
Parameter: Vmin threshold w2
• Default setting (_:148) Vmin threshold w2 = 105.000 V

Parameter: Vmax threshold w1


• Default setting (_:132) Vmax threshold w1 = 115.000 V
Parameter: Vmax threshold w2
• Default setting (_:149) Vmax threshold w2 = 115.000 V
7.9.4.6 Blockings
Parameter: Blocking behavior
• Default setting (_:14011:134) Blocking behavior = Auto-Manual
If the corresponding voltage limits are exceeded in either direction, the blockings prevent a change to a lower
or higher tap. On the one hand, this prevents excessive wear of the contacts of the tap changer and, on the
other hand, it prevents a system incident. With the parameter Blocking behavior, you set whether these
blockings are effective only in automatic operation or in both automatic and manual operation.
Parameter: V< Blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:135) V< Blocking = on
Parameter: V< Threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:136) V< Threshold = 90.000 V
Parameter: V< Time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:137) V< Time delay = 0 s
Parameter: I> Blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:138) I> Blocking = on
Parameter: I> Threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:139) I> Threshold = 150 %
Parameter: I> Time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:140) I> Time delay = 0 s
If the load current exceeds the threshold value I> Threshold for the time I> Time delay, the overcur-
rent blocking prevents changing to a higher or lower tap. Set the threshold value I> Threshold in % in rela-
tion to the rated current. To do this, set the parameter I reference for % values.
Parameter: I< Blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:141) I< Blocking = off
Parameter: I< Threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:142) I< Threshold = 10 %
Parameter: I< Time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:143) I< Time delay = 10 s
If the load current drops below the threshold value I< Threshold for the time I< Time delay, the under-
current blocking prevents changing to a higher or lower tap. Set the threshold value I< Threshold in % in
relation to the rated current. To do this, set the parameter I reference for % values.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1519
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Additional Pararmeters for Three-Winding Transformers and for Grid Coupling Transformers
Parameter: V< Threshold w1
• Default setting (_:136) V< Threshold w1 = 90.000 V
Parameter: V< Threshold w2
• Default setting (_:150) V< Threshold w2 = 90.000 V
You can find the parameter and information lists in chapter 7.9.5 Settings.

7.9.4.7 Parallel operation


Parameter: Parallel mode
• Default setting (_:14011:161) Parallel mode = No mode
With the Parallel mode parameter, you can switch the voltage controller into one of the following modes:
No mode
Master
Follower
Circulat. react current
Parameter: Parallel-transfomer id
• Default setting (_:14011:168) Parallel-transfomer id = 1
The Parallel-transfomer id parameter indicates the ID of the transformer.
With this parameter, you identify individual transformers in a parallel group. Transformers belonging to the
same parallel group must be uniquely identifiable based on the ID. The unique identification applies to all
transformers which communicate via GOOSE.
Parameter: Parallel mode changeable
• Default setting (_:14011:164) Parallel mode changeable = by setting
With the Parallel mode changeable parameter, you can influence the parallel operation by setting
or via the setting controllable.
Parameter: Force master changeable
• Default setting (_:14011:165) Force master changeable = by setting
With the Force master changeable parameter, you can determine by setting or via the setting
controllable which device is the Master in the parallel operation. In a group of transformers working in
parallel, only one device can be the Master. The presence of a Master is monitored.
Parameter: Maximal tap difference
• Default setting (_:14011:166) Maximal tap difference = 2
With the Maximal tap difference parameter, you set the maximum permissible difference of the tap-
changer positions between the transformers of a group.
Parameter: Reactive I control factor
• Default setting (_:14011:169) Reactive I control factor = 1.00
The voltage deviation between the transformers is influenced with the parameter Reactive I control
factorThis means that a deviation from one stage exceeds the bandwidth of the voltage controller. This
allows the control deviation DCRC, initiated by the circulating reactive current, to be adjusted individually for
every parallel operation.
Parameter: VT supervision
• Default setting (_:14011:146) VT supervision = on
With the VT supervision parameter, you switch the voltage supervision on or off.
Parameter: VT supervision threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:147) VT supervision threshold = 10.0 %
With the VT supervision threshold parameter, you set the threshold value for the voltage supervision.
Parameter: VT supervision time delay

1520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

• Default setting (_:14011:148) VT supervision time delay = 10 s


With the VT supervision time delay parameter, you set the time for which exceeding the voltage
supervision threshold does not lead to a blocking.
Parameter: Circul. current blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:149) Circul. current blocking = on
With the Circul. current blocking parameter, you switch the supervision of the circulating reactive
current off or on.
Parameter: Circul. current threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:150) Circul. current threshold = 150 %
With the Circul. current threshold parameter, you set the level at which the supervision must be acti-
vated.
Parameter: Circul. current time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:151) Circul. current time delay = 30 s
With the Circul. current time delay parameter, you set the time for which exceeding the threshold
value of the circulating reactive current supervision does not lead to a blocking.

7.9.5 Settings

Two-Winding Transformer and Parallel Control

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
_:2311:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
_:2311:106 General:Rated app. 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power transf.
_:2311:108 General:Imp(Z): short 1.00 % to 20.00 % 10.00 %
circuit imp.
General
_:14011:1 90V V.contr.2w:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:14011:101 90V V.contr.2w:Oper- • Manual Manual
ating mode • Auto
Control tap changer
_:14011:107 90V V.contr.2w:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
_:14011:109 90V V.contr.2w:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model • SBO w. normal secur. security
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:14011:110 90V V.contr.2w:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:14011:111 90V V.contr.2w:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
back monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:14011:156 90V V.contr.2w:Number • 1 1
of target voltage • 2
• 3
• 4

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1521
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14011:112 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1
_:14011:157 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 2
_:14011:158 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 3
_:14011:159 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 4
_:14011:113 90V V.contr.2w:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:14011:114 90V V.contr.2w:T1 char- • Linear Linear
acteristic • Inverse
_:14011:115 90V V.contr.2w:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:14011:116 90V V.contr.2w:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:14011:117 90V V.contr.2w:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:14011:118 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step • off off
up • on
_:14011:119 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
_:14011:120 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
up T delay
_:14011:121 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step • off on
down • on
_:14011:122 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step 0.0 % to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
_:14011:123 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
down T delay
_:14011:124 90V V.contr.2w:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:14011:155 90V V.contr.2w:Regulate • off on
with T2 at start • on
_:14011:160 90V V.contr.2w:Set • off on
point mode active • on
Parallel operation
_:14011:161 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel • No mode No mode
mode • Master
• Follower
• Circulat. react current
_:14011:168 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel- 1 to 8 1
transfomer id
_:14011:164 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel • by setting by setting
mode changeable • controllable
_:14011:165 90V V.contr.2w:Force • by setting by setting
master changeable • controllable
_:14011:166 90V V.contr.2w:Maximal 1 to 9 2
tap difference
_:14011:169 90V V.contr.2w:Reactive 0.01 to 100.00 1.00
I control factor
_:14011:146 90V V.contr.2w:VT • off on
supervision • on

1522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14011:147 90V V.contr.2w:VT 0.5 % to 10.0 % 10.0 %
supervision threshold
_:14011:148 90V V.contr.2w:VT 1 s to 600 s 10 s
supervision time delay
_:14011:149 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. • off on
current blocking • on
_:14011:150 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. 10 % to 500 % 50 %
current threshold
_:14011:151 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. 0 s to 1000 s 60 s
current time delay
Line drop comp.
_:14011:125 90V V.contr.2w:Line • off off
drop compensation • LDC-Z
• LDC-XandR
_:14011:126 90V V.contr.2w:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising
_:14011:127 90V V.contr.2w:Max 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
load current
_:14011:153 90V V.contr.2w:R line 0.00 Ω to 30.00 Ω 0.00 Ω
_:14011:154 90V V.contr.2w:X line -30.00 Ω to 30.00 Ω 0.00 Ω
Limiting
_:14011:102 90V V.contr.2w:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:14011:103 90V V.contr.2w:Higher -128 to 127 15
tap-position limit
_:14011:128 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin • off on
limiting • on
_:14011:129 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold
_:14011:130 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:14011:131 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax • off on
limiting • on
_:14011:132 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold
_:14011:133 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:14011:134 90V V.contr.2w:Blocking • Auto Auto-Manual
behavior • Auto-Manual
_:14011:135 90V V.contr.2w:V< • off on
Blocking • on
_:14011:136 90V V.contr.2w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold
_:14011:137 90V V.contr.2w:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:14011:138 90V V.contr.2w:I> • off on
Blocking • on
_:14011:139 90V V.contr.2w:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1523
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:14011:140 90V V.contr.2w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:14011:141 90V V.contr.2w:I< • off off
Blocking • on
_:14011:142 90V V.contr.2w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:14011:143 90V V.contr.2w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay

Three-Winding Transformer

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Winding 1
_:2311:101 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
_:2311:103 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Winding 2
_:2311:102 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
_:2311:104 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
General
_:15601:1 90V V.contr.3w:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:15601:101 90V V.contr.3w:Oper- • Manual Manual
ating mode • Auto
_:15601:157 90V V.contr.3w:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection • Winding 2
• WithMaxLoad
_:15601:161 90V V.contr.3w:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection • Winding 2
Control tap changer
_:15601:107 90V V.contr.3w:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
_:15601:109 90V V.contr.3w:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model • SBO w. normal secur. security
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:15601:110 90V V.contr.3w:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:15601:111 90V V.contr.3w:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
back monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:15601:164 90V V.contr.3w:Number • 1 1
of target voltage • 2
• 3
• 4
_:15601:112 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1 w1
_:15601:165 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 2 w1
_:15601:166 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 3 w1

1524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:15601:167 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 4 w1
_:15601:146 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1 w2
_:15601:168 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 2 w2
_:15601:169 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 3 w2
_:15601:170 90V V.contr.3w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 4 w2
_:15601:113 90V V.contr.3w:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:15601:114 90V V.contr.3w:T1 char- • Linear Linear
acteristic • Inverse
_:15601:115 90V V.contr.3w:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:15601:116 90V V.contr.3w:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:15601:117 90V V.contr.3w:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:15601:118 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step • off off
up • on
_:15601:119 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
_:15601:120 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
up T delay
_:15601:121 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step • off on
down • on
_:15601:122 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step 0.0 % to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
_:15601:123 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
down T delay
_:15601:124 90V V.contr.3w:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:15601:162 90V V.contr.3w:Power- • off on
flow supervision • on
_:15601:163 90V V.contr.3w:Regulate • off on
with T2 at start • on
_:15601:171 90V V.contr.3w:Set • off on
point mode active • on
Line drop comp.
_:15601:125 90V V.contr.3w:Line • off off
drop compensation • LDC-Z
• LDC-XandR
_:15601:126 90V V.contr.3w:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w1
_:15601:147 90V V.contr.3w:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w2
_:15601:127 90V V.contr.3w:Max 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
load current
_:15601:153 90V V.contr.3w:R line 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
w1

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1525
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:15601:154 90V V.contr.3w:X line -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
w1
_:15601:155 90V V.contr.3w:R line 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
w2
_:15601:156 90V V.contr.3w:X line -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
w2
Limiting
_:15601:102 90V V.contr.3w:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:15601:103 90V V.contr.3w:Higher -128 to 127 15
tap-position limit
_:15601:128 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin • off on
limiting • on
_:15601:129 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w1
_:15601:148 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w2
_:15601:130 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:15601:131 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax • off on
limiting • on
_:15601:132 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w1
_:15601:149 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w2
_:15601:133 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:15601:134 90V V.contr.3w:Blocking • Auto Auto-Manual
behavior • Auto-Manual
_:15601:135 90V V.contr.3w:V< • off on
Blocking • on
_:15601:136 90V V.contr.3w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w1
_:15601:150 90V V.contr.3w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w2
_:15601:137 90V V.contr.3w:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:15601:138 90V V.contr.3w:I> • off on
Blocking • on
_:15601:139 90V V.contr.3w:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:15601:140 90V V.contr.3w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:15601:141 90V V.contr.3w:I< • off off
Blocking • on
_:15601:142 90V V.contr.3w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:15601:143 90V V.contr.3w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay

1526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Grid Coupling Transformer

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Winding 1
_:2311:101 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
_:2311:103 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Winding 2
_:2311:102 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
_:2311:104 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
General
_:16351:1 90V V.contr.gc:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:16351:101 90V V.contr.gc:Oper- • Manual Manual
ating mode • Auto
_:16351:157 90V V.contr.gc:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection • Winding 2
• WithMaxLoad
_:16351:161 90V V.contr.gc:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection • Winding 2
Control tap changer
_:16351:107 90V V.contr.gc:Check • no yes
switching authority • yes
_:16351:109 90V V.contr.gc:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model • SBO w. normal secur. security
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:16351:110 90V V.contr.gc:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:16351:111 90V V.contr.gc:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:16351:164 90V V.contr.gc:Number • 1 1
of target voltage • 2
• 3
• 4
_:16351:112 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1 w1
_:16351:165 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 2 w1
_:16351:166 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 3 w1
_:16351:167 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 4 w1
_:16351:146 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1 w2
_:16351:168 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 2 w2
_:16351:169 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 3 w2
_:16351:170 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 4 w2

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1527
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:16351:113 90V V.contr.gc:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:16351:114 90V V.contr.gc:T1 char- • Linear Linear
acteristic • Inverse
_:16351:115 90V V.contr.gc:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:16351:116 90V V.contr.gc:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:16351:117 90V V.contr.gc:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:16351:118 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step • off off
up • on
_:16351:119 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
_:16351:120 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
up T delay
_:16351:121 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step • off on
down • on
_:16351:122 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 % to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
_:16351:123 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
down T delay
_:16351:124 90V V.contr.gc:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:16351:162 90V V.contr.gc:Power- • off on
flow supervision • on
_:16351:163 90V V.contr.gc:Regulate • off on
with T2 at start • on
_:16351:171 90V V.contr.gc:Set point • off on
mode active • on
Line drop comp.
_:16351:125 90V V.contr.gc:Line drop • off off
compensation • LDC-Z
• LDC-XandR
_:16351:126 90V V.contr.gc:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w1
_:16351:147 90V V.contr.gc:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w2
_:16351:127 90V V.contr.gc:Max load 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
current
_:16351:153 90V V.contr.gc:R line w1 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:154 90V V.contr.gc:X line w1 -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:155 90V V.contr.gc:R line w2 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:156 90V V.contr.gc:X line w2 -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
Limiting
_:16351:102 90V V.contr.gc:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:16351:103 90V V.contr.gc:Higher -128 to 127 15
tap-position limit
_:16351:128 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin • off on
limiting • on
_:16351:129 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w1

1528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:16351:148 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w2
_:16351:130 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:16351:131 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax • off on
limiting • on
_:16351:132 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w1
_:16351:149 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w2
_:16351:133 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:16351:134 90V V.contr.gc:Blocking • Auto Auto-Manual
behavior • Auto-Manual
_:16351:135 90V V.contr.gc:V< • off on
Blocking • on
_:16351:136 90V V.contr.gc:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w1
_:16351:150 90V V.contr.gc:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w2
_:16351:137 90V V.contr.gc:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:16351:138 90V V.contr.gc:I> • off on
Blocking • on
_:16351:139 90V V.contr.gc:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:16351:140 90V V.contr.gc:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:16351:141 90V V.contr.gc:I< • off off
Blocking • on
_:16351:142 90V V.contr.gc:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:16351:143 90V V.contr.gc:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay

7.9.6 Information List

Two-Winding Transformer and Parallel Control

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
90V V.contr.2w
_:14011:81 90V V.contr.2w:>Block SPS I
_:14011:85 90V V.contr.2w:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:14011:53 90V V.contr.2w:Health ENS O
_:14011:54 90V V.contr.2w:Inactive SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1529
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:14011:52 90V V.contr.2w:Behavior ENS O
_:14011:301 90V V.contr.2w:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:14011:302 90V V.contr.2w:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:14011:326 90V V.contr.2w:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:14011:329 90V V.contr.2w:Block auto SPC C
_:14011:312 90V V.contr.2w:Operating mode SPC C
_:14011:305 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:14011:306 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:14011:307 90V V.contr.2w:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:14011:308 90V V.contr.2w:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:14011:309 90V V.contr.2w:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:14011:310 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin Limiting SPS O
_:14011:311 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax Limiting SPS O
_:14011:315 90V V.contr.2w:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:14011:316 90V V.contr.2w:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:14011:317 90V V.contr.2w:V< Blocking SPS O
_:14011:318 90V V.contr.2w:I> Blocking SPS O
_:14011:319 90V V.contr.2w:I< Blocking SPS O
_:14011:366 90V V.contr.2w:VT supervision SPS O
_:14011:367 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. current blocking SPS O
_:14011:320 90V V.contr.2w:V act. MV O
_:14011:333 90V V.contr.2w:Vact.m MV O
_:14011:321 90V V.contr.2w:ΔV act. MV O
_:14011:334 90V V.contr.2w:ΔVactV MV O
_:14011:335 90V V.contr.2w:ΔVactC MV O
_:14011:322 90V V.contr.2w:I load MV O
_:14011:364 90V V.contr.2w:PhAng MV O
_:14011:336 90V V.contr.2w:I load Σ MV O
_:14011:365 90V V.contr.2w:I circul. MV O
_:14011:323 90V V.contr.2w:V max MV O
_:14011:324 90V V.contr.2w:V min MV O
_:14011:325 90V V.contr.2w:V target MV O
_:14011:354 90V V.contr.2w:Target voltage 1 SPC C
_:14011:355 90V V.contr.2w:Target voltage 2 SPC C
_:14011:356 90V V.contr.2w:Target voltage 3 SPC C
_:14011:357 90V V.contr.2w:Target voltage 4 SPC C
_:14011:358 90V V.contr.2w:Set target voltage APC C
_:14011:359 90V V.contr.2w:Block T1 SPC C
_:14011:337 90V V.contr.2w:No. of master is not 1 SPS O
_:14011:338 90V V.contr.2w:Automatic block. local SPS O
_:14011:328 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel operation SPC C
_:14011:331 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel group INC C
_:14011:332 90V V.contr.2w:Force master SPC C
_:14011:360 90V V.contr.2w:Remote parallel mode ENS O
_:14011:363 90V V.contr.2w:Remote para. transf. id INS O
_:14011:361 90V V.contr.2w:Cause of par.op. error ENS O

1530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:14011:362 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel-operation error SPS O

Three-Winding Transformer

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
90V V.contr.3w
_:15601:81 90V V.contr.3w:>Block SPS I
_:15601:85 90V V.contr.3w:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:15601:53 90V V.contr.3w:Health ENS O
_:15601:54 90V V.contr.3w:Inactive SPS O
_:15601:52 90V V.contr.3w:Behavior ENS O
_:15601:301 90V V.contr.3w:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:15601:302 90V V.contr.3w:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:15601:332 90V V.contr.3w:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:15601:335 90V V.contr.3w:Block auto SPC C
_:15601:336 90V V.contr.3w:Operating mode SPC C
_:15601:305 90V V.contr.3w:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:15601:306 90V V.contr.3w:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:15601:307 90V V.contr.3w:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:15601:308 90V V.contr.3w:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:15601:309 90V V.contr.3w:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:15601:357 90V V.contr.3w:Power-flow superv. SPS O
_:15601:310 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O
_:15601:311 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O
_:15601:312 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O
_:15601:313 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O
_:15601:314 90V V.contr.3w:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:15601:315 90V V.contr.3w:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:15601:316 90V V.contr.3w:V< Blocking w1 SPS O
_:15601:317 90V V.contr.3w:V< Blocking w2 SPS O
_:15601:318 90V V.contr.3w:I> Blocking SPS O
_:15601:319 90V V.contr.3w:I< Blocking SPS O
_:15601:320 90V V.contr.3w:Vact.w1 MV O
_:15601:321 90V V.contr.3w:Vact.w2 MV O
_:15601:322 90V V.contr.3w:ΔV act. MV O
_:15601:323 90V V.contr.3w:I load w1 MV O
_:15601:324 90V V.contr.3w:I load w2 MV O
_:15601:325 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 1 MV O
_:15601:326 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 2 MV O
_:15601:327 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 1 MV O
_:15601:328 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 2 MV O
_:15601:329 90V V.contr.3w:V tar.w1 MV O
_:15601:330 90V V.contr.3w:V tar.w2 MV O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1531
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:15601:358 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C
_:15601:359 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 2 w1 SPC C
_:15601:360 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 3 w1 SPC C
_:15601:361 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 4 w1 SPC C
_:15601:362 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 1 w2 SPC C
_:15601:363 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 2 w2 SPC C
_:15601:364 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 3 w2 SPC C
_:15601:365 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 4 w2 SPC C
_:15601:366 90V V.contr.3w:Set target voltage w1 APC C
_:15601:367 90V V.contr.3w:Set target voltage w2 APC C
_:15601:368 90V V.contr.3w:Block T1 SPC C
_:15601:356 90V V.contr.3w:Winding act. INS O
_:15601:369 90V V.contr.3w:Winding selec. manual SPC C
_:15601:370 90V V.contr.3w:Winding selec. auto SPC C

Grid Coupling Transformer

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2311:53 General:Health ENS O
90V V.contr.gc
_:16351:81 90V V.contr.gc:>Block SPS I
_:16351:85 90V V.contr.gc:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:16351:53 90V V.contr.gc:Health ENS O
_:16351:54 90V V.contr.gc:Inactive SPS O
_:16351:52 90V V.contr.gc:Behavior ENS O
_:16351:301 90V V.contr.gc:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:16351:302 90V V.contr.gc:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:16351:332 90V V.contr.gc:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:16351:335 90V V.contr.gc:Block auto SPC C
_:16351:336 90V V.contr.gc:Operating mode SPC C
_:16351:305 90V V.contr.gc:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:16351:306 90V V.contr.gc:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:16351:307 90V V.contr.gc:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:16351:308 90V V.contr.gc:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:16351:309 90V V.contr.gc:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:16351:357 90V V.contr.gc:Power-flow superv. SPS O
_:16351:310 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O
_:16351:311 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O
_:16351:312 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O
_:16351:313 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O
_:16351:314 90V V.contr.gc:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:16351:315 90V V.contr.gc:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:16351:316 90V V.contr.gc:V< Blocking w1 SPS O
_:16351:317 90V V.contr.gc:V< Blocking w2 SPS O

1532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:16351:318 90V V.contr.gc:I> Blocking SPS O
_:16351:319 90V V.contr.gc:I< Blocking SPS O
_:16351:320 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w1 MV O
_:16351:321 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w2 MV O
_:16351:322 90V V.contr.gc:ΔV act. MV O
_:16351:323 90V V.contr.gc:I load w1 MV O
_:16351:324 90V V.contr.gc:I load w2 MV O
_:16351:325 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 1 MV O
_:16351:326 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 2 MV O
_:16351:327 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 1 MV O
_:16351:328 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 2 MV O
_:16351:329 90V V.contr.gc:V tar.w1 MV O
_:16351:330 90V V.contr.gc:V tar.w2 MV O
_:16351:358 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C
_:16351:359 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 2 w1 SPC C
_:16351:360 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 3 w1 SPC C
_:16351:361 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 4 w1 SPC C
_:16351:362 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 1 w2 SPC C
_:16351:363 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 2 w2 SPC C
_:16351:364 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 3 w2 SPC C
_:16351:365 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 4 w2 SPC C
_:16351:366 90V V.contr.gc:Set target voltage w1 APC C
_:16351:367 90V V.contr.gc:Set target voltage w2 APC C
_:16351:368 90V V.contr.gc:Block T1 SPC C
_:16351:356 90V V.contr.gc:Winding act. INS O
_:16351:369 90V V.contr.gc:Winding selec. manual SPC C
_:16351:370 90V V.contr.gc:Winding selec. auto SPC C

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1533
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
1534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
8 Supervision Functions

8.1 Overview 1536


8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 1537
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 1542
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 1585
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 1590
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 1591
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 1592
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 1593
8.9 Group Indications 1601

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1535
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview

8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi-
sion:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device

• Protects persons and primary technical devices

• Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing


The following areas are monitored:
• Supervision the resource consumption of the application
• Supervision of the secondary system

• Supervision of device hardware

• Supervision of device firmware

• Supervision of hardware configuration

• Supervision of communication connections


When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.

1536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision

8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision

8.2.1 Load Model

SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents you
from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:

[sclastmo-141210-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI

A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the present
application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is overloading the
device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 8-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates that
functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such a
case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quanti-
ties on device utilization:
Functional Brief Description Change in Load
Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts that must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
gered, fast processed especially fast (for process range
example, to invoke interlock- • Create CFC chart
ings between protection func- • Delete CFC chart
tions) • Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1537
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision

Functional Brief Description Change in Load


Area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for protection, control, and • Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
measurement functions Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions (for example, Line
function group and Circuit-breaker function group)
• FG • Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups, for • Protection functions and their stages
tions example, between the • Circuit-breaker function groups
• Fast Line function group and • Fast GOOSE connections
GOOSE the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group
• Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
Protection Signal transmission via protec- Adding or removing
Communica- tion communication and differ- • Communication modules for the protection interface
tion ential protection communica- (in the DIGSI 5 Hardware and logs view)
tion • Routings to the protection interface
• Functions of theLine differential protection
Line differen- Line differential protection Adding or removing differential protection functions
tial protection
Main protec- Protection functions with high Adding or removing
tion requirements for fast operate • Functions and zones of the distance protection; func-
times tions and tripping stages of the ground-fault protec-
tion
• Power-swing blocking, functions and tripping stages
of instantaneous high-current tripping
Backup protec- Protection functions with Adding or removing
tion average requirements for fast • Functions and stages of overcurrent protection
operate times • Synchronization Function
Other protec- Protection functions with low Adding or removing
tion requirements for fast operate • Overload protection functions
times • Functions and stages of voltage protection
• All functions not listed previously
CFC event-trig- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
gered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard • Create CFC chart
GOOSE • Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
• Control • Control and interlocking Adding or removing
• Other • CFC charts in the area of • Function blocks for control and interlocking
contin- control, measured-value • CFC charts in the control area
uous preprocessing, and event- • Switching devices (except circuit breakers), for
function controlled example, Disconnector function groups
chart • Operational measured • Operational measured values
• Opera- values • CFC charts in the measured values area
tional
measured
values

1538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision

If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you may be able to return to the
permitted area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function or state has
been switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function or stage,
delete it rather than switching it off.
Use the general Circuit-breaker function group only in the following cases:
• Interaction with a protection-function group is essential.
That is, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the Circuit-
breaker function group to be switched off.

• You want to use functions such as the automatic reclosing function or circuit-breaker failure protection in
the Circuit-breaker function group.
If a circuit breaker is only to be modeled for control purposes, use the Circuit-breaker [state only] function
group.

8.2.2 Function Points

When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.

[scfpunkt-141210-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption

The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.

NOTE

i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator.

8.2.3 CFC Resources

Task Levels of the CFC Function


A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4 task
levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the other,
in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1539
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision

Task Level Description


Fast Event-Triggered Use the Fast Event-Triggered task level for time-critical tasks, for
example, if a signal should block a protection function within 2 ms to 3 ms.
Functions on this task level are processed in an event-triggered way with
the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is immediately
processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection functions
and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-Triggered Use the Event-Triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
Fast event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-Triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or line
protection, the functions on the Event-Triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.
Measurement Use the Measurement task level for processing measured values. Functions
on this task level are processed cyclically every 500 ms.
Interlocking Use the Interlocking task level preferably for logic functions that should
be executed with lower priority than functions in the Event-Triggered
task level. If the available ticks of the Event-Triggered task level shown
in the following figure are sufficient for the required CFC functionality, you
do not need to use the Interlocking task level.

All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels. You
reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.

1540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision

[sc-cfc-statistic, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-3 CFC Statistics

NOTE

i The fast-event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks. At
this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended to
configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in
any other level.

NOTE

i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should be
deleted.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1541
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.1 Overview

The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The
measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni-
tored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the supervi-
sion of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
Measuring circuits (voltage):
• Measuring-voltage failure
• Voltage-transformer circuit breaker

• Voltage balance

• Voltage sum

• Voltage rotating field


Measuring circuits (current):
• Broken conductor of the current circuits
• Current balance

• Current sum

• Current rotating field

• Saturation detection

Trip circuits

External auxiliary voltage


When these supervisions pick up, corresponding warning indications are output. Some supervisions lead
directly to the blocking of affected protection functions or to the marking of measuring points that have
become invalid, so that affected protection functions can go into a secure state.
A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the Function
Description and as overall overview at the end of chapter 8.

8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure

8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions


The Measuring-voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits:
• Non-connected transformers
• Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit breaker (in the event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)

• Broken conductor in one or more measuring loops


All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage transformer secondary circuits which can lead to failures of
the protection functions.
Each of the following protection functions has the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure. With the
setting value of the parameter, you can specify whether the protection functions react to a measuring-voltage
failure or not (block/not block).
• Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

• Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

• Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

1542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

• Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

• Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases

• Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection


The following protection functions are automatically blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
• Distance protection
• Directional Negative-Sequence Protection

• Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

8.3.2.2 Structure of the Function


The function is part of protection function groups which are connected with a 3-phase voltage and current
measurement point.

[dwstrffm-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-4 Structure/Embedding of the Function

The function is broken down into 3 subfunctions (see Figure 8-5):


• Supervision for unbalanced measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for 3-phase measuring-voltage failure

• Supervision for switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure

[lozusamm-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-5 Breakdown of the Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1543
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.

8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure

Logic

[looppode-200812-05.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-6 Logic Diagram Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is violated and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6). The indi-
cation Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker open).
Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious instanta-
neous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) combined
with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked. The
device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative-sequence and positive-sequence
current. In the event of 1-pole automatic reclosing, the supervision is blocked.

Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, the monitoring can be delayed using the
Asym.fail. - time delay parameter.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. The monitoring seals in
and the Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance

1544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

has disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults outside the protection
zone, this seal-in time prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection
functions.
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.

8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure

Logic

[losymmet-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-7 Logic Diagram 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure

Balanced Fault – VA, VB, VC <


A 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultaneously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• A jump of the voltage (signal Jump V)
If these criteria are fulfilled and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the 3ph.failure-alarm indica-
tion is output. When the voltage returns (even as 1-phase), the monitoring drops out.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1545
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Release by Phase Current


When all phase currents exceed the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release the monitoring is
released.
If the device incorporates the distance-protection function, the device checks the input threshold value
3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release against the minimum current setting of the distance protection for
plausibility. The threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release must be set to less than or equal to the
release current of the distance protection.
More information can be found in chapter Distance protection, 6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions .

Blocking in the Case of a System Incident


In the case of a 3-phase system incident, supervision must be blocked. The device detects a 3-phase incident
with a jump in the current. This change is detected via the internal signal Jump I or when the change in
current of a phase current exceeds the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump. The change in
current of phase currents is formed from the difference between the present current phasor and the current
phasor of the previous period. This allows to take into account a jump of the current phase.

NOTE

i If a voltage-transformer circuit breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load

Logic

[lozuscha-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-8 Logic Diagram Switching to 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure

1546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <.
• The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the ≥1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected
Object.
A voltage jump – such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit breaker (see chapter
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure) – does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is started.
After the time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the moni-
toring is only possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection function
group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit breaker, because the circuit-breaker condition is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 8.3.2.4 3-Phase
Measuring-Voltage Failure) is not released in this situation, for example, because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.

8.3.2.6 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Asym.fail. - time delay

• Recommended setting value (_:113) Asym.fail. - time delay = 10.00 s


The Asym.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the time during which a system incident
detected after the occurrence of the unbalance resets the monitoring. This setting is important in the case of
weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) in order to give certain protection functions (such as distance
protection) more time for detecting system incidents. As long as the time delay runs, it is assumed that the
unbalance is due to a system incident.
As soon as the time has elapsed, the supervision assumes a measuring-voltage failure and seals in.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
If you want the seal-in function to operate sooner or at once, you can reduce the time.

Parameter: Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt.

• Recommended setting value (_:115) Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. = No

Parameter Value Description


no After elapse of the time delay the supervision function seals in. Even if the
system incident criterion is fulfilled, the protection functions concerned will
remain blocked.
This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an
absence of the measuring voltage in the case of an unbalanced system inci-
dent.
This is the default setting.
yes The seal-in function is switched off. The supervision drops out immediately
when a system incident is detected. With this setting, the unbalanced meas-
uring-voltage failure is only reported, and in the event of a double failure
(measuring-voltage failure and system incident in parallel), unselective trip-
ping is preferred.

Parameter: 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <

• Recommended setting value (_:101) 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < = 5 V

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1547
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

The 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < parameter allows you to set the pickup value of the monitoring.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
If you expect major disturbances acting upon the voltage inputs, you can increase this value. Increasing the
values makes the supervision more sensitive to 3-phase system incidents.

Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release

• Recommended setting value (_:102) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or


0.5 A for Irated = 5 A

The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release parameter is used to define the phase current threshold above
which the monitoring is released.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
If the device incorporates the Distance protection function, this value must be set to less than or equal to the
release current of the distance protection.
You can find more information in chapter Distance protection 6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions .

Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump

• Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or
0.5 A for Irated = 5 A

The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: SO 3ph.fail. - time delay

• Recommended setting value (_:106) SO 3ph.fail. - time delay = 3.00 s


The SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the delay of the monitoring.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.

NOTE

i Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will
not be possible any more.

Parameter: Operating mode


This parameter (_:4711:101) Operating mode and its settings are described in chapter Process monitor.
You can find more information starting in chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions.

Parameter: Switch-on 3ph. failure

• Recommended setting value (_:107) Switch-on 3ph. failure = on

Parameter Value Description


on The subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is
active.
In the case of low loads, the subfunction for detection of a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure is not released, for example, because the current flow
is too low. In this situation, the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure can perform the monitoring task.
Siemens recommends to switch that subfunction on.

1548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Parameter Value Description


off With the setting off the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure is not active.

8.3.2.7 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Mes.v.fail.det
_:1 Mes.v.fail.det:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:115 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- • no yes
DO on netw.flt. • yes
_:113 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail. 0.00 s to 30.00 s 10.00 s
- time delay
_:102 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr.release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:103 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr. jump 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
VA,VB,VC <
_:107 Mes.v.fail.det:Switch-on • off on
3ph. failure • on
_:106 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 0.01 s to 30.00 s 3.00 s
3ph.fail. - time delay

8.3.2.8 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Mes.v.fail.det
_:82 Mes.v.fail.det:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Mes.v.fail.det:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Mes.v.fail.det:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Mes.v.fail.det:Health ENS O
_:300 Mes.v.fail.det:Alarm SPS O
_:304 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-inst.alarm SPS O
_:303 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-alarm SPS O
_:301 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
_:302 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 3ph.failure-alarm SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1549
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision

8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions


Signaling-voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC
device via binary inputs. For this purpose, one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, the associated binary signals are marked as invalid and a Signaling-voltage malfunc-
tion indication is issued.
Several signaling-voltage supervision groups can be created in one SIPROTEC device. Each of these groups
monitors an adjustable area with binary inputs.

8.3.3.2 Structure of the Function


The Signaling-voltage supervision function group contains, besides the general functionality, one preinstan-
tiated Supervision group stage. The Supervision group stage can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.

[dwivsstr-060214-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-9 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

8.3.3.3 Function Description


You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in the Global DIGSI 5 library. It
contains 1 pre-instantiated Superv.Grp. function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a
maximum of 25 supervision groups.

[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-10 Entry in the Global Library

Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information
routing of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed
here, for example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.

1550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-11 Information Routing

Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules
are not taken into consideration by this.
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.

[sc_ivsgrp, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-12 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (I)

NOTE

i Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms.

You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Superv.Grp. function block and define any
binary input within this group for supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check mark at
the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This extends
the parameterization menu by the sections Supervis. grp. start and Supervis. grp. end (see the
following figure).

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1551
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

[sc_gruppe_de, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-13 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (II)

There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1 and 2 or 2 and 3, but no binary inputs on modules 1 and 3. The binary inputs used for super-
vision can be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Superv.Grp. function blocks within
the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.

Example
There are 4 input/output modules available.
Binary inputs of input/output modules 1 and 2 are already combined in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary
inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping.
In supervision group 2, only these 2 binary inputs of the input/output module 2 not used in supervision group
1 as well as further consecutive binary inputs of the input/output modules 3 and 4 can be combined.

8.3.3.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter (General): Mode

• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on


With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the appropriate group. If you put the group into test mode, the Sig. volt.
disturbed indication is given a test flag. If the supervision input drops out in test mode, the assigned inputs
retain their status without their quality attribute being set to invalid.

1552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Parameter (Supervision Signal): I/O module ID

• Default setting (_:104) I/O module ID = I/O module 1


Using the I/O module ID parameter, you specify the I/O module for which you want to activate signaling-
voltage supervision. Counting of the I/O modules starts in increasing order with the binary inputs of the base
module. The binary inputs of the PS201 power-supply module permanently installed in the base module count
as the 2nd I/O module followed by additional I/O modules (3 to n) in the expansion boards of the device.

Parameter (Supervision Signal): Binary input

• Default setting (_:105) Binary input = 1


Using the Binary input parameter, you specify the binary input responsible for the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the parameterized I/O module. The quality attribute of all other binary inputs for this
module are set to valid or invalid depending on the presence of the signaling voltage at the parameterized
binary input.

Parameter (Supervision Signal): Enable variable group

• Default setting (_:102) Enable variable group = untrue


You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the check mark. If you have not set
the check mark (default setting), only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision
signal. If you have set the check mark, the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group
and End supervision group. You can then use that to carry out the grouping of binary inputs for supervision
groups explained in the function description.

Parameter (Start Supervision Group): I/O module ID

• Default setting (_:106) I/O module ID = I/O module 1


Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the first I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the lowest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.

Parameter (Start Supervision Group): Binary input

• Default setting (_:107) Binary input = 1


Parameter Binary input is used to define the lowest binary input for the first I/O module (see (_:106)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.

Parameter (End Supervision Group): I/O module ID

• Default setting (_:108) I/O module ID = I/O module 1


Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the last I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the highest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.

Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input

• Default setting (_:109) Binary input = 1


Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1553
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.3.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:1 Superv.Grp.#:Mode • off on
• on
• test
Superv. signal
_:104 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
ID • I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:105 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input
_:102 Superv.Grp.#:Enable • 0 false
variable group • 1
Supervis. grp. start
_:106 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
ID • I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:107 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input

1554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supervis. grp. end
_:108 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
ID • I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:109 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input

8.3.3.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Superv.Grp.#
_:52 Superv.Grp.#:Behavior ENS O
_:55 Superv.Grp.#:Sig. volt. disturbed SPS O

8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions


The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function detects the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker due to short circuits in the voltage-transformer secondary circuits.
The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function works independently of Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion and should be used – if possible – in parallel to it.
The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker has an impact on the quality of the recorded measured-
value data (see chapter 3.4 Processing Quality Attributes).
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in cases of the tripping of the voltage-trans-
former circuit breaker:
• Distance protection
• Directional negative-sequence protection

• Ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults in grounded-neutral systems


For the following functions the reaction (block/not block) can be set within the function in cases of a tripping
of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker:
• Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases
• Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage

• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage

• Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage

• Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1555
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.4.2 Structure of the Function


The Figure 8-14 shows the position of the function in the device. Every voltage measuring point contains the
Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function.

[dwmcbstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-14 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.4.3 Function Description


The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is captured via the binary input signal >Open. With an
active input signal the information about the measuring-voltage failure is relayed to the affected functions
(see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions). The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained
in the specific protection-function descriptions.

Response Time of the Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker


The response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker can be slower than the pickup time of the
distance protection. This bears the risk of an overfunction. The response time is communicated to the device
with the Response time parameter. For a timely detection of the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker, the pickup of the distance protection is delayed by that response time.

8.3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes


The function is always active and need not be switched on.

Input Signal: >Open

• Input signal: (_:500) >Open


The input signal >Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. As a rule,
this occurs via the routing to a binary input.

Parameter: Response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Response time = 0 ms


When the voltage-transformer circuit breaker drops out, the device must block the distance protection imme-
diately to prevent an unwanted tripping of the distance protection due to the absence of the measuring
voltage while the load current is flowing.
The blocking must be faster than the 1st stage of the distance protection. This requires an extremely short
response time of the miniature circuit breaker (≤ 4 ms at 50 Hz, ≤ 3 ms at 60 Hz rated frequency). If the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact does not fulfill this requirement, you have to set the response time accordingly.

8.3.4.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


VT miniatureCB
_:101 VT miniatureCB:Response 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
time

1556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.4.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Definite-T #
_:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

8.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection

8.3.5.1 Overview of Functions


The purpose of the Broken-wire detection is to detect interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current
transformers during steady-state operation. In addition jeopardizing the secondary circuit due to high
voltages, such interruptions can mimic the presence of differential currents for the differential protection, as
caused by short circuits in the protected object. To prevent overfunctions due to faulty current values, the
affected protection functions are blocked.

8.3.5.2 Structure of the Function


The Broken-wire detection function is structurally anchored in the power-system data as well and in various
protection function groups.

[dwbwsjsk-301112-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-15 Structure/Embedding of the Function

The Broken-wire detection function consists of several stages.


1. Broken wire suspected
• The instantaneous values of all current measuring points are checked on a phase-selective basis for
implausible values.

• The affected phases are marked with Broken wire suspected and the following indications are generated:
(_:301) Phs A BW suspected, (_:302) Phs B BW suspected and/or (_:303) Phs C BW
suspected and (_:307) Broken wire suspected
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.

• After 10 ms of broken-wire check, a detected wire break is signaled with the following indications: (_:
304) Phase A broken wire, (_:305) Phase B broken wire and/or (_:306) Phase C
broken wire and (_:308) Broken wire confirmed
2. Broken-wire check
• Current phases suspected to have a broken wire are tested for plausibility using exclusion criteria.
• A valid exclusion criterion resets the broken-wire suspicion and cancels any existing blocking of protec-
tion functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1557
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

3. Blocking the protection


• The Broken-wire blocking marker immediately leads to blocking of some protection functions.

[lobwstr1-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-16 Stages of the Broken-Wire Detection Function Using the Example of Differential Protec-
tion

8.3.5.3 Function Description

Broken Wire Suspected


The Broken-wire detection function monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all
measuring points. For this purpose, the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility.
Each expected violation must be confirmed by additional criteria before a wire break can be detected and
signaled with assurance.

NOTE

i If the secondary circuits of the current transformers are accidentally opened while the broken-wire detec-
tion is on, functions like the differential protection are blocked phase-segregated and no longer initiate trip-
ping. Hazardous overvoltages can be generated at the open circuit of the current transformer in this condi-
tion which are not eliminated because the differential protection is blocked.

The detection of the local broken wire suspected is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of the
device selectively for each phase. Depending on the protected object, the detection is based on permanent
(line differential protection) or frequency-adjusted instantaneous values (transformer differential protection).

Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.06 I/I rated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken wire suspected.

1558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Resetting:
The broken wire suspected is reset by phase current flowing again , by a reset criterion of the broken-wire
check or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting can be useful during laboratory tests among other applica-
tions.

Indication
If the broken-wire detection by the broken-wire check has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated.
The indication is held stable for the duration of at least 3 periods.

Broken-Wire Check
To prevent unwanted pickup of this monitoring function caused by special operating conditions, for example
fault, maintenance, test, etc., a local broken wire suspected must be confirmed by additional other criteria.
These criteria are checked on the level of the protection functions (Protection function group).
If at least one of the following criteria contradicting wire break is satisfied, the locally set broken wire
suspected is reset including any associated protection blocking.

Local resetting criteria:

• At least one protection function has picked up.

• An assigned circuit-breaker is open.

• A wire break is simultaneously detected at a different local current channel.

• Jump detection on a local voltage channel (if voltage transformers exist)

• Jump detection of the associated zero-sequence current

• Jump detection on a different local current channel of the same phase without broken wire suspected

• Local overcurrent, that is, for at least one phase applies Iph > 2· Irated

Reset criteria at the opposite end:


For the line differential protection, there are additional criteria of the opposite end that can contradict a local
broken wire suspected and cause resetting. The request to reset is transmitted via the protection interface.
• A wire break is simultaneously detected at a current channel of the opposite end.
• Jump detection on a voltage channel of the opposite end (if voltage transformers exist)

• Jump detection on a current channel of the opposite end

• Local overcurrent at the opposite end, that is true for at least one phase Iph > 2· Irated

Blocking the Protection


The decision to block the protection and the determination of the local broken wire suspected is performed
phase-segregated for each 3-phase current measuring point of the device. A central mode parameter of the
broken-wire detection (Mode) in the power-system data decides the blocking behavior.
• No blocking
– Wire break is only signaled

• Blocking
– Each broken wire suspected must cause the affected protection functions to be blocked. Affected
phases are marked with “protection blocked”.

• Automatic blocking
– In addition to broken wire suspected, you can make the blocking dependent on the criterion that the
maximum differential current of all phases does not exceed a settable threshold value Delta
value for autoblock for the differential protection. The phases to be blocked are marked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1559
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Differential protection functions and protection functions that pick up on unbalanced currents are blocked.
Each individual protection function is responsible for the actual blocking and is described there, too.
When using the fast measuring transducer inputs as 4 mA to 20 mA inputs, broken-wire detection is active.
With a < 2 mA current, wire breaks are detected and the wire break indication is set. The measured values
display remains unaffected.

8.3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Mode

• Recommended setting value (_:1) Mode = off


The Mode parameter is used to switch the broken-wire detection to on, off and test.

Parameter: Mode of blocking

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Mode of blocking = blocking


The Mode of blocking parameter enables you to define the blocking condition (see Blocking the protec-
tion). Siemens recommends using the default setting. The setting options are blocking, auto blocking
and not blocking.

Parameter: Delta value for autoblock

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Delta value for autoblock = 1.00 I/IN
With the Delta value for autoblock parameter you can make the blocking decision for protection func-
tions dependent on the amount of the differential current.

8.3.5.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Brk.wire det.
_:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of • blocking blocking
blocking • auto blocking
• not blocking
_:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value for 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
autoblock

8.3.5.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Brk.wire det.
_:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O

1560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O

8.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision

8.3.6.1 Overview of Functions


In healthy network operation, a certain balance between currents can be assumed.
The Current-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase currents in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

8.3.6.2 Structure of the Function


The Current-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current
measuring point.

[dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-17 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.6.3 Function Description


The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase
current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if
|Imin| / |Imax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Imax > Release threshold.

[losymmke-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-18 Characteristic of the Current-Balance Supervision

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1561
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Logic

[locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-19 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision

The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

Delay failure indication


If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the operate delay of the failure indication (parameter Delay failure
indication) begins. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

Blocking the Function


The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function

• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

8.3.6.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold min/max

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.5


The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum
(Imax) phase current.

1562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Parameter: Release threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5 A for Irated
=5A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).

Parameter: Delay failure indication

• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s


Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided.

8.3.6.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv. balan. I
_:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

8.3.6.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O

8.3.7 Voltage-Balance Supervision

8.3.7.1 Overview of Functions


In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1563
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.7.2 Structure of the Function


The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.

[dwstrusy-300913, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-20 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.7.3 Function Description


The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest phase-
to-phase voltage to the largest phase phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold

[lokenuns-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-21 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision

1564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Logic

[lospasym-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 8-22 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision

The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is meas-
ured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-phase
voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

Delay failure indication


If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the delay of the failure indication begins, (parameter: Delay
failure indication). If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

Blocking the Function


The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function

• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.

8.3.7.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold min/max

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75


The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1565
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Parameter: Release threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V


With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Delay failure indication

• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s


Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

8.3.7.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

8.3.7.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O

8.3.8 Current-Sum Supervision

8.3.8.1 Overview of Functions


In healthy system operation, the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Current-sum supervision function monitors the sum of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary
circuit. It detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary
circuit.
For summation of the currents, the device requires the phase currents and the ground current of the current
transformer neutral point or of a separate ground-current transformer at this measuring point. Select the
following connection variant:
• Current-transformer connections connected to 3 current transformers and the neutral point (see
Figure A-14 in the Attachment)

1566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

NOTE

i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).

8.3.8.2 Structure of the Function


The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas-
urement point.

[dwstrcss-300913, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-23 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.8.3 Function Description


The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors. Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN| > Threshold + Slope factor •Σ | I |.

[lokensum-300311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-24 Characteristic of the Current-Sum Supervision

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1567
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Logic

[locssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-25 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision

Slope of the Characteristic Curve


The Slope factor • Σ | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of
the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.
The Slope factor and Threshold parameters are used to set the fault-current limit (IFmax) for the current-
sum supervision. The device calculates this fault current limit with the formula:
IFmax = Threshold + Slope factor • Σ| I |
The device uses the current inputs (IA, IB, IC and IN) to calculate:
• The fault current IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN|
• The maximum current Σ| I | = | IA| + |IB| +| IC| + |kl• IN|
with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground-current
transformer (IN), for example, cable type current transformer.
• Transformation ratio of residual-current converter: RatioN

• Transformation ratio of phase-current converter: Ratioph

1568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

[foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func-
tion.

Delay failure indication


When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the delay of the failure
indication (parameter: Delay failure indication) starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for
that time, the Failure indication is generated.

Blocking the Function


The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function

• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

8.3.8.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Slope factor

• Recommended setting value (_:101) Slope factor = 0.1


The Slope factor parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax)
phase current. This function calculates the RMS values.

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A

The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).

Parameter: Delay failure indication

• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s


Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided.

8.3.8.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv. sum I
_:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1569
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication

8.3.8.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. sum I
_:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O

8.3.9 Voltage-Sum Supervision

8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions


In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit. For
summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of an
open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

NOTE

i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

8.3.9.2 Structure of the Function


The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.

[dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-26 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.9.3 Function Description


The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN • VN | > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.

1570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

[lokenvss-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-27 Characteristic of the Voltage-Sum Supervision

Logic

[lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-28 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision

The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.

Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold, the parameter Delay failure indication
triggers the indication Failure.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1571
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN • VN |, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
You can find more information in this respect in chapter 8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions ).

Delay failure indication


When the threshold value for the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure indication)
is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.

Blocking the Function


The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function

• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.

8.3.9.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V


The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Delay failure indication

• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s


Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

8.3.9.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

8.3.9.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O

1572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.10 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

8.3.10.1 Overview of Functions


The Current phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
currents by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the currents. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

8.3.10.2 Structure of the Function


The Current phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
current measurement point.

[dwstrcrs-040211-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 8-29 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.10.3 Function Description

Logic

[locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 8-30 Logic Diagram of the Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1573
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in the chapter A Appendix.

Release Condition
The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than
0.5 Irated.

Blocking of the Function


The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source

• Via a protection pickup


The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

Delay failure indication


When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Delay failure indication,
the indication Failure is generated.

8.3.10.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Delay failure indication

• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s


Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

8.3.10.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv. ph.seq.I
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

8.3.10.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O

1574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.11 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

8.3.11.1 Overview of Functions


The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.

8.3.11.2 Structure of the Function


The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.

[dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-31 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.11.3 Function Description

Logic

[lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]

Figure 8-32 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1575
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix.

Release Condition
The supervision of the voltage phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase-to-phase voltages are
greater than 40 V.

Blocking of the Function


The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source

• Via a protection pickup


The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

Delay failure indication


When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Delay failure indi-
cation, the indication Failure is generated.

8.3.11.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Delay failure indication

• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s


Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

8.3.11.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

8.3.11.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O

1576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.12 Saturation Detection

8.3.12.1 Overview of Functions


The Saturation detection function evaluates the profile of the current signals and determines whether the
current transformer is saturated.
Protection functions such as the Line differential protection require this information for their selective func-
tion.

8.3.12.2 Structure of the Function

[dwstr saett, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-33 Structure of the Function

The Saturation detection function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current measuring
point.
The Saturat. det. block is visible in the measuring point Current 3-phase only if the I-DIFF fast 2
stage is instantiated in the Line differential protection function or if the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is instanti-
ated in the Stub-differential protection function.

8.3.12.3 Function Description


If current-transformer saturation occurs, this leads to an erroneous representation of the primary-current
history. With this, typical signal distortions of the current-signal profile occur.
The Saturation detection function searches for these typical signal distortions in the current signals of the 3
phases. If the Saturation detection function detects the typical signal distortions, it transmits corresponding
internal information to the protection functions. The protection functions evaluate this information and react
if saturation is detected.
The Saturation detection does not operate until a configurable minimum current (parameter: CT satura-
tion threshold) is exceeded.

8.3.12.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: CT saturation threshold

• Default setting (_:9001:120) CT saturation threshold = 8.0 A


The CT saturation threshold parameter is in the Saturat. det. block and is only visible if the I-
DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated in the Line differential protection function or if the S-DIFF fast 2
stage is instantiated in the Stub-differential protection function.
With the CT saturation threshold parameter, you set the current threshold for the saturation detection.
If the set value is exceeded, the saturation detection becomes active.
Calculate the setting value for the parameter CT saturation threshold according to the following
formula:

[fo_sup isaet, 1, en_US]

where:
kCT Minimum current factor

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1577
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

n´ Effective accuracy limiting factor

The effective accuracy limiting factor n´ is calculated as follows:

[fo_saet n, 1, en_US]

where:
n Rated overcurrent factor
Srated Rated burden of the current transformers [VA]
Si Inherent burden of the current transformers [VA]
S' Actually connected burden (protection device + secondary lines)

The minimum current factor kCT establishes the relationship between the different classes of conventional
primary current transformers and the expected minimum current that can result in saturation of the trans-
former.
Closed iron core transformers such as X, P, PX, PS, and TPS are combined in the current-transformer class
TPX. These transformers have a large amount of remanence and a large secondary time constant.
Conventional current transformers with an anti-remanence gap such as the TPY and the PR limit the
maximum possible remanence to 10%. The minimum expected current that can result in saturation of the
transformer is greater for this current-transformer class.
Due to its linear characteristic curve, the current-transformer class of the linear transformers TPZ transforms
the alternating-current component of the primary current very well. The direct-current component of the
current is greatly reduced. Depending on the connected burden, saturation occurs just below the operational
overcurrent.

The following table shows the minimum current factor kCT for the different current-transformer classes:

Current-Transformer Class TPX TPY TPZ


kCT 5 3 1.5

8.3.12.5 Settings

Measuring Point I-3ph

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Saturat. det.
_:17731:101 Saturat. det.:CT satura- 1 A @ 100 Irated 1.200 A to 100.000 A 8.000 A
tion threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 6.00 A to 500.00 A 40.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 1.200 A to 50.000 A 8.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 6.00 A to 250.00 A 40.00 A

8.3.13 Trip-Circuit Supervision

8.3.13.1 Overview of Functions


The Trip-circuit supervision function recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit. When 2 binary inputs are used,
the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit. If only 1 binary input is available, it will not recognize
disruptions at the circuit-breaker.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the
binary inputs VCtrl > 2 VBImin. At least 19 V are required for each binary input. This makes the supervision usable
only with a system-side control voltage of > 38 V.

1578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.13.2 Structure of the Function


The trip-circuit supervision is integrated into the Circuit-breaker function group. Depending on the number of
available binary inputs, it works with 1 or 2 binary inputs.

[dwtcsueb-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-34 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.3.13.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs


In order to recognize disruptions in the trip circuit for each switch position, you need 2 binary inputs. One
input is connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection, the other parallel to the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.

[dw1po2be-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-35 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs

CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (activated)
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed if the CB is activated)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open if the CB is activated)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1
V-BI2 Input voltage for binary input 2

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1579
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

Supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage.
It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either acti-
vated (“H”) or not (“L”). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault can be a disruption or
a short circuit in the trip circuit, a failure of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker

With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC or >CB aux.contact phsA to
>CB aux.contact phsC are not routed to the binary inputs of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5),
the indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input sig.n.routed are generated and the Trip-
circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.

[lo1po2be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-36 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs

8.3.13.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input


When using 1 binary input, you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker. The binary input is
connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection device. The circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact is bridged by means of a high-resistance equivalent resistance R.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

1580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

[dw1po1be-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-37 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (activated)
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed if the CB is activated)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open if the CB is activated)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance

The supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the failure of the control
voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed by means of the equivalent resistance R or by means of the auxiliary contact
AuxCon1 of the closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed (L).
If the binary input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control
voltage has failed.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker

With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you set which functions act on the trip circuit that is
being supervised. While these functions are active (for example, protection tripping), the trip-circuit supervi-
sion is blocked. The closed contact of the command relay does not lead to a failure indication in this case.
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip
circuit, the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC are not routed to the binary inputs
of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5), indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input
sig.n.routed are generated and the Trip-circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1581
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

[lo1po1be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-38 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated when
the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is
open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:

[fofr1b02-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]

So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain picked up, Rmin results in:

[fofr1b03-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]

You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:

[fofr1b01-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:

[fofr1b04-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]

1582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

8.3.13.5 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Alarm delay

• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)

• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit fail.phsA to Trip-circuit fail.phsC.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-
term transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration
of a trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is
actually interrupted.

Parameter: Blk.by trip/open cmd from

• Possible settings, application-dependent


The parameter works only with the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you select whether the blocking command comes
from the circuit breaker or from the circuit-breaker failure protection. The parameter appears only in
DIGSI.

8.3.13.6 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


74TC sup.1BI #
_:1 74TC sup.1BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.1BI #:Alarm delay 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
_:102 74TC sup.1BI #:Blk.by trip/ Setting options depend on
open cmd from configuration
74TC sup.2BI #
_:1 74TC sup.2BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.2BI #:Alarm delay 1.00 s to 30.00 s 2.00 s

8.3.13.7 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
74TC sup.1BI #
_:82 74TC sup.1BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsA SPS I
_:501 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsB SPS I
_:502 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsC SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.1BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.1BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.1BI #:Health ENS O
_:300 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsA SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsB SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1583
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
_:302 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsC SPS O
_:303 74TC sup.1BI #:PhA input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:304 74TC sup.1BI #:PhB input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:305 74TC sup.1BI #:PhC input sig.n.routed SPS O
74TC sup.2BI #
_:82 74TC sup.2BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsA SPS I
_:501 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsB SPS I
_:502 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsC SPS I
_:503 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsA SPS I
_:504 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsB SPS I
_:505 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsC SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.2BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.2BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.2BI #:Health ENS O
_:300 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsA SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsB SPS O
_:302 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsC SPS O
_:303 74TC sup.2BI #:PhA input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:304 74TC sup.2BI #:PhB input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:305 74TC sup.2BI #:PhC input sig.n.routed SPS O

1584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware

8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware

8.4.1 Overview

The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules

• Plug-in modules on the interface locations


The error responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can switch into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
• Communication-module failure (module x)
• Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)

• USB interface

• Integrated Ethernet interface

• Real-time clock device

• A/D converter (fast current sum)

• Battery voltage

• Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)


Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of opera-
tion.
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (RAM) in the base module
• Defective module

• Module-connection error (PCB Link)

• Control circuit error binary output

• Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage

NOTE

i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).

Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module

• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row


You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1585
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware

Device Operating Hours


The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.

8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

8.4.2.1 Overview of Functions


The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters it performs the following tasks:
• Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.

• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (for example, analog-digital converter)

• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measurement input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instanta-
neous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).

[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-39 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Path)

NOTE

i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point
routing, set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point.

8.4.2.2 Structure of the Function


The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the Power-system
data function group of each 3-phase current measuring point.

1586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware

[dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-40 Structure/Embedding of the Function

8.4.2.3 Function Description


Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 • (Σ| i | - Base point 2)
With the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN), the device calculates:
• Fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
• Maximum current Σ| i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|

[lokenisu-240413-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 8-41 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1587
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware

Logic

[losumsch-240413-01.tif, 3, en_US]

Figure 8-42 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.72 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).

NOTE

i The parameters are fixed in the device and cannot be changed.


It is not necessary to change the parameters depending on the application.

Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal
analog-digital converters function.
The threshold value is permanently set to 10 % of the device rated current.

Slope of the Characteristic 1


The component Slope of the characteristic 1 • Σ | i | takes into account permissible errors of the current input
that can occur in the case of small overcurrents.
The Slope of the characteristic 1 is permanently set to 0.1.

Slope of the Characteristic 2


The component Slope of the characteristic 2 takes into account permissible errors of the current input that
can occur in the case of high overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).

1588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware

The Slope of the characteristic 2 is permanently set to 0.95. The base point of the Slope of the character-
istic 2 is permanently set to 10.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1589
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware


The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
• Supervisions of the data and version consistency
• Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware

• Supervision of the available processor performance


When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be in
effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:

Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.


The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).

Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
Such errors are, for example:
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor

• Program-sequence error

Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error

• CFC-runtime error

• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row


You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 8.8 Error
Responses and Corrective Measures. You will find corresponding corrective measures there.

1590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration


The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:

Configuration errors for which the device remains in operation.


The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in the IE converter config-
uration (normal/sensitive).

Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Missing hardware module (module x)

• Incorrect hardware module (module x)

• Incorrect hardware combination

• Incorrect plug-in module (module x)


You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another synchro-
nization with DIGSI.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1591
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections


SIPROTEC 5 devices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond the
hardware supervision of the communication plug-in modules the transferred data must be monitored with
respect to their consistency, failure, or outage.

Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.

Marking Fault Signals/Data


The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
• GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication.
• Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values, both analog measured values and binary information
to invalid (for example, for differential protection). Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in
cases of failures.

• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3, you will find
the detailed description, in tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also
be found there.

1592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

8.8.1 Overview

When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device
and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked
and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the supervision func-
tions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.

How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable


In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to the
type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and indica-
tions.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures

Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures


To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
• Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device remains in operation.
• Defect severity 2:
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
• Defect severity 3:
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects cannot be implemented by a restart. In fallback mode, the
protection and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
• Defect severity 4:
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but remains in operation. Normally, the user can
corect the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes
for defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.

Error Responses
Group-Warning Indication
Group Warning

Indication in
Operational Log

Indication in
Device-Diagnosis Log

Indication of
the Life Contact

All Protection and


Automation Functions

Fallback Mode
Device Restart (Reset)

Defect Severity 1 x x x – – – –

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1593
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

Error Responses
Defect Severity 2 – – x x During x –
the
starting
time of
the
device
Defect Severity 3 – – x x x – x
Defect Severity 4 – x – x x – –

8.8.2 Defect Severity 1

Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Live status contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated

Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The device-
diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corresponding
corrective measures for each detected device error.
There is further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.1 Indications.

Group-Warning Indication Group Warning


In the delivery condition, all supervision indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal
(_:301)Group warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority
of supervision indications are permanently connected to the Group warning (Group warning column =
fixed). However, some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a CFC chart
(Group warning column = CFC). If necessary, you can remove again the routings via a CFC chart from the
group indication.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is prerouted to an LED.
The following logic shows the context.

1594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

[lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-43 Forming of a Warning Group Indication Group Warning

Overview of Errors

Indication Type Group Explanation


Warning
General:
(_:53) Health ENS CFC If the Health of an individual function
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS block, for example a protection stage or
an individual function, goes to the
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS
Warning or Alarm state, this state is
processed via the associated function
group up to the general group indication
Health (_:53).
Check from the operational log from
which function or function block the
error originates. In the associated func-
tion description, there is additional
information as to why the Health of the
function or a function block can change.
Device:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1595
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

Indication Type Group Explanation


Warning
(_:320) Auxiliary Power Fail SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
Check the external power supply.
(_:305) Battery failure SPS Battery fault:
Replace the device battery.
To avoid data losses, Siemens recom-
mends replacing the device battery
when the supply voltage of the device is
switched on.
(_:312) Compensation error x ENS Calibration error in module x:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked
with the quality attribute of question-
able (measured value display with ≈).
(_:314) Offset error x ENS Offset error on module x:
If this indication persists after the device
start, contact the Customer Support
Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked
with the quality attribute of question-
able (measured value display with ≈).
(_:306) Clock fail SPS Internal time failure
• Check the time settings first.
• Then replace the device battery.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact
the Customer Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked
with the quality attribute of Clock
Failure.
(_:319) Error memory SPS Checksum (CRC) error in monitored
memory areas of the device
Measuring-transducer error (x) ENS Hardware error on the measuring-trans-
ducer module on plug-in module posi-
tion E/F/M/N/P:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Handling an alarm:
(_:504) >Group Warning SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation
of group warning
Time sync.:
(_:305) Time sync. error SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing
master is faulty:
• Check the external time source
first.
• Check the external connections.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact
the Customer Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked
with the quality attribute of Clock not
synchronized.
Power-system data:meas. point I-3ph:wire
break: Wiring:

1596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

Indication Type Group Explanation


Warning
(_:301) Phs A BW suspected SPS Indications of broken-wire detection
(_:302) Phs B BW suspected SPS (see chap. 8.3.5.1 Overview of Func-
tions)
(_:303) Phs C BW suspected SPS
Blocking: Protection functions tending
(_:304) Phase A broken wire SPS
to overfunction in the event of a wire
(_:305) Phase B broken wire SPS break (for example, line differential
(_:306) Phase C broken wire SPS protection) are blocked.
(_:307) Broken wire suspected SPS CFC
(_:308) Broken wire confirmed SPS CFC
Power-system data:meas. point I-3ph:superv. Failure of the current balance (see chap.
SPS CFC
bal. I: 8.3.6.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point I-3ph:superv. Failure of the current phase-rotation
SPS CFC
Phsseq.I: supervision (see chap. 8.3.10.1 Over-
(_:71) Failure view of Functions )
Power-system data:meas. point I-3ph:superv. Failure of the current sum (see chap.
SPS CFC
Sum I 8.3.8.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the quick current sum (see
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: chap. 8.4.2.1 Overview of Functions)
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in
the analog-digital converter at the
power input.
• Check the exterior wiring.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact
the Customer Support Center.
Quality: The internally managed current
measured values are marked with the
invalid quality attribute.
Blocking: The protection functions
based on current measurement are
blocked.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
SPS CFC
Volt.Trans.Cir.B: open.
(_:500) >Open Blocking: Appropriate functions are
either blocked definitely (for example,
distance protection) or the blocking can
be set individually.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage balance (see chap.
SPS CFC
Superv. bal. V: 8.3.7.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage phase-rotation
SPS CFC
Superv. Phsseq.V: supervision (see chap. 8.3.11.1 Over-
(_:71) Failure view of Functions )
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage sum (see chap.
SPS CFC
Superv. of Sum V: 8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1597
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

Indication Type Group Explanation


Warning
2 devices prot. comm.: Protection interface Protection interface connection defec-
#: tive:
(_:303) Connection broken SPS CFC 43 • Check the connections and the
(_:316) Error rate / min exc. SPS external communication infrastruc-
ture.
(_:317) Error rate / hour exc. SPS
• If the fault is not remedied, contact
(_:318) Time delay exceeded SPS the Customer Support Center.
(_:320) Time delay jump SPS Transferred Signals: Faulty or not
received telegrams are detected at the
receive end and discarded. They do not
result in failure of the applications.
Configured binary signals are reset after
a time that can be set.
Line 1: Mess.Volt.Fail detected: Measuring-voltage failure detected:
SPS CFC
(_:300) Failure Check the exterior wiring.
Blocking: Appropriate functions are
either blocked definitely (for example,
distance protection) or the blocking can
be set individually.
Line 1: Overcurrent 3ph #:General: 3-phase overcurrent protection works as
SPS CFC
(_:2311:101) Emergency mode act. an emergency overcurrent protection.
Main protection function is blocked.
Line 1: Line differential protection #:General SPS Indication of the line differential protec-
information: tion: Differential current too high
(_:2311:316) Alarm: Idiff too Blocking: With appropriate parameteri-
high zation, the line differential protection
will be blocked (see chapters 6.2.3 Func-
tion Description and 10.4 Functional
Test of the Line Differential Protection).

8.8.3 Defect Severity 2

Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart

NOTE

i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.

Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational log.
The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detec-
tion and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available for
later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recom-
mendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.

43 The indications are not prerouted in the CFC chart. The indications must be added to by the user in the CFC chart!

1598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.

Overview of Errors

Number Device-Diagnosis Log


826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
826 CPU overload:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.

8.8.4 Defect Severity 3

Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode

Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus
available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are
offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.

Overview of Errors

Number Device-Diagnosis Log


2822 Memory error (continuous)
Contact the Customer Support Center.
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
4729 Device bus error (repeated):
• Check the module configuration and the module connections.
• Contact the Customer Support Center.
4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1599
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures

Number Device-Diagnosis Log


5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
956 Firmware-version error:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
2013, 2025 Signature error:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.

8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)

Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the device
hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of the
defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.

• The life contact is terminated.

• The red Error LED is activated.

• All protection and automation functions are blocked.

• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).

• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 8.9 Group Indications).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm

Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.

1600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.9 Group Indications

8.9 Group Indications


The following group indications are available:
• (_:300) Group alarm
• (_:301) Group warning
• (_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Information routing. In the
operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).

[scgrwarn-010313-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-44 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix

Group Indication Group Alarm


The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect severity 4 monitoring. This moni-
toring has a special purpose, as it is set user-specifically by a binary input signal and not by internal device
supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, such as blocking all protection and automatic
functions (see chapter 8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm
becomes active. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group
alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the >Group
Alarm. This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.

Group Indication Group Warning


The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly linked to the signal (_:301) Group warning, others are
connected flexibly in the device delivery condition via a CFC chart. This assignment is described in chapter
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning, that initiates the Group warning.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1601
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.9 Group Indications

The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.

Group Indication
The Group indication is exclusively for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set, the
indication (_:302) Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log. This
warning indication does not result in blocking a protection function. If the binary input signal is reset, the
signal (_:302) Group indication drops out. Using a CFC chart, you can define when the binary input
signal (_:505) >Group indication is to be set.

1602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision
of the Primary System

9.1 Overview of Functions 1604


9.2 Structure of the Function 1605
9.3 Operational Measured Values 1607
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 1609
9.5 Average Values 1610
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values 1613
9.7 Energy Values 1615
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values 1618
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System 1622
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 1623
9.11 Measuring Transducers 1643
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 1649

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1603
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions

9.1 Overview of Functions


The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group. This is how, for example, the electric power is calculated
from the voltage and current measurands.
Measuring transducers are an exception as they already form various calculation parameters from the analog
current and voltage inputs themselves.
Basic instructions for recording and editing process data can be found in the chapter 2.1 Function Embedding
in the Device.

[dwomverf-010212-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing

For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Operational measured values
• Fundamental and symmetrical components

• Function-specific measured values

• Minimum values, maximum values, average values

• Energy metered values

• User-defined measured and metered values

• Statistic Values

1604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.2 Structure of the Function

9.2 Structure of the Function


Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
A typical function group is displayed below.

Function Group Line


In the simplest version the Line function group obtains the measured values of the 3-phase voltage and
current system and contains the following measured-value groups:

[dwomvltg-030912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The Minimum values/Maximum values/Average values and User-defined values can be inserted from the
library into the Line function group.
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.

Circuit-Breaker Function Group


The Circuit-breaker function group may contain the following measured values:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1605
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.2 Structure of the Function

[dwomvls1-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values


The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and
minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of
the protected object. This requires that the connection polarity for the measuring points used be correctly set
(also compare (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the measuring point
current, 3-phase). It is, however, possible, to set the "forward" direction for the protection functions and the
positive direction for the powers, etc., differently, for example, such that the active power import (from the
line to the busbar) is displayed positively. Then set the option P, Q sign in the affected function groups on
the reversed parameter. With the parameter not reversed (default setting), the positive direction for
the powers, etc., corresponds with the "forward" direction for the protection functions.
The affected values are given in detail in the Chapters 9.3 Operational Measured Values - 9.9 Statistical
Values of the Primary System.

1606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.3 Operational Measured Values

9.3 Operational Measured Values


Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values

Active power

Apparent power

Reactive power

n Harmonic order
φn The angle difference between the voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Power factor

Active power factor

Function Group Line


The following table describes the operational measured values of the Line function group.
All protection functions have access to the values.

Table 9-1 Operational Measured Values of the Function Group Line

Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IN par Line Phase current of the parallel A A Rated operating current of the primary values
line
IY Neutral-point current of A A Rated operating current of the primary values
transformer
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VLAB, VLBC, VLCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Calculated zero-sequence kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
VN Measured neutral-point kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
displacement voltage √3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
P Active power MW – Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1607
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.3 Operational Measured Values

Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to


dary
Q Reactive power Mvar – Reactive power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
S Apparent power MVA – Apparent power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Cos φ Active power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW – Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar – Reactive power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA – Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx

NOTE

i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General of the respective function group, the sign of
the following measured values can be inverted (see chapter 5.1 Function-Group Type Line in the
subchapter 5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group, section on the Inversion of Output-Related Measured
and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC

• Reactive power (total): Q total

• Reactive power (phase-related): QA, QB and QC

1608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components


The fundamental components are calculated from the frequency-tracked instantaneous values through a
Fourier filter (integration interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the
amount and phase angle.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.

Fundamental Components

Table 9-2 Fundamental Components

Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to


dary Angle
V A, V B, V C Phase-to-ground voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
values/√3
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
ment voltage values/√3
V 12, V 23, Phase-to-phase voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of the
V 31 primary values

I A, I B, I C Phase currents A A ° Rated operating current of the


primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A ° Rated operating current of the
primary values

Symmetrical Components

Table 9-3 Symmetrical Components

Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to


dary Angle
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V1 Positive-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
V2 Negative-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A ° Rated operating current of the
current primary values
I1 Positive-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values
I2 Negative-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1609
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values

9.5 Average Values

9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values

Average values can be formed based on different measurands:


• Operational measured values
• Symmetrical components
Through the settings, you can set how and when the average values are formed. The settings describe:
• Time slot over which the average value is formed
(Parameter: Average calc. interval )

• Update interval for the display of the average values


(Parameter: Average update interval )

• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components
You reset the average value formation via the
• Binary input >Reset average value
• DIGSI

• The integrated operation panel

NOTE

i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Reactive power (total): Q total

9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values

The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.

Parameter: Average calc. interval

• Default setting: (_:104) Average calc. interval = 60 min

Parameter Value Description


1 min to 60 min Time slot for averaging, for example 60 minutes

Parameter: Average update interval

• Default setting: (_:105) Average update interval = 60 min

1610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values

Parameter Value Description


1 min to 60 min Update interval for displaying the average value, for example 60 minutes

Parameter: Average synchroniz. time

• Default setting: (_:106) Average synchroniz. time = hh:00


The parameter describes the synchronization time for average value formation.

Parameter Value Description


hh:00 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective on the full hour
hh:15 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective 15 minutes after the full hour
hh:30 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective 30 minutes after the full hour
hh:45 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective 45 minutes after the full hour

NOTE

i The average value calculation restarts after


• Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
• Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)

• Changing the time

• Resetting the average values


The average values are reset immediately. The display changes to "---".

The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.

Average calc. interval = 60 min


Average update interval = 30 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.

Average calc. interval = 60 min


Average update interval = 60 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.

Average calc. interval = 5 min


Average update interval = 10 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:00.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1611
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values

A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 11:10:00.

1612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values

9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values

9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values

Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Operational measured values
• Symmetrical components

• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.
(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )

• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )

• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.

[dwminmax-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-2 Minimum and Maximum-Value Formation

Minimum and maximum values are time-stamped.


Minimum/maximum values are formed through:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components

• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI

• The integrated operation panel

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1613
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values

NOTE

i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Minimum/maximum values of the active and reactive power:
Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal

• Minimum/maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal

9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values

The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.

Parameter: Min/Max cyclic reset

• Default setting: (_:107) Min/Max cyclic reset = yes

Parameter Value Description


Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is acti-
vated
No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deacti-
vated
None of the following parameters are visible

Parameter: Min/Max reset each

• Default setting: (_:108) Min/Max reset each = 1 day

Parameter Value Description


1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value and the maximum value, cyclically on all
specified days, for example each day (1 day)

Parameter: Min/Max reset minute

• Default setting: (_:109) Min/Max reset minute = 0 min

Parameter Value Description


0 min to 1439 min Resetting the minimum value and the maximum value at the specified
minute of the day, which is stated in the parameter Min/Max Reset
takes place every, for example 0 min 0 min (= 00.00)

Parameter: Min/Max days until start

• Default setting: (_:110) Min/Max days until start = 1 day

Parameter Value Description


1 day to 365 days Indication of when the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum values and
maximum values begins, for example in 1 day (after the parameterization)

1614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values

9.7 Energy Values

9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values

The device continually determines the values for the active and reactive energy from the power-measured
values. It calculates the exported and imported electrical energy. The calculation (summation over time)
begins immediately after the device startup. You can read the present energy values on the device display or
through DIGSI, delete the energy value (set to 0), or set it to any initial value. After input, the energy-value
calculation will continue with the new setting values.
Energy values can be transferred to a control center through an interface. The energy values are converted
into energy metered values. Here the following applies:

[foomverg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Through the settings, you set how the metered values are processed. The setting parameters apply for all
energy metered values of the device, and do not have a function-group specific effect. You determine the
following points:
• Parameter Energy restore time
Hour-related point in time; at this point in time, the device will provide a metered value at the communi-
cation interface for transmission. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval
will be deactivated automatically.

• Parameter Energy restore interval


Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu-
nication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: The transfer interval is used alternatively to the transfer time, and deactivates the set transfer time.
The display of the device is always up to date.
You will find these parameters in the device settings under measured values.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input (>Restoring). The rising edge of the binary
input leads to restoring, that is, provision of the energy-metered value at the communication interface.
The metered-value memory and the energy values can be set to 0 via a binary input (>Resetting) if there is
a rising edge.
Note: The binary inputs affect all energy/energy metered values simultaneously.
The following energy values are available:
Energy Values Primary
Wp+ Active energy, output kWh, MWh, GWh
Wp- Active energy, input kWh, MWh, GWh
Wq+ Reactive energy, output kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
Wq- Reactive energy, input kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh

In compliance with IEC 61850, when individually measured values are missing, the quality of the energy-
metered values changes to the state Questionable.
This quality state is retained until a new meter content is specified for the energy value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Set
- Setting a new counter status
- Resetting the counter status to 0

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1615
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values

NOTE

i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function, section on the
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active energy, output: Wp+
• Active energy, input: Wp-

• Reactive energy, output: Wq+

• Reactive energy, input: Wq-

9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values

The set parameters apply for all electricity meters of the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the
project tree under Settings > Device settings.

Parameter: Energy restore interval

• Default setting: (_:111) Energy restore interval = 10 min

Parameter Value Description


0 min Restoring deactivated
60 min Cyclical restoring after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes

Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore time is not in
effect and will be deactivated automatically.

Parameter: Energy restore time

• Default setting: (_:112) Energy restore time = none

Parameter Value Description


none Deactivated
hh:00 Restoring on the full hour
hh:15 Restoring 15 minutes after the full hour
hh:30 Restoring 30 minutes after the full hour
hh:45 Restoring 45 minutes after the full hour

Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval is
not in effect and will be deactivated automatically.

Parameter: Energy restore

• Default setting: (_:120) Energy restore = latest value

Parameter Value Description


latest value Restoring of the current energy value
delta value Restoring the difference value between the current energy value and the
energy value of the last restoring operation

Parameter: Energy restore by A.time

• Default setting: (_:121) Energy restore by A.time = false

Parameter Value Description


False Restoring deactivated

1616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values

Parameter Value Description


True The cyclic restoring after the set time of the parameter (_:111) Energy
restore intervalwill also be synchronized with the system time.
Example: Energy restore interval = 30 min; current system time:
12:10 o'clock First restore: 12:30 o'clock; next restore: 13:00 o'clock etc.

Note: When the parameter is activated, the following setting values are possible for the parameter (_:111)
Energy restore interval: 1 min; 2 min; 3 min; 4 min; 5 min; 6 min; 10 min; 12 min; 15 min; 20 min;
30 min; 60 min.

Input Signals: >Restoring and >Resetting

Binary Inputs Description


>Restoring The restoring of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The metered value memory is set to 0 through the binary input.

You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix. Open the function group, for example, Line, where
you created the energy value. There, under the tab Measured values you will find the tab Energy, 3-phase.
In this tab, you will find the logical signals in addition to the measured values.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1617
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values

9.8 User-Defined Metered Values

9.8.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values

NOTE

i You can define additional metered values through DIGSI for user-specific applications.

Use pulse meters; then you can define the respective metered values through DIGSI and set parameters for
them analogously to the energy values. You can read out the metered values on the display of the device or
via DIGSI.
Through settings, you can individually set how each pulse-metered value is processed:
• Parameter Restore time
Hour-related point in time when the device will provide a metered value at the communication interface
for transmission. After this, the transfer takes place in accordance with the selected protocol.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval will
automatically be deactivated.

• Parameter Restore interval


Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu-
nication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time will automati-
cally be deactivated.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input ( >Restore trigger ) or via a logical
internal binary input. The rising edge of the binary input leads to restoring and thus to provision of the
metered value at the communication interface.
The counter pulse of any external/internal pulse generator is connected to the device via a routable binary
input ( >Pulse input ). If this does not deliver any plausible values, this can be signaled to the device via
another routable binary input ( >External error ).
In compliance with IEC 61850, in the event of an external error, the quality of the pulse-metered value
changes to the state Questionable. No more pulses are added as long as the external error persists. Once the
external fault condition has been cleared, pulses are added again.
The quality of the pulse-metered value remains Questionable until a new meter content is specified for the
pulse-metered value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Setting
- Setting a new meter content
- Resetting the meter content to 0

• Parameter Edge trigger


Through settings, you can select between counting only with a rising edge or with rising and falling
edges on the pulse input.
The pulse counter can be reset to 0. You can perform this resetting via the rising edge of a routable binary
input ( >Reset ) or via operation on the device.
To display the counting amount at the device display, use DIGSI to set the desired weighting of the counter
pulses, the unit of the metered value and a multiplication factor for every pulse generator. You can also assign
a user-specific name.
To do this, open the functional area Pulse-metered value in DIGSI information routing. (see Figure 9-3).
Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.

1618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values

[scomvimp-010313-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-3 Setting with DIGSI, General Settings, Pulse-Metered Values

9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values

The functionality Pulse-metered values is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you must
load it from the library into the respective function group.
The parameters can be set individually for every pulse counter. You will find the setting parameters in DIGSI in
the project tree under Parameter > Function group
For pulse-metered values, the following described settings and binary inputs are available.

Parameter: Restore time

• Default setting: (_:101) Restore time = none

Parameter Value Description


none Deactivated
hh:00 Transfer on the full hour
hh:15 Transfer 15 minutes after the full hour Note:
hh:30 Transfer 30 minutes after the full hour Note:
hh:45 Transfer 45 minutes after the full hour Note:

Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval is not in effect
and will be deactivated automatically.

Parameter: Restore interval

• Default setting: (_:102) Restore interval = 0 min

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1619
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values

Parameter Value Description


0 min Deactivated
1 min to 60 min Cyclical transfer after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes

Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time is not in effect and
will be deactivated automatically.

Parameter: Edge trigger

• Default setting: (_:103) Edge trigger = rising edge

Parameter Value Description


rising edge Counting with rising edge at the pulse input
rising & falling edge Counting with rising and falling edge at the pulse input

Parameter: Restore by absolute time

• Default setting: (_:104) Restore by absolute time= False

Parameter Value Description


False Deactivated
True The cyclic restoring of setting Restore interval after the set time is also
synchronized with the system time. Example: Restore interval = 30
min; current system time: 12:10 o'clock. First restoring operation: 12:30
o'clock; next restoring operation: 13:00 o'clock, etc.

Input Signals: >Pulse input, >External error, >Restore trigger, >Reset

Binary inputs Description


>Pulse input Input for the counting pulses of an external pulse generator
>External error Indication that the counter pulses of the external pulse generator are faulty.
The indication has an effect on the quality identifier of the pulse value.
>Restore trigger The transfer of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The rising edge at the binary input resets the pulse counter to 0.

The amount of energy indicated by a pulse generator is to be displayed as a measured value.


1 pulse corresponds to 100 Wh.
The pulse weighting, the SI unit, and the factor must be adjusted to one another.
Display value = Calculated metered value * Pulse weighting * Factor * SI unit.
If the check box Restore delta value is activated, the differential value is transferred at the restore time set
via the communication interface. The difference value is formed by subtracting the counter content of the last
restoring operation from the current counter content.
You route the logical signal >Pulse input to a binary input to which the pulse generator is connected.
Set the following values:
Name Active Power Meter
Pulse weighting 100
Restore differential value Activated
SI unit Wh
Factor 1

The factor is used for adaptation to larger units (for instance, 1000 for kWh). It is adjustable in powers of ten
(1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). The following figure shows the signals that can be arranged in the DIGSI information
matrix. Open the function group where you created the pulse-metered value, for example, Line 1. There, you
will find the function area Pulse-metered value. Here you will also find the logical signals next to the
metered value. Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.

1620 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values

[scimpzwe-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-4 Setting with DIGSI

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1621
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System

9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System


The device has statistical values for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
The following values are available for each circuit breaker:
• Total number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device.
• Number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device, separately for each circuit breaker pole
(if 1-pole tripping is possible)

• Total sum of primary breaking currents

• Sum of the primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole

• Hours with open circuit breaker

• Hours under load


The following values are available for each disconnector switch:
• Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device
• Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device, separately for each
switch pole (if 1-pole switching is possible)

1622 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

9.10.1 Overview of Functions

A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a high
precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.

9.10.2 Structure of the Function Group

The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).

[dwstrpmu-250613-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-5 Structure/Embedding of the Function

9.10.3 Function Description

The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time stamps
and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power frequency
change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured values. There-
fore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system, for example
network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1623
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

Table 9-4 Comparison of Synchrophasors and Conventional Measured Values

Synchrophasors of the PMU Measured Values from the Measuring Points


Continuous updating (measured value of current) Slow updating (typically every 5 seconds)
with, for example, 10 values per second (reporting
rate)
Every measured value has a time stamp No time stamp for the measured values
Phasor values of current and voltage (amplitude and RMS values without phase angle
phase angle)

The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.

[dwstrwam-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-6 Structure of a Wide-Area Monitoring System with Phasor-Measurement Units

The phasor-measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchrophasor
communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automation
technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol.
The central evaluation system, e.g. SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files, archives them
and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may also be
performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other PDCs or
to a control station is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore, the
device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.

Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.

1624 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[dwgeopdc-061011-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-7 Geometric Representation of a Phasor

Reference Point for Determining the Angle


The phase angle of a measuring signal Xm is determined relative to a cosine function having a rated frequency,
which is synchronized with the UTC time reference (see Figure 9-8).

[dwutcphi-260112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-8 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1625
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared.

Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.

Total Vector Error (TVE)


The TVE describes the error between the actual and the measured values of the input signal. The Synchro-
phasor Standard IEEE 37.118 defines upper limiting values of 120 % VN and 200 % IN, among other things. Up
to these limiting values, the TVE of 1 % must not be exceeded for stationary signals. The standard defines the
2 performance classes, Class P and Class M, as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable and
the TVE of ≤1 % must be maintained. The SIPROTEC 5 devices support Class P and Class M, which specify the
following influencing variables for a TVE of 1 %:
• Signal frequency (relative to fN)
• Signal magnitude (relative to 100 % nominal magnitude) for voltage and current

• Phase angle (relative to 0°)

• Harmonic distortions (relative to < 0.2 % (THD) up to the 50th harmonic


The following figure graphically represents the total vector error. As well as the amplitude, the TVE also enters
into the angle error.

1626 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[dwklatve-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-9 Representation of the Total Vector Error

The TVE is defined as follows:

[fo_utcphi-111011-01.tif, 1, --_--]

where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal

• Xi(n) = Imaginary part of measured signal

• Xr = Real part of input signal

• Xi = Imaginary part of input signal

Variables that influence the TVE are:


• Amplitude errors
• Phase errors

• Synchronization accuracy (deviation from the UTC)


Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the
GPS receiver module, as well as by the optimal setup of the GPS antenna.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1627
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

9.10.4 Transmitted Data

The following data is transmitted from the PMU to the PDC:


• Current and voltage phasors
• Frequency

• Frequency rate of change

• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1st 3-phase voltage measuring points
2nd 1-phase voltage measuring points
3rd 3-phase current measuring points
4th 1-phase current measuring points

The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of
3 individual synchrophasors. This setting can be made via the parameter (_:10621:103) Only positive
sequence.

9.10.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)

PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which the
PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been
queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU. If
you use the method of spontaneous transmission via UDP, data output starts immediately after the device
boots without a close command to the PMU.
In addition to the phasors, the channel names of the routed measuring points and the binary information are
transferred. Per default, these are automatically generated by the respective PMU function groups.
Where applicable, you can also edit the channel names of the measuring point and assign a designation of its
own for this purpose. For more information, see chapter 9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI. The
names for the binary information carried out are however, generally automatically generated by the respec-
tive PMU function group and cannot be edited.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:

Table 9-5 Possible Measuring-Point Names

Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point U-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01

1628 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point U-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID03

Table 9-6 Possible Binary Information Names

Path Displayed in DIGSI 5 Name Transferred to the PDC


(Can Be Edited) (Cannot be Edited)
PMU 1: BIN-01-INFO-6
Transf.bin.1:
>BinaryInfo.6
PMU 1: BIN-02-INFO-8
Transf.bin.2:
>BinaryInfo.8
PMU 1: BIN-10-INFO-3
Transf.bin.10:
>BinaryInfo.3

Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission is
terminated by a corresponding trip command from the PDC or when the connection between the PDC and the
PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713
The ports must be configured on the PDC.
If you are using the UDP protocol for communication between the PMU and the PDC, you can set either
command mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode. In asynchronous
response mode, data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37.118
format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the
PMU.
Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 3 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support for
up to 12 PDCs.

9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI

You configure and parameterize the Phasor Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in a
DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as PMUs.
The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as PMUs. If
more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module assembly (expan-
sion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO ( 2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1629
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N, or P of the device, see Figure 9-10. You can view the
selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and cannot
be changed.

[sccommod-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-10 Placement of Communication Modules

NOTE

i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules and
cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.

Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in
item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.

[scethern-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-11 Ethernet Address Configuration

In the DIGSI properties dialog for channel 1, select the synchrophasor protocol, see the following figure.

1630 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scprotoc-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-12 Protocol Selection

After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, an advanced settings
dialog for PMU-specific configuration opens, see the following figure.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1631
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scwildcard_de, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-13 PMU-Specific Configuration

You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the systems administered.
Configurable placeholders are permitted for each PDC/IP address with the TCP PMU transmission protocol in
general and with UDP in the Communication mode commanded operation. These placeholders allow you
to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is to
permit each individual device or system access within the respective system without limits with regard to their
hierarchy level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is elimi-
nated. You are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result, very
flexible when making changes to the configuration of the entire system, for example. The placeholder char-
acter must follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.

1632 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

EXAMPLE of Placeholder Characters:


Example 1:
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00101011 is not permitted
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00111111 is permitted
Example 2:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.1
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.127
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.1 to 192.172.16.127.
Example 3:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.100
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.3
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.100 to 192.172.16.103.

If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder and
requested IP address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received is
accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.

NOTE

i You must have configured at least 1 IP address in order to establish a connection between the device and
PDC.

If you use the asynchronous data transmission method, set the PMU transfer parameter to UDP and the
Communication mode parameter to Spontaneous operation. The PMU data are then sent cyclically via
UDP to each PDC/IP address permanently configured in DIGSI. You may not configure placeholders for PDC/IP-
address ranges in this communication mode.
Data output starts immediately after the device has booted. In this way, no starting signal from the PDC is
necessary to start data transmission.

[sc_spontan_pmu, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-14 PMU Configuration for Spontaneous Transmission

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1633
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

The configuration dataset is transmitted 1x per minute. With the Reporting Rate parameter, you set the
number of cyclic repetitions of the data packages. As UDP is a connectionless protocol, a preconfigured desti-
nation device with its PDC/IP address is not required to be physically present and/or connected. This allows
uninterrupted provision of the data without bidirectional communication.

NOTE

i If you have not configured valid PDC/IP addresses and still activate option for spontaneous data transmis-
sion, no cyclic data telegrams are sent.

NOTE

i It is possible to configure IP addresses for various PDCs that are not in the same subnetwork as the COM
module. Such configurations are considered valid and may be loaded into the device. However, if the
device transmits spontaneous data and configuration packages to these IP addresses, the PDC with the
deviating subnetwork destination address cannot be reached.

EXAMPLE
COM-Module Address Configuration
• IP address: 192.168.100.1

• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0


PDC Address Configuration
• IP address for PDC1: 192.168.100.160
• IP address for PDC2: 86.168.100.161
Only PDC1 receives the data because the IP address is in the same subnetwork as that of the COM module.
PDC2 cannot be reached because the subnetwork address (86.x) differs from the subnetwork address of the
COM module (192.x). The PMU cannot transmit data to this address.

Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 9-15 shows an example expansion of the device configuration by 2 additional input/output modules.
You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points via the DIGSI routing
matrix, see example in Figure 9-16.

1634 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scaddios-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-15 Adding Additional Input/Output Modules

[scroutin-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-16 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points

The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 2 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 2 x 3-phase current measuring points

• 2 x 1-phase voltage measuring points

• 2 x 1-phase current measuring points


You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU, see the following figure. However, each PMU must
be connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1635
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scfgconn-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-17 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups

When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
The device load, however, is dependent on:
• Number of PMUs
• Performance class (where Class M generates the greater load)

• Number of assigned channels

• Configured reporting rate of each PMU

• Number of binary signals to be transferred

Changing the Channel Names of Phasors


You can edit the names of the individual phasor channels for voltage and current in DIGSI. The clearly struc-
tured channel designations assist with when testing and commissioning PMU systems. Furthermore, only the
names visible in the IEEE C37.118 interface can be changed. The function block designations themselves
cannot.
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names in the scope of the
SIPROTEC 5-PMU support. Due to the protocol, the designation length is limited to 16 ASCII characters per
channel. However, when renaming, you have to assign at least 1 character. The renaming of binary channels
is not supported in the current implementation.
You can start the renaming by setting the check mark at Own phasor names with the parameterization in
the PMU function block Functional settings. Once you have activated this check mark, define a separate
name for each phasor. For this purpose, DIGSI shows all routed measuring points on the PMU in the function
group connections (see following figure).

1636 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scPMUnam_de, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-18 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors

NOTE

i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive-sequence system
only to No in the functional settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each 3-
phase measuring point for renaming.

Routing Binary Signals


You can connect binary inputs or CFC information with binary channels of the PMU via DIGSI information
routing. You will find, in the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) folder, the Binary information transmission
function block in the DIGSI function library (see the following figure). You can instantiate this function block
up to 10 times in one PMU function group. Each of these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary
channels.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1637
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scpmubif-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-19 Information Routing in DIGSI 5

Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
• clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.

[scparami-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-20 Log Indication for Display of the PMU/PDC Connection

9.10.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device

You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance on
the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 9-21). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical slot
position of the communication module in question.

1638 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

[scdevpmu-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-21 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display

You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 9-22).

[sccompmu, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-22 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1639
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

9.10.8 Application and Setting Notes

Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as protocol for the GPS clock, see the
following figure. With other settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchron-
ized.

[sc_setting time source_2014-09-09, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-23 Setting Time Synchronization

To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.

Parameter: Mode

• Default setting (_:10621:1) Mode = on


Activate and deactivate the PMU or switch to Test mode via the parameter Mode. The possible setting values
are on, off and test. In Test mode, the PMU data is marked as invalid.

Parameter: Reporting rate

• Default setting (_:10621:102) Reporting rate = 10 frames/s


With the parameter Reporting rate, you specify the number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to
the PDC per second.

NOTE

i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set.

1640 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

Parameter: Only positive sequence

• Default setting (_:10621:103) Only positive sequence = no


With the parameter Only positive sequence, you set whether the positive-sequence system is to be
transmitted instead of 3 individual synchrophasors in the case of 3-phase measuring points. The setting you
make here is then valid for all PMUs with 3-phase measuring points.

Parameter: Class

• Default setting (_:10621:101) Class = Class P


With the setting Class, you set which performance class is used for the calculation of the measured values.
Class P is the standard case for PMUs. In this case, filters are used that are suitable for a short response time
and therefore are well suited for recording dynamic processes. Class M is conceived for applications that are
unfavorably affected by alias effects and in which short response times are not relevant.

Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.

9.10.9 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Func. settings
_:10621:1 Func. settings:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:10621:101 Func. settings:Class • Class P Class P
• Class M
_:10621:102 Func. settings:Reporting • 1 frame/s 10 frames/s
rate • 5 frames/s
• 6 frames/s
• 10 frames/s
• 12 frames/s
• 15 frames/s
• 20 frames/s
• 25 frames/s
• 30 frames/s
• 50 frames/s
• 60 frames/s
• 100 frames/s
• 120 frames/s
_:10621:103 Func. settings:Only posi- • no no
tive sequence • yes
_:10621:104 Func. settings:Port • port F results from the
• port E plug-in module
• port P position
• port N
_:10621:105 Func. settings:Custom- • 0 false
ized phasor names • 1
Meas.point V-1ph
_:10621:130 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:131 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1641
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Meas.point V-1ph
_:10621:133 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:134 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point I-1ph
_:10621:136 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:137 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point I-1ph
_:10621:139 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:140 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point V-3ph
_:10621:106 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:107 Func. settings:Phasor 1 Freely editable text
_:10621:108 Func. settings:Phasor 2 Freely editable text
_:10621:109 Func. settings:Phasor 3 Freely editable text
_:10621:111 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point V-3ph
_:10621:112 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:113 Func. settings:Phasor 1 Freely editable text
_:10621:114 Func. settings:Phasor 2 Freely editable text
_:10621:115 Func. settings:Phasor 3 Freely editable text
_:10621:117 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point I-3ph
_:10621:118 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:119 Func. settings:Phasor 1 Freely editable text
_:10621:120 Func. settings:Phasor 2 Freely editable text
_:10621:121 Func. settings:Phasor 3 Freely editable text
_:10621:123 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point I-3ph
_:10621:124 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:125 Func. settings:Phasor 1 Freely editable text
_:10621:126 Func. settings:Phasor 2 Freely editable text
_:10621:127 Func. settings:Phasor 3 Freely editable text
_:10621:129 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text

9.10.10 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:10621:52 Func. settings:Behavior ENS O
_:10621:53 Func. settings:Health ENS O

1642 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers

9.11 Measuring Transducers

9.11.1 Overview of Functions

Measuring transducers with an input rated at 20 mA can be used in the devices. 4 such inputs are available as
module ANAI-CA-4EL, which can be plugged into a communication module slot (for instance, port E or F). Up
to 4 such modules can be plugged in. Typically, slowly changing process variable such as temperature or gas
pressure are recorded with such 20-mA measured values and reported to the substation automation tech-
nology.

9.11.2 Structure of the Function

The measuring-transducer blocks are embedded in the Analog units function group and contain input and
output channels that are configurable independently of each other.

[dwstrumu-050313-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-24 Structure/Embedding of the Function

9.11.3 Function Description

The 20-mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If the parameter Range active is not activated (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of
-20 mA to +20 mA. The following figure shows an example.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1643
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers

[dwklbsp1-120124-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-25 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)

In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius and the measured value
20 mA a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius. Thus, Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100 are entered.
The resolution (decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolu-
tion = 0.1.

[sctransd-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-26 Settings for Example 1

If a value smaller than -24 mA or larger than +24 mA is applied to the measuring-transducer input, the meas-
ured value is marked as invalid. If the parameter Range active is activated, the 2 additional parameters
Upper limit and Lower limit appear. Both limiting values indicate the input currents in mA, for which
the value set by the Conversion factor (Upper limit) and the value 0 (Lower limit) of the calcu-
lated measurand are valid (see following figure).

1644 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers

[dwklbsp2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-27 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 2)

In this example, Range active is selected. The Upper limit is at 15 mA, the Lower limit is at 5 mA
and the Conversion factor remains at 100. The total results in a characteristic curve as shown in the
following figure, taking into account all possible valid measured values from -24 mA to +24 mA. The param-
eter Upper limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value
in the Upper limit setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if
the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.

[dwklges2-120124-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-28 Total Characteristic Curve in Example 2

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1645
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers

[sctrans2-210415, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-29 Settings for Example 2

Each measuring transducer makes available the scaled measured value in the information matrix (these are
the temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The measuring-transducer values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.

9.11.4 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Unit

• Recommended setting value (_:103) Unit = °C


You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.

Parameter: Conversion factor


The (_:104) Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring trans-
ducer.

Parameter: Resolution

• Default setting (_:108) Resolution = 0.1


The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution.

Parameter: Range active

• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false


If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA.
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor appear.

Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor

• Default setting(_:105) Upper limit = 20000 mA

• Default setting (_:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100

• Default setting(_:106) Lower limit = 4000 mA

• Default setting (_:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100


If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the

1646 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers

calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting.

9.11.5 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


MT in #
_:101 MT in #:Meas. transduc. • Voltage input Current input
I/O type • Current input
• Voltage output
• Current output
• Temperature input
_:103 MT in #:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1647
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


_:108 MT in #:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

9.11.6 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
MT in #
_:301 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:302 MT in #:TD direct MV MV O

1648 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.1 Overview of Functions

The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function:


• Records the wear of circuit breakers
• Allows maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when their actual degree of wear makes it
necessary

• Sends a warning signal when the wear of a circuit breaker reaches a specified degree

• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time


Savings on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main benefits this functionality offers.

9.12.2 Structure of the Function

The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
The function offers 4 independent operating stages with different measuring methods:
• ΣIx-method stage
Sum of tripping current powers

• 2P-method stage
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles

• I2t-method stage
Sum of all squared fault-current integrals

• Supv.CB make time stage


Supervision of the circuit-breaker make time
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 ΣIx-method stage. A maximum of 1 ΣIx-method
stage, 1 2P-method stage, 1 I2t-method stage, and 1 Supv.CB make time stage can be operated simultane-
ously within this function.
The general functionality is available across stages and provides a uniform start criterion for the stages.

[DwCBWear, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-30 Structure/Embedding of the Function

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1649
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.3 General Functionality

9.12.3.1 Description

Logic
As the wear on the circuit breaker depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching
action, including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is important. The following general
functionality provides starting and further timing information to the different stages (methods).
The general functionality operates phase-selectively. The following figure shows the logic of the functionality
across stages.

[LoCBWear, 3, en_US]

Figure 9-31 Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Func-
tion

Start Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function


The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function starts when any of the following criteria is fulfilled:
• Internal protection-function tripping signal from the function block Trip logic is received

• Open command signal from the internal Control function is received.

• Binary input signal >Start calculation is initiated, for example, from external.

1650 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

• Closed position signal of circuit breaker is going


This signal is derived form the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. In this way, opening the circuit-breaker
manually is detected.

Logic Input Signals for Stages


As soon as the start criterion has been fulfilled, the timers of the parameterized opening time and break time
are started. With the parameter CB opening time, the time when the circuit-breaker pole begins to open is
defined. With the parameter CB break time, the time of the pole being open including the arc extinction is
defined. The following figure shows the relationship between these circuit-breaker times.

[DwCBTime, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-32 Circuit-Breaker Times

In order to prevent an incorrect calculation in case of a circuit-breaker failure, the parameter Current
thresh. CB open is used to verify whether the current actually returns to 0 after 2 additional cycles. Funda-
mental components are used for comparing the threshold values. When the current criterion fulfills the
requirement of the phase-selective logic release, the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are
initiated.

End Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function


After calculation and evaluation have been completed, the end criterion of the circuit-breaker maintenance is
fulfilled. The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function is ready for a new initiation.

9.12.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: CB opening time

• Default setting value (_:2311:101) CB opening time = 0.065 s


You use the CB opening time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker until the start of opening of switching poles.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 9-32.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1651
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

Parameter: CB break time

• Default setting (_:2311:102) CB break time = 0.080 s


You use the CB break time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker to the instant of arc extinction (and switching pole open).
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 9-32.

Parameter: CB make time

• Default setting (_:2311:103) CB make time = 0.080 s


With the parameter CB make time, you define the typical time interval between the activation of the closing
procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows.
You can find more information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.

9.12.3.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


General
_:2311:101 General:CB opening time 0.001 s to 0.500 s 0.065 s
_:2311:102 General:CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s
_:2311:103 General:CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s

9.12.3.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calculation SPS I

1652 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.4 ΣI*-Method Stage

9.12.4.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[LoCBWIxS, 3, en_US]

Figure 9-33 Logic of the ΣIx-Method Stage

Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value


RMS values of the fundamental components are stored for each phase in a buffer during the time between the
start criterion and the pole-opening-starts criterion. With the coming pole-opening-starts criterion, the latest
value in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh. CB
open. The 20 ms prior value is used as tripping/opening current for further calculation.
If no value within the buffer is above the setting value, this circuit-breaker opening affects only the mechan-
ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1653
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

[LoCBWIxF, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-34 Logic of the Determination of the Tripping Current Value

(1) Current-flow criterion fulfilled


(2) 20 ms prior value

Calculation of the Wear


If the ΣIx-method stage receives the logic release signal, the determined tripping current is used in the calcula-
tion of wear. The calculation results are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣIx method as
follows, with phase A as example.

[FoCBWIxA-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Where:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-
breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x

Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the ∑Ix method

m Total number of switching cycles

The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according to
the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).

Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning


If the summated ΣIx value of any phase is greater than the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.

1654 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Exponent

• Default setting (_:11371:101) Exponent = 2.0

You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:11371:102) Threshold = 10 000.00


You use the parameter Threshold to define the threshold of the statistic value.
The relation of the tripping current powers to the exponentiated rated normal current Irated allows the limiting
value of the ΣIx method to correspond to the maximum number of make-break operations. For a circuit
breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the maximum number of make-break operations can be
entered directly as limiting value.

9.12.4.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


ΣIx-method
_:11371:1 ΣIx-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11371:101 ΣIx-method:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:11371:102 ΣIx-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000

9.12.4.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
ΣIx-method
_:11371:54 ΣIx-method:Inactive SPS O
_:11371:52 ΣIx-method:Behavior ENS O
_:11371:53 ΣIx-method:Health ENS O
_:11371:301 ΣIx-method:ΣIx A BCR O
_:11371:302 ΣIx-method:ΣIx B BCR O
_:11371:303 ΣIx-method:ΣIx C BCR O
_:11371:304 ΣIx-method:Warning ACT O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1655
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.5 2P-Method Stage

9.12.5.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[LoCBW2PS, 2, en_US]

Figure 9-35 Logic of the 2P-Method Stage

Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value


For the description to determine the tripping/opening current value, refer to chapter 9.12.4.1 Description.

Calculation of Remaining Switching Cycles


A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the circuit-breaker manufacturer illustrates the relationship of
permitted switching cycles and the tripping/opening current, see the following figure. According to the
example, this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA.
2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current. Point P1
is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated. Point P2 is deter-

1656 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associated
values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at Ir,
Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.

[DwCBWOpC, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-36 Diagram of Switching Cycles for the 2P Method

As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:

[FoCBW2P1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles

The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1657
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

NOTE

i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.

[DwCBWSlo, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-37 Value Limitation of Slope Coefficient

(1) Applied function from m < -4


(2) Parameterized function with m = -4.48
(3) Parameterized function with m = -1.77

If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation changes
the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:

[FoCBW2P2-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

1658 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
Endur.i Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith
switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current

EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:

[FoCBW2P3-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.

Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning


If the residual switching cycles of any phase lie below the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is gener-
ated.

9.12.5.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Switching cycles at Ir

• Default setting (_:101) Switching cycles at Ir = 10 000


You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated normal current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.

Parameter: Rated short-circ.cur. Isc

• Default setting (_:102) Rated short-circ.cur. Isc = 25 000 A


You use the Rated short-circ.cur. Isc parameter to define the rated short-circuit breaking current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.

Parameter: Switching cycles at Isc

• Default setting (_:103) Switching cycles at Isc = 50


You use the Switching cycles at Isc parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated short-circuit breaking current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1659
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:104) Threshold = 1000


You use the Threshold parameter to define the threshold of residual switching cycles with rated normal
current. A warning signal is generated when the statistic is less than the Threshold.

Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the Threshold parameter. Assuming a circuit breaker with the
same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the Threshold value based on the following calcu-
lation:

[FoCBW2P4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

9.12.5.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


2P-method
_:1 2P-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 2P-method:Switching 100 to 1000000 10000
cycles at Ir
_:102 2P-method:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:103 2P-method:Switching 1 to 1000 50
cycles at Isc
_:104 2P-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 100

9.12.5.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
2P-method
_:54 2P-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2P-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 2P-method:Health ENS O
_:301 2P-method:Endur.A INS O
_:302 2P-method:Endur.B INS O
_:303 2P-method:Endur.C INS O
_:304 2P-method:Warning ACT O

1660 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.6 I2t-Method Stage

9.12.6.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[LoCBWI2t, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-38 Logic of the I2t-Method Stage

Calculation of the Wear


The I2t method evaluates the wear of a circuit breaker based the sampled measuring values of the phase
currents during the arc time. The duration of the arc time is defined by the difference between the 2 settings
of parameters CB break time and CB opening time (see also Figure 9-32). The stage determines the
ending point of the arc time by searching backward the zero-crossing point of the phase currents after it
receives the logic release signal. Then, the squared fault currents during the arc time are integrated phase-

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1661
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in
the following formula, with phase A as example.

[FoCBWI2T-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A

The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.

Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning


If the statistic value of any phase lies above the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is generated.

9.12.6.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Threshold

• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 10 000.00 I/Ir*s


You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured
values of the phase currents.

9.12.6.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


I2t-method
_:1 I2t-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 I2t-method:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/Ir*s 10000.00 I/Ir*s

9.12.6.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
I2t-method
_:54 I2t-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I2t-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I2t-method:Health ENS O
_:301 I2t-method:ΣI²t A BCR O
_:302 I2t-method:ΣI²t B BCR O
_:303 I2t-method:ΣI²t C BCR O
_:304 I2t-method:Warning ACT O

1662 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.7 Supervision CB Make Time Stage

9.12.7.1 Description

Logic of the Stage

[Lo_sup-cb-make-time, 1, en_US]

Figure 9-39 Logic of the Supv.CB Make Time Stage

Operating Mode
The stage for the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time calculates the time between the circuit-breaker
closing command and the point in time when the current from at least one phase exceeds the
Oper.current threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the param-
eter CB make time, the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked
with the quality invalid.
If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the param-
eter Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded, the corresponding outputs Warning 1 and Warning 2 are activated for 100 ms. These
can be routed in the log.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1663
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.7.2 Application and Setting Notes

Parameter: Level of warning 1

• Default setting (_:101) Level of warning 1 = 5 %


With the parameter Level of warning 1, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 1 is set. The
output Warning 1 then drops out after 100 ms.

Parameter: Level of warning 2

• Default setting (_:102) Level of warning 2 = 10 %


With the parameter Level of warning 2, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 2 is set. The
output Warning 2 then drops out after 100 ms.

Parameter: Oper.current threshold

• Default setting (_:103) Oper.current threshold = 0.100 A


With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define the current threshold. If the measured value
exceeds this threshold, the measured value is detected as flowing operating current. As soon as an operating
current flows, the end of the time interval Make time is detected.

Parameter: Delay correction time

• Default setting (_:104) Delay correction time = 0.000 s


With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted from
the Make time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for example,
relay residual times, if necessary.

9.12.7.3 Settings

Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting


Supv.CB mak.t.
_:1 Supv.CB mak.t.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning 1
_:102 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 10 %
warning 2
_:103 Supv.CB 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
mak.t.:Oper.current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
threshold
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:104 Supv.CB mak.t.:Delay -0.050 s to 0.050 s 0.000 s
correction time

1664 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring

9.12.7.4 Information List

No. Information Data Class Type


(Type)
Supv.CB mak.t.
_:54 Supv.CB mak.t.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv.CB mak.t.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv.CB mak.t.:Health ENS O
_:301 Supv.CB mak.t.:Make time MV O
_:302 Supv.CB mak.t.:Warning 1 SPS O
_:303 Supv.CB mak.t.:Warning 2 SPS O

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1665
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
1666 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
10 Functional Tests

10.1 General Notes 1668


10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) 1669
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication 1670
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection 1672
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displacement 1676
Voltage
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1677
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test 1680
10.8 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test 1684
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection 1685
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision 1686
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test 1687
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal 1688
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual 1689
Voltage
10.14 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems 1691
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function 1692
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control 1696

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1667
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes

10.1 General Notes


Various tests have to be performed for commissioning to warrant the correct function of the device.
For tests using secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are locked in and trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise indicated.
Secondary tests can never replace primary tests because they cannot include connection faults. They provide a
theoretical check of the setting values only.
Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection
systems, with the operation of the system, and with safety regulations and provisions (switching, grounding,
etc.).
Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning. The described tests require that these
be capable of being performed safely. They were not conceived for operational checks.

1668 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection)

10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage


Connection)
The proper connection of the current and voltage transformer is checked with load current over the line to be
protected. For this, the line must be switched on. A load current of at least 0.1 Irated has to flow over the line; it
should be ohmic to ohmic inductive. The direction of the load current has to be known. In case of doubt,
meshed and ring systems should be unraveled. The line remains switched on the for the duration of the meas-
urements.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured value. First make sure that the power
measured values correspond to the power direction. Normally, it can be assumed that the forward direction
(measuring direction) goes from the busbar toward the line.
Using the power measured values at the device or DIGSI 5, make sure that it corresponds to the power direc-
tion:
• P is positive if the active power flows in the line or protected object.
• P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.

• Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object.

• Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line . The current-
transformer neutral point then points in the direction of the protected object (for example line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1669
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication

10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication

10.3.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication

Checking the Protection-Data Communication


If the devices are connected to one another via the protection interface and switched on, they contact each
other automatically. If, for example, device 1 recognizes device 2, the successful connection is indicated (see
next figure). Accordingly, each device signals to all devices that aProtection-data communication is available.

[scprotec, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-1 Connection Establishment in DIGSI 5

Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
² Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication valid in DIGSI
5 (see Figure 10-1).
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication invalid (see
Figure 10-1).
In Figure 10-2 there is no protection-data communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protec-
tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. The transmission of protection data is interrupted and
differential protection is ineffective. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protection
interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.

1670 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication

[scprotco-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-2 Protection-Data CommunicationDeactivated

10.3.2 Directional Test

In the case of protection interfaces of type 1 and type 2, the complex phasors of the voltage and current meas-
uring point are exchanged between devices of one communication topology in order to be able to carry out a
directional test during commissioning, for example. DIGSI 5 depicts this in the form of a phasor diagram. You
can only route the measuring point to the protection interface. For 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts, a measuring
point can therefore be transferred and checked optionally. You can also check and test the 2nd measuring
point by rerouting. Furthermore, communication with DIGSI 5 can take place via the protection interface to
other devices of the constellation. For this purpose, the protection-interface connection is interrupted and
DIGSI 5 uses this connection for communication with the remote device.
² After completing the remote connection by DIGSI 5, the system switches back over to protection commu-
nication.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1671
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection

10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection


The line differential protection offers 2 types of tests:
• Test of the differential protection in a local device
• Test of the entire differential protection in all devices
You can test the Line differential protection function only locally on a device. You control the test mode with
the controllable (_:2311:309) Test local device. If you select this operating mode, the Line differen-
tial protection becomes ineffective in all the other devices of the device combination. In the device to be
tested locally, the Line differential protection remains effective. The locally installed and measured current is
seen as differential current. Thereby, you can check the tripping behavior on the local device. Note, that the
operate indications from the Line differential protection do not lead to the control of the device relay.
With the (_:2311:308) Test all devices test mode, you can check the Line differential protection
function with all the device of the devices combination. You can check the reaction of the Line differential
protection to parameter changes before actual operation. In the DIGSI 5, you can check the actual operating
point in the differential-protection characteristic curve (see Figure 10-9).
In both test modes, the device relays are not operated. If the device relays are to be operated, you must set
this as follows in DIGSI or on the device:
• In DIGSI 5 under Settings → Device settings → Test support.
Set a check mark for parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test.

• On the device, under Settings → General → Test support → (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under
test
For both test modes, all indications are marked with a test bit.

Test of the Differential Protection in a Local Device


You can switch the test of the local differential protection function on or off in the following way:
• Via the operating dialog in DIGSI (online)

• Via the on-site operation panel

• Via the binary inputs >Test local device on and >Test local device off

[lo Ldiff test device local, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-3 Logic Diagram for Testing the Local Device

The indications Ctrl:Test local device or BI: Test local device show in which way the test was
switched on. If a device test was initiated by DIGSI or via the communication interface, then the indication(_:
2311:307) Ctrl:Test local device is issued.
If the test is activated, the local differential protection function operates in test mode. This is signaled via the
indications Test local device act. as well as Behavior (I-DIFF test) and Behavior (I-DIFF fast test).
The differential protection functions in the other devices become inactive and report this state with the indica-
tions Inactive and Test remote device.
You can activate the operating mode manually in the following way:
• DIGSI: Online access → Interface → Device → Device information
• On-site operation panel: Main menu → Device functions → Line 1 → Line differential protection

1672 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection

With a test switch, you can activate the binary inputs and switch over the current inputs of the protection
device to a current generator.
The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs.

[loextta1-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-4 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device

If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Test local device on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Test local device off as L (active without voltage).

[loextta2-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-5 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device

Test of the Entire Differential Protection in All Devices


You can switch the test of the entire differential protection function in all devices on or off in the following
way:
• Via the operating dialog in DIGSI (online)
• Via the on-site operation panel

• Via the binary inputs >Test all devices on and >Test all devices offl:

[lo Ldiff test all devices, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-6 Logic Diagram for the Test of All Devices

The indications Ctrl: Test all devices or BI: Test all devices show in which way the test was
started. If the test is activated, the differential protection function in all devices operates in test mode. This is
signaled via the indications Test all devices activ and Behavior (I-DIFF test) and Behavior (I-DIFF
fast test). In this state, the differential protection may be tested.

NOTE

i The test of all devices cannot be set and will be rejected if the local differential protection functions are
already logged off.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1673
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection

You can activate the operating mode manually in the following way:
• DIGSI: Online access → Interface → Device → Device information
• On-site operation panel: Main menu → Device functions → Line 1 → Line differential protection
The following diagrams show possible variants of activation of the test-operation type through control of
binary inputs.

[loextta3-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-7 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices

If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Test all devices on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Test all devices off as L (active without voltage).

[loextta4-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-8 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices

Checking the Differential and Restraint Current


You can check the differential and restraint current directly on the device or by means of DIGSI 5.
In order to find the differential and restraint current on the device, go to Operational measured values →
Measurements → Line 1 → Functional measured values → Differential protection.
When using the DIGSI 5 to check the differential and restraint current, the connection with the device must be
established first. To find the operational measured values of the line differential protection, go to Name of
device → Measurements → Line 1. While in the working area, the operational measured values of the func-
tion can be found under Functional measured values → Aligning differential protection.
In DIGSI 5 the operating points (OP) derived from the differential and restraint current can also be checked in
the graphic display of the differential protection characteristic curve. In order to find the differential protection
characteristic curve in DIGSI 5, go to the project tree Online device (Name of device) → Test Suite → Protec-
tion functions → Line 1 → Line differential protection. The operating points derived from the differential
current and the restraint current are graphically displayed in the differential protection characteristic curve
(see the following figure).

1674 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection

[dwueidif-191113-01, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-9 Characteristic Curve of the Differential Protection

To ensure reliable operation of the line differential protection, the operating point must be located inside the
working area and clearly below the tripping lines.
If the differential current monitoring function is tripped or the operating point lies within the tripping area,
proceed as follows:
• Check the pickup value for stage I-DIFF.
• Check the polarity of the current transformer.

• Verify that the differential current is generated by the primary system. Did you consider the charging
current? It will be depicted as a permanent differential current.
If these were not the causes of the differential current, the differential current can be generated by asyn-
chronous communication networks. Such asynchronicity can be created by coupling larger communica-
tion networks.
Another cause of the differential current could be unbalances in the runtimes for the protection commu-
nication that have always existed but not been noticed. This means that the transmission times for the
protection data back and forth are different, as a result of which the measured values received cannot be
synchronized perfectly. Hence, a differential current that might activate the operate function during
increased current flow will be calculated.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1675
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displacement Voltage

10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence


Voltage/Displacement Voltage
Checking Disturbance-Voltage Suppression in the Load Resistor with a System Ground Fault

! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.

² With the primary system de-energized and grounded, insert a 1-pole ground fault bridge on the high-
voltage side of the unit transformer.

! CAUTION
If there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and simultaneously a grounding on the high-
voltage side, do not perform the test.
Material can be damaged during the test if there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and
simultaneously a grounding on the high-voltage side.
² Neutral grounding at the transformer must be interrupted during the test.

² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to 30 % of the rated machine voltage.
² Read the zero-sequence voltage V0, measured value from the operational measured values.

² Extrapolate the zero-sequence voltage to 100 % of the machine voltage (V0, fault).

² Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value.
If the result is less than 0.5, the safety margin is sufficient. If the fault voltage is lower, you can increase the
sensitivity of the protection function.

Example:
V0, meas. = 0.75 V
Vthreshold value = 5.68 V
V0, fault = 0.75 V * 100 % / 30 % = 2.5 V
Safety margin = 2.5 V / 5.68 V = 0.44
The calculated safety margin of 0.44 is sufficient because it is below 0.5.
² Shut the machine down and de-excite it. Remove the ground-fault bridge.
² Restore neutral-point grounding if you require grounded operation of the neutral on the high-voltage
side of the unit transformer.
When using the function for startup ground-fault protection on a busbar connection, carry out the same check
as for the unit connection, but only the part Test during machine ground fault.

1676 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure


Protection
Integration of the Protection Function into the Station
The integration of the protection function into the station must be tested in the real-life application. Because
of the multitude of possible applications and possible system configurations, the required tests cannot be
described here in detail.

NOTE

i Always keep in mind the local conditions, the station plans, and protection plans.

NOTE

i Siemens recommends isolating the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both ends before starting the
tests. Line disconnector switches and busbar disconnector switches must be open so that the circuit
breaker can be operated without risk.

General Precautions

! CAUTION
Tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder cause a trip command to the output to the adjacent (busbar)
circuit breakers.
Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
² In a first step, interrupt the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) circuit breakers, for example, by
disconnection of the corresponding control voltages.

For testing the circuit-breaker failure protection, it must be ensured that the protection (external protection
device or device-internal protection functions) cannot operate the circuit breaker. The corresponding trip
command must be interrupted.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it can also contain points, which have to be ignored
in the current application.

Test Modes
The device and the function can be switched to test mode. These test modes support the test of the function
in different ways:
Test Modes Explanation
Device in test mode This operating mode is relevant for the following tests:
1. Approach of current thresholds in the case of an
external start: Supervision of the binary input signals in
the case of an external start is disabled. This setting allows
a static activation of the starting signals in order to
approach the current threshold.
2. Check whether the issued trip commands actuate the
corresponding switches, because the device contacts are
also actuated in the device test mode.
CBFP function in test mode (device is NOT in test This operating mode is important for function tests in
mode) which the generated operate indications are NOT
supposed to actuate the binary outputs.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1677
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

NOTE

i When the function or device is in test mode, all indications are given a test bit.

NOTE

i In the mode Device in test mode, the operate indications generated by the function operate the binary
outputs.

The function must also be tested in its normal, switched-on condition.


Consider the following in this case:
² The device contacts are actuated.
² Binary input signal supervision (in the case of an external start) is enabled and blocks the function.
² All indications generated are generated without test bit.

Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts


When circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, they make an essential contribution to the
reliability of the circuit-breaker failure protection, provided that their settings are set accordingly.
² Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked.

Internal Starting Conditions (Trip Command from Internal Protection Function)


The internal start can be tested by means of tripping a protection function, for example, the main protection
function of the device.
² Check how the settings of the circuit-breaker failure protection are set. Refer also to the chapter Applica-
tion and Setting Notes.
² For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
² Generate the trip for the protection function. This can be generated within the device by a test sequence
(see description in the Operating manual) or by creating corresponding secondary test values.
² The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.

External Starting Conditions (Trip Command from External Protection Function)


If external protection devices are also able to start the circuit-breaker failure protection, the external starting
conditions require checking.
² Check how the settings of the circuit-breaker failure protection are set.
Refer also to the chapter Application and Setting Notes.
² For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
² Activate the binary input or inputs to which the start signal and possibly also the release signal for the
CBFP function are routed. This can be done in 2 ways:
– 1) Via internal test sequences
– 2) By controlling the binary input or inputs via an auxiliary voltage
² Check the start input signal, and if available, check the enable input signal in the spontaneous or fault
messages.
² Check the pickup indication in spontaneous or fault indications.
² The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.

1678 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Start by Trip Command from the External Protection


² Check the static and - in case of 2-channel operation - also the dynamic supervision of the binary input
signals. For this purpose, induce pickup of the supervision and check the supervision indications and the
ready signal in the event log buffer.

Start by Trip Command from the External Protection without Current Flow
² If start is possible without current flow: (see Start by trip command of the external protection).

Repetition of the Local Tripping (T1)


² Make sure that the trip repeat signal controls a 2nd circuit (2nd coil) for switching off the circuit breaker.

Backup Tripping in the Case of a Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2)


For tests in the station, it is important to check that the distribution of trip commands to the adjacent circuit
breakers in the case of a circuit-breaker failure is correct. The adjacent circuit breakers are all circuit breakers,
which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the short-circuit current if the feeder circuit breaker
fails. They are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which
the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers depends
largely on the system topology.
² With multiple busbars, the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked.
The test has to check for every busbar section that, in case of a failure of the feeder circuit breaker under
observation, only those circuit breakers which are connected to the same busbar section are tripped.

Backup Tripping on Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2), Tripping of the Opposite End


If the trip command of the circuit-breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit breaker at the opposite
end of the tested feeder, the communication channel for this remote trip has to be tested as well.
² It is practical to test the communication channel for the remote trip while transmitting other signals in
accordance with 10.3.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication.

Termination
² All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, such as special switch positions, interrupted
trip commands, changes to setting values, or individually switched off protection functions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1679
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test

10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test


The Circuit-breaker test function enables you to easily perform a complete test of the trip circuit, the closing
circuit, and the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker can be opened for 1-poles, you can perform the test sepa-
rately for each circuit-breaker pole.
The circuit-breaker test carries out an automatic open-closed cycle or an open-only cycle of the circuit breaker
during operation. In addition, you can take a current-flow criterion into consideration for the test. The current-
flow criterion causes the circuit-breaker test to be executed only if the current flow through the circuit breaker
is below the parameterizable threshold value.

NOTE

i If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected, a circuit breaker that has been opened may be
permanently closed.

The following test programs are available for you to carry out the circuit-breaker test. 1-pole tests are only
possible if the respective circuit breaker is capable of being opened on 1 pole.
No. Test Program
1 3-phase open/closed cycle
2 1-pole open/closed cycle A
3 1-pole open/closed cycle B
4 1-pole open/closed cycle C

Structure of the Function


The Circuit-breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers.

[dwcbch01-240217, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-10 Embedding of the Function

1680 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test

[dwzecbc1p2-161013, 2, en_US]

Figure 10-11 Structure of the Function

Test Procedure
The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit-breaker test can start:
² If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports the position of the breaker pole to the device via the binary
inputs of the signal Position, the test cycle is not initiated unless the circuit breaker is closed.
² If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact has not been routed, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is
closed.
² The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-closed cycle or an open-only cycle (indication >Ready).
² A protection function must not have been picked up in the circuit-breaker protection function group
responsible for the circuit breaker.

[scCBTest3p, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-12 Circuit-Breaker Test Parameters

Figure 10-13 shows the chronological sequence of an open-closed cycle as an example. If you have activated
the Open only option, the close command is not executed and the dead time not taken into consideration.
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is connected, the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi-
tion = open after the trip command is generated. When the indication Position = open is received, the
close command is transmitted during an open-closed cycle after a dead time (parameter (_:6151:101)
Dead time). If the feedback from the circuit-breaker positions is not received within the maximum transmis-
sion time (Dead time + 2 · Output time + 5 s), the circuit-breaker test is aborted and considered to be
failed. The proper functioning of the circuit breaker is monitored via the feedback on the circuit-breaker posi-
tions.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1681
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test

[dwcbch03-300913, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-13 Progress over Time of a Circuit-Breaker Test Cycle

With the Use current-flow criterion parameter, you can also specify that a circuit-breaker test is only
executed if the current flowing through the circuit breaker does not exceed a specific current threshold
(Current threshold parameter). Otherwise, the circuit-breaker test is not started.
² If the current-flow criterion is disabled, the current threshold is not evaluated. Then, the circuit-breaker
test is performed independent of the magnitude of current flowing through the circuit breaker.

NOTE

i The circuit-breaker test does not perform a synchrocheck even if the synchrocheck has been configured in
the protection-function groups for circuit breakers. This may cause stability problems in the system during a
3-pole interruption. Therefore, a 3-pole circuit-breaker test should be very short, or not performed at all
under load.

You can start the test program as follows:


• Via the device-control panel
• Via DIGSI

• Via communication protocols

• Via control commands, which you can also connect in the CFC
The following figure illustrates operation of the circuit-breaker test in DIGSI.

[sccb_1-3pol, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-14 Circuit-Breaker Test in the Test Suite in DIGSI

² Select the function in the project tree on the left in the online access.

1682 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test

² Start the desired test program in the upper portion of the working area.
² The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the working area. Additional informa-
tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit-breaker test is being performed can be read in
the operational log.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1683
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.8 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test

10.8 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test


Secondary Test
Check the function preferably by using transient files. You can create the files from a power system simulation
for the specific application.
To simplify the test, certain transient files in COMTRADE format are available via the download area. The files
contain simulations of out-of-step situations. These situations must be simulated for the protection function
by using suitable test equipment (such as CMC by Omicron). To check the proper behavior of the protection
function, it is recommended to route all relevant messages as a binary track to the fault record.
² Make use of the test options offered by the test equipment.
² Before starting the tests, check whether the test equipment generates the test signals correctly. The
delivered test signals must be impedance locus diagrams corresponding to the circles shown in
Figure 6-485.

Primary Test
² Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
² Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to the
current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
² Switch the protection function on.

1684 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection

10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection


General
² For the test, make sure that the test current reflects the typical inrush current.
² Perform the test with transient signals. These can be recorded inrush currents or simulated currents from
a transient system model.
² When using synthetic signals, observe the notes on the individual measuring principles.

Harmonic Analysis
² Superimpose on the fundamental-component current a test current of double frequency (2nd harmonic)
and test the pickup behavior with this.
² Cause a threshold value excess (internal pickup) for one of the protection functions that you want to
block.
- or -
² Apply a test current with a load current as lead (current step).
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.

CWA Process
² Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in all 3 phase
currents.
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1685
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision

10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision


General
² For the test, make sure that the switching threshold of the binary inputs is clearly below half the rated
value of the control voltage.

2 Binary Inputs
² Make sure that the binary inputs used are isolated.

1 Binary Input
² Make sure that, in the circuit of the 2nd circuit-breaker auxiliary contact, an equivalent resistance R is
connected.
² Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R.

1686 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test

10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test


Secondary Test
Check the function preferably by using transient files. You can create the files from a power system simulation
for the specific application.
To simplify the test, certain transient files in COMTRADE format are available from the download area. The files
contain simulations of power-swing situations. These situations must be simulated for the protection function
by using suitable test equipment (such as CMC by Omicron). To check the proper behavior of the protection
function, it is recommended to route all relevant indications as a binary track to the fault record.
² Make use of the other test options offered by the test equipment.
² Before starting the tests, check whether the test equipment generates the test signals correctly. As test
signal, the result must be impedance-locus diagrams which form circles.

Primary Test
² Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
² Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to the
current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
² Switch the protection function on.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1687
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal

10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal


² Check the phase sequence (direction of rotating field) at the device terminals. It must correspond to the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
² The output indication Phase sequence ABC or Phase sequence ACB displays the determined
phase sequence. This must correspond to the phase sequence that was set.
² You can also determine the phase sequence via the Symmetrical components measured values. If you
obtain negative-sequence system variables (V2, I2) and no positive-sequence system variables (V1, I1) with
symmetrical 3-phase infeed, the setting parameter Phase sequence does not correspond to the
connection.

1688 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence


Voltage/Residual Voltage
Checking the Stator Ground-Fault Protection with the Machine
You have to check whether the protection function and the protection ranges are functioning correctly. The
following tests are intended for the unit connection.
You can check the protection range by performing a test with a ground fault at the generator terminals. The
ground fault test in the power system enables you to verify the noise suppression of the load resistor.

Checking the Protection Range with a Machine Ground Fault

! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.

² Insert a 1-phase-to-ground jumper into the terminal circuit of the machine.


² Set the Mode parameter in the protection stage to test. This prevents the trip command from being
generated for the stage.
² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to approx. 20 % of the rated machine voltage.
² From the operational measured values, check the plausibility of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and the
input voltage at the connected input.
² Determine the protection range from the pickup voltage.
The following applies for the protection range S:

[foschzbe-130309-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Example: Measurement with secondary voltages


VNG: Generator voltage transformed to the transformer secondary side = 100 V
V0, pickup value: Measured zero-sequence voltage at pickup = 5.68 V
S: Resulting protection range = 90 %
² Check the messages in the message buffer. If the Detection of faulty phase parameter is set to
yes, check the display of the phase affected by the fault.
² Shut the machine down and remove the ground fault bridge.
² Set the Mode protection stage parameter to on.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1689
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

Checking Disturbance-Voltage Suppression in the Load Resistor with a System Ground Fault

! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.

² With the primary system de-energized and grounded, insert a 1-pole ground fault bridge on the high-
voltage side of the unit transformer.

! CAUTION
If there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and simultaneously a grounding on the high-
voltage side, do not perform the test.
Material can be damaged during the test if there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and
simultaneously a grounding on the high-voltage side.
² Neutral grounding at the transformer must be interrupted during the test.

² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to 30 % of the rated machine voltage.
² Read the zero-sequence voltage V0, measured value from the operational measured values.

² Extrapolate the zero-sequence voltage to 100 % of the machine voltage (V0, fault).

² Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value.
If the result is less than 0.5, the safety margin is sufficient. If the fault voltage is lower, you can increase the
sensitivity of the protection function.

EXAMPLE:
V0, meas. = 0.75 V
Vthreshold value = 5.68 V
V0, fault = 0.75 V * 100 % / 30 % = 2.5 V
Safety margin = 2.5 V / 5.68 V = 0.44
The calculated safety margin of 0.44 is sufficient because it is below 0.5.
² Shut the machine down and de-excite it. Remove the ground-fault bridge.
² Restore neutral-point grounding if you require grounded operation of the neutral on the high-voltage
side of the unit transformer.
When using the function for startup ground-fault protection on a busbar connection, carry out the same check
as for the unit connection, but only the part Test during machine ground fault.

1690 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.14 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems

10.14 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems


Primary Test
The primary test is used for the evaluation of the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the deter-
mination of the ground-fault direction.
For directional testing, the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function (67Ns) is configured and a
directional stage is switched on. For example, the directional 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement.
The most reliable test is the one with a primary ground fault. Proceed as follows:
² Isolate the line and ground it on both sides; on the farthest line end it must remain open during the
entire test.
² Place a 1-phase ground fault bridge on the line. For overhead lines, this can be done at an arbitrary loca-
tion, in any case behind the current transformer (as seen from the busbar of the feeder to be tested). For
cables, the grounding is done on the farthest end (sealing end).
² Remove the protective grounding from the line.
² Switch on the circuit breaker on the line to be tested.
² Check direction indicator (LED if routed).
² Check the indication (_:302) Ground fault in the ground-fault log or fault log with regard to its
direction. The indication (_:302) Ground fault forward must be logged as direction information.
If backward is determined as the direction, either with the current connections or the voltage connec-
tions, there is an inversion in the neutral path. For the display unknown, the ground current is probably
too low.
² Switch the line off and ground it.
This completes the test.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1691
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function

10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function


Measuring the Circuit-Breaker Make Time
Under asynchronous system conditions, the circuit-breaker make time must be measured and set correctly.
This achieves an exact parallel switching with a phase angle 0o. If switching occurs only in synchronous system
conditions, this section can be skipped.
The make time can be determined via the following 2 methods:
• By reading from a fault record (recommended method)
• With external timer
1. A simple option for determining the make time involves reading the time between the close command and
closure of the switch pole via the fault record. The time determined here is the real make time and not the
operating time of the circuit breaker. You do not have to add any further time.
Siemens recommends the following procedure:
² Establish a condition in which the circuit breaker can be closed without hazard.
² If V2 is switched through, activate the operating mode Close cmd. at V1< & V2> for the synchroni-
zation stage by setting to yes.
If V1 is switched through, activate the operating mode Close cmd. at V1> & V2<.
² Make sure that the fault recorder is turned on. Via a temporary CFC chart, link the signal Release
close cmd. of the active synchronization stage to the binary input signal >Manual start (of the
fault recorder). With the release of closure, a fault record of the parameterized duration is set up (the
default setting of 500 ms is more than adequate for this).
² Starting the synchronization stage. The device activates immediately.
² Read the fault record and determine the make time via SIGRA (see Figure 10-15).
Use the 2 cursors and the time-measuring function for this. Position the first cursor on the raising close
command. The occurrence of the 2nd voltage signals the closed power-switching poles. Place the 2nd
cursor on the raising 2nd voltage.
² Set the determined time with the CB make time parameter. Round off to the next lower adjustable
value. Proceed in the same way for all other sync stages.
² Set the parameter Close cmd. at V1< & V2> or parameter Close cmd. at V1< & V2< back to
its source value.
² Delete the CFC chart.

1692 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function

[scsyn001-170510-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-15 Measurement of the Circuit-Breaker Make Time

2. The configuration in Figure 10-16 is suitable for measuring the circuit-breaker operating time with an
external timer. Set the timer to the range 1 s or a tripping of 1 ms.
Connect the circuit breaker manually. The timer is started simultaneously by this. After the poles of the circuit
breaker close, the voltage VLine appears. The timer is then stopped.
If the timer is not stopped owing to an unfavorable closing moment, repeat the attempt.
Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts.

NOTE

i Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time. This exclusively depends in good
approximation on the binary output used for the close command. You can find the switching times for the
different binary outputs in the Technical data. Set the total time with the parameter CB make time.
Round off to the next lower adjustable value. Proceed in the same way for all other synchronization stages
used.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1693
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function

[dwsynae6-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-16 Measurement of the Circuit-Breaker Make Time

Checking the Measurement Chain


The measurement chain for the voltage measurement must be checked. As soon as one of the synchronization
stages to be used is closed, all the necessary functional measured values are calculated. The synchronization
stage, thus, does not have to be started for this check.
Proceed as follows when checking the measurement chain as a primary or secondary test:
a) As primary test
² Establish a synchronous state by closing the circuit breaker, if possible.
² Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
– The delta values must be 0.
– Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values
for the voltage.
– Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.

b) As secondary test
² Establish a synchronous state by applying synchronous voltage values at both measuring points.
² Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
– The delta values must be 0.
– Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values
for the voltage.
– Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.

Blind Switching Attempts when Used in Machines


Perform blind switching attempts when using the function in machines.
Requirement:
² You have checked the setting values again.
² The circuit breaker is switched off. The close command for the circuit breaker is interrupted (discon-
necting the close command). The system voltage is switched through for the measurement.

a) Attempt with asynchronous systems:


² Via manual control, set the generator to a speed slightly below the permitted frequency difference
according to the setting values Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 and Max. frequency diff.
f2<f1. The generator is excited to line voltage. You can read out the values in the operational measured
values.

1694 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function

² Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller. You can use a synchronoscope to trigger the start at synchronism, that is, at 12 o'clock. The
duration until the close command then corresponds to a cycle with the duration 1/Δf. At a frequency
difference of 0.1 Hz, the duration is thus 10 s.
² Insofar as permissible, perform this attempt several time for oversynchronous switching and subsynchro-
nous switching.
² The switching performance can be checked with an external recorder or the integrated fault recording
function. You have to start the fault recording explicitly.
² You can repeat the blind switching attempts at the limits of the permissible voltage difference.

b) Attempt with synchronous systems:


² Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller.
² Check the proper release for activation with the message log or via a fault record. You have to start the
fault recording explicitly. All activation conditions have to be fulfilled within the time Delay close
command.
If you observe the change between synchronous and asynchronous operation, raise the changeover
threshold f-threshold ASYN<->SYN slightly.

c) Attempt with synchrocheck:


² If you use this function in conjunction with the manual synchronization, check the proper release for
closure.
² Synchronize the generator manually. Start the synchronization stage externally via a binary input. Check
the proper release for closure with the indication log or via the fault record. You have to start the fault
recording explicitly.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1695
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

10.16.1 Secondary Tests

10.16.1.1 General
Secondary tests can never replace the primary tests described in the following (10.16.2 Primary Tests),
because you cannot exclude connection faults.
Secondary tests are used for the following purposes:
• Checking the setting values
• Checking the correct reaction of the protection function, limits, indications, blocking, and voltage control
functions

• Checking the engineering (for example, routing of the respective logic signals, display images with meas-
ured values and CFC logics)

• With parallel control check of the communication


Note the following information during the secondary tests:

NOTE

i For tests with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are connected and that the
trip commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted. Otherwise, the circuit breaker may be activated.

If the tap-changer position is not updated manually during the secondary test, you must deactivate the tap-
changer supervision. Otherwise, the voltage control is blocked after every switching procedure.

NOTE

i Once you have completed the secondary test, you must activate the tap-changer supervision again.

10.16.1.2 Checking the Transformer Tap Position

General
For this test, the transformer must be de-energized, that is, circuit breakers and disconnectors are switched
off/opened, protected against re-energizing and the maintenance grounding switch should be closed.

1696 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

During the functional test of the on-load tap changer, the most important setting parameters for the tap-
changer supervision such as Motor supervision time, Highest tap changer pos., and Maximum
output time must be checked and adjusted.

[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 10-17 Parameters of the Tap Changer

Tap-Position Display
You can route the current tap position as a position indication on a display page or into the operating indica-
tions. If no signal is present or the function is blocked, the device reports a position error. The display then
indicates an invalid tap position with --- (Figure 10-18). You can find information on which conditions lead to
an invalid tap position in the section Adjusting-Command Supervision, Page 1458.

[sc_osop_valid_position, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-18 Invalid Tap-Changer Position in the Device Display

Parameterize BCD Code


If the tap position of the tap changer is transmitted to the SIPROTEC 5 device via BCD code with prefix, then it
is sufficient to assign the binary inputs with the corresponding functions according to the routing. Corre-
sponding functions are for example:
• BCD1
• BCD2

• BCD4

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1697
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

• BCD8

• BCD10

• BCD20

• BCD40

• BCDminus

• Sliding contact
You can find a short introduction into parameter setting and routing of the binary inputs for the tap position in
chapter 7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Besides the tap-position display via BCD with prefix, the SIPROTEC 5 device offers the option to code the
tap position as follows:
• Binary
• 1-of-n

• BCD

• Table

• Gray Code

• IEC 61850 GOOSE indication (Type BSC)


Optionally, you can also use an mA signal or a resistance-coded tap-position display. An ANAI module must be
installed for the analog integration of the tap-position signal.

Checking the Tap Position


The active binary input is marked with a cross in the device menu under the entry Binary IO. Siemens recom-
mends driving through all positions of the tap changer completely, if possible, thereby testing the correct tap-
changer position indication once the parameterization of the tap position detection is finished and the tap-
position display is activated.
You can carry out the tap-position check from the on-site operation panel or from the DIGSI Online-Editor. If
you are using the DIGSI Online-Editor, set the switching authority of the device to Remote and the operating
mode of the voltage controller to Manual.

[sc_ibs_contr_func, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-19 DIGSI Online-Editor

1698 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

Checking Sliding Contact


The device can monitor the runtime of the motor drive. This function is used to identify failures of the motor-
drive mechanism during the switching procedure and to initiate actions (for example, blocking) if required. If
you want to use the motor supervision time, you must route the motor run signal (most significant binary
input) and set the motor runtime.
The maximum motor runtime can be calculated by measuring – during commissioning – how long the tap
changer needs from the time point of the incremental command until completion of the tap changing. The tap
changer needs approx. 7 s to 10 s for one tap-position change. Select the runtime to be 2 s to 3 s longer than
the measured time. This takes into account a tolerance for the aging of the tap changer. If the tap changer has
a run-through setting, select the motor lead time based on the run-through time of the switching tap (+ toler-
ance time).
If the tap-changer position is not manually updated during the secondary test, you must deactivate the tap-
changer supervision. Otherwise, the voltage control is blocked after every switching procedure.

NOTE

i Once you have completed the secondary test, you must activate the tap-changer supervision again.

10.16.1.3 Check of the Voltage-Control Function


The measured control deviation D results from the following formula:

[fo_ibs_regelab, 1, en_US]

where:
Vact-prim Actual voltage, primary
Vtarget-prim 90V V.contr.2w → Target voltage primary
Vrated 90V V.contr.2w → General:Rated voltage

If you set the 3-phase measuring point voltage to VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN, the
measured voltage primary Vact-prim results from the ratio of the voltage transformer parameters Rated
secondary voltage VCT-sec and Rated primary voltage VCT-prim .

[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt, 1, en_US]

This results in the secondary voltage Vact-sec to be fed in depending on the control deviation D to be achieved
with the connection type VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN / 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
being:

[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt_2, 1, en_US]

This results in the secondary voltage Vact-sec to be fed in depending on the control deviation D to be achieved
with the connection type VT connection = 3 ph-to-ph voltages being:

[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt_3, 1, en_US]

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1699
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

Table 10-1 Example Settings for the System Data

Parameters Value
Power system → VT 3-phase:Rated primary voltage VCT-prim 15 kV
Power system → VT 3-phase:Rated secondary voltage VCT-sec 110 kV
Voltage cont. 2w → General:Rated voltage Vrated 10.5 kV
Target voltage 1 Vtarget 11 kV

This results in the secondary voltage Vact-sec with a phase-to-ground connection being:

[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt_4, 1, en_US]

10.16.1.4 Further Tests

Control Deviation

• Check the control deviation D = 0 % at set point value infeed.

• Check the measured value of the control deviation D online in DIGSI or on the on-site operation panel of
the device.
Secondary infeed values for the example:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec = 46.6 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec = 46.6 V ⋅√3 = 80.7 V

Command Outputs

• Check the output of the Lower adjusting command after the parameterizable time T1.
With a set bandwidth B of 1 %, this results in the secondary pickup value:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec > 47.1 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec > 47.1 V ⋅√3 = 81.5 V
• Check the output of the Higher adjusting command after the parameterizable time T1.
With a set bandwidth B of 1 %, this results in the secondary pickup value:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec < 46.1 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec < 46.1 V ⋅√3 = 79.8 V
• Check the output of the Lower adjusting command after the parameterized time Fast step down T
delay.
For the set parameter Fast step down limit = 6 %, the following secondary pickup values result:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec > 49.3 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec > 49.3 V ⋅√3 = 85.3 V
• Check the output of the Higher adjusting command after the parameterized time Fast step up T
delay.
For the set parameter Fast step up limit = -6 %, the following secondary pickup values result:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec < 49.3 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec < 49.3 V ⋅√3 = 85.3 V

Blockings

• Check the undervoltage blocking V< Blocking.


For the set parameter V< Blocking = 8 kV, the following secondary pickup values result:

1700 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec < 58.7 V


Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec < 58.7 V ⋅√3 = 101.6 V
• Check the overcurrent blocking.

NOTE

i The overcurrent blocking works with the maximum current of all phases, for this reason, check the phases
A, B, and C separately.

Example

Parameters Value
Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated primary current ICT-prim 7500 A
Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current ICT-sec 1A
Voltage cont. 2w → General:Rated current Irated 5500 A

[fo_ibs_overcur_block, 1, en_US]

If you set the parameter I> Threshold to 150 %, this results in an infeed current secondary of Iact-sec > 1.1 A
for the example.

Line Compensation

• Check the Z Compensation.


The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a % at rated load. In
case of a voltage drop primary of 504 V across the line at rated current, according to the setting notes in
7.9.4.4 Line Compensation, this results in a setting value of 4.8 %.
The secondary current to be fed in at a load current for the 100 % load case results in:

[fo_ibs_load_current, 1, en_US]

where:
ICT-prim Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated primary current
ICT-sec Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current
Irated Voltage cont. 2w → General:Rated current

The secondary voltage to be fed in for the 100 % load case with a control deviation D [%] to be tested for the
voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground results in:

[fo_ibs_sec_volt, 1, en_US]

For the voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase, the reference must be multiplied with the factor √3.
For a control deviation of D = 0 % to be tested and a setting value Target voltage rising of 4.8 %, in
the example, for voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground, this results in a secondary infeed voltage
of:

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1701
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

[fo_ibs_sec_volt_values, 1, en_US]

The infeed current for the 100 % load case is Iact-sec = 0.733 A.
• Check the XandR compensation.
The control deviation results from the difference of the measured voltage Vact-prim and a calculated compen-
sated target voltage Vtarget-comp.

[fo_ibs_target_comp, 1, en_US]

The calculated compensated target voltage is calculated from a numerically determined voltage Vload at the
end of the line:
Vtarget-comp = (Vact-prim - Vload) + Vtarget
This numerically determined voltage Vload at the end of the line is determined form the parameters X line, R
line, the flowing current Iact-prim, and the rotor angle φ.
The measured voltage at the voltage controller results as follows from the dependency to the numerically
determined voltage Vload and the flowing current Iact-prim:

[fo_ibs_volt_prim_calcul, 1, en_US]

with IΔVI = Iact-prim ⋅ (cosφ ⋅ R + sinφ ⋅ X)


If you insert the target voltage Vtarget in the formula instead of Vload, for the resulting control deviation this
results in D = 0 %.
• Check whether the operational measured value ΔV has the value 0 via the on-site operation panel or in
DIGSI.
If you set the previous example values and if you set the values 0.10 Ω for parameter R line and 0.15 Ω
for the parameter X line, then this results in the following secondary infeed values at a rated load current of
5500 A and a cosφ = 0.707:
With a phase-to-ground connection

[fo_ibs_input_values_LE, 1, en_US]

with Iact-sec = 734 mA and φload = -45°


With a phase-to-phase connection

[fo_ibs_input_values_LL, 1, en_US]

with Iact-sec = 734 mA and φload = -75°

1702 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

10.16.1.5 Voltage-Control Function for Parallel Transformers

Checking the Settings of the Voltage Controller within a Group and of the GOOSE Communication

• For the functional test of Voltage cont.2w, route the indications Health, Remote parallel mode,
Parallel-operation error, and Auto Blocking to an LED.
• Check this routing.

• Route the GOOSE input indication Cmd. with feedback under


Voltage reg.2w → Parallel control → ParallelProxy on one display page.
The tap positions received from the other voltage controllers are shown under:
Voltage reg.2w → Parallel control → ParallelProxy
• Switch all affected voltage controllers to the parallel mode.

[sc_ibs_tap_changer_pos, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-20 Example of a User-Defined Display Page

If the indication Parallel-operation error is reported, the following causes are possible:
• Communication error

• Parallel-mode error - inconsistent setting Parallel mode

• Parameter Parallel-transfomer id inconsistent or identical for 2 voltage controllers

• Master error (number of Masters in the group ≠ 1), only with the Master-Follower method

• Measured value invalid (for example, with line compensation no current transformer assigned in the
remote voltage controller)

• Mode error (inconsistent test mode of the voltage controllers)


You can find the reason for the indication in the operational log of the indication Cause of par.op.
error.

NOTE

i If the indication Auto Blocking is reported and if the indication Parallel Auto Blocking is
reported in the ParallelProxy, the possible cause is that the remote voltage controller is blocked or the
Follower device is in the Manual in case of the Master-Follower method.

Checking Remote Measured Values


You can check the measured values received via GOOSE in the DIGSI-Online-Editor or on the on-site operation
panel of the device under the following path:
Main menu → Measured Values → Voltage cont.2w → Function values. → Parallel operat. → Parallel-
Proxy

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1703
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

[sc_ibs_func_value, 1, en_US]

Figure 10-21 Functional Measured Values in DIGSI

Checking the Voltage-Control Function for Parallel Transformers


First you must check the manual update of the transformer taps in the operating mode Manual. Proceed as
follows:
• Switch the Master device to the operating mode Manual.
• Switch the Follower devices to the operating mode Auto.

• On the Master device, start a Higher adjusting command for the tap changer.
The voltage controllers in Follower mode of the same group must also change to a higher tap once the new
tap-changer position is reached.
• Check the tap position of the Follower devices on the device display of the on-site operation panel.
• Repeat the test with a Lower adjusting command.

Checking the Voltage-Control Function of the Master-Follower Method

• Carry out the test items of the voltage-controller function in the chapter 10.16.1.1 General in the Master
device.

NOTE

i During this test, note that the measured control voltage Vact.m is averaged from the measured voltages
of all parallel voltage controllers and therefore the secondary voltage must be fed in for all voltage control-
lers.

Checking the Line Compensation


To check the Z Compensation (LDC-Z), proceed as follows:
The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a % at rated load.
Since the rated load current in the Master and Follower devices can be different, you must calculate the
parameter Target voltage rising separately for each voltage controller.
• First, based on the following ratio, determine the percentage of the primary load current of the line
compared with the rated current of a transformer k (k = 1, 2, …, 8).

1704 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

[fo_ibs_load_cur_perc, 1, en_US]

[fo_ibs_prim_load_voltage, 1, en_US]

The following calculation values result from the Example, Page 1516, which is shown in the setting notes in
the chapter Z Compensation.
Parameters Transformer T1 Transformer T2
Power system → 11 kV 11 kV
VT 3-phase:Rated primary voltage VCT-prim
Power system → 110 V 100 V
VT 3-phase:Rated secondary voltage VCT-sec
Power system → 1500 A 3000 A
CT 3-phase:Rated primary current ICT-prim
Power system → 1A 5A
CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current ICT-sec
Voltage cont. 2w → 10.5 kV 10.5 kV
General:Rated voltage Vrated
Voltage cont. 2w → 26 MVA 52 MVA
General:Rated app. power transf. Srated
Voltage cont. 2w → 1430 A 2859 A
General:Rated current Irated
Target voltage Vtarget 11 kV 11 kV
Target voltage rising 4.8% 9.6%

• Based on the following table check the input currents and voltages for each voltage controller:

Transformer T1 Transformer T2 Transformer T1 Master


Independent Independent Transformer T2 Follower
T2 = off T1 = off
(I2 = 0) (I1 = 0)
Input values, secondary
Isec 0.953 A 2.383 A 0.635 A 3.1833 A
Phase-to-ground Vsec 33.198 V 60.359 V 34.641 V 62.984 V
Phase-to-phase Vsec 57.501 V 104.54 V 60 V 109.1 V
Functional measured values
Vact 11.5 kV 11.5 kV 12.0 kV 12.0 kV
Iload 1430 A 1430 A 953 A 1910 A
Iload∑ - - 2860 A 2860 A
ΔVactual 0% 0% 0% 0%
Vtarget 11.5 kV 11.5 kV 12.0 kV 12.0 kV

You can find more information in chapter 7.9.4.4 Line Compensation.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1705
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

Checking the Voltage-Control Function with the Method of Minimizing the Circulating Reactive Current
The following secondary test is used to check the setting values. The current is fed into one voltage controller
respectively and this current has a phase angle of -90° to the voltage.
• Check also the functional measured values for the circulating reactive current for the voltage controllers
where no current is being fed in.
The following simplification results:
The current on one voltage controller is the total load current (Iload= Ik) and therefore the measured circulating
reactive current depends on the primary load current on a transformer:

[fo_ibs_ccm_trafo, 1, en_US]

where:

Total susceptance value

Xk Transformer reactance on transformer k

The control deviation DCRCk resulting from the circulating reactive current is determined in the voltage
controller numerically according to the following formula:

[fo_regelabwdcc, 1, en_US]

The primary current to be fed in at a desired control deviation DCRCk results as follows:

[fo_ibs_regelabwd_ccm, 1, en_US]

The current to be fed in is calculated from the following ratio, with the phase angle to voltage being ∠Iact-sec =
-90°

[fo_ibs_load_cur_prim, 1, en_US]

Example

Table 10-2 Example Values

Parameters Transformer T1 Transformer T2


Power system → 22 kV 11 kV
VT 3-phase:Rated primary voltage VCT-prim
Power system → 110 V 100 V
VT 3-phase:Rated secondary voltage VCT-sec

1706 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

Parameters Transformer T1 Transformer T2


Power system → 1500 A 3000 A
CT 3-phase:Rated primary current ICT-prim
Power system → 1A 5A
CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current ICT-sec
Voltage cont. 2w → 10.5 kV 10.5 kV
General:Rated voltage Vrated
Voltage cont. 2w → 26 MVA 52 MVA
General:Rated app. power transf. Srated
Voltage cont. 2w → 1430 A 2859 A
General:Rated current Irated
Target voltage Vtarget 11 kV 11 kV

For the transformer T1, with a desired control deviation of 1 % and the parameter Reactive I control
factor = 1, the primary current is as follows:

[fo_ibs_regelabwd_ccm_values, 1, en_US]

• Check the function values in all voltage controllers according to the following table:

Secondary Test Secondary Test


Infeed Transformer T1 Infeed Transformer T2
for D = 1 % for D = 1 %
Input values, secon- T1 T2 T1 T2
dary
Isec 0.09622 A 0A 0A 0.4041 A
-90° ph-gnd -90° ph-gnd
-150° ph-ph -150° ph-ph
Phase-to-ground Vsec 31.754 V 57.735 V 31.754 V 57.735 V
Phase-to-phase Vsec 55 V 100 V 55 V 100 V
Functional measured values
Vact 11.0 kV 11.0 kV 11.0 kV 11.0 kV
Iload 144 A 0A 0A 243 A
Phase angle 90° - - 0°
Iload∑ 144 A 144 A 243 A 243 A
ICRC 90 A -90 A -91 A 91 A
ΔVact 1% -1 % -1 % 1%
ΔVact u 0% 0% 0% 0%
ΔVact k 1% -1 % -1 % 1%

Checking the Pickup Value of the Circulating Reactive Current Blocking


If the value of the circulating reactive current exceeds the threshold value Circul. current threshold
for a longer time than the set time delay Circul. current time delay, the indication Circul.
current blocking is issued and the voltage control is blocked.

SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1707
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control

[fo_ibs_ccm_cur_thresh, 1, en_US]

Thus. the secondary infeed current results as follows with a phase angle to the voltage ∠Iact-sec = -90°:

[fo_ibs_ccm_cur_inp, 1, en_US]

The calculation from the values of the Table 10-2 with a pickup value of 50 % results in the following for the
transformer T1:

[fo_ibs_ccm_cur_inp_value, 1, en_US]

With Isec > 0.76 mA and ∠act-sec = -90°

10.16.2 Primary Tests

If secondary test equipment is connected to the device, remove it or switch the test switch to the operating
position.
• To be able to control the on-load tap changer manually, switch the voltage controller to the Manual
operating mode.

NOTE

i Be aware that a trip occurs in case of incorrect connections.

Checking the Polarity of the Voltage Transformer and Current Transformer


The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers is tested using the load current via the feeder
to be controlled. For this, you must switch on the line or the protected object. A load current of at least 0.1 ⋅
Irated must flow through the line or the protected object. The load current should be ohmic to ohmic inductive.
The direction of the load current must be known. If there is a doubt, open meshed or ring systems.
The line or the protected object remains switched on for the duration of the measurements. You can derive
the direction directly from the operational measured values.
• Make sure in DIGSI 5 or on the device with the following path that the power measured values corre-
spond to the power direction:
Main menu → Measured Values → Voltage cont.2w → Power values.
If active power flows in the line or the protected object, the power direction for P must be positive. If inductive
reactive power flows in the line or the protected object, the power direction for Q must be positive. If the
power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite the current-
direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite en

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi